> Be = WHITNEY LIBRARY, HARVARD UNIVERSITY. inte Gila OF i, We RNIN be Sturgis Hooper Professor IN THE MUSEUM OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOGY Hate, >> AD D> > BS A 2D’ > IDI» Ss ID DW. SS dines ie 4 y ‘ eae Paheres Satties Ps PROCEEDINGS AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY HELD AT PHILADELPHIA PROMOTING USEFUL KNOWLEDGE Vol, XI JANUARY 1869 TO DECEMBER 1870 Je TSU AID ID, I eet Itye\e IP TEAC IN WY IBID) I CO Jey, GUISE IN SO CMl Ia Je ye BY M CALLA & STAVELY. om" 1871. 2 XSi : \ 1065 Sih | aeta 6 PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. Vor XI: JANUARY, 1869. No. 81. Stated Meeting, January 1, 1869. Present, three members. Mr. Eni K. Prices, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from John Tyndall, dated London, May 21, 1868. A request from Prof. Dawson for a set of the Transactions . for the Montreal Natural History Society, was referred to the Committee of Publication. The Surgeon General’s Office, at Washington, was ordered to be placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Pro- ceedings. Donations for the Library were received from the Prussian Academy, Bureau des Ponts, Royal Astronomical and Geolo- gical Societies, Boston Natural History Society, Renselaer Polytechnic Institute, Franklin Institute, and Dr. Newberry. The report of the Judges and Clerks of the Annual EHlec- tion for Officers of the Society held this day, was read, an- A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—A 2 nouncing that the following named members were elected Officers for the ensuing year: President. George B. Wood. Vice-Presidents. John C. Cresson, Isaac Lea, Frederick Fraley. Secretaries. Charles B. T'rego, K. Otis Kendall, John L. Le Conte, Jie Je, Ibesleye Curators. Franklin Peale, Khas Durand, Joseph Carson. Treasurer. Charles B. Trego. Counsellors. Frederick Fraley, Robert Patterson, Daniel R. Goodwin, de 1, Jemiees Pending nominations, Nos. 593 to 621 were read. And the Society was adjourned. Qo 1869.] [Porter. Stated Meeting, January 15, 1869. Present, ten members. JOHN C. CRESSON, Vice-President, in the Chair. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Society of Emulation of Abbeville and the Royal Institution. Letters of envoi were received from the Meteorological Office of the Royal Society, and from the Society of Physical and Natural Sciences at Bordeaux, requesting an exchange of publications, which was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. A request for the loan of Mariana’s History of Spain for six months from President Coppée, was referred to the hLi- brary Committee with power to act. A copy of No. 80 of the Proceedings, just published, was laid on the table by the Secretaries. Donations for the Library were received from M. Rencon Mr. O. Warner, Secr’y Com. Massachusetts, Dr. B. A. Gould, Mr. 5S. Scudder, Boston Public Library, New Jersey Histori- eal Society, Dr. Joseph Parrish, the Blind Asylum, Medical News, Librarian of Congress, Treasury Department, and Dr. Rushenberger. The death of GC. F. P. von Martius, at Miinich, Decem- ber 138, 1868, was announced by letter from his son, Dr. C. A. Martius. The death of John Cassin, at Philadelphia, January 10, 1869, aged 55, was announced by Dr. Le Conte, and on mo- tion of Dr. Rushenberger, Dr. Bridges was requested to pre- pare an obituary notice of the deceased. The following communication was received from Prof. T. C. Porter, dated, Haston, Pa., Jan. 6, 1869. Mr. Boyd’s letter has arrived, and the following extracts contain all the information he can now give concerning the Indian inscriptions near Peach Bottom : ‘“The rocks from which I copied the figures sent you are granitic, very Brinton.] b as [January 15, hard, and situated in the Susquehanna River about three miles below the Pennsylvania State-line and twelve or fourteen above Havre de Grace. During high freshets they are entirely submerged. The inscriptions are numerous and in a fine state of preservation when not directly exposed to the abrading force of ice and drift-wood. They occur on the sides and tops of some half dozen rocks. Although at first sight they might seem to have no connection with each other, I have been able to trace an arrangement in horizontal and vertical lines. The grooves are semi-cylindric, and in some cases have a depth of half an inch or more. My copies were taken by placing sheets of paper on the figures and coloring the portions lying immediately over the grooves. Thus, the out- lines, if rude, are faithful and of full size. Owing to the limited time at my command, I did not copy them all, but confined myself to the more curious. The people of the neighborhood, although many of them are descended from early settlers who came into contact with the Indians then living there, seem to know nothing as to the origin or meaning of these figures. I regret that the information I send you is so scanty, but, should the hilosophical Society desire it, it will give me great pleasure to make a thorough exploration of the rocks and their inscriptions, next July, when I expect to spend several weeks not far from the locality.” Dr. Brinton, present on invitation, addressed the Society upon the nature of the Maya group of languages, and, in his opinion, the great value of several manuscript grammars and vocabularies in the Society’s Library. On motion of Mr. Fraley, the thanks of the Society were tendered to Dr. Brin- ton, and he was requested to furnish the Secretaries with an’° abstract of his remarks. The Maya group of languages comprises those spoken in the old departments of Yucatan, Vera Paz, Chiapas, Guatemala,.and Soconusco. The Huasteca also belongs to it, which was current in the province of Tamaulipas, about Tampico. The Natchez of Louisiana, and the Chahta- Muskoki family display some affinities with it, which have not yet been fully investigated. On the ethnological maps of Pritchard, Waitz, Bas- tian and Kiepert, and others, the Mayas are located on the Greater An- tilles also, and it is the opinion of the Abbé Brasseur de Bourbourg, as well as some other writers, both ancient and modern, that the Mayas and Aztecs both look to the former inhabitants of Haiti—the so called Taini —as their common progenitors. For this opinion there is no sound foundation, as there can be brought abundant evidence to prove that both 1869. ] D [Brinton. the tribes native in Cuba and Haiti, as well as those on the Bahamas, and those resident on the lesser Antilles before the arrival of the Caribs were Arrowacks, and came from South America, The most important dialects of the Maya are the Yucatecan, the Qui- che, the Cakchiquel, the Tzendal, the Pokonchi, the Huastecan and the Zahlopahkap. They are as closely allied one with another as the Ro- manic tongues of modern Hurope, and have many points in common which give them peculiar interest, in fact the very highest interest, among American aboriginal languages. Not merely were they the dialects of the most cultivated branch of all the red race, from which indeed the civilization of the whole Northern Continent probably proceeded, but they exhibit certain linguistic traits, allying them strangely to the more perfected tongues of the Old World. So strong are these resemblances that of recent writers Brasseur and Bastian both incline to hold them akin to the Aryan family, and possibly largely influenced by Scandinavian immigration in the eleventh century. This however is a baseless hypothesis. “ The traits referred to are: 1st. Their less marked polysynthetic struc- ture, approaching at times to a plainly inflectional character; 2d. Their harmonic repetition of vowels like that in Scythian tongues, the suffixes added to change the grammatical character of words often varying their vowel to agree with that in the terminal syllable of the root; 3rd. The pronominal affixes of the verbs, which are added to the verbal root to express the relation of the action, and form a regular conjugation pre- cisely as was the case in the primitive Aryan tongue ; 4th. The genesis of the pronouns, which as recently carefully investigated by M. H. de Charency has disclosed laws of growth of very general interest. In these languages also, is found the only native American literature. The Mayas used a phonetic alphabet as well as ideographic writing, and thus preserved their chronicles and traditions for many centuries anterior to the discovery. At the Conquest, their chief literary monument, called the Book of the Mats (7. e. of the nobles, who sat on mats while the com- mon people occupied the floors), the Popol Vuh, was written in Roman Characters in the Quiche dialect. This with several other similar works has been published in the original and with translations in Spanish and French. As the Maya group may thus be considered the key to the civilization, the mythology, the literature, and earliest possible history of the red race, it is most desirable that any valuable manuscripts which throw light upon it shall be published. Two such exist in the Library of the American Phi- losophical Society, both short, both of the highest value, both unique and entirely unknown to scholars. One of these is a grammar covering 54 small 4to pages of the Cakchiquel dialect, the other still shorter, em- braced on 82 small pages, and is the only existing grammar of the Chol or Putum dialect, spoken by the Lacandones, among the mountains of Vera Brinton. ] 6 [January 15, 1869. Paz. The former dates from 1692, and the author is unknown; the latter is a copy of the grammar of the Dominican missionary Francisco Moran, and is dated 1695. Itis in duplicate, by different hands, and as the only known work on the Chol, deserves by all means to be placed within the reach of linguists. A quite full vocabulary is appended, and a sufficient number of prayers and dialogues in the dialect to allow a very satisfactory exhibit to be made of the whole structure of the dialect. The longer Cakchiquel grammar could likewise be rendered extremely useful by the proper use of other manuscripts in that dialect now in pos- session of the Society, and which have not hitherto been used. These include several dictionaries, books of sermons, Confessionaries, and a copy of the earliest volume printed in any Central American dialect, the Doetrina Christiana of Marroquin, printed at Mexico, 1556. The enlightened attention which this Society has always given to American linguistics, and the great benefit which the publication of these two small works, enriched by the notes and illustrations for which the Society’s Library offers such abundant material, lead me to hope that your honored body will take the necessary steps to render them thus available to the learned world. Mr. Lesley was nominated and elected Librarian for the ensulng year. The Standing Committees were chosen for the ensuing year as follows: Finance—Mz. Fraley, Mr. J. F. James, Mr. Marsh. Publication—Mr. . P. James, Dr.) Carson; Prot. ©) B: Trego, Mr. H. K. Price, Mr. Tilghman. Haii—Mr. Peale, Mr. P. KH. Chase, Mr. S. W. Roberts. Library—Dr. Bell, Dr. Coates, Mr. Price, Mr. Barnes, Mr. Briggs. The list of surviving members was read. On the list, Trameisy 1, 1868, U.S. 281, Foreign, 142—423. Klected in 1368; U.S: 10) Horeien,” ) lass Deceased in 1868) U./S) 11> Poreign, “a= =e: On the list, January 1, 1869, U. S. 280, Foreign, 188—418. Nominations Nos. 593—621 were read and spoken to. The Committee on the Michaux Legacy reported a resolu- tion for empowering M. Carlier of Paris, which was adopted. New nominations Nos. 622, 628 were read. The Publication Committee reported a recommendation to if send the second series of the Transactions, complete, to the . N. H. S. of Montreal, which was so ordered. The ballot boxes were then opened by the presiding officer, and the following named gentlemen were declared duly elect- ed members of the Society. George H. Horne, M. D., of Philadelphia. Wilham M. Gabb, of Philadelphia. Hakakian Bey, of Cairo. inant Bey, of Cairo. Auguste Mariette Bey, of Cairo. Dr. Ceselli, of Rome. Hmmanuel De Rougé, of Paris. Henri Brugsch. Johannes Diimichen. Frangois Chabas, of Chalons sur Sdaone. Samuel Birch, of London. Kdward Lartét, of Paris. Joseph Prestwich, of London. Carl L. Riitimeyer, of Basel. William H. Flower, of London. George Rolleston, of Oxford. Thomas H. Huxley, of London. Joseph D. Hooker, M. D., of Kew Gardens. John Phillips, of Oxford. J. J. A. Worsaae, of Copenhagen. Sven Nillson, of Lund. Auguste Carher, of Paris. Benjamin 8. Lyman, of Philadelphia. Henry C. Baird, of Philadelphia. Samuel J. Reeves, of Philadelphia. Hector Tyndale, of Philadelphia. Joshua B. Lippincott, of Philadelphia. Horace Binney, Jr., of Philadelphia. William Blackmore, of Salisbury (London) England. And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, February 5, 1869. Present, fifteen members. Dr. GrEorGE B. Woop, President, in the Chair. Mr. Binney, Gen. Tyndale and Mr. Lyman, new members, took their seats. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Acade- my at Amsterdam, Royal Library at the Hague, Batavian Society at Rotterdam, Zovlogical and Statistical Societies at London, Leeds Philosophical Society, American Statistical Society, Massachusetts and New Jersey Historical Societies, Boston City Library, Yale College, Peabody Institute, and also from the Philadelphia College of Physicians, returning thanks for a donation of duplicate pamphlets. Letters of envoi were received from the Geog. Soe., Vienna, June 80; Holl. Soc., Harlem, May 20; Acad., Amsterdam, Sep. 2; Central Bureau of Statistics, Sweden, Nov. 25, 1868. Donations for the Library were received from Prof. Zante- deschi; the Geographical Societies of St. Petersburg, Vienna and London; Academies and Societies of Amsterdam, Rot- terdam, Harlem and Niirnburg; Antiquarian: Societies at Copenhagen and London; Central Bureau at Stockholm; Astronomical and Geological Societies at London; Nat. Hist. Soc. and Pub. Lib., Boston; Amer. Oriental Society; Silli- man’s Journal; Medical News; Acad. Nat: Sci., Philadel- phia; Dr. Carson; Wisconsin Historical Society; and Fen- dall’s executors at Washington. The Librarian communicated for publication in the Pro- ceedings a vertical section of the coal measures of the Georges Creek portion of the Cumberland Basin, made some years ago, with great care, by the State Chemist and Geologist of Maryland, Mr. Philip T. Tyson of Baltimore. On motion it was referred to the Secretaries with power to publish. February 5, 1869, ] 9 [Tyson. SECTION OF CUMBERLAND COAL BASIN. By Puiuie T. Tyson or BauTIMore. It contains the position and thickness of rocks of the entire ‘‘ Poto- mac Coal Field,’’ amounting to about 1400 feet. In order to have a fixed base I have made the heights on the left hand margin from the level of tide water, beginning at 670 feet. This was obtained from the maps and profiles of the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad, of which I had copies. I had also those of the Georges Creek Coal and Iron Company, which connected with the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad. In addition to these I caused numerous other levelings and measurements to be made between Georges Creek and the Savage Mount, and was therefore enabled to con- struct the entire section from actual measurement, with the aid of very extensive diggings, whilst making Geological Surveys for the Georges Creek Coal and Iron Company in 1852. This section extends down to the Devonian, and I have also examined and find its beds precisely like those below the Yohogheny Coal Field and the Great Western Field, as seen in the Gap a few miles east of Connellsville. The measurements from 670 to 1120 feet were taken on the Savage river and Potomac. From thence to 1349 feet on Mill run, which flows into Georges Creek. From thence to 1443 feet on Laurel run, which also flows into Georges Creek. From 1448 feet on the 8. E. face of Dug hill, at the foot of which is Lonoconing. Feet above Tide. Thickness. Character of Rock. Wy Shale. SOY Coal. 2050 19’ 0” Shaley Sand Stone. Pcoum On Shale. OP OW Coal. LOM Limestone with Shale seams. 2000 13! 9! Fire Clay. ay OY Unknown. ae ay Nodules of Iron in Shale. 1950 ae. ye Shale. SN GL) Sand Stone, fine grain. ye Shale. 4’ 3” Coal (2/’ shale parting). 10’ 0” Fire Clay. By? Ql Coal. 1900 3!’ O/ Fire Clay. ( Sand Stone Shaley. bl! Ov + Sand Stone Micaceous. 1850 ] Sand Stone Coarse. 421 GU Shales, not fully examined. A 61! Coal. OU! Shale. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—B Tyson.] Feet above Tide. 1800 1750 1700 1600 Thickness. 1/ 4/ 1/ 1/ 9/ a O// gi! 10” 3 0” 8// QO” All gi 0" 6” 6! Q/ 6// 6// (Wd gi! 0’ g/ Q// Qo” 6” Ql 6// Qo” vill QO” 6// 6// 6// 6// 6// 6! 6// yt 3/7 6// 6// 6// (Wa Bu PA qu 6// g// 4/ 10” 10 [February 5, Character of Rock. Coal. Shale. Coal. Shale. Shaley Sand Stone. Shale ferruginous. Main Coat. Bands of Iron ore. Shale. Fire Clay. Limestone. Shale. Sand Stone, fine grain. Shale. Coal. Shale. Shale. Ore No. 20 at its top. Shale ferruginous. Coal. Shale. Coal. Ore Nos. 17, 18 and 19 in Shale. Ore No. 16 in Fire Clay. Shale. Coal. Ore No. 15 in Shale. Ore balls in stratum of Fire Clay. Shale. Coal. Shale. Ores No. 13 and 14 in Fire Clay. Sand Stone. Ores 12, 11, 10, 9 in Shale. Shale with ore balls Nos. 8 and 7. Ore No. 6. Shale with ore No. 5. Coal. Ore No. 4 in Shale. Coal. Shale. Shale and Coal together. Ore No. 3 in Shale. Coal. Shale. Ore No. 2 in Fire Clay. Ore No. 1 in Shale. 1869. ] Feet above Tide. 1500 1450 1400 Thickness. oO! 6” 1/ 6// 1/ 6// 1/ 6// 9 6B 5/ Ov 8/ O// 4/ 6// 1/ 6// vil 4! AY QO” Ll) QO” Q) ol WW? Q// 39’ 0” 15’ 0” 3/ 0// 6/ Q// 9) O// 10’ 0” 44! Q!/ 8// 10” oF Ql 28/ 6// 11 Character of Rock. Ore in Shale. ( Undermine in | the 3/” Coal and Upper all the Ore above plick for 4’ will come pand 1 down. If stack- Ore" ed in rows and self-washed for |} a month, it will | yield 40 0-0. Coal. Shaley Sand Stone. Shale. Coal. Limestone. Fire Clay. Coal. Shale. Shale ferruginous. Shale. Coal. Shale. Coal. Shale. Coal. Shale, brown. Shale, sandy with balls. Shaley Sand Stone. Shale. Coal. Fire Clay. Shales ferruginous. Shale with balls. Shale ferruginous. Shale. Sand Stone. Shale. Ore in Fire Clay. Limestone. Ore in Fire Clay. Shale. Sand Stone. Coal. Shale. Limestone Sand Stone. [Tyson. Tyson.] Feet above Tide. Thickness. 1350 1300 1200 1150 1100 1050 6/ 6/ 6/ 4! 1/ {/ 3) 4) 6/ 6/ 30/ 9! 1 24! 9) 3) 3) 6/ 27! 8) 197 20/ 1/ Q” OQ” Q” 6” gi Ql Ql Ql” QV” Q// 0” (a 0” 0” 0” 6” 6/7 - 0” 0” Qo” OV Al) QO” 8” 0” 6 12 Character of Rock. Shale. Hard black band. Shale very ferruginous. Shale. Coal Shaley. « Coal hard. fe 8// Coal good. Sandy Fire Clay. Ore in Shaley Fire Clay. Limestone. Sand Stone. Shale. ( Ore balls. Marine shells. Balls in Shale. Coal. Shale. Coal. Shale. Coal. ( Shales. | Fire Clay. 1 Sand Stone. { Not explored. Coal. Unknown. Coal crop near top. Sand Stone at bottom. Ferruginous Shale. + Grey Shale. Black Shale. t Six feet Coal. Fire Clay. Shales with balls of ore. Unknown. Coal. Shale. Sand Stone. Coal. f Shales. Fire Clay. Shales. | Fire Clay. Coal. February 5, towrd Su) 1869.] [Tyson. Feet above Tide. Thickness. Character of Rock. 1000 OOM Fire Clay. 950 92/ 0” Sand Stone [XII]. This rock is constant. It makes the flat summit of the west mountain; and, north of Savage creek, has lying on it isolated cubic blocks, fragments of itself, as large as three story houses, very remarkable objects. ay! OY Large balls of ore. 900 14’ 6” Shale. 3// Shale Coal. Ie ey Sand Stone, thin layers. AL 04 Coal. A GY Shale. 850 42/ Gg! (Sand Stone, &c., not explored.) Te OM Ore in Shale. 800 83’ 0/ (Principally Sand Stone, ?) 750 ey OY Coal. Buy Shale. Small interval. QO Sand Stone, thin bedded. Coe AVY Lowest known coal bed. GOO Principally Sand Stone, but not much 550 explored. 90’ 0” Green Shale of XI. 450 2 ? Grey Limestone of XI. Mr. Chase communicated the results of a careful discussion of Philadelphia Life Tables, extending through 62 years, and including more than 400,000 lives. On motion of the Librarian, the subject of the propriety of publishing the MSS. grammars of the Chol and Cokchiquel languages, in the Society’s Library, was referred to the Pub- lication Committee, to report thereon, after consultation with Dr. Brinton. Pending nominations Nos. 622, 623 were read. At Prof. Coffin’s request and on motion of Prof. Kendall, the Officers of the Society were authorized to sign a memo- rial to Congress praying for a sufficient appropriation for ob- serving properly the total eclipse in August next. On motion of Mr. Fraley the renting or otherwise dispo- sing of the Hall was referred to a committee consisting of Messrs. Price, Fraley, Welsh, Rushenberger and Cresson. And the Society was adjourned. 14 Stated Meeting, February 19, 1869. Present, fourteen members. Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. Dr. Horn, a newly elected member, took his seat. Letters accepting membership were received from Samuel Birch, dated British Museum, London, February 2d, and Wil- liam H. Flower, dated College of Surgeons of England, Lon- don, February 1, 1869. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the London Antiquarian Society, Nov. 23, 1868, for No. 77, the Essex Institute, Rhode Island Historical Society and University of New York City, all for No. 80 of the Proceedings. A letter from M. Chevalier announced the transmission of a set of the reports of the Jury of the International Exposi- tion of 1867. A letter from Prof. Coppeé enclosed a receipt for Mariana’s History of Spain. Donations for the Library were announced from Prof. Zan- tedeschi, the Russian Academy, French Geographical Society, B. N. H. Society and Public Library, Mr. Hii K. Price, Dr. Kirkbride, Prof. Cope and Hon. Charles Sumner. The death of Charles N. Bancker, at Philadelphia, February 16, 1869, aged 91, was announced by Dr. Hays with appro- priate remarks, and on motion of Mr. Fraley, Judge Cadwal- lader was requested to prepare an obituary notice of the de- ceased. Mr. Lea communicated for publication in the Transactions ‘Remarks on Thirteen New Species of Crinoidea, from the February 19, 1869. ] 15 [Cope. Paleeozoic rocks of Indiana, Kentucky and Ohio, &c. By Sidney S. Lyon of Louisville, with 4 plates,” which was re- | ferred to a committee consisting of Mr. Lea, Mr. Cope and Mr. Lesley. The Secretary, in the absence of Dr. Leidy, communicated for publication a memoir ‘On the Geological Age and Equi- valents of the Marshall Group. By Prof. A. Winchell.” Which was referred to a committee consisting of Mr. Lesley, Dr. Le Conte and Dr. heidy. A letter from Prof. F. V. Hayden communicated “ Notes on the Geology of Wyoming and Colorado Territories, No. 2, with 6 wood cuts, already cut, and two ink sketches,” which was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. Prof. Cope exhibited and described a jaw of Mylodon an- nectens from the post-tertiary rocks of South America. Prof. Cope exhibited the mandible of a gigantic sloth from the post-ter- tiary of the Banda Oriental in South America. He stated that it belong- ed to the genus Lestodon (Gervais) but approached in its characters the Myodon of Owen. He pointed out the anterior canine teeth of Mega- lonyx, the posterior canines of Lestodon, and the reduction of the same in Mylodon to the character of small premolars, less than the molars. In the species exhibited, the canine is removed to close proximity to the molars, and was as large as the first, immediately following it. The species differs not only in this respect, but in the form of this and other teeth from the Mylodon robustus (Owen), to which it is nearly related. The form of the symphysis is not very different, but is turned outwards at the anterior angles and emarginate medially. The lateral margin con- cave. The canine directed upwards, and more outwards than the mo- lars. Its section presents longer straight inner and anterior sides, and a short convex outer side, which is connected to the inner by an oblique, slightly concave side. The second tooth or molar about the same size, and of subtrifoliate section, the outer lobe more obtuse, and less strong- ly separated by alveolar ridges than the two inner from each other. Third molar quite oblique, directed backward and inward, the section composed of four arcs separated by alveolar ridges. Posterior part of alveolus of last molar broken away, the anterior part narrower and more oblique than any other tooth. Prof. Cope stated that the species seemed to be near the Lestodon myloides of Gervais, which was however so briefly described as to be scarcely recognizable. According to the characters of Lestodon, the canine tooth appears to be at a greater distance from the molar than in Cope.] 1 6 [Eebruary 19, 1869. the present animal, where that distance is only twice as great as that between the first and second molars. Prof. Cope described several points of novelty and import- ance in the memoir on the Fossil Batrachia of North America, which the Society is publishing in Part 1 of Vol. XIV. of its Transactions; and expressed a desire that the Society should permit him to illustrate the memoir with additional plates. He pointed out that all the tortoises of the Cretaceous yet discovered were fresh water forms, many allied to Chelydra, and that there were no extinct land tortoises or Testudinidae in North America, the species from the Western Territories referred hitherto to Testudo being in fact Emy- did. He called attention to the peculiar characters of the Mosasaurs and of the Streptosauria, as not having been previously pointed out, and stated there were eleven species of the first named group known to hin from North America. One of these, M. depressus Cope, common in New Jersey, is defined by the transverse ovate form of the vertebral centra throughout the column, and the presence of a prominent rib of the outer face of the quadrate bone, throwing the meatal pit inward, and not reaching the proximal articular face. He mentioned also the modifications of form in the Dinos skele- ton, by which an approach to the Birds was indicated. Thus the ilium from a vertical, assumed a transverse position, the acetabulum being thrown upward and forward, while the great size and inferior and pos- terior position of the other pelvic elements transformed the weight of the viscera posteriorly, to beneath the support. The consequence of this was the inclosure of a longer series of vertebra as sacral, derived from the lumbar series, and the support of the body by a powerful hind limb, more nearly beneath the centre of gravity than in other types of reptiles. An additional approximation to the birds was seen in the hind limbs. _ The head of the femur was transverse to the condyles, and the crest of the ilium furnished with a very elevated crest. In the more quadrupedal forms as Iguanodon and Hadrosaurus the crest was much curved out- wards, while in the biped types as Laelaps and Pecilopleurum the crest projected more forward. In the latter also the astrogalus embraced the tibia in the closest manner, and presented to the foot at a remarkable angle. In Compsognathus this element had united with the tibia as in birds. The latter and Stenopelix Myo, he stated to be the best preserved injpelvic characters. He stated that these affinities had been explained by him at a meeting of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, in Feb., 1867, and had since been confirmed by other authors. Nominations Nos. 622 and 623, and new nominations Nos. 624, 625, 626 were read. And the Society was adjourned. February 5, 1869.] 1 7 [Chase. PHILADELPHIA LIFE TABLES. By Puryy EARLE CHASE. More than forty years ago Dr. Gouverneur Emerson, in the American Journal of the Medical Sciences, began his discussion of the vital statis- tics of Philadelphia.* His connection with the Board of Health gave him ready access to the original returns, and after subjecting them to a rigid scrutiny, he became satisfied that the sanitary condition of the city was remarkably good. Doctors W. S. W. Ruschenberger, Wilson Jewell, James N. Corse and W. Lehman Wells, on behalf of the Committee on Epidemics and Me- teorology, of the Philadelphia College of Physicians, subsequently pub- lished some interesting local nozological tables and conclusions. I can- not find that any other noteworthy use has been made of a valuable mortuary record, which has been kept with great care, and without inter- ruption, from the commencement of the year 1807 until the present time.t+ At the request of the Provident Life and Trust Company of Philadel- phia, I have recently computed two comparative life tables, from the * Among the results developed by Dr. Emerson’s investigations connected with the movement of population and vital statistics of Philadelphia, embracing a period of about thirty years from the year 1807, when the first official Bill of Mortality was issued, are the following: 1. Great healthfulness of the city proper, in which the annual proportion of deaths to the popula- tion was only 1 in 56 (See Am. Med. Journal for Nov. 1827). 2. Excessive mortality in the colored population (Ibid). 3. Improved condition of colored population as indicated by reduction of mortality. 4. Excessive mortality of children in the warm months, and demonstration of the fact that the deleterious operations of heat are almost entirely confined to the first months of life, the influence of the seasons upon infantile mortality being scarcely perceptible after the first year of life has passed. 5. The excessive mortality of male over that of female children in the first stages of infancy, and demonstration that this is not owing, as commonly supposed—to greater exposure of male children to accidents, but to diseases and physiological causes peculiar to each sex (Am. Jour. of Med. Sciences, 1827 to 1831). 7. Practical conclusions drawn from results last mentioned (Ibid). 8. Seasons when most births take place (Ibid. Nov., 1845). 9. Influence exerted through epidemic cholera and other depressing agencies, tending to reduce_the preponderance of male births (Same Journal for July, 1848, p. 78). j “From authority vested in the Board of Health, this municipal power makes it obligatory upon physicians to give certificates designating the name, age, and sex of all who die under their care, and sextons are bound by still heavier penalties not to permit the interment of any dead body until such certificate is obtained, which he returns to the Health Office on the last day of every week, for publication” (Emerson; op. cit., vol. I, p. 117). A. P. S.—VOL. XI—C Chase.] 1 8 [February 5, returns of the Board of Health, and of the several monthly meetings of the Society of Friends in the city and its immediate neighborhood. The general Philadelphia table is more extensive than any table hith- erto published for a single locality, being based upon records of 425,502 interments, 265,590 births, and seven successive decennial census enu- merations. . The Friends’ table is based upon records of 14,666 interments, 4,264 births, and eight enumerations of membership. This is the first table ever published that affords any basis for estimating the sanitary advan- tages of moderation, temperance, and a general regard for the laws of health and morality. The tables which have been constructed from the experience of different Tontines and Life Insurance Companies exhibit some of these advantages, with the added indeterminate advantage of medical selection. The following definitions and explanations may facilitate the study of the tables : The possible life, is the limit which is sometimes attained in a given district. The probable life (‘vie probable’), is the term at which one half of those who are born alive will have died. It is the age, the probability of living beyond which is as great as that of dying before the age is attained. : The probable life at any age, is the term at which one half of those who are living at that age will have died. The expectation of life (‘vie moyenne’), is the average age which will be attained by all who are born. The expectation of life at any age, is the average after life-time of all who are living at that age. The mean expectation is the average after life-time of all who are living. The proportionate mortality at any age, is the ratio of the number dying during the year following that ege to the number living at the precise age. The vitality at any age, is in inverse ratio to the proportionate mortal- ity atthatage. If, for example, out of 1000 children born alive the average number of deaths under 1 year of age is 180.38, the proportionate mor- tality per 1000 is 180.38, and the vitality is “""° or 5.54. 180 35 Neither the mean age at death nor the mean age of the living furnishes a sufficient clue to the expectation of life, or any independent criterion of salubrity. Emigration, immigration, excess of births over deaths or of deaths over births, zymotic diseases, and other circumstances, variously disturb the normal values which are embraced in a perfect life table. Such a table represents an ideal stationary population, or one in which the number of annual births is exactly equal to the number of annual deaths, and one which is not affected by emigration or immigration. 1869. 19 [Chase. By a joint examination, in accordance with the formulas of De Morgan, Davies and Farr, of the numbers living at any given age and the num- bers dying at the same age, the disturbances to which all populations are subject can be mostly eliminated, and results obtained which will afford a proper basis for comparisons. There are, however, some elements of uncertainty which cannot be removed by any method hitherto proposed. Among these are the fol- lowing : 1. The old and still mooted doctrine of climacterics, or critical periods of life in which some great constitutional change is supposed to take place, appears to derive some confirmation from such irregularities as the alternate diminution and increase of proportionate mortality, in the Car- lisle table, at the ages 21, 22, 31, 33, 46, 50, 89, 90, as well as from the increase of expectation, in the Carlisle table from 91 to 95, in Quetelet’s Belgian table from 89 to 91, and in the Philadelphia table from 91 to 100. 2. Wherever a population is affected by immigration, two classes of disturbance may be looked for; one arising from the poorer class of immigrants, who live in the most unhealthy neighborhoods, exposed to privations and hazards which increase the mortality of infancy and youth; the other from a better class, like our house servants, the agents of im- porting houses, and persons of some property, who increase the average vitality towards the close of life. 3. In many places, especially in cities, almshouses and asylums for the aged furnish comforts which tend to prolong life. The tendency is aided by the freedom from care and anxiety, the infrequency of exhausting mental effort, and the watchfulnéss of friends or nurses. - 4, Ina Society with birthright membership, like the Society of Friends, nearly all the deaths in infancy and youth may be entered on the records. But after reaching maturity the ties of membership are often sundered for various reasons, and many of the deaths in old age may escape notice. The ratios of apparent mortality will thus be affected unfavorably, during the whole course of life. According to the census of 1860, the foreign-born residents of Phila- delphia constituted nearly thirty per cent. of the entire population. On this account any comparisons with other life-tables either in infancy or old age might convey an erroneous impression. But the mean expectation is probably but little affected by the foreign element, and it may very properly be considered in the following comparison with two of the most celebrated and one of the most unfavorable foreign tables. Comparative mean expectations : rice London. Wc ae decisis ae eect ele 23.70 years. hiladelphiaw ees. shies ee tree sitters on are eae d1.46 ‘* Hants su molishe INOmos Males erento aerate srs: Siete ee oe ee SCMeke DNA e ter mete talc tenet sucha cvetercre d2.30 6S CraTLiSTE DEM cme tee a stiare te Amana ti laonetre ee let lect ast) tauclatehe a 32.66 < RIOTS ae roan ened Neat) cere minaien ty ve act Shae Ie, 33.11 GO Chasc.] 20 [February 5, Notwithstanding the increased juvenile mortality consequent upon immigration, the Philadelphia table shows a possible life of 114, a prob- able life of 38.44, and an expectation of 35.09. I know no other city of much magnitude in which so favorable vital conditions have ever been reported. In preparing the Philadelphia table the following values were ascer- tained : Ratio of deaths of colored persons to entire number of deaths foriG2 ivearsa. i). seiarpiaie velar ete. eysianegs 8.7 per cent. JDO, soROMN WAG To UK, mMNEDIHVOs oosccnadobacecocoacsoous 6.7 ee Average mOLtalitiy. G2 VALS: «charter ieite eltrerele ayer 1 in 47.836. a Colored mortality, 62 years.................... 1 in 27.766. gs i of 1858 to 1862, inclusive....... 1 in 34.780. Ratio of still-births to total births ...................... 4.3 per cent. nomen pis ve bh COUPEE OVS apc Maes ale eles aS 8 Hae 9 oe GC GG. Ibnmabarer LRAT (HO) OO OMEN A oS ooqodcenboondd0dKd 2 Ou vence Gor OS GRMANS WO IHN oa cacbooosecbdcneesooodiopodesos (A oes Naturaleannualbimerease reac cies sacle ol crieteecteri rere Peace AWeragey a COTE OSA ce b aistboumattnr, carey cio emp ihan coc Byer OS ne SG TyPeNTMIETEHNOM, ¢ sods oqoodsobs5c0c000s00b000 Bp. 6 Meamyacre cbicleat ins. ives. me ie reotenes.) tumuvaseetecrllen te ciel 23.57 years. 68). SO oye idae) JihpiNe eed oo anh woe too pogcodeaouTuseo.0S 24.29 ee Dr. Emerson’s discussions showed a ratio of deaths of colored persons, as great as 16 per cent. of the entire number of deaths ; an average white mortality varying between 1 in 38.25 and 1 in 56.53; an average colored mortality of 1in 19 from 1807 to 1820 inclusive, and of 1 in 27.2 from 1821 to 1830 inclusive. We have no means of determining the ratio of colored mortality since the close of the war, but even if it should show a temporary increase, there can be little doubt that the general sanitary improvement noted by Dr. Emerson still continues. The diminution in the per centage of colored deaths, from 16 per cent. to 6.7 per cent., is attributable in part to this general improvement, and in part to the pre- ponderating increase of the white population. The advantages of regular habits are shown by the following compa- risons : Friends. Philadelphia. Advantage. Maximum vitality (age 12)........ 310.56 257.7 20.49 per cent. Average proportionate mortality from 20 to 60 years of age..... 14.25 pat) ORB oS Kixpectationvotelite ei. ane selec 43.73 35.09 24.62 * Rrobableylife. ye) vaea teen aan 48.08 33.44 43.78 sé Proportionate mortality at birth... 124.66 180.38 44.70 £6 at 1869.] [Chase. PHILADELPHIA GENERAL LIFE TABLE. Living, | Dying, Propor- | Expecta- Living, | Dying Propor- | Expecta- A J tionate tion, A 5 ’! tionate tion, S°| Namber, | Number| Mortality, | Number 8° | Number, | Number| Mortality, | Number per 1000. | of years. per 1000. | of years. 0.|100,000 | 18,038 | 180.38 35.09 58 | 30,799 | 891 2893 | 1597 2 59 | 29908 | 905 3025 | 1543 ; aes ew cae a ie 60 | 29,003 | 918 3165 | 14.89 31 69.995 | 2982] 4260 46.59 61 | 28,085 | 931 Bae | TBE 4 | 67013 | 2039 | 30.43 47.74 2) D7 5k 14946 34.84 | 1384 5 | 64,974 | 1,387 | 21.35 48.23 63 | 26208 | 961 AGG || 1B i 64 | 25,247 | 978 38.72 | 1281 6 | 63,587 943 | 1483 48 27 < . Be 7 | 62.644 651 | 10.40 Aap), || EO eae) | ee OES deel: 8 | 61,993 470 | 7.58 47.49 66 | 23,273 | 1,016 43.64 | 11.81 9 | 61.523 362 | 5.88 46.84 67 | 22.257 | 1,036 AG 55) TBD 10 | 61,161 297 | 4.88 46.12 68 | 21.991 | 1,055 4975 | 1085 69 | 20.166 | 1,073 53.22 | 103% 11 | 60,864 951 | 414 45.34 2 : 2 Z 12 | 60,613 aaa See betes 70 | 19,093 | 1,087 56.94 9.95 13 | 60.377 938 | 3.95 370 71 | 18,006 | 1,096 60 88 9.52 14 | 60,139 955 | 424 49, 87 72 | 16,910 | 1,101 65 08 9.11 15 | 59,884 978 | 4.64 42.05 73 | 15.809 | 1,098 69.48 871 “4 | 14,711. | 1,090 74 10 832 16 | 59,606 307 | 5.18 41 24 c: e ee a oe Ae || asses Sa | ene ve 75 | 13,620 1.076 78.96 7.94 18 | 58,956 378 | 6.40 39.69 76 | 12.545 | 1,054 84.06 758 19 | 58.578 414 | 7.10 38 4 77 | 11.491 | 1,028 89.44 7.23 20 | 58,164 456 | 7.83 38.21 78 | 10463 | 995 95.14 6.89 as 79 | 9468 | 959 | 101.20 6.57 21 | 57,708 493 8.55 37.51 : s is 3 | 56.686 560 | 9.88 36.17 gi | 7593 | 870 | 11456 5 Ot 24 | 56,126 587 | 1048 35 52 5 Gr23) Ne sto) nmoinos 5 OD 25 | 55,539 610 | 11.00 34.89 83 | 5,904 | 767 | 129.80 5.36 ‘ BL BAB NTO) Ie 1ag 1S 5.09 26 | 54,929 629 | 11.45 34.28 : V : 27 | 54,300 643. | 1183 33.67 BD) eer || eal FEDS eee 28 | 53.657 653 | 1218 33 07 a6) Sie |) Ge 156.57 457 29 | 53,004 662 | 1250 32.47 87 | 318 | 5389 | 16920 4.32 30 | 52,342 672 | 1284 31.87 88 | 2646 | 484 | 183.42 410 s9 | 2162 | 439 | 20310 391 31 | 51,670 681) |) 13818 31.28 ye Me 2 “3s | ences Beet aes sae 90 | 1,723 | 3889 | 225.54 3.78 33 | 50,300 698 | 1388 30 10 91 | 1,334 | 319 | 239.32 3 63 34 | 49.602 706 | 14 24 99.52 92 | 1015 | 247 | 24300 3°75 35 | 48.896 716 | 14.63 28.94 93 768 | 187 | 94499 3.79 Ls 94 581 142 | 244.99 3 85 36 | 48.180 722, | 15.00 28.36 : 37 | 47.458 730 | 1538 Ba) PO Bee AOU cesta one 38 | 46,728 736 | 1576 97.22 96 332 80 | 239.67 404 39 | 45,992 743 | 1615 26 64 97 252 59 | 234.40 416 40 | 45,249 748 | 16.53 26.07 98 193 43 | 99554 498 e 99 150 31 | 205.67 4 38 41 | 44,501 754 | 1694 25 50 49 | 43747 tee | gees eat 00 119 23 | 192.76 4.39 43 | 42.987 7686 | 17.83 2436 || 101 96 18 | 186.42 4.31 44 | 42199) "72 | 18.30 93.79 || 102 78 14 | 18286 419 45 | 41,449 778 | 18.78 23.23 || 103 64 12 | 180.78 401 104 9 9 | 179.65 379 46 | 40,671 784 | 19.28 22.66 47 | 39.887 "39 | 19.78 9219 || 105 =o if Eds so o/b 48 | 39.098 795 | 2033 2154 || 106 35 6 78 60 316 49 | 38.303 800 | 20.90 2097 || 107 29 Be a leigins 2.75 50 | 37,503 807 | 21.50 20.41 || 108 24 6 | 189.04 995 5419 0 pin s6/eae) | ets | 22150) oes a) eoe a aes Claiesee maaultaealee 52 | 35,883 821 | 2288 19.28 a Pag 2 53 | 35,062 830 | 23.66 1872 || 111 7 4 1.05 Bt | 34.239 840 | 24.54 1817 || 112 3 2 80 55 | 33,392 851 | 2550 a A) wale 1 1 50 56 | 32,541 865 | 26.56 tz06 |) 21 57 | 31,676 27.70 16.51 Chase.] Living, Age amber, 0 | 10,000 1 8,753 2 8,242 3 7,970 4 7,778 5 7,641 6 7,542 7 7,470 8 7,417 9 7,377 10 7,346 i 7,319 12 7,296 i133 7,272 14 7,247 alts) 1,22 16 7189 17 7,154 18 7,115 19 7,07 20 7,022 21 6,968 22 6,910 23 6,848 24 6,782 25 6,714 26 6,645 27. 6,573 28 6,501 29 6,428 30 6,354 381 6,280 32 6,205 i: 6,130 34 6,055 385 5,979 386 | 5,903 37 5,828 3 5,752 39 5,676 40 5,600 41 5,525 42 5,450 43 5,379 44 5,801 45 5,227 46 | 5,153 47 5,07 48 5,006 49 4,932 50 | 4,859 51 4,784 52 4,709 53 | 4,632 54 | 4,553 55 | 4,470 56 4,385 57 | 4,296 Dying, Number Propor- tionate Mortality, per 1000. 124.66 DBOrLrAO NokNb Ube SOOM Pewee who SMNSH HBOHMHMN DONNK ANON a SOOO Ponce (=) an 2 ST bo 22 [February 5, 1869. PHILADELPHIA FRIENDS’ LIFE TABLE. Expecta- tion. Number of years. 3.73 43.89 50.89 51.61 51 87 51.79 51.46 50 95 50.32 49.59 48 80 AST 47.12 46 27, 45.43 44.60 43.79 43.00 42.24 41.50 40.78 40.09 39.43 38 78 38.15 387.53 36.92 36 31 35 71 35 11 34.51 33.92 33.32 32.72 32.12 31.52 30 92 30.32 29.71 29.10 28.49 27.87 27.25 26 62 25.99 25 36 24.71 24 06 23 40 22 74 22.08 21.41 20 75 20.09 19 43 18.78 18.13 17.49 Age. Living, Number, 4,204 4,108 4,007 3,903 3,794 3,680 3,562 3,440 3,314 3,184 3,049 2,910 2,768 2,622 2.473 Dying, Number HOR EPNPbpARE Propor- tionate Mortality, per 1000. 22.90 24.45 26.12 27.95 29 90 32 00 34 26 30.72 39.40 42.32 45.50 48.94 52.68 56.70 61.04 65.65 70.58 75.82 81.32 87 10 93.14 99 42 105.96 112 72 119 72 126.94 134.40 142.10 150 00 158.10 166 42 174 93 183.66 192 62 201 80 211 25 220.98 231.02 241.38 252 14 263.30 274,92 287.02 299.66 312.92 826.85 341 54 856.795 872.87 389 96 Expecta- tion. Number of years. 16.87 16.25 15.64 15.05 14.47 13 90 13.34 12.80 12.27 11.75 11 25 TO Hy IS CoM WoO bottle cc weocctw BRR ER Clore WO DBADSOCH wRaMMO Hom TNO RFOPNS FETE O QEEEO ob Fae ee ae OURS oro OOF CONN SHO Stated Meeting, March 5, 1869. Present, eighteen members. Dr. Woop, President, in the Chair. Mr. Baird, lately elected a member, was introduced to the presiding officer and took his seat. Letters accepting membership were received from J. J. A. Worsaae, dated Castle of Rosenborg, Copenhagen, February 4, 1869; from J. Chabas, dated Chalon sur Sadne, Feb., 1869; from Hd. Lartét, dated Paris, No. 25 Rue Lacépede, February 15, 1869; from T. H. Huxley, dated Royal School of Mines, Jermyn Street, London, February 16, 1869; and from W. M. Gabb, dated Philadelphia, February 19, 1869. A letter declining appointment to prepare ‘an obituary notice of John Cassin was received from Dr. Bridges, dated Philadelphia, February 20, 1869. Letters acknowledging the receipt of the published Pro- ceedings of the Society, Nos. 75, 76, 77, were received from G. Kirchhoff, dated Heidelberg, October 22, 1868; from Pro- fessor Hornstein, Director of the Prague Observatory, dated November 5, 1868; and from the Royal Society of Antiqua- res, Ospanlaan Sanne 1, 1868. Letters of invoice were received from the Royal Seuica of Antiquaries; the Jablonowsky Society of Leipsic, November 11, 1868; the Academy of Sciences at Vienna, November 4, 1868; the Swiss Polytechnic School at Zurich, November 27, 1868; the Royal University at Norway, Christiania, Novem- ber, 1868; and the United States Legation at Paris, February 8, 1869. 24 A letter was read from M. A. Carlier to Mr. Durand, respecting proceedings taken in the case of the Michaux Legacy. Donations for the Library were received from the Natural History Society at Moscow, the Geographical Society and Physical Observatory at St. Petersburg, the Royal University of Norway, the Royal Saxon Society, the Prince Jablo- nowsky Society at Leipsic, the Societies at Gorlitz, Emden, Lausanne, and Geneva, the Academy of Sciences at Vienna, the Geographical Society and Bureau des Ponts et Chaussées at Paris, the Royal Astronomical, Meteorological and Chemi- cal Societies of London, Sir John F. W. Herschel, the Bos- ton Natural History Society, the New York lyceum, the Franklin Institute, the Medical News, the Episcopal Church Hospital, Gen. W. F. Palmer, the Rev. Albert Barnes of Philadelphia, the Peabody Institute of Baltimore, the Public Library of Cincinnati, the University of Michigan, and the California Academy of Sciences at San Francisco. A record was made of the decease of J. K. Paulding and Alexander Stevens, M. D., of New York. The committee to which was referred the paper on thirteen new species of Crinoidea, in the Paleozoic rocks of North America, in Kentucky, Indiana and Ohio, by Col. 8. 5. Lyon of Louisville, presented their report, recommending its publi- cation in the Transactions of the Society, which, on motion, was so ordered. The committee to which was referred the paper on the Mar- shall Group, by Prof. A. Winchell, reported, recommending its publication in the Proceedings; on motion, it was referred to the Secretaries with power to act. Pending nominations Nos. 622 to 626 were read. ‘And the Society was adjourned. bo Or February 19, 1869.] {Ilayden. NOTES ON THE GEOLOGY OF WYOMING AND COLORADO TERRITORIES. INEOe2 By F. VY. HaypEn. Before describing the geological character of the Laramie Plains and the country to the west of it, I will attempt to present a resumé of the physical geography of that very interesting region. If we look at the profile of the route constructed by the Union Pacific Railroad for their road from Omaha to Fort Bridger, we shall find that at Omaha, the initial point, the altitude is 968 feet above tide level. At the mouth of Lodge Pole creek, a distance of 377 miles, we have an elevation of 3528 or a gradual rise in that distance of 2560’ or a grade of about 7 feet to the mile. From the mouth of Pole creek to Crow creek crossing near Cheyenne 513.76 miles west of Omaha we have reached an elevation of 6019 feet, or an average grade of over 9 feet to the mile for the entire distance. At Evans’ Pass on the summit of the Laramie range, we have reached the highest point in the Rocky Mountains, 8248’, a distance of 545.62 miles west of Omaha. The average grade is over 13 feet to the mile. But for 100 miles west of Omaha the average grade of ascent increases as we approach the mountains. If we take the distance from Crow Creek Crossing at the foot of the mountains to Evans’ Pass, ‘‘the Summit,’’ a distance of 31.86 miles, we have an average grade of ascent of nearly 70 feet to the mile. We can see clearly by these figures the plan of growth of that portion of our continent west of the Mississippi. A number of these profiles have been constructed across the continent from the Mississippi to the Pacific ocean, from the north line to the south, all pointing to the same result, and all agreeing substantially in the aggregate results. Passing over this first range of mountains to the Laramie plains, from Crow Creek Crossing to Laramie river 57.53 miles, and 571.39 miles west of Omaha, the elevation is 7175 feet above tide water. Showing that even in the plain country on the west side of the first range the elevation is over 1000 feet higher than at the base of the mountains on the east side. From the latter point westward there is a continued line of ascent and descent produced by the same forces that elevated the whole Rocky Mountain Chain. Passing the Humbolt mountains we then descend by a moderate grade to the Pacific ocean. The intermediate portions are occupied by a continued series of more or less elevated mountain ranges with intervening valleys which are always at a considerable height above the sea, but vary at different points from east to west. For example the elevation of the Laramie plains near Fort Sanders is 7175 feet, at Salt Lake Valley 4285, making a difference of 2990 feet. We shall en- deavor to show hereafter that this difference in the elevation of the two localities of nearly 3000 feet operates most favorably upon the agricul- tural resources of Salt Lake Valley. While the summers in the Laramie plains are very brief, and it will always be difficult under the most favor- A. Pp. S.—VOL. XI—D OF Hayden.] 26 [February 19, able circumstances to produce crops to any extent, the productions of Salt Lake Valley are among the finest in the world. We can see at a glance therefore that the whole country west of the Mississippi is as it were an elevated Plateau, out of which rise, as if by the bursting of the crust, a vast series of ranges of mountains, trending in the aggregate nearly north-west and south-east, and each of the series made up of an infinite number of minor ranges trending in almost every possible direction. In many instances important ranges of mountains are separated from the main chain by extended plains composed of creta- ceous or tertiary formations, and without a knowledge of the geological structure of the country, they would seem to be entirely disconnected. The Black Hills of Dakota, occupy an area of 6000 square miles. If we examine the map this important range seems to be entirely isolated from the main range, but from the south-western side extends a low anticlinal valley, just exposing the tertiary and for a portion of the dis- tance the cretaceous beds, and linking the Black Hills with the Laramie range near Fort Laramie. Again, the same may be said of the Big Horn range, from the south-east end of which along the valley of Poison Spring creek extends an anticli- nal valley, joining the Big Horne range with the Laramie near the Red Buttes. All these isolated ranges, however distant they may appear to be from the main range, or however small they may be, are really connected to the eye of the geologist. It is thus thatthe anatomy of this great mountain system can be worked out in detail. Never can it be well done, so as to command the unqualified approbation of the scientific world, until the minutest topography and the geology are united together. The northern portion of the Laramie range properly commences near the Red Buttes. Here the nucleus of feldspathic granite or syenite is concealed by the overlying unchanged beds, and a broad interval occurs which is occupied by a great variety of formations, ranging from the carboniferous to the most recent tertiary. In its southward extension this range seems to flex around from an almost easterly trend to a south- west direction, forming almost a half circle. It then joins on to the main range in the neighborhood of Long’s Peak. Thus the Laramie range constitutes the east side and the greater part of the north side of the Laramie plains which forms, thus enclosed, a huge park. On the south side is the Medicine Bow range, the loftiest ridges covered with perpetual snow. Connected with this range also are numerous minor ranges. The west side is an open rugged barren sage plain, with here and there detached small mountains extending far westward toward Salt Lake valley. The Laramie range forms the most beautiful illustration of an anticli- nal ridge I have ever met with in the Rocky Mountains, with the excep- tion of the Black Hills of Dakota. Either one of these ranges if thoroughly studied, would form excellent monographs of the physical geography and geology of the mountain region. The nucleus of the Black Hills is composed of red feldspathic granite . 9 1869. ] = 7 [Hayden. and other metamorphic rocks, and inclining from the flanks may be seen the upturned edges of the Potsdam sandstone, Carboniferous limestones, brick red sands and sandstones. ‘Triassic, Jurassic marls, Cretaceous and Tertiary rocks, all dipping at various angles, but in such a way as to be easily accessible to the student. The Laramie range is equally systematic in its plan of development but rather more complicated, and the results of erosive action are much more strongly shown and the superficial deposits or drift in many places conceal the underlying rocks. Like the Black Hills the Lamarie range does not give rise to any important streams of water. Myriads of little streams originate in or near the dividing ridge and cut their channels down the'slopes and flow into the North or South forks of the Platte. The main branch of the North Platte rises in the range of mountain which forms the north side of the Middle Park, very near Long’s Peak. It takes a course a little west of north, flows through the middle of the north park, cutting its way through immense canons between the North Park and the Laramie plains. It then continues\nearly a north course through tertiary as well as cretaceous rocks to its junction with the Sweet Water, when it bends around to the eastward so that near the Red Buttes its course is nearly south-east until it reaches the main Platte near Long. 101°. The Sweet Water, which is the principal branch of the North Platte, rises in the southern end of the Wind river mountains, and flows nearly east and unites with the North Platte near Independence. These streams flow through nearly every variety of geological formations which occur in the West. From the junction of the Sweet Water to Red Buttes, it flows through granite, carboniferous limestone, red beds, jurassic marls, and White river tertiary beds. From the Red Buttes, through lignite-tertiary to a point about 100 miles north-west of Fort Laramie. There the White river tertiary beds overlap the lignite-tertiary, and then contiuue to the forks of the Platte. The Medicine Bow and the two Laramies are important branches of the North Platte, and take their rise in the lofty snow capped moun- tains on the south side of the Laramie plains. The region north of the North Platte is mostly a vast sage plain and but few small branches flow in from that direction, but a multitude of small streams cut deep chan- nels through the sides of the Laramie range and flow into the North Platte. as From. Red Buttes to Fort Lamarie, a distance of 150 miles, many beautiful little streams rise in the Laramie and pour a good volume of water into the Platte. These creeks occur every few miles, and in their passage from the mountain they have not only worn a deep channel in the steep side of the mountain, sometimes 1000 feet or more in depth, but they have also scooped out a wide deep valley which affords the best of pasture, ground for stock in summer and warm sheltered places in winter. The main branch of the South Platte rises in the range of moun- y Hayden.] 28 ; [February 19, tains which bounds the west side of the south park, and flows about north-east to Cache la Poudre, and there bends round slightly toward the east and joins the main Platte. The little branches that flow from the mountain sides are very numerous, and each one cuts a tremendous channel through the sides of the mountain, affording most excellent sec- tions of the strata for the geologist. Nearly all the branches that rise in the plains have very wide valleys, but are mostly dry, especially in the latter part of the summer and autumn. Although the Platte river is never navigable at any season of the year, yet the area drained by it is immense, at least 800 miles from east to west and 350 from north to south, or an area of nearly 300,000 square miles; and yet the North Platte is one of the minor branches of the Missouri river. The South Platte flows through the different formations along the flanks of the mountain ; and in its course through the plains cuts the lignite-tertiary for 50 miles or more, when the White river tertiary over- laps the plains to the junction. The above brief remarks are intended principally to show by the geography the gigantic scale upon which every thing in this Western Country is planned, that even the district drained by the Platte and its branches is larger than all New England, New York and Pennsylvania. September ist, I left Fort Sanders with my party to examine the country along the southern border of the Laramie plains. We passed over the different beds of the cretaceous period for about 30 miles, until we reached a point near Cooper’s creek, when indications of the tertiary begin to overlap the cretaceous. The examples of the erosive action of water along the northern side of the mountains that border the Laramie plains are numerous. In the valley of Cooper’s creek near the foot of the mountains there is a trian- gular space about five miles long, and two or three miles wide on the south-west side. On the south side there is a hill 500 feet high, the sum- mit of which is composed of drift, and the surface paved with partially worn rocks. On the north-west side there is a long ridge, the top of which is composed of the yellowish sandstones of cretaceous formation No. 5, in which a few characteristic species of fossils, like Inoceramus, occur. These ridges seem to converge about two miles below the Stage Station, so that the creek passes through a sort of gorge. The valley of the creek is covered quite extensively with drift materials derived from the neighboring mountains. Six miles west of Cooper’s creek we find the first good exposure of coal. The upper cretaceous beds crop out occasionally in that vicinity, but are overlapped by the coal bearing strata. The slopes are all so gentle and the superficial drift covers the country to such an extent that I found it difficult to get a good section. No. 5 (cretaceous) seems to pass gradually up into the coal-bearing beds, and the change in the sediments of the two systems is slight. What appears to be the lowest bed of the coal-bearing scries in this region, is a brown grit, very loosely aggregated with, sometimes, irregu- IC 1869. ] 29 [Hayden. lar layers of sandstones ; at other times inclosing concretions, with con- centric layers or composed of thin laminze and readily cleaving in pieces on exposure to the atmosphere. JImmediately underneath the coal les a bed of drab clay varying in thickness from three to five feet. The first locality where the coal is exposed by the uplifting of the beds is near a small lake. The dip is about 10°° towards the north-east and from the mountains. There is about six to eight feet of pure and impure coal together. Above, is a bed of drab clay ; and over this again a layer of fine grit, capped with hard-sandstone. The clay over the coal is full of small rounded nodules of iron and yellow sandy concretions. About a mile west from this locality is another outcropping of coal. The bed is here separated by about 23 feet of drab arenaceous clay, with five feet of excellent coal above and six to eight feet below, making in all from ten to twelve feet of solid coal. Some of it has a dull bitumi- nous look, other portions are as glistening and black as anthracite. Above the coal is the usual clay bed, many layers in which are largely composed of the stems and leaves of plants. Above this there are beds of loose rusty brown sand and sandstone with some ferruginous conere- tions ; and a layer of light brown very compact silicious rock caps the hill. The dip of the beds is not more than 3° to 5°. At the immediate entrance to the mine the inclination is about 5°. The coal can be easily wrought and the mine well drained, in spite of its clay roof. The coal is of excellent quality, but like most of the brown coals of the west, crumbles on exposure to the atmosphere, as appears from the condition already of the large coal heaps in front of the mine. So far as I have been able to ascertain, I am inclined to believe that the coal bed already alluded to is the lowest in the region and identical with the one so successfully worked at Carbon Station on the line of the Union Pacific Railroad ; but I do not think that it is the oldest coal bed in the tertiary series of the West. The valley of Rock creek is from three to five miles in width and evi- dently a valley of erosion. On the west side of it there is a ridge at least 500 feet high, composed of tertiary beds, which in some places incline 10° to 15°, but the general dip is not more than 5°. On both sides of the stage road for ten miles west of Rock creek there is a large area covered with huge piles of rusty brown sandstone, mostly concretionary. In some localities a great many impressions of deciduous leaves were found. The tertiary beds extend to the mountains and form a large part of the foot hills. Here lofty wall-like exposures of sand- stone make their appearance, giving a very rugged appearance to the country. As far as the eye could reach we saw peculiar looking pyramidal, conical and dome-shaped hills, from 300 to 500 feet high, composed of alternate layers of rusty yellow sandstone and greenish gray indurated sands, which are sometimes in the valleys of streams exposed for a thick- ness of 1000 or 1500 feet. These beds incline gently from the mountains, about north-east. Since crossing the Big Laramie river exposures of the red beds have not 30 Hayden. ] 2) [February 19, been observed in the foot hills of the mountains. Usually they form a most conspicuous feature.in the scenery. Their absence here is due either to the comparatively small erosive action, insufficient to wear away the cretaceous and tertiary beds; or to the fact that they are covered with a thick deposit of drift. The inclination of the beds are gentle and the ascent of the mountain side is as it were by steps; one series of foot hills rising slowly above another, until the snow capped ranges are reached. In this region all the hills, and even the gorges through which the little streams flow, are so covered with debris and the whole surface is so clothed with grass, that the rough points are smoothed down and the underlying rocks are difficult to see. Hven Elk mountain, which must rise at least 1500 feet above the bed of Medicine Bow creek, is so smooth and so covered with grass, that the rocks are nowhere visible. North of the road for 30 miles or more, the tertiary beds are on the contrary worn by atmospheric agencies into a great variety of rugged forms, so that the scenery recalls portions of the ‘‘ Bad Lands” on the Upper Missouri composed of the same formations. Fig. 1 illustrates the character of the coal-bearing formation of the Upper Missouri, but is equally descriptive of the region under notice. The feature of greatest interest is that which affords evidence of comparatively recent glacial action, not merely in valleys of erosion, but in vast deposits of water- rolled rocks, everywhere visible. The mountain sides toward the plains are literally paved with rounded boulders, commonly of no great size ; but the sides of the hills opposite the mountains, have scarcely any on them, and are in most cases covered with bushes or with grass. The bottoms of the streams are also covered with pebbles or boulders ; and the nearer the mountains the larger and more numerous these rocks become. FIG. 1. The Medicine Bow creek, a fine mountain stream fringed with a con- siderable belt of cotton-wood, has a valley extending far into the moun- tains, with a gradual ascent. It is by far the most beautiful yalley west (9) 1869. ] v0 1 [Hayden. of the Laramie river. Although covered thickly with boulders the soil is good, and the grass excellent. It has been for years a favorite pasture ground. Elk mountain is a short range of spurs with its highest point fronting the creek ; it resembles the short range, with abrupt front, east of the Little Laramie. The metamorphic rocks have been uplifted, while the unchanged rocks have remained quiet, or been let down at the foot of the mountain, without leaving that series of upheaved ridges which we find running along the base of most of the mountains. The range is about 10 miles long, forming what I have called an abrupt anticlinal ; that is, on one side of the mountain the anticlinal is complete, the un- changed rocks inclining from the mountain in regular order of sequence; while on the mountain side the rocks are nearly vertical, and the sedi- mentary beds jut up against the base, their edges being entirely con- cealed. Against the north side of Elk mountain the cretaceous and some of the tertiary beds jut so abruptly that all the older rocks are concealed, while on the opposite side, the entire series, from the granite nucleus to the cretaceous formation, may be measured across their up- turned edges. Along the immediate base of the mountains there is a belt of country which in many instances might be called a monoclinal valley. It has been even more smoothed by erosion than any of the valleys of the streams, and aiways runs at right angles to them. ‘Through this valley of erosion the old stage road and Western Union Telegraph line is located. North of the road can be seen a series of upheaved ridges somewhat irregular in their continuity but gradually receding northward like sea waves. The first ridge is composed of aseries of dark brown indurated clays and sands, with layers of more or less laminated rusty sandstone of fine texture, and tendency to concretionary forms, varying rapidly in thickness from 2 to 10 or 12 feet, dipping N. 20°? W. from 5° to 10°, 20° west of north. In this ridge are quite extensive beds of lignite, one of which is about six feet thick separated into three parts by layers of clay. In the harder layers above and below are great quantities of indistinct vegetable impressions. The interval between the first main ridge and the second is about 15 miles, and in that interval several lignite beds - crop out with layers of light gray fine grained siliceous rock. The second main ridge is composed of a variety of beds inclining 3° to 5°, the general color being brown, or light drab, while the harder layers are rusty sandstones. One bed, perhaps 50 feet thick, is of fine gray indurated sand with a greenish tinge. At the summit of this ridge were very distinct indications of the lignite bed at some period in the past. Several feet of rocks were baked to a brick red_ color, and fragments of completely fused rock lay scattered about. From the bed of the Medi- cine Bow to the summit of the second ridge I estimated that 1200 to 1500 feet of strata were exposed to view, and from the presence of lignite and deciduous leaves I regarded them all as belonging to the tertiary series. Some of the sandstones are made up of an aggregate of crystals of oo Hayden. ] 2) [February 19, quartz and feldspar, showing that the materials were derived at least in part from the metamorphic rocks. Many of these sandstones disinte- grate by exfoliation, or exquamation, and have the rusty spherical concre- tions scattered through them. The main trend of these ridges is N. E. and $. W. The general ap- pearance of the country is extremely desolate and cheerless; scarcely any vegetation but sage and grease-wood ; with here and there a little lake, which from its alkaline character only adds to the dreariness of the scene. Near the summit of the second ridge in the burnt rocks are quite abundant impressions of plants ; and more especially lower down, about the middle of the ridges, there is a layer of the iron rocks about 2 feet in thickness largely composed of fragments of leaves. A few miles west of Fort Halleck a very conspicuous hill, called Sheep mountain, is composed of carboniferous limestones, red beds; and is probably capped with lower cretaceous rocks. These beds incline 252, but a very hard bed of sandstone capping the summit dips 35°. .There appears to be an unusual thickness of triassic (?) rocks at this locality. The average dip of the strata is from 80° to 50°, varying between west and north. FIG. 2. From Medicine Bow river to Rattle Snake Pass, a distance of about 30 miles, the road extends through a monoclinal valley.* For nearly our * Vig. 2 illustrates the character of the upheaved ridges which everywhere are seen upon the margins of the mountain ranges, extending in many cases for miles, like waves; and the geologist can walk across the upturned edges of all the formations from the granite to the most recent ter- tiary inclusive. ) 1869.] 5 [Hayden. entire route the road seems to form the line of separation between the eretaceous and tertiary rocks, the former being well displayed on our left, jutting up against the mountain sides; the latter extending in wave like ridges into the distance on our right. As we approach Pass creek however about 5 miles to the east, the cretaceous beds reveal themselves clearly on the right side of the road, No. 5 attaining a great thickness ; while, on the left, inclining from Sheep mountain Numbers 3 and 2 are very plainly shown in a series of irregular and rather low ridges. All along Elk mountain the red beds are visible but not conspicuous, and they do not give color to the debris at the foot of the hills. In this vicinity the tertiary beds must be at least 5000 feet thick, which, with an equal thickness of the cretaceous, makes in all at least 18,000 feet, a larger development than I know at any other point to the eastward. Indeed we shall be able to show that these formations continue to in- crease in thickness as we go west. On the north side of Pass creek we have an uplift of rather fine grain yellow sandstone, which presents a front like a wall composed generally of vertical columns. On the summit are isolated piles of every form, the relics of erosion. The sandstone is about 200 feet in thickness and the ridge inclines northward at an angle of about 19°. The trend of all these ridges varies between north and west. As we emerge from the hills through the Pass on the Pass creek, we strike a vast open plain, and the ridges of upheaval seem to pass off and die out en echelon in the plain, the ends making a gentle flexure from the west northward, so as to form one side or rim of the plain. There appears to be in these formations many alternate beds of brownish yel- low sand and sandstones, the whole readily yielding to atmospheric in- fluences, covering the hills as well as the valleys, with a great depth of fine sand, from which the long lines of harder sandstone project. These ridges of upheaval run at various distances from each other, from 100 to 1000 yards, with monoclinal valleys intervening. The broad plain west of Elk mountain must be a region of depression; or a portion of the country left undisturbed while the surrounding parts were elevated. As far as the eye can reach this plain appears to be per- fectly level; and no cuts to show the character of the underlying beds. A thick deposit of drift covers every thing. On its northern side the mountain ridges seem to trend about north-east and south-west, the southern end sloping gently down with the plain. The rusty calcareous sandstones which form the inner ridges facing the plain are undoubtedly cretaceous and incline 80° to 45°. These rusty sandstones here form a belt about 15 miles in width, with intercalated layers of yellow arena- ceous material covered with grass, only the harder layers projecting here and there above the surface. In one of these higher ridges of sandstone a Baculite (B. ovatus) was found. In another ridge was a seam about six inches in thickness composed entirely of a small oyster about the size, ‘‘though probably distinct from’’ O. Congesta. Inthe plain country, A. P. 5. —VOL. XI—E (>) Hayden. ] 34 [February 19, even far distant from the mountains, the rocks are more or less disturbed, but generally not exposing older beds than the cretaceous. We find also that there is an irregular series of anticlinals and syncli- nals resembling somewhat, but on a gigantic scale, the furrows in a ploughed field. Not unfrequently we meet with a high synclinal ridge, formed of rocks inclining toward each other; and then following the same beds along and across the ridges we shall find them dipping away from each other making a synclinal valley. I have given my observations along this route somewhat in detail from the fact that no accurate information concerning the geology of this region has ever been published; and because we have had no definite data for coloring a geological map. Our course was along the Overland Stage Road just at the base of the mountains, on the south side of the Laramie plains, from 5 to 20 miles south of the Union Pacific Railroad line ; and by comparing my observations of the geology along the stage road with those along the line of the railroad it will be seen that there are many points of difference. As I have before remarked, the-Laramie range of mountains forms one of the most complete and beautiful anti- clinal systems in the West. The Laramie plains, as the area enclosed by these mountains is called, exhibits a broad, undulating almost treeless, surface about 60 miles long from East to West, and 50 miles broad from North to South. From Fort Sanders along the stage route to Little Laramie river, the distance is about 18 miles. The surface is quite undulating, but all the slopes are moderate in their inclination. All the basis rocks belong to the creta- ceous period. At the crossing of the Big Laramie may be seen a small thickness of the black clays of No. 2, and here and there are isolated hills which show the yellow chalky layers of No. 3. Some of the higher ridges which extend down into the plains from the foot of the mountains reveal here and there the rusty yellowish arenaceous marls of No. 5. From Little Laramie Station to Cooper’s creek the distance is 15 miles. Over this interval the cretaceous rocks prevail and belong mostly to the upper portion of that period. There are probably isolated patches of tertiary overlapping the cretaceous beds. One of these isolated areas of tertiary occurs about two miles north of Cooper’s Creek Station on the west bank of the creek where an excellent coal bed has been opened nine feet thick. The coal is quite pure, compact, but rather light, and burns well. I do not think it will be continuous over a very large area, but it will yield a large amount of fuel before it is exhausted. From this point westward nearly to Fort Bridger, and perhaps beyond, the tertiary beds may be said to prevail in the plain country. Rocks of older date with comparatively few exceptions are not seen except in close proximity to the mountains. In some instances the mountains abut abruptly on the plains, the tertiary or cretaceous beds jutting against the granite or igneous nucleus, and concealing for long distances all the older rocks. Again, intervening between the plain country and the principal mountain ranges are 50 to 100 miles of what: may be called 9 1869. ] ‘ 39 [Hayden. foot hills, or minor ranges of the mountains, in which are exhibited on a grand scale the entire series of unchanged rocks known to exist in this country. In the mountains near the sources of the Little Laramie the red beds show themselves in very great thickness and give to the scenery pecu- liarly picturesque features.* Near Elk mountain the red beds appear again ; but in the interval they seem to be partially concealed either by drift or cretaceous and tertiary beds. It will be impossible to represent minute details of the geology of this country by colors except on a care- fully prepared topographical map constructed on a much larger scale than any that we have. We are satisfied, however, whether the older formations are well shown or are concealed entirely, or in part, that they either do now or did once extend across the country with a nearly uni- form thickness. = ' TE —— iq —<. saiibnanes sa My oe Ny A a 0 NN ni UNS rr sally = We will now return to Laramie City and examine the geological char- acter of the country along the line of the Union Pacific Railroad west- ward. From Laramie City to Cooper’s Lake Station, a distance of 25.6 miles, there is a good degree of uniformity in the character of the coun- * The action of the atmosphere upon these brick red sandstones of the Triassic Age is beau- tifully shown in the wood cut, Fig. 3, taken from a photograph. These worn sandstones form a conspicuous feature in the scenery of the Laramie Plains. 36 Hayden.] 2) [February 19 y y 19, try. On our right the Laramie range appears like a wall bending round to the north-west and west, and finally disappearing from view at Coop- er’s Creek Station. Near the crossing of the Big Laramie river we sce on our right the red beds which are somewhat marked. We can follow them up to the foot of the mountains by their peculiar brick red color. Then come the cretaceous rocks, especially the upper members of the group, soon after crossing the Laramie river, and continue to a point about 5 miles east of Como Station, more than 60 miles west of Laramie City. There may be some few isolated patches of the tertiary beds. The principal rocks seem to belong to No. 5. Carmichael’s Cut east of Rock Creek is a locality quite well known. The strata cut through are mostly rather friable fine grained rusty gray sandstones, with bluish brown calcareous concretions of various sizes scattered through them, which when broken open reveal a great variety of shells—Baculites, Ammonites, Inoceramus, and many other species characteristic of No. 4 and 5, which undoubtedly blend throughout this region, and cannot be separated as distinct divisions of the system. No. 3 has not been observed along the immediate line of the railroad, but it is well showed in many localities in the Laramie plains. From Laramie City to Cooper’s Station the country as far as the eye can reach presents a cheerful appearance. The irregularities of the sur- face are smoothed down and a long stretch of level prairie is covered with grass, with here and there a grass covered ridge or rounded butte. The basis rocks are mostly indurated arenaceous clays or loose yellow sands which yield readily to atmospheric influences. There are many rounded arenaceous concretions, and sometimes a thin layer of laminated sandstone. There is a slight disturbance of the beds; and the ridges of upheaval seem to trend nearly east and west. As we proceed westward from Cooper’s Station we find the black clays of No. 2, and the appearance of the country becomes dreary and sterile in the extreme. They extend to a point about 5 miles east of Como. The waters are alkaline, and there is no timber along the creeks except stinted willows, and very little grass or vegetation of any kind ; as far as the eye can reach nothing but black plastic clays. Just before reaching Como we come to a very interesting quarry of sandstone from which the materials for the construction of the extensive railroad buildings at Laramie City and Cheyenne are obtained. The rock is a gray, rather friable, sandstone, and occurs in isolated patches resting on the shaly clays of No. 2, and are so filled with fragments of vegetable impressions, sometimes quite distinct deciduous leaves, that one is reminded of the tertiary sandstones. J am inclined to think how- ever that it is a local deposition of sandstone in the cretaceous series. This point and the district about Como is extremely interesting to the geologist, and there are some curious problems yet to be solved. At Como Station the railroad runs for some distance through a distinct anticlinal valley, the strata inclining away to each side. The south side of the road exhibits the most complete series of the beds. A high ridge or 1869.] ol [Hayden. is composed of jurassic beds mostly capped with the sandstones of No. 1, while as far as the eye can extend southward the low wave like ridges of No. 2 can be seen. Towards the southwest the anticlinal valley seems to close up, but north-eastward expands indefinately, and extends no doubt to the Laramie mountains. In the valley the red arenaceous beds are quite conspicuous. These jurassic rocks are composed for the most part of alternate layers of loose sands and some harder beds of sandstones, but there are a few layers of sandstone and marl; and in these are great quantities of an Ostrea, Pentacrinus, Asteriseus, and Belemnites densus, all well known jurassic types. These beds throughout the jurassic series are full of tidal ripples, mud markings and irregular laminee of deposition, indications of a shallow water deposit. All the fossils are badly broken and worn as if they had been transported from a great distance and deposited in turbulent waters. About a mile west of the station the road cuts through the full series of jurassic beds with Nos. 1 and 2 of the cretaceous inclining north-west at an angle of 45° to 50°. From a point about 10 miles east of Como to St. Mary’s Station, for a distance of about 50 miles, the tertiary formation occupies the country with the sands, sandstones and clays peculiar to it and also numer- ous coal beds. The most marked development of the coal beds is at Carbon Station, about 80 miles west of Laramie Station. The rocks incline nearly south-east or south and east. Three entrances have been made to mine a bed 9 feet thick. The openings follow the dip and con- sequently descend. The mines are about 300 yards from the railroad; a side track has been laid to them. More than 1000 tons of coal have already been taken out, and the Union Pacific Railroad Company are ready to contract for any amount that can be supplied. The coal at Car- bon is of the best quality of tertiary splint, very compact and pure. It is not as hard as anthracite, but the miners informed me that it was more difficult to work than the bituminous coals of Pennsylvania. It is used to a great extent on the locomotives, and the engineers speak in high terms of it. Over the coal is what the miners call slate, a somewhat earthy bed breaking into slabs showing woody fibre, and much of it look- ing like charred wood or soft charcoal. As we pass up in the section fragments of deciduous leaves are seen more distinctly, and finally the whole graduates into a dark drab clay. At the bottom of the coal are thousands of impressions of deciduous leaves, such as Populus, Platanus, Tilea, &c. Some of the layers of rock, 2 to 4 inches in thickness, are wholly composed of these leaves, in a good state of preservation, and so perfect that they could not have been transported any great distance. The Union Pacific Railroad Company have placed their coal interests in charge of Mr. Thomas Wardell, an old English miner, who is con- stantly employed in prospecting and opening mines the whole length of the road. At Carbon he has erected six pretty cottages, as residences for the miners, and a number more are in process of building. At 9 Hayden.] 38 [February 19, Separation and Point of Rocks other villages will be built. All the apparatus for permanent and extended mining operations are being gradually introduced. Nearly all the wood now along the line of the road has to be transported from 10 to 40 miles, and in two years from the present time most of it within a reasonable distance of the road will have been consumed. The future success of this great thoroughfare is therefore wholly dependent on the supply of mineral fuel, and its im- portance cannot be too highly estimated.* From St. Mary’s to Rawlings Springs, a distance of about 30 miles, the railroad passes over rocks of cretaceous age. No coal beds need be sought for in the immediate vicinity of the road, although it is quite possible that on the north side of the road isolated patches of tertiary con- taining coal may be found. The railroad from a point about 8 miles east of Benton to Rawlings Springs, passes through one of the most beautiful anticlinal valleys I have seen in the West. On either side the rusty gray sands and sandstones dip away from the road at an angle of 10° to 15e. This anticlinal valley is most marked near Fort Steele at the crossing of the North Platte. About 5 miles east of Fort Steele I made a careful examination of a railroad cut through a ridge of upheaval which inclined about south or a little east of south. We have, exposed here, commencing at the bottom : 1. Gray fine grained sandstone, rather massive and good for building purposes and easily worked, 80 feet thick—dip 25°. 2. A seam, 2 feet thick, of irregular black indurated slaty clay, with layers of gypsum all through it then 2 feet of aranaceous clay. 3. Ten feet of rusty gray compact sandstone. 4, Hight feet of clay and hard arenaceous layers, very dark in color, passing up into harder layers which split into thin lamin, the surfaces of which are covered with bits of vegetable matter. 5. About 50 feet of rusty yellowish gray sandstone. All these sand- stones contain bits of vegetable matter scattered through them. 6. 100 to 150 feet of steel-brown indurated clay with some iron concre- tions. The clay is mostly nodular in form. 7. A dark brown arenaceous mud rock, quite hard, 80 feet. From bed 5 I obtained numerous species of marine shells, among them a species of Ostrea and Inoceramus in great numbers. The upper surfaces of the hard clay layers appeared as though crowded with impressions of sea-weeds or mud markings. In another railroad cutting about 4 miles * Mr. J. P. Carcou, an assistant on the survey, made an analysis of a fair specimen of the coal from the Carbon mines with the following result: Moisture at 100° C. 11.60. Volatile Combustible Matter, 27.68. Fixed Carbon, 51.67. Ash, 6.17. Sulphur, 2.88, Color of Ash, light grey. Specific gravity, 1.37. Weight, per cubic yard, 2212 tbs. (>) 1869. ] 39 [Hayden. east of Rawlings Springs I obtained the same Jnoceramus and a large species of Ammonite. These fossils are important in establishing the age of these rocks. At Rawlings’ Springs are some very interesting geological features. At this locality the elevatory forces were exerted more powerfully than at any other point along the railroad from Laramie Station to Green river. The entire series of rocks are exposed here, from the syenites to the cretaceous inclusive. The railroad passes through an anticlinal opening. To the south of the road are variegated gray, brown and red- dish siliceous rocks dipping 5° to 10° S$. W. A very hard bluish lime- stone resting upon them I have no doubt is carboniferous, although I was unable to find any fossils in this region. North of the road ridges of upheaval stretch away toward the north-west and attain a height of 1200 to 1500 feet above the road. On careful examination the red syenite may be found exposed in a number of places, and gives us the opportu- nity of studying the relation which the unchanged rocks sustain to the metamorphic. The syenite beds dip 70° about 8. E., the unchanged beds resting upon them in nearly a horizontal position. The layers imme- diately on the syenite are a beautiful pudding stone of rounded quartz pebbles and feldspar, and above it layers of fine siliceous rock with thin intercalations of clay, the whole having the position and appearance of Potsdam sandstone. Iam inclined to believe that we have here lower silurian representatives. In all cases these rocks repose on the upturned edges of the syenite ; sometimes nearly horizontal ; again inclining 3° to 10°. In one or two places these lower silurian (?) beds are lifted a thou- sand feet or more into the air, still maintaining a nearly horizontal pos- ture. On the mountain sides the beds are broken off so as to incline 50°, 60°, up to nearly 90°. These siliceous rocks, covered with ripple marks, Ge., afford excellent building stone, and are much used by the railroad company. They reach a thickness of 500 to 800 feet. Upon them rests the blue lime- stone, 30 to 40 feet thick ; then variegated sandstones ; and the red beds in the distance. From the tops of these ridges one can see numbers of both synclinal and monoclinal valleys. There is one monoclinal valley, 3 to 5 miles wide, which stretches far into the north-west, a smooth and level grassy prairie. All these ridges have suffered great erosion, and the silurian (?) beds are planed and grooved even to a greater extent than the more recent beds. Everywhere the evidences of erosion during the drift period are on a gigantic scale. A fine sulphur spring from under the bed of blue limestone gives name to the station. The water is clear and possesses excellent medicinal properties. About 4 miles west of Rawlings’ Springs the tertiary beds begin to overlap, but in the distance on either side are lofty ridges of cretaceous and perhaps still older rocks. The ridge, 15 miles south of Separation, at least 1000 feet high, is certainly formed of lower cretaceous and prob- Hayden.] 40) [February 19, ably also of that great thickness of sandstones and clays which hold a position between the transition No. 1, and the brick red beds. Near Separation, about 10 miles west of Rawlings’ Springs, a coal bed 11 feet thick has been opened, probably the same as the one opened at Carbon, and near Rock and Cooper creek. The dip is nearly west about 10°. The opening being at the summit of the hill, all the coal will have to be drawn up a slope, and the difficulties of drainage will be greatly increased. The coal is of excellent quality. Above and below the coal is the usual drab indurated clay. Below the clay is a bed of gray ferru- ginous sandstone. On the summits of the hills in the vicinity are layers of fine grained siliceous rocks with arenaceous concretions, some of them containing impressions of deciduous leaves. The tertiary beds lie in ridges running across the country. The beds are uplifted in every direction. A more desolate region I have not seen in the West. Nothing seems to grow but sage bushes, and in some of the valleys they grow very large. All over the surface of the hills and in the plains are great quantities of water-worn pebbles. Many of these valleys were scooped out by an amount of waters far in excess of any known at the present day in this region. Some of the widest and deepest do not now contain any running stream. The layers of fine grained sandstone on the hills in this vicinity con- tain more or less impressions of leaves, like Populws and Platanus, in a good state of preservation. West of Separation the dip of the tertiary beds diminishes. Before reaching Creston, about 13 miles west of Separation, they le nearly hori- zontal, and all the surrounding country presents more the appearance of aplain. At that station the Union Pacific Railroad Company haye a well 100 feet or more deep, at a depth of 88 feet in which was struck an 8 foot coal bed, with 4 feet of excellent coal and 4 feet of coaly shale. The coal was of about the same quality as that near Separation, probably from the same bed. If so, coal at a depth of about 80 feet must underlie an area of at least 100 square miles. In this well beds of bluish arena- ceous clay were passed through first, then black clay with carbonaceous matter throughout. Just over the coal was fine bluish indurated clay with very distinct impressions of leaves, among which the most abundant were Populus and Plutanus. ‘The railroad cuts and the valleys them- selves show very distinctly the character of the intermediate softer beds. The erosion has been so great in this country, and all hills and cantons are so covered with debris that it is almost impossible to obtain a clear idea of the color and composition of the intermediate softer beds. The harder sandstones, &c., project from the surface and are accessible to the eye without much excavation. Marine and fresh-water tertiary forma- tions occupy the whole country along the line of the railroad to Quaking Asp Summit, west of Fort Bridger, and possibly over to Salt lake to a greater or less extent. From Creston to Bitter Creek Station, a distance of 45 miles, the beds 1869.] 4 } (Hayden. are mostly fresh water and hold a nearly horizontal position. West of Bitter creek we get again upon marine tertiaries dipping 80 to 6° nearly east. We have therefore between Rawling’s Springs and Green river a sort of syneclinal basin, the marine tertiary dipping west about 10° on the east side, and the same marine beds inclining east 3° to 6° on the west side; while at Table Rock, Red Desert, and Washakie, a con- siderable thickness of purely fresh water beds are filled with shells of the genera Paludina, Unio, Melania, &c. Table rock is a square butte lifting itself about 400 feet above the level of the road, composed of the beds of a sandstone which in many instances is little more than an aggregation of fresh water shells. After leaving Bitter Creek Station the hills approach nearer to the road and show the characteristic features of the marine tertiary again. Seams of coal appear in many places, while yellow arenaceous mazrls, light gray sand with indurated clay beds and more or less thick layers of sandstone occur. The dip varies from 3° to 6° east or nearly east. At Black Bute Station on Bitter creek, about 15 miles west of Bitter Creek Station there is a heavy bed of yellow ferruginous sandstone, irreg- ; ular in its thickness and in part concretionary, and full of rusty concre- tions of sandstones of every size from an inch to several feet in diameter, mostly spherical, and when broken revealing large cavities filled with oxide of ironloam. ‘This sandstone, 150 to 200 feet in thickness, forms nearly vertical blufts, and is worn by atmospheric agencies into the most fantastic shapes. Above it are sands, clays, sandstones of every texture and coal beds, one of which, near the summit of the hills, has been burned, baking and melting the superincumbent beds. I found in seve- ral layers the greatest abundance of deciduous leaves, and among them “a fine Palm leaf, probably the same species which occurs in the coal beds on the Upper Missouri, named by Dr. Newbury Campbellt.. There is also a thin seam near one of the coal seams made up of a small species of Ostrea. The railroad passes down the Bitter creek valley which has been run through the tertiary beds, and on each side high walls can be seen ineli- ning at low angles. As we pass down the valley toward Green river, the inclination brings to view lower and lower beds. These are all plain- ly marine tertiaries, while an abundance of impressions of plants are found everywhere. No strictly fresh water shells occur, but seams of Ostrea of various species. There are also extensive beds of hard tabular rocks which would make the best of flagging stones. On the surface are excellent illustrations of wave ripple marks, and at one locality tracks of a singular character; one looking asif it had been made by a soli- ped. It resembles the tracks of mules on the soft bottom ground. Others seem attributable to some huge bird ; another to some four-toed Pachyderm. I obtained specimens and careful drawings of these tracks. In the field report some detailed sections of these tertiary beds will be given. Yet Iam convinced that local sections are not very important. The character is so changeable that two sections taken ten miles apart would A. P. S.—VOL. XI—F Hayden. ] 4 2 [February 19, not be identical, and in some cases not even very similar. The more - recent the age of formations the less persistent seem to be their litholo- gical characters over extended areas. Although the coal beds seem to be abundant everywhere along the line of the road in the lower tertiary deposits, they have been wrought as yet in few localities. Near Point of Rocks Station, about 45 miles east of Green river, one of the best coal mines I have yet seen in the West has been opened, and Mr. W. Snyder, the able Superintendent of the Union Pacific Railroad, has ordered a side track to be laid to it about a quarter of amile long. Five coal beds have been opened in a vertical height of 80 feet. The lowest is about 100 feet above the bed of the creek. They are respectively 5, 1, 4, 3 and 64 feet thick. The five foot bed is the most valuable, and as the strata are nearly horizontal it can be worked with ease and free of water. The hard, compact coal is pitched down the sides of the hill more than a hundred feet without being broken by the fall. It is purer and heavier than any coal I have yet seen west of the Laramie mountains. The other beds already opened will yield moderately good coal. Several other beds are in these hills which have not yet been examined. Near the summit of the hills, above the coal beds, there is a seam six inches thick composed entirely of oyster shells, about the size of the common edible oyster, but of a distinct and probably un- described species. Another bed of coal has been opened about 28 miles west of the Point of Rocks, at Rock Spring. It is about 4 feet thick, with a bed of sand- stone at the bottom and a slaty clay roof. It cannot be worked to advantage. Scattered all through the coal-bearing strata are seams and concretions of brown iron ore in abundance, sometimes persistent over extensive areas, and varying from 4 to 12 inches in thickness. The ore occurs mostly however in a nodula® form, and much of it can be made of economical value when there is a demand for it. There are also numer- ous Chalybeate and Sulphur springs with excellent medicinal properties. Near Rock Springs fresh water beds again incline nearly west 6° to 10°, but apparently different from those between Creston and Bitter creek. The beds exposed at this point are made up of drab clays, sometimes a little sandy, with heavy beds of gray and rusty yellow easily disinte- grating sandstones. There are also in the clay beds quite thick beds of coal which have ignited spontaneously and baked the superincumbent layers, in many cases melting the rock. There is very linge vegetation on these hills, only now and then a dwarf cedar. Near the summit of the hills there is a thin layer of limestone com- posed of an aggregate of small melanias. From Rock Spring to Bryan the rocks present a peculiar appearance, occurring mostly in thin laminez or layers like slate. There are 300 to 500 feet of these drab gray laminated shales, and above them, capping the hills about Green river, are from 300 to 500 feet of rusty yellow shales, which are weathered into castellated forms. 1869. ] 4 3 [Hayden. Near the junction of Bitter creek and Green river there is a bed of very singular bituminous earth which has excited much attention. It has been used as a fuel and burned so readily in stoves, that some people valued it more than true coal; but it is not now much used. An analysis shows that it is an inferior fuel.* The bed is usually about 4 feet thick, but sometimes only 2 or 24. It is often parted by several thin seams of shaie. These Green river shales or slates as they might be called, must contain some calcareous matter, although not very fossiliferous. Possi- bly a more careful study will reveal a greater variety of animal and vege- table forms. In the same cuts between Green river and Bryan, a distance of about 13 miles, great quantities of fossil fishes occur in a kind of chalky slate. Quite perfect impressions are formed upon the surfaces of the slates, presenting the appearance of having been preserved in quiet waters. Indeed all the Green river rocks may be said to possess a soft chalky character. At Bryan some fine specimens of fish were obtained from a well about 60 feet below the surface. On the distant hills of this locality are layers of a chalky limestone which would make excellent lime and is now used as a building stone. It has the appearance of oolite, and in fact is made up of an extinct unde- termined species of Cypris. About 7 miles west of Bryan we have: 4, Yellowish chalky laminated beds, very thinly divided. 3. Thin layers of gray chalky limestone filled with fresh water shells like Corbula. 2. Rusty indurated sandstone, somewhat shaly. 1. Gray shale. Many of the layers in bed No. 8 are made up almost entirely of a small _ bivalve shell. About 2 miles above Green River Station the river cuts through a great thickness of fine sand and gravel shqwing, on the slope and bottoms a vast deposit of drift. Much of the shale in this region has a greenish tinge, and the river in passing over them seems to have taken up some of the green coloring matter, so that the water has a peculiar green color and hence the name. From Bryan to a point about 10 miles west of Fort Bridger the entire surface of the country is covered with buttes of every shape, cones, * Mr. Carson’s analysis of a specimen of this bituminous earth gives the following constituents - Silicic acid, 18.58. Sulphuric acid, 3.88. Sesquioxide of Alumina, 8.14. Sesquioxide of Iron, » 2.19. Lime, 14.11. Magnesia. 7.11. Carbonic acid, 17.40. Water, 2.90. Volatile Matter, 22.25. Fixed Carbon, 3.73. 100,29. L Hayden.) 44 [February 19, pyramids, and long ridge-like hills which show a vast amount of erosion. Indeed the portion about Church Butes is precisely hike the Manvaises- terres or Bad Lands of White river.* FIG. 4. In a cut along the railroad nearly opposite to Church Butes there is a bed formed of clay filled with small kidney shaped masses of fine bluish clay, the whole filled with beautiful specimens of Unios, Paludinas and other fresh water shells. There are also in the same cut layers of green- ish clay much indurated, flesh colored concretionary and rusty drab sandstone. : About 6 miles west of Carter’s Station a cut in the road reveals a tough plastic dark gray clay, and at the top of the cut a bed of flinty concretions filled with small seams of chalcedony. The whole country is paved with small water worn pebbles, mostly of opaque flint and some of them exceeding 4 or 5 inches in diameter. Over a belt about 10 miles wide from east to west and of unknown length from north to south, there are the greatest quantities of moss agates. Iam inclined to the opinion that they originated in thin irregular seams in this recent ter- tiary formation, probably somewhere south of Church Butes. The origin of all this drift is evidently local and it is most probable that the transporting power had its origin in the Utah mountains. These ter- tiary beds are all nearly horizontal, inclining not more than 1° to 3°. At South Bend Station there is a layer of silicious limestone filled with small Melanias, which are entirely changed into chalcedony. ‘Some Unios also occur. The bed below it is composed of ashen gray shale a little arenaceous ; then comes a silico-caleareous layer. Above the shell seam * The geologist can compare the following illustration of the “Bad Lands” of White river, Dakota, with Fig. 4, which is engraved from a photograph taken from nature, of Church Butes. The peculiar features of the weathered hills in this region bear a striking resemblance to those on White river. 1869. ] 45 [Hayden. is a great thickness of shale, capped with a kind of conglomerate made up of rounded pebbles and concretions, with here and there a Unio. In the south and east, 75 miles distant, we can see a range of snowy moun- tains, Minetah; and the intermediate country is covered with rugged tertiary bluffs. To the north, 100 to 150 miles away, the Wind River range is visible, and this interval is also occupied by the same rugged hills. At Church Butes a remarkable undescribed species of turtle was found projecting from the hill sides. The beds of this basin near Church Butes and Fort Bridger incline to the eastward, but are nearly horizontal, and seem to jut. up against the mountain sides with very little inclination. The style in which they have weathered or suffered erosion, their position in relation to the older formations, and the general appearance of the surface, suggest their identity with the White River formations. But they are more arena- ceous. JI am inclined to the opinion that while they are independent basins they were synchronous. The western rim of this recent fresh water basin is well defined at Quaking Asp ridge. Everywhere here the examples of erosion are dis- played on a tremendous scale, and the rounded water worn boulders almost pave the ground. The west sides of the hills are quite abrupt, and are covered with the worn rocks; while the eastern sides slope gently down in long ridges; showing the direction from which the forces have acted as well as their local character; that they originated some- where in the direction of the mountains, and by scooping out the valleys, strewed the surface with rocks. Near Fort Bridger, and west to Quaking Asp Summit, there are in the recent tertiary formations several beds of the reddish grit which give its peculiar variegated character to much of the surface in this part of the West. Inthe cuts of the railroad are shown numerous beds of brick red and purplish clays and sands. » The inclination of the beds just on the western margin of the basin is 3° to 5°. There are 100 to 150 feét of reddish indurated clays, slightly arenaceous, with some light brands, and one or two layers of gray sandstone ; above this, 100 feet or more of light gray arenaceous material, with some hard layers of sandstone ; then irregular harder layers of sandstone, sometimes concretionary, project- ing from the sodded hills’ and many of the peculiar features of the scenery are due to their existence. After passing Quaking Asp Summit westward we come into a region underlaid by a distinct series of formations of older date than those at Fort Bridger, and in many cases nearly or quite vertical. The same dip is again to the westward. / About 20 miles west of Fort Bridger there is a fine soda spring yield- ing the most delicious water. Judging from a deposit near the spring of what appears to be limestone, the water must hold lime as well as iron, &e., in solution. Probably it will be a place of resort at no distant day. On Bear river there are several outcroppings of coal. The principal one by the side of the railroad near the station is nearly vertical, en- Hayden.] 46 [February 19, closed between beds of drab clay, and separated into two members by a clay parting of from 8 to 10 feet thick. There is probably an aggregate of from 12 to 15 feet of good coal. The dip is towards the northwest 60° to 80°. Ongthe upper side, above the drab clay, there is a bed of rather soft gray sandstone 50 to 100 feet thick. Below, are beds of rusty sandstone, clay, and indurated arenaceous clay, yellowish, drab, reddish and gray. In a railroad cutting, about a mile east of the coal mine, are 25 to 50 feet of drab indurated clay, covered with 150 to 200 feet of ferruginous and gray sandstone dipping north-west. The lowest beds shown here look like cretaceous clays of No. 2; and in some of their slaty layers are an abundance of fish scales, a species of small oyster and a shell like an Inoceramus. These black plastic clays, are undoubtedly cretaceous and lie below the coal. The strata enclosing the coal are evidently marine, for all the organic forms thus far discovered seem to belong to marine types. There is also an oil spring in Bear River valley in which parties are sinking a shaft. The whole country exhibits abundant signs of drift action, and the hills as well as the valleys are paved with worn rocks. Between Bear and Sulphur creeks, there is a fine plateau 40 to 50 feet high, covered with sage—Artemesia tufida, and as smooth as a table. The soil in the bottoms of the streams is most fertile ; if irrigated, vege- tables of all kinds grow well, and there is abundance of water for that purpose. On the right side of Bear river, 10 miles below the station is, Medicine Bute, which must be 800 to 1000 feet high above the bed of the creek. It is undoubtedly composed for the most part of the strata of the coal series, which I am inclined to regard as of older tertiary age, although the evidence is as yet conflicting. Passing westward from Bear Creek Station, over beds nearly horizon- tal or inclining at a small angle, we suddenly come to an upthrust of rocks, called the Needles, dipping east or south-east 25° to 385° or 40°. This is a more remarkable exhibition of massive conglomerate than any I have ever seen further east. The rocks project their summits in the shape of sharp pointed peaks to a height from 300 to 500 feet above the road. Some of the worn masses which compose the conglomerate are an aggregation of worn pebbles, proving that a portion of the materials were derived from some still older conglomerate. Sometimes there is a thin local seam of coarse sand containing only a few pebbles, but the whole mass, from 500 to 1000 feet thick, is in the main a coarse conglom- erate made up of water worn rocks varying in size from the smallest pebble to boulders a foot in diameter. The pebbles are mostly flint, mixed with a few of sandstone ; rocks of modern data being compara- tive rare. This seems to be a local outburst of the conglomerate through a vast thickness of variegated sands and clays which inclines westward 40° to 600. The trend is a little west of north. These ‘‘needle rocks”’ are near Yellow Creek Station, and the ridge of upheaval extends down from the Minetah range. In the vicinity of the mountain ranges such is 1869.] 47 [Hayden. local dips are common, and keep to no regular direction ; but far distant from the source of power the ridges are comparatively regular. From the hills about a mile west of Yellow Creek Station we have the first and most extended view of the country I have ever seen in the West. We can examine objects with considerable distinctness on a clear day for a radius of 50 to 100 miles in every direction, over a most rugged surface, with high ridges and deep gorges, the strata showing red, yellow, gray, and in fact every variety of color. Other beds are composed of quite light colored sandstone. From Fort Bridger westward one of the most interesting phenomena is the favorable change that takes place in the vegetation of the surface. Broad plains and hill slopes covered thickly with grass, with compa- ratively little sage, is now the rule. Patches of quaking asp appear here and there and along the streams are fringes of cotton wood. About 3 miles west of the Needles there is an upheaved ridge carrying a bed of white limestone, with streaks of chalcedony in it resembling those of the White River tertiary limestones, and dipping nearly east at an angle of 20°. After leaving this point the rocks, again nearly horizon- tal, have for the most part a prevailing reddish tinge, with alternations of reddish indurated clays, and gray and reddish sandstones. The harder — layers form quite abrupt bluffs 150 to 200 feet high all along the streams or valleys. Ina tunnel at the head of Echo cafion, where the beds have been excavated by the Union Pacific Railroad Company, the base is a red indurated clay, slightly arenaceous, with bands of hard sandstone of a greenish tinge; above this, a red grit, much indurated, but becoming less so as we approach the summit. At Echo Station there are high bluffs of the red grits, with gray sandstones; but the prevailing color of all the rocks in Echo cation from source to mouth is reddish or dark purple. The excavations for the grading of the railroad are extensive in this region and give a clear idea of the succession of the beds; but there is a great uniformity in the composition of the rocks. The sandstones are gray or yellow, and always yielding readily to the weather, wearing into all sorts of fantastic shapes, full of holes and caves, projecting points and pillars. The hills are covered with a considerable amount of loose material, worn rocks, &c. The valleys are also covered with a heavy superficial deposit. From Bear creek to Echo Kanyon Station, 20 miles, most of the way is over the red grit beds. The railroad runs directly down the Echo valley from its source to its junction with the Weber valley. Its scenery is wonderful from its general ruggedness; the water is excellent; the grass is good and all the valleys are susceptible of cultivation. Timber, though scarce everywhere, is more abundant than in localities farther to the east. Passing down Echo Kanyon from Hanging Rock Station to the mouth of Echo valley, bluffs of massive sandstone rise upon the right to a height of from 400 to 1000 feet, colored gray and yellow, yellowish purple and brick red, and containing some conglomerate. Hayden.] 48 [February 19, A mile below Hanging Rock a drift into the bank 20 feet beneath a bed of conglomerate, discovered six inches of carbonaceous clay between two beds of ash colored, somewhat sandy, indurated clay, each about 6 feet thick. Below the coaly layer there are 2 inches of a material, which an analysis shows to be composed of Water 2.62, Volatile Matter 73.92, Ses- quioxide 1.41, Lime 0.87, Magnesia trace, Sulphuric acid 0,37, TeLnosyali.e= ric acid a trace, Silica 59.14—99.80. From the mouth of Echo up the valley the rocks seem to form a sort of gentle anticlinal for about 10 miles and then the inclination is reversed. The general dip however is 5° to 15°, nearly north-west; but for 6 miles below and 3 miles above Hanging rock it is increased to 25° and even to 35°. This formation, which differs somewhat lithologically from any with which I am acquainted, must have an aggregate thickness of at least 3000 feet. The conglomerate portion must be at least 1500 feet in thickness. Tt includes beds of coal, and shows a few fossils, which are all either im- pressions of deciduous trees or marine shells. Near Coalville, a little town in the valley of Weber river, 5 miles above the mouth of Echo creek, coal outcrops several times. At Spriggs’ open- ing the dip is 20° or 30° east; and the coal bed about 15 feet thick ; capped with gray sandstone, much of it charged with pebbles. I was informed that in other places this pebbly sandstone rests directly on the coal bed. A few hundred feet from Spriggs’ opening, a shaft to strike the same bed has been sunk 79 feet deep, through 12 feet of gravel and sand, into black clay growing hayler downward, and holding numerous specimens of a species of Inocerumus, Ostrea, and Ammonites, showing that the black clays are certainly of cretaceous age. If these beds do actually lie above the coal as the dip would indicate, then this formation of doubtful age, ex- tending from Quaking Asp Summit to Salt lake, must be cretaceous, and some of the finest coal beds in the West are in rocks of that age.* The Weber river flows directly west and the rocks incline in a sort of half circle between north and south. Several beds of massive sandstone cap the high hills, and between them are layers of clay with a reddish tinge. I -was informed that there were in this section 6 or 7 beds of coal varying in thickness from 18 inches to 15 feet. i Passing down the Weber valley the dip would carry down the Coalville coal beds, in a distance of 5 miles, that is, at Echo City, to a depth of from 1200 to 1500 feet beneath the surface. So that the coal area that can ever be made available for economical purposes in this region must be very limited. An interesting feature along the Weber river is its terraces. Near Echo City there is a rather narrow bottom near the river; then an abrupt ascent of 80 feet; then a level plain or bottom of 200 to 400 yards; then a gentle ascent to the rock bluffs. The summit of the first bluff at Echo is 500 feet high; it then slopes back to the plains beyond. Passing down the Weber valley, about a mile below Echo Station, the beds begin to dip 25° N. E. The whole valley is filled with rounded . f* Confirming the published opinions of Dr. Le Conte and Dr. Newberry.—Ep1ronr. | 1869.] aI 9 (Hayden. boulders, some of them 3 to 4 feet in diameter. The Weber river through- out the greater part of its course seems to plough through a monoclinal valley; but just before reaching the entrance of Lost creek it seems to pass along a local synclinal valley. A long ridge of conglomerate extends down from the direction of the Wasatch mountains, nearly north-east and south-west, inclining nearly north-east 5° to 10°. At this point, the Weber, instead of continuing in the synclinal valley, cuts through the ridge, isolating a portion about half a mile in length and forming a huge chasm, or gorge, which is called here the Devil’s Gate. After passing through this ridge, the Weber receives Lost creek, and makes an abrupt bend to the southward; and here are exposed an immense thickness of the older rocks in a nearly vertical position. These rocks extend down the Weber river four miles or more, when the beds abruptly change from the nearly vertical position to a nearly horizontal one. Commencing near the ‘‘Narrows,’’ or the mouth of Lost creek, we have a considerable thickness of the jurassic limestones and marls, dip- ping 70° or 80° north-east, of a bluish ash color, very hard and brittle, cleaving into thin layers, and fracturing in every direction, so that the sides of the hills are covered toa great depth with its debris. Then comes a series of mud shales, with ripple marks, some layers of very white sand- stone, and a thick bed of hard red sandstone, destined to take the highest rank among the building stone of Utah. It can be easily wrought into fine forms for culverts, fronts for buildings, caps and sills, &c. Then comes a vast thickness of gray, and dark gray, more or less cherty, limestones, which are probably carboniferous ; and below these again a very hard silicious rock, oftentimes massive, which I referred to the Potsdam period, portions of which are filled with holes at right angles to the layers, very similar to much of the Potsdam east of the Mississippi pierced by Scolithus linearis. In this quartzose group there is a bed of shaly limestone, 6 to 10 feet thick. A few indistinct molluscs, were ob- served in the limestones and the mud shales. The distance from the mouth of Lost creek to the end of the nearly vertical series of rocks is about three miles. So that we have here a thickness of strata not much less than two miles from the top of the Jurassic downwards so as probably to include the Silurian. At the mouth of Lost creek, there is a remarkable example of non-con- formity in hills of different ages. The reddish conglomerate rests directly upon the upturned edges of the vertical beds described above, and it is an important question what has become of all the intermediate beds, contain- ing the coal, which are so conspicuous about 5 miles above Echo city. Descending the Weber from the ‘‘ Narrows ”’ we find some of the most remarkable rugged scenery in the west. The walls are very noticeable, and are formed of two beds of limestone, projecting from the sides of the valley, at right angles, from between which 10 or 12 feet of loose material has been washed out. Near the tunnels the rocks on the left side of the Weber dip about 10°, nearly north, while on the other side the strata incline in the opposite direction 3° to 5°, as if the valley was anticlinal. IN TES Sp VO, Hayden.] 50 [February 19, Then again the valley would appear to be monoclinal, the strata on the right side of the river inclining 20° south, and on the opposite side, though presenting a nearly vertical front, inclining south also. A little farther on down the yalley, and on the right side of the river, come beds of red sandstone ; below these again gray sandstone, with a reddish tinge, the red sandstone dipping east 12°; while on the opposite side of the river, the hills are open, rounded and grass covered. The cherty crinoidal limestone extends to Morgan city and generally disappears. The red sandstones are seen among the foot hills. At Morgan city, we come out of the principal cation of the Weber, into a broad open bottom, filled with little villages and farm houses. The soil is of great fertility. The hills on either side are smoothed off and covered thickly with loose material and vegetation. The high vertical exposures all disappear. The Wasatch range seems to trend nearly north and south ; even the foot hills of this range are so smoothed off and covered with drift and then with grass, that the underlying rocks are not to be seen. The industry shown by the Mormons in this valley is worthy of all praise: The little streams are made use of to irrigate the rich bot- tom lands, which produce abundantly, and the houses look neat and com- fortable. Fruit cannot be raised to any extent in the Weber valley. The varieties of trees are confined mostly to the bitter-cotton-wood, although from Echo city down, we meet with a small dwarf, oak-box, elder, striped maple, and choke-cherry. Just below the little village of Enterprise, I saw in the hills rocks composed of an aggregate of quartz pebbles, the whole mass looking like the Potsdam. Still farther down, we come to feldspathic rocks, indicating that the dip of the gneissic beds of the Wasatch range is westward. ‘The Wasatch range is composed of gneiss so far as the rocks can be seen along the Weber. The rocks are beautifully banded everywhere. There are also coarse aggregations of quartz and feldspar with large masses of tourmaline ; and all through the gneiss are seams of feldspar and quartz of various thicknesses. The evidence is quite clear that from Morgan city to the entrance of the Wasatch Kanyon stretched a lake, the waters of which must have filled up the valley, rounded off the hills and covered the sides of the mountains with loose debris. Along the sides of the Kanyon of the Wasatch, 43 miles long, are thick deposits of loose sand interspersed with water worn boul- ders in many places. These deposits have been cut through in making excavations by the railroad, and the lines of current deposition are curiously well marked. About half way through the kanyon, there is a sudden bend in the Weber river, by which a small portion of one of gneis- sic ridges is cut off. Opposite this ox-bow, a kanyon descends the moun- tain side, down which a vast quantity of loose material has been swept, filling the channel of the river with local drift, and probably driving the current through the gneissic ridges. The Weber river, if its channel were straightened, would run through this deposit of drift, which is about 0 kK 1869.] ol ; {Hayden. feet thick ; instead of which, it makes a bend and cuts its way through a massive gneissic ridge. Extensive deposits of whitish, fine blue and rusty yellow sandstones, hard enough for building purposes, with flesh colored marls, probably of pliocene age, and resembling very closely in many respects the more recent tertiary beds along the Platte, occur in this valley. ‘These recent beds dip east or south-east. We thus learn that some of the later move- ments in the elevation of these mountain ranges have been of compara- tively modern date. Terraces continue to show themselves the entire length of the Weber river, and they are probably synchronous with those which surround the basin of Salt Lake valley.* a ey, SAW ATAUTT RS ee — We ies =A Hosea > Aral esha ———_——S After emerging from the Wasatch Kanyon of the Weber valley, we pur- sued a southerly course along the base of the Wasatch range to Salt Lake city. For 20 miles or more, all the unchanged rocks have been worn away from the flanks of the mountains or completely concealed by debris. All over the gentle slopes at the foot of the mountains are strewn masses of rocks ; all gneissic and evidently from the central parts of the moun- tains. Terraces distinctly surround this basin everywhere. There is one large one, with two or three smaller ones, on the sides of the mountains, and from the lowest one downwards, the surface slopes gently to the lake. I was informed that the lake had risen 9 feet vertically since 1868, and of course the water has aggressed upon the land to a great distance. I have heard no explanation of this phenomenon. All the lakes in the west are said to be rising more or less. * This illustration from a sketch by Mr. F. W. Meek of the terraces along the Missouri river be- tween Council Bluffs and Sioux City, will apply equally well to Helena or Salt Lake valley; and they are doubtless synchronous in age. In the sketch, the distant high hills are composed of yellow marl or “ loess,” the terraces the same, and the bottom of rich vegetable mould. Hayden.] ; : 52 [February 19, The carboniferous limestones begin to make their appearance along the flanks of the mountains about 10 miles north of Salt Lake city, and con- tinue to a great or less extent all around the rim of the basin. On the flanks of the mountains, east of the city, are the red beds (juras- sic?); probably a careful study would reveal jurassic, cretaceous, and possi- bly even tertiary beds. President Young has long since offered a large reward to any one who would discover workable beds of coal within a reasonable distance of the city, and a thorough search has been made for them, but thus far without success. A bed of coaly clay only has been found near the city in the mountains. All the coal used in the valley is transported in wagons from Coalville, on the Weber. The best of red sandstone for building purposes is brought from red sandstone canon, just east of the town. Iam inclined to believe that it is carboniferous. The beautiful gray granite which is used in the.construction of the Mor- mon temple is brought from Cottonwood valley in the Wasatch mountains. It is composed of white feldspar, quartz and black mica. The surface of Salt Lake valley has been rendered fruitful by the industry of the Mormons. Like the greater portion of the west, it was originally a vast sage plain. Now by irrigation all kinds of cereals and roots grow luxuriantly, and there are no better apples, peaches, plums, grapes, &c., raised in America. Itmay eventually become a vine growing region. Following the stage road eastward, 16 miles from Salt Lake city to the Brewery at the mouth of Parley’s Kanyon, we reach the foot of the moun- tain, over sand beds which are probably of post-pliocene age. Here a little stream cuts through the sand beds, exposing a vertical bluff 200 feet high, composed of some fine sand, horizontally stratified and overlaid with a great thickness of water worn pebble conglomerate. There are indications all along the flanks of the mountains, that nearly or quite all the formations already recognised as far west as this point are here rep- resented. At the entrance of the kanyon, the carboniferous limestones dip north-east 70° to 80°; over them lie the purple and red sandstones and rusty yellow layers; and under them reddish shales. Beneath these shales an immense thickness of dark gray silicious rock stands nearly vertical. Allthis vast thickness of older rocks, in appearance semi-meta- morphosed. are undoubtedly the counterparts of the series described in the Weber valley just below the entrance of Lost creek. The road passes up a monoclinal valley between the ridges of silurian (?) rock, having a brittle fracture, and the monoclinal slopes are covered with debris. No gneissic rocks are noticeable along this road. Before reaching the summits, in fact soon after we begin the ascent, we come to the conglomerates and sandstones which accompanied us down the Echo and Weber valleys. Near the summit all the hills are rounded by erosion and grassed over, and water-worn boulders are scattered about here and there, so that the underlying rocks are partially concealed. Just beyond the summit we arrive at a broad open exposure in the valley of the stream called Parley’s Point, half a mile wide, and about 7000 feet Ko 1869.] . vo [Hayden. above sea level. Settlements are numerous all along the road ; but while there is very good grazing, few of the cereals will grow. All the rocks on the eastern slope incline at a greater or less angle ap- parently towards the east. Just as we enter Silver Creek valley, we come to numerous upthrusts of partially changed sandstones and conglomerates, the first indications that we get along our route of the neighborhood of igneous rocks. Some of the masses of rock which go to make up the conglomerate are of great size, very compact and of a steel gray color, and are enclosed in a gray siliceous paste ; but whether large or small, all are angular. The formation looks much like that near South Boulder creek, near Denver. Passing down the valley of Silver creek, we soon emerge into the valley of the Weber. We come to the hills enclosing the coal which dip down the valley at angles of from 20° to 50°, and of course the belt along which the coal beds are exposed is very narrow. Five or six beds as I have be- fore said, varying in thickness froma few to 15 feet, are reported. I heard also that about 4 miles from Mr. Sprigg’s opening, a bed of fossil oysters had been seen above the coal. That these coal strata are of marine or estuary character Ihave no doubt; but the limited time given me for their study prevented me from securing such positive evidence as is desirable; and as this formation occupies a vast area west of Fort Bridger, it seems all the more important to fix its geological position. That it is not older than the cretaceous we know by the occurrence of leaves of deciduous trees, and the black plastic clays of No. 2, helding quantities of fragments of fish-remains. I will now recapitulate briefly the principal geological formations along the line of the Union Pacific Railroad from Omaha to Salt Lake city. The Upper Coal Measure Limestones are seen at Omaha, near the- water’s edge, and quarried all along the Platte nearly to the Elk Horn river. The Lower Cretaceous rusty sandstones of No. 1, overlap the Upper Carboniferous limestones about four miles above the mouth of the Platte, and extend to the mouth of the Loup Fork ; but the yellow marl deposit or leess, conceals for the most part the underlying rocks. A fine yellowish sand, ofthe same age, or a little less recent, overlaps the cretaceous near Columbus. The chalky limestones of No. 3, with the characteristic Inoceramus problematicus, here and there crop out, and some obscure exposures have been detected in the Pawnee Reservation, 15 or 20 miles up the Loup Fork. This fine yellowish sand soon gives place to the Pliocene beds of the Platte, Loup Fork and Niobrara rivers, indurated marls, sands, or sand- stones, which continue on as far as the margin of the Laramie range of mountains, 5380 miles west of Omaha, that is, for nearly 480 miles along the line of the railroad. In the grand anticlinal of the Laramie range, which I have already described, they sometimes repose with a slight dis- cordance on the older rocks ; sometimes, as near the Laramie peak, they rest directly on the syenites, and entirely conceal, for a distance of 40 or Hayden.] o4 [February 19, 50 miles, all the unchanged rocks of older date ; but a careful study of the eastern flank, from Red Butes to Long’s Peak, will reveal all the forma- tions that are known to exist in this part of the west, inclining from the sides of the granitic nucleus at various angles. The railroad then for 40 miles passes over and cuts through a great variety of Syenites; some compact, beautiful building stones, almost equal to the Scotch lyenites, but the greater part ferruginous and easily disintegrating on exposure.* ws M4 Ay, CES BS tu NG ray a ehALAnK : AL UAY ane s Ah Ne iy “ ihe SS AN REE aK YON oS On the west side of the Laramie range, we pass across the upturned edges of the counterparts of the various formations seen on the eastern slope. From Laramie city to Salt Lake, formations of different ages con- tinually appear and disappear. The Cretaceous formations occupy the country for 60 miles from Laramie city nearly to lake Como. Genuine Jurassic beds, with characteristic fossils, are here exposed for a short distance, in an anticlinal valley, along which the railroad passes. Belemnites densus are in great numbers. Cretaceous beds mostly No. 2, appear again west of Como. Miocene coal beds overlay the cretaceous, just before reaching Carbon * These syenites weather into most beautiful forms resembling gigantic ruins, so that they have sometimes deserved their common appellation, of broken down temples, castles, &c, The sketch, (Fig. 5,) shows well the peculiar features which these piles of rocks assume through atmos- pheric influences. It is engraved from a photograph of ascene on the Laramie range, taken by Mr. Carbutt, photographer, of Chicago, Illinois. Ie 1869.] Ty) [Hayden. Station, 80 miles west of Laramie. At Carbon where they are exposed to view, impressions of fossil leaves occur in the greatest abundance. The species are few and nearly all of them identical with those described by Dr. Newbury, from the miocene tertiary beds of the Upper Missouri. Some strata consist almost entirely of leaves, in a fair state of preserva- tion, as if they had not been subjected to a great deal of drifting prior to deposition. Indeed, the trees themselves must have grown near the spot, to shed their leaves in such great abundance, just as we find leaves accumulated now in muddy bottoms. Dr. Newbury has identified from this locality, Pepulus Cuneata, Populus Nebrascensis, Platanus Haydent and an undescribed species of Cornus. The Wyoming Coal Company’s shaft sunk at this station to reach the coal, has descended nearly 60 feet through a considerable thickness of bluish-black arenaceous clay, in rather thick layers, upon the surface of which are great quantities of Populus and Platanus. Very nearly the same species are described throughout a great thickness of these tertiary beds, and the evidence seems to be pretty clear that the vegetation was nearly uniform throughout the period of the deposition of the coal strata. The Cretaceous beds are again exposed in a sort of anticlinal valley, about 10 miles east of the N. Platte crossing. But a few miles on either side of the railroad tertiary beds are seen. At Rawling’s Springs, all the formations from the syenites to the cre- taceous, are thrown up over a restricted area; 2 miles farther west, the tertiary beds again overlay. At Separation, 26 miles west of Benton Sta- tion, a bed of excellent coal has been opened by the railroad company, in the rocks over which Platanus Haydeni and Cornus acuminata, (N,) with other undetermined species of plants occur. This forms the eastern rim of a basin which extends about 110 miles to the westward. Soon after leaving Separation, the strata becomes nearly horizontal, and are of fresh water instead of estuary origin. Beyond Bitter Creek Station, estuary beds reappear dipping east. At Washakie, Red Desert and Table Rock occur thick beds made up of an aggregate of fresh water shells, of the genera Unio, Paludina, Limnea, Melania, &c., At Black Butes and Point of Rocks, a great abundance of impressions of deciduous leaves are found. At Black Bute Station, about 850 miles west of Omaha, I found in the coal strata Sabal Campbelli, N, Rhamnus elegans, Cornus acuminata, Quercus aceroides, Tilia antiqua, with some undescribed species. At Point of Rocks, an important coal station, about 14 miles farther west, I found Platanus Haydent, P. Nebrascensis, Cornus acuminata, and Magnolia tenerafolia. In the vicinity of Elk mountain, along the overland stage road, in beds which I regarded as belonging to the older tertiary, and holding a position near the junction of the tertiary and cretaceous, and nearly or quite on a parallel with the lower tertiary beds near Den- ver, Colorado, I found Platinus Haydent, Quercus aceroides, Magnolia tenerafolias with fragments of Cornus and Rhamnus. Near Green River the eastern rim of what appears to be another tertiary basin commences, the beds having a gentle dip to the westward. Between Hayden.] 56 [February 19,1869. Green River crossing and Bryan Station, fine specimens of fossil fishes occur in rocks which resemble the Solenhofen slates. West of Bryan, fresh water shells of the genera Corbicula, Limnea, Physa, Paludina, Mela- nia, and Unio occur in the greatest quantities. This basin extends to Quaking Asp ridge, 22 miles west of Fort Bridger. We then come to a series of variegated beds, whose dominant color is red or reddish, of estuary or marine origin, with coal beds from 6 to 15 feet thick. These extend far westward to the Wasatch mountains, pos- sibly farther. The evidence inclines one to regard them of cretaceous age, but they may be older tertiary. _ In Weber valley there is an immense thickness of the older sedimentary rocks from the jurassic inclusive to the silurian inclusive, the thickness of which I estimated at from 5,000 to 10,000 feet. The Wasatch range is composed of metamorphic rocks, mostly gneisic, which are well shown in the valley of Weber river for the distance of 4 miles. The Union Pacific Railroad from Omaha to Salt Lake valley, a distance of nearly 1200 miles, really pass through metamorphic rocks but twice; first in crossing the Laramie range, a distance of 20 or 30 miles, and in the Weber valley through the Wasatch range, 4 miles. At Rawling’s Springs, the syenites are seen on the north side of the road for a little distance, but not immediately along it. It will thus be seen that over the vast region known as the Rocky Mountain district proper, the area that can be colored on a geological map as occupied by igneous or metamorphic rocks is comparatively small, while the more modern formations as tertiary and cretaceous, are met with everywhere even up to the summits of the loftiest ranges and some- times covering them. Nore. The illustration, Plate 1, Fig. 2, Pulpit Rock, shows the high nearly vertical bluffs of conglomerate, at the entrance of Echo creek into the Weber river, Utah Territory. I am inclined to regard these rocks as older tertiary, from the fact that they lie along the coal beds of this region, but they may be cretaceous. Twin Peaks, No. 1, Plate 1, form a part of a mountain range, enclosing Salt Lake valley. The terrace system is well shown, as described in the preceding paper. Lo March 5, 1869. ] 5 / (Winchell. ON THE GEOLOGICAL AGE AND EQUIVALENTS OF THE MARSHALL GROUP. By Pror. A. WINCHELL. CONTENTS. I. The existence of controversy. II. History of discovery and opinion. III. Present state of our stratigraphical knowledge. Tables of stratification in various States. Parallelism of these strata. The Black Shale. The Carboniferous Conglomerate. The strata between the Conglomerate and the Waverly series. The Waverly series and its equivalents. « Not synchronous with Portage and Chemung. Huron Group synchronous with Portage and Chemung in Michigan, Ohio, Kentucky, Lowa. This synchronism consistent with the tenor of Geological History. IV. Present state of our paleontological knowledge. Characters and parallelism of the Huron Group. Catalogue of fossils from the Marshall Group and its equivalents. Discussions of the catalogue. Relations of Western localities among themselves. Relations of these to Portage and Chemung. Relations of the same to Conglomerates of western New York. V. The Fauna of the Marshall Group presents a Carboniferous aspect. Fossils identified with Carboniferous species of America and Europe. Fossils whose analogies recur in Carboniferous rocks. Generic and subgeneric types of a Carboniferous character. VI. The Fauna of the Chemung Group presents a Devonian aspect. VII. Can the Marshall and Chemung Group be synchronized? Reliability of fossils in determining parallelism. The Marshall and Chemung cannot be synchronized. Influence of geographical conditions. VIII. Parallelism of the Catskill and Marshall Groups. Objections considered. Paleontological affinities of the two. Table of geological equivalents. 1X. Their names. Appendix. References to publications on the subjert. I. ExIsTENCE OF CONTROVERSY. Every person conversant with the history of American geological science is aware of the controversy which has long existed in reference to the age and equivalents of the strata lying between the Corniferous limestones and the limestones of the Lower Carboniferous system. Geologists of the highest ability—both American and European—have participated in the discussions ; and western geologists, almost without exception, have been constrained to commit themselves, for specific reasons, to definite, though often diverse, views in reference to the geology of the zone in question. Asadditional facts have been successively brought to ight, some important progress has been made in the settlement of controverted points ; and the great body of western geologists seem to have united with considerable unanimity ina judgment upon the main issues. Very persistent oppo- An BS So=S\WOllg a Winchell.] 58 [March 5, sition is manifested, however, in certain quarters, to the verdict which is already shadowed forth; and there are probably few whose convictions have been satisfactorily and finally settled by a comprehensive comparison of the facts which have been collected. I think, therefore, it may be use- ful, in the present state of opinion, to bring forward a review of the data upon which the controversy has proceeded, and to furnish the grounds of the convictions which for some years past have been strengthening in my own mind. In doing this, I hope I shall be actuated by a spirit of candor, and sentiments of profound respect for the distinguished names arrayed against my position. I seek only the truthful determination of the ques- tion; and I would not raise my voice in a discussion where so many worthier ones have been heard, did I not recall to mind that the merest child, or the humblest peasant may stumble upon phenomena which the philosopher had long sought in vain, and which may serve as the solvent of chronic and distressing doubts. Il. History or DiscovERY AND OPINION. So far as I have observed, the first distinct allusion by any geological writer to the zone of rocks under consideration, is embraced in an elabor- ate description of the topography and geology of the ‘‘bituminous coal deposits of the valley of the Ohio, and of the accompanying rock strata”’ by that distinguished pioneer of western geology, Dr. 8. P. Hildreth.! In the section which he has given ofthe ‘‘Ferruginous deposits,’’? it would appear that the lower beds, 500 feet in thickness, extend into the series afterwards designated the ‘‘ Waverly series’’ by the Ohio geologists. Dr. Hildreth styles them the ‘‘Great Lias Rock,’ and afterwards an ‘¢ Argillaceous sandstone rock, very fine grained,’”’ &c. Dr. 8. G. Morton appends to this paper descriptions and figures (mostly too imperfect for identification) of several species of included fossils. In 1888, Mr. C. Briggs,’ assistant upon the geological survey of Ohio, bestowed the name ‘‘ Waverly Sandstone Series’’ upon the lower portion of the succession of shales, sandstones, and shaly sandstones, interposed between the so-called Black Slate and the great Carboniferous Conglome- rate. The series took its name from the village of Waverly in the southern part of the State in Pike county, since some of the most beautiful building stones afforded by the series had been quarried at that place. The Ohio geologists, however, in other and subsequent publications, generally referred to this assemblage of strata under the designation of. ‘‘ Fine Grained Sandstone Series.’’4 The lower limits of the series, as defined, were distinctly marked by the horizon of the Black Shale ; but the upper limits were not stated with precision. It does not appear however that the series was originally supposed to reach upwards to the Conglomerate ;° 1 Amer. Jour. Science and Arts, vol. 29, p. 1, and Plates 1 to xxxvVi., 2 Tb. p. 133; also 136, 3 First Ann. Rep., Ohio, p. 79. 4 See for instance ‘‘ Report of Special Committee to report on the best method of obtaining a complete geological survey,” 1836, p. 13, where the expression seems to have been first employed; Whittlesey, Second Ann. Report, 1838, p. 56; J. W. Foster, Ib. p. 76; Briggs, Ib. pp. 122, 130. 5 Whittlesey, 2d Ann. Rep., p. 56. a 1869.] og [Winchell. though the Ohio geologists appear eventually to have given the term ‘‘Fine Grained Sandstone Series’’ that extension of meaning ; and Col. Whit- tlesey, Prof. Hall, Dr. Newberry and others, have since treated the term ““Waverly series’? as synonymous. The Ohio geologists abstained, on principle, from expressing any opinion on the subject of the American or foreign equivalents of these rocks. During the same year, Mr. J. W. Foster® made a report in which he de- seribed the Fine Grained Sandstone of Licking and Franklin counties, as a continuation of the Waverly seriés of-Briggs, and expresses the opinion that it is ‘‘a member of the mountain limestone formation.’’ I direct particular attention to this early judgment. It must be noted, however, that the older Cliff Limestone was also at that time regarded as belonging to the mountain limestone series. Both Foster and Briggs speak of the paucity of organic remains in the lower portion of the series, and their abundance in the upper portion. The public geological survey of Michigan was inaugurated at about the same time as that of Ohio. The earliest mention of sandstones in that State, occupying a position in the zone under consideration, is found in Dr. Houghton’s report for 1838.7 Under the head of the ‘‘Upper Sandstone of the Peninsula,’’ he notices those rocks which I have designated’ the “* Woodville Sandstone’’ above the coal; the ‘‘ Parma Sandstone ’’ be- neath it, and those portions of the ‘‘ Marshall group” which outcrop in the southern counties. The outcrop of the last named sandstones in the vicinity of Pt aux Barques, east of Saginaw bay, is treated by Dr. Hough- ton in connection with the Lake Superior Sandstone under the head of “‘TLower Sandstone or Graywacke group”’ (p. 9). In the report of the following year, the Marshall sandstones are again stated by Dr. Houghton to belong to ‘‘the great carboniferous group of rocks.’’9 The first attempt at a systematic account of these strata was made in 1840 by Bela Hubbard, assistant on the geological survey. Mr. Hubbard correctly apprehended their position as beneath the coal producing strata, and alluded to the richness of the lower beds in organic remains. The deeper and more argillaceous strata were never, tn southern Michigan, asso- ciated as in Ohio, with the newer and more arenaceous beds. The entire series of argillaceous strata, including the black shale of the state, which is very inconspicuous in the southern counties, were described by Hubbard as the ‘‘ Kidney Iron Formation.’”’ This was regarded as the bottom of the Carboniferous system. The northern outcrop of these groups were reported upon in 1841.1! In his attempt to assign them to their proper stratigraphical position, Mr. Hubbard fell into singular errors, and intro- duced into the most elaborate account of the lower peninsula which was destined to be published for twenty years, a confusion of facts which ren- dered the geology of Michigan an enigma to every one who attempted to ® Second Ann. Rep. Geol., Ohio, p. 103. 7 First Ann. Rep. Geol. Mich., p. 3. 8 First Bienn. Rep. Mich., 1861. ® Mich. Geol. Rep., 1839, p. 28. 10 Mich. Geol. Rep., 1840, p. 87. M Mich. Geol. Rep., 1841, p. 114. Winchell.] 60 [March 5, parallelize the rocks with those of surrounding States.!2. The following is Mr. Hubbard’s tabular statement of the succession of groups embraced in the lower peninsula, A. Erratic Block group or Diluviums, B. Tertiary Clays, C. Coal measures, D. Sub-carboniferous Sandstones, E. Clay and Kidney Iron formation, F. Sandstones of Pt aux Barques, ~ G. Argillaceous slates and flags of Lake Huron, Hi. Soft, light-colored Sandstones, I. Black, aluminous slate, K. Lime rocks of Lake Erie. 3 In this table, as we now know, the groups marked D, F, and H, are but different outcrops of the Marshall group ; and those marked H, G, and I, but different outcrops of the Kidney Iron or Huron group. Following Dr. Houghton in the report of 1838, Mr. Hubbard regarded the Pt aux Barques sandstones and conglomerates as occupying a position beneath the Kidney Iron formation of the southern portion of the state, and conse- quently failed to identify the underlying shales. In the next place, Mr. Hubbard identified with the Pt aux Bdrques shales, the shales of the ‘Michigan Salt group,”’ struck in the salt wells at Grand Rapids, although these latter actually occupy a position above the Marshall sandstones. When, therefore, these sandstones and the underlying Huron shales were struck in the boring of the salt wells, they were supposed to constitute the third couplet of similar strata, and are set down as groups H and I, in the above table.!4 This confusion is illustrated by the following dia- gram : Michigan Salt Group, 1 is ts ae B Marshall Group,..... Baars y Huron Group,....... Hl The Pt aux Barques sandstone were rightly recognized by Hubbard as the equivalent of the characteristic portion of the Waverly sandstone se- ries in Ohio; and it is singular that they were not observed to be equally identifiable with the sandstones of Hillsdale county in the southern part of the state. The upper conglomeratic portion of the Pt aux Barques sandstones was erroneously synchronized with the Carboniferous con- glomerate, which though reposing on the Waverly of Ohio, is separated from the equivalent Marshall in Michigan, by the Carboniferous limestone and the Michigan Salt group. The Black Shale was also recognized as 12 In his attempt, in 1843, to parallelize the strata of Michigan with those of other states, Prof. Hall assigned the Pt aux Barques series to the zone of the Waverly Series and the Portage and Chemung; but he seems not to have known how to dispose of the rocks denominated by Hough_ - ton and Hubbard the ‘‘Upper Sandstone of the Peninsula.” Rep. Geol., 4th Dist. N. J., p. 519. 13 See also Report, p. 136. M4 Report, p. 133. 1869.] 61 (Winchell. agreeing ‘in general character and position”? with ‘the Black Shale stratum of Ohio and Indiana.”’ § In 1841, when Professor Hall was closing up his labors upon the geology of Western New York, he undertook an extended tour through the west- ern states for the purpose of ascertaining to what extent the formations recognized in New York could be traced in other regions. The general results of this tour were announced in 1842.16 At this time, he was led to regard the Waverly series (embracing everything between the Black Shale and the Conglomerate), as a prolongation of the Chemung and Por- tage groups of New York. The thick bedded sandstones at Newburg and Waverly were identified with the Portage sandstones, while the shaly sandstones and flags near Cleveland were regarded as representing the Gardeau shales and flagstones. From Newburg to Cuyahoga Falls, and also at Akron, he identified the shales and sandstones of the Chemung group. Passing down the Ohio into Indiana, Prof. Hall again identified strata corresponding to the Portage, and doubtfully to the Chemung ; while above these, and beneath the carboniferous limestone, was a series of are- naceous strata becoming interstratified above with beds of mountain lime- stone, and, on the whole, exhibiting affinities with the Carboniferous system. Nevertheless he inclined to regard them as ‘‘ sub-carboniferous”’ (used in the sense of swbter-carboniferous,) remarking that ‘a limit should be fixed between what is to be strictly referred to the Carboniferous period, and older deposits.’’ 17 The Black Shale of Ohio and Indiana was regarded by Professor Hall as the equivalent of the Marcellus Shale of New York ‘“being the only representation of that rock, the Hamilton group and the Genesee slate’’ (Ib. 280). . During the same year, Mr. Conrad !8 read a paper before the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, in which he embraced brief descrip- tions of three fossils from the Marshall sandstone of Moscow, Michigan, which he referred to the Carboniferous system. Mr. Vanuxem’s Report on the Geology of the Third District of New York, also appeared this year. In 1847 the distinguished European geologist, de Verneuil, gave the world the results of an extended and critical investigation of the parallel- 15 Tt is interesting to note this early identification of the now styled Marshall sandstones with the characteristic portion of the Waverly sandstone serics; and the Black Shale of Michigan with the Black Shale of Ohio and Indiana; as these opinions were expressed by Hubbard anterior to the first elaborate attempts by Hall and de Verneuil to trace the parallelism of formation in the different states. Dr. Houghton had, indeed, previously recognized the correspondence of the “Black Shale ” with certain formations in western New York, as described in the annual reports of that State; though there is room to doubt whether he made the identification preferably with the Mar- cellus or the Genesee Shale. Under the great natural difficuities attending the exploration of the “‘wilderness of Michigan,” then just emerging from a territorial condition, and the equally great embarrassments resulting from the undisturbed condition of the strata, it is indeed remarkable that the early geologists of the state succeeded in establishing So many conclusions which have stood the test of nearly a third of a century. ; 1s Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlii p. 51; Jour. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. v. p. 1, and more fully in Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol., p. 267. See also Geol. Rep., Fourth Dist. N. Y., p. 229. Mv Trans. Assoc. Am. Geol., p. 281, 18 Jour. Acad. N. S., Phil., vol. viii, p. 249 and 269. A») Winchell. ] 6 fe [March 5, ism existing between American and European paleozoic formations.!9 This paper was translated and somewhat condensed by Professor Hall for pub- lication in America.” Professor Hall’s translation is accompanied by criticismsand additions. 2! One of the results of de Verneuil’s studies was to lower the base of the Devonian system from the bottom of the Portage group where it had been placed by Conrad, to the bottom of the Oriskany sandstone, and to fix the summit above the Catskill group. He recognized the prolongation of the Portage and Chemung groups into Ohio, but did not detect them in Indiana, Kentucky, and Tennessee; though Prof. Hall in his notes upon the paper, was inclined to recognize them in Indiana above his and Owen’s ‘‘sub-carboniferous.’’ The upper, or fossiliferous portion of the Waverly series was regarded by de Verneuil as falling within the limits of the car- boniferous system. The Black Slate of the West was identified with the Genesee Shale of New York. These conclusions are fortified by extended paleontological comparisons. Professor Hall in his commentary upon this elaborate paper, seems to oscillate between two opinions. He insists at one time upon the Silurian relationships of the Hamilton, Portage and Chemung, and the broad lithological and paleontological gap intervening between the Chemung and the Catskill, 22 intimating that there is the place to draw the systemic lines ; while at another time he asserts that the Chemung is more inti- mately ‘‘related to the Carboniferous sandstones of the West than the Hamilton group of New York ’’ #—that ‘there is no well defined line of separation between the Chemung rocks of New York, and the sandstones of Ohio and Indiana, which contain carboniferous fossils’’—and that ‘‘the error of American geologists who have attempted to compare our formations with those of Europe, has been, in this instance, that of regard- ing the great Carboniferous limestone as forming the basis of that system, including all the strata below it in Devonian and Silurian.’’?4 In 1848 Mr. Murray, of the geological survey of Canada, made an ex- amination of black bituminous shales on the south-east shore of Lake Huron at Kettle Pt., and described them? under the head of ‘* Hamilton group,’ remarking that they contained Lingula, but ‘‘neither of the two species represented by Mr. Hall as belonging to the Genesee slate.”” Mr. Murray adds that ‘‘no trace of the sandstones [of the Portage and Che- mung groups] . . . has yet been met with in western Canada.” 19 “Sur le parallélisme des dépots paléozoiques de ’Amerique Septentrionale avec ceux del’ Europe; suivie @’ un tableau des éspéces fossiles communes aux deux continents, avec l’ indication des étages ot elles se rencontrent, et terminée par un examen critique de chaque de ces éspéces.” Bulletin de la Soc. Geol. de France, 2me Ser. Tome, iv, p. 646. 20 Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, [2] vol. v. pp. 176 and 359 and vol. vii. pp. 45 and 218. 21 See further critical remarks by Sharpe, ‘‘On the Paleozoic Rocks of N. A.,” in Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lond., Aug. 1848, and a paper by Mr. Elle de Beaumont, entitled ‘‘ Note sur les systémes de Montagnes les plus anciens de ’ Europe.” 22 Amer. Jour. Sci., [2] v. 367, Note; vii, 46, Note 3 and p. 231. He had previously pointed out the break below the Catskill. Pal. N. Y., vol. 1, introd. p. xvi. 22 Amer, Jour. Sci., [2] vii, p. 46, Note (a,) 24 Amer. Jour. Sci, [2] vii, 45, Note. 25 Report of Progress, 1848-9, p. 24. 9 1869.] 63 [Wincheil, In 1850 Professor Hall resumed the discussion of the parallelism of eastern and western formations, and the parallelism of the whole with the standard systems of Europe.?° In this celebrated discussion, Professor Hall states that ‘‘ the shalesand sandstones of the Catskill mountains, . . . have no representatives at the West. Succeeding the Black Shale, however, there is a group of shales and sandstones which, from the fossils they contain, are regarded as belonging to the Carboniferous period.”®” And again, ‘“‘the green shales and sandstones of Ohio and Indiana, which succeed this Black Shale, have been recognized as carboniferous by their fossils, though there is still some doubt whether the lower part may not represent the Chemung group of New York.’’ He still insists on the carboniferous aspect of the rocks from the Marcellus to the Catskill, and cites, after de Verneuil, the Goniatites rotatorius and Goniatites princeps as proving the carboniferous age of the ‘‘ Rockford bed”’ WHELs he regards as embraced in the Marcellus shale.” About the same date, Mr. Murray®° reported new observations on the Black Shales of Canada West, in the region more recently famous for its production of petroleum. These he still regarded as embraced in the Hamilton Group, and probably continuous with those previously exam- ined at Kettle Point. He remarks that the ‘‘ bituminous springs [of Enniskillen] probably owe their origin ’’ to this formation. Tn 1851, Mr. Christy?! read a paper before the American Association at its Cincinnati meeting, in which he announced that the Rockford Gonia- tite limestone is centrally located in the Black Slate of Indiana, and ac- cording to YVerneuil embraces the carboniferous fossils Gontatites rotator- zus and G. princeps, and Cyclolobus. Mr. Christy specifies several locali- ties at which the limestone and the slate may be seen in juxtaposition, and accounts for Dr. D. D. Owen’s error in pronouncing the limestone a portion of the Cliff limestone. Mr. Christy states that the Goniatite limestone has about 28 feet of black shale below it, and about 30 feet of black shale above it. The latter is succeeded by ‘‘about 350 to 400 feet of soft shale with an occasional stratum of limestone and some beds of sand- stone, including fossils.’’®? At the same meeting Col. Whittlesey3? read a paper ‘‘On the equiva- lency of the rocks of north-eastern Ohio, and the Portage, Chemung, and Hamilton rocks of New York.’’ Col. Whittlesey’s extended and accurate observations in the state, enabled him to furnish valuable sections of the Ohio strata, to which I shall have occasion again to refer. Following Professor Hall in his paper published in 1842, he places the Ohio rocks, from the Cliff limestone to the Conglomerate, in the zone of the New York Upper Devonian. In 1852 Dr. D. D. Owen*! published a geological map of the North- west, ? 26 Foster and Whitney’s Rep. Min. Land District, L. Sup., vol. 11., chap. xviii, p. 285. 27 Ib. p. 292. 2 Tb: p. 307 23 Tb. p. 309. 80 Rep. Progress Geol. Sur. Can., 1850-51, p. 29, 31 Proc. Amer, Assoc., vol. v., p. 76. 32 Tb. p. 80. 33 Ib. p. 207. ‘1 Geol. Rep. Wis. Iowa, and Minn. Winchell J 64 [March 5, | in which he colored as Carboniferous, all those regions in Missouri and Towa underlaid by rocks intervening between the Carboniferous limestone and the Black Slate. Dr. Owen embraced in the Mountain limestone series, the yellow sandstone at the base of the exposure at Burlington, Iowa, and from the associated odlitie bed he describes and recognizes Producta Cora, Spirifera striata and Cryroceras Burlingtonense (Ib. p. 95). : Professor Swallow in his Missouri Report, published in 1855, recog- nizes the Chemung group, and establishes three divisions called respec- tively, in descending order, the ‘‘ Chouteau limestone,”’ the ‘‘ Vermicular sandstone and shales,’’ and the ‘‘ Lithographic limestone.’’ Professor Swallow in referring to differences of opinion about the age of these rocks, says: ‘‘Many of our fossils are either identical with, or very similar to those of the Chemung group of New York. Among these are a species of those remarkable forms of the New York reports called Hucoides cauda- gall? and Filicites gracilis; also Avicula subduplicata and Nucula bellatula. Mr. F. B. Meek** in his appendix, enumerates 55 species of fossils from these rocks, of which 19 are described by Dr. B. F. Shumard as new species ; 13 are identified with European carboniferous species, while one only, Avicula duplicata (Hall, ) is identified with species from the Chemung of New York, and two—Spirifera mucronata? and Nucula bellatula, ‘are identified with Hamilton species. Such determinations would seem to afford but slender support to Professor Swallow’s decision, to range these rocks on the horizon of the Chemung. During the same year Mr. Marcou*’ reproduced in Europe the geologi- eal chart of the United States, which he had first published in America® in 1858. In this chart’he colors as underlaid by the Mountain Limestone, the entire area in Michigan which we now know to be occupied by the Marshall and Huron groups. The area of the Waverly series is colored as Devonian. This chart was again reproduced in 1858 %9 with alterations, at which time, Mr. Marcou seems to have regarded the area of the Mar- shall group in Michigan as also of Devonian age. Norwood and Pratten 4° in 1855, in describing Chonetes Fischeri from the yellow sandstones at Burlington, Iowa, refer them to the ‘‘base of the Mountain Limestone.”’ The ‘‘ Knobstone’”’ formation of Kentucky was ranged by D. D. Owen?! in 1856, as ‘* sub-carboniferous’’; while the ‘‘ Black Singula Shale,”’ as he styles it, was regarded as Devonian. Professor Safford 4? in the same year advanced the opinion that the Black Shale of Tennessee ought to be regarded as Carboniferous. In Mr. Murray’s48 Canadian report for the year 1855, he decides to transfer the Black Shale of Canada West to the ‘‘ Portage and Chemung 3% Rep. Geol. Surv. Mo. 1., p. 101. 36 Tb. IT, p. 218. \ 37 “Geol. Karte d. Verein’ Staaten,” in Peterm. Mittheilungen, p, 149. 33 Geol. Map of U.S., with explanatory text. 29 Geology of North America, with Maps and Plates, Zurich. 40 Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., [2] vol. iii, p. 25. 41 Geol. Rep. Ky., vol. 1. p. 89. 42 Geol. Reconnoissance Tenn., p, 158. 42 Rep. Geol. Sury. Can., 1863 6, p. 129. f 1869.] 65 [ Winchell. group ;”’ assigning as his motive the fact that ‘‘ Professor Hall, on seeing the section at Kettle Pt., expressed it as his opinion that the rocks were the lowest measures of the Portage and Chemung group,’’ and the fact that ‘‘a nearly complete section of the Hamilton group’ had been dis- covered on ‘‘ some of the tributaries of the River Sable (south).”’ The ferruginous shales of the Marshall group of Michigan were again pronounced Carboniferous in 1858, by Dr. R. P. Stevens,44 who described from Battle Creek three species of Leda and one species each of Vucula and Chonetes. These are spoken of as occurring in ‘‘association with an Ortho- ceras, Nautilus, and Bellerophon Uret, which is evidently carboniferous.”’ In tlre same year, Professor Hall 4> published his Report on the geology of Eastern Iowa, in which he embraced the first separate account which I have observed of the yellow sandstones which outcrop on the banks of the Mississippi at Burlington and other localities. He speaks contidently of their equivalency to the Chemung rocks of New York, and points out a bed of green shale at the base, which he thinks might represent the Por- tage group. He does not fail to recognize, however, the imperceptible graduation of these sandstones into the overlying Burlington limestone, and expresses the opinion that the Chemung group of Missouri, as organ- ized by Professor Swallow, ‘‘ will probably be found to include a portion of the Hamilton group.’’4® Professor Hall describes eleven species of fossils from these strata, but makes no identifications with fossils from the typi- cal Chemung of New York. Mr. C. A. White’s ‘‘sections’’ of the rocks at Burlington, in the appendix to this report, possess very great interest, as embodying the results of exact observations. In September, 1860, Messrs. Meek and Worthen‘*’ published descriptions of five new species of fossils from the Rockford limestone. In the same month, Mr. C. A. White*® published ‘‘ Observations on the Geology and Paleontology of Burlington, lowa, and its vicinity ;’’ embracing descrip- tions of seven new species from the yellow sandstones, and elaborate discussions establishing the intimate relations existing between the yellow sandstones and the overlying Burlington limestone. During 1859-60-1, a geological survey of the lower peninsula of Michi- gan was in progress under my direction. The first public announcement of the determinations made upon this survey was in the form of a lecture delivered at the University by myself to an audience consisting mainly of a delegation from the Chicago Academy of Sciences, who were then on an excursion to the University of Michigan. This lecture was reported in full and published in the Chicago Tribune in December, 1860. A summary of the results of the survey was also published in the Detroit Tribune, December 11th, 1860, and briefly in the Detroit Advertiser of January 26, 1861. Advance sheets of my official report were sent off August 18th, 1861, and noticed in the American Journal of Science and Arts in Septem- ber, 1861. 44 Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxv-., 262. 45 Geology of Iowa, 1, p. 88. 48 Tb. p. 91. 47 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., September, 1860, p. 447. 43 Jour. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. vil, p. 209. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—I Winchell.] 66 [March 5, Tn the several documents to which I have just referred, I stated distinetly that I regarded the Marshall sandstones of Michigan as the equivalents of the Fine grained sandstone series of Ohio, and the Black Shale of Michigan as equivalent to the Black Shale of Ohio and Indiana. I also stated as a matter of stratigraphical demonstration, that these black shales are seen in Thunder bay of Lake Huron and in Grand Traverse bay of Lake Michigan to rest above the well characterized Hamilton limestones. I had at first considered these black shales as the equivalent of the Genesee Shale of New York,4? but in deference to the judgment of Professor Hall, person- ally expressed, I united them with my overlying Hudson group, which was organized to receive a series of bluish and greenish argillaceous strata beneath the Marshall sandstones, and supposed by me-to correspond to the Portage group of New York.5® I was not aware at that time, that Mr. Murray had had an almost identical experience,®! as I have already stated. Tn 1860, Professor Swallow®2 published descriptions of 19 species of fos- sils from the Chouteau and Lithographic limestones of Missouri ; and in the same year, Mr. Lyon®? published a section of the rocks of Kentucky, in which he ranges the ‘‘ Knobstone formation ’’ under ‘‘sub-carbonifer- ous,’’ and inclines to place the Black Slate in the same position. Early in 1861, Professor Hall®! published ‘‘ Notes and Observations upon the Fossils of the Goniatite Limestone in the Marcellus Shale of the Hamilton group in the eastern and central parts of the State of New York, and those of the Goniatite beds of Rockford, Indiana, with some anala- gous forms from the Hamilton group proper.”” In this paper Professor Hall returns with strong assurance to his original opinion enunciated in 1842, that the Black Shale of the West is the equivalent of the Marcellus of New York, and that the ferruginous sandstones of Ohio and Indiana, are the equivalents of the Portage and Chemung. He describes as new 18 species from the Rockford beds including those recognized as Gonitatites rotatorius,»> and Goniatites princeps by Verneuil, and two species previously , described by Meek and Worthen. He, however, fails to identify a single species from the Rockford limestone with any species occurring in the Marcellus Shale or other Devonian rocks of New York. The same number of Silliman’s Journal which contained the announce- ment of my official report, contained also a paper by Messrs. Meek and W or- then®® on the “‘ Age of the Goniatite Limestone at Rockford, Indiana, and its relations to the Black Slate.of the Western States, and to some of the succeeding rocks above the latter.’’ These authors deny that any portion of the Black Slate is found above the Goniatite limestone, as had been asserted by Christy, and announced that it lies entirely below. The limestone they identify with the Chouteau limestone of Missouri, founding the opinion on an identification of at least six out of 23 or 24 Rockford species, and a close resemblance amongst most of the others. They argue 49 Mich. Geol. Rep., 1861, p. 78. 50 Tb. pp. 79 and 139. 51 Jn alluding to this fact in my report, I inadvertently attributed this experience to Mr- Billings; Report, p. 79- 52 Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci., 1, 635. 53 Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci.. 1, 620- 54 xiii. Report New York Regents App., p. 95. 99 This is described as G. Ixion, in a note, p.125. °* Amer. Jour. Sci.. [2] xxxiii., 167. 67 1869.] ( (Winchell. with a degree of paleontological acuteness which cannot be gainsayed, that both the Rockford beds, and the three members of the Chemung group of Missouri as interpreted by Professor Swallow, present characteristics which forbid their introduction into the Devonian system. They affirm the judgment of de Verneuil, that the Black Slate of the West is the equivalent of the Genesee Shale of New York. In an appended note they propose to adopt the name Kinderhook group for the rocks in Ilinois lying between the Black Shale and the Mountain Limestone. Some time in 1862, Professor Hall>” published a ‘‘ supplementary note’’ to his paper on the Rockford limestone, in which he states that having identified the Rockford Gondatites Hyas among fossils from the Waverly sandstone of Licking county, Ohio,®® he is led to ‘‘conelude that the position assigned to the Goniatite beds of Rockford may be erroneous, and that the true position is higher in the series, or more nearly in a parallel with the Chemung group.”’ During the year 1862 large additions were made to our exact knowledge of the species of fossils embraced in the series of rocks immediately under- lying the Mountain Limestone. In February, Messrs. White and Whitfield®? published a paper entitled ‘Observations upon the rocks of the Missis- sippi valley, which have been referred to the Chemung group of New York, together with descriptions of new species of fossils from the same horizon at Burlington, lowa.”’ This paper embraces descriptions of 31 new species, The authors in their introductory remarks, synchronize the yellow sand- stones of Burlington, with the Chemung of New York, though admitting the strong paleontological contrast, and their striking affinity with the Burlington limestone and higher carboniferous rocks. This opinion is founded upon the identification of several lowa and Missouri fossils with species from the Waverly series of Ohio, which is assumed to be in physi- cal continuity with the Chemung of Western New York, as originally alleged by Professor Hall. , In April, Mr. White published further descriptions of new species from the same horizon at Burlington, lowa; Hamburg, Dlinois; and Hannibal and Clarkesville, Mo.;and in the same month Professor Swallow®! published descriptions of two new species from the Chouteau limestone of Missouri. In May I published® a paper ‘‘On the rocks lying between the Carbon- iferous Limestone of the Lower Peninsula of Michigan, and the limestones of the Hamilton Group, with descriptions of some Cephalopods, supposed to be new to science.”? Of the species enumerated, 24 were from the Marshall group, and one from the Huron. In this paper the Black Shale - 57 Fifteenth Report New York Regents, App., p. 81. 53 Having myself examined the fossils, 1 do not consider it identified wlth G. Ixion, Meek and Worthen (=G. Hyas, Hall,) but with G. Marshallensis, Winchell, which differs from G., Lyoni by constant technical characters, having an additional accessory lobe and saddle, and having the dorsal lobe broader and relatively longer. A transverse section of G. Lyoni, is broadest near the umbilicus, while a section of G- Marshallensis is regularly oval. Professor Iall’s inference, however, remains unchallenged. 59 Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. vol. viii, p- 239° 60 Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist-, vol. ix, p- 8. 61 Trans. St- Louis Acad. Sci-, vol. 2, p-sl- 82 Amer Jour Sci, [2,] xxxiil., 352. Winchell.] 68 [March 5, of Michigan and Canada West, were again identified and ranged within the limits of the Huron group, next above the Hamilton. In September® I continued the enumeration of Michigan species from the Marshall and Huron groups, giving 63 from the former, and 17 from the latter. Of the Marshall species, 5 were identified with fossils previously described from Rockford. Of the Huron species, 6 were identified more or less doubtfully with species from the Hamilton group of New York. In November, Col. Jewett! and Professor Hall® both made publication of the results of late observations upon the rocks in Eastern New York, which had been embraced within the limits of the Catskill group upon the geological map of the state. Col. Jewett declared the opinion as the result of his examinations, that the Catskill group did not exist within the limits of the state ; while Professor Hall admitted that the upper limit of the Chemung rocks must be carried in the Catskill mountains, ‘‘ to an elevation of at least 2,000 feet above tide-water.’’ He stated that it now becomes necessary to restrict the term Catskill group to the beds above [the Che- mung of Delaware county, hitherto regarded as Catskill, ] or to those for- merly known as X and XI of the Pennsylvania Survey.’’ He closes by remarking that ‘‘in tracing the Chemung group westward, there are many indications that it may require to be restricted in its designation,’ and that ‘‘the Waverly sandstone group of the Ohio reports, at one time regarded by [himself] as entirely equivalent to the Portage and Chemung groups, may, in its upper members, constitute a distinct enOuD) though we do not yet know any line of demarkation between them.’ In 1862, Professor R. Owen in his Report on the geology of aia, ranges the shales and sandstones underneath the Mountain Limestone in a group designated after D. D. Owen, ‘‘sub-carboniferous,’’? regarding them as at the base of the Carboniferous system, and the equivalent of at least some portion of the Waverly series of Ohio. The Black Slate he identifies with the Genesee Shale. In January, 1863,°7 after having read Col. Jewett’s announcement of the unreal character of the Catskill group, and Professor Hall’s admission that this group must, at least, be very materially reduced in thickness, I gave utterance to convictions which had for some time been maturing, that not only were the Waverly rocks of the West of Carboniferous age, but that also the Chemung of New York, which Hall, White, Whitfield,” Swallow, and others had persisted in identifying with these, must also be regarded as Carboniferous. I furnished a synopsis of the paleontological evidences that the Chemung, Waverly, Marshall, Rockford and Burling- 63 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil-, September, 1862, p. 405. In the Sixteenth Report of the New York Regents Professor Hall has given figures of the internal structure of Centronella Julia, described in this paper, from drawings furnished by myself. He however, refers the species to Cryptonella— an error which he has since recognized. (Notice of vol. iv. of the Paleontology of New York, p. 21-) 64 Fifteenth Report Regents New York, p- 198, and Amer. Jour. Sci., [2,] xxxiv, 418. 65 Canadian Naturalist and Geol., vol. vii, p- 377- 66 Indiana Geol. Rep-, 1862, pp- 92, 108, &c. 67 Amer. Jour. Sci., [2] xxxv, 61. In this paper, an editorial alteration makes me say “Old Red Sandstone of New York,” when I wrote “ Old Red Sandstone of Scotland.” 1869. ] 69 (Winchell. ton beds were synchronous, and that all should be ranged within the Car- boniferous system. ®® In January, 1863,°9 I published a series of ‘‘ descriptions of fossils from the yellow sandstones lying beneath the Burlington limestone, at Burling- ton, Iowa.’? The number of new species described in this paper was 59, and the number of old species there first identified from the yellow sand- stones was 10—raising the total number of species thus far known from those strata from 66 to 185. The Carboniferous facies of this assemblage of organic remains was again insisted upon.” Sir William Logan”! in the Geology of Canada, published in 1863 or 1864, refers the Black Shale of Canada West to the Genesee, but states that Professor Hall embraces the Genesee in the Portage. This is what I had done in 1860. In November, 1863, a pamphlet appeared from Professor Hall’? contain- ing descriptious of 17 species of crinoidea obtained from the Waverly sandstone series at Richfield, Ohio. While admitting that this assem- blage of crinoids presents affinities with Carboniferous types, he asserts that the aftinities are quite as strong with types from the recognized Chemung and even the Hamilton of New York. Horbesiocrinus lobatus is actually identified with a Hamilton species, while 7. communis, though intimately related to forms from the Keokuk limestone, has also been found in the Chemung. He regards Scaphiocrinus Afgina as closely re- lated also to Poteriocrinus diffusus of the Hamilton group. He concludes: ‘‘Left to the evidence afforded alone by the collection, and the means of comparison at present possessed, I should infer that the geological posi- tion of these species is between the Hamilton group and the lower Car- boniferous beds; while the occurrence of a single species identical with a species in the middle of the Chemung group will ally them more nearly with the fauna of the Hamilton group than with that of the Carbonifer- ous period.’’ The age of the Ohio sandstones was again touched upon by Professor Hall in 1864, who thought that the study of the fossil plants of the Chemung tended to confirm opinions previously entertained as to the Carboniferous affinities of these rocks and those in Ohio, which he had 68 The identifications with Chemung fossils had been reported by others; as at that time I had not personally examined Chemung specimens. I had identified one Avicula from Professor Hall’s figure and description. 69 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Jan., 1863. p. 2. 70 The genus Syringothyris established in this paper, though not accepted by Professor Hall, (Proc. Amer. Phil: Soc. May, 1866, p. 250) has been shown to be valid by the examinations of some of the highest authority in America and England. (See Meek: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Dec., 1865, and Carpenter: Annals and Mag. Nat. Hist., July, 1867, p. 68, where the genus is partially illustrated- Davidson; Geolog, Mag., July, 1867, who gives a fully illustrated description of the genus—partly from drawings furnished hy myself.) Dr. Carpenter now refers to this genus a part of Spirifer cus- pidatus from Millicent Ireland (as first suggested by Mr. Meek;) S. Hannibalensis Swallow, S. Capax, Hall, Syntrielasma hemiplicatus, Meek and Worthen—also probably a portion of Spirier distans of Belgium. 7. Geology of Canada, 1863, p. 387 7 Pamphlet; reprinted in xvii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 1865, p. 50. 73 xvi. Rep. N. York Regents, pp. 92and107. Note. 70 Winchell.] / [March 5, regarded as contemporaneous. Ina note he remarks that the Catskill rocks of Eastern New York must probably be restricted to ‘‘the coarse conglomerate of the upper part of the Catskills,’? which corresponds to the outliers occurring on the summits of the higher hills in Western New York, and to a continuous formation beyond the limits of the State in Pennsylvania. . In July, 1865, I presented’ a continuation of the results of my re- searches in the paleontology of the rocks under consideration, embracing descriptions and notices of fossils from the States of Michigan, Ohio, In- diana, Illinois, Iowa and Missouri, in all which I had made personal ex- plorations. The number of species noticed in this paper is 94, of which 36 were therein first described. This paper presents a shadowing forth of conclusions which I feel constrained to think, demand the candid con- sideration of paleontologists. To this time I had been impressed with the expectation that the Chemung rocks of New York would eventually be synchronized with the Waverly series of Ohio upon paleontological grounds. It had generally been supposed that the Chemung strata em- braced from three to six species which could be identified with western species from the horizon of the Waverly sandstone ; and that on the com- pletion of the study of these rocks by the paleontologist of New York, further identifications would be effected. At the suggestion of Professor Hall, I spent several days with him in February and March 1865, in making direct comparisons between the types of the Chemung group of New York and a collection of fossils supposed to belong to the same horizon, from the Western States. The western fossils brought under comparison numbered about 175 species. To the great surprise of both of us, we were unable to identify a single species with Chemung types. All the reputed identifications had to be abandoned. This is a conclusion in which Professor Hall united with myself. Not satisfied to be completely frustrated in my attempt to determine the New York equivalent of our western sandstones, I turned my atten- tion to an examination of the facts in connexion with strata occupying a position in Western New York above the typical Chemung strata. Pro- fessor Hall’> had described a conglomerate in Western New York as ter- minating the Chemung series, and had remarked that it contained Che- mung fossils; though it does not appear that any critical and final exam- ination had been made upon this point. The Catskill group had been restricted at the east to certain conglomerates capping the Catskill moun- tains, and at the west to detached outliers of sandstone becoming also at times conglomeritic.7® In addition to these he had described a conglom- erate which he identified with the Carboniferous of Pennsylvania and Ohio”. It does not appear that any two of these conglomerates had been 74 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.. July, 1865, p. 109. The materials for this investigation, besides my own collections in different States, embraced Col. Whittlesey’s Ohio collection and numerous resi- dual investiganda of the White collection of the University, from Jowa, Missouri and Illinois, 7 Geol. Rep. 10th Dist. N. Y., p.252 and elsewhere, 76 Canadian Naturalist, vii. p. 380. 77 Rep. Geol. 10 Dist. N. Y., p, 284. } : Ra 1869.] il. [Wincheil. seen in juxtapasition,78 and Iam not aware of the evidence upon which they had been pronounced stratigraphically consecutive. Through the kindness of Professor Hall I was permitted to examine the original specimens of fossils from the so-called Chemung and Car- boniferous conglomerates. The fossils of the latter had been collected from a single locality, about four miles north of Panama in Chatauque ‘county, and did not number in all more than half a dozen species, of which three had been described in the New York Report.7? Of these, four were found, to the surprise of both of us, to be identical with species from the horizon of the Waverly series of the West. Nor was this all. On comparing specimens of the so-called Chemung conglomerate with these, [remarked not only a great lithological similarity but a striking general resemblance of the fossils, and ‘an actual identity of two species with species which had been identified in the Carboniferous conglomerate. My conclusions, so far as any could be reached, were announced in the following words : ‘Tn the light of these identifications, and in the absence of all identifi- cations between the western species and those of the Chemung, as wellas between the species of this (so-called Chemung) conglomerate and those of the Chemung, it might not seem unreasonable to doubt its affinities with recognized Chemung rocks, and to suspect its continuity with the supposed ‘Carboniferous conglomerate,’ until observation shall have demonstrated that its stratigraphical position is really below that forma- mation. And further, since we must probably abandon the attempt to coérdinate the Chemung of New York with the fossiliferous portions of the sandstones and shales of the West lying between the ‘Black Slate’ and the Coal Conglomerate, it seems not unlikely that we may yet be able to prove the conglomerate of Western New York to be the attenuated and littoral prolongation of those western sandstones and shales—at least of the superior and fossiliferous portions of them ; so that the latter would stand as a hitherto unrecognized group of strata lying at the very base of the Carboniferous system ; while the Chemung rocks of New York fall within the Devonian system, toward which the writer is now inclined to think that their paleontological affinities attract them.” “Tt yet remains to determine by observations in the field, whether the so-called ‘Carboniferous conglomerate’ of Western New York is really the equivalent of the Coal conglomerate of Ohio ; and whether any actual junction of superposition can be discovered in Western Pennsylvania or Eastern Ohio between the Chemung rocks in their westward prolongation and the fine grained sandstones and gritstones of the Western States.”’ In December, 1865, Messrs. Meek and Worthen®® described three additional species from Ohio and Illinois ; and Mr. Meek®! took up a dis- cussion which involved the characters and validity of the Genus Syringo- thyris from the yellow sandstones of Iowa: In 1866 I published®? the results of a geological and economical survey 73 Hall—Rep. Geol. 10 Dist. N. Y., p. 292. 79 Geol. 10 Dist. N. Y.. p. 291. 80 Proc. Acad. Nat-Sci. Phil., Dec., 1865, p. 245. 8! Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., Dec., 1865, p 275- % The Grand Traverse Region, p. 51. Winchell.] ’ 72 [March 5, of the Grand Traverse Region in the lower peninsula of Michigan, among which I alluded to the ratification of my previous opinions that the Black Shale of the West is the equivalent of the Genesee Shale. J announced here, for the first time that this shale had afforded me two characteristic New York fossils from near the mouth of Bear Creek in Canada West— Leiorhynchus multicosta and Discina Lodensis.®8 In this report I repeated my correction that the ‘‘green shales’? above the Genesee Shale in Michigan correspond to some portion—perhaps the Cashaqua Shale—of the Portage group of New York, while the higher bluish, argillaceous shales might answer to the Chemung. In June of the same year, having occasion to make a survey and report, *4 in conjunction: with Dr. Newberry, upon portions of Knox and Coshocton counties in Ohio, I cited several Waverly sandstone species as extending upward into the Coal Measures, and suggested that the Ohio equivalent of the Portage and the Chemung might be the series of the ‘‘ Chocolate Shales and Flags,’’ whose existence beneath the fossiliferous sandstones of Ohio had been demonstrated by borings. The deepest of these borings indicated the existence of 1060 feet of shales and sandstones between the base of the False Coal Measures and the top of the Genesee Shale. Of this distance 534 feet were occupied by the so-called ‘‘chocolate shales and flags.”’ In July of the same year Messrs. Meek and Worthen® described two additional species, of which one was from Richfield, Summit county, Ohio, and the other from Rockford, Indiana. During the same year (1866) appeared the first volume of the final Re- port on the geology of Illinois, in which Mr. Worthen,*®® speaking of the Kinderhook group, locatesit at the base of the Carboniferous system, insists upon the carboniferous affinities of its fauna, and expresses the opinion that no rocks exist in Illinois or Indiana which can be referred to the Chemung group of New York. Before the close of the year the second volume of this Report appeared, in which the paleontology of the Kinderhook group is described by Messrs. Meek, Worthen, and Newberry,®” the facts of which seemed fully to sus- tain the previous opinions of those geologists in reference to the age of the group. : During the same year (1866) Professor Hall§* also made advance publica- tion of some views which were to be embodied in lais fourth volume of the’ Paleontology of New York. In this paper he insisted with great earnest- ness upon the probable Chemung age of the Waverly series and its west- ern equivalents, explaining the contrast of the eastern and western faunas on geographical and hydrographical considerations. 83 Mr. J. P. Lesley has somewhere attributed the discovery of these fossils to Professor Hall. It is true that I had exhibited them to Professor Hall and obtained his acquiescence in my identifica- tion, but he did not intimate that he previously observed them west of New York, Indeed, in his latest known opinion these Canadian shales had been referred to the Portage group. (Geology of Canada, 1863, p. 387. 84 Prospectus of the Neff Petroleum Co.,p.7. *% Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., July, 1866, p. 251. ®6 Geol. Survey IIL, I, p. 108. 87 Geol. Surv. Ill. IJ, Paleont. pp. 62, 77, 80, 145. 88 ‘Trans. Amer. Philosophical Soc., 1866, p- 246; in advance of Vol. LV, Paleont. of N. Y. ro 1869.] lo [Winchell. In 1867, at the meeting of the National Academy at Hartford, Professor Hall reiterated the same views with considerable amplification. Professor Agassiz, who was present, gave them his earnest endorsement, pronouncing them the natural and philosophical conclusions of a geologist who had devoted 30 years to the study of the data upon which the conclusions rested. His remarks in reference to geologists who felt themselves con- strained to entertain divergent opinions were at least emphatic, if they were not complimentary. Finally in August, 1868, Dr. T. S. Hunt read a paper before the Chicago meeting of the American Association®® in which he makes note of the occurrence, in the extreme western part of the province, of some gray and more or less blackish shales overlying the Genesee Shale proper, which he ranges in the horizon of the Portage group. It will be noticed in the sequel of this paper that I have made a similar disposition of similar strata in Michigan, Ohio, Indiana, Kentucky, and Missouri. Such is a sketch of the history of opinion in reference to the rocks under consideration. % III. PrREesENT STATE OF OUR STRATIGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE. In the State of New York the strata above the Genesee Shale have been arranged by Professor Hall®! as follows :— Carboniferous Conglomerate :—Coarse silicious conglomerate and diag- onally laminated sandstone. Catskill Group :—Conglomerate of the Catskill mountains. Along Gen- esee river, a calcareous sandstone, sometimes highly ferruginous, ap- proaching iron ore. Chemung Group :—Conglomeritic at top in Western New York. Green- ish gray sandstones with occasional fossiliferous bands. Portage Group :—A., In Eastern New York. 1. Shales and shaly sandstones and flagstones 100 feet. 2. Red shale and shaly sandstone 400 to 500 feet. 3. Greenish and gray shales and shaly sandstones. 4. Darker shales to Hamilton Group. 89 Published in Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts [2] XLVI. p.355. In this paper Dr. Hunt takes occasion to state that “ Professor Winchell, for some reason, doubts the existence of the Portage formation in Ontario.” As Dr. Hunt makes no reference to any published doubts entertained by me on this subject, lam at aloss to know the source of his mis-information. I have heretofore always iden-— tified with the Portage (or Portage and Chemung) the series of argillaceous strata extending from the Genesee Shale to the Marshall sandstones, (See the various references already made in this paper.) If these strata exist in Ontario I should pronounce them Portage. I have already described them upon the Michigan borders of Ontario, and it is to be presumed that they extend across the boundary. As Dr. Hunt states, these Portage shales are physically a continuation of the Genesee shale proper, and by ranging them all in my Huron group, I did in 1861, what Dr. Hunt has done in in 1866 and 1868. 90 T have made no note of the elaborate and able researches of Dr. Dawson upon the fossil vege- tation of rocks lying in and near the zone under consideration. Dr. Dawson’s papers—together with some minor papers. also passed over—will be referred to in an Appendix. #1 Final Rep. 1V Dist. N. Y.; Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, vol. vii., p.377; xvi. Report Re- gents N. Y.,p.107. Note. Ne rong Si lay / Winchell.] i4 [March 5, B, In Western New York. 1. Portage Sandstone, thick bedded. 2. Gardeau Shales and Flagstones—green and black—slaty and sandy shales with thin layers of sandstone. 3. Cashaqua Shale—soft, argillaceous, green, crumbling to a tena- ceous clay. In Ontario, although Professor Hall and Sir William Logan have assigned at least a portion of the black shales to the horizon of the Por- tage Group, I have not been able to distinguish any of them from the Genesee shale proper containing Ledorhynchus multicosta and Discina Lo- densis. As overlying shales of the age of the Portage Group however exist in Michigan close to the national boundary, I have always pre- sumed that they extend across it. This opinion Dr. Hunt has very re- cently confirmed. In Michigan I have been able to make out a complete determination of the strata as follows :°? Parma Conglomerate :—a whitish or rusty, often conglomeritic and ob- liquely laminated sandstone with vegetable remains. 105 feet. Carboniferous Limestone :—irregularly bedded, often cherty or ferrugi- nous, and much shattered 7m sitw—becoming arenaceous below. 70 feet. Michigan Salt Group:—consisting of aluminous and gypseous shales, thin gray flags, bands of limestone and thick beds of gypsum. 200 feet. Marshall Group :—consisting of :— Napoleon Sandstone, pale buff, often conglomeritic, obliquely lami- nated, thick bedded. 128 feet. Marshall Sandstone, reddish, yellowish, olive, obliquely laminated, highly ferruginous—the iron often under a rudely concentric, concre- tionary arrangement. In places calcareous. Highly fossiliferous. 160 feet. Huron Gritstones, bluish or greenish gray, fine grained, regularly bedded. 15 feet. Huron Group, consisting of :-— Argillaceous shales and flagstones—the latter less prominent in the southern part of the State. 500 feet. Green arenaceous shales, especially in Grand Traverse Bay. 25 feet. Black bituminous shale (Genesee shale). 25 feet. Hamilton Group. [The calcareous member of this group is conspicuous in Michigan. ] In the State of Ohio the succession of strata seems to be nearly as fol- lows :°8 Conglomerate, buffish, obliquely laminated, more or less pebbly, often with rudely concentric spheroids of iron ore. Sometimes underlaid by “* Halse Coal Measures.”’ 92 Mich. Geol. Rep., 1861, p. 138; Amer. Jour, Sci. [2] xxwxiit., 352; The Grand Traverse Region, p. 49. ® Foster Geol. Rep. Ohio, p. 77; Briggs—Ib., p. 79; Whittlesey—Proc. Amer. Assoc. Vv. p- 76; Winchell—Mich. Geol. Rep., 1861, p. 78, also, Prospectus, Neff Petroleum Co., p. 7. Be 1869] (e [Winchell. Gritstone series, consisting of flaggy shales, ferruginous, somewhat thick- bedded sandstones with iron-stone partings, often with interstratified blackish or bluish shales. Followed downward by shales of a bluish, brownish or reddish color, 100 to 150 feet. Waverly series:—Bluish or greenish gray, fine-grained and evenly bed- ded, often fossiliferous sandstones and flags, with interstratified brown- ish shales. 200 feet. [In Knox county the Gritstone and Waverly series are together 517 feet. ] Chocolate shales, argillaceous, chocolate colored, bluish and blackish. 250 to 300 feet. [In Knox county this series is 450 feet. ] Black Shale, 100 to 150 feet. [This is an abnormal thickness of the Black Shale in the West, and it is probable the upper portion belongs with the Chocolate series. ] In the State of Indiana the series seems to be constituted as follows :9! Carboniferous Conglomerate. St. Louis Limestone, freely represented. Warsaw Limestone. Keokuk Group, consisting of :— Gray limestone and calcareous shales (Floyd county) 50 feet. Wanting in Northern Indiana. Brown shales with geodes and nodules of hornstone. Knob formation or gritstones, micaceous, ferruginous, friable, with in- tercalated limestones in the upper part. 150 feet or more. Rockford Limestone, with Goniatites, Wce.; represented by a thin bedded sandstone in Northern Indiana. Wanting in Western Indiana. Black Shale. Tn the State of Illinois we have the following succession of strata.°% Burlington Limestone. Kinderhook Group, consisting of ‘‘gritstones, sandy and argillaceous shales, with thin beds of fine-grained and oélitic limestone.’’ 100 to 200 ft. Black shale. ‘‘Dark blue, green, or chocolate colored shales, passing locally into a black bituminous shale.’’ [Presents in Southern and Western Illinois, rather the characters of the Huron shales of Michigan. May it not constitute, with the lower portion of the Kinderhook group, a representation of the Portage and Chemung of New York ?] In Iowa (at Burlington) the series of strata is the following :% No. 8. Upper Burlington Limestone. 20 feet. No. 7. Lower Burlington Limestone. 30 to 50 feet. No. 6. Odlitic Limestone, with fossils. 2 feet. No. 5. Yellowish Sandstone with abundant casts of Brachiopods. 4 to 6 feet. No. 4. Limestone, with Brachiopods. 9 feet. No. 3. Odlitic Limestone. 3 in. %! Hall—Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol. p. 280; Meek and Worthen—Amer, Jour. Sci. [2] xxxii., 167; W orthen—TIll. Geol. Report, vol. i., p. 116; Christy—Proc. Amer. Assoc., V., p. 76. 9 Worthen—Geol, Surv. Ill., I., p. 108; TIT., p. 115. 9° Hall—lowa Geol. Rep., I.,90; White—Ib., Append. 76 Winchell.] ( [March 5, No. 2. Bluish-brown Limestone with corals. 8 in. No. 1. Yellowish Sandstone, passing downward into a bluish indurated clay. Fossils rare. 68 feet and more. In Missouri we are furnished with the following series of rocks :°7 Encrinital Limestone, regarded as equivalent to the Burlington Limestone. Chouteau Limestone. 10 to 70 feet. Limestone, brownish-gray, earthy, silico-magnesian, in thick beds. 40 to 50 feet. Limestone, blue or drab, compact, thin and irregularly bedded. Vermicular Sandstone and shales. 30 to 100 feet. Sandstone, buff or yellowish-brown, fine-grained, argillo-calcareous. Sometimes becomes an impure magnesian limestone. Shale or fire-clay, blue or brown, argillaceous, in regular, thin strata. Lithographic Limestone, light drab to light buff and blue, pure, fine, compact, even-textured, silicious. 60 to 70 feet. At bottom is a blue shale 30 to 40 feet thick. In Kentucky, according to my own observations, we have at Knob Lick and Pine Knob, four miles south of Danville, the following section : Sandstone, yellowish, from top of Knob down. 150 feet. Shale, blue, arenaceous, with bands of iron ore and ferruginous sand- stones, forming the phenomenon known as ‘‘ Knob Lick.”’ 80 feet. [Resembles shales of Huron Group. ] Black Shale, only moderately bituminous. 40 feet. Silicious and Geodiferous Beds, containing Oystiphyllum Americanum, Phillipsastrea gigas, Heliophyllum Halli, Fistulipora Canadensis and other Hamilton fossils. % Hydraulic Limestone, blue, arenaceous, very thick bedded, with frag- ments of fossils. 12 feet. Nashville Group. In Tennessee the Black Shale rests directly upon the Nashville group, and is overlaid by about 150 feet of the ‘‘Silicious Group,’’ in the very lowest beds of which I have recognized Producta semireticulata, Orthis Michelini, Spirifera Logani, and an undescribed Zaphrentis, which, with the Spirifera, is regarded as characteristic of the Keokuk Limestone. Above the Silicious group we have 394 feet of cherty limestone, mainly re- ferable to the St. Louis division, ! since it contains Lithostrotion Canadense, Producta semireticulata, Streptorhynchus wmbraculum, Spirifera Keokuk Var, S. perinflata? The presence of Rhynchonella Verneuiliana indicates that the Warsaw limestone may also be represented in the lower portion of this formation. Next above we have 6038 feet of limestone abundantly 971 Swallow—Neo. Geolo. Report, L., 101 and Tab. 15, p. 99; Meek and Worthen—Amer. Jour. Sci. 2) xxxii., 171. % PD). D. Owen speaks of no Devonian in this part of Kentucky except the Black Shale. He, how- ever, speaks of Upper Silurian rocks; these I have not seen. 99 These fossils were collected in Hickman and Maury counties, and kindly furnished me by Prof. Safford. 100 In its physical characters this cherty limestone is a continuation of the Silicious Group, and Prof. Safford informs me that he so treats it in his forthcoming Report. td 1869.] (7 [Winchell. stocked with the crinoids of the Kaskaskia division of the Mountain lime- stone, embracing Pentremites Godont, pyriformis, symmetricus and globosus and Agassizocrinus gibbosus. This section is from the eastern border of the basin of Tennessee along the road from Nashville to Sparta and the summit of the Cumberland Table Land at Bon Air. A black bituminous shale exists in considerable force in Carrol county and other parts of Arkansas, immediately superimposed by lower carbon- iferous limestones; but Dr. D. D. Owen expresses a doubt whether it answers to the Devonian Shale of Ohio ; and he also doubts the existence of rocks in Arkansas corresponding to the Knob formation. !! In attempting to trace the parallelism of these formations on purely structural and lithological grounds, it may be remarked, in the first place, that the identity of the Black Shale cannot now be mistaken. Itisa matter of no surprise that it should at any time have been referred to the horizon of the Marcellus Shale, as long as stratigraphical observations were confined to Ohio and Indiana. Its stratigraphical position above the Hamilton group is now, however, demonstrated by actual superposition in Grand Traverse Bay of Lake Michigan, Thunder Bay of Lake Huron, at various points in the peninsula of Ontario, and on the borders of the ““Knob region’’ below Danville in Kentucky. Its position immediately below the arenaceous and argillaceous beds which are the subject of dis- cussion in this paper, is demonstrated by the order of superposition at Pt aux Barques of Lake Huron, at sundry points in Branch, Kalamazoo and Allegan counties, Michigan, and at various places in northern and cen- tral Ohio. When at Rockford, Indiana, I had the opportunity to make my observations under favorable circumstances. The milldam had been broken away by a freshet, and the exposure of Black Shale three-fourths of a mile above was such as to indicate clearly by the dip, that this rock passes under the Goniatite limestone. My observations in this vicinity enabled me to determine the following succession of strata. Goniatite Bed—seen below the dam and at Wilson’s creek, Semi-indurated clay. Limestone, fine, compact but shattered, bluish, rusted in the vicinity of the fractures. Contains the Brachiopods and Radiates described from Rockford. Black Shale. It is further possible, as first suggested by Messrs. Meek and Worthen, that the blue shale at the base of the Lithographic Limestone in Missouri should be co-ordinated with the Black Shale. I think, however, there are reasons for considering the Genesee Shale unrepresented in Missouri. It is proper to remark that the so-called Black Shale or ‘‘ pyroschist’’!92 101 Geology Reconnois. Ark. J, pp. 87, &c., and 135. 12 Dr.T.S. Hunt proposes this Anglicised Grecism of the “‘Brandschiefer” of the Germans, (Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxvi., 159,) since, as he asserts, this shale contains no free bitumen. Jn this, however, he is certainly mistaken, as I have seen it oozing from the cliffs in Grand Traverse Bay ; and I am informed that the odor has sometimes attracted the attention of travelers. It appears, furthermore, that the intimate mingling of comminuted organic matters with argillaceous ma- terials creates the most favorable conditions for the spontaneous evolution of hydrocarbonaceous products from the rocks. 78 Winchell.] / [March 5, varies very materially in the percentage of bituminous and carbonaceous matters at different localities ; and the thickness of the dark bituminous beds is also extremely variable. In Michigan and Tennessee the bitumi- nous beds are comparatively thin, but in the former State there is a vast mass of non-bituminous or slightly bituminous shales immediately over- lying the lower portions, which pass by insensible gradations into the typical black shale. These, according to Hunt, occur also in Ontario. Proceeding from structural data alone, I united this entire series of shales in one formation which I styled the Huron group; and I am even now strongly inclined to associate this shale with the strata above rather than with those below. Should it be thought these facts tend to point out the equivalency of the Black Shale proper with the dark shales existing in the lower part of the Portage group of New York, it may be stated that the existence of Lingula spatulata in great abundance in the Black Shale of Ohio and Kentucky and the presence of Discina Lodensis and Leiorhynchus multicosta in the Black Shale of Ontario will effectually narrow the deter- mination to the Genesee Shale of New York.!° In the next place, the Carboniferous Conglomerate marks a superior horizon which cannot ordinarily be mistaken. The Parma Conglomerate of Michigan, as I have heretofore indicated,!°! occupies the same strati- graphical position. The conglomerate of Western New York identified by the New York geologists with the Coal Conglomerate of Ohio, presents undoubtedly a lithological affinity. The same is true, however, of the conglomerate represented as terminating the Chemung series, and also of the conglomeratic portions of the Catskill group. Iam not informed of the lithological or structural grounds upon which these three similar con- glomerates (each locally varying to similar sandstones) have been ranged in an order of sequence. As they are nowhere seen in immediate super- position, it is at least supposable that they are but local occurrences of one and the same formation. If thus identifiable, the question still re- mains to be determined whether the formation les in the horizon of the Chemung, in that of the Catskill or that of the Coal Conglomerate. The only evidence at present in our possession bearing upon the determination of this question is paleontological. This evidence, as I have already inti- mated, tends to unite the so-called Chemung and Carboniferous conglome- rates and range them in a zone below the Coal Conglomerate of Ohio. This subject will be resumed in the paleontological part of this paper. In the third place, it may be remarked that we are now in possession of the means of determining the parallelism of the western strata between 103 [ desire to remark, in passing, that the Marcellus shale of New York is probably represented in Little Traverse Bay by the highly bituminous and earthy limestone near the base of the Ham- ilton group. ‘The same is seen at Thunder Bay Island, Lake Huron, and in the oil wells of Ennis- killen, Ontario. This shale seems therefore, like the Genesee shale, to constitute only an appendage to another formation. 104 Michigan Geol. Rep., 1861, pp. 114, 138. So far as I know this was the first instance in which a geological designation was bestowed upon this formation. The Canadian geologists in the Report of 1863, apply the name “ Bonaventure formation” to a series of arenaceous strata ‘‘ belonging to the base of the Carboniferous series.” (p. 404.) In the Atlas to accompany this Report, published in 1866, the Bonaventure formation is put down as the equivalent of the Coal Conglomerate of the United States, Ke 1869. ] i9 [Wincheil. the Carboniferous Conglomerate and the summit of the arenaceous series which has been locally designated Waverly, Marshall, Kinderhook, &c. The Carboniferous limestone of Michigan has been shown !% on paleonto- logical grounds to possess affinities with the median stages of the Carbon- iferous Limestone series of the Mississippi valley. The Michigan Salt Group has at length yielded some beds of fossiliferous flags, from which, as might have been anticipated, it is shown to stand in close relation with the same series. The Knobstones of Indiana and Kentucky, always ranged by geologists within the limits of the Carboniferous system, pos- sesses strong lithological affinities with the Waverly series, and withal occupy the same relative position between recognized Carboniferous lime- stones and the Black Shale. But paleontological evidence compels us to elevate them into the zone of the Mountain Limestone which, at every point of contact, is shown to lie above the Ohio psammitic series. Indeed, it appears from observations made by others and by myself, that the Knob- stone formation of Indiana and Kentucky, with the associated shales and limestones, is substantially restricted to the horizon of the Keokuk division of the Mississippi Limestone series, or ‘‘ Mississippi group.’’!0 The Silicious group of Tennessee is only a southward prolongation of the same under changed petrogenetic conditions ; though in that State, the silicious characteristics also invade the horizon of the Warsaw and St. Louis Limestones—as may be seen along the valley of the Calfkiller river, and on the first bench of the ascent to the Cumberland Table Land. We come now to the series of strata, the determinations of whose equivalencies has presented the most serious difficulties. The Gritstones and Waverly sandstones of Ohio offer marked petrographic affinities with the arenaceous strata of the Chemung and Portage groups of New York ; and it is doubtful whether on purely lithological and structural grounds we should ever be able to distinguish them. The same may be said how- ever, and has been said, of the Knobstones of Indiana ; and the same is also measurably true of a comparison between the Chemung and Catskill strata, or the Catskill and Millstone Grit, or the Waverly and Millstone Grit. There seems to be, moreover, a connection of continuity between the psammites of Ohio and the Chemung flags of Chatauque county. A similar petrographic resemblance is apparent between the Marshall rocks of Michigan in the northern and southern outcrops, and the Waverly of Ohio. Furthermore, no little resemblance can be traced between these sandstones and the yellow sandstones beneath the Carboniferous limestone of Iowa. The Rockford limestone and the calcareous strata of the same zone in Illinois and Missouri present considerable contrast, but they ap- proximate, on the other hand, certain calcareous beds in the Waverly series of Summit county, Ohio, and the Marshall series of Calhoun county, Michigan. Moreover, these calcareous strata are intimately associated in Illinois and Missouri, with arenaceous strata which everywhere recall the aspect of the arenaceous strata of other States. In respect to stratigraphi- 10 Mich. Geol. Rep. 1861, p. 103. 106 T propose the use of this term as a geographical designation for the Carboniferous Limestones of the United States which are so largely developed in the valley of the Mississippi river. Winchell.] i 80 [March 5, cal position, we find all these formations lying beneath the Mississippi limestones and above the Genesee shale. The synchronism of the Waverly and Gritstone series of Ohio, with the Portage and Chemung of New York, has not only long been asserted—at least at invervals—by Professor Hall, but has been generally assented to by others, who have had occasion to consider the subject, or have felt disposed to defer to competent authority. The controversy which has existed has been rather in reference to the systemic position of the two, as the citations which I have already made from the history of the controversy sufficiently indicate. The Waverly series has gene- rally been regarded of late years, as extending down to the Black Shale ; and the denial of the parallelism of this series with the Chemung and Portage las appeared to leave no space for the existence of the latter groups in Ohio. There is, as Professor Hall has frequently asserted, an improbability that a group more than a thousand feet thick in western New York, should have completely thinned out before reaching the meridian of Cleveland or the peninsula of Michigan. There are some facts in my possession, however, bearing upon this subject, which I have never yet had the opportunity to bring into prominent notice. In my Report on the lower peninsula of Michigan I described a series of argillaceous strata!’ underneath the Marshall sandstones, and ex- tending to the Hamilton limestones. The Genesee Shale constitutes the lower portion of this group—being structurally a portion of it. In my Report I assign but 210 feet of thickness to this group, as this was all that I had actually measured at outcrops; but borings subsequently executed in various parts of the State, show that the group actually pos- sesses a thickness of 500 to 600 feet.1°S This mass occupies the place of the Portage and Chemung strata. In the southern portion of the State it is quite purely argillaceous, passing vertically at intervals into mica- ceous arenaceous shales, or even calcareo-arenaceous flags ; but in its northern outcrops, we find compact flagstones frequently intercalated in the series, giving it a physical approximation to the New York strata, whose stratigraphical position it usurps. Moreover, in Grand Traverse Bay, we discover, not far above the Genesee Shale, a mass of green are- naceous shales which apparently answer to the Cashaqua Shale of the Portage group. We have in this series all that is requisite to answer the demands of the Portage and Chemung groups. The thickness is, indeed, conside- rably reduced ; but it must be remembered that all the other New York groups traced into Michigan exhibit even a greater attenuation than this parallel would imply.!9 . 107 Tembraced in this group 14 feet of gritstones, which I subsequently removed, on studying their paleontology. (Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxili., 352. 108 J have several times published these later determinations, but Dr- Hunt continues to quote from my Report of 1861, (Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlvi., 357,) having evidently overlooked my later announcement. (See, for instance, “The Grand Traverse Region,” (1866) p. 52.) 10 Dr. Hunt thinks the Salina Strata will yet be found to attain agreater thickness in Michigan than that assigned to them in my Report of 1861, (Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlvi., p. 359.) The facts announced by him would certainly justify such an expectation; but I embrace the opportu- nity to state that though bored through in several places since the date of my Report, the thickness has not been found materially greater than stated in 1361. 1869.] 81 [Winchell. Let us now inquire whether in Ohio, which lies contiguous to Michigan, anything can be discovered which answers to the Huron group. The lower portion of the series super-imposed upon the Black Slate of Ohio, has generally been passed by with the remark that it appears to be unfossiliferous, or that it may belong to a different epoch from the fos- siliferous sandstones above. I think, however, the thickness of these subter-psammitic strata has not been generally suspected. As in Michi- gan, so in Ohio, we are indebted to the enterprise stimulated by the late petroleum-industry, for the disclosure of the full extent of the argillaceous and flagey deposites immediately above the Black Shale. We are now assured of the existence of a vast series of shales in Ohio which corres- pond both in position and in lithological characters to the Huron group of Michigan. In Knox county they attain a measured thickness of 450 feet. Here, again, we discover ample scope of strata to answer the demands of the New York Portage and Chemung, without bringing in the Waverly and Gritstone series above. In Kentucky also, at ‘‘ Knob-lick,’”’ south of Danville, and at other points, we discover a series of argillaceous strata not less than 80 feet thick, reposing upon the Black Shale, and presenting again all the phy- sical characters of the Huron group. As these shales are surmounted by Knobstones of Keokuk age, we have no stratigraphical determination whether they should be synchronized with the Huron group, or the Marshall, or the lower part of the Mississippi group. I think it will be admitted, however, that some presumption exists that they lie in the horizon of the Huron Shales. In Iowa it seems not unlikely that the base of the yellow sandstone series, with its bluish, slightly micaceous sandstones, comes into the same zone ; while the blue shales, 80 feet thick, beneath the Lithographic limestone in some parts of Missouri, may probably be more correctly syn- chronized with the argillaceous shales of the Huron group than with the black or Genesee section of that group. I would suggest also that the Tllinois shales, somewhat doubtfully referred by Prof. Worthen to the hori- zon of the Genesee shale, may le rather in the horizon of the Huron shales of Michigan. It appears from the foregoing statements that we are by no means com- pelled to resort to the Waverly and Marshall series to discover the western representatives of the Portage and Chemung of New York. If the appar- ent continuity of the eastern and western formations should appear to compel such identification, let it be remembered that the Knobstones stand in the same apparent relation to the Waverly that the Waverly does tothe Chemung, and yet we yield to the weight of paleontological evidence in denying their equivalency. If, moreover, it appears that the Chemung and Portage have become finer and more argillaceous in their westward extension, it will be remembered that the Waverly strata also, when traced into Indiana, Illinois, and Missouri, have assumed a finer constitution, and have received moreover that accession of calcareous constituents which we always expect to characterize formations remoter from the A. P. S.—VOL. XI— K 29 : Winchell.] 82 [March 5, ancient continental shores.!!° During the periods which followed the Gene- see epoch, the time was approaching when the agitations of the terres- trial crust should culminate in the spread of thousands of square miles of coarse débris over the bottom of the continental lagoon of North America; the materials of the great Carboniferous Conglomerate. In the progress of the gathering convulsion, the movement of the waters had attained such a degree of violence during the period of the Portage and Chemung as to give rise to the formation of flags and sandstones within the limits of the State of New York, while yet the quieter waters which rested over Michigan and Ohio were precipitating only the materials of shales , and the regions further west were as destitute of mechanical sediments as of the organic débris which give origin to limestones. In the following or Marshall period, the disturbance of the terrestrial crust had attained such a limit as to give distribution to the Catskill and so-called Chemung and Carboniferous Conglomerates of New York, while in Ohio and Michigan, it attained only such a degree of energy as had been witnessed in New York during the preceding period, and resulted in the sandstones and shales of the Waverly and Marshall series. Still further West the quiet conditions of limestone-making continued to prevail. In the Knobstone epoch following this, the agitation had extended still further West. While 3,000 feet of mechanical sediments were accumulating in Pennsylvania, the conditions of sandstone accumulation had traveled towards the centre of the American lagoon as far as Indiana, Kentucky and Tennessee, while even yet, the state of quiet was sufficient in Nlinois and west of the Mis- sissippi to permit the existence of limestone making animals. The grand agitations of the Millstone grit epoch followed, with the still later oscilla- tions of the surface which conditioned the phenomenon of the Coal epoch, terminated by the tremendous convulsions which gave birth to the moun- tain barriers of the Atlantic border. But none of these events were felt in the far West. Deep seas and limestone-forming operations—as Prof. Hall has well shown!!! continued to characterize the history of the inter- ior of the continent while the coal marshes of Ohio and Pennsylvania were heaved and tossed in the titanic pastimes of geological forces. This sketch of the succession of geological events shows that the parallel- ism which I have traced is in strict harmony with the method of later Pale- ontological Time; and instead of suggesting abrupt disappearances and incongruous synechronisms, is the only marshalling of the American strata which keeps perfect time with the grand march of geological events. 10 There is a priori evidence against the continuity of the Chemung and Waverly. Arenaceous sediments, from the circumstances and conditions of their origin, must be limited in extent, at least in one direction. We should therefore expect the Chemung to grow finer and to lose its physical identity in its western prolongation; and, if a sandstone recurs at the West, the immediate pre- sumption arises that it is a phenomenon of changed continental conditions, characterizing another geological period. Compare Hall: Foster and Whitney’s Rep. IT, p. 287- 11 Report on the Geol. and Pal. Mex. Boundary Surv. p- 124; Iowa Geol. Rep. p. 137—141. 85 1869.] {Marston. Stated Meeting, March 19, 1869. Present, ten members. JOHN C. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from C. L. Riitimeyer, dated Basel, February, 18th, and from J. Prest- wich, dated Shoreham, near Seven-oaks, England, March 2, 1869. A letter of envoy was received from the Meteorological Office of the Royal Society at London, dated Dec. 24, 1868. Donations for the Library were received from the Meteoro- logical Office of the Royal Society of London, from M. Che- valier, Membre de la Commission de |’Exposition Interna- tionale de 1867 at Paris, from the London Board of Trade, from the Boston Natural History Society, from the American Antiquarian Society at Worcester, from the Editors of the American Journal of Arts and Sciences at New Haven, from Prof. Cook, State Geologist of New Jersey, at Newark, from Mr. Henry C. Carey, Mr. Pliny H. Chase, and the College of Pharmacy, at Philadelphia, and from the Smithsonian Insti- tute, at Washington. ~ Commodore John Marston presented, for the cabinet, four fragments of painted pottery, dug up by him, early in the year 1861, from the soil of the Island of Sacrifices, near Vera Cruz, Mexico. The principal piece is 5 inches long by 2 inches wide, a sort of doll, with a fillet over the head, and a painted white plain ribbon-like collar round the neck, from which seems to have depended six painted white and red tags, four on the breast, and one behind each shoulder. The fillet over the forehead is painted in alternate red:'and white sections. The skin of the forehead and nose, the region around the mouth, the lower parts of the ears, and the half-seen eyeballs, are painted the same dead white ; the rest of the doll has been painted a deep red, much of which has worn off. Two banded bent arms can be traced down the sides and upon the breasts, ending in two white spots for hands. An attempt has been made to sig- nify the left arm by a slight relief. The head has the Astec monument look, there being nothing but backhead and forehead. The eyes are half closed, and the upper teeth exposed by the drawing back of the upper lip. This gives the impression that it was intended to represent a corpse or Emerson. ] 84 [March 19, mummy. Two small holes show that the cylinder is hollow ; but they do not communicate. One of the other three pieces is a whistle, made of a human head with- out neck, the aperture slanting up over the forehead. The cheeks are hugely swollen, and the mouth set to represent the act of blowing. The nose is colossal, and the whole thing full of that peculiar humor of Mexi- can art, which is so strikingly exhibited in the set of masks (?) which the Society has in its Poinsett Cabinet. The other two fragments are very imperfect, and seem to have been pipe-stands, ornamented, the one with a bird’s head, and the other with something like a calf’s. Judge Cadwalader read, by appointment, an obituary notice of Mr. Bancker, which was followed by remarks by Mr. H. K. Price, describing the consequences of the policy inaugurated by Mr. Bancker, as President of the Franklin Insurance Com- pany, of holding a large number of small mortgages. ‘T’o the encouragements and facilities which this policy affords me- chanics and builders with small capital, and, therefore, to Mr. Bancker, the City of Philadelphia has been largely indebted for its rapid extension. Dr. Emerson communicated a description of an ingenious and important improvement in Whitney’s Cotton Gin (1798), made by Mr. R. R. Gwathmey, of Kentucky (1867), and already adopted by planters in the Southwestern States. Whitney’s gin requires the cotton to be picked by hand from the boll, before it can be ginned. Gwathmey’s machine, by simply reversing the mo- tion of the saws, rejects the hulls unbroken, and thereby increases the working capacity of a field hand fourfold, that is, from the old rate of five bales of (400 Ibs.) per month to twenty. Pending nominations Nos. 622 to 626 were read. The Chairman of the Special Committee on the Letting or Selling of the Hall reported that the Committee desired the advice of the Society respecting price. In view of the small attendance of members, on motion, this subject was made the order of business for the next meeting, notice to be sent to all the members. On motion of Prof. Trego, the subject of the Rittenhouse Clock was referred to the Curators, with power to act, report- ing their action to the Society. And the Society was adjourned. 1859.] 85 [Cadwalader. OBITUARY NOTICE OF MR. BANCKER BY JUDGE CADWALADER. Cuaries Nicott BAaNncKER, one of our oldest members, died on 16th February last, aged 91 years. The Society’s request that I would prepare their memorial of him is fulfilled with a mournful pleasure. But my domestic connection with him was so close that the duty cannot be per- formed without a feeling of some embarrassment. The spontaneous ten- dency to the language of eulogium will be restrained. I will not here speak of him in his religious or social relations. My re- marks will be limited to subjects which may concern more directly his relations to our Society. We may thus consider the career of Mr. Bancker as a merchant on an extended scale, as a practical and scientific insurer, and as a man of gene- ral scientific information. New York, the city of his birth, was, in the days of his youth, a place of secondary importance. He removed, in his boyhood, to Philadelphia, then the commercial, political, and literary metropolis, where he entered the counting house of John Guest, one of the largest importers from Eng- land, and was thoroughly educated for the pursuit of commerce. Before he had completed his twenty-first year, he became, through his abilities, energy, and assiduous efficiency, the partner of Mr. Guest, who changed his residence to England, leaving their vast concerns here in the sole charge of his young associate. This was Mr. Bancker’s responsible relation for many years, including the latter part of the first war, and a great part of the second war, of the French revolution. In each of these eventful periods, the commercial navigation of the world was, in a great measure, carried on under the flag of the United States. The opposing belligerents asserted that the cargoes, professedly of neutral ownership, in vessels thus navi- gated, were of more than twenty times the greatest value that could be honestly owned by neutrals. The retaliatory maritime hostilities of the opposing belligerents against professed neutrals were chiefly directed against the United States. Cruisers and privateers captured our vessels and those of avowed enemies almost indiscriminately. Such were the causes of the maritime war of the United States with France in 1799, and of their general war with England in 1812. I believe that Mr. Bancker’s house in trade owned no vessels, and neither imported nor exported merchandize for the account of others. The immense business in which they were engaged for their own account re- quired the purchase of millions of sterling bills. This important part of their business was conducted so regularly and carefully that not a penny was ever lost from the failure of parties to such paper. The fact is remark- able, and the reason is interesting. It was not that parties to the paper did not fail. Many failures of course occurred. Of perhaps five sets of Exchange, three, or even four, through capture, might not reach their destination. But there was no loss, for the reason that Mr. Bancker’s = Cadwalader. ] : 86 [March 19, house took no bills which they did not, on sufficient grounds, believe to have been drawn upon shipments, orintended shipments, of adequate value. His house were mere buyers in the exchange market. They did not them- selves take, or directly control, any security except the personal responsi- bility of the drawers of the bills. But this was not the security on which they relied. Believing that the business in which every bill had been drawn was legitimate, they had no doubt that the bill would be accepted abroad, upon the credit of shipments which had been, or would be fully insured against capture. Capricious vacillation marked the belligerent conduct of the British Government in the occasional suspension and renewal of ill judged retali- atory measures affecting neutrals. A sudden commercial crisis, from one of the most ill-timed of these vacillations, caused, in 1810, an unprece- dented depression of the values of a large stock of British imports in the United States. The heaviest losers were Guest and Bancker. The part- nership was dissolved. He retired from it, without retaining any property, but was not indebted to any one. During the interval which preceded the war of 1812, he visited Eng- land on business of Stephen Girard, then the wealthiest merchant of the United States, with results of extraordinary profit for Mr. Girard, and of corresponding advantage to himself. He soon resumed commercial business on his own account, and continued it variously for several years. At one time, he dealt largely in cotton, including the product of the re- motest parts of our country in which it was grown. »His practical experi- ence in almost all subjects of internal and external trade, was of the most extended range. He was not engaged in commerce after 1826. It then became neces- sary for him to seek other employment ; and his attention was turned to imsurance. The science of insurance—for it 7s a science—cannot be sufficiently taught by professors of law, nor fully understood by mere merchants, nor very deeply fathomed by mere mathematicians. Insurance, we may be told, is a substitute for capital, and should enable men without capital to engage securely, on borrowed means, in enterprises otherwise unduly hazardous; and, therefore, that where insurance has been made, and the premium paid, anything which may tend to prevent fair indemnification against loss, ought in law to be deemed a breach of contract, and must in ethics be a subterfuge and fraud. On the other hand, we may be told that the contract is one of indemnity against a risk of which the subject is always beyond the insurer’s reach or controi, and is at the exclusive charge and disposal of the insured ; that the insurer is therefore entitled always to expect a rigid application of the purest principles of ethics for the protection of his interests, and that no public interest would be pro- moted by excusing a careless disregard of his rights. Each proposition, when correctly understood, may, with certain applications, be true. But neither proposition is of much practical use. In the absence of fraud, ) 1869. ] 87 [Cadwalader. persons insured do not ordinarily forfeit their insurances through any mere carelessness of themselves or their agents. But no prudent msurer will take a risk where any interest of the insured would be promoted by eare- lessness of the subject of the risk. Insurance, it has again been often said, is an aleatory contract, that is to say, a bargain upon a chance, like a throw of dice. An insurer’s tables of risks may, in a certain sense, resemble those which might be made for the use of a professional gamester on a grand scale. But beyond this, there is properly no anal- ogy to gaming. Insurance, in its general results, is, in fact, though not in form, a contract of mutual benefit; and the benefit is not, im any proper sense, wncertain upon either side. The values of life insurances ean thus be calculated with approximate certainty, because, however uncertain may be the continuance of an individual life, the average dura- tion of human life, is known from experience, and is almost invariable. Then, as to marine insurances, it has been often said with truth, and, in our own city, has been practically tested in more cases than one, that a merchant employing a great many ships, or shipping a great many cargoes, may prudently calculate for himself whether he would more probably lose by insuring than derive benefit; in other words, whether the premiums to be paid would probably exceed the maritime losses to be incurred. Fire Insurance, under this head, is not an exception. Where the risks are sufficiently numerous, at points detached from one another, and of small amounts, or where large risks are divided among several insurers, the rates of premium are safely adjustable to a standard of uni- formity. The more the insurances are with due caution multiplied, and the source of profit increased, the greater is the safety of the insurer. These are truisms, whatever may be the complexities of their safe appli- cation. I will not add any general remarks concerning the reservation and investment of accruing income to meet losses. It is a misfortune of the present age, and an especial evil in this country, that men do not scruple to engage in responsible business, without any apprenticeship, or other preparatory training. An insurer without experience would be not less unfit for the business than a lands- man for navigation. In Mr. Bancker’s time, interests of importance were not thus trusted in untried hands. His youthful experience of marine insurance had been acquired when it was principally the business of underwriters not incorporated. It had been regulated by them on the sound basis of self interest. The insurance of his own shipments may have been instructive to him, but had probably been less so than his necessary constant observation, during the wars of the French revolution, of the transactions of other merchants, whose bills he purchased when the safety of his remittances depended upon the insurances of millions in value of shipments afloat, whose dangers have been mentioned under a former head. He had afterwards been, for some years, the agent, in this country, of one of the largest associations of English insurers; and had been a director of a life insurance company in this city. Fire Cadwalader. ] 88 [March 19, insurance was the branch of the business in which he proposed specially to engage. To the preparatory study and observation of the peculiarities of insurance of this kind, he devoted more than two years until 1829, when, through his influence, the Franklin Fire Insurance Company was incorporated. He conducted this Company’s business for almost forty years. At his death, the Company, with an entire capital of $400,000, had paid five-and-a-half millions of losses, and the claims unsettled were less than $24,000. The annual income was $360,000, or 90 per cent. on the capi- tal. The yearly dividends for ten years had been 82 per cent.; and the assets were more than $2,600,000,—the accrued surplus being about $1,100,000. Nothing had ever been lost upon an investment ; nor was there an existing investment of doubtful security. This complete success of the Company was due entirely to his administration of its affairs. The attainment of such success, or of much greater seeming success, would not have been surprising, or even extraordinary, if there had, in the meantime, been a corresponding hazard of proportional heavy losses. But such hazard had not been incurred. At the outset, serious difficul- ties were indeed encountered in promoting the extension of the new Company’s business without assuming an undue proportion of extra- hazardous risks. Of risks of small amount in Philadelphia, most of the less hazardous were taken by two or three mutual insurance Companies of long established standing, which made no dividends. Competition for such risks, at full premiums, could not be expected until a corres- ponding surplus fund, in addition to the capital, should have been accu- mulated. The division of large risks among several insurers was then difficult, if not impossible, because fire insurers, and fire imsurance agencies, were few, and fire insurance brokers fewer. Upon manu- facturing establishments and the contents, insurances might readily have been effected. But there could be no standard of premiums on such risks uniformly proportional to the actual hazard, because, independently of the combustibility of the subjects, and of general reasons which under a legislative policy of artificial protection affect such risks, the con- stantly recurring changes in the protective legislation of the United States made the inducements to care of such subjects by the parties insured peculiarly variable. These early difficulties were for a time partly overcome by the obvious and ordinary, though often unsatis- factory expedient of establishing agencies at points more or less distant. The difficulties were completely overcome through the adoption of a very simple plan to multiply insurances upon small risks near home.’ The plan was to lend on first mortgages of newly constructed dwelling houses of moderate dimensions, in Philadelphia and the suburbs, enough money to pay the cost of the ground and the premium of a perpetual insurance on the buildings, with sometimes the addition of a small portion of the cost of their construction. The insurances were, of course, made by the Company’s own policies. The two-fold purpose of a proper insurance, and a safe investment, was thus effected in every such case. 1869.] ; 89 (Cadwalader. There was nothing novel in such transactions of combined investment and insurance. The novelty in this Company’s transaction of such busi- ness was, that they were the first insurers who made it systematic instead of occasional. Every builder of limited means became aware that he could, with certainty, on making such an insurance with this Company, obtain the accommodation of such a loan upon mortgage, and that the time of credit, however limited in form, would, in fact, be indefinite, if the interest were punctually paid. The Company’s business of this kind increased until such mortgage investments, I believe, 1100 or 1200 in number, of an average amount of less than $2,000, constituted four-fifths of the assets. Thave described this method of investment in order to introduce the statement of a wonderful truth. It is that, although this Company has paid, as I have said, five and a half millions for losses by fire, these losses have all, with one or two insignificant exceptions, occurred on property not mortgaged to the Company. The exceptions have been within a year or two, and of an amount so small as to be quite inappreciable. Thus, it may be said that these insurances and investments have actually been made without any toss. The Company, for several years past, might have annually divided more than 20 per cent. on their capital, though during the whole of this time, not a single new insurance had been effected. I do not mean that it would in that case, have been prudent for insurers to have done so. But the fact attests the safety of the business of an insurer who while extending it to the utmost fair limit, adheres to the cardinal maxim, already mentioned, of never insuring where the interest of the in- sured might be promoted by carelessness of the subject of insurance. But who may be the cautious and energetic insurer capable of combin- ing constant adherence to this maxim with a continual increase of busi- ness? Without answering the general question, let us consider Mr. Bancker’s peculiar capacity for executing the two-fold function. His perception was most acute, clear and comprehensive, his intellectual energy the most active, his decision was always prompt, and his purpose firm. I have already shown that the range of his practical experience was almost universal. Let me add here that no extent or magnitude of his operations ever prevented his vigilant, particular, and accurate attention to the minutest details of any and every business in which he was con- cerned for himself or others. This minute attention to the details of his duty was continued until the closing hour of his life. Asaman of general scientific tastes and attainments, he was known within these walls, and extensively beyond them. The general results of existing knowledge were, in the concrete, well understood by him; and he pursued experimental and analytical investigation sufficiently to enable him to understand the causes and modes of improvement, and to keep pace with its progress. His mind was thus amply stored with true knowledge. He was a constant, it might be said, universal reader. To the day of his death, he read as a student, not, according to the ordinary habit of old A. P. S.—VOL. XI—L Cadwalader.] 90 [March 19, age, as a critic or a censor. His own extensive library contained, in the- ology, in metaphysics, in history, belles lettres, natural philosophy, and every other department of useful knowledge, or polite accomplishment, all the literature of his varied and unremitting study. New books in every department, read by him, and on his parlor table upon their first publi- cation, were, in due season, transferred to their proper shelves. His phi- losophical apparatus, constantly renewed from all parts of the world, was the collection of his long lifetime, and, like his library, was arranged according to the most improved plan. Possibly this apparatus may now, in some part, be antiquated. But I am informed that in certain depart- ments, every modern improvement has been supplied, and that, under some heads, for example the polarization of light, the means and ap- pliances for illustrative experiment are complete and unsurpassed. He took pieasure in promoting and assisting the pursuit of useful knowledge by others. Such aman may, through such benevolence, con- tribute more to the diffusion of scientific information than those who justly obtain the praise of useful discoverers. Public lecturers on natural philosophy and on experimental chemistry, had always the free use of his apparatus. They frequently availed themselves of the privi- lege. I heard, in my childhood, public acknowledgments of his liberality in this respect; and they were, after the lapse of half a century, renewed in the hearing, perhaps, of others now present. Tf I have described him rightly, it will be understood that he may have been eminently capable of comparing the results of investigations by other persons in different branches of art and science. This made his conversation often useful and instructive to practical men. Fallacious pretensions to originality of invention he detected at once, by intuition, as it were. He discerned, with as quick a glance, latent merit which was ultimately to succeed, not only in the practical, but likewise in the fine arts. Stated Meeting, April 2, 1869. Present, twenty-two members. JOHN C. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from S. Nillson, dated Lund, Sweden, 8d Marz, 1869. A letter was received from Mr. J. Whiteaves, Curator of the Museum of the Natural History Society at Montreal, dated March 29, 1869, acknowledging the receipt of Transactions 1869.] 9 if [Davidson. and Proceedings, and offering a set of the Canadian Naturalist in exchange. A letter from the London Antiquarian Society, acknowl- edged the receipt of Proceedings, A. P. 8., No. 80. Donations for the Library were received from the London Geological Society, Essex Institute, Peabody Academy at Salem, New Bedford Library, George H. Ellis of Cambridge, New Jersey Historical Society, Franklin Institute, Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, and the Protestant Episco- pal Church Hospital. The decease of Dr. Robley Dunglison on the Ist inst., aged 71, at Philadelphia, was announced by Mr. Peale, and on mo- tion of Mr. Fraley, Dr. Pancoast was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Professor Trego communicated an extract from a letter from Mr. Davidson of the Coast Survey, to Mr. D. B. Smith of Germantown, detailing the method employed to obtain the recent determination of Longitude and the velocity of the electric current between Cambridge and San Francisco. San Francisco Chronograph. —| Cambridge D on ; eee 7000 miles NMIAIN LINE ) 7 Onn eewesiee! a) B+ rt a) prolongation = D 7 me ee ( uy i] = = § a Man == | 5 ea \ Qe . ) ( A a) ) \ puns 2 otneanenEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEeeneneenE [ San Francisco ~~ | relay Kr a | | E Local circuit RE Local battery Ra Nee = W]/ Earth at San \\ aa eo ANY Barth at Sa O. Sending pen. 1, Receiving pen. San Francisco, March 1st, 1869. I give you the first written news not only of our telegraph longitude success, but of the success of my plan for determining the time of trans- mission of clock signals from my clock to Cambridge and back, over 7,000 miles of wire, through 13 repeaters and a multitude of relays. Through the liberality of the Western Union Telegraph Company, I had two trans-continental lines placed at my use, and last night I succeeded Dubois. ] 92 [April 2, beautifully. My circuit was as follows. My clock breaks the local circuit every second, depriving the helix A of its electricity, and the magnet of its magnetism. This relieves the armature B, which is drawn away by a spring, and the pen C makes its record on the revolving cylinders of the chronograph. At the same instant the main current to Cambridge and back is broken by the insulated prolongation of the arma- ture at D, and the break transmitted to Cambridge and back, through 7,000 miles of wire, to my relay E, which relieves the armature F, and the local circuit is broken; the helix G deprived of its electricity and the magnet of its magnetism, relieving the armature H, which is drawn away by a spring, and the pen I makes the record on the revolving cylinders of the chronograph. These two pens are on the same horizontal line. Our experiments show that it took 0.87 of a second to traverse the above circuit. I also made experiments through to Buffalo, Chicago, Omaha, Cheyenne, Salt Lake, and Virginia, and back. All successful. As this experiment was not contemplated by the programme of the longi- tude experiments, I have the satisfaction of seeing my ingenuity success- fully proved. Prof. Kirkwood communicated through Mr. Chase a discus- sion of the periodicity of the Sun’s spots. Mr. Chase made a communication of certain curious rela- tionships of astronomical elements. Mr. Dubois presented through Dr. Harris a specimen and analysis of silver ore. Mr. Dubois offers the following recent notes from the Assay Office, U. S. Mint: ; By far the largest single piece of silver ever brought to the Mint, was a cake or test-bottom, deposited on the 16th March, by Mr. Christian, President of the Brown Silver Mining Company, of Colorado. Its weight was 4,343 ounces troy, equal to 290 lbs. avoird. nearly. There was a small proportion of gold, and the net Mint value was 5,720 dollars, silver coin. This was stated to have been extracted from twenty tons of galena in the gangue ; making about 286 dollars to the ton. In the Report of the British Commission on International Coinage, lately published, we find an extract from the ‘‘Journal des Debats,”’ of Noy. 13th, 1866, stating that the German assayers had found the average fineness of French gold coins of that year to be 898 thousandths, ‘‘and a fraction.’’ It adds that this is an unworthy source of gain to Govern- ment, whose ambition it should be to have the coins correct. The ‘‘Moniteur’”’ of Nov. 20th (official organ), replies, that this is as near to standard as can be expected from the defects of practical opera- tion ; and that it is the duty of Government to prevent these ‘‘ ill-founded criticisms.”’ 1869.] 93 [Dubois. Our own assays for many years, have proved a deficiency in the French coins, averaging about one thousandth. The apology of the ‘‘Moniteur’’ has no just foundation. Both at this Mint, and at San Francisco, the gold coins are kept close to the mark, scarcely varying the tenth of a theusandth; as is proved by annual assays, and by foreign reports. British coinage is equally exact. This fact affords an argument against the project of International Coinage. If we work to 900, and France to 899 or less, and both pass alike, the difference is against us. We have a letter from a gentleman of South Carolina, an extract from which may lead to philosophical reflections, and therefore be in place : “Our State, poor as it is, is full of coin. Planters will have nothing to do with securities. They can’t spend money on negroes—they have land enough—and so they get gold, and bury it. I know of more than one who has over 30,000 dollars in gold, and of one who has 80,000 dollars. ‘Even the 5 cent nickel is hoarded to an enormous extent. We have sent great quantities into the interior, but in travelling in the country you will never meet with them. I am told they are regarded as of full silver value.”’ Herewith is shown to the Society, a specimen of silver ore from the White Pine Region of Nevada, which is now drawing so much attention. This new mining district is in Lander county, in the mountain range, east of the Reese River district. This specimen is from the ‘‘ Black Spider Mine,’’ and is a silicious gangue containing sulphides of copper and antimony, with rich seams of chloride of silver. It came marked ‘‘$10,000 per ton,’’ and Mr. Eck- feldt’s assay found it to contain half that proportion ; or as we prefer to say in such cases, $2.50 per pound ; inasmuch as such ores are not found by the ton ; and it is desirable to avoid the grandiloquence which favors deception. Mr. P. W. Sheafer communicated through the Secretary some boring records from the Anthracite Basins. The Committee on the disposal of the Hall reported, and on motion of Dr. Le Conte, the subject was postponed. The Publication Committee requested instructions as to the disposal of ninety pages of new matter, with several wood cuts and two more plates inserted by Prof. Cope in the me- moir now going through the press, explaining that the origi- nal estimate of cost would probably cover the expense of the new matter. On motion of Dr. Le Conte the subject was re- ferred to the original Committee. Pending nominations, Nos. 622 to 626 were read. And the Society was adjourned. Kirkwood. ] 94 [April 2, ON THE PERIODICITY OF THE SOLAR SPOTS. By DanreL KirRKWwoop. § L—The Results of Observation. (1.) The most ancient observations of sun-spots, of which we have any record, are those of the Chinese in the year 321, A. D. The first notice of their detection by Europeans is found in the annals of the Frankish kings. fno |New Groups.| Maz. and Min. Spots. ‘according to Wolf. 1826 277 22 118 1827 273 2 161 1828 282 0 225 Max, (1829.5) 1829 244 0 199 1830 217 1 190 1831 239 3 149 1832 270 49 84 1833 247 139 33 Min. (1833.8) 1834. 273 120 51 1835 244 18 173 1836 200 0 272 1837 168 0 333 Max. (1837.2) | 1838 202 0 282 | 1839 205 0 162 1840 263 3 152 1841 283 15 102 1842 307 64 68 1843 312 149 34 1844 321 111 52 Min. (1844.0) 1845 332 29 114 1846 314 1 157 1847 276 0 257 1848 278 0 330 Max. (1848.6) 1849 = OR 0 238 1850 308 2 186 1851 308 0 151 1852 337 2 125 1853 299 3 91 1854 334 65 67 1855 , 813 146 79 1856 321 193 34 Min. (1855.2) 1857 324 52 98 1858 335 0 188 1859 343 0 205 1860 332 0 211 Max. (1860.5) 1861 322 0 204 1862 317 3 160 1863 330 2 124 1864 325 4 130 1865 307 25 93 1866 | 349 76 45 1867 312 195 25 Min. (1867.0) 1868 (4.) This table presents a very marked periodicity ; the interval be- tween two consecutive maxima or minima, being, according to Schwabe, about 10 years. Soon after the announcement of this interesting dis- covery Dr. Lamont, of Munich, detected a corresponding decennial period in the variation of the magnetic needle; the epochs of maxima and minima in the latter coinciding with those in the former. These results have also been confirmed by other observers in places quite remote from each other; so that the decennial magnetic cycle may be regarded as well established. The equality of this period with that of the solar spots naturally suggested the hypothesis of their intimate rela- tionship. Such a causal connection may be difficult of explanation : the fact, however, is placed beyond doubt by the researches of Wolf and Sabine.* The former, besides carefully observing the sun-spots since # These magnetic variations, which will not be discussed in the present paper, are mentioned to — give completeness of view to the phenomena under consideration. It is also worthy of remark that the Aurora Borealis is believed to exhibit a corresponding periodicity. Kirkwood.] 96 [April 2, 1847, has discussed all accessible recorded observations, both solar and magnetic, bearing on the subject. He has thus ascertained a number of epochs of maxima and minima anterior to those observed by Schwabe,— from all of which he has determined the period of the spots to be 11.11 years. He undertakes to show, moreover, that this period coincides more exactly with that of the magnetic variation than the 10-year cycle of Lamont. (5.) The 56- Year Period.—Besides Schwabe’s period of 11 years, Wolf finds a larger cycle of 55 years, in which the solar activity passes through a series of changes. It is not, however, so distinctly marked as the cycle of Schwabe. Its last maximum was about 1837, and that preceding, about 1780. - The relative number of spots in different years, from 1749 to 1826, when Schwabe commenced his systematic observations, are given (according to Wolf) in Table II. TABLE II. SoLaR Spots, FROM 1749 To 1825. Year. | Rel. no. Maz.| Min.|| Year. | Rel. no. | Maz.| Min. of Spots. | | of Spots. 1749 63.8 1788 90.6 1788.5 1750 | 68.2 |1750.0 1789 | 85.4.2) 1751 40.9 1790 75.2 1752 33.2 4791 46.1 1753 23.1(?) 1792 52.7(2) 1754 73.8 1798 20.7(2) 1755 6.0 1755.7 1794 23.9 : 1756 8.8 1795 16.5 1757 30.4 1796 9.4 1758 38.3(2) 1797 5.6 1759 48.6(?) 1798 2.8 1798.5 1760 48.9 1799 5.9 1761 75.0 1761.5 1800 16.1 1762 50.6 1801 30.9(?) 1763 37.4 1802 38.3(?) 1764 34.5 1803 50.0(?) 1765 23.0 1804 70.0(2) |1804.0 1766 17.5(?) 1766.5)| 1805 50.0(2) 1767 33.6 1806 30.0(?) 1768 52.2 || 1807 10.0(?) 1769 85.7 1808 2.2 1770 79.4 1770.0 1809 0.8 W771 73.2 1810 0.0 1810.5 1772 49,2 1811 0.9 1773 39.8 1812 5.4 1774 47.6(?) 1813 Sell 1775 27.5 1775.8'| 1814 20.0(?) 1776 35.2.2) 1815 35.0(?) 1777 63.0 | 1816 45.5 1816.8 1778 94.8 | (| L817 43.5 1779 99.2 \1779.5 1818 34,1 1780 72.6(2) ‘| 1819 22.5 1781 (Gn 1820 8.9 1782 33.2?) 1821 4,3 1783 22.5(?) 1822 2.9 1784 4.4(?) 1784.8 1823 1.3 1823.2 1785 18.3 1824 6.7 1786 60.8 1825 17.4 1787 92.8 | (6.) The 233-Day Period.—Prof. Wolf, after carefully discussing his own and Schwabe’s observations, claims to have discovered two or three minor periods of solar activity. ‘ By projecting all the results in a con- he 1869.] 97 [Kirkwood. tinuous curve, he finds in it a series of small undulations succeeding each other at an average interval of 7.65 months,’’* or 233 days. (7.) The 27—Day Period.—The same astronomer thinks he has detected a short period of variation corresponding to the sun’s time of rotation with respect to the earth, or about 27 days. (8.) The 584-Day Period.—De La Rue, Stewart and Lewy, have found a period varying between 18 and 20 months; the mean being about 584 days.{ Other periods of maxima and minima will probably be detected ; but those we have enumerated are perhaps the only ones sufficiently well established to justify any attempt at explanation. § I.—Discussion of the Phenomena. (9.) That the solar spots are produced in some way by the planetary disturbance of the photosphere, is now generally admitted. As yet, however, the manner in which this influence is exerted, can be little more than matter of conjecture. If the action is analogous to that of the moon on the earth, the relative disturbing power of the different members of the system will be as follows : TABLE III. RELATIVE INFLUENCE OF THE PLANETS ON THE SuN’s SURFACE. YN | Name. Mass. | In Aph. |At M. Dist.| In Perih. ae greivsr (Hneke) Laer Tel 219 Mereury | 7 i? (Leverrier) ; 102 180 355 Venus E0L2IT 203 207 211 Earth 314760 95 100 105 Mars 2I9VLTIO 2 ts 4 Jupiter Torr 194 214 236 Saturn spay 8 10 12 Uranus 2t899 0 0 0 Neptune Tetey 0 0 0 This table is derived from the formula where ¢ represents the disturbing power of a planet, m, its mass, and =, its distance. (10.) The connection between the number of sun-spots and the posi- tions of the planets was noticed by Wolf as long since as 1858. In the Comptes Rendus, for January, 1859, he published a formula in which the number of sun-spots was made to depend on the different configurations of Venus, the Earth, Jupiter and Saturn. In the learned and interesting memoir—previously referred to—of De La Rue, Stewart and Lewy, the causal connection between the positions of Venus and Jupiter and the behaviour of sun-spots seems to be clearly established. Professor Wil- * Sir John Herschel, Quart. Jour. Sci., Vol. I., p. 228, April, 1864. y+ Am. Journ. of Sci. and Arts, for March, 1867. A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—M Kirkwood.] 9 8 [April 2, liam A. Norton, of Yale College, in his ‘‘Treatise on Astronomy,’’ pp. 434—436, presents a brief but valuable discussion of the same subject. An inspection, however, of Table III., shows that writers generally have given undue weight to Saturn’s influence. Again, although Mercury’s action at aphelion is but feeble, and even at his mean distance, less than that of Venus or Jupiter, his perturbing power at perihelion is the greatest of all planets—a fact which certainly demands consideration in any theory which refers the origin of solar spots to planetary agency. In short, after giving the subject much study and attention, I deem it impossible, with the numbers given in table III., and without the intro- duction of any modifying cause, to establish a general correspondence between the different sun-spot periods and those of regularly recurring planetary configurations. (11.) But the hypothesis that a particular portion of the sun’s surface is more favorable to spot formation—or, in other words, more susceptible to planetary influence—than others, will, it is believed, obviate all diffi- culty. Is there, then, any independent probability of the truth of this hypothesis? It is well known that the formation of spots occurs chiefly between particular parallels of /atétuwde, and that the numbers are greater in the northern than in the southern hemisphere. It seems, therefore, at least not improbable that a like difference may exist in regard to longi- tude. ‘*‘Sommering directs attention to the fact, that there are certain meridian belts on the sun’s disk, in which he had never observed a solar- spot for many years together.’’* Buys-Ballot, of Utrecht, has found, from an elaborate discussion of a great number of meteorological ob- servations, that there is a short period of variation in the amount of solar heat received by our planet; the period from maximum to maximum coinciding, at least approximately, with that of the sun’s rotation with respect to the earth. Sir William Herschel also believed that one side of the sun, on account of some peculiarity in its physical constitution, was less adapted to radiate light and heat than the other. (12.) On the hypothesis which we have ventured to suggest, the sun- spot period would be equal to the interval between two conjunctions of the disturbing planets on the heliographic meridian (designated by M) of that part of the surface most susceptible to their influence. It would depend, therefore, on the ratio of the sun’s period of rotation to the inter- val between two consecutive conjunctions of such planets. Or, as Mer- cury’s influence is extremely variable, a maximum would be produced by this planet’s perihelion passage, when the most susceptible part of the sun’s surface had the same, or nearly the same, heliocentric longitude. In order, then, to test this hypothesis, we must first inquire what is the most probable period of the sun’s rotation ? (13.) On account of the proper motion of the solar spots, the time of the sun’s rotation as determined by their apparent motion across the disk, varies from about 25 to 29 days. The proper motion of the spots * Humboldt’s Cosmos, Vol. LV., p- 378. 1869.] 99 (Kirkwood. has recently been discussed with great labor and ability by Professor Spéerer, of Anclam, and Mr. Carrington, of England, who haye shown conclusively that the rapidity of movement varies regularly with the lati- tude. The equatorial portions have the greatest angular velocity ; in other words, the proper motion of the spots is in a direction contrary to that of the sun’s rotation. The formula by which the astronomers named express the law for the dependence of the sun’s apparent period of rota- tion on the latitude are as follows: According to Carrington, 5 = 865’ — 165! sin 77. 3 . (1) a “¢ Spéerer, & == 116.°84'75 — 3°. 3812 sim (41°13! +7,). (2) where = is the are described in a solar day. The true time of rotation is supposed to be that indicated by an equatorial spot ; and on this assum p- tion, (1) gives P — 24,49711 — 244 28h 18m 93s : : : : : : (3) or, (2) gives P — 24.462447 — 24¢ 14h 59m Qs ; 5 : : : (4) The true value is probably between the results here given. (14.) But will this modifying element in the theory of planetary action afford a satisfactory explanation of the periodic recurrence of maxima and minima of solar spots? Let us consider. (a.) The 11-Year Cycle.—The anomalistic period of Mercury is 87.4 9702, and 87.9°9702 x 46 — 4046.96292 — 11.¥077 — T, 4 : : : (5) This is very nearly equal to Wolf’s value of the cycle, and agrees at least equally well with recorded facts.* Again, a = MLA = aon Ayn On ER ray which is nearly a mean between Spéerer’s and Carrington’s values of the sun’s period of rotation. With this, therefore, as the time of the sun’s axial revolution, we have 46 times the period of Mercury—equal to 163 times that of the sun’s rotation. The recurrence of maxima at mean intervals of 11.077 years would thus be accounted for.t Again, the epochs at which sun-spots were seen before the invention of the telescope may be presumed, with much probability, to have been nearly co-incident with the maxima epochs of Schwabe’s cycle. Now, it is a remarkable * The following astronomical cycles are also nearly equal to this period of variation : 1. 18 periods of Venus =11.074y. 4, 17¢,=11.030y 2. 35 syn. per. of Mer.=11.104 5. 28¢,=11.082 3. 1 period of Jupiter.—11.860 6. 45¢,=11.063, where ¢, =the syn. per. of Venus with respect to Jupiter ; ¢,=syn. per. of Mercury with respect to Venus; and ¢;—that of Mercury with respect to Jupiter. 7 It is not probable that Mercury is on the meridian M precisely at the epoch of perihelion passage. Itis only necessary to suppose this coincidence to occur when the planet is near the perihelion point. Even at the distance of 20° the diminution of the disturbing power would be extremely small. Kirkwood.] 100 [April 2, fact that all of those dates given in Art. (1), except perhaps the last, har- monise with the value which we have adopted for Schwabe’s period of variation. Thus, From 321, A.D. to 1860, we have 139 periods of 11.072+years each. Co al to 807 oe dt sf 11.045 sf *¢ 807.22 to 840.5 3 ne 11.093 ts “¢ 840.5 to 1096 oS 23 a 11.109 me «<< 1096 to 1161 Be 6 Hf 10.833 ve Seema Git to 1590.9 ‘* 39 Cy 11.024 ve Hn mlO9OE9 to 1750.0‘ 14 es 11.367(2) os Smet O20 to 1829.0 ‘‘ 7 4 11.286 ae omens 2940 to 1860.5 ‘‘ 5) af 10.500 a The variability of the period will be hereafter considered. (b.) Wolf’s Cycle of 56-57 Years.—The synodic revolution of Mercury is 115787748, and 115.487748 x 177 — 20510.9 31896 — 56-y 15324 — T, c ; (7) In this period the line of conjunction of Mercury and the earth advances 56.15324 revolutions. Now, T, 826.15324 ~ This value of the sun’s period of rotation differs from that in (6) by only 29 seconds. Adopting it, therefore, we find that Mercury and the earth will be in conjunction on the same heliographic meridian at regularly recurring epochs of 56 years and 56 days. (c.) The 233-—Day Period.—The mean interval between the consecutive conjunctions of Venus and Jupiter is 2367992. The close agreement of these periods, leaves little room to doubt that the latter is the true period of spot variation. (d.) The 27-Day Period.—This is at once satisfactorily accounted for on the hypothesis prepared in Art (11). (e.) The 584-Day Period.—The identity of this period with that of the synodic revolution of Venus has already been indicated by De La Rue, Stewart and Lewy. (15.) It would be easy to point out theoretically other periods of varia- tion, which an exact discussion of observations would probably confirm. It will be obvious, however, that the actual phenomena must be ex- ceedingly complicated. The great eccentricity of Mercury’s orbit; the ever-varying configurations of the disturbing planets; the probably unequal susceptibility of different parts of the sun’s surface to their influence; combined, perhaps, with other causes, but imperfectly under- stood, must render the complete discussion of the phenomena both operose and difficult. The subject, in short, presents a new and interest- ing department of the theory of perturbations. (16.) A careful inspection of tables I. and II. will indicate that Schwabe’s cycle is lable to considerable variation, both in duration and intensity. The epochs of greatest disturbance were 1837 and 1848, when the number of spots was about 50 per cent. greater than in 1828 and 1860. DAds628 24a 19) 49m 505 10 ey 1869.] 1 0) 1 [Kirkwood. The observations of recent years seem to render it probable, moreover, that the epoch of extraordinary activity is passing away. The number of new groups in 1867 was less than in any other year since the com- mencement of Schwabe’s observations; while the whole number counted during the 11 years from 1857 to 1867 inclusive, as compared with that of the 11 years immediately preceding, was as 1483 to 1715. (17.) The Great Irregularity of the 11-Year Cycle from 1828 to 1860.— Mercury was in perihelion about 1838.277, and this was probably the maximum epoch depending on Mercury alone. But the observed epoch of greatest disturbance was about 1837.2. Let us, then, inquire whether any configuration of the disturbing planets will account for this marked deviation from regularity. Mercury and Venus had the same mean longitude (343°) near the 1st of April, 1837, or, about 1837.247*, when Mercury was at less than its mean distance from the sun. If this conjunction occurred on, or very near, the solar meridian M, an extraordinary disturbance of the photosphere would evidently result. Now, the interval from 1837.247 to 1838.277 was 376.92075, during which time the sun would have performed 15 entire rotations ; also the arc between longitude 343° and 75°, (that of Mercury’s perihelion, ) is 92°. The daily motion of Mercury, moreover, when nearest the sun is about 5°. If, then, the conjunction of 1837.247 occurred over the solar meridian M, and if we represent by ¢ the number of days from 1838.277 till Mercury was on the same solar meridian, we shall have, taking the sun’s period of rotation as adopted in (6) 376.2075 + ¢ =---_ == 24,826 . s 5 2 : ‘ : (9) 1B D2 Se Ont whence ¢ = 3.98 +, and 5° ¢=—19° + . : : : a (10) Hence the longitude of Mercury when on the solar meridian M in 1838, and at other recent maximum epochs, was 94°, or 19° from the perihelion. Again, the interval between two consecutive conjunctions of Mercury and Venus is 1444.5651, and 144.4 5651 » 28 — 4047.4 8228, exceeding the period of 163 solar rotations by 1.419. It is easy to see, therefore, that when the mean longitudes of the planets were the same (about 348°) in 1848.328, the ecliptical longitude of the solar meridian M was 12° in advance, and that the disturbing effect would consequently be diminished, although still sufficient to fix the maximum in 1848 instead of 1849. In like manner the further decrease of solar activity in 1859—60, as well as the observed increase from 1828 to 1837, is readily accounted for. (18.) Mercury and the earth had the same mean longitude, 0°, + about 1837. 726. Mercury and Venus, es ee 34894 0~«(* 1837.247, * [his is not the precise epoch of conjunction; wemay adopt it, however, without material error, It may be remarked that a great disturbance of the photosphere would also be produced by the passage of the planets successively over the meridian M, shortly before the time of actual con- junction. Kirkwood.] 102 [April 2 The interval between these epochs was 174.195. Hence if these con- junctions occurred on the solar meridian M, the sun, during the interval, must have performed 7.047 revolutions. Now, 174.4 95 Rona the same value of the sun’s period of rotation as was found in (6). The harmony of these results affords a striking confirmation of the proposed hypothesis. (19.) We have given a very imperfect discussion of the spot-cycles due to the disturbing effect of Mercury, Venus, and the earth. These results must be materially modified by Jupiter, whose disturbing influence has not yet been considered. It is not too much to hope that by means of a more exact analysis, in which the action of each of the planets, Mercury, Venus, the earth, and Jupiter shall be taken into account, the condition of the sun’s surface may be predicted with as much certainty as the ebbing and flowing of the tides at any particular locality on the surface of our planet. (20.) An easy calculation will show that the greatest tide produced in the sun’s photosphere by any single planet must be less than-an inch in height. The actual disturbance, therefore, is certainly much greater than might reasonably have been expected from a cause apparently so insignificant. It is conceivable, however, that the physical constitution of the fluids forming the luminous surface may be such that a very slight impulse may be sufficient to create a rupture, and thus occasion the phe- nomena observed. (21.) The foregoing discussion justifies, we think, the following con- clusions : 1. A connection between the behaviour of sun-spots and the configura- tions of certain planets has been placed beyond reasonable doubt. 2. The theory, however, of spot formation by planetary influence is encumbered with anomalies and even inconsistencies, unless we admit the co-operation of a modifying cause. 3. The hypothesis that a particular part of the solar surface is more susceptible than others to planetary disturbance is rendered probable by the observations of different astronomers. 4. The 11-year cycle of spot-variation is mainly dependent on the influence of Mercury. 5. The marked irregularity of this period from 1822 to 1867, is ina great measure due to the disturbing action of Venus. 6. Wolf’s 56-year cycle is determined by the joint action of Mercury and the earth. And, Finally, the hypothesis proposed accounts, as we have seen, for all the welt defined cycles of spot-variations. mE oaa'go6: BuLoomMiIneton, InpIANA, March 15th, 1869. 1869.] 103 [Chase, COSMICAL RELATIONS OF LIGHT TO GRAVITY. By Piiny EARLE CHASE. Prof. Kirkwood’s very interesting presentation of the evidence which indicates special lines of disturbance on the Sun’s surface, furnishes a new analogy to guide the researches of investigators. The well known de- pendence of one class of magnetic fluctuations on the position of ocean meridians, strengthens his hypothesis of similar meridians beneath the solar photosphere* which may possibly be detected by spectroscopic ob- servations, while the coincidence of luminous, magnetic, and gravitating lines encourages renewed efforts to trace out the fundamental harmonies of our planetary system. Wheatstone’s experiments have been generally regarded as proving that the velocity of electricity is greater than that of light. But the out- break of the solar spot recorded by Sir John Herschel, and the simulta- neous agitation of the magnetic needles at Kew and elsewhere, render it probable that electrical action is sometimes, if not always, transmitted with precisely the same velocity as light. May it not be that the induc- tion between the successive coils of a wire, however widely they may be separated, produces a spark before the electric current has traversed the whole extent of the wire? Or, if the wire were transparent, is there any reason for supposing that it would transmit a wave of light less rapidly than one of electricity? The analogies to which attention has been called by numerous ob- servers, between phenomena which are dependent upon various forms of force, may be supplemented by relations, no less curious and interesting, of light to cosmical gravitation, some of which are shown in the follow- ing equations. They appear to open a new field for inquiry, in which analysts may, perhaps, find profitable employment. Let the sun and planets be denoted by the following subscript figures. Oi; $25 933 Gis $5; inner asteroid,; mean asteroid,; superior asteroid,; Yo5 2103 Bas Vio Let h be the modulus of solar light, on the hypothesis that the luminif- erous ether is an indefinitely elastic, material medium, and that, therefore, h = , u denoting the velocity of light. =o) V = velocity, and T — time of theoretical planetary revolution at the surface of the sun, or of a planet. 0. = velocity, and t, = time, of axial rotation of n 7 — radius m — Mass d — mean distance from sun ¥ — centre of gyration — //2_ * See also Henshall on 6 of ie Q, and 2 with same face of sun. Cosmos, xvii., Noy. 1860. p. 573. Chase.] 1 04 [April 2, e — 1 + orbital excentricity 2 — effective inertia of votation — moment of inertia divided by time of revolution = m 7/a Then } i Tr I, = BS (=) -*. Ot, = U, and» = 29, eigen : Bony, Uae u gi u 4 u iP 2 crags (ay Mid of zther Pi Te m 3 coe (+ 3 d, i 4 dy, = Go 5 dy (2 z Ter Gre eee 6 d, = € d, 64 9. uy Gy = oF d, emai 8. d,; = 2 (d, — 7a,) 9 dy 1 Xb pies LtOy 10 iy Ew il. V2 ds = a 12. 7d, = d, 13. dy. x dy (S z Oh S< Pi M4 14 OF (oe oo ds a) = OP ah 15 Nap v7 1 AIG Vs —= Uy SG “ & x a Ug M4 The motion of the air in the earth’s annual revolution and daily rotation, is slightly undulatory, but hardly perceptibly differing from a regular ellipse. Its motions are controlled, mainly by solar, and subordinately by terrestrial force, the former giving a motion of 63.8, and a moment of in- ertia of 548,000,000 times the latter. According to Marriotte’s law, the specific gravity of the atmosphere should be determined by the conjoined pressure of solar and terrestrial gravity. The liquid and solid portions of the earth, however, are not subject to Marriotte’s Law. In any fluid which is simultaneously affected by two attracting masses, e. g: by the earth and the sun, it would seem that two systems of waves should be generated, moving with velocities v, v! such that » = V2gh w= V2gh But if the fluid is on the earth’s surface, = i!, while at the centres of ORGE, G) 3G B38 UD 2 Tic 1869. ] 105 [Chase. In the orbital motion the pressure of solar force is nearly constant, but terrestrial gravity tends to maintain the atmosphere at a uniform level, orin a constant volume. Now the kinetic energy under constant pres- sure : that under constant volume : : 1.421 :1, or very nearly :: 72:1. M. Treves found that the number of oscillations in a tuning fork was increased ,+, by magnetizing the fork. Farther experiments are desir- able to determine whether his result may be accepted as a general one, but it may be temporarily regarded as curiously coincident with our hypothetical case. in which aye gyle « BE ery Dy Ve = 1/ Qn = V ne! ie Ess Fer a May cas S17: 12: y 2m, : V mM, 18. V 2m,: Vm, : : sp. gr. water : sp. gr. air (at mean tempera- ture) Sy 1 119° (2m, \a: ( M4 4 2 Gh 3 Oa Is < 9 @) 4 = 20. 2 Os ty X I; V4 21. The inertia of the air which is retarded by the thermal and tidal ‘‘brakes’’ appears to be overcome and the wave-equilibrium re- stored, after g, has acted for a sufficient time to give V,. ‘ yearl 2 22. Dy = (aa barometric range ) at St. Helena x g, t,? a peck oe 2 23. BV Pion DS 8 WV Ten & OCR BUR OX (a) 24. Mean vel. of sound = mean vel. of air. 25. If * be divided in proportion to the 7 of the several planets, TY Jupiter’s proportion will be 8, of 1125.84 — 692.83, and 692.83 » V, = w. It may be desirable to modify some of these equations by considerations connected with centrifugal force. The closeness of the principal analo- gies may be illustrated by a few examples, in which I assume the following values asa basis of comparison: 1 : = 1.449662; 4 7,= 5.630384 .°. 4 k= 4 m 11.302517 ;—and Newcomb’s estimates, a = 326,800; d, = 92,380,000 ; 4 = 185,600. Spo6rer. Faye. Carrington. Kirkwood. Theory. Mean. 1 t, = 24.62447 dy. 25.07472 dy. 24.9711 dy. 24.82594 dy 25.0297 dy. 24.9052 dy. o*. U = 188,697 m. 185,267 m. 186,035 im. 187.123 m. 185,600 m. 186,528 m. Theoretical. Assumed. (ile 30.070552 h 3. PaO MONE! ees A suranga = 468,770 465,604. d. 4 —! _ 682.3516 5% ores 3.1416 3.153. Ty d. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—N Chase.] 106 [April 2, d 5. = GaSe . t _ 326,800 (327,280]* 7 mM di, 30.070552 d. 10. 2a Gales 12am 1 a aE Ge = 81416 83,1524. d 155. 2695 5 Me 216,395 218, 142. r; OF 17. He cite .. 22 __ 333, 750 326,800. o} ‘ GBs ; ; ter f 18. Mean s.g.——.— — 807.45+ .-. 7" 325,380 326,800. air Ws . al i O 19. (2 x 826,800)? — 28.43 .-, 4 _ 98.48 28,162. 9s 20. Thine Se a Lg OR gary TO 18.4. 1 21, 29,1302 60) 18. 376aneiya a) Nin) 8:3 Ogos 135 \2 2 22. (ane qt, —92,361,900m. .-.d,—= 92,361,900 92,380,000. . 438° XK Zar o4, cee a Za 1112.07 ft, .- vel. — 1112 o7a mem grog 4 25, 692.83 V, — 187,750 m. 1. = 187,750 185,600. 26. The earth’s proportion would be .000862 of 1125.84 — .97, and 97 x Vi Me 405 _ _mass of sun 2, 38 © mass of planets 27. aU SS) Ge IY, = Oh The following estimates of the sun’s mass and distance, and the veloc- ity of light, are derived from the foregoing equations : From mag- From sp. From From at- From an- From in- From netic accel- gravity length of mospher- nual baro- ertia of mean esti- eration. of air. day. ic inertia. m’icrange. Jupiter. mate ofgif Sun’s mass 333,750 325,380 341,560 325.520 326,610 338,490 321,940 Sun’s distance 93,033,200 92,246,000 93,886,300 92,260,000 92,361,900 93,450,000 91,920,000 Vel. of light 186,910 185,330 125,630 185,360 185,560 187,750 184,670 The study of gaseous molecular motions may, perhaps, be aided by the analogies of luminous vibrations. The equation ~ — g, t, seems to be an important one. A solitary planet or particle would acquire the velocity of revolution in a circular orbit in 4 of the time of revolution, but the particles of the hypothetical elastic fluid to which the luminous vibrations are attributed, under the combined pressure of g, and of their own adja- * As the value assumed for r, was derived from this equation, the theoretical and assumed results of course correspond exactly. The bracketed number corresponds to: the ordinary value d4 nm t+ According to Johnston’s Physical Atlas, the average of the air and ocean temperatures on the parallels of 45° latitude, is 539.69 F. he specific gravity of air at that temperature is ] + 807.45. { The retardations of the atmospheric tides at St. Helena, at Abs 6a 12 = 216.4. The estimates vary from 214.9 to 217.5. hy and is respectively, atte jfk 9 pas) m . . = m a f C are 59’ 85, 26 and 31 , the mean retardation being 5014 [See Trans, A, P. S., vol. 13, py 128. | @ Mean of polar (32°) and equatorial (82°) = 579. Isothermal of 57° = latitude 439°. 1869.] 107 [Sheafer. cent particles, do not acquire the oscillatory velocity of light until yg, has acted for } the time of rotation. Does this indicate successive vibra- tions in the directions of three co-ordinate axes ? And does the tidal action of the planets contribute to the disturbance from which the vibrations originate? The sun-spot theory, and equations 25, 26, and 27, favor such a hypothesis. The proportionality indicated by (1,) Ob 8h 88h Ge RA ae Ph becomes significant, if we consider that any equatorial particle must move through the distance 2 z 7, before it returns to the same relative position, and that during the entire series of disturbances, through which it passes in the interval, g, is exerting an energy, the resultant of which is equivalent to a fall of g, ¢,2. BORING RECORDS FROM THE ANTHRACITE BASIN. By Mr. P. W. SHEAFER. Record of Lower Boring. Nassau Shaft. One mile north of Scranton. From Surface below R. Road. 8! 3" Rock, ay (OY 11”) 3 Coal, 1’ 0” Rock, 2! Sandy Gravel, 2 Slate, 6// Rock, aly a Slate, Ome Sand Stone, 8! 4” Light Slate, 4! 6! Dark Slate, 4lr 39/ 10” Coal, a Dark Slate, Ri wal Hard Rock, 6// Dark Slate, oh ai 9’ 11" Coal, 3/ (0! Slate, off Ceal, OL 4’ 3" Slate, 2 Slate, (hard bands,) 1/11’ Hard Rock, 3! 6!’ Slate, (hard bands,) 20/ 8’ Dark Hard Reck, BO gu Dark Slate, 10’ 6” 44’ gl’ Coal, pure, 8! 4N Coal, bony, Syl Coal, good, 6!’ Coal, bony, 6" Coal, good, ay 10’ 6” Hard Rock, 1’ 4” 128’ 9” Sheafer. ] 108 [April 2, The above is from the journal kept by Wm. Barryman, reported to Mr. P. W. Sheafer, Eng. Mines, Pottsville, in 1857. Rocks dip gently South. Record of Upper Boring. Nassau Coal Company. One mile north of Scranton, Pa. From surface, 13/ 00” Rock, 12) G 26! 27 Coal mixed with Slate, ROL Light Rock, 21’ 3! Dark Sand, 6” Hard Rock, May als 30/ 10/ Coal, W007 Slate, dark soft, 7 OY Slate, dark, We ay Rock, light, 12’ 4” Slate, dark, 4! -Q!! 187 6/! Coal, gy Black Slate, Diam Oe Coal (with Slate, ) wy Coal, pure, ay (OY oO Slate, dark, hard, LOG 0” Rock, OH Slate, TUS a OY Coal, We ey Slate, (hard bands, ) BY a Rock, 1’ 0” Slate, (hard bands, ) 6/38 12/ 117 Coal, 9/ BI Slate, dark hard, 12/ 9” Rock, light, Die Slate, (hard bands, ) S/O! Rock, hard, WT By4 Slate bands, 4’ 3” Slate and hard bands, 18’ 10/’ Slate, dark, 8 are Rock, hard, BY OY Rock, light, GM? Slate, dark, 9/7 66’ 4! Coal, pure, 8’ 0” Slate, dark, By G” Slate, hard, light, WW? Rock, hard, 8” Rock, hard, light, Nel Bi Slate, dark, 1 OQ! 25! 6// Coal, ae. (oi Slate, dark, WO" Slate, light, 6! 9// Stay 1869. ] Coal, Slate, light, Coal, Slate, black, 6/ Slate, (hard bands, ) 8’ Slate, dark, 2! Rock, light, 5/ Slate, dark, 8/ Slate, light, 8/ Rock, light, ile Slate, black, 3/ Rock, hard, Slate, black, 1’ Coal, Slate, Rock, hard, 109 11 qi 5// 1// 8// 6// 0” 11! a 8! 6// 10// (Sheafer. WE gi 1 Oo” 9/ gir Ay 4" HOM RS 91 (measured on rods) 309’ 34 Nore. Journal kept by Mr. Berryman, and reported to Mr. P. W. Sheafer, in 1857. Swartz Boring above Dunmore, about N. 78° 2E. (7,000 feet) from the corners, in Dunmore, near Scranton. P. W. Sheafer. Earth from Surface down, Sand Rock, hard, coarse, Sand Rock, yellow, Coal, Sand Rock and Slates, Blue Rock, hard, Slate, Coal, Slate, Sand Rock, Blue Rock, hard, Slate, Coal, Slate, Blue Rock, hard 9! 28' By Mr. Stevenson, Jan. 6, 1857, to National Anthracite Company's Cross Section. Top Rock. Slate, Bony Coal, 2! Top Bench of worked Coal, Middle Bench of Coal, Bottom Bench of Coal, il Bony Coal, rough, 2! Slate, 19/ 6// 0” 0” 0” O// OQ’! 49/ O/! 5/ Oo” Oo” O// 6// 49) 6/1 4/ oI 6// O// 0” QO’ 62/ 6// 4/ 6// 0’ Ley O// 190/ 8// 5/ 6// 10” patil 10/7 to 2! OV | Sheafer.] ] 10 [April 16, Tolerably Good Top Slate, Top Bench of good Coal, 4’ 10” Slate, 6” 6/ 14" Bottom Bench of Rough Coal, 95! The above is a section of the two beds of Coal in the Lackawanna Coal Basin, 1} miles west from Scranton, furnished by the boss miner to P. W. Sheafer, March 11, 1857. Opened by two drifts on the South bank of the Lackawanna, where the Coal dips about 5° West. These Coal were known as the 9 and 11 foot beds. Stated Meeting, April 16, 1869. Present, seventeen members. Dr. GkorcE B. Woop, President, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from J. C. Mill, dated Blackheath Park, March 22, 1869. Letters acknowledging the receipt of diplomas of member- ship were received from John T'yndall, dated London, March 20th, and from H. A. Newton, dated Yale College, March 2d, 1869. Donations for the Library were received from the Royal Academy and Observatory at Turin, the Geological Society and M. Bossange at Paris, the R. Astronomical Society and Mr. Quaritch at London, the Royal Society at Edinburgh, the Portland Society of Natural History, the Rev. J. B. Perry, the Essex Institute and Cambridge Museum, the editors of the Journal of Medical Sciences, Dr. Isaac Lea, J. B. Lippin- cott & Co., and the Fairmount Park Commissioners of Phila- delphia. Professor Spencer F. Baird, of Washington, was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the late member, John Cassin, of Philadelphia. The Committee to which was referred additions to the Memoir of Professor Cope, reported in favor of publication. 1 1 1 [Lesley. Professor Cresson introduced the subject of the brilliant Aurora Borealis of the preceding evening, which Dr. Emer- son, Mr. Price, and Mr. Chase described as seen by them. Mr. Lesley said that it was so brilliant and roseate at Washington, D. C., that the fire engines were taken out; that it did not invade the southern half of the heavens to any extent; but that he observed a brightly illuminated feather, 30° or 40° in length from east to west, float slowly west-north-westward, some little distance south of the zenith, gradually expanding its dimensions but scarcely changing its form, during half an hour. Its head or eastern point was, when first seen, say 40° east of the meridian, and at the end of half an hour, quite that distance west of the meridian. It was evidently an electrified cirrus cloud, and could no doubt have been watched until it sank to the horizon, but for the fact that it passed lengthwise directly under the moon, then about four days old, and very bright. Castor and Pollux shone brightly through it, as it passed beneath them. At one time an auroral feather shot from its northern edge and streamed along. westward, nearly parallel with its northern edge, continuing brilliant about twenty seconds. Soon after, an electric spot glowed suddenly in its centre for about the same length of time. With these exceptions, it appeared steadily and uniformly illumi- nated. Mr. Lesley compared it with the triple curtain aurora which he saw July 23d, 1862, on the banks of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and described in the Proceedings of the Society, Vol. IX, page 60. Dr. Emerson called the attention of the Society to the Rob- bins’ process for preserving wood from mould and decay by the injection of the vapors of coal tar. Professor Cresson ex- plained the difference between this and other processes for attaining the same end; especially one now in use in Phila- delphia, in which the spontaneous inflammability of wood injected with high volatile hydrocarbons is guarded against by a subsequent injection of the surface with silicates. Nominations Nos. 622 and 626 were read and spoken to. At the request of the recommenders, nomination No. 626, after being discussed, was postponed, for the purpose of affording an opportunity for associating with it other names mentioned in the discussion. Nos. 622 to 625 were then balloted for. The Rittenhouse Clock. The curators were authorized to have it put in complete order, although it is no longer fit to use for astronomical purposes. The following named persons were declared duly elected members of the Society : 112 D. G. Brinton, M. D., of Philadelphia. A. D. White, President Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y. J. H. C. Coffin, U. 8. N., Supt. Naut. Almanac, Washing- ton, DAC; Joseph Wharton, of Philadelphia. And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, May 7, 1869. Present, nine members. JOHN C. CREsSON, Vice-President, in the Chair. Dr. Brinton was introduced to the presiding officer, and took his seat. Letters accepting membership were received from J. H. C. Coffin, dated Nautical Almanac Office, Washington, April 21, 1869; D. G. Brinton, dated 1001 North Sixth street, Phila- delphia, April 19, 1869; A. Carlier, dated 6 rue de Milan, Paris, Avril 19, 1869, and D. White, dated Cornell Univer- sity, Ithaca, N. Y., May 1. Donations for the Library were received from the Royal Academies and Societies at St. Petersburg, Berlin, Copen- hagen, Gottingen, Munich, and Dublin; the Societies of Sei- ence at Offenbach, Frankfort, Bordeaux, Manchester and Leeds; the Geological Societies at Vienna, and Geographical Societies at London and Paris, the Zoological Botanical So- ciety at Vienna, the London Astronomical, Chemical, Meteor- ological and Asiatic Societies, the Boston Natural Historical Society and Wool Manufacturers Association, the American Pharmaceutical Society, Academy of Natural Sciences, Frank- lin Institute, House of Refuge, Deaf and Dumb Institute, Dr. C. D. Meigs, the United States Sanitary Commission, the Congressional Library, and Mr. IT. B. Brooks, Civil Engineer at, Negaunee, Michigan. Dr. Hayden presented, for publication in the Transactions, an Appendix to his report of the Geology on the Yellow and Missouri Rivers, under the superintendence of Captain Ray- ‘ May 7, 1869.] 113 [Chase. nolds, said Appendix consisting of a sub-report on the Carices of the Expedition made by the late Dr. Dewey. On motion, the Memoir (with its five plates) was referred to a Committee consisting of Mr. Durand, Mr. James, and Dr. Ruschenberger. Mr. Rothwell, Engineer of Mines, exhibited through the Secretary a published copy of his new map of the eastern end of the first Anthracite Coal Basin, with cross sections, showing the excessive plication of the synclinal. (See Plate 2, fig. 2.) Mr. Chase communicated by permission of Mr. Pierce, Di- rector of the U. S. Coast Survey, the more recent results of his Investigations into the rain gauge curves. The observations which were examined, and the method of treatment, were described in my discussion of the tidal rain-fall of Philadelphia, (ante, vol. x., pp. 528-7). The frequent tendency to triple maxima and minima, which I have at- tributed to lunar influence on the daily barometric spheroid,—the estab- lishments, both of temperature, and of position with reference to great bodies of water,—the different relations of precipitation to atmospheric pressure at different seasons of the year, —the influence of the moon and of each of the principal planets on temperature, winds, cloudiness, and both frequency andamount of rain-fall, the probability that the influences upon temperatnre are due to the induced aerial currents and not to radiation, (a South wind raising, and a North wind depressing the thermometer),—the secular variation, which appears to depend principally upon the combined action of the Moon and Jupiter,—are all clearly indicated by the normal curves. Most of the curves show a great similarity at the opposite equinoxes, and a great contrast at the opposite solstices, both at Greenwich and at Philadelphia. But in the total rain-fall at different solar hours, the equi- noctial and solstitial contrast is modified by a synchronous divergence at the two stations, the Philadelphia curves differing greatly at the equinox- es and being nearly alike at the solstices. This peculiarity may be owing to the fact that the prevailing winds at Greenwich are from the ocean, while those at Philadelphia are from the land, so that an atmosphere sat- urated with moisture is normal at the former station, abnormal at the latter. The planetary curves are so strongly marked that it seems impossible to account for them by any action analogous to the Moon’s differential at- traction. They may perhaps be satisfactorily explained by the moment of inertia, and the constantly and often rapidly varying distance of the centre of gravity of the earth and disturbing planet. Dr. Brinton communicated the information which he had obtained respecting the valuable Arawak MSS. Grammar and OPES Vi OL EXO 114 Vocabulary by Shultz, in the library of this Society, and the desirableness of publishing a discussion of their relations to other MSS. existing in Europe. It appears that the language which Columbus reported to be common to all the larger islands of the W. Indies was neither Carib, nor Maya, but genuine Arawak, scarcely differing from that now spoken be- tween the Amazon and Orinoco, not more than Chaucer's English from the English of to-day. It is an added proof that the whole fauna (man included) of the islands outside the Gulf Stream came from the Spanish Main, the movement being in the opposite direction to that of the fauna of N. America which terminated its course in Florida. A letter and enclosed testimonial note of the proceedings of the Michaux Legacy were read, from M. Carlier, announ- cing the final settlement of the legacy at Paris and in Pon- toise; and on motion of Mr. Chase, these documents were referred to the Committee on the Michaux Legacy with in- structions to prepare the needful papers, and procure the sig- nature of the President of this Society, and to remit funds for the expenses incurred ; and they are hereby authorized to draw upon the Treasurer of the Society for the necessary amount. A communication from the Janitor was referred to the Committee on the Hall. And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, May 21, 1869. Present, seventeen members. Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. Mr. Wharton was introduced to the presiding officer, and took his seat. A letter returning thanks for election to membership, was received from the President of the United States, dated Ex- ecutive Mansion, April 24, 1869. A letter acknowledging the receipt of a set of the Society’s 115 Proceedings, Vol. I to X., was received from the London Me- teorological Office, May 9th, 1869, and from the R. Academy at Lisbon, acknowledging receipt of No. 77. Donations for the Library were reported from the Berlin Academy, Dr. Jarvis, Mr. Haven, Dr. Le Conte, Prof. Coffin, the New York Canal Commissioners, Buffalo Young Men’s Association, Cincinnati Observatory, and California Academy of Sciences. The Committee on Dr. Dewey’s Carices, &c., reported, re- commending its publication in the Transactions, which was so ordered. A communication and letter was received for the Magellanic Premium, read by title and regularly referred to the Board of Officers. Dr. Horn presented for publication in the Transactions a paper entitled Revision of the Tenebrionide of America north of Mexico, by Geo. H. Horn, M. D., which was referred to Dr. Le Conte, Dr. Leidy and Dr. Bridges. Mr. Lesley exhibited a photo-lithograph of a section across the Alleghany mountains, to illustrate the proportionate pli- cation of the earth’s surface to its radius. See Plate 2, Fig. 1. Dr. Hayden’s Geological Map of the Upper Missouri was exhibited, together with many sketches and photographs of scenery and structure. It was afterwards resolved, that the Secretaries be instructed to address a letter to Gen’l A. A. Humphreys, Chief Hngineer U 5S. A., expressing the desire of the A. P. S. to have the results of the Geological explorations made in the Territories of the U.S. by Dr. Newberry, Hayden and others, while employed by the Government, made speedily available for present use by publication at the expense of the Government, or in such other manner as may be thought expedient. The Committee to which was referred the publication of the Choltee MS. recommended its publication in the Pro- ceedings, under the supervision of Dr. Brinton, which was so ordered, and on motion of Mr. Price, the Secretaries were au- thorized to print additional copies, according to their best judgment. And the Society was adjourned. 116 Stated Meeting, June 18, 1869. Present, ten members. Mr. FraueEy, Vice-President, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from Professor Rolliston, University Oxford, England, May 29. Letters of invoice were received from the Imperial Geog. Society of Russia, May 15; U.S. Nav. Obs. May 19th; Cin- cinnati Obs. May; and A. M. Mayer, of Bethlehem, May 26. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Im- perial Geographical Society of Russia. The Cincinnati Ob- servatory requested the completion of its imperfect set of the Proceedings. The Meteorological Office reported its change of address to No. 116 Victoria street, London, 8. W. Donations for the Library were received from the Paris Geographical Society and School of Mines, the London As- tronomical Society, Prof. Rolliston, of Oxford, the Bath So- ciety, W. T. Blanford, the Boston N. H. Society, the Rhode Island Society for En. Dom. Industry, Franklin Institute, College of Pharmacy, Medical News, Philadelphia University, West Penn Academy, Prof. Mayer, Prof. Ennis, Provost C. J. Stille, the U.S. Sanitory Commission, Naval Observatory, Census Bureau, R. W. Rossiter, Wilmington Institute, and St. Louis Public School Commissioners. Mr. Cope made a communication concerning a discovery of certain fossil remains found in New Jersey, the structure of which indicated a connection between the bird and reptile classes, and described the peculiarities of construction pre- sented by the fossil referred to. He also exhibited fossil re- mains of the Plesiosaurus and Mososaurus orders or types, and described their relation to other genera of similar type. 117 June 18, 1869.] [Cope. The fossil which Prof. Cope exhibited was the almost perfect cranium of a Mosasauroid reptile, the Clidastes propython. He explained various peculiarities of its structure, as the moveable articulation of certain of the mandibular pieces on each other, the suspension of the os-quadratum at the extremity of a cylinder composed of the opisthotic, &c., and other peculiarities. He also explained, from specimens, the characters of a large new Plesiosauroid from Kansas, discovered by Wm. E. Webb, of Topeka, which possessed deeply biconcave vertebrae, and anchylosed veural arches, with the zygapophyses directed after the manner usual among vertebrates. The former was thus shown to belong to the true Sauropterygia, and not to the Streptosauria, of which Hlasmosarus was type. Several distal caudals were anchylosed, without chevron bones, and of depressed form, while proximal caudals had anchylosed diapophy- ses and distinct chevron bones. The form was regarded as new, and called Polycotylus latipinnis, from the great relative stoutness of the paddle. He also gave an account of the discovery, by Dr. Samuel Lockwood, of Keyport, of a fragment of a large Dinasaur, in the clay which underlies immediately the clay marls below the lower green sand bed in Monmouth County, N. J. The piece was the extremities of the tibia and fibula, with astragalo-caleaneum anchylosed to the former, in length about sixteen inches; distal width fourteen. The confluence of the first series of tarsal bones with each other, and with the tibia, he regarded as a most interesting peculiarity, and one only met with elsewhere in the reptile Compsognathus and in birds. He therefore referred the animal to the order Symphypoda, near to Compsognathus Wagn. The extremity of the fibula was free from, and received into a cavity of the astragalo-cal- caneum, and demonstrated what the speaker had already asserted, that the fibula of Ignanodon and Hadrosaurus had been inverted by their describers. The medullary cavity was filled with open cancellous tissue. The species, which was one half larger than the type specimen of Hadro- saurus foulkii, he named Ornithotarsus immanis. Dr. H. C. Wood spoke of his investigations with regard to the Fresh Water Aloze of Eastern North America. Pending nominations, Nos. 628 to 638, new nominations, Nos. 638 to 640, were read. Dr. H. Allen offered and read a paper ‘“‘On Human Oste- ology, containing the heads of divisions of a more extended communication, which he proposes to present at a future time. Allen.) 1 1 8 {June 18, 1869. The following observations have been instituted with the object of testing the value of the following propositions: Ne That a true conception of the skeleton can be only secured by studying em- bryology and osteology conjointly. For inasmuch as the skeleton is the frame-work adapted to protect internal organs, and to afford attachments to ligaments and muscles, and since the osseous particles (centres of ossification, either free or combined) are the results of forces acting in obedience to the necessities of organs to be protected and of trunks to be moved, it follows that bones can be best studied when understanding the requirements calling them into existence. ele That the ‘centre of ossification’’ is the osteological unit. For since ‘‘the bones’’ are associations of centres of ossification having little or no determinate value, it is rational to prefer these centres as the primal forms, before the more or less arbitrary ones, the results of their combination. Ill. That the causes of variation of the forms of ‘‘ bones’ within the limits of health are to be found in the muscles placed in association with them. Since the idea of a limb is progression, the bones stand up as fulera and levers to the power, we find the degree of power holds a direct ratio to the strength of lever and amount of weight. Hence, bones of limbs cor- respond in point of strength and size to the muscles associated with them. Habit is thus seen to be indirectly the chief cause of the variation of ossific forms. IV. That the causes of localization of diseased action are best determined by the application of the foregoing propositions. (1.) A number of centres of ossification coalescing to protect a given viscus, the resultant form may preserve, throughout life, a physiological as well as a mechanical unity. Example: The centres composing the brain case. When, however, the centres of ossification in the bones of limbs unite, while losing their identity in form they maintain a peculiar independence of action throughout life. Example: The centre com- posing the femur and tibia. (2.) The evidences of retrograde activity (atrophy) are most marked along the lines of progressive activity (growth. ) (8.) Activity of development is accompanied with vascularity. In- creased vascularity is an exciting cause to morbid action. Therefore it follows that diseased action may be often found in association with an in- complete genetic process. (4.) Since muscles control the normal shapes of bones during harmo- nious action, their inharmonious action may prove a cause of deformity. (5.) Continual excitation of points of connection of muscles with bones may prove an exciting cause to disease within such areas. The Society was then adjourned. PROC. AMER. PHIL. SOC, VOL.XI. PL.IN J.P. LESLEY 1869. PHILADELPHIA. FIG.I. SECTION OF I50 MILES ACROSS THE APPALACHIAN BELT |N PENSYLVANIA DRAWN TO THE SAME SCALE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL, South Mountain (Blue Ridge) saliW \S Carboniferous Alleghany W.N.W. . Wepre \siturian Present Surface Line oF Lawrentran 50 miles joo miles 1s0 miles FIG.2 PR LEHIGH COAL& NAVIGATION COSCOALPROPERTY- =~» — SECTIONS EBAL MEASURES. June 18, 1869. ] 1 19 [Wood, PRODROMUS OF A STUDY OF THE FRESH WATER ALGAE OF EASTERN NORTH AMERICA. By Horatio C. Woop, Jr., Professor of Botany in the University of Pennsylvania. For several years all the leisure, my more strictly professional duties allow me, has been devoted to the study of the Alga-fauna of our inland waters, and I had intended delaying publication until ready to offer to the scientific world an elaborate memoir upon the subject. The field is however so constantly enlarging, that the day of final preparation seems rather to recede than draw near. This and the hope of stirring up other laborers, have induced me to print now a very brief abstract of the results that have so far rewarded my efforts. In enumerating and describing the species herein contained, I shall follow the classification and arrangement adopted by Rabenhorst in his ‘‘ Flora Europea Algarum.’’ It should, however, be plainly understood that I do not do this, as endorsing the method of the German Professor, but simply because I do not feel pre- pared at present to discuss the natural arrangement of this group, and desire to leave the whole subject for a future Memoir. The desire of enlisting the assistance various of observers, as already mentioned, has been one of the motives that have prompted me to publish at this time. Iam already greatly indebted to several botanists for aid, amongst whom I may mention Dr. J. S. Billings, U.S. A., Professor H. W. Ravenel, and Mr. William Canby, and am thereby emboldened to ask for more. If there are any persons engaged in the study of these plants, I will be most happy to exchange specimens with them, either fresh or mounted for the microscope; and when occasion may arise, will most freely give all the credit due them for species new to America or Science, If there are others willing to help me, I will do all in my power to aid them in return by labelling specimens, giving information as to books, &c., or make such other returns as circumstances will permit. Any one who is thus willing had better address me by letter, when I will forward to him preservative fluid, with some directions. A certain amount of experience and knowledge of the subject greatly facilitates the collection of these plants, but scarcely so much as in other departments of cryptogamic botany. Most of the species of fresh water algae are so small that the most experienced algologist does not know how great the reward of the day’s toil may be until he places his booty on the object glass of his compound microscope. In order to aid any one who is desirous of collecting and studying these low forms, it seems to me not amiss to make here a few remarks upon the where and the when to look, and the how to preserve after they are found. There are three or four distinct classes of localities, in each of which a distinct set of forms may be looked for. Stagnant ditches and pools; _ springs, rivulets, large rivers, and other bodies of pure water; dripping rocks in ravines, &c.; trunks of old trees, boards, branches and twigs of living trees and other aerial localities. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—P Wood.] 120 June 18, In regard to the first of these—stagnant waters—in these the most con- spicuous forms are oscillatoriz and zygnemacese. The oscillatorize may almost always be recognized at once, by their forming dense, slimy strata, floating or attached, generally with very fine rays extending from the mass like a long, delicate fringe. The stratum is rarely of a bright green color, but is mostly dark; dull greenish, blackish, purplish, blue, &e. The oscillatoriz are equally valuable as specimens at all times and seasons, as their fruit is not known, and the characters defining the spe- cies do not depend upon sexual organs. The zygnemas are the bright green, evidently filamentous, slimy masses, which float on ditches or lie entangled amongst the water plants, sticks, twigs, &c., inthem. They are only of scientific value when in fruit, as it is only at such times that they can be determined. Excepting in the case of one or two very large forms, it is impossible to tell with the naked eye with certainty whether a zygnema is in fruit or not; but there are one or two practical points, the remembrance of which will very greatly enhance the probable yield of an afternoon’s search. In the first place, the fruiting season is in the spring and early summer. The latter part of March, May and June are the months when the collector will be best repaid for looking for this family. Again, when these plants are fruiting they lose their bright green color and become dingy, often yellowish and very dirty looking— just such specimens as the tyro would pass by. The fine, bright, green, handsome masses of these algae are rarely worth carrying home. After all, however, much must be left to chance; the best way is to gather small quantities from numerous localities, keeping them separate until they can be examined. Adhering to the various larger ditch plants, to floating matters, twigs and stones, &e., will often be found filamentous algae, which make fine filmy fringes around the stems, or on the edges of the leaves; or per- chance one may meet with rivulariz or nostocs, &c., forming little green or brownish balls, or indefinite protuberances attached to small stems and leaves. These forms are, however, to be looked for especially later in the season. Whenever seen, they should be secured. Tn the latter part of summer, there is often a brownish gelatinous scum to be seen floating on ditches. Portions of this should be preserved, as it frequently contains interesting nostocs and other plants. In regard to large rivers, the time of year in which I have been most successful in such localities, is the latter summer months. Springs and small bodies of clear water may be searched with a fair hope of reward at any time of the year when they are not actually frozen up. I have found some exceedingly beautiful and rare algae in such places as early as March, and in open seasons they may be collected even earlier than this. The desmids are most abundant in the spring, and possibly most beautiful then. They, however, rarely conjugate at that time, and the most valua- ble specimens are therefore to be obtained later—during the summer and fall months; at least, so it is said; and the little experience I have had with this family seems to confirm it. Rivulets should be watched espe- cially in early spring, and during the summer months. | 9 1869.] 1 21 [Wood. From the time when the weather first grows cool in the fall, on until the cold weather has fairly set in, and the reign of ice and snow com- mences, is the period during which the algae hunter should search care- fully all wet, dripping rocks, for specimens. Amongst the dew bearing stems of wet mosses—in dark, damp crevices, and little grottoes beneath shelving rocks—here, at this season, is the algae harvest to be reaped. Nostoes, palmellas, conjugating desmids, sirosiphons, various unicellular algae, then flourish in such localities. My experience has been, that late in the fall, ravines, railroad cuttings, rocky river-banks, &c., reward time and labor better than any other localities. The vaucherias, which grow frequently in wet ground, as well as sub- merged, fruit in the early spring and summer in this latitude, and are therefore to be collected at such times, since they are only worth preserv- ing when in fruit. In regard to algae which grow on trees, I have found but a single spe- cies, and do not think they are at all abundant in this latitude. Farther south, if one may judge by Professor Ravenel’s collections, they are the most abundant forms. As to the preservation of the algae—most of the submerged species are ruined by drying. Studies of them should always, when practicable, be made whilst fresh. Circumstances, however, will often prevent this, and I have found that they may be preserved for a certain period, say three or four months, without very much change, in a strong solution of acetate of alumina. If this is not to be had, I would recommend a trial of a preservative liquid, made of glycerine, carbolic acid (creasote of the shops), and water. This mixture might be made by dissolving half an ounce of pure carbolic acid (a little more of the impure), in three fluid- ounces of glycerine, and adding a full pint of pure water. Almost all species of algae which are firm and semi-cartilaginous, or almost woody in consistency, are best preserved by simply drying them, and keeping them in the ordinary manner for small plants. When studied, fragments of them should be soaked in water. The only satisfactory way that algae can be finally prepared for the cabinet is by mounting them whole, or in portions, according to size, for the microscope. Of the best methods of doing this, this is hardly the place to speak ; but a word as to the way of cleaning them will perhaps not be out of place. Many of them, especially the larger filamentous one, may be washed by holding them fast upon an ordinary microscope slide, with a bent needle or a pair of forceps, and allowing water to flow or slop over them freely, whilst they are rubbed with a stiffish camels hair pencil or brush. In other cases, the best plan is to put a mass of the specimens in a bottle half full of water, and shake the whole violently ; draw off the water from the plants in some way, and repeat the process with fresh additions of water, until the plants are well scoured. At first sight, this process would seem exceedingly rough, and liable to spoil the specimens, but I have never seen bad results from it, at least, when practised with judgment. The water seems so to envelope and protect the little plants that they are not injured. Wood.] 1 22 (June 18, After all, in many instances it appears impossible to clean these algae without utterly ruining and destroying them—the dirt often seeming to be almost an integrant portion of them ; so that he who despises and rejects mounted specimens, simply because they are dirty and unsightly, will often reject that which, scientifically speaking, is most valuable and attractive. In concluding this introduction, it is perhaps pardonable to state, that there are in my possession elaborate descriptions and drawings (from nature) of nearly all the plants mentioned in this paper, and that of the species mentioned, all but a dozen or two are new to science or new to this continent. CLASS PHYCOCHROMOPHYCEAE. ORD. CYSTIPHORAE. FAM. CHROOCOCCACEAE. GEN. CHROOCOCCUS. C. REFRACTUS. Sp. Nov. C. cellulis in familias solidas arcte consociatis, plerumque subquad- ratis, saepius triangularibus, rare multiangulis; familiis saepius loba- tis; cytiodermate tenui, vix visibile, achroo; cytioplasmate subiliter granulato, subfusco vel subluteo, valde refrangente. C. Cells closely associated together into solid families, mostly sub- quadrate, very often triangular, rarely multiangular; families often lobed ; cytioderm thin, scarcely perceptible, transparent; cytioplasm finely granular, brownish or yellowish, highly refractive. Diam. cell.so0’’ sog0/’, rare in cellulis singulis 5,5,/’; famil. 7.55” S/H) 17 3 0 Hab. In rupibus irroratis prope Philadelphia. C. MULTICOLORATUS. Sp. ov. C. in strato mucoso inter algas varias sparsus; cellulis singulis sphae- ricis, vel 2-4 (rare 8) aut angulis aut semisphaericis aut abnormibus in familias oblongas consociatis ; cytiodermate crasso, hyalino, haud lamel- loso; tegumentis plerumque nullis, interdum subnullis; cytioplasmate plerumque homogeneo, interdum subiliter granulato, vel luteo-viride vel caeruleo-viride vel luteo vel subnigro, vel brunneo, vel saturate aurantiaco, saepe ostro tincto. Diam. cell., sing. sine tegm., 5,55'’ cum teg. 73457’ o ’; cell. in famil. sing. a¥00'—a300- Fam. long. 5'59//—z50"" 5 lat. gs'p9!—as'00"- C. Occurring scattered in a mucous seer with other algae ; cells spherical and single, or else angular semisphaerical or irregular and asso- ciated together in oblong families of from 2-4 (rarely 8) ; inner coat thick, hyaline, not lamellate ; outer coat generally wanting, sometimes indis- tinctly present ; endochrome mostly homogeneous, sometimes minutely 1869. ] 123 [Wood. granular, either a yellowish green or bluish green, or yellowish, or brown, or blackish, sometimes tinged with bright lake. Hab. In rupibus humidis prope Philadelphia. GEN. GLOEOCAPSA. G SPARSA. Sp. Nov. G. in strato mucoso sociis algis variis sparsa ; cellulis sphaericis, vel oblongis vel ovatis, 2-8 in familias consociatis ; familiis subglobosis vel subovatis, interdum numeroso-aggregatis; tegumentis internis aureo- fuscis, firmis, rarissime coloris expertibus, homogeneis, vel lamellosis ; tegumentis externis achromaticis, rare subachromaticis, plerumque vix visibilibus; cytioplasmate homogeneo. Diam. max. cell. oblong. sine tegum. long., z/yq/’; lat., 7A;5/’; cell. glob., sine tegum., 555/’; cum tegum., ;j,5//; fam., -4,/’. G. scattered in a mucous stratum composed of various algae ; cells spherical, or oblong, or ovate, associated together in families of from 2-8; families subglobose or subovate, sometimes aggregated together in large numbers; inner tegument yellowish brown, firm, rarely colorless, homogeneous or lamellate; external tegument achromatic, rarely sub- achromatic, generally scarcely visible. GEN. MERISMOPEDIA. M. CONVOLUTA. Bréb. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. Remarks. —I have only a slide of specimens, which were given me by my friend Dr. J. Gibbons Hunt. Our American form seems to be too close to the European species to be separated from it, although in no case is the frond in any wise plicate or convolute, and the cells are somewhat smaller (long diameter, ;759’’). M. Nova. Sp. Nov. M. thallo membranaceo, distincte limitato, cellulis numerosissimis composito; cellulis ovalibus, arcte approximatis, 16 in familias consoci- atis, dilute caeruleo-viridibus, interdum medio constrictis; thalli margini- bus rectis, integris. Thallus membranaceous, distinctly limited, composed of very numer- ous cells ; cells oval, closely approximated, consociate in families of 16, light bluish green, sometimes constricted in the middle ; margin of the thallus straight and entire. Diam. cell. ad. zyyq/’. Hab. In flumine Schuylkill, prope Philadelphia. FAM. OSCILLARIACEAE. GEN. OSCILLATORIA. O. NIGRA. Vawuch. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. 6 Wood.] 1 24 [June 18, Remarks.—Our American form does not quite equal the measurements given by Rabenhorst. I have never measured it over ;;)55’/ in diameter. oO. Limosa. (Roth.) Agh. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. Remarks.—The dissepiments are never granulate, at least that I have seen. Otherwise our American forms agree in all respects with the de- scriptions of the European. 0. NEGLEOCTA. Sp. Nov. O. trichomatibus modice brevibus, aut dilute purpuraceo-plumbeis aut plumbeo-cinereis, plerumque rectis, aut stratum mucosum atro-purpureum haud distincte radiante formantibus, aut in strato gelatinoso haud radiante subplumbeo dispersis et cum algis aliis intermixtis, rare oscil- lantibus sed lente sese moventibus; articulis diametro fere 4 plo bre- vioribus; dissepimentis plerumque haud granulosis, rare indistincte granulosis; apiculo obtuse rotundato, interdum breve nonnihil atten- uato. Filaments rather short, of a dilute purplish lead color, or leaden gray, generally straight, either forming a mucous, blackish purple stratum without marked rays, or diffused with other algae in a gelatinous mass, rarely oscillating but gliding ; articles about four times shorter than broad ; joints for the most part not granulate, rarely indistinctly granulate ; ends obtusely rounded, occasionally shortly somewhat attenuate. Diam. 7=57//=.0066. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. 0. IMPERATOR. Sp. Nov. O. in strato mucoso, plerumque natante, olivaceo-atro, longe radiante ; trichomatibus rectis aut subrectis, tranquillis, dilute viridibus vel satu- rate olivaceis, haud oscillantibus, sed ambulantibus; apiculis nonnihil attenuatis, late rotundatis vel subtruncatis, curvatis; articulis diametro 5-12 plo brevioribus, ad genicula indistincte contractis ; cytioplasmate homogeneo, olivaceo-viride ; vaginis firmis, ad genicula distincte trans- verse striatis, O. Occurring in an olive-black mucous stratum, mostly swimming and with long rays; filaments straight or straightish, light green or deep olive, tranquil, not oscillating, but moving with a gliding motion; ends somewhat attenuate, broadly rounded or subtruncate, curved ; articles 5-12 times shorter than broad, slightly contracted at the joints ; cytio- plasm homogeneous, olive green; sheaths firm, distinctly transversely grooved at the joints. Diam. .002.’ GEN. LYNGBYA. L. BICOLOR. Sp. Nov. L. trichomatibus simplicibus in cespites nigro-virides dense in- tricatis, varie curvatis, plerumque inarticulatis, interdum breve articu- 1869.] 125 [Wood, latis et ad genicula contractis; cytiodermate dilute caeruleo-viride, plerumque copiose granulato, saepe interrupto; cellulis perdurantibus cylindricis, saepe elongatis, saturate brunneis, sparsissimis; vaginis firmis, achrois, in trichomata matura modice crassis. L. with the filaments closely interwoven into a blackish green mat ; filaments variously curved, simple, mostly inarticulate, sometimes shortly articulate with the joints contracted; endochrome light bluish green, mostly very granulate, often interrupted; heterocysts cylindrical, often elongate, deep brown, very few; sheaths firm, transparent, in old fila- ments moderately thick. Diam. 7757’’. Hab. In flumine Schuylkill prope Philadelphia. FAM. NOSTOCHACEAE. GEN. NOSTOC. N. CALCICOLA. Ag. Hab. In rupibus prope Catoosa Springs, Georgia.—Prof. Ravenel. Remarks.—The heterocysts in the American plant are both intermixed and terminal, otherwise the description of the European form is well answered. The region of country in which the specimen was collected is a limestone one. Iam unable to say more positively whether the rocks on which it was growing were limestone or not. GEN. SPHAEROZYGA. S. POLYSPERMA. Labenhorst. In stagnis prope Camden, New Jersey. S. SUBRIGIDA. Sp. Nov. §. natans ; trichomatibus singulis, rectis aut subrectis, minimis, dilute viridibus ; articulis cylindricis aut subglobosis, distinctis; sporis cylin- dricis, in medio gradatim nonnihil constrictis, singulis aut duplicis, sine cellulis perdurantibus inter se; cellulis perdurantibus brevecylindricis, singulis, distinctis. 8. Floating; filaments single, straight or straightish, very small, light green; articles cylindrical or subglobose, distinct; spores single or double, in the middle gradually a little constricted, not having a hetero- eyst between them ; heterocysts shortly cylindrical, single, distinct. Diam. cell. veg. trans. g¢p5q//=.00016; spor. transv. g9y5!-z2s55"/= -00023//—.00022” ; long. 7.455/=.00066” ; cell. perd. transv. ,,155//=.00022. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. GEN. CYLINDROSPERMUM. C. FLEXUOSUM. (Ag.) Rabdenh. Hab. In humo irrorato prope Philadelphia. Wood.) 1 26 [June 18, c. MINUTUM. Sp. Nov. C. trichomatibus dilute aerugineis, plerumque flexuoso-curvatis et intricatis, interdum subrectis; articulis cylindricis, ad genicula plus minus constrictis, homogeneis vel granulatis; cellulis perdurantibus ter- minalibus, hirsutis, globosis; sporis ellipticis, diametro 2-3 plo longiori- bus, subtilissime granulatis. Filaments light aeruginous green, generally curved and intricate, sometimes straightish; articles cylindrical, more or less constricted at the joints, homogeneous or granulate; heterocysts terminal, hirsute, globose ; spores elliptical, 2-3 times longer than broad, very minutely granulate. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. GEN. ANABAENA. A. GELATINOSA. Sp. Nov. A. thallo mucoso gelatinoso, indefinite expanso, dilutissime brunneo, nonnihil pellucido ; trichomatibus haud vaginatis, leviter flexuoso-curva- tis, nonnihil distantibus, haud intricatis, aut dilute aureis aut dilute caeruleo-viridibus ; articulis globosis, homogeneis; cellulis perduranti- bus articulorum diametro fere aequalibus, globosis, vel rare oblongis ; sporis terminalibus, singulis, globosis, (fusco-brunneis ?) Thallus gelatinous, mucous, indefinitely expanded, somewhat pel- lucid, with a brownish tinge; filaments not vaginate, somewhat curved, rather distant, not intricate, either a light golden yellow or light bluish green ; joints globose, homogeneous ; heterocysts about equal to the fila- ment in diameter, globose or rarely oblong ; spores terminal, globose. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. GEN. NOSTOCHOPSIS. Gen. Nov. Trichomata ramosa cum cellulis perdurantibus aut in latere sessilibus aut in ramulorum brevissimorum apicibus dispositis. Vaginae nullae. Thallus definitus. Thallus definite ; filament branched; heterocysts sessile upon the sides of the filaments or raised upon the apices of short branches; sheaths none. Remarks.—The curious plant upon which this genus is founded has the habit of a nostoc. The outer portion of the frond is condensed so as to give the appearance of a periderm; there is, however, no true peri- derm. The consistence of the thallus is that of a firm gelatinous mass. The trichomata or filaments radiate from the inner part of the frond towards the outer surface, but many of them take their origin in the outer portions of the thallus. In most places they are distinctly articu- lated, and indeed often seem to be composed of globular cells, resem- bling the filaments of a nostoc; on the other hand in certain portions they are not at all articulated. No sheaths are anywhere visible. The heterocysts are strangely enough never placed in the continuity of the 1869.] 127 [Wood. filaments. Sometimes they are sessile immediately upon the latter, some- times they are raised upon very short branches. They are globose with rather thick walls. No spores were discovered. It seems to me best for the present to class this curious plant with the nostochaceae, although I am not altogether satisfied as to its affinities. N. LOBATUS. Sp. Nov. N. thallo vivide viride aut luteo-viride, cavo, enormiter lobato, natante, modice magno, firmo, gelatinoso; trichomatibus plerumque longis, flexuosis, dilute viridibus, plerumque articulatis, partim inarticulatis, cylindricis aut sub-moniliformibus, sparse granulatis. Diam. trichom ; cell. perdur. Remarks.—I found this plant floating upon the Schuylkill river just above Manayunk. The hollow frond was buoyed up by a bubble of gas contained within it. It was an irregular, flattened, somewhat globose mass, of a bright green color and about 3 an inch in diameter. It seems very probable that in its earlier condition, it was a solid attached frond. The long slender filaments are often very tortuous, but run a pretty direct general course towards the outer surface. FAM. RIVULARIEAE. GEN. GLOIOTRICHA. G. INCRUSTATA. Sp. Nov. G. globosa vel subovalis, firma, solida, ad pisi minimi magnitudinem, dilute viridis, crystallophora ; trichomatibus rectis aut leviter curvatis, in pilum productis, viridibus aut flavescentibus, saepe infra laete viridibus sed supra flavescentibus, haud ordinatim articulatis ; articulis inferiori- bus in trichomatibus maturis brevibus, plerumque compressis; pilo apicale recto aut leviter curvato, plerumque indistincte articulato, saepe inter- rupto; vaginis amplis, achrois, saccatis, interdum valde constrictis ; spo- ris cylindricis, saepe curvatis, diametro ad 9 plo longioribus; cellulis perdurantibus sphaericis. Diam. trichom. cum vag. 7355//-73959/’ Sporis Max. 73459//—7s4yq’’ 5 Cell. perd. ps5007- Frond globose or suboval, firm, solid about the size of a very small pea, light green, crystal bearing; filaments straight or slightly curved, produced into long hairs, green or yellowish, sometimes bright green in their proximal portions but yellowish above, not regularly articulate ; lower articles in the mature filament short, and generally compressed ; apical hair—like portion straight or slightly curved, mostly indistinctly articulate, frequently interrupted; sheath ample, transparent, saccate, sometimes strongly constricted ; spores cylindrical, frequently curved, about 9 times as long as broad. Hab. Schuylkill river, plantas aquaticas adhaerens. $ A. P. S.—VOL. XI. Q (9 Xe) Wood. ] ] 28 [June 18; GEN. RIVULARIA. R. CARTILAGINEA. Sp. Nov. R. subglobosa, parva, cartilaginea, saturate brunnea vel sub-atra, soli- taria in plantis aquaticis :—trichomatibus maturis sterilibus rectis aut sub- rectis, cylindricis, elongatis, haud articulatis ; cytioplasmate saepe inter- rupto; vaginis arctis et distinctis; cellulis perdurantibus globosis, dia- metro subaequalibus :—trichomatibus fertilibus rectis aut sub-rectis, supra spora cellulis 8-9 instructis ; sporis elongatis, rectis, cylindricis ; vaginis nonnihil crassis, arctis :—trichomatibus immaturis, breve articulatis ; vaginis subamplis. Frond subglobose, small, cartilaginous, deep brown or blackish, soli- tary upon aquatic plants: mature sterile filaments, cylindrical, elongated, not articulated, their cytioplasm frequently interrupted, their sheaths close and distinct, their heterocysts globose and about equal to them in diameter ; fertile filaments straight or nearly so, above the spores fur- nished with 8 or 9 cells; spores elongate, straight, cylindrical; sheaths rather thick, close; immature filaments shortly articulate, their sheaths rather large. Diam. trich. cum vag. 3755’; spor. sg57/’. Hab. In palude, Northern Michigan. GEN. DASYACTIS. D. MOLLIS. Sp. Nov. D. parva, ad magnitudinem pisi minimi, enormiter subglobosa, mol- lis, gelatinosa, dilute viridis, haud distincte zonata ; trichomatibus pler- umque subrectis, partim distincte, partim indistincte articulatis ; vaginis, in trichomatibus maturis haud visibilibus, in trichomatibus juvenibus supra subamplis; cellulis perdurantibus sub-globosis, globosis, vel ellip- ticis, diametro duplo majoribus, plerumque singulis sed interdum bi vel triseriatis. Frond small, about the size of a small pea, irregularly subglobose, soft, gelatinous, light green, not distinctly zoned; filaments generally straightish, partly distinctly, partly indistinctly articulate; sheaths in the mature filament not perceptible; in the young filaments rather large in the upper portion; heterocysts subglobose or globose or elliptic, twice as large as the filament, generally single but sometimes bi or tri-seriate. Diam. trich. gpo9//-zs50’ 5 cell. perd. zryq/’- Hab. In palude plantas aquaticas adhaerens, Northern Michigan. GEN. MASTIGONEMA. M. ELONGATUM. Sp. Nov. M. initio subglobosum, postea saepe nonnihil fusinum, nigro-viride, lu- bricum, firme ; trichomatibus aerugineis, valde elongatis, flagelliformibus, interdum inarticulatis sed saepius breve articulatis, interdum ad genicula valde constrictis ; apice interdum truncato sed plerumque in pilo, longo,* achroo, flexuoso, producto; vaginis achrois, arctis, saepe apice truncatis ; cellulis perdurantibus globosis vel subglobosis. w 1869.] 1 9 [Wood. Thallus at first subglobose, afterwards frequently fusiform, blackish ereen, slippery, firm; filaments aeruginous, very elongate, sometimes not articulated, but more generally shortly articulated, sometimes strongly contracted at the joints; apices sometimes truncate but gener- ally produced into a long, flexuous, translucent hair ; sheath transpar- ent, close, frequently truncate at the apex; heterocysts globose or sub- globose. Diam. 52,7//=-00026.”’ Hab. In aquario meo. GEN. MASTIGOTHRIX. M. FIBROSA. Sp. ov. M. trichomatibus dilute caeruleo-viridibus vel olivaceis vel sub- aerugineis, infra haud articulatis, supra saepe breve articulatis ; apice in trichomatibus maturis in setam hyalinam, distincte articu- latam, longam, producto; vaginis achrois, in filamentis immaturis, distale distinctis, latis, hyalinis, infra modice crassis, arctis—in trichoma- tibus maturis infra arctis, et indistinctis, supra in fibetillis dissolutis, in apice, absentibus ; cellulis perdurantibus globosis interdum geminis. Filament either light bluish green or olivaceous or subaeruginous, below not articulate, its upper portion often shortly articulate ; apex produced in the mature filament into a hyaline seta, which is long and distinctly ar- ticulate ; sheath transparent—in the immature filament, distally distinct, broad, hyaline, but proximally close and rather thick—in the mature filament below closeand rather indistinct, and superiorly dissolved in fibril- lae so as to be entirely wanting at the apex; heterocysts globose, some- times in pairs. Diam. trichom. 335,’'; cell. perdur. y3499//-rs$50""- Hab. In strato mucoso cum algis variis, in rupibus irroratis prope Philadelphia. FAM. SCYTONEMEACEAE. GEN. SCYTONEMA. Ss. CATARACTA. Sp. Nov. S. rupicola, caespitosum, fusco-atrum, longe et late expansum ; tri- chomatibus flexuosis, flexilibus, fere 0.25// longibus, vage pseudoramo- sissimis, superficie laeve; pseudoramis elongatis, singulis, rarissime geminis, liberis, interdum fuscis, saepius hyalinis, apice plerumque truncato, rare nonnihil attenuato, saepe barbato, haud rubello; tricho- matibus internis aerugineis, tenuissimis, plerumque distincte articulatis ; articulis diametro plerumque brevioribus, sed interdum longioribus, saepe sejunctis, saepe subglobosis ; vaginis crassis et firmis ; cellulis per- durantibus et basilaribus et interjectis, singulis, rarissime geminis. Diam. trich. c. vag. plerumque .00045/’; max. .0011/’; sine vag. max. .00013.// 8. Forming on rocks an extended turf-like stratum of a brownish Wood.] 130 [June 18, black color; filaments flexuous, flexible, almost 0.25” long, irregularly branched, their surface smooth; branches elongate, single, rarely in pairs, free, sometimes fuscous, frequently hyaline, their apices generally truncate, rarely somewhat attenuate, frequently provided with enlarge- ments, never reddish ; cytioplasm aeruginous, very thin, generally dis- tinetly articulate; articles mostly shorter than broad, but sometimes longer, frequently disjoined, often subglobose ; sheaths thick and firm ; heterocysts both basal and interjected, single, extremely rarely gemi- nate. Hab. In flumine Niagara prope cataractam. S. CORTEX. Sp. Nov. S. minutissimum, stratum tenue submembraneum formante; tricho- matibus sparse pseudoramulosis, pseudoramulisque repentibus et plus minus concretis, viridibus aut dilute fuscis, varie curvatis, haud rigidis ; cytioplasmate viride, articulato, rare distincte granuloso ; articulis diam- etro longioribus aut brevioribus; vaginis arctis, nonnihil tenuibus, achrois, plerumque coloris expertibus, sed interdum dilute fuscis; cellulis perdurantibus et singulis et geminis, et basalibus et interjectis, globosis vel subglobosis. 8. Very minute, forming a thin, submembranaceous stratum ; fila- ments sparsely branched, together with the branches, creeping and more or less concreted together by their sides, green or light brown, variously curved, not rigid; cytioplasm (internal filament) articulate, rarely dis- tinctly granulate ; joints longer or shorter than broad; sheaths close, rather thin, transparent, generally colorless but sometimes light brown ; heterocysts globular or subglobular, single or in pairs, basal or other- wise. Diam. trich. cum vag. 73355//-73359// Hab. South Carolina in ramis (Platanus occidentalis). Prof. Ravenel. 8. RAVENELLII.* Sp. Nov. S. lignicola, breve caespitosum, viride-nigrum ; trichomatibus plerum- que repentibus, vel fusco-olivaceis vel aureo-fuscis, modice pseudoramosis; ramis ascendentibus, rigidis, flexuosis rare pseudoramulosis, vel fusco- olivaceis vel aureo-fuscis, rarissime cum apicibus subachrois ; trichomati- bus internis coloris expertibus, granulosis, saepe vagina erumpentibus, plerumque articulatis; articulis diametro longioribus aut brevioribus ; vaginis arctis, crassibus, fusco-olivaceis vel aureo-fuscis, plerumque supra truncatis et apertis, superficie nonnunquam irregulare ; cellulis perduran- tibus subquadratis, singulis, interjectis. S. Forming little, shortly turfy spots, on bark, of a greenish color ; filaments mostly creeping, either brownish olive or yellowish brown, moderately branched; branches ascending, rigid, flexuous, very rarely provided with secondary branchlets, either brownish olive or yellowish *It affords me great pleasure to dedicate this species to Prof. H. W. Ravenel as an acknowledg- ment, not so much of the aid rendered in my studies of our fresh water algae, as of his great ser- vices to science in some of her kindred branches. 1869.] 131 [Wood. brown, rarely subtransparent at the apex; cytioplasm colorless, granu- lar, often extending out beyond the sheaths, generally articulate ; joints longer or shorter than broad ; sheaths close, thick, brownish olive or yel- lowish brown, for the most part truncate at their ends and open, their surface sometimes irregular ; heterocysts subquadrate, single, interstitial. Diam. trich. cum vag. 73959//—7s859// 5 TAM. C. Ve zsh g/— 4 285g"! Hab. South Carolina, in ramis Celtis. Prof. H. W. Ravenel. GEN. SYMPHOSIPHON. S. CORIACEA. Sp. Nov. S. in strato ad 2 lineam crasso, coriaceo, nonnihil spongioso disposita ; trichomatibus pseudoramulisque flexuosis, dense intricatis, arcte concretis ; trichomatibus internis rarissime haud articulatis sed plerumque breve et distincte articulatis, plerumque pallescentibus, interdum dilutissime aerugineis, saepe interruptis ; articulis granulosis, interdum sejunctis, diametro subaequalibus ad fere duplo longioribus ; vaginis crassissimis, distincte lamellosis, achrois et coloris expertibus, stratis externis saepe intumescentibus, superficie corrugata, hirta; cellulis perdurantibus nullis? S. Forming a leathery and spongy, tough stratum of about 2 lines in thickness and of a light slate color. Filaments and branches flexuous densely intricate, closely concreted ; internal filament very rarely not articulated, in most cases very distinctly jointed, generally nearly colorless, sometimes with a faint aeruginous tint, often interrupted ; articles granular, sometimes disjoined, from about equal to twice the length of their diameter; sheaths very thick, transparent and colorless, very distinctly lamellated, external lamella often swollen, their surface corrugate and variously rough and ragged ; heterocysts none. ? Diam. trich. c. vag. max. zsh%55//=.00083; sin. vag. max. zziq9//= 00025. Remarks.—\ have examined a great number of filaments and have nowhere seen anything like a heterocyst. The specimens examined had been preserved in solution of acetate of alumina, but I do not think the salt had changed materially their color. Hab. Texas. Prof. Ravenel. cen. TOLYPOTHRIX. T. pistorTA. (Miiller.) Ktz. Var. ? In aquario. Dr. Fricke. Remarks.—The specimens which have been identified as T. distorta, agree well with the descriptions of that species, except in the fact that the heterocysts are often 4-seriate and that they are rather parallelogram- matic than subglobose, as well as in the circumstance that the sheaths are close. I do not think the differences are sufficient to distinguish species. Wood.] 1 32 [June 18, FAM. SIROSIPHONEACEAE. GEuN. SIROSIPHON. S.. PULVINATUS. Bred. Hab. In rupibus irroratis prope Philadelphia. Ss. GUTTULA. Sp. Nov. S. in maculis subnigris, parvis, tenuibus, plerumque rotundatis, inter- dum enormibus, dispositum ; trichomatibus arcte intertextis, ramossis- simis, rigidis, inaequalibus, subcylindricis, nonnihil contortis ; ramulis abbreviatis vel nonnihil elongatis, apice obtuse rotundatis ; ramulorum et trichomatum cellulis tri-multiseriatis, plerumque pachydermaticis,. ferrugineo-fuscis, enormiter globosis, homogeneis; cellulis apicalibus interdum breve cylindricis, haud articulatis; vaginis sat amplis, luteo- brunneis vel dilute ferrugineo-brunneis. Arranged in small, thin black spots, which are generally round, but sometimes irregular: filaments closely interwoven, very much branched, rigid, unequal, subcylindrical, somewhat contorted ; branches abbreviate or somewhat elongate, apex obtusely rounded ; cells of the trichoma and branches 3 to many seriate, mostly with thick coats, ferru- ginous-fuscous, irregularly globose, homogeneous ; apical cells sometimes shortly cylindrical, not articulate, sheaths ample, yellowish brown. Diam. max. trich. cum vag. -4,//=.0018. Hab. South Carolina, ad Taxodium distichon corticem. Prof. Ra- venel. S. ACERVATUS. Sp. Nov. S. in guttulis minutissimis, subcrustaceis, nigris, in strato sub- continuo saepe aggregatis; trichomatibus parvis et brevibus, rigidis, admodum inaequalibus, prostratis, tuberculis, arcte et dense ramos- sissimis, viridibus aut aureis aut brunneis; ramulis brevibus, pler- umque haud ramulosis, erectis aut ascendentibus, saepe abbreviatis, papilliformibus, obtusis, saepe lateraliter connatis; cellularum serie in trichomatibus multiplici in ramulis plerumque simplici ; cellulis subglo-: bosis vel subangularibus, viridibus, haud distincte granulosis, in ramu- lorum apice saepe breve cylindricis et interdum obsolete articulatis ; vaginis aureis, nonnihil hyalinis. Arranged in drops, which are very minute, subcrustaceous, black, and frequently aggregate into a subcontinuous stratum ; filaments small and short, prostrate, rigid, somewhat unequal, tuberculate, densely and closely branched, green or golden or brown ; branches short, for the most part not branched, erect or ascending, frequently abbreviate, papiliform, obtuse; series of cell multiple in trichoma, mostly simple in the branches; cells subglobose or subangular, green, not distinctly granu- late, in the apices of the branches frequently shortly cylindrical and sometimes obsoletely articulate ; sheaths golden, somewhat hyaline. Hab. South Carolina, ad corticem (Ilex opaca). Prof. H. W. Ra- venel. 1369.] 133 [Wood. Diam. trich. cum. vag. max. 34, Ram. 7255 - zs5o0 Remarks.—This species is closely allied to §. coraloides, but I think is distinct from it. S. Lienrcota. Sp. Nov. S. strato expanso, tomentoso, atro; trichomatibus ramossissimis, arcte intertextis; ramulis abbreviatis vel elongatis, subrectis aut varie curvatis, apicibus obtuse rotundatis vel subacuminatis ; trichomatum et ramulorum cellulis uni vel biseriatis, plerumque pachydermaticis, dilute vel saturate aerugineis, enormibus, plerumque homogeneis ; cellulis termi- nalibus elongatis, cylindricis, saepius nonnihil oscillatorium modo articu- latis, granulosis ; vaginis sat amplis, haud achrois, vel luteo-brunneis vel fuscentibus vel ferrugineis. Occurring in an expanded, tomentose, black stratum ; filaments very much branched, closely interwoven, branches abbreviate or elongate, nearly straight or variously curved, their apices obtusely rounded or sub- acuminate ; cells 1-2 seriate, mostly thick walled, light or deep aerugin- ous, irregular, mostly homogeneous ; terminal cells elongate, cylindrical, frequently articulate somewhat like an oscillatoria, granulate ; sheaths somewhat ample, not transparent, light brown, fuscous or ferruginous. Diam. trich. cum vag. max. 7-4y//—.00066”. Hab. South Carolina ; in lignis fabrefactis. Prof. H. W. Ravenel. Ss. NEGLECTUS. Sp. Nov. -$. immersus ; trichomatibus subsolitariis, longis usque ad lineas quatuor, cylindricis, ramossissimis; ramulis singulis; cytioplasmate interdum aerugineo, plerumque aureo-brunneo; cellulis uniseriatis rarissime bi- seriatis, subglobosis, interdum sejunctis sed plerumque arcte connectis et moniliformibus, modo confluentibus, haud distincte pachydermaticis ; cellulis terminalibus elongato-cylindricis, saepe nonnihil oscilatorium modo articulatis ; cellulis interstitialibus nullis; vaginis achrois, inter- dum brunneis, plerumque coloris expertibus. 5. immersed, subsolitary, attaining a length of 4 lines, cylindrical, very much branched; branches single ; cytioplasm aeruginous, mostly yellow- ish brown; cells uniseriate, very rarely biseriate, subglobose, sometimes separate but more frequently closely united and moniliform ; terminal cell an elongated cylinder, often articulate somewhat like an oscillatoria; interstitial cells wanting ; sheaths transparent, sometimes brown, mostly colorless. Remarks.—This species is perhaps too close to S. crameri, but appears to differ from it very markedly in habit and place of growth. Diam. trich. cum. vag. 545 = .0017; sine. vag. zy457/ Hab. In stagnis prope Camden, New Jersey. Ss. PELLUCIDULUS. Sp Nov. S. immersus ; trichomatibus ramossissimis, solitariis vel subsolitariis ; ramis plerumque unilateralibus, ramulosis; ramulorum apicibus late rotundatis, haud attenuatis; cellulis in seriebus simplicibus dispositis, in Wood.) 134 [June 18, trichomatibus nonnihil rotundatis, in ramulis saepe angularibus, plerum- que compressis, diametro aequalibus—4 plo brevioribus, terminalibus cylindricis, obscure articulatis ; cellulis interstitialibus nullis ; vaginis arctis, hyalinis, haud lamellosis ; cytioplasmate aerugineo vel brunneo, minute granulato. S. immersed ; filaments very much branched, solitary or subsolitary ; branches mostly unilateral, branched ; apices of the branches not atten- uate, broadly rounded ; cells disposed in a simple series, in the trichoma somewhat rounded, in the branches frequently angular, mostly com- pressed, equal to 4 times shorter than the diameter ; terminal cell cylindri- cal, obscurely articulate ; interstitial cells none; sheath close, hyaline, not lamellate ; cytioplasm aeruginous or brown, minutely granulate. Diam. trich. cum vag. 73°5,//=.00106” ; sine vag. .0008’’- Hab: In stagnis, prope Hibernia Florida. Mr. Wm. Canby. S. SCYTENEMATOIDES. Sp. Nov. S. strato submembranaceo, nigro-viride, saepe interrupto, cum super- ficie inaequale ; trichomatibus saepe arcte intricatis, flexuosis aut varie curvatis,. haud rigidis, plerumque vix ramosis; cellulis uniseriatis, interdum interruptis, arctis, irregulare quadrangulis, diametro sub- aequalibus aut 1-3 plo brevioribus, haud distincte granulatis, caeruleo- viridibus ; vaginis amplis, haud distincte lamellosis, superficie enormiter corrugatis et hirtis, achrois, plerumque coloris expertibus interdum dilute brunneis. S. In a submembranaceous, blackish green, frequently interrupted - stratum, with an uneven surface; filaments often closely intricate, flexuous or variously curved, not rigid, mostly sparsely branched ; cells uniseriate, sometimes interrupted, close, irregularly quadrangular, about equal in length to their diameter, or about 1-3 times shorter, not distinctly gran- ulate, bluish green ; sheaths ample, not distinctly lamellate, their surface rough and corrugate, transparent, mostly colorless, sometimes light brown. Diam. sine. vag. max. 73'55//=.00066”’; cum vag. max. 7}}9//=.0013”. CLASS CHLOROPHYLLOPHYCEAE. FAM. PALMELLACEAE. GEN. PALMELLA. P. JESENII. Sp. Nov. P. thallo indefinite expanso, initio dilute aut laete viride, molle, pellu- cidulo; aetate provecta firmo, tuberculoso, saturate olivaceo-viride ; cellulis globosis vel ellipticis, —in thalli aetate immaturo, plerumque singulis aut geminis, saepe distantibus,—in aetate provecta saepe in familias con- nexis, plerumque confertis ; tegumentis in thalli aetate immaturo plerum- que diffluentibus, aetate provecta plerumque distinctis. Thallus indefinitely expanded, in the beginning soft and pellucid, after- 1809.] 135 [Wood. wards firm, tubercular, deep olive green: cells globose or elliptical ; in the immature thallus, single or geminate, frequently scattered; in the mature thallus often closely conjoined into families, mostly crowded ; in the young thallus the teguments of the cells are mostly diffluent, after- wards distinct. Diam. cell. glob. max. 32/57’/=.00028 ; cell. oblong. long. max. 33'59/’ =.0004. GEN. TETRASPORA. T. LUBRICA. (Roth) Ag. In aquis limpidis prope Philadelphia. GEN. RHAPHIDIUM. R. POLYMORPHUM. Fresen. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. FAM. PROTOCOCCACEAE. GEN. SCENESDESMUS. s. acutTus. Meyen. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. Ss. PoLYMORPHUS. Sp. Nov. S. cellulis fusiformibus, aut ovalibus aut ellipticis aut globosis, sin- gulis aut 2-8 conjunctis, plerumque utroque polo aculeo unico, interdum aculeis duobus, instructis: apicibus obtusis, acutis, vel acutissimis ; aculeis gracillimis, rectis, modice elongatis, inclinatis. S. cells fusiform, or oval, or elliptic, or globose, single or 2-7 con- joined, furnished in most cases with a single spine, sometimes 2, at each end ; ends obtuse, acute or very acute; spines exceedingly slender and acute, straight, moderately long, inclined. Diam. y59//—750/; plerumque zy457/’- Hab. In aquis quietis prope Camden, New Jersey. GEN. HYDRODICTYION. H. UTRICULATUM. Roth. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. GEN. PEDIASTRUM. B. BORYANUM. (Turpin.) Mengh. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—R Wood.] 1 36 June 18 FAM. DESMIDIEFEAE.* cen. PALMOGLOEBA. P. CLEPSYDRA. Wood. P. saxicola et bryophila, in gelatina achroa interdum dilute viride nidulans ; cellulis cylindricis, cum polis obtuse truncato-rotundatis, diam- etro 2-3 plo longioribus ; lamina chlorophyllacea axili, plerumque indis- tincte, saepe nulla; plasmate dilute viride; nucleo plerumque distincto ; zygosporis subfuscis aut subglobosis aut enormiter in clepsydre forma ; membrana externa enormiter excavata et sulcata. P. living on rocks and mosses, swimming in a transparent, sometimes light green jelly; cells obtusely truncated, rounded at the ends, 2-3 times longer than broad ; chlorophyll lamina axillary, mostly indistinct, often wanting; endochrome light green; nucleus generally distinct ; zygospore subfuscous, either subglobose or of an irregular form, somewhat resembling that of an hour-glass; external coat irregularly excavated and sulcate. Diam. ;33,/’. Hab. In rupibus et in muscis irroratis ad Chelten Hills, prope Phila- delphia. GEN. CLOSTERIUM. C. EHRENBERGI. Menegi. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. C. DIANAE. Hhrod. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. Cc. LUNULA. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. C. ROSTRATUM. EHhrb. Hab. Prope Philadelphia, C. SETACEUM. Hhrb. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. C. LINEATUM. Hhrb. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. C. LEIBLEINII. tz. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. C. PARVULUM. WNaeg. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. c. ACEROSUM. (Schrank.) Hhrb. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. *T have paid so little attention to the Desmids that I intended at first to omit the family, but afterwards thought best to mention the few I have identified. 137 [Wood. 1869.] GEN. TETMEMORUS. T. GRANULATUS. (Bréb.) Raifs. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. GEN. PLEUROTAENIUM. P. TRABECULA. (Hhrb.) Naeg. Hab. Prove Philadelphia. GEN. SPIROTAENIA. 8. BRYOPHILA. (Bréb.) Rabenhorst. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. cEN. MICRASTERIAS. M. TRUNCATA. (Corda.) Brib. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. M. JENNERI. Ralfs. GEN. STAURASTRUM. S. PUNCTUALATUM. Bréb. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. GEN. DIDYMOPRIUM. DR. GREVILI. FKéz. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. GEN. COSMARIUM. C. CUCUMIS. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. c. BOoTRYTIS. (Bory.) Menegh. Hab. Prope Philadelphia. FAM. ZYGNEMACEAE. Remarks.—In this family I only enumerate such species as Ihave found in fruit, since there can be no certain identification of sterile plants. My list | am well satisfied, however, by no means completely represents the fauna of the neighborhood of Philadelphia. GEN. RHYNCONEMA. R. ELONGATA, Sp. Nov. R. articulis vegetativis diametro 7-20 plo longioribus ; articulis spori- feris multo brevioribus, valde tumidis ; cytiodermate utroque fine pro- tense et replicato ; fascia unica, laxissime spirali ; anfractibus plerumque 7; sporis ellipticis, diametro 1-23 plo longioribus. Sterile joints 7-20 times longer than broad; fertile joints much Wood.] 138 [June 18, shorter, greatly swollen; cell wall at each end produced or folded in ; chlorophyll filament 1, spiral lax ; turns mostly 7; spores elliptical, 2-24 times longer than broad. Diam. Spor. -,5 = .00106. Artic. vegetat. -=55 .0005. Hab. In aquis limpidis prope Philadelphia. R. PULCHELLA. Sp. Nov. R. articulis sterilibus diametro 2-3 plo longioribus ; sporiferis nonni- hil tumidis; fascia unica; anfractibus 3-4; sporis ellipticis, diametro fere duplo longioribus ; cytiodermate utroque fine protense et replicato. Sterile joints 2-3 times longer than broad; fertile joints somewhat swollen; chlorophyll band one; turns of spiral 3-4; spores elliptical, almost twice as long as broad; cell wall at each end produced or folded in. Diam. Artic. Steril. 455 - 757 = -00033 - .0013. Spar. 2,5 -— 7495 = .0012 .00133. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. GEN. SPIROGYRA. 8. WEBERI. tz. Remarks.—The American form agrees pretty well with the European, but is however, larger, its cells also a attain a greater proportionate length, and their chlorophyll bands have more turns. The lower limits of the American form are, however, so overlapped by the upper limits of the European, that it seems to me they must be considered identical. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. s. DUBIA. Kitz. Remarks.—I have never seen the sporangial cell swollen in American specimens, in other respects the agreement is complete. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. S. QUININA. (Ag) Kéz. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. S. RIVULARIS. (Hassall), Rabenhorst. Hab. In rivulis prope Hibernia, Florida. Mr. Wm. Canby. S. LONGATA. (Vauch), Ktz. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. s. INSIGNIS. (Hassall), Itz. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. s. PROTECTA. Sp. Nov. S. saturate viridis, lubrica ; articulis sterilibus diametro 6 plo longiori- bus; sporiferis vix tumidis; cytiodermate in cellule utroque fine pro- tense et replicato ; fascia unica; anfractibus 6; sporis oblongis vel ellip- ticis : membrano crassissimo. S. Deep green, slippery ; sterile joints 6 times longer than broad ; fer- 1869. ] 139 [Wood. tile cells scarcely swollen; cell wall folded in at the ends; chlorophyll band single ; turns 6 ; spores oblong or elliptical, spore wall very thick. Diam. Rete steril. tig! =.00146 ; spor. lat. -405//—-42,//—.00133—.0016 long. -235—0033. Ss. ORASSA. Kitz. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. s. DILUTA. Sp. Nov. S. articulis sterilibus diametro subzqualibus ad duplo longioribus ; fructiferis haud tumidis ; fasciis spiralibus 5, angustissimis, laxis, valde nodosis; anfractibus plerumque 3, interdum 1; zygosporis sparsis, late ellipticis vel ovatis aut globosis; cytiodermate modice teuue, in utroque fine nec protenso nec replicato. 8. Sterile joints about as long as broad to twice longer, fertile cells not swollen; chlorophyll bands 5, exceedingly narrow, lax, strongly nodose ; turns mostly 3, sometimes 1 ; zygospores few, broadly elliptical, ovate or globose ; cell wall moderately thin, not infolded at the ends. Diam. Artic. steril. -#2,//=.008”. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. S. PARVISPORA. Sp. Nov. S. articulis sterilibus diametro 2-4 plo longioribus ; fructiferis haud tumidis, diametro 1-24 plo longioribus; fasciis spiralibus 4, angustis, nodosis, anfractibus pluribus ; zygosporis parvissimis, ellipticis, diametro 4-2 plo longioribus; cytiodermate utroque fine nec protenso, nec replicate. Sterile joints 2-4 times longer than broad; fertile not tumid, 1-23 times longer than broad; chlorophyll bands i narrow, nodose ; turns many ; zygospores very small, elliptical, 14-2 times longer than broad ; cell wall not infolded at the end. Diam. Art. Steril ~23,//=.003 spor. diam. transv. 7435//-744)//—.002- 0023; long 723,//-738,5//= Hab. In stagnis, Hibernia, Florida. Mr. Wm. Canby. f GEN. ZYGNEMA. Z. INSIGNIS. (Hassall), Ktz. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. GEN. SIROGONIUM. S. RETROVERSUM. Sp. Novo 8. articulis sterilibus diametro 7-15 plo longioribus ; fasciis spiralibus 1, rare 2, latis, granulatis; anfractibus 1-9 ; articulis fertilibus valde tu- midis, retroversis, copulatione genuflexa et sine tubo connexivo ; cytio- dermate nonnihil crasso, utroque fine protenso vel replicato; sporis ellipticis. Sterile joints 7-15 times longer than broad ; chloroplyll band 1, rarely 2, broad, granulate ; turns 1-9; fertile article very tumid, retroverted ; Wood.] 140 [June 18, union of cells without connecting tubes, genuflexuous; cytioderm somewhat thick, infolded at the ends; spores elliptical. Diam. cell. steril. --%5//=.0012. GEN. MESOCARPUS. M. SCALARIS. Hassal. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. ORD. SIPHOPHYCEAE. FAM. HYDROGASTREZA. GEN. HYDROGASTRUM. H. GRANULATUM. (Linn). Disv. Hab. In stagnis exsiccatis, Delaware. Dr. I. F. Billings. FAM. VAUCHERIACE. GEN. VAUCHERIA. Vv. GEMINATA. (Vauch). De C. Hab. In stagnis prope Philadelphia. Vv. POLYMORPHA. Sp. Nov. V. in cespites dense intricata ; thallo capillari, tenui; antheridia cor- niculata ex ramuli lateralis apice formatis; ramulis fertilibus interdum et oogoniis et antheridiis instructis, interdum antheridiis solum ; oogoniis plerumque geminis, interdum singulis, globosis vel ovatis, sszepe brevi- rostratis, plerumque distincte pedunculatis sed rarius sessilibus ; oosporis enormiter subglobosis vel ovatis; sporodermate achroo e stratis duobus composito. Ceespitose ; thallus hair like, thin ; antheridia corniculate, formed of the apex of lateral branches ; fertile branches sometimes furnished both with oogonia and antheridia, sometimes with antheridia alone ; oogonia sometimes single but mostly in pairs, occasionally shortly rostrate, gen- erally distinctly pedunculate but sometimes sessile ; oospores irregularly subglobose or ovate, surrounded by a transparent double spore coat. Hab. In aquis prope ‘‘ Buffalo Bayou,’’ Louisiana. Prof. H. W. Ravenel. Vv. SERICEA. Lyngd. Hab. In stagnis et humis irroratis prope Philadelphia. v. AVERSA. Hassal. Remarks.—I have found this species in the neighborhood of Philadel- phia, if indeed it be a species. Prof. Rabenhorst thinks it probably merely a form of the preceeding and all the specimens I have seen appeared to run into it. 1869.] 141 [ Wood. ORD. NEMATOPHYCEAE. FAM. ULVACEAE. GEN. SCHIZOMERIS. S. LEIBLEINII. « 8 4 Motalawadthpbelowereadscee ee eee eae 6 2 Wenoth bridge. sa 4. 1- Beets Me eae me cites 1 8 a6 HEMET (GUANGING))o5600e000000n0bans0endsaN0 2 4 a Lill} hose scree. sol Serica mine teirvatn erase oe tia cer 2 5 ie LOC Gs © ORIN Cd LO CRE ONS, HOH EELS AES I Amini ae 23 Upper surface of limbs dark brown. Cope.] 148 [July 16, Habitat. This turtle occurs in some of the tributaries of the Parana or Uraguay rivers, either in the Argentine Confederation or the Banda Oriental, but in which, I do not know. My information is derived from W. W. Morgan, M. D., of Philadelphia, who resided many years in Monte Video, where he obtained the specimen from a collector. This species differs from those already known, in the greater extension forwards and laterally of the anterior margin of the carapace. Jn conse- quence the forms of the vertebral, nuchal, and marginal plates are ex- aggerated in form, the first in length, the last two in width. CHELOPUS RUBIDUS, Cope. If this genus be regarded as co-extensive with the Geoclemmys of Dr. Gray, it embraces with the present addition, fourteen species. Carapace oval, moderately elevated and with obtuse median keel ; mar- gin entire not recurved. Vertebral plates broader than long, with con- cave posterior sutures, except the anterior, in which the length is some- what in excess. Its lateral margins are parallel and the anterior angle is produced, curtailing the small nuchal. Scuta concentrically grooved, visible, though obsolete in the old individual. Plastron rather plane, deeply emarginate behind; very openly in front. Inguinal and axillary scales very small. Areolz of the scuta a little above and behind their centres. ‘i Claws short, toes much united on all the limbs. Soles and palms with large scales. Forearm with six cross-rows of large scales in front, and two longitudinal rows on the outer side. A cross series of three across the carpus behind. Posterior foot club-shaped. Testudo-like, the heel with three cross rows of shields of 1, 3, 2 respectively, the posterior of the last two very large, double the next smallest. Rest of the hind limb small sealed. Head broad plane above, muzzle and loreal region vertical. Beak ob- tusely hooked, not emarginate ; alveolar faces without grooves or ridges. Ground color of body yellow, the limbs and throat shaded and spotted with red, which is margined with black. The neck above and laterally is marked with numerous black rings and lines; below with the gular region it is closely black dotted. Tail very short, even in the males, yellow, with fine black longitudinal lines above. Limbs with black and pink dots. A chevron shaped red band extends from the orbits round the canthus nostralis and muzzle, and another wider and with narrow black margin between the orbits, with the apex forwards. Two similar bands extend from the orbits posteriorly to the obscure tympanum, and two are concentricably arranged on the occiput, the apex of the anterior being separated as a large red spot. In the male the colors are deeper and brighter. Carapace yellowish brown, each costal scutum with a hori- zontally oval black-edged yellow spot in its area, surrounded by yellow annuli. The young shows: shows that there are two such concentric annuli. Marginals with alternating longitudinal yellow and black lines above, brown below. In the young, the vertebrals have a marginal yel- low anuulus, and median. oval. ring with yellow and black variations. 1869.] * 149 (Cope. Below, deep brown, the plastron broadly yellow all round. In the young the yellow extends over the whole plastron ; in the very old the brown is very narrow medially. Measurements, (No. 265.) Greakestmenothy plastromey:)lyyscijicleis-/sy-velley sir- <- (m. .1525 Wadthynvedially (hotall)evvseie tt) arises ee 1128 Greatest length carapace...................--- gS vod UG Greatest elevation carapace................... “064 JehuaGl lhirnlo wROUN LeNeO>poodaesocooboodsusG5050u0 0538 Fore GS CID OW Ree tisie soy onus cei Beek ‘041 eadtand neck: abOvies es .scce ec sycls oe see Sees th TWhvichin Meal “leunynorel\bod boeeeusdeupaccvcouce “024 OiROeA OHS 150) Gravel WMVAAIGs Soancoocecsddanou0. “e .0082 Habitat. Tuchitan Tehuantepec, Mexico, discovered by Prof. Francis Sumichrast. Four specimens, Nos. 264-5-6-7. This handsome land tortoise appears to approach sufficiently near the C. callicephalus, Gray (Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1868, 254), of unknown habitat, to render a comparison proper. That species according to Gray, has a posteriorly truncate plastron, and a notched beak. The vertebral scuta are as long as broad, the second and thirdlonger. ‘The chin, throat, and upper parts of the neck are spotless. We owe this species to our active correspondent, F. Sumichrast, who since the days of Natterer, has not been equalled in the thoroughness and extent of his zoological researches in Tropical America. CoNIOPHANES PICEIVITTIS, Cope. Scales in twenty-five longitudinal series, vertex and muzzle in one plane; upper part of rostral plate prominent, not produced between the internasals. Latter less than half prefrontals. Prefrontals longer than wide, decurved to the subquadrate loreal. Postnasal higher than pre- nasal. Preoculars one or two, postoculars two, superior larger. Super- ciliaries narrow. Frontal rather wide, with long posterior angle, and parallel lateral outlines which are little shorter than the anterior. Occipi- tals elongate, scarcely emarginate behind. Superior labials eight, fourth and fifth entering orbit. Sixth higher than long ; seventh largest. Tem- porals 1-2. Postgeneials shorter than pregeneials. Inferior labials ten. Gastrosteges 158 two anals; urosteges, 90. Total length, .542 m.; of tail, .063 m.; from muzzle to canthus oris, .014 m.; interorbital width, .0048 m. The ground color above and below is white, which is immaculate below, except on the throat and chin, where it is black dusted. Above three broad black bands extend from the end of the muzzle to the end of the tail. The inferior commences on the middle of the third row, and occupies three and two half rows of scales ; a row and one-half intervenes between this and a median dorsal band which covers six and one or two half rows. The ground color on the head is an irregular line from the muzzle along each canthus and beyond orbit, and the upper labial plates ; these are thickly dusted with black, the anterior spotted on the edge. Cope.] 150 [July 16, From Chihuitan, Tehuantepec, Western Mexico. F. Sumichrast, Coll. in Mus. Smithsonian, No. 248. SYMPHIMUS LEUCOSTOMUS, Cope, sp. et gen. nov. Char. gen. Dentition isodont ; cephalic plates normal except that the internasals are confluent with the nasal, and the latter with each other and with the loreal. Preorbitals one. Rostral shield not prominent ; scales smooth, equal, uniporous ; anal bifid. General form elongate. This genus differs from Chilomeniscus, to which its technical characters are similar, about as much as any colubrine serpent does from a burrowing calamarian. Its form is nearly that of Cyclophis, and it should perhaps be placed nearest toit in the system. Steindachner’s Bergenia mexicana* should, it appears to me, be referred to Chilomeniscus Cope, of which it is the fourth species. Char. specif. The head narrow, not very distinct, the muzzle acumin- ate, but obtuse at the extremity. The scales in fifteen longitudinal series. The form is cylindric and elongate. The tail of medium length as in Cyclophis. Rostral plate high as wide, scarcely visible from above, not prominent. Side shield of the muzzle pierced by the nostril and ex- tending to the preocular ; latter long as high, not reaching the frontal. Postoculars one on one side, two on the other. Superior labials seven, third and fourth bounding orbit, all longer than high except the fifth ; temporals 1-2 large, the anterior bounding the fifth and sixth labials. The median sutures of the rostronasal and prefrontal plates of equal length. Frontal longer than wide, with concave sides; superciliaries wide, occipitals elongate, common suture nearly as long as prefrontals and frontals together, truncate behind. Inferior labials eight, fifth largest—narrow ; pregeneials a little longer than postgeneials. The eye is rather small. Urosteges, 111, gastrosteges. Color olive gray above, a dorsal band of light brown extending over three rows of scales to the origin of the tail ; the skin of its median region being yellow. Throat, chin and superior labials light yellow, a black line above the superior labials from the second posteriorly. The brown of the upper regions descends to the lower row of scales at about the twelfth transverse row; two or three lower rows are pale edged. Belly dirty white. The dorsal band is posteriorly ill defined, and extends a little be- yond the vent ; tail brown. Tn. Lin. MotalvenathwNoOwe40 eee oener eae ter een 31 B38 Wemortlas taytleseiec sy. 3 ave ce deena epee baler eee eave cn Neue ea 10 9 eno thiaietuswiNow22 (ieee see eel res 6.8 iimterorbivalliswidthy uur apa vee eee reese i dpa AWitdigh: jamz, Zee at oer RAS ROARS an ee 1.8 VV ir ty Oral G ets yeacielc ole ce tsa aie Meira ce nO ce AAR 1.4 Bree Fog oh tl As Ge RAI Pee A es Bree ALF Oy clean C005 ci cto Gis 7 0 No. 240. From Chihuitan, from the same. No. 227. From the collections of the Smithsonian Institution from the province of Oaxaca, Mexico, made by Francis Sumichrast. * Reised. Oester. Freg. Novara Reptilia, 92 fig. 1869. ] 151 [Cope. LEPTODIRA MYSTACINA, Cope. Scales in nineteen longitudinal series. Body very slightly compressed, head distinct, an elongate oval. Superior labials seven, the second in contact with the upper and lower preoculars, third and fourth with orbit, and fifth with occipital excluding the temporal. Fourth, fifth, and sixth higher than long ; temporals 1-1-2. Oculars 2-2, inferior small in both sets. Internasals long as wide, prefrontals longer than wide. Frontal longer than wide, with parallel sides, considerably in contact with superior ocular. Occipitals oval, scarcely emarginate behind. Postgeneials longer than than pregeneials. Gastrosteges 187, anal 1-1, urosteges 70. The ground color is a dirty white, and is uniform below. Above it, marked by very broad cross-bands, which extend to the gastrosteges and are twice as wide as the intervals of ground. There are thirteen to the vent ; on the posterior half of the body they divide on the vertebral line, and alternate ; one is thus continuous with two of an opposite side, leaving the ground in lateral squares. Head above, including occipitals, a lighter speckled brown above, leaving a white collar. A black band from eye to angle of mouth, and a second from below the eye to mouth, parallel to the above, encloses with it a light band ; a black band from eye to nostril ; lips in front black spotted. Total length 16.25 inches ; of mouth 7 lines; of tail 4.25. Habitat. The western region of Mexico, near the Isthmus of Tehuan- tepec, two specimens (251-261) sent to the Smithsonian Institution by Francis Sumichrast. This serpent approaches very near the L. pacifica Cope in details, but differs totally in coloration. The structural differ- ences are the following : L. mystacina. LL. pacifica. Head elongate oval ; Head short wide. Preocular reaching frontal; Preocular not reaching. Prefrontals longer than wide; P. f. wider than long. Fifth labial to occipital ; Fifth labial not to occipital. TRIMORPHODON, Cope. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1861, 297. This peculiar genus, hitherto not found outside of the Mexican, Cen- tral-American and Sonoran districts, is well illustrated by the collections received by the Smithsonian Institution. Two species have been hith- erto known, and I now add three others, as follows : I. Scales in 21-8 Rows. Seven (six) superior labials ; three loreals; head black in front with a white T shaped mark ; back with uniform black rhombs. T. TAU. Hight superior labials ; head broad, short; three loreals ; head dark- brown, with light cross-bar on muzzle and between eyes, and V on oc- ciput ; body with broad brown annuli; tail one-fifth the total. T. UPSILON. A. P. S.— VOL. XI—T 2 Cope.] lo2 [July 16, Nine superior labials ; head long, swollen behind ; two loreals ; head with a lyre-shaped pattern, back with irregular rhombs, with pale centres; tail one-sixth the length. T. LYROPHANES. Nine superior labials; head long; two loreals; head with chevron bands ; body with irregular pale centred rhombs. T. BISCUTATUS. Seales in 27 Rows. Nine superior lJabials, three loreals ; head elongate ; two dark cross- bands and two chevrons on head ; back with very irregular rhombs, with pale centres ; tail one-sixth. T. MAJOR. TRIMORPHODON TAU, Cope. Scales in twenty-three series. Muzzle projecting considerably beyond the mouth. Rostral plate somewhat produced behind ; internasals, about one-fourth size of prefrontals, which are long as wide. Frontal with straight lateral margins, which are longer thananterior. Occipital not longer than frontal, regularly rounded behind. Nostril in middle of nasal. Three loreals, three post and three preoculars. Temporals, 2-3-4. Superior labials six, the fifth probably composed of two plates fused, as it is twice as long as deep, on both sides. The fourth and fifth enter the orbit, the third is cut down by the lower loreal and preocular. Inferior labials, eleven. Body strongly compressed. Total length Om. 236; of tail, .035 m. Above gray, with twenty-three jet-black rhombs, which extend to the gastrosteges by their lateral angles. Tail with ten rhombs ; all every- where unspotted with paler. Sides of belly black spotted. Head gray with a black mask above as far as the middle of the occipitals, but with two lateral ear-shaped prolongations on the same ; a pale T-shaped mark extends transversely between orbits, and longitudinally to end of muzzle. One specimen, No. 236, from F. Sumichrast, from the western part of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, Mexico. TRIMOPHORDON UPSILON, Cope. Internasals broader than long, prefrontal broad as long, frontal with parallel outline not reached by the preocular. Oculars 8-3. Nasals dis- tinct, loreals three, forming an L. Temporals 3-3-3. Fourth and fifth labials in contact with orbits. Twelve inferior labials. Scales in 2-3 series. Body with twenty-four brown annuli, which are broken imto irregular spots on the belly, and are broader than long on the vertebral line. On all but the anterior third the length, a vertical brown bar stands between these on the sides. Chin and lips white, superior plates brown spotted above. Loreal region spotted. Temporal and occipital region brown with a pale Y on the occipital common suture. Total length 0.34m. Tail .052 m.; head to aictus .011 m. One specimen in Mus. Smithsonian from I. I. Major, from Guadalaxara, - West Mexico. 1869. ] 153 [Cope. TRIMORPHODON MAJOR, Cope. This large species hasa head of lanceolate form; the body is com- pressed and the tail slender. The large number of series of scales char- acterizes it most distinctly. Gastrosteges 258, anal 1-1, urosteges 88. The preocular does not reach the frontal; temporals 3-4-5. There is a broad brown band across the muzzle and chevron, ceasing between the eyes, whose limbs are lost above the rictus ovis. A second chevron be- hind this is closed by a spot connecting the limbs behind. The dorsal rhombs extend to the gastrosteges, and are manifestly formed by the union. of four spots, two vertebral, and one on each side ; they enclose three spots of the ground in a cross-row. Two specimens from near Tehuantepec from Francis Sumichrast. TELEOLEPIS STRIATICEPS, Cope, sp. et gen. Nov. Character genericus. Dentition diacranterian. Cephalic shields nor- mal; two nasals, the nostril in the anterior one ; the loreal region with a deep longitudinal groove. Scales equal, smooth, biporous; anal shield entire. Tail short, body slender ; head wide, very distinct. Disregarding the scale pores, this form might be regarded as a near ally of Xenodon, or perhaps of Opheomorphus, for it has the head of the first and the body of the last. The importance of Reinhardt’s scale pores I have often had occasion to observe, and I believe their absence or single or double existence to be as important indices of natural groups as any other structural feature. In general, Reinhardt’s tables show that sub- terranean and aquatic Colubrine serpents do not possess these pores, while the more highly developed and typical forms of a more aerial life possess them double ; the Coronelline forms of an intermediate character, possess single pores, though frequently none, and rarely two. Teleolepis agrees with Alsophis in many technical characters, except in having a single anal shield, but the latter differs especially in its exces- sively elongate tail. A close approach appears to be made by Zamenis, but here the anal plate is double also. Bothrophthalmus Schleg. a Ly- codont, presents the peculiar loreal groove. Character specificus. The body is rather compressed, the urosteges not angulate. The scales are in nineteen longitudinal series, and are rather wide on the dorsal region The length of the tail enters the total 5.66 times. The head is broad and flat, and the neck narrow. The rostral plate is flat, and slightly visible from above. The internasals are little shorter than the prefrontals, but not so wide. Both nasals are visible from above, but not the loreal; the preocular reaches the frontal. The latter is as long as the occipitals and rather narrow, with concave borders. Each occipital is as broad as the middle suture ; the superciliaries large. The eyes are large and with round pupil. Nasals about equal; the loreal with a curved supero-posterior mar- gin, which invades the single preocular ; postoculars three, the superior in-contact with occipital only, the inferior the largest, joining only the fifth and sixth superior labials. The temporals are very small and num- ber 2-2-4. Superior labials eight, fourth and fifth entering orbit ; sixth Cope.] 154 [July 16, quite elongate, last two each longer than high. Inferior labials nine ; geneials equal, not elongate. Gastrosteges 189, urosteges 70. Total length of a young animal 0m 30; of tail 0m 03.5. Color above light brown, with a dorsal series of transverse quadrate deep brown spots extending from nape to middle of tail; they extend over seven and two half rows of scales, and are restricted by a light yel- low line, which extends on each side the back. The spots are yellow- edged anteriorly and posteriorly. The sides are marked with two rows of alternating pale brown blotches, of which the superior is opposite the dorsal series. There is a triangular dark edged yellow spot on the ex- tremity of each gastrostege ; belly closely brown punctate. A blackish band extends from the rostral plate to the side of the neck, and three similar bands with pale middles extend on the top of the head to the nape. Lips and chin yellow, brown blotched. This species was found by Geo. Sceva, of the Thayer Expedition to Brazil, and is No. 909, Mus. Comparative Zoology, Cambridge, Mass. LYGOPHIS LACHRYMANS, Cope. This species repeats the generic characters of Lygophis in the dia- cranterian dentition, lack of scale pores, tail of medium length and nor- mal scutellation. Seales in seventeen series, obtuse. Muzzle short, rostral shield not as high as wide, not prominent. Internasals broader than long ; frontal broad, shorter than occipitals, with a right angle behind. Superior labials eight, fourth and fifth only in orbit, sixth only higher than long. Loreal longer than high ; oculars 1-2, the anterior not reaching frontal ; temporals 1-2. Inferior labials large, nine; pregeneials shorter than postgeneials. Gastrosteges 173; anals 1-1; urosteges 78. Color aboye, chestnut brown ; ends of gastrosteges and first three and a half rows of scales blackish, yellowish margined above from side of neck to end of tail. On the anterior half the body is divided by a yellow- ish band on the first and second rows of scales. Below and labials bright yellow, the anterior superior labials brown margined. A deep brown band from eye across sixth labial, another across seventh, and a black spot on side of neck. Head above brown. Habitat, unknown. This species is remotely like Coniophanes fissidens. It differs from Rhadinaea taeniolata Jan. (Hnicognathus) in the broader frontal, and the lip bands as well as uniform back. ALSOPHIS RIJGERSMAEI, Cope. Six specimens of this species serve to represent its characters. In three the scales are in 23 series, in one in 21. The loreal plate is longer than high, and with a straight superior suture, except on one side of one individual, where it is angulated above as in A. antillensis. The muzzle projects considerably beyond the mouth, but the rostral plate is not pro- longed on its upper surface. Superior labials eight, third, fourth, and fifth in orbit ; these with the sixth are the only labials higher than long. Temporals 1-2 the anterior in contact with inferior of the two postocu- lars only. One preocular occasionally divided and not reaching frontal. 1869.] 155 [Cope. Nasals different in size, the anterior much smaller and not more elevated than the loreal. Muzzle very narrow, internasals longer than broad, vertical elongate and contracted by the concave superciliary sutures, its anterior suture one-half its length, which equals the common occipital suture. Occipitals emarginate behind. Gastrosteges 201, 201, 204, 210; anal 1; urosteges 100, 122, 108, 100. Length 37.25 inches, of which the tail measures 3.25 inches. Color, dark slate brown above, with a number of blackish cross-bands behind the head, which are sometimes quite indistinct and sometimes separated by paler bands. A broad brown band from the nostril through the eye which expands and is lost on the temporal region, though its lower boundary is continued as a line on the side of the neck. The scales on the median dorsal line have a white border. Belly, the posterior half black, anterior yellowish, gray spotted. Upper labial region orange, brown spotted; gular region grayish brown and orange mingled. Frontal and occipital plates dark medially. This species is in general appearance much like the A. sanctaecrucis, but it has the loreal plate of the A. angulifer, and several more series of scales than either. The frontal shield is of a narrower form than in either A. sanctaecrucis or A. antillensis. Habitat. So far as yet known, this distinct species is confined to the small island of St. Martins, in the Spanish West Indies, which has an area of only about thirty square miles. Six specimens were sent to the Academy Natural Sciences by Dr. R. E. Van Rijgersma of that island. I dedicate the species to him in recognition of his labors in endeavoring to lay a basis for the complete zoology of that island. XENODON ISOLEPIS, Cope. Eight superior labials, fourth and fifth entering orbit, sixth the largest, exceeding the seventh. Anal shield bifid. Scales of the body in nine- teen series quincuncially arranged of equal size and form, one pitted. General arrangement that of a Coluber; the body is also as in that type entirely cylindric. Oculars 1-2; loreal little higher than long ; postnasal highest ; rostral not prominent. Temporals 1-2. Frontal longer than wide, longer than occipital. Gastrosteges 156 ; urosteges 55. Color uniform leaden above, flanks greenish, below dirty white. Pos- terior tooth rather short. This species is nearest in technical characters to the X. neovidii Gth. but differs entirely in color, and the equal size and form and quincuncial arrangement of the scales. The sixth upper labial is according to Gunther’s figure (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 18638, V. C.,) much smaller than the seventh ; here the latter is distinctly smaller than the former. From Pebas Equador on the upper Amazon. Received from Professor James Orton, of Vassar College, New York. A collection recently re- ceived from that gentleman from the same locality embraced the follow- ing species, all of which are in the Museum of the Academy Natural Sciences, presented through the liberality of Prof. Orton. Cope.] 156 July 16, Testudinata. Chelys matamata. Ophidia. Typhlops reticulatus, L. Tortrix scytale, L. Rhabdosoma microrhynchum, Cope. Leptodira annulata, L. Oxyrhopus clelia, L. Xenodon isolepis, Cope. Herpetodryas carinatus, L. Himantodes. Leptognathus catesbyi, D. B. Elaps lemniscatus, Linn. Elaps imperator, Cope, (#. batesi, Gthr.) Elaps scutiventris, Cope. Bothrops bilineatus (27 series of scales only.) Lacertina. Amphisbaena alba, L. Amphisbaena fuliginosa, Schreb. Amiva surinamensis, Gray. Thecadactylus rapicauda, Houtt. Anolis viridiaeneus, Peters. Batrachia. Pithecopus tarsius, Cope. Specimens with head and body five inches in length. Pithecopus tomopternus, Cope. Hyla marmorata, Daud. Hyla leucophyllata, Beireis. A curious variety with a round or dis- cord blackish spot on the vertex, brown lateral band from end of muzzle, and whole under surfaces a bright salmon color. Another variety appa- rently has been named Hyla triangulum by Gimther, P. Z. 8. Lond., 1865. Scytopis allenii, Cope. Bufo naricus, Spix. Bufo margaritiferus, Merr. Pipa surinamensis, L. ELAPS SCUTIVENTRIS, Cope. Form slender, tail short, thick. Oculars 1-2; superior posterior with its inferior suture continuous with that of the occipital. Superior labials seven, third and fourth in orbit, all except the first higher than long, none reaching occipital. Temporals 1-1. Superciliaries broad as long ; prefontals and internasals of equal length, the former much the wider. Rostral broader than high, not prominent. Symphyseal largely in con- tact with pregeneials. Scales in fifteen series. Gastroteges 274; anal divided ; urosteges 15. Above black, except a broad yellow head-band, which extends from the posterior margin of the prefontals to that of the occipitals. Tail with Ort iy 1869. ] 1 i [Cope. one or two crossings above. Below black, with large transversely oval yellow spots, which extend to the third row of scales, and include three or four gastrosteges at intervals of the same width. Length, 17.5 inches, tail, 7 inches. From Pebas on the Amazon in Equador. From Prof. Orton. This species appears to be nearest the E. narducci of Jan. TRIGONOCEPHALUS (Bothrops) ARBOREUS, Cope. Scales in thirty-five longitudinal series, all carinate except the inferior. Eight superior labials which diminish in size posteriorly, bounded above behind posterior line of orbit by seven small scales, which are not distin- guishable from those of the temple. Second labial forming anterior boundary of fossa; two rows scales between fourth and orbit. Inferior labials eleven. Three scales on the canthus above, the anterior two large, forming with a pair on top of the muzzle a shielded space of six plates. Supercilaries large, separated by nine rows. Gastrosteges 201, urosteges 64 pairs. The body is much compressed, and the coiled tail with slightly expanded prehensile extremity, appropriately to arboreal life. Color, greenish yellow, the first series of scales yellow,-ends of the gas- trosteges with a green line. Dorsal region with faint brownish yellow spots often paired; many scales black edged. Labial scales of both jaws black edged ; a black band with yellow interruptions from eye to angle of mouth. This handsome and venomous tree serpent was discovered by Dr. Otho Wucherer, near to Bahia, Brazil. It is a near ally of the B. bilinea- tus of Nieuwied, but that animal has 27-9 rows of scales, and the top of the muzzle is sealed, (as given by Schlegel in the atlas of his Physionomie des Serpens), and the color is slightly different. TRIGONOCEPHALUS (Bothrops) PUBESCENS, Cope. Scales in twenty-three rows, all including the inferior, keeled. Eight superior labials, the fourth longest, and separated from the orbit by three rows of scales. Second not extending to the front of the maxillary pit. Posterior labials quadrate shorter. Seven rows of scales between super- ciliaries ; two on canthus rostralis above, besides the edge of the preocular. The anterior quite large, flat, the second separated by five rows scales. Maxillary, palatine and pterygoid, mandibular and laryngeal margins with the fang sheaths, silky pubescent, forming short longitudinal fringes. Color, brown, with blackish brown spots on each side from ver- tebral line to fourth row of scales. The spots are rounded and pale edged and alternating. They are divided by a longitudinal line of the ground near their middle. There are in their intervals above, round pale edged brown spots, A brown band from eye to angle of mouth, pale edged below ; a similar band across head in front of superciliaries ; two divergent brown spots behind the same plates, and two divergent brown bands behind these, all yellow edged. Sides of face and throat thickly brown dusted. Belly closely brown spotted ; widest spots near end of gastrosteges. Gastrosteges 182, urosteges 25. One specimen of this serpent was brought by the Thayer expedition Cope. ] 158 [July 16, from the Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. It is nearest the B. nieuwiedii, Spix, but may be distinguished by the extraordinary character of the silky fringes in the mouth as well as by the entirely different coloration. In the Jatter respect it is rather more like B. diporus. CNEMIDOPHORUS GRANDENSIS, Cope, sp. nov. Char. Ten series of abdominal plates; brachium plated ; two fronto- parietals. Green with 2-3 white longitudinal lines on each side, a row of brown spots between the two superior and above the more dorsal of the latter. Description. The nostril is anterior to the naso-frenal suture. Infra- labials four, separated from labials behind by one series flat scales (not granules), mesoptychium entire, with 3-4 rows plates, some small ones on the margin, except at middle. Supranasals in contact; also the pre- frontals. Frontal single, much angulate in front. Supraorbitals four, not separated from frontals and frontoparetals by granules. ‘Two pairs wedge shaped parietals, interparietal parallelogrammic as large as one pair. Scutellation minute, caudal scales strongly keeled. Brachiais and antibrachials continuous, latter in two rows only; former continuous with postbrachials, the two forming together five rows, all smooth. Nine femoral pores. Anals continuous with abdominals, composed of one large median plate, margined laterally and behind by six plates, the two posterior marginals. Coloration.—The inferior lateral pale line is interrupted aud not well marked ; sides pale green, between and above the superior lateral lines, brown ; median dorsal line bright green. Nineteen brown spots between nape and rump above upper line, those below rather fewer. Femur with two pale streaks behind, tibia and fore-arm spotted in front. Belly and throat uniform yellow. Habitat. The Rio Grande, Brazil, brought by Capt. George Haminaton, and presented to the Essex Institute, Salem, Mass., (No. 388, ) Museum Academy Natural Sciences, Philadelphia. This species only resembles the C. murinus, D. B., and the C. hetero- lepis, Tschudi in the increased number of its abdominal shields. In C. murinus the brachium is altogether granular, while the C. heterolepis differs in having but one frontoparietal plate, and only two parietals, with frontoparietal smaller than either. It is from Peru. On account of the united frontoparietal shields I refer C. hypery- thrus, Cope as type, and C. heterolepis, Tschudi, as second species of a genus different from the present, under the name of VERTICARIA. Measurements of C. grandensis.* Motel@lenetietcies es): Omid 932s) Horeslimab sere ei 12. Om 02 CPU OuvVieMitiere ce ania Omi06*>) oe Eindae ase ae eee Om 036 08 150) GOllighes sooabor Om 01.9 Cor LOOtI Meas hitter Om 2 AMEIVA ANALIFERA, Cope, sp. nov. Of the group of A. plei, ¢. ¢., with twelve ventral series of scales, no * In the lezal measure of the United States the metre and decimal fractions. E@ 1869.] 159 [Cope. heel spurs, and one frontal plate. The tibial shields in three rows, the outer much larger, and outer toe longer than inner. It differs from that species in having the prebrachial shield small, and in three sub-equal longitudinal rows, graduating into the large prebachials regularly, in hav- ing ten or eight regular marginal anal plates, the median pairs not ab- ruptly larger, and in not having a series of black spots on the sides. The teeth are from the nostril posteriorly 9 canine like, and seven or eight obutuse molars, two or three posterior usually with a lateral cusp. Two median plates in front of the anals. Gular scales in a transverse band of about nine rows, larger ; relatively larger also than in A. plei, also the latter has several rows of scales between the labials and infralabials ; the A. analifera but one row. Greenish yellow below, brownish olive above, with blackish cross- shades on the nape in St. Martin’s specimens. Sides, groin and tail above white spotted ; some white spots in rows across the rump. In Lin Total length (two irches of tail reproduced)...... 13 JEMGl WHWAAIS 1D). WEI > oacdocaocoadscezoooonmacuos 4 6 JEUhaVel Iibem bo sey eetracis Meciominin oe Site Ae Rle ine, MAG ately ed 3 11,8) TINGORG So o-0rd @ SRC aeniG a Stok ee ees eae ee ere ee 1 6 HER OME UMUIIT RY Sree mbehale toes cacielencial sai nets qelersievune ] 8 Head including membr. tympani................. Here lec) Several specimens in Museum Academy from the island of St. Martins, West Indies, presented by Dr. R. E. Van Rijgersma, correspondent of the “Academy at that place ; also one specimen from the adjacent island of St. Bartholomews, from Dr. A. H. Goés of that island. The following species were included in the collection of Dr. Rijgersma. IGUANA NUDICOLLIS, Cuy. This species occurs also in the Swan Islands off the coast of Honduras ; Museum Columbia College, New York. ANOLIS GINGIVINUS, Cope, P. A. N. §., Philadelphia, 1864, 170. AMIVA ANALIFERA, Cope, supra. MABUIA AENEA, Lacep. ATSOPHIS RIJGERSMAEI, Cope, supra. HYLODES MARTINICENSIS, Dum. Bibr. SCELOPORUS SINIFERUS, Cope. Twenty-four transverse series of scales between interscapular region and rump. Seven longitudinal series at the latter point, ten at the former. Lateral scales large, nearly equalling the ventral, which are considerably smaller than the dorsal. All well keeled and mucronate, except the ven- tral, which are smooth and without mucro or emargination, except a few spinous series in front of the vent. Gular scales entire. Palms and soles strongly keeled ; tail slender, its scales strongly keeled like those of the back. Male with three, female with six femoral pores. No granular space in front of shoulder, and no longitudinal folds in the same region, but a short vertical fold in which the skin is so deeply inverted as to Ae Pass =O XU Cope.] 160 [July 16, form a deep pocket extending more than half way to the tympanum, and with some subdividing folds. No auricular scales different from the temporal ; all strongly keeled. Two pairs of supranasals, two pairs frontonasals separated by a small iaternasal. Frontal divided transversely and longitudinally ; frontoparie- tals small. Parietals small, transversely divided; interparietal large, broader than long. Supraorbitals four on each side, preceded by three scales, and bounded inwardly and outwardly by much smaller scales: None striate ; those on muzzle weakly one keeled. Tn. Lin. Noranl Nave, cen dboonoodadcussscdbavesceoddoa00~ 6 8.2 IbemyENN TO WEIIis ocoonedascccecctaccdonhodoucdcogs 2 1.4 OGRA Ts Tayi cll ee Panne eg Mea canes dec dt kd ayes Wad nt aaah 10.2 Gf TORCANEMUS OPISHe sera ee Bie eee ; Dea 56 libavoll Waal] cass petaepen Mee ates spat rae Me come ale 1 8.4 36 OE COOLS aE ReMERe Be Rn aiolarebara c rath ak On eases 10.1 Gt AOTRE TMH ADOT OVSee LEAN ea NS DAT RIER REE nh ay em Toes Sas Alert 6 10.6 VAG ERGs Gocabagcousscucoood RRR eR a Ate aT ey, 4.8 This species is comparable to 5S. oligoporus, Cope, in the large scales and few femoral pores, but differs much in the division of the frontal plate, large interparictal and cervical pocket. It is considerably smaller and of different coloration. Numerous specimens in Smithsonian collections from Francis Sumi- chrast, from the Pacific side of the Isthmus Tehuantepec. LiyLA RUGULOSA, Cope, sp. nov. Cystignathidarum. Prefrontal bones in close union with each other and the fronto-parietals. Vomerine teeth present; auditory apparatus well developed. Manu- brium cartilaginous, xiphisternum emarginate. Toes webbed ; dilata- tions well developed, supported by T-shaped phalanges. Abdomen nearly smooth. This genus is very near to Hylodes,* differing almost entirely in the webbed toes. Keferstein, who has just described this genus (Archiv. f/ Naturgesch, 1868, 926), in consequence of his adhesion to the system of Giinther, has attained to a very coufused idea of its affinities. Character Specificus.—Head broad, body short ; heel extends to end of muzzle. Vomerine teeth in two approximated fasciculi, much behind the posterior line of the nares. Choanae half the size of the ostia pharyngea. Tongue oval, one-fourth lree, openly emarginate behind. Tympanum nearly as large as orbit. Skin thin, with sundry rugosites on the sides of the dorsal region. Muzzle acuminate, not projecting ; nostrils nearly terminal. Canthus rostralis well marked, lores slightly coneave ; front a little convex. Tarsal fold slight, metatarsal tubercle one inner. Solar web to the middle of the first (proximal) phalange on the first and fifth digits; to the base of the same on the others. Third %* Lithodytes rhodopis, Cope, Pr. A. N. Sci., Phil., 1866, 323 is Hylodes sallei, Gthr. P. Z. 8. Lond., 1868- 1869. ] 161 [Cope. digit very elongate. Anterior toes free; lengths 2-4-1-3. A weak dis- coid abdominal dermal fold. Abdomen very obscurely areolate, medially nearly smooth. Color blackish-brown above, sometimes with pale vertebral streak. Femora not marked behind ; above with three oval brown areas enclosed by light lines. , in place, the former occupy irregular pockets, caverns and veins. They occur as incrustations, sometimes tubular and of singular tenuity, as well as in masses. The breccia caverns no doubt had their origin in the same way. The ready decomposition of the limestone has permitted them to be rapidly formed and filled again. It is interesting to note that the only similar bone deposits occur in the galena bearing Hill Limestone of Illinois. These have been described by Drs. Leconte and Leidy, and their species are included in the present list. MEGALONYX JEFFERSONII Harlan. Fragments of teeth. Found also in caves in Tennessee, Georgia and Alabama. STEREODECTES TORTUS, Cope, gen. et. sp. nov. This animal is represented by a nearly perfect upper incisor tooth, and fragments of numerous others. It appears to be a rodent, and the tooth in question presents several points of resemblance to that of Arctomys monax, from which it does not differ much in size. The characters which determine its distinction from that genus are very important, and indicate widely different affinities. The central pulp cavity is exceedingly small, and the tooth for a length no doubt considerably above that of the A.monax, solid, with that exception. At the distal fractured extremity it is narrowly linear in the plane of compression of the tooth, while at the proximal fracture it is round, and of perhaps a shade greater diameter. The anterior face of the tooth is as usual, covered with an enamel layer about as thick as that in Arctomys, which extends round the outer face, covering its anterior two-fifths, and is very slightly decurved on the inner plane face. Viewed from the centre of the are which the tooth describes, the shaft is seen to form a slight sigmoid. ‘The posterior narrowed mar- gin forms a still stronger sigmoid, throwing the extremities of the shaft in opposite directions. JI have not observed this torsion in any living genus of Rodentia, except in abnormal specimens. — : The specific characters are as follows: A section of the shaft is a nearly isosceles spherical triangle. Distally the inner face is more nearly plane than the outer, while proximally the outer is the less oblique of the two. The anterior face is convex in section, and regularly continuous to the outer side. There is a slight groove below the edge of the enamel on the inner side, and a few weak transverse indications across the shank. The’ enamel is nearly smooth, under the microscope displaying weak, minute striae, much asin Arctomys. The are in profile is a perfectly regular segment of a circle. The color is white, and this in a matrix where the yellow color of incisors of other Rodentia is well preserved. ° Length of chord between outer circumference at frac- mee (HUG! CMSs ocebesgoos soos Bor Oibia aero ote 04 saatheronglOs Long diameter proximal end.............. st ieee eRe Short y° gs O85 Che ter syste eet see PS baie lore) I am unable to throw much light on the affinities of the animal which 1869. ] 175 [Cope. bore these teeth. They are more compressed than in the Beaver, and deeper than in the Vischaca ; they are not so narrowed anteriorly as in theagutis. The solidity is only approached by the Castorides ohien sis, and to some degree Amblyrhiza inun data, of the same period. Castor FIBER, Linn. C. Canadensis, Kuhl. Portion of mandible with three molars, not distinguishable from recent specimens. NEOTOMA MAGISTER, Baird. Mammals of North America, p. , tab. Said to be larger, and otherwise different from the following. Found in the Bone Caves near Carlisle, in the great Appalachian Valley, in Pennsylvania. NEOTOMA ?FLORIDANUM, Say. et. Ord. A superior molar, incisors, and other portions. The first is not larger than in recent animals, and does not conform in peculiarities to those ascribed by Baird to his N. magister from the Pennsylvania Bone Caves. The latter is, however, described from mandibular pieces. The recent Neotoma of this species is exceedingly common in allof the caves which I examined. Their marks can be found from near the mouths to the most remote recesses. They build, in dry places in the more distant chambers, nests of complete and durable construction. In such a chamber in the Hoge’s Cave, Montgomery County, Va., I found a number of these nests near together and fastened by interwoven sticks and corn-husks in some mass, to the points and crevices of the rocks. The upper surface of the pile, in which the nest was made, was composed apparently of chewed linden bark, forming a soft, tough, and nearly white material. This surface was always oblique, and enclosed a round cavity, large enough to hold one’s two fists, which was entered by a mouth a little more contracted than the whole diameter. Numerous fresh seeds of the Celtis pumila lay about them. They are sweet, and the small tree which produces them is abundant where the traces of the cave were found. Seeds undistinguishable from these are abundant in the limestone breccia with the remains of Neotoma, and testify to the identity of habit of this species in the days of Tapirs, Peccaries and Sloths. ARCTOMYS MONAX, Gmel. The Ground Hog. One nearly perfect ramus mandibuli with all teeth but the last molar, not distinguishable from re- cent examples. : Found also at Galena. (See Leidy, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., XI., p- 100.) Arvicona, Sp. Noted by Leidy, 1. c., from Galena, Il. GEOMYS BURSARIUS. Leidy, l. c., p. 100. Found at Galena by Dr. E. D. Kittoe with numerous other species enumerated by Leconte and Leidy. HESPEROMYS ? LEUCOPUS, Raf. Molar teeth undistinguishable from those of this common mouse. Cope.] 1 14 [July 16, TAMIAS LAEVIDENS, Cope, sp. nov. This ground squirrel is indicated by the distal half of a mandibular ramus, with adjacent fragments, probably of maxillary and squamosal. The successional first molar appears above the alveolar border, and an- other tooth apparently is in place, but so encrusted with calcite, as to be quite obscured. This species differs in three marked peculiarities from the T. stri- atus. The first molar has two anterior cusps instead of one; they are separated by a deep groove ; there is also a little cusp between the ex- ternal two. The incisor teeth are not striate grooved on their anterior face, asin T. striatus, though they have three narrow grooves on the outer longitudinal angle; they are wax yellow anteriorly. Third, the ramus is more slender, especially in the portion anterior to the molars ; the depth at the mental foramen is just half the length between the first molar and the base of the incisor above. As in T. striatus, this foramen is nearer the superior outline of the ramus. There is less curvature visible in the inferior face than in some individuals of the existing species. Lines- JU Sralen ck TATIONS CHbIRS KONE WO) Ws Noo ondodocGucoobo0 4094 40< 2.6 Depthvatmental foramen ry) yeriere eters alr larelo ae ote 1.4 U6 (0 86 SiVESIh WOU pooo oc sogadpoosenomedocoouasee eps ball IDWATNEEIE TNENSOs 36s ca nibodopocooagdadDoddaDoGDOGODOS alte IDO iG WIE es sodclo6as cob cccdasgnoDoMOoDOD OOO ODGOuS 2.2 ScruRUS PANOLIUS, Cope, sp. nov. A small squirrel of the size of the Chipmunk (Tamias striatus), but of the type of dentition and form of the Sciurus hudsonius. It is represented by a ramus mandibuli, containing two molar teeth, and the included portion of the incisor, the coronoid, and vertical ramus being lost. Numerous fragments, including incisors, ete., are probably to be referred to this species. The ramus is quite flat, being perfectly plane on the inner face, below the molars; its diameter below the first is equal to that at the incisive © alveolar margin above. Theseries of molars is very little oblique to the plane of the ramus, and, judging by the positions of the anterior three, not curved. There is, therefore, but a slight projection of the alveolar border on the inner face of the ramus. The least depth of the edentu- lous portion, equals the chord from the base of the first molar to the edge of incisive alveolus. The mental foramen is near the middle of this length, and a little above the middle of its depth. The anterior margin of the masseteric fossa, is below the posterior third of the first molar. The two molars are well worn, the first being successional: the animal was therefore adult. The worn faces are concave; the inner .anterior point of the margin is the most elevated, while the two external lobes are in both the most prominent. There is also a slight emargination on the inner face. The first molar is about as long as wide, the second a little wider than long, and slightly oblique forwards and inwards; the inner ry 1869. ] 1 if) [Cope. and outer lateral margins in each are about equal. In profile the first is slightly the more elevated of the two. Measurements. Lines. Length of ramus from maxillary foramen to incisive al- VEOMUE GOOG ca cdooponopoounboboeoS aclonadodneodbee tba) Length of bases of two anterior molars.......... Peano!) es from base of m. 1 to do. of incisor.............. 1.7 oS “¢ mental foramen to base of incisor....... . 1.55 Least depth ramus (near mental foramen)............ 2. Depth ramus at first tooth......... eG Aehistaliei usr eveneconseanerse ome sO se ue GT ee tee Saasree aoc viret Suse SB mes ah 2.4 Width ue Second oyiges= = see Kava water Nel srareeneeamitlce These indicate a much stouter form than in the Tamias striatus.* The foramen mentale is lower in position; the series of molars is much less oblique to the axis of the ramus than in the chipmunk, and the inci- sor tooth is stouter. As compared with the S. hudsonius the measure- ments are absolutely one third greater, indicating a difference in size of nearly two to one. Viewed from above the thickness of the ramus at the middle in Se. panolius is proportionately very much less, while at the incisive margin there is less difference; the two measurements being equal in 8. panolius, the incisive much narrower in Sc. hudsonius. The first molar in the existing species is narrower outside than inside and simple; in Sc. panolius, equal and emarginate. This little species has not furnished sufficient materials to indicate its relationships fully; but it is smaller than any true squirrel now inhabiting the United States. - LEPUS SYLVATICUS, Bachm. Numerous molar and incisor teeth from both jaws, and two partially broken rami of the mandible. One of these is broken off behind the third molar; another complete only as far.as the usual line of the coronoid process, and containing the second, third and fourth molars. These por- tions are similar to those of the common species now found throughout the eastern district of North America. Also from Galena; see Leidy 1. ec. XI, p. 100. ANOMODON SNYDERI, Leconte. Amer. Journ. Sci., 1848, 103. Journ. Ac. Nat. Sci., Phil., I1J, 171, Tab. A large and remarkable insectivore known only as yet from an incisor tooth from Galena. BULARINA, sp. A nearly complete ramus with dentition perfect, of about the size of that of the common B. talpoides was found, but unfortunately mislaid. * See Baird. U.S Pac- R. R. Exp]. VIL, Tab. XLVI, 2 and 1. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—W 1 716 [July 16, Cope. ] VESPERTILIO, 8p. Numerous bones of bats occur in the breccia. ) IO 1869. ] an [Wood. Once or twice during a paroxysm, I had what might be called night-mare sensations; I felt myself mounting upwards, expanding, dilating, dissolving into the wide confines of space, overwhelmed by a horrible, rending, unutterable despair. Then with tremendous effort, I seemed to shake this off, and to start up with the shuddering thought, next time you will not be able to throw this off, and what then! Under the influ- ence of an emetic I vomited freely without nausea and without much relief. About midnight, at the suggestion of the doctors, I went up stairs to bed. My legs and feet seemed so heavy I could scarcely move them, and it was as much as I could do to walk with help. I have no re- collection, whatever, of being undressed, but am told I went immediately to sleep. When I awoke early in the morning, my mind was at first clear, but in a few minutes the paroxysms, similar to those of the evening, came on again, and recurred at more or less brief intervals until late in the afternoon. All of the day there was marked anesthesia of the skin. At no time were there any aphrodisiac feelings produced. ‘There was a marked increase of the urinary secretion. There were no after effects, such as nausea, headache, or constipation of the bowels. The following notes were kindly furnished by Dr. Thomas: ‘TI was called at 83 Pp. m. to Dr. H. C. Wood, and was informed he had taken an over-dose of extract-cannab. indic. I found him presenting at first glance, the mental condition and excited manner of mild alcoholic intoxication. His powers of ratiocination were but slightly impaired. The most promi- nent psychological manifestation was a constant and overwhelming dread of impending death, which no amount of assurance could relieve for more than an instant; with this was combined an almost entire loss of the fac- ulty of appreciating time—moments seeming to his disturbed conscious- ness to be hours in length. He stood and walked without difficulty, and his voice was natural in tone and accent. Pupils widely though not com- pletely dilated ; pulse moderately full, and numbering 106 beats per min- ute, increasing in frequency to 118 per minute within the following twenty minutes and becoming decidedly weaker. The extremities were cool and growing colder. ZinciSulph. was now ordered with the view of evacuating the stomach of any of the drug which might remain unabsorbed, as well as for any possible revulsive influence it might exert. At ten minutes after 9, when the emetic was obtained, the pulse was found to have increased in frequency still farther (136) and to have proportionately decreased in vol- ume. Within 15 minutes following, the feet meantime having been soaked in hot mustard water, free emesis took place, and the pulse rapidly fell, improving at the same time in quality. At 10.15 it was 104 per minute, and it remained about the same for the succeeding hour. The warmth of skin was at this time restored. The mental state varied but little hroughout. At 11.15 I resigned the case to Dr. Allen.”’ The foregoing experiment proves that the Kentucky hemp does contain an appreciable quantity of the resinous active principle or principles, but it was merely tentative, and was not intended to determine the proportion- ate amount. In order to determine the proportion of extract obtainable, the follow- ing experiment was performed: iy Wood.] 239 [Nov. 19, Six ounces of the dried leaves of male Kentucky hemp plants were treated with hot alcohol and then exhausted with a little ether. The tinctures thus obtained were mixed and evaporated. The extract thus procured weighed 252 grains. One drachm of it was rubbed up with a strong solution of the Carbonate of Soda to remove fatty matters, &c. It lost nineteen grains or 82 per cent., very nearly one-third of its weight. Six ounces of the leaves, therefore, yielded rather more than two and two- thirds drachms of an extract, from which every thing soluble in an alka- line solution had beenremoved. The method employed resembles that of the Messrs. Smith of Edinburgh. They obtained from 6 to7 per cent. of their purified extract from the plant grown in India. I obtained 4 to5 per cent. of the extractive, and as the operation was on a small scale and con- ducted by one totally unversed in practical pharmacy, there can be no doubt that there was sufficient loss to bring up the proportion fully to 5 per cent.; moreover the American leaves were probably not so thoroughly dried as the Indian. The therapeutic powers of this extract were not tested. To test the matter further, I exhausted three ounces avoirdupois with hot alcohol, and the resultant tincture was placed in the hands of Hance, Griffith and Company, Manufacturing Chemists of this city.* Four-fifths of this tincture were evaporated by them to the consistency of a syrup, and to it was added ten times its bulk of water. The precipitate was washed and dried. When given into my hands, it was a softish greenish, adhesive resin. Of this I took # of a grain dissolved in a mixture of alco- hol and ether. It produced marked cerebral disturbance amounting to a mild intoxication. These symptoms were similar to those heretofore detailed, but very much milder. There were, however, no marked periods of unconscious- ness, merely a feeling of hilarity and a total inability to fix the attention except for a very short period and also some prolongation of time. Of this same resinous extract, my friend, Car] Friih, a graduate of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, took one grain. He first felt the influ- ence of if about supper time. His head felt as if some one was violently compressing it and at the same time there was a feeling of hilarity, with an uncontrollable desire to talk and laugh, so that those around him asked him what had come over him. At supper he was almost ravenous and ate so much that it was noticed by others. Upon attempting to concentrate his thoughts upon any sub- ject, he found it required a very painful effort. In attempting to com- pound a prescription, he found it impossible to remember more than one ingredient at a time, and even this was almost beyond his powers. In the evening he went to a lecture at the College of Pharmacy. Although he understood all that was said, yet he could not remember it a moment, and at times would forget his surroundings and then suddenly wake up to find himself sitting in the lecture room. Later in the evening he attended a society-meeting, and afterwards went out with a fellow student, but has no recollection of what was said or done. There was a good deal of pria- #Now ILance, Brothers and White. Oo 1869.] 251 [Wood. pism during the night, and a state of venereal excitement was induced, lasting several days. During the night, urine was passed very freely. Before this, he had taken two grains of Herring’s extract with the re- sult of producing similar symptoms, which were, however, no more intense than those caused by the single grain of the American resin. Messrs. Hance and Griffith prepared the resin from the remainder of the hemp tincture, by first agitating with milk of lime, filtering, precipitating by sulphuric acid, agitating with animal charcoal, again filtering, concen- trating by evaporation, and precipitating the resin by the addition of twice the bulk of water. The resin thus obtained was tested by my friend, Dr. Richardson, in the Pennsylvania Hospital, by permission of Dr. Da Costa, the attending physician. One-fourth of a grain of it was found to be suf- ficient to produce decided therapeutic results ; in some cases acting very pleasantly as a hypnotic and calmative; in others, causing evident sen- sorial disturbance, but rather aggravating than alleviating the distress of the patient. Having at that time a lady under my care, subject to severe attacks of neuralgia, I supplied her with some of the drug in + grain pills. Of these she found one was always sufficient to induce a quiet sleep of some hours duration, from which she generally awoke free from pain. After the limited supply of this preparation was exhausted, I tried with her a sim- ilarly prepared extract made from imported India hemp plants, but a grain of this did not suffice to quiet the pain and induce sleep. The above experiments are certainly sufficient to prove that the hemp plant, as grown in Kentucky, contains a sufficient abundance of the active principle, to be capable of yielding a supply to the pharmaceutist. If I am correctly informed, the India plant is worth at wholesale prices, about a dollar a pound in our market. The male seeding plants in Kentucky, after they have shed their pollen, are worthless. It was with such plants the experiments were instituted. A considerable supply of them might be obtained, so Mr. Hamilton writes me, for little more than the expense of gathering them, or if the demand should exceed the amount of such male plants, the leaves of the female plants when ready to be cut for the fibre might be obtained on the same terms. A more important consideration than the mere monetary one, is the probability that, when the plants were raised near home, a more uniform product would be obtained. There can be no doubt, that under certain circumstances cannabis in- dica supplies a medical need, which no other drug will so exactly meet. Yet, the extracts as kept in the shops, even when honestly made, vary so indefinitely in strength, and indeed are so generally almost inert, that the use of this narcotic has been largely abandoned in consequence. It is very probable that this variation depends to a certain extent upon differ- ences in age and modes of cultivation, &c., of the plant. If this be so, the growth of the plant under the eye of the pharmaceutist will give him the opportunity of learning the conditions best fitted for developing in it the active principles. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—2D 929 Wood.] 232 [Nov. 19, 1269. The U. 8. Pharmacopeia apparently recognizes the fact of the variance of the hemp extracts of commerce and directs a purified extract. The pro- cess of preparation given, consists simply of dissolving the crude extract in alcohol and evaporating. Unfortunately this does not meet the difficulty, since the solubility of the extract in alcohol is no certain measure of its activity. There are many inert matters existing in the plant which are soluble in alcohol, so that a fair amount of extract may be yielded by a specimen which contains almost no resin. This may occur to a certain ex- tent even if India hemp plant be the subject of the trial and is very cer- tainly the case when plants from other localities are employed. In order to throw some light on this subject the following experiment was made: 100 grains of a fine looking extract made from India plants wholly soluble in alcohol, were rubbed up with a solution of potash, dis- solved in alcohol, passed through animal charcoal precipitated by a strongly alkaline solution, filtered, and the resin carefully washed and dried. The resultant weighed 68 grains. Even if we allow as much as 12 per cent. for waste, there was, therefore, present in the original extract 30 per cent. of inert matters, which corresponds very closely with the amount of inert matter contained in the extract prepared by myself from the American plant. That the matters removed by potash are inert I proved in regard, at least to the American extract, by taking them in considerable amount without any perceptible effects being induced. In view of the above mentioned facts, it would seem advisable to replace in the U. 8S. Pharmacopeia for 1870, the present Hvtractum cannabis purifi- catum by a preparation to be called Resina Cannabis, and to be made by precipitating the concentrated tincture, by water rendered strongly alka- line by the presence of soda or potash. Such a mode of preparing is essentially that originally published by the Messrs. Smith of Edinburg. The resin, as obtained by himself in this way, corresponds pretty closely with that described by the latter gentle- men in their original paper. It is fawn colored, in very thin layers, but when in mass, is blackish. Itis neutral to test paper, and is apparently, a simple, active principle ; at least I have not been able to separate any or- ganic principle from it. At one time, I strongly suspected the presence in it of an alkaloid, because its action on myself was so similar to that of the mydriatics. In order to determine this point, a concentrated tincture was treated with water acidulated with acetic acid, filtered,and to the clear solution thus obtained an alkali was added, but no precipitate was afforded—neither did tannic acid produce any. This experiment was repeated, sulphuric acid being substituted for the acetic. The same negative result was obtained. Again, a concentrated tincture was treated with freshly precipitated ox- ide of lead, filtered, the lead removed by the hydro-sulphate of ammo- nia and the water acidulated with sulphuric acid, was added. Upon again filtering, the clear solution obtained, did not respond to any of the tests for an alkaloid: dilute water of ammonia, filtered through the lead, gave no precipitate with muriatic acid, showing the absence of an insoluble organic acid. Dee. 3, 1869.] 233 [Du Bois. Stated Meeting, Dec. 3d, 1869. Present, fifteen members. Dr. Woop, President, in the Chair. Letters of acknowledgment and envoy, and donations for the Library, were received from the Swedish Bureau of Statistics, Prussian Academy, Physical Society at Geneva, M. M. de Mortillet and de Reftye, Captain Toynbee, the Linnean Society, Franklin Institute, Editors of ‘Nature,’ Mr. Isaac Lea, Mr. Dubois, Prof. Haldeman, and Mr. Worthen, of Illinois. Mr. Du Bois exhibited to the Society, some specimens of silver coin» which have just been struck at the Mint, in illustration of the plan sug- gested in a pamphlet which hes on the table. There are three pieces of the same devices, of 50, 25, and 10 cents. There are also two pieces of 50 ceuts, of various devices, with a view to afford a choice, in case the plan should be adopted and legalized. The head of Liberty on one of these, wearing a cap, is copied from the statue at the Capitol. The dies were designed and executed by the present engraver of the Mint, Mr. William Barber ; with the aid of the Hill Engraving Machine. The main idea which lies at the root of the proposed plan, is, that gold is, properly speaking, the only measure of market values; while sdlver Should be used only as a subsidiary or fractional currency. It may, or it may not, be of full weight, corresponding to the average comparison with gold. If it is so, it is sure to be snatched away, exported, or buried, whenever a suspension of specie payment occurs. If it be of reduced weight, it will still circulate and perform its functions, although the gold be missing. But at such reduced weight, it should be legally limited, as to amount of issue; and there should also be a close limit of legal tender. With these two safeguards, it would be equally current, whether gold were at a premium, or at par, as compared with bank paper. The measure of weight last concluded upon, in striking these specimens, is 154 grains for the half dollar; the lesser pieces in proportion. This is four-fifths of the weight of the present silver coins. It also agrees (very closely) with ten grammes of French metrology. Further, it would be 220 new grains, if the proposed plan of decimalizing the avoirdupois pound be accepted. And once more, it allows the Mint to buy silver for this coinage, at any line of premium on gold under 30 per cent. as com- pared with bank notes. It would therefore, if legally adopted, be current immediately. Further details will be found in the pamphlet referred to. Mr. Du Bois also exhibited a medal just struck at the Mint, to celebrate the union of the two oceans by Railway. On the obverse is the head of President Grant, from an original design. It was deemed proper to indi- cate under whose administration this great work was completed. _On the reverse is a scene representing a train of cars passing from ocean to ocean, Du Bois.] 234 [Dec. 3, 1869. through mountainous ranges; with a legend from the Scripture, ‘“‘ Every mountain shall be made low.”’ The medal was struck by order of the Director of the Mint, Goy. Pol- lock, and the dies were made by Mr. Barber. The opportunity is also taken to show a head of Rittenhouse, in wax, executed by the same artist, from the bust in the Society’s hall. It is in- tended to form the obverse of a medal, by reduction on the engraving machine already spoken of. Prof. Hayden explained the character of the MSS. Journal of his recent explorations in the Rocky Mountains. The Annual Report of the Treasurer was read. The Annual Statement of the Trustees of the Building Fund was read, and the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, Dec. 17th, 1869. Present, fourteen members. Dr. Woon, President, in the Chair. Letters were read from Mr. H. A. Homes, of Albany, State Li- brarian, from the Natural History Society at Newcastle upon Tyne, and from Dr. F. V. Hayden, withdrawing his paper, on account of its ensuing publication by the Department of the Interior at Washington. Donations for the Library were received from the London Geological Society, the Boston N. H. Society, Mr. Homes of the N. Y. State Library, the College of Pharmacy, Mr. David Paul Brown, Mr. Hector Orr, Gen. A. A. Humphreys and the Department of the Interior. A letter was read from the Chairman of the Publication Committee, Mr. James, relative to the publication of Dr. Dewey’s Report on Carices. On motion of Nr. Fraley, the pa- pers were recommitted to the original Committee, Mr. Durand, Mr. James and Dr. Ruschenberger. A communication was made by Mr. P. W. Sheafer of the fol- lowing records of well borings in the Wilksbarre coal region: 935 Dee. 17, 1869.] 235 [Sheafer. From P. W. Sheafer’s Note Book, Engineer of Mines, Pottsville, Pa. Oxford Shaft near Hyde Park, Luzerne county, Pa. 180 ft. deep to the Diamond coal, which is about 7 thick. At 33 ft. cut a 5’ coal through a gangway on which the shaft water is sent to surface ; at 65 ft. cut a 6’ Coal. Further down the Lackawanna is the crop of the 14 ft. Coal, which lies below the Diamond about 80 ft. A small Coal bed divided by a seam of rock lies between. Audenried Shaft, near Wilkesbarre. From manuscript of Supt. Ken- drich, April 5, 1862. Surface. 16/ Sand and Loam. 56 =40/ Sand Stone Rock. 7) ile Slate. 80 =10/ Coal. 120 —40/ Slate. 1203— 3 Coal. 1605_—40/ Slate. 1663— 6/ Coal. 1763=10/ Fire Clay. 2261=50/ Slate. 228 = 14 Coal. 238 =10/ Fire Clay. 259 =21/ Mixed Sand Stone. 264 = d/ ' Slate. S09) == by Coal. BB Se! Fire Clay and Slate. 3828 =32/ Mixed Sand Stone. 300 = 7! Coal. 338 = 3/ Fire Clay. 395 =57/ Black Rock. \ 400 = 5/ Coal. 415 =15/ Mixed Sand Stone. Empire Shaft near Wilkesbarre, April 5, 1862, from Surveyor Allerbach’s notes, who got it from Broderich, Supt. From Surface to bottom of 10’ Vein Coal is 80’ 66 ce qs! 66 134/ ce (73 5/ (75 99()/ ce ce 14/ be 300L/ April 5, 1862. Copy of Dundee Shaft, near Monticoke, Wyoming Valley, from Section in Lentz & Co.’s Office, by P. W. Sheafer, E. M., from F. Koerner. Dip 4° 8. H. 287 Surface. Oy . BH Coal. g/ 6// 6/ Fire Clay. 21! Sand Stone. haefer. ] 10/ 13/ 6/ 6// 3) 9/ G// 10/ G// 16/ Ail (WY vil 6/ 4! BI 4! g/ 10/ G/ 9/ 12’ Wily 9) 6// 14’ 15/ UY Ol 897 6! 10” 5// Ba (Ge 318/ 9/ Ql” 5/ 16/ B/ Q”” 6/ 5) G// ah (BY 1/ 6// 4 15/ 20/ 12/ 440’ 08/7 This shaft was continued to a depth of 700 feet. 236 [Dec. 17, Fire Clay. Sand Stone and Slate mixed. Slate. Coal. Slate. Coal. Slate. Coal. Slate. Coal. Slate. Sand Stone. Fire Clay. Slate and Sand Stone. Slate. Sand Stone and Slate. Fire Clay. Slate and Fire Clay. Sand Stone. Fire Clay. Slate and Sand Stone. Slate, pump. Coal. Slate. Sand Stone. Fire Clay and Slate. Sand Stone. Coal. Slate and Coal. Slate. Coal. Fossil Shells. No Vegetable impr. Sand Stone. Slate, Fire Clay, Benches of 8. Stone. Sand Stone. Soft Fire Clay. Hard Fire Clay. Sand Stone. Coal. Slate. Dark colored Sand Stone. Shells. Sand Stone. Slate. tific feature is the fossil shells at a depth of 318 feet. Its remarkable scien- ey, 1869. ] 23 ( [Wood A communication from Dr. R. J. Roscoe, of Carlisle, Sco- harie county, N. Y., to the Librarian, relative to certain sup- posed fossils of high grade and great size found in the Lau- rentian rocks of Essex county, New York, fragments of which were brought by Dr. Le Conte, and deposited in the Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences, in Broad street, was read and commented upon by the Librarian, who explained that they were plications of alternate layers of metamorphosed limestone and sandstone deposits; and that Dr. Leidy had described similar, but much larger ones (one weighing per- haps 20 tons), in the marble quarries near Attleborough, Penn., in a subsilurian group of perhaps the same age. ‘The sheets of graphite covering the plicated layers prove, no doubt, the organic origin of the cale-spar layers; but the present form of the mass ought not to be taken as the original form of the animal organism. Dr. Geo. B. Wood communicated his experiments and views on the revival of peach and other fruit trees, by the applica- tion of potash to their roéts. A discussion followed, in which Dr. Coates, Dr. Emerson, Prof. Trego, Judge Lowrie and Gen. Tyndale joined. f Dr. G. B. Wood described a discovery which he believes that he has made, and which, if verified by further experiments, will be of great value to the agricultural interests of the country. Potash, combined with one or more of the vegetable acids, is an essential ingredient in vegetables, particularly in fruit, which, it is probable, cannot be produced without it. Sometimes fruit-trees cease to bear, prematurely ; and, in relation to peach trees, it is well-known that, in this vicinity, after producing a few crops, they not only cease bearing, but perish themselves ina short time ; whereas their natural life is 50 or 60 years or more. The fact seems to be that pot- ash is wanting in the soil in sufficient abundance to allow the tree to continue to bear fruit continuously. Dr. Wood believes that by supplying potash to the tree, so that it shall reach the radicals, and be absorbed, the deficiency may be supplied ; the fruit-bearing power is festored, and the tree itself, if prematurely perishing, revived. He was led to this con- clusion in the following way: Having a considerable number of peach trees, which had entirely ceased to bear fruit, and were themselves obvi- ously decaying, and believing, with most persons, that the cause lay in the worms at the root of the tree, he put in operation a plan which he had seen his father perform, more than fifty years since, of digging around the base of the stem a hole four or five inches deep, scraping away all the worms that could be found burrowing at the junction of the stem and root, and filling the hollow thus made with fresh wood-ashes, recently Wood.) 238 [Nov. 19, from the fire, and of course retaining all their potash. The ashes were used with the view of destroying the worms that might have escaped no- tice. This was done in the autumn of 1868. In the following spring he was himself astonished at the result. The trees appeared to have been restored to all their early freshness and vigor. They put forth bright green leaves, blossomed copiously, and bore a crop of fruit such as they had never borne before ; many of the branches breaking down under their load of peaches. In reflecting on these results, Dr. Wood came to the conclusion that all this change could not possibly have been produced by the destruction of a few worms ; and, besides, there were several of the peach trees treated, in which no worms could be found. He was thus led to the belief that the real cause of the revival of the trees was the ashes, the potash of which, being dissolved by the rains, had descended along the roots to their rootlets, and presented to them the very food for want of which the trees were dying. He has, accordingly, had hundreds of va- rious’ kinds of failing fruit trees treated in this way this fall, in the expectation of an abundant harvest next year. Should he live till then, he will inform the Society of the result. Should he not live, the experi- ment will at least have been put on record. In answer to an inquiry, Dr. Wood said that the soil was of all kinds, sand, loam, and clay. Dr. Coates remarked that trees at first grow slowly, and have but little chance to get potash from the limited area which they occupy. For in- stance, around the body of large trees there are seldom other growths. Dr. Emerson gave his experience of peach growing. The peach, brought from Persia, loves a mild climate, and suffers when brought North, unless protected. When first brought to this country it grew luxuri- antly, in all parts, well. Of late years, however, owing to the clearing away of the forest, which afforded it the same kind of protection which, in Northern Europe, was given it by glass, it has become limited to the soft climate of the peninsula between the Delaware and Chesapeake. Bays, where it has no disease and bearsabundantly. The ‘‘ Yellows,’’ however, although looked upon asa disease spreading from tree to tree, is in fact produced by colonies of a parasite, which propagates under favor of a low constitutional condition of the tree, produced by the failure of the neces- sary climatic protection. As to the nourishment of the tree, salts, espe- pecially of potash, are very nutritive. But there is another element in wood ash, phosphorus, which is the prime mover of all vegetable life. Dr. Emerson described one of his unpublished experiments, with a peach orchard, which yielded inferior fruit, but only as to color; otherwise the fruit was as good as others. He gave a top dressing of 200 or 300 tbs. of superphosphate to the acre, and the next year his peaches brought 10 or 20 cents more in the market. At a certain exhibition, some pears of a very high color were displayed, which brought a very high price. Their rearer had used dog dung in quantities, which lent additional force to Dr. Emerson’s belief that phosphoric acid heightened the color of his peaches. Dr. Wood repeated that his experiment bore especially upon the mode 1869. ] 239 [Wood., of application of the potash. The spreading of potash over the surface of the land produced no great result. But, when placed where the rain water could carry it along the descending roots down to the rootlets, it is immediately absorbed by the plant, and produces its effects. Judge Lowrie said that he bought, in 1838, a wild place near Pittsburgh. It was covered with forest trees and underbrush. He cleared away the undergrowth and weeds. Within three years he discovered that all the wal- nut and hickory trees were beginning to die, although in rich soil, and 4 or 5 feet in diameter, and some of them one hundred feet high. In the course of two years none were left. The oaks, maples, lindens and elms were not affected. Prof. Trego said that in Bucks county, black walnut trees, planted along the fences, grow and flourish well, and are not hurt by standing quite alone as shade trees. He had placed wood ashes around the foot of a fine pear tree, banking it up around the tree, but it had no effect. Peach trees have many roots running horizontally, and the rootlets are near the soil. To this Dr. Wood replied that, according to his observations, they descend into the ground obliquely. General Tyndale said that the finest peach grounds in the United States are the highlands of Southeastern Tennessee ; the tops of mountain spurs of the Cumberland plateau, around Chattanooga, above the conglomerates of the Coal Measures and the cavernous limestones of the sub-carboni- ferous, two thousand feet or more above sea-level, and many hundred miles in the interior of the country. The stated business of the meeting being in order, the Re- port of the Financial Committee was read, and, on motion, the appropriations, recommended therein for the ensuing year, were passed, as follows: al ala AO LeMeMO ATL AUN gs wretches uveyemctten oe is ced sul ha Saye wisleys ow Aes $700 00 palayoOteAssistamt Gomlibrariancc.co.scos aces ves cannes tee ease 560 00 AAT yAOLe SAMUEL OTe) a) sevice setae ee ald Mut eteluta leis SaeiER. gels MalSiess es . 100 00 PSU CLUTCHES QOKGN 8 cytes Cols sibieiyl Na cldcom ee Mele Me amie ge mi Shwe 6 ON obs. ale 150 00 SN OSCIN OOM too) TOMAS. ooccaccossugouecuudbuuuSD fae asia 50 00 Re tbyge =pen ses Ore Mil tatlamen) vert dk ieleie shoei stati aclsicecre el ie ilero 100 00 MT IBAC COU eyes staess atel sy atvt Father Rogel applied himself with success both to the words and structure of the tongue,® but his man- uscripts are not known to be in existence. Consequently, the earliest specimens of Muskokee proper, except the few words given by Fontanedo, date after the settlement of the colony of Georgia by the English. The Moravian missionaries who settled at Ebenezer, near Savannah, attempted to study the language in order to use it in converting the natives. Their success was poor, though they collected a number of words. In writing them they used the Greek alphabet, as better adapted-to express the na- tive sounds. Hence we find in their reports such strangely familiar-look- ing words, as tucza fire, properly tvtke, doce sun properly hasse, 6:4) _ UTAYE. shoe, ete.7 The use of the accents in their vocabularies is one ad_ vantage over the modern alphabet. I believe, however, no translation was ever published in this character, and the missionaries soon became discouraged in their proselytizing efforts. - The first printed books in Muskokee, which I have been able to find, were published in 1835. One of them is a translation of the Gospel of John, by the Rev. John Davis ; the other a duodecimo tract of 35 pages, entitled : A short sermon : also hymns, in the Muskokee or Creek language, by Rey. John Fleming, missionary of the American Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions (Boston, 1835). Since that date a number of religious and educational works have ap- peared, the titles of some of which in my possession I add: Nakeokv Setempohetv. Introduction to the shorter Catechism, trans- lated into the Creek language by Rev. R. M. Loughridge, A. M., and Rev. David Winslett. Second edition, revised andimproved. Presbyterian Board of Publication, Phila., 1858, 12 mo., pp. 34. Nakcokv es Kerretv Enhyteceskv. Muskokee or Creek First Reader, by W. A. Robertson, A. M., and David Winslett. Second edition. New York, 1867, 12 mo., p. 48. Nakcoky esyvhiketv. Muskokee Hymns, collected and revised by Rev. R. M. Loughridge, A. M., and Rev. David Winslett, interpreter. Fourth edition, revised and enlarged by Rev. W.S. Robertson, New York, 1868, 12 mo., pp., 221. Cesus oh uyares. I will go to Jesus. Translated into Creek by Thos. Perryman and Mrs. A. E. W. Robertson, Tullahassee Mission, American Tract Society, no date : 12 mo., pp., 23. A Grammar of the Maskwkee or Creek Language, to which are prefixed lessons in spelling, reading, and defining. By H. F. Buckner, a mission- ° He says: “mettant par escrit les termes et locutions indiénnes, jé pouvois entendre la plus grande part de leur discours.” Hist. Notable de la Floride, p. 29. 6 He says: “Insix monthsI was able to speak and preach init.” Letter of 9th Dec., 1570. These early students, to take them at their word, must have had more linguistic talent than our genera- tion is favored with. 7 Urisperger, Nachrichen, Anno 1734. Brinton. ] 304 [March 4, ary under the patronage of the Domestic and Indian mission board of the Southern Baptist Convention. Assisted by his interpreter, G. Herrod, superintendent of public instruction, mecco Creek nation, etc. Published by the Domestic and Indian mission board of the Southern Baptist Con- vention, Marion, Alabama, 1860, 8 vo. pp. 139. Messrs. Buckner and Herrod also published a translation of the Gospel of John, and Mrs. Robertson, a translation of a tract on the Sabbath. The Laws ofthe Nation and various other works have likewise appeared. The Na- tion, I may here state, numbers about 14,000 souls, and about one-half of the male population can read, soit isof considerable importance that the structure of the language be ascertained. Il. THE ALPHABET. The need of a uniform alphabet for American tongues is nowhere more vividly shown than in Muskokee. More than one-half of the limited lit- erature I have above mentioned is unintelligible to educated natives on ac- count of the discordant alphabets used. Not less than jive different ones have been devised. That now generally adopted and certainly best adapt- ed for practical utility to the Nation, is based upon the English sounds of the letters. It was agreed to by many interpreters and chiefs at the Old Agency, in 1858, and has been introduced in all printed works since, ex- cept those of Messrs. Buckner and Herrod. It contains thirteen conso- nants, and six vowels. The vowel sound of a in fate, the sound th, and the consonants b, c, d, g, j, r, g, Vv, X, and z, are wanting, although in the Hitchitee dialects the b occurs. The remaining consonants are given their English values, and the letters r and c are introduced to represent sounds not in our tongue. The r is an aspirated 1, slightly guttural, quite simi- lar to the Welsh ll. The c is pronounced tch, soft, as in wretch. The w is always surd, as in we, weak. The vowels are: a the Italian or Spanish a. e as in mé. i as in pine. oO as in note. u as in wood, or rule. v represents the neutral vowel, and is really 4 short. No accents are used, although both accents and signs of quantity should be employed to express the language correctly. Nonasals are provided for, although very . soft nasals do occur, and are represented in Mr. Fleming’s alphabet by diacritical marks, and in that of Mr. Buckner by the Spanish n following the vowel. The absence of sonant letters and of decided nasals is the chief differ- ence between this and the Choctaw alphabet, and explains much of the apparent diversity between the two tongues. Thus the Choctaw sinti, snake, becomes in Muskokee ceto, the sonant being changed to its surd, and the nasal dropped ; Ch. shakba, arm, shortens the first vowel to v, and permutes the labial, becoming Mus. svkpa; and again Ch. iubi becomes Mus. hufi, thigh. 1870.] 305 [Brinton. Mr. Fleming gives two sounds toa, one as in father, the other as in wash; e as a in paper; i as ee in meet; ai asi in pine; and represents the r by hl, Of course this materially alters his orthography. Mr. Buckner makes use of the Agency alphabet, with these changes : ch for c; ias in pin; ii asi in pine; uas in rule; 0 as in not; the Greek for o as in go; @ as oo in took, foot. These changes, he claims, are nec- cessary to represent the language accurately, but both the natives.and the missionaries have told me this isamistake. There is really no such sound in Muskokee as 0 in not, and Buckner’s error arose from the shortening effect of k after the sound of a, as in rakko, great. Furthermore, the dis- tinction he draws between 6 and u is imaginary, as he himself half con- fesses ina note to p. 22 of his Grammar. As his work is the only at- tempt ever made to display the grammatical structure of the language, it will be a service to philology to point out several serious errors into which he has been betrayed. Jam enabled to do this from information furnish- ed me by Mrs. A. E. W. Robertson, of the Tallahasse mission, who is ex- cellent authority on the language, and from the unpublished manuscripts of the late Rev. Cyrus Byington, from which I have drawn that which re- lates to the Choctaw. Ill. Remarks on BuckNner’s “‘MAsSK@KEE GRAMMAR.” Nouns. The author (p. 52) remarks that common nouns are not varied on ac- count of number ; and that namesof people are pluralized by the suffix vlki. Therule should be that most nouns denoting an agent form their plural by adding lke, as pasv a sweeper, plural pasvlke; some others indicate the plu- ral by adding take, which also forms the plural of pronouns, and in writing it is important to distinguish which word is pluralized, as the position of the suffix is in both cases the same; thus, ce wvnv take, your (pl.) sister, but ce wvnvtake, your sisters. The declension of the noun is given by Buckner under three headings, the first form, the nominative case, and the objective case. The first form always ends in a vowel, the nom. case in t, the objective inn. The possessive case, he says, is formed by prefixing the possessive pronoun to the thing possessed. Mrs. Robertson divides the cases into nominative, possessive, objective, relative, and vocative. The nominative ends in t, but with ‘‘ continual exceptions,’’ not for euphonic but for grammatical reasons still obscure. The possessive case is the simple form of the noun, but requires the possessive pronoun after it, as it did in old English, e. g. ** John his hat.’”? The declensions given are as follows : BUCKNER. Mrs. ROBERTSON. 1st form Cane John Nom. Canet Canet Object, Canen Canen Possessive Cane Relative Canen Vocative Cane. ‘ Cane em eslafky, John his knife. J think that any attempt to give paradigms of Muskokee nouns in this Brinton.] 306 [March 4, manner will be incorrect. Those ‘‘ continual exceptions”’ will still remain obscure. Weare so inveterately accustomed to the declensions of the Aryan tongues, and to case-endings, that we think every language must have them. Such is not the case. None of the Chahta-Muskokee tongues have anything of the kind. They express the relations of words in a sen- tence by a complicated but strictly regular system of particles or elemen- tary sounds, each sound, when combined, retaining its original significance, which are called ‘‘ post-positive particles’ or ‘‘article-pronouns.’’ These are divided into two classes, the definite and the distinctive, and are sub- ject to numerous changes. They can be used with all parts of speech, and supply the place of case-endings, and modal terminations. The Muskokee terminal series t, it, et, vt, corresponds to the Choctaw at, vt, et; the ob- jective and relative forms are the Choctaw nasals a and 0; and the pos- sessive form is the same in both tongues; e. g. Choc. Chan in chuka, John his house. There is still wanting an analysis of the Muskokee article- pronoun, and no grammar of the language can be drawn up correctly till this is done. Adjectives. On the comparison of adjectives Mr. Buckner says (p. 68) : ‘‘The comparative degree is formed by prefixing sin to the positive, and the superlative is formed by prefixing ri to the comparative, as cvmpe, sweet; sincvmpe, sweeter ; risincvmpe, sweetest.’’? In fact, both these latter are in the comparative degree ; sin is the particle es, govern- ing a pronoun in the relative, and the expression should read es en evmpe, sweeter than it ; the r or er prefixed to the es, simply expresses a stronger comparison, as eres en cvmpe, still better than it. The superlative is formed not by a prefix, but by the suffix mahat, in the nominative, and mahan in the oblique cases, as cvmpe mahat, sweetest. Mr. Buckner’s rule for the plural of adjectives is: ‘* Adjectives of two syllables form their plural by inserting the contracted form of the first syl- lable between the two syllables of the singular,’’ as tvphe, wide, pl. tvp- tvhe. This rule is very incomplete. There are in Musokee two classes of adjectives, the first closing the root with a single consonant, the second with a double consonant, or with two consonants. The first form their plural by adding vke to the root, as here, good, pl. hervke, cate, red, pl. catvke, lane, pl. lanvke. The second class form their plural by inserting the first two letters of the root between the two closing consonants, as hvlwe, pl. holhvwe, lvwke, pl. lvwlvke, svfke, pl. svfsvke, lowveke, pl. lowve- loke. Many of this class transpose the consonants, apparently for the sake of euphony ; as kocukne, pl. kocuncoke, cvfekne, pl. evfenevke. Some of them also form their plural as those of the first-class; as yekce, pl. yekevke, afvcke, pl. afvckvke. Some in both classes insert ho before the terminal con- sonant; as hiye, pl. hihoye, holwvke, pl. holwvhoke; evpvkke, pl. evpvkhoke. Lekwe, rotten, has two plurals, one, lekhowe, applied to animal matter, the other, leklewe, to vegetable matter. . There is also a dual of adjectives, which Buckner does not mention. It is not frequently used ; cvfekne, pl. cvfencvke, dual evfenevkvke ; yekee, strong, pl. yekevke, dual, yekevkvke. These occur only in the second person. 1870.) 307 [Brinton. Throughout Mr. Buckner’s work his division of words is faulty, and adds much to the difficulty of the language. He is much too positive in his views, and his translations are frequently far from literal. His Gram- mar cannot be relied upon as a safe guide in any sense, and while he is de- serving of much credit for his industry in collecting material, the arrange- ment of and the deductions from that material must be condemned. IV. THe MuskokEE VERB. The congugation of a verb in an American language is a prodigious task. In analysing the Muskokee verb I shall avoid as many complications as possible, and speak only of active verbs, in their first transitions (when the object is presumed to be always in the third person and the singular number), in their first form, and affirmative signification. Roots. Muskokee verbs have two roots. The first is formed by drop- ping the termination etv of the infinitive mood, as nvfketv, to strike, root nvfk, kicetv, totell, root kic. Thesecond rootis formed by inserting h before the final consonant of the first root, if there is but one consonant ; and by inserting i between the two final consonants if they are two ; and if they are the same, the latter is changed into y ; ¢é. g. kicetv 1st root kic 2nd root kihe letketv letk ‘letik vkhottetv vkhott vkhotiy merretyv merr meriy Moods. The ordinary form of the Infinitive ends inetv. The sign of the subjunctive is the particle omat, added after the tense sign. It corres- ponds to, and is probably derived from, the Choctaw subjunctive particle kmvt. The Imperative has a future as well asa present form, correspond- ing in this with most other American languages, and not a rare exception as Buckner thinks. Tenses. The imperfect tense has not less than five forms. The first re- fers to something which has transpired to-day, the second to what trans- pired yesterday, the third to an occurrence usually only a few weeks ago, or, as we would say, ‘‘lately,’’ the fourth to an action or event long since completed, but within the memory of the speaker, while the fifth imper- fect, called the indefinite or historic tense, refers to transactions of which the subject of the verb has no personal knowledge, nor is directly con- nected with. The future tenses are the simple, the compound, and the progressive fu- tures. The progressive futures are formed by adding to the first and second roots the termination vran, and subjoining the tense signs of either past, present, or future tenses. They express the idea of being about to, or having been about to, perform an action, and when formed from the fifth imperfect, convey the sense of obligation or necessity. It willthus be seen that both in formation and signification they present a striking analogy to the first and second periphrastic. conjugations—those from the participles in rus and dus—in Latin. All the above tenses are formed from the first root of the verb. The perfect tense, is formed as in Latin, from the second root, by adding to it the terminations of the present. Brinton.] 308 [March 4, The tense-signs are as follows : Present, es, the e dropped in the first person singular, and lengthened in the first person plural. Imperfect, first, is second, vnks third, emytes, emvtvs, or emyts, the e dropped in the first person singular. fourth, vntvs fifth, vtes Future, simple, vres, the v dropped in first sing. compound, tares, used after the fifth imperfect with its finals dropped, ¢. g. nvfkvyvte tares. progressive, vran added to the root. Perfect, is, to second root, thei shortened to v when it comes before y. Persons. The persons are indicated by inseparable personal pronouns between the root and the tense sign. They vary in the different tenses according to the following table: Sing. 1st pers. 2nd, Pl. Ist 2nd 3d Present, and third imp., i etsk e atsk ak First, second, fourth, and fifth imp. vy etsk ey atsk ak Simple future, a etsk ey atsk vk The third singular is wanting. There is a dual form of the verb when two persons or things are spoken of,—an objective dual, ina sense. It isformed by prefixing torkor (proba- bly a corruption of the Choctaw tuklo, two) and making changes in the first syllable of the root, according to rules with which Iam not acquainted. The pronouns remain in the singular form, as letkis I run, torkorkis we two run. %, Negative form. The negative form of the verb is made by inserting the negative particle ak (Choctaw, ik), after the root, which latter may under- go euphonic changes, e. g. kicis, I say, kicakis, I do not say. It was my intention to give a complete paradigm of the active, affirma- tive, simple verb, in the first transition, but as I am not able to exhibit this satisfactorily at present, I shall omit it. I shall therefore conclude this article by a partial analysis of a specimen sentence in the language, and a comparison of it with the same in Choctaw, thus showing the af- finities of these tongues. V. SPECIMEN SENTENCE. Acts. ch. xv, verse 11: And when the people saw what Paul had done, they lifted up their voices, saying in the speech of Lycaonia: The gods are come down to us in the likeness of men. In Muskokee: i Momen estet, nake Pal momecaten hecakof em opunvky-en-haken kvwvpa kvtes, Likeonv em punvky ofvn, Hesake tvmese este omvket ye pun hvtvpeces, mahaket. 309 [Brinton. 1870.] Translation. Momen, and, the conjunctive particle with the terminal n, which throws the clause into the oblique case or sense. estet, the people, compounded of este and the definite article-pronoun nominative t, literally, people the. nake, the thing, or things. Pal momeceaten, that Paul had done. hecakof, when they saw. em, their. opunvky, word; en, its; haken, sound. kvwvpakvtes, they lifted up, fifth imperfect. Likeonv em punvkv ofvn, Lycaonia its language in. Hesaketvmese, gods, from hesakety, life, and emese, source or font, ““ source of life.” This is the word commonly employed by the mission- aries for God. Col. Hawkins, in his Sketch of the Creek Country, spells it E-sau-ge-tuh E-mis-see. Mr. Perryman tells me that it is probably a word coined by the English, and not of native origin. este omvket, men resembling. ye, hither, pum, to us; hvtvpeces, have descended; makaket, saying. In Choctaw (the nasals in italics): Mihma okla hash ot, Pal vt nana yvmihinchi na pisa mvt, Laikeonia anumpa ho okla anumpulit chitoli hosh, Chitokaka vhleha yvt hatak o chiyuhmit aka mintit ayvt hvpim vivshke ; ahanchi tok. Translation. Mihma, and, with the definite oblique termination. okla, people, hash ot, pronoun of renewed mention definite, the afore- said ones, they. Pal vt, Paul he; nana, the responsive pronoun definite; the thing which, what. yvmihinchi, he had done. na—myt, when, pisa, they saw. Laikeonia anumpa ho, Lycaonian speech the, ho is the distinctive article pronoun in the oblique case. okla anumpulit hosh, the people, the aforesaid ones (hosh) spoke; chitoli, loudly. Chitokaka, gods, vhlehay vt, they indeed, article pronoun definite. hatak 0 to men, distinctive and oblique, chiyuhmit, resembling. aka, below, mintit, coming toward, ayvt, here, ‘‘coming toward this place below.”’ hupim, to us; vlvshke, have come, from ula, to come. ahanchi tok, they said. The particle tok throws the verbs into the re- mote imperfect tense. The strong similarity in the construction of the two languages is very evident from these specimens. A. P: S —VOL. xXI.—11h 310 Stated Meeting, March 18, 1870. Present, eleven members. Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from Mrs. Mary Somerville, dated Naples, Feb. 14, 1870. Letters of envoy were received from the Royal Academies at Munich, (Dec. 1,) and Vienna, (Aug. 20,) from the R. So- ciety of Zoology at Amsterdam, (Dec. 9,) and the Society at Giessen, Sept. 2, 1869. Letters of acknowledgment were received from the Soci- eties at Giessen, (77-80), Gottingen, (78-80), Bremen, (73-80), Prof. Bunsen, (78, 79), Historical Acad. at Madrid, (XIII. 1, List, Cat. I, 71, 72, 77), R. Academy at Amsterdam (78-80), R, Library, Hague, (78-80), Observatory at Prague (78-80). A circular letter respecting the celebration of its 25th an- niversary festival, on the 27th of March (April 8th), was re- ceived from the Society at Riga. A. letter was read from Captain C. F. Hall, dated Wash- ington, D. C., March 12, 1870, enclosing a petition to Con- gress, in favor of his proposed Third Arctic Exploring Expe- dition. The petition was laid upon the table for the signature of the members and others. Donations for the library were received from the Societies at Moscow, Emden, Frankfurt, Lille, Bordeaux, Montreal and Madison: from the Berlin Academy; Paris Geographical Society; Royal Institution of G. Britain, London; Chemical and Antiquarian Societies; Greenwich Observatory; Dublin Geological Society; Dr. Haughton; the American Antiquarian Society; New York Lyceum; Dr. Geo. B. Wood; and the Peabody Institute. A Cireular from the Smithsonian Institute announced an- other transmission of correspondence for the 20th April; all envoys to be in Washington by the 1dth. Prof. Cope communicated the results of his examinations of the locality, two miles S. W. from Woodbury, where from 30 to 60 skeletons, some of them women and others children, dll were lately exhumed, and the greater part broken up, and spread upon compost heaps. Dr. Leidy has recovered one pretty complete skull, which he exhibited before the Aca- demy of Natural Sciences, at its last meeting, and expressed a decided opinion in favor of its Huropean origin. Professor Cope’s opinion was equally confident, that the remains were those of no aboriginal Indian race. Professor Trego sug- gested that they belonged to that early Finnish or Swedish Colony, which attempted a settlement on the banks of the Delaware, a short while previous to the arrival of the Hol- landers and Quakers, under William Penn. The bodies were all taken from a shallow trench, not more than 8 feet wide by 16 long; they had been laid in two tiers or stages, one above the other, and there was no relic, ornament, tool, wea- pon, or fragment of clothing, to suggest relationship to any age or race; and no appearance of a tumulus. Prof. Cope exhibited three large photographic pictures of figures of the human foot incised in upper cretaceous red sandstone, near Topeka, thought by western men to be fossil impressions. The shadows in the photographic copies showed plainly the nature of the marks, for the ball of the great toe was an elevation, instead of a depression, and the cutting was carried round the ends of the intervals between the toes. A discussion of the use of the foot in aboriginal picture writing followed. Dr. Carson recalled the exhibition of a sculptured rock, showing rivers and game, a sort of guide map, taken from the Susquehanna River banks, by Prof. Walter R. Johnson, at the Academy of Nat. Sciences or Historical Society, about 1836 or 1837, and expressed his desire that it should be re covered for use, in comparison with later discoveries. Dr. Brinton being questioned as to the amount of credence to be given to Baron De Waldeck’s alleged Elephant or Mas- todon figures, supposed to be recognisable among the hiero- glyphics of Mexico, rephed that he had had the opportunity of examining M. Charancy’s photographs, and agreed with the latter, that no such figures could be made out from the dl2 original designs, but that the figures in question were symbol- ically compounded of man and serpent, and appear as such in MSS. recently published by the French government. Mr. Lesley instanced the mammoth, etched on a plate of ivory, found in a cave in France, to clear away any serious im- probability from the way of supposing a like physical remin- iscence of the Mastodon in this country. He referred, also, to the fact, that the Ancient Kgyptian B was graphically repre- sented by the human leg, A by the arm, T’ by the hand, and that what is called the comb, may have been meant for the foot- mark. In the earliest stage of human life the foot and the foot-print were of superior importance to the hand and its work. But in the second stage of aboriginal life, the hand took precedency of the foot, as symbol of force and skill, com- bining thought with feeling, the reasoning power with the instinct. It soon entered into the synod of symbolic gods, with its fingers, and obtained a special worship for its hand-print. Dr. Coates related the origin of the Arabic cyphers on the hypothesis, that they were constructed by posturing with the hands and fingers, singly and in combination. Pending nominations 649—656 were read. The following communication was read: Office of the Commissioners of Fairmount Park, No. 2248. Fifth Street, Philadelphia, March 12th, 1870. At a meeting of the Commissioners of the Park, held this day, the fol- lowing preamble and resolutions were adopted : WHEREAS, The American Philosophical Society has made a communi- cation to this Commission, proposing that the name of André Francois Michaux, who travelled long in this country, and described our Oaks and forest trees, in a work of great merit and splendor, should have his name, and that of his father (who had, by like travel and study, rendered ser- vice to science), honored in the Fairmount Park, in a manner to be a me- morial to their devotions, and to promote the objects which had occupied their lives, and has proposed, after the death of the widow of André Fran- cois Michaux, to devote the interest or income of six thousand dollars be- queathed by him to said Society, to be expended in execution of the trust of his will in the said Park, for the purpose following. Therefore, Resolved, That there shall be a grove of Oaks in the Fairmount Park forever to bear the name of ‘‘ The Michaux Grove,’’ in which, if practi- cable, shall grow two oaks of every kind that will endure the climate. Resolved, That any surplus of revenue received by the Commission from Jan. 7, 1870.] 313 (Chase. the Michaux Fund, after satisfying the requirements of the preceding resolution, shall be devoted to the cultivation of Oaks of every variety ca- pable of cultivation in our climate, in the Park nursery, which Oaks, to the extent of two of each kind cultivated, be hereafter distributed to other Public Parks in the United States, under proper regulations to be hereafter prescribed. Attest, Davip F. Foury, See. Park Commission. On motion of Mr. Price, it was then Resolved, That this Society do agree to the terms contained in the pre- amble and resolutions of the Fainmount Park Commissioners, adopted on the 12th day of March, 1870, in the expectation and confidence that the planting of the Michaux Grove of Oaks may be soon commenced, so that the Grove shall early become one of the attractions of the Park. And the Society was adjourned. COMPARISON OF MECHANICAL EQUIVALENTS. By Pruiny EARLE CHASE. Read January 7, 1870. The comparison of different mechanical equivalents will open a new field for investigation, which may prove to be fertile in valuable results. For example, recent determinations, by the different methods of Thom- sen and Farmer, fix the mechanical equivalent of light, in a wax candle burning 1263 grains per hour, at 13.1 foot-pounds per minute, the equiva- lent of 1 grain being 6.215 foot-pounds. According to Dulong, the heat evolved, during the combustion of 1 grain of olive oil in oxygen, is suffi- cient to heat 9862 grains of water 1° C. According to Favre and Silber- mann, 1 grain of oil of turpentine, burned in oxygen, would heat 10,852 grains of water 1° C. It may therefore be presumed that the total heat given out by the com- bustion of 1 grain of wax, is about sufficient to raise 10,000 grains of water 1° C., or 18,000 gr. 1° F. This represents a mechanical equivalence of (18,000 « 772 + 7000 =) 1985.143 foot-pounds, which is 319.5 times as great as the corresponding equivalent of the light given out during the combustion. Tyndall, in his lecture on Radiation, states that the visible rays of the electric light contain about one-tenth of the total radiated heat. The re- lative luminous intensity of an electric lamp would therefore appear to be about 32 times as great as that of the wax candle. This ratio so nearly resembles that of solar to terrestrial superficial attraction, and the con- nection of electric and magnetic currents with solar radiation is so evi- dent, that additional experiments, to furnish materials for a great variety of similar comparisons, seem desirable. While it is possible that the re- semblance, in the present instance, may be accidental, the numerous harmonies between the manifestations of cosmical and moecular forces, render it at least equally possible that it may have a weighty significance. 314 [Feb. 4, Chase. ] MONTHLY VARIATIONS OF RAINFALL AT PHILADELPHIA. By Puiny EARLE CHASE. Read Feb. 4, 1870. The following Tables may be of service in the study of secular rainfall. The Normals, in Table II. were computed from the observations of seven successive years, in the same manner as those in my previous discussions. I. Montaiy RAINFALL AT PHILADELPHIA, FOR FORTY-FIVE YEARS. Jan. Feb. Mar. Apl. May. June. Jul. Aug. Sep. Oct. Nov. Dec. 1825 84 3.26 4.63 ey ae BH) AS RD PBL NS SLB 1826 2 SOF CO mma Si 19 4.65 3.68 2.75 2.00 O.co) le comele2s 1827 2.86 3.55 1.23 2:85 2:50 2.09 2.97 5.75 “9 5.91 4.76 3.26 1828 2:05) 2375 3:35 3.82) S49 2.69 5.33 15. 4562 139 6.71 26 1829 Bye 9 Shy 7 Oeey( EEC. OS GUE aU iy CL SOM | ORB) BEG) ital 1830 1.63 2:06" “4.11 1.82 3.75 5.99 4.07 Bis | 124853 4.31 5:35 518 1831 Gy eel Be yO) Oe BL Zhai GLB) - GEG} chal Test} a) 1832 cuits) OLE. IN) ets} A) debi) as) Le) LG) OE) 1833 3.97 1.24 2.22 S710) 15!S8)) 9.5328) 453539) 3:82) sl O05 meee Simao 1834 2.49 2.22 2.02 2.83 3.52 3.99 4.35 62 3.57 3.29 3.01 2.33 1835 Zio ARB 3283) 94233) 199 G27) 16255) 22505) 2563) An 22 S519 26S 1836 TEG2 os 2299) Mel) aoe ene2 20a) meio) yu2.O ele 97) tale 82 umd! D9 me oro+mmmotolle 1837 2.50 3.58 3.76 2.83 485 2.838 5.89 4.06 228 66 3.23 2.55 1838 2.20 2.19 3.17 3.59 3.58 660 2.388 2.78 9.52 4.90 3.35 1.04 1839 5.04 3.42 1.50 1.51 6.07 3.92 2.52 464 2.92 2.83 3.10 6,26 1840 1.84 3.01 2.63 683 2.69 5.95 4.54 5.55 2.50 5.73 2.49 3.65 1841 7.84 1.389 5.82 646 3.27 3,11 3.28 9.10 1.90 3.20 4.22 5.92 1842 136 4596 «2184 531586) BY) 80) 3.79) a7) 8549) 8566 1845 144 254 441 4.72 2.04 1.69 4.54 9.25 4.86 3.22 415 4.04 1844 405 1.45 4.43 135 3.09 3.35 528 2.40 4.03 5.02 2.95 2.75 1545 3.76 4.74 2.42 2.58 1.60 3.72 2.76 7.30 2.16 2.53 2.50 3.96 1846 463 3.38 460 2.11 3.44 3380 4.60 4,27 20 244 7.97 3.44 1847 4.73 4.57 4.70 9 1.57 3.30 276 318 807 3.00 2.84 5.78 1848 2.08 1.44 2.76 1.54 4.90 4.48 3.28 1.71 1.81 3.74 2.384 5.01 1849 308s | PASI Wh aloaey SRE) PAD PRY GE alee 5.59 2.60 5.84 1850 4.77 287 4.75 2.66 6.50 2.03 5.97 833 7.738 109 332 4.51 1851 1.23 3.11 3.47 4.56 482 3.44 252 2.56 1.13 3.02 3.36 2.27 1852 2.01 2.71 4.27 644 3.03 4.03 4.06 4.40 1.29 2.27 6.05 5,17 1853 1.85 4.44 2.46 3.83 5.17 1.10 6.30 3.09 4.46 3.47 2.32 2.17 1854 2.33 4.20 1.62 7.75 693 2.39 3.02 84 3.80 1.55 2.83 2.91 1855 2.34 2:35 1.68 2:05 2:96 7.95 6.40 2:79 4:00 411 2:04 5.42 1856 ANA Le 2a 2235 ee S-Ole 260) ee 99 ema oll sn: 00) ssi: O13 0 ne 2 Ommmmcros 1857 3.53 it) tds} G7) oS Te BAL we) IS AG) a 1858 259 229 1.09 464 501 4.50 1.35 4.94 1.49 1.84 5.61 4.50 1859 6.67 3.66 6.98 5.61 2.25 601 4.07 4.74 7.68 3.138 3.82 3.49 1860 3.22) 2.75 1-42) 3280 3.82) 288 99 840 2.85 4.52 613 3.31 1861 5.24 2.07 3.92 3.71 6.64 3.88 2.56 3.14 440 3.80 4:87 2.09 1862 479 4.64 3.55 4.16 2.31 6.97 2.46 93 3.98 4.77 4.79 1.65 1863 4.72 468 5.88 7.01 4.51 4.25 GOL 1.45 88 2.46 2.70 4.63 1854 1.70 das) ul SS) a) Beier 7G) ISP} GB) ile! 1855 Beil mayse) ZU cRy el Zr RY aR IS HOG} GSI (Ol 1866 Bebe GsOlliay 2215 ame 93) e465 a 2596 222) ) S21 O fla ey meyer) 1867 W710) WBE89) DAG eam SI 723255 1t0 2) 2239) 5/82) tel 2) meas 2 e230 sie oa eS 1868 3.62 2.52 3.36 5.44 7.00 4.37 3.51 2.67 8.91 74 5.28 3.60 1859 4.298 4.66 5.30 2.12 4.24 5.58 2.89 128 3.25 6.32 3.73 5.91 1870. | Il. Montuiy NorMALS OF RAINFALL AT PHILADELPHIA, June. 1838 1839 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1848 1849 1850 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1855 1857 1855 1859 1860 1861 1862 1863 1864 1865 1866 1867 Jan. 2.94 3.47 3.91 4,28 4,28 3.86 3.62 3.94 4.19 3.87 3.51 3.64 3.99 3.91 3.28 2.91 3.23 3.84 4.05 3.61 2.88 2.49 2.42 2.28 2.06 2.08 2.41 2.92 3.41 3.72 4.05 4,4] 4,62 4.66 4 45 3.92 3.33 3.00 2.87 2.93 Feb. 3.06 2.95 2.69 2.41 2.17 2.00 2.03 2.34 2.70 2.92 2.94 2.86 2.77 2.75 2.80 2.81 2.95 3.36 3.58 3.30 2.81 2.61 2.74 2.99 3.33 3.58 3.81 2,53 1.81 1.70 2.17 2.66 2.92 3.19 3.47 3.93 3.74 4.36 4.74 4,42 Mar. 3.06 3.18 3.24 2.95 2.53 2.36 2.50 2.72 2.87 2.89 2.78 2.80 3.22 377 4.01 3.98 3.89 3.80 3.92 4.07 4.21 4.37 4.34 4.00 3.42 2.74 2.16 1392) 1.94 2.22 2.84 3.40 3.59 3.68 4,20 4,75 4,78 4.34 4,02 4.08 Apl. 3.66 3.74 3.65 3.39 2.90 2.56 2.81 3.28 3.41 3.24 3.28 3.93 4.96 5.52 5.10 May. 2.73 2.96 3.01 3.39 4.07 4.31 3.76 3.13 3.18 3.75 4.23 4.25 4.01 3.89 3.74 3.29 2.78 2.54 2.67 3.11 3.71 4.30 4.78 4-77 4.65 4,82 4,76 4,29 4.04 4.17 4,14 3.99 4.11 4,39 . 4,65 5.41 6.33 6.64 6.48 6.33 31115) 3.25 3.74 4,01 3.79 3.64 4.07 4.89 5.50 5.56 5.26 5.04 4.89 4.49 3.80 3.11 2.84 3.01 3.30 3.46 3.47 3.29 2.96 2.84 2.93 2.92 2.99 3.61 4,45 §.00 5.26 5,22 4,82 4,48 4.59 4,74 4,41 4.01 4.33 5.39 6.24 Jul. 4.21 4.34 4.12 3.81 ile 4.04 4.55 4.78 4.56 4.07 Befa7/ 3.50 4.26 5.64 6.53 6.14 5.00 4.10 3.65 3.42 3.44 3.72 3.97 4.09 4.31 4,58 4,54 4.09 3.45 2.93 2.66 2.47 2.36 2.61 3.31 3.89 3.81 3.26 2.84 2.80 Aug. 3.66 3 87 4.36 4.71 4.36 3.33 2.33 2.07 2.48 3.10 3.79 4,74 5.79 6.42 6.41 6.02 5.57 5.09 4,43 3.91 4,26 5,22 5.51 4.77 3.71 2.92 2.78 3.64 4.99 5.80 5.838 5.71 5.16 3.86 2.46 1.93 2.41 3.81 5.73 6.61 Table I. indicates the following probabilities: 1. Of a change of weather (from a preceding wet month, or season, to a dry one, or vice versa). In September, “¢ November, “ January, “¢ April, Sep. 2.69 3.03 3.28 3.36 3.26 3.17 3.05 2.83 3.05 3.98 4.66 4.16 3.02 2.41 2.66 3.16 In Autumn, [Chase. FoR 40 YEARS. Oct. 3.41 3.18 3.64 4.44 Nov. 4.86 4.75 4.03 3.20 2.67 2.61 2.84 3.09 3.23 3.26 3.20 5.15 3.25 3.50 3.66 3.61 3.67 4.08 4.34 3.89 3.16 2.94 4.64 4,99 4,84 4.34 5.84 3.59 3.26 3.12 3.41 Dec. 1.88 2.26 2.91 3.50 3.97 4.01 3.56 3,09 2.86 2.83 3.20 3.95 4.53 4.58 4.23 3.80 3.58 3.75 4,25 4.83 5.13 4,94 4,37 3.84 3.52 3.41 3.57 3.94 4,27 4.41 4,23 3.72 3.08 2.74 3.04 3.89 4,57 4.55 4.02 3.73 8 5) 2. Of a continuance of the weather of the preceding month or season. In January, ** February, “* October, “¢ December, In Winter, “¢ Summer, “¢ Spring, 9 14 lowed by a dry Summer (June to October, inclusive), and vice versa, is very curious. 316 Stated Meeting, April 1st, 1870. Present, eleven members. Pror. Cresson, Vice-President, in the Chair. Letters accepting membership were received from Carl Fr. Naumann, dated Leipsic, 13th February, 1870; George Ritter Von Frauenfeld, Wien, 5th March, 1870; Prof. Dr. F. V. Hochstetter, Wien, 2d March, 1870; Louis Gruner, Prof. Min. Keole des Mines, Paris, 6th March, and Edward Everett Hale, dated Boston, March 21, 1870. Donations for the Library were received from the London Astronomical Society; M. Theodore Wechniaakof, of Paris; the Boston 8. N. H.; the Cambridge Museum of Comparative ZLoology; Mr. J. H. Trumbull, of Hartford, Dr. 5S. D. Gross, of Philadelphia, the Franklin Institute, the Episcopal Hospital, and the Editors of Nature. Prof. Cope exhibited fossil fishes in black shale from Dr. Hayden’s collections of 1869; from Railroad cuttings, in the Green River Country, Rocky Mountains, belonging to the salt water family of the Clupeide, and the brackish water family of the Cyprinodentide, for two of which he proposed the names, Lithichthys pusillus and Cyprinodon levatus. These make the first appearance in America, of genera known to be fossilin the rocks of Mount Lebanon. (See Proceedings below.) Dr. Hayden described the large collections which he made in that region, and deposited at Washington. The shales are charged with bituminous matter, and exhibit multitudes of small fish, insects, freshwater-plant stems, nuts, and among other things, a true feather, as determined by Mr. Marsh, of New Haven; probably not a bird’s feather, but belonging to some form of Archzeopteryx. A discussion took place respecting the law of storms as set forth in a recent memoir by M. Prestel. : Pending nominations Nos. 649 to 656, and new nominations Nos. 607, 658, were read. And the Society was adjourned. S317 Febrnary 4, 1870.] {[Brinton. GRAMMAR OF THE CHOCTAW LANGUAGE. PREPARED BY THE REVEREND Cyrus ByYINGTON, AND EDITED BY Dr. BRINTON. Read before the American Philosophical Society, Heb. 4, 1870. INTRODUCTION. The Choctaw, or properly Chahta nation, numbers at present about 17,000 souls, 4,500 of whom are Chickasaws. When first known to Europeans these allied peoples occupied the territory on the Jeft bank of the Mississippi, almost from the Ohio river to the Gulf. They be- long to the great CHAHTA-MUSKOKEE family, which, in early days, controlled the whole country from the Mississippi to the Atlantic, and from the Gulf shore to the Apalachians. The Choctaws have always been quick to adopt the instruction of their civilized neighbors, and at present have about seventy schools with nearly two thousand pupils on their reservation.! During the French occupation of Louisiana, in the early part of the last century, efforts were made by the Roman Catholic missionaries to convert them, but without success.2 In 1818, Protestant missionaries were sent among them, who effected a permanent impression upon them, and were mainly instrumental in bringing about their present highly ereditable condition, Their evil habits were reformed, they were instructed in agriculture, and their language was reduced to writing, In the latter, the alphabet suggested by the Hon. John Pickering, in his essay ‘‘On a uniform orthography of the languages of the Indians of North America,’’ was employed. The first book printed was a spelling book, by the American Tract Society, in 1825. Since that time, besides a large number of tracts, almanacs, hymn books, and educational works, the whole of the New Testament and most of the Old Testament have been printed in the language, by the American Bible Society, New York city, after faithful translations by the Rev, Cyrus Byington and the Rey. A. Wright, assisted by educated natives, ® These can readily be obtained, and will be found of great service in elucidating the grammatical structure of the language, as it is for the first time explained in the present work by the hands of the REv, Cyrus BYINGTON, This eminent scholar and missionary, whose name is inseparably connected with the later history of the Choctaw nation, was born at Stockbridge, Berkshire county, Massachusetts, March 11, 1793. He 1 Report of the Commissioner of Indian Affairs, for 1869, p. 37. . 2Shea, History of Catholic Missions in the United States, p, 441. 3 In comparing the translation of the Four Gospels, second edition, 1845 (Boston, printed for the A. B. C. F. M.), with the second edition of the New Testament by the American Bible Society (New York, 1854), I find a number of slight differences, especially in the use of the neutral vowel v. A. P. S —VOL. xI.—12E Brinton. ] 3 18 {February 4, was one of nine children, and his parents were in humble cireum- stances, but industrious and respected. His father was at one time a tanner, and subsequently a small farmer. Necessarily, therefore, his early education was limited. When a well grown lad he was taken into the family of Mr. Joseph Woodbridge, of his native town, from whom he received some instruc- tion in Latin and Greek, and with whom he afterward read law. In 1814 he was admitted to the bar, and practiced a few years with suc- cess in Stockbridge and Sheffield, Mass. His father though a moral was not a religious man, and it seems to have been only after he reached manhood that Mr. Byington became, as he expressed it, ‘‘a subject of divine grace.’’? He then resolved to forsake the bar and devote himself to missionary life. With this object in view he entered the theological school at Andover, Mass., where he studied Hebrew and theology, and was licensed to preach, September, 1819. At this time he hoped to go to the Armenians in Turkey. But Providence had prepared for him another and an even more laborious field. For about a year he preached in various churches in Massachusetts, awaiting some opportunity for missionary labor. ‘Toward the close of the summer of 1819, a company of twenty or twenty-five persons left Hampshire county, Mass., under the direction of the American Board of Missions, to go by land to the Choctaw nation, then resident in Mississippi. They passed through Stockbridge, in September, and were provided with a letter from the Board, asking Mr. Byington to take charge of them, and pilot them to their destination. He was ready at a few hours’ notice. The company journeyed by land to Pittsburgh, where they procured flat boats, and floated down the Ohio and Mississippi to a point near the mouth of the Yalobusha river, whence a land journey of two hun- dred miles brought them to their destination. Thus commenced Mr. Byington’s missionary life among the Choc- taws. It continued for nearly fifty years, and resulted, with the blessing of Providence and the assistance of some devoted co-work- ers in the Nation, especially the Rev. A. Wright and the Rey. Cy- rus Kingsbury, in redeeming the nation from drunkenness, ignor- ance and immorality, to sobriety, godliness, and civilization. There are no lives which in the eyes of the philanthropist are more worthy of admiration, or more deserving of record than those of such men, who not only rescue thousands of individuals from spiritual and physical degradation, but preserve with enlightened care the only memorials of whole nations. For throughout his missionary life Mr. Byington appreciated the value which a knowledge of the language and traditions of the Choc- taws would have to scholars. From his arrival among them, there- 1870.] 3 1 9 (Brinton, fore, he devoted assiduous labor to their language with a view to com- prehend its extremely difficult construction, and to render it availa- ble for the missionary and philological student. The first draft of his Grammar was completed in 1834. It was written and re-written, until at the time of his death, which occurred at Belpre, Ohio, December 31st, 1868, he was at work upon the seventh revisal. This had proceeded as far as the close of Part I. This much, therefore, of the Grammar is almost precisely as the author left it. - Part Il. commencing with the Article-Pronouns, I have arranged from the manuscripts of the fifth and sixth revisals, deposited in the library of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia, by the family of the author. In undertaking this task I have throughout adhered closely to the language and arrangement of the original, even where a different nomenclature and an altered arrangement suggested themselves, as in better accordance with modern philological views. It is, I think, - more proper to maintain strict fidelity to the forms chosen by so thorough a Choctaw scholar as the Rev. Mr. Byington, in the expla- nation of so difficult a tongue, than to run any risk of misrepresent- ing his views by adopting a more modern phraseology. Mr. Byington’s own views of what he had accomplished deserve recording. In his diary under date March 11, 1864 (his birthday), he writes : ‘“The last year I revised the Choctaw Grammar, going over the ground twice. The last effort I hope is my best, and will be of use to learners of Choctaw, and to Choctaw scholars in schools, but it needs further revision, and then to be well transcribed. J. commit these efforts in my old age to the Lord. I have enjoyed these labours very much. The pleasure of happily resolving difficulties in these studies, and of success in the work, is gratifying, and reviving to the mind.”’ In 1867 he wrote: ‘*This work can be much improved hereafter by other hands. It may be compared to the first survey and making of a road in a new country.” In spite of these deficiencies, of which no doubt the author was more distinctly aware than any one else, his Grammar remains one of the most valuable, original, and instructive of any ever written of an American language. It is the result of nigh half a century of con- centrated study, and we may well doubt if ever again a person will be found who will combine the time, the opportunities, and the ability to make an equal analysis of the language. Mr. Byington also prepared a Choctaw dictionary, containing about 15,000 words, which remains in manuscript, in the possession of his family. Brinton.} 320) {February 4, In commencing the study of Choctaw, those accustomed only to English and cognate languages will discover many peculiarities. Some of them are as follows : 1. The want of the verb ‘*‘to be’’ as a declinable word. 2. The want of personal pronouns in the third persons, singular and plural. 3. The want of a plural form in many nouns, verbs and adjectives. 4. The irregular manner in which the plural is made. 5. The want of a passive voice in some verbs, and its irregular forma- tion. 6. The order of words in a clause or sentence. 7. The use of pre-positive particles, or prefixes. 8. The use of post-positive particles, or suffixes. 9. The use of fragmentary pronouns, simple and compound. 10. The repetition of pronouns. 11. The numerous ground-forms of the verbs, arising from internal changes in the primary root. 12. The negative forms of verbs, adjectives, and fragmentary pronouns. 13. The causative forms of verbs. 14. The internal changes in the causative forms. 15. The uniformity of grammatical forms and structure. 16. The extent to which the rough aspirate h sapplies the want of the verb of existence. 17. The difficulties in resolving and translating the article-pronouns. PART FIRST. ORTHOGRAPHY. 1. THE ALPHABET. Consonants. vowels, diphthongs, nasals, and aspirates are used. 5 ? foes ? Letters. Names and values. Aa a or ah, a bread, as in father. Vv 4 short, as a in vial, or u in sun. Bb be Ch ch che Ke a long, as in made, or e in there. Estey fe Hh he HI hil hle X 1870. J 321 (Brinton. in e as iin marine, and short as i in pin. Kk ke Ll le Mm me Nn ne Oo o as in note. Pp pe Ss se Sh sh she Uu oo as in took, or u as in full. Ww we Yy ye. Nasals: 2, 9, u, i. 2. REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. The vowel v has heretofore been called ti short. But the Choctaws give it the sound of 4 short, and when lengthened it passes into a long ; as, vbi, to kill; abi, to kill. Hi], hl, is an aspirated 1, when at the beginning of a syllable ; when it closes a syllable, it is lh; as, hlibata, a buckskin thong; tulhko, buck- skin leather. H, h, has two sounds, one a smooth aspirate, as in hina, a road ; the other rough, as in tahli, to finish. K, k, has two sounds, one sharp, as in oka, water; the other rough, as in the article-pronoun okvt, oke. In order to express the sound fully, the latter might be spelled okhvt, okhe. The vowels have the continental sounds. The diphthongs are: ai, pronounced as iin pine; and au, as ow in now. 3. THE NASALS. These are not represented by independent letters, but by a line drawn under the vowels, thus: a, i, 0, u, pronounced ang, ing, ong, ung, with slight variations depending upon the next succeeding consonant. v nasalized, passes into a. e 66 66 66 To ai oe Mg ‘** ay, as falaiya, to be long, falaya, being long. Ay ce OF ‘* aw, as laua, to be many, lawa, being many. The nasal sounds increase the distinctive power of the words in which they occur. For instance, the article-pronouns a definite and © distinc- tive are made more definite and distinctive by the nasal mark. This is also true of adverbs of affirmation and negation ; verbs and adverbs take the nasals as intensives ; a, yes it is; ha, no it is not; keyu, no it is not; chito, large ; chito, being large, the large one. The nasal sound implies emphasis, and distinctiveness by comparison. 4. SOUNDS WANTING. The consonants c¢, d, g, j, q, ', Vv, X, and z, are absent in Choctaw. Double consonants, such as br, dr, tl, bt, nt, st, are of difficult articula- Brinton. ] 322 [February 4, tion to the natives. When such sounds occur in proper names, as in the Bible, they substitute others, as follows: for c soft they use s, as Cyrus, Sailas; for c hard, k, as Canaan, Kenan; for ch hard, k, as Enoch, Enak; for d, 1, as David, Lewi; or else t, as Daniel, Taniel or Tanili; for g soft and for j, ch, as Gentile, Chentail, Jew, Chu; for g, ko or ku, as queen, kuwin, or kowin; for r, 1, as Rachel, Lechel, but at the end of a syllable it is dropped, as Peter, Peta; for v, f or w, as Levi, Lefai, David, Lewi ; for x, ks, as Exodus, Eksotus ; for z, s, as Zaccheus, Sakevs. When two consonants come together, a short vowel is sometimes inserted, or one is prefixed: as, wheat, wohet; Andrew, Antilu ; bridle, bilitel; Stephen, Istifin; Reid, Olit. 5. CONTRACTIONS. Contractions by the elision of vowels or consonants are frequent in both simple and compound words and phrases. A few examples are given: chuka ay ont antah, for onvt antah, he goes to and stays at the house. anont aya, for anolit ayah, he goes along and tells it. bot vbi, for bolit vbih, he beats and kills. chukachvfa, for chuka achvfa, a family. chukfushe, for chukti ushi, a lamb. issakshup, for issi hakshup, a deer skin. siaknip, for sa haknip, my body. 6. CONSONANT CHANGES. The following change of the consonants may take place : ch may change tosh: ochiah, she draws water ; oshtiah, she goes to draw water ; tanchi, corn, tashishi, corn-fodder. Sh may change to t, as in the article-pro- noun osh, ot. K and t, and] and m, are interchangeable in a few words: as ikhana to ithana, to know ; oktvni to ottvni, to appear ; omba to oma, to rain ; yukpa changes to yuppa, to be pleased. 7%. VOWEL CHANGES. a shortened becomes v, as chumpa, to buy, chumpvt iah, he goes to buy. é shortened becomes i, as emah, imah, he gives. 0 shortened becomes u, as tok, tuk, it was, hommah it is red, hummah it is reddish. v lengthened becomes a. i lengthened becomes e, as pisah, pesah, he sees. ti lengthened becomes o. o in holissoh becomes i in hollisichih, he writes. a in momah becomes i in mominchih. 8. NASAL CHANGES. Exact rules for these changes are not easily given. The nasals a, i, 0, u, stand before the consonants f, h, hl, k, n, s, sh, w, and y; as i fuli, his switch ; i hollisso, his book ; i kana, his friend ; i wak, his cow ; i yuka, his prisoner. The nasal marks are changed to the letter m before the diphthongs, the vowels, and the consonants b, m, and p; and to the letter 1870.] ve [Brinton. n before ch, lh, 1, and t; but to these rules there are exceptions ; as, imi shilombish, his spirit ; i ponaklo, to inquire of him; nan anoli, an in- former; nan illi, death. The position of the organs of speech preparatory to the utterance of the succeeding letter causes a change in the nasal sound ; as, i wak, his cow; im issuba, his horse ; in chuka, his house. 9. DOUBLED CONSONANTS. Consonants are doubled in the intensive form of verbs and adjectives ; as, alota, to be full. vilota, to be quite full. anoa, to be reported. vnnoa, to be commonly reported. anumpa, to be spoken. vynnumpa, to be much spoken. himak, now. himmak, hereafter, after all. pila, thither. pilla, away there. kvnia, gone. kynnia, really gone. 0 When the consonant y is doubled, the first one is transformed into i ; as, hoyo, to look for. hoiya, to look for earnestly. ayukpa, to be glad of. aiyukpa, to be very glad of. ayohmi, to do so there. aiyohmi, to do so really. 10. SYLLABIFICATION. Syllables usually terminate in a vowel sound, but may end with a con- sonant. When two simple consonants occur in the same word, the first ends one syllable and the second commences the succeeding one 3 as, bvnna, to want; tohbi, to be white. The double consonants ch, sh, hl, and lh, are inseparable. The long vowels have their full sound in all ac- cented syllables, except the vowel i, which is occasionally short, as in sipsi, a poplar, ilh, to die. In words of two or more syllables the accented sy!- lable takes a consonant, which is heard in both syllables; as, hina, a word, pronounced hinna. In some words the consonant is doubled ; as, illi, to die ; putta, all. Ina few instances the mark / has been used to indicate emphasis and the imperative mood; as, Luke X. 37, i nukhaklo tok a/, he that showed mercy on him. 11. ACCENT. In words of two or more syllables the penult is accented ; as, kan/chi, to sell; ano/li, to relate. In words of four or more syllables there is a secondary accent on the second syllable before the penult ; as, po/hlomo/li, to double them up; anum/pohon‘li, to keep talking. There is another accent which falls on the final syllable of such words as in English are followed by marks of punctuation, from the comma to the period. It is called the pause accent. Consonants take the accent merely, while final vowels take the rough aspirate h suffixed. 12. DIVISION OF WORDS. Allsimple words are written separately. There are, however, words compounded with prefixes, suffixes, and inseparable pronouns, which are written as one. But to avoid confusion, whenever it is possible, the ele- ments of each clause are written and printed separately. 324 [February 4, Brinton. } 13. ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS IN A SENTENCE. The connective. The subject and its modifications. The object and its modifications. The verb or predicate, with its modifications. Time when comes both before and after the subject. Time how long is similarly placed, and also at the close of the sen- tence ; Luke I. 24; IV. 20. 6. Instrument and means, with modifications, precede the verb. 7. Adjectives follow nouns. 8. Adverbs follow verbs, adjectives, and adverbs. 9. Infinitives precede the word on which they depend. 10. The place where, comes next after the time when. 11. The imperative follows the noun which is its object ; Luke I. 3, 9. 12. The predicate is often at or near the close of the sentence. See Mat. V. 1—12 verses. 2 k= 62 ot PART SECOND. GRAMMATICAL FORMS AND INFLECTIONS. _ PARTS OF SPEECH. There are in Choctaw nine sorts of words, or parts of speech, namely : Article-pronouns, or post-positive particles. Pronouns, or substitutes. Verbs. Prepositions, or pre-positive particles. Nouns, or names. Adjectives, or attributes. Adverbs, or modifiers. Conjunctions, or connectives. Se) BD SIE 1G be ONE Interjections, or exclamations. CHAPTER I. THE ARTICLE-PRONOUNS. $1. This is the most difficult part of Choctaw Grammar. The want of separate words corresponding to the English articles, of the personal pro- nouns in the third persons singular and plural, the relative pronouns single and double, and the copulas, is much felt by Americans in studying this language. The article-pronouns are used to supply these wants in a great variety of ways. They do not always admit of a translation. They often merely indicate the case of a word or clause. An accurate and full explanation of them is not attempted. Only a few leading remarks and rules are presented. § 2. The use of the article-pronouns is for definite and distinctive speci- fication, limitation, emphasis, and prominence, and to show the connection and relation which one word, paragraph, or clause bears to another. 1870.] 325 (Brinton. § 8. They are placed after nouns and pronouns with their attributes, after verbs, adverbs, and their attributes, after prepositions and conjunc- tions. They are definite, distinctive, and contradistinctive, subjective, objective, and copulative. A part of speech can take more than one at a time. $4, They may be translated by (1) the articles a, an, the, (2) the adjec- tive pronouns one, ones, some, (3) the personal pronouns he, she, it, they, in the nominative case, and him, her, it, them, in the oblique case, (4) the relatives who, which, what, that, in the nominative case, and whom, which, what, that in the oblique case, (5) by the double relatives he who, she who, that which, and they who, (6) and by the one who, the ones who, and the ones whom. Often they are not to be translated in English. § 5. The primary or ground forms of the article-pronouns are a definite, and © distinctive. They are used (1) as articles, (2) as personal pronouns in the third persons singular and plural, (3) as relative pronouns, single and double, in both numbers, (4) as adjective pronouns, (95) as copulas. § 6. a is definite, and when used as an article is much like the English article the, though it is also translated by a, or an. @ is distinctive, and corresponds to the indefinite @ or an in English, or to the adjective pro- nouns one, ones, some. @ implies certain knowledge, while @ ignores other objects and does not make certain the objects it specifies otherwise than that they belong to one species or kind. © is emphatic. Both are used for specification, emphasis, and case.! § 7. In the oblique case nouns are sometimes found without either of them. And when they are used, they may be rendered by either of the articles, or as mentioned above. § 8. The article-pronouns have (1) variations, and (2) modifications. § 9. @ DEFINITE. a may be varied by becoming vV, e, or i. It is modified by suffixing various letters, which alter its signification, thus : 1 Definite and Distinctive. — These two forms of speech run through the whole language, and modify not only article-pronouns, nouns, verbs, and conjunctions, but even clauses and sentences. Mr. Byington explains the double plural of the personal pronoun of the first person, common to nearly all American languages, and generally known as the exclusive plural (excluding the second person) and inclusive plural (including the second person, with or without the third person), the former as definite, the latter as distinctive. These plurals, he says, ‘correspond to a definite and © distinctive;” and of the separable personal pronouns, vno and sia, he says, “‘the difference be tween them is similar to that between a and o.” The distinctive expresses in its broadest sense the signification of the word or clause, but lends an emphasis which distinguishes it from any word or clause of allied purport; the definite defines or limits the signification to some specific, known word, individual, or act. Vno, I, distinctive, begins a sentence, the speaker being as yet vague; but as soon as the speaker is defined by a verb, adjective, or other qualifying word, the pronoun changes to sia, I, definite. Vhli, definite, edge, limit, to be the edge or limit of anything, to bound it; this signification is extended in the distinctive form ahli, to be the whole of anything, hence to be true, truth. A. P. 8 —VOL. XI.—13E Brinton.] 326 [February 4, It adds t, to form the nominative case, at, vt, et, My, a nasal sound, to form the oblique case, 4, i h, to form an affirmative (predicate acdniren ah, it is the; h, and varies to e, to form an affirmative (predicate absolute), eh, it is; k, to form a determinate definite, ak, the, that; and kvt, ket, kit; sh, to form a renewed mention definite, ash, vsh, the said, the same; mo, to form a renewed mention distinctive, amo, vmo, the ones. It prefixes m in mvt, ma, mak, to express a simultaneous, or concomi- tant object or act, the too; e.g. Luke XVI. 25, Svso ma! Son! (@. e. thou, too, my son). § 10. @ DISTINCTIVE. © is modified in a similar manner. It adds sh, t, or cha, to form the nominative, osh, ot, ocha; a nasal to form the oblique case, 0, ona; h, to form an affirmative (predicate distinctive), oh, that is so; k, to form a determinate distinctive. ok, that one is so; sh, to form a renewed mention distinctive, osh, the said ones; mo, to form a renewed mention concomitant, omo, the said ones, too; kb, to form an optative, okb, oh, that it were so; km, to form a conditional, okm, if it were so; keh, to form an affirmative contradistinctive, okeh, it is so and not otherwise; t, cha, and na, to form connectives. $11. The definite and the distinctive are both used separately after one subject, and then the definite follows the noun, and the distinctive its modification. Thus John III. 1, Hatak vt Falisi yosh, a man who wasa Pharisee ; Luke X. 39, itibapishi hvt Meli hohchifo hosh, a sister whose name was Mary. The distinctive may also be used first, and the definite follow the modification ; Luke XI. 27, ikfoka yvt yammak osh, the womb that. § 12. These two article-pronouns and their modifications combine with each other to form the third class, the CONTRADISTINCTIVES. § 13. THE CONTRADISTINCTIVES. The definite @ in combination with the distinctive 0: at, et, vt, take o to form a contradistinctive a, to, eto, uto, nom. case. a in the oblique case changes to an and takes 0, ano, vno. ak takes o to make the determinate contradistinctive, ako. mak takes o to make a simultaneous or successive contradistinctive, mako. myt in the nominative case takes o to form a contradistinctive, mvto. ma in the oblique case becomes man, and takes 0, mano. ak becomes ok in ak ok, for intensity of specification. mak takes ok in mak ok, for the same reason. 1870.] 327 (Brinton. a takes mo to form a definite and indeclinable renewed mention in recent past time, as Luke XVI. 13, achvfa kamo, the one. The distinctive 0 in combination with the definite a : ok takes vt in okyt, nom. case, contradistinctive. ok takes a in oka, oblique case. ok takes ah in okah, a distinctive and definite predicate. ok takes eh in okeh, a distinctive and absolute predicate. ok takes ato, vta, in okvta, nom. and okanto. ok takes ano or yno in okvno, oblique case. ‘ok takes ak in okak, to double the definitive force of the pronoun. ok ak takes the pronoun o in okakosh, okako, as a strong definite and concessive, Mark XY. 31. o takes mo in omo, renewed mention in the remote past tense, inde- clinable. $14. The following table presents the values and significations of the article-pronouns and their modifying particles, in a brief and compre- hensive manner : a, V, €, i, definite, implying knowledge of the thing, act or individual named ; as, wak a, the cow, not a or some cow. 0, distinctive, generic, implying kind and ignoring other objects, but not rendering the thing, act, or individual certain. It does not specify particular objects, but merely distinguishes them ; as, wak 0, a cow, not a horse. ch, connective, and. h, predicative or affirmative, the sign of existence. k, determinate or demonstrative, that, the. kb, optative, wishing it were so, oh that ; definite ; the distinctive form is okb. km, suppositive, conditional, or contingent, if, when, provided ; definite ; the distinctive form is okm. m, successive, simultaneous, compellative, when, then, also, too, oh. mo, renewed mention distinctive, the same, the said; omo, remotely past ; amo, recently past. sh, renewed mention definite of recent past time. shkeh, definite affirmation, it is. okeh, distinctive affirmation, it is so and not otherwise. t, connective, continuative, definite ; a copula, and. y, euphonic. a, 0, i, nasals, objectives and copulas. In order that these modifications may be more perfectly understood, some further explanations of the most important of them are added. § 15. Ih predicative, or affirmative. The verb of existence, to be, does not occur in Choctaw, and this particle supplies its place. It is suffixed to nouns, pronouns, infinitives, adjectives, adverbs, prepositions, conjunc- tions, and article-pronouns, which end in a vowel, to form a proposition ; Brinton.] 328 [February 4, when they end in a consonant, the consonant receives an accent called the substantive verb accent. Examples: vila, a child. vilah, it is a child. vno, I. vnoh, it is I. takchi, to tie. takchih, he ties. kvllo, strong. kvlloh, he is strong. fehna, very. fehnah, it is very. anukaka, within. anukakah, it is within. minti, come. mintih, it is come. mihma, and. mihmah, and it is. a, the. ah, it is the. 0, a, one. oh, it is a, it is one. he, will, shall. heh, it will be, it shall be. hatak, man. hatak’, it is a man. chukvsh, heart. chukvsh/’, it is the heart. tuk, tok, was, has en. tuk’, tok’, it was, it has been. This particle is not subject to any change for person, number, or gender. Its place is at the end of a proposition. In such expressions as kullo fehnah, he is very strong, the h is removed from kulloh, he is strong, to the end of the sentence. When used with a verb and article-pronoun. it is in printing often prefixed to the latter, instead of beiug suffixed to the former, where it properly belongs; as, achi bokeh, for achih okeh, he there says. $16. Kk determinate. This particle limits with precision the word to which it is joined,—just that much, no more, no less, and no other. Like h, it is a suffix, although it is often written asa prefix of the following word. Thus, ilvppvt achukma kvt yuammak 0 ishahli hokeh, this in good- ness is better than that, should be ilvppvt achukmak vt yummak o i shahlih oke. The particle k is also used as a prefix to a vowel in the past and future tenses of verbs in the negative forms, where it has reference to the verb, in order to limit it in this form; as, ik kvllo ke tuk, which should be written, ik kvllok etuk. In renewed mention in remote past time, k is changed to ch, as chash, chamo, for kash, kamo; and in some instances h and k are interchangeable, as nachi yim mikvt or nachi yim mihvt, thy faith. $17. m successive, simultaneous, compellative. This is a prefix, never a suffix, of a. It may be translated after nouns by, the also, the too; and after verbs by when, then, when then, then when. Examples: iyi ma, the feet too; vmoshi mvto, as for my uncle, he too; aki mvno, as for my father, him also. As a compellative it is prefixed to ah; miko mah, a. king. It is prefixed to ak to make a definite expression that something is just now gone before, or will next follow, or is now passing; as, ia lih mak okeh, I am going now. $18. The form shkeh. The absolute article-pronoun termination shkeh is definite, and follows verbs, adjectives, and adverbs in the present and future tenses, and the pronouns sia, chia, I, thou, ete. ia lish keh, I go, absolutely, present tense, I am going, I am off. ia lash keh, I shall go, I will go, let me go, let me off. 1870.] 329 (Brinton. The distinctive form is seen in ia li hok eh, I go instead of doing some- thing else ; ia lish, I go, and k that, eh, it is; ia la chi shk eh, go I will and that it is; ia lashke, indefinite and remote future for ia la heshke. $19. The conditional forms Kmn definite, and @Kmn distinctive. The definite conditional is formed from k determinate and suffix of a word, and m a successive and prefix of a, kma. Luke XII. 538; ia lih, I go; ia lik, a determinate act; ia lik ma, when I go then.. The distinctive conditional is made by the pronoun o before k in okm; ia li hokma, if I go, suppose I go; km and okm take the definite a with its modifications. § 20. The optative forms kb definite and oKb distinctive. These par- ticles form the optative mood, by prefixing the infinitive of the verb. § 21. Y is used as a prefix to mand o. It is euphonic after the vowels a, i, 0, and before a and 0; vila yvt, villa yosh, ushi yvt, in place of vila vt vila osh, vshi vt. § 22. The definite article-pronoun of comparison or contrast. This is used to specify objects either as inferior or superior to others when placed in contrast, corresponding to the phrases ‘‘how much more,’ ‘“‘how much less,’’ especially with definite and pointed emphasis. The simple form is het in the nominative, and hi in the oblique case. But these are not in use. The compound forms only are used. Nom. case, ak het, mak het, okak het. Oblique case, ak hi, mak hi, okak hi. Contradistinctive form. Nom. case, ak heto, mak heto, okak heto. Oblique case, ak heno, mak heno, okak heno. Conditional form. Nom. case, k mak het Oblique case, k mak hi - ok mak het ok mak hi k mak heto k mak heno ok mak heto. ok mak heno. Examples of the use of these pronouns where a contrast is expressed may be found in John III. 20, hokakheto, Mat. XXIII. 26, yokakheto, 1 John Y. 9, 2 Cor. III. 8, 9, Luke X. 35, John VIII. 4. § 22. GENERAL TABLE OF DECLENSIONS OF THE ARTICLE-PRONOUNS. The definite: Nom. case, at, vt, et, it. Oblique case, q, i, i. The distinctive: Nom. case, osh, ot, ocha. Oblique case, 0, 0, ona. _ The contradistinctive: Nom. case, ato, vto, eto, heto, anto, atoha. Oblique case, ano, yno, eno, heno, ano, anoha. Or in one table: Nom. case, at, vt, et, it, het; osh, ot, ocha; ato, vto, eto, heto; anto, atoha. Oblique case, a, g, i, i, hi; 0, 0, ona; ano, vno, eno, heno; ano, anoha. Brinton.] 330 [February 4, $ 24. TRANSLATION OF THE ARTICLE-PRONOUNS, AND THEIR MODIFICATIONS. a definite. When a immediately follows a noun it may generally be translated by the article, or else omitted. When any verb is under- . stood in connection with a noun, @ should be translated by a relative pro- noun; as, Atvm ak osh hatak moma i tikba hatok, Adam he was of all men the first of them he was; Adam the one who of all men was the first. When a modifying word or words follow the noun, the particle comes last; as, miko vt mintih, the king comes; miko 9, pisah, the king he sees (regem videt); miko chito vt mintih, the great king comes; miko chito a pisah, he sees the great king. The particle follows pronouns and designates their cases, vno vt, I; vno a, me. § 25. @ distinctive. When it follows nouns it denotes them as un- known; nvni chaha yo, a mountain; the particular mountain is not known, but it is made a distinctive object, a mountain and not a plain, or other place. The difference between @ and © may be seen in Mat. XVII. 1, and 9, nynih chaha yo, a mountain; nvnih chaha ya, the mountain. It has an emphatic and prominent meaning in such sentences as Gal. IV. 2, Pal sia hosh, I, Paul; Acts VIII. 20, Chihowa yosh nan ima ya, the gift of God; Acts V. 4, hatak 0, men. Like a, it is rendered by the personal pro- nouns in both cases and numbers, he, she, it, they, him, her, it, them, and by the relative and double pronouns. It has a contradistinctive sense in such expressions as Mat. XXY. 3, bila yano, as for the oil, in distinction from the lamps. It is used after verbs, and with some conjunctions, to render a distinct reason for an action; as, Luke XI. 37, ont chukowa cha, impa chi hosh )binili tok, he came in and sat down for to eat. It hasa oncessive sense when combined with the particles ok ak; as, yohmic hokak o, although it is so. Sometimes the article-pronouns are used to translate the articles a and the, and sometimes they are used in Choctaw where the articles do not occur in English. Some examples from Mark I. will illustrate this. The beginning, vmmonak vt; the gospel, vbanumpa; the son of Jehovah, Chihowa ushi; the way, ataya ya; the river of Jordan, Chatan okhina yako; _ John, Chanvt; Jordan, Chatan ako; Jesus, Chisvs vt; a girdle, yskofvchi yo; water, oka yo; the water, oka ya; a voice, anumpa hvt; the angels, enchel vhleha hosh; the sea, ok hota; the ship, peni ash; fishers of men, hatak hokli yo; the unclean spirit, shilombish okpulo ash osh; the unclean spirits, shilombish okpulo hak. Matth. XV. 38: Mihma okla impa tuk vt, ohoyo vila aiena hokvto asha ho, hatak 4000 ushta tok;.And they that did eat were 4000 men, beside women and children. Here vt makes those who ate definite, while ho makes the women and children distinctive and objective. Acts IX. 6. nanta hak o katiohmila hi a? What wilt thou have me do? is definite; but, Acts XXII. 10: nanta ko katiohmi la chi ho? is distine- tive. 1870. ] [S) 331 [Brinton. S 26. TABLE OF TRANSLATIONS OF THE ARTICLE—PRONOUNS. 1. Nominative'case, as articles; . Definite, at vt, et, it, a, the. . Distinctive, osh, ot, ocha. a, an, the one. 2. Nom. case, as personal pronouns; 1. Definite, at, vt, et, it, he, she, it, they. vo one, . Distinctive, osh, ot, ocha, he, she, it, they. 3. Nom. case, as relative pronouns; Definite, at, vt, et, it, who, which, what, that. 4. Nom. case, as double pronouns; some one, some who. 5. Renewed mention; 1. Definite, ash, the, the said, the aforesaid. (os) alle they . Distinctive, ok, ak, osh, the one, any one who. 6. Contradistinctive; . Definite, at, vt, et, it, he who, she who, that which, they who. . Distinctive, osh, ot, ocha, the one who, some who, the ones who, any Distinctive, compound, ato, vto, eto, he as for, she as for, it as for, as for (he as for him, etc). 2. Definite compound, okvto, they which, such as they. See Luke VII. 25, XII. 4. 7. Definite distinctives; ak osh, he the one who, she the one who, it the one which, they the ones ok who, they who and not others. 8. Distinctive definite; vt, he, she, it, they particularly. 9. Renewed mention distinctive; ash, osh, the said he, the said slie, the said they. Luke VII. 20, hatak ash ot. rw) . Definite, a, 10. Conditional; . Definite, kmvt, if the, when the, if he, if she. . Distinctive, okmvt, if it were he then, etc. . Contradistinctive, okmvto, if then as for him, ete. 11. Oblique case, as articles; i, a, an, the. . Distinctive, 0, ona, a, the, any, some. 12. Oblique case, as personal pronouns; . Definite, a, i, him, her, it, them. . Distinctive, 0, ona, him, her, it, them. 13. Relative pronouns; Definite, a, i, whom, which, what. 14. Double pronouns; . Definite, a, i, him whom, her whom, those whom. . Distinctive, 0, ona, the one whom. 15. Renewed mention; ash, the said. Luke VII. 19, Chan ash ot. Brinton.] 332 [February 4, 16. Definite and distinctive; ok ak 0, the one whom, any one whom. 17. Contradistinctives; ano, vno, eno, as for him, her, it, them. kyno, myno, okyno. 18. Definite distinctive; ak o, the one whom, he whom, those whom and not others. ak ok, Luke VIII. 12. 19. Distinctive definite; aka, him, her, them. 20. Renewed mention distinctive; ash 0, the said. 21. Conditional; Definite, kma, if him, if her, if it, if them. Luke XII. 53. Distinctive, okma, if so. Definite, kmvno, if him, etc., what then. Distinctive, okmvno, if so what then. 21. Comparative forms; 1. Nom. ak het, particularly he, she, it, you, I, or they. 2. Oblique, ak hi, particularly him, her, it, you, me, or them. 22. Predicative form; 1. Definite, ah, eh, he is, she is, it is, they are. 2. Distinctive, oh. 1. Definite and final, shkeh, it is. 2. Distinctive and final, okeh, it is so and in no other way. 23. Ancient and sonorous forms; wrwre ocha, hocha, yocha. ona, hona, yona. katoha. kanoha. okakanto. okakano. okakocha. 2 akakona. These were formerly used by the orators at the public assemblies, but are now almost obsolete.! The compound forms often admit of both the articles, the pronouns, and the relatives, in their translation; alam okash, he the one who; nukhaklo vkleha yokvto, the last word being composed of y euphonic, o distinctive, k demonstrative, a definite (varied to v), t connective, and o final, and is in form a contra-distinctive, ‘‘the merciful, they who are so, as for them, they.”’ ‘ § 27. Position of the article-pronouns. The article and personal pro- nouns generally follow nouns and their attributes. The relatives follow pronouns, verbs and their attributes; vno vt, I who, ia li tuk vt, I who went I, Svso ilvppvt illi tuk osh, falamvt okchaya hoke, Luke XV. 24. 1 In former times there was a well known solemn style which abounded in sonorous words. One part of a sentence was nicely balanced by another, and in delivery a chanting or metrical intonation was used. At the close of each paragraph the orator would invite the people to listen, who would in turn indicate approval by crying out yymmah! It is that! (or ‘‘ that’s so”); and viphesa! It is right! The most frequent peculiarity of the style was the lengthened pronominal suffixes, as for instance, Nanta hocha? What isit? Nanahona, something. (Byington MSS). 339 [Brinton. 1870. ] The article-pronouns are moveable, and may be transferred from the logical to the grammatical subject, in order that they may retain their character as suffixes. In the tenses, the article-pronouns may either precede the particle by which the tense is indicated, as, a tok, etok, itok, achi, or follow it, as, a- tuk a, a tok a, achika, a tuk o, a tok o (literally, a, he; tok, past tense particle, did; 0, it; he did it); anta la chi hatuk oke, Luke XIX. 5, I must abide; hlypi sabvnnah a tuk, salt I wanted it was, it was salt that I wanted, h predicative, a a relative pronoun. § 28. Change of case. A peculiarity in the use of the article-pronoun with nouns is that the nominative case changes to the oblique case when another subject is introduced. For example, Matthew XIII. 4, Atuk osh hokchi ma na nihi kanimi kvt hina lapalika yo kaha tok; atuk o hushi puta kvt ant vpvt tahli tok. Here osh, nom. he (the sower), is changed to ma, oblique, before na nihi kanimi kvt, another subject (some of the seed); and this latter nominative becomes atuk 0, oblique, before the next sub- ject, hushi puta kvt, (the fowls). § 29. USE OF THE ARTICLE-PRONOUN WITH NOUNS. In connection with nouns, the article-pronouns indicate case, and may thus be regarded as forming a sort of declension. For example: hatak, man, men. Nom. case. Oblique case. hatak okvt, the man, as a man. hatak amo, the said, the same man. hatak okvto, the man, asforthe man. hatak oka, as a man, a man. hatak okmvto, when the men they. hatak okvno, the men they. hatak ash osh, men the said. hhatak okmvno, if men then. peni, a boat, boats. peni vt, the boat, a boat. peni 0, a boat, some boat. peni mvt, the boat also, a boat too, or also. peni vto, peni anto, as for the boat, contradistinctive. peni mvto, as for the boat, also, then. peni amo, the said boat. peni osh, a boat, one boat, the boats, some boats. peni a tuk, peni ya tok, the boat which was. peni a chi, the boat which will be. peni a hinla,* the boat which can be. Example: Luke XVII. 32, Lat tekchi a tok a hvsh ithaiyanashke, she who was the wife of Lot, her remember. § 30. TABULAR LIST OF ARTICLE-PRONOUNS.! Definite forms. Distinctive forms. Subjective. Objective. Subjective. Objective. at, vt, et, it, ish a, i osh (0) vto, ato ano, vno okvt oka 1 Subjective and Objective,—These expressions are used by Mr. Byington rather in their logical than their grammatical sense, and must be so understood in this Table. The list here givenis evidently not complete, but it is accurately copied from his latest revision. A. P. §.—VOL. xI.—14E Brinton. ] Bd [February 4, Definite forms.. « — | Distinctive forms. Subjective. Objective. | Subjective. Objective. mvt ma § okmvt okma myvto myno | okbat okbeh ak, mak, okbato okbano kmyt kma omo omo kmyto kmak kbat kba cha na amo amo lish lil | Neither subjective nor objective. h | ok eh | ok ak akok okm mak | okmak km okvmo, okamo | ochosh. Finals, or verb substantive forms. h, eh, shkeh hokeh ah oh CHAPTE SRT: PRONOUNS. § 1. The pronouns are divided into two classes, separable and insepara- ble.. Separable pronouns are independent words. Inseparable pronouns are fragmentary words, and are all prefixed to other words, except li, I, which is suffixed. I. SEPARABLE PRONOUNS. $2. These are of four classes, 1, distinctive personal; 2 2, Eleisatine per- sonal; 3, possessive; 4, personal-and-possessive. 1. The distinctive, or emphatic personal. Simple form. With h predicative. vno, I, me, mine. vnoh, it is I, it is mine. chishno, thou, thee, thine. chishnoh, it is thou, thine. pishno, we, us, our (def). pishnoh, it is we, ours. hvppishno, we, us, our (dis). hypishnoh, it is we, ours. hvchishno, you, yours. hvehishnoh, it is you, yours. $ 3. These pronouns are used in the nominative, oblique, and possessive cases for all genders, without change of form. Their case is shown by the article-pronouns, which they take for specification, emphasis, and case. 1870.] 339 [Brinton. They are prominent, generally standing at the beginning of a sentence without an antecedent, and are repeated by the inseparable pronouns which follow in the same clause or sentence. They are nasalized with some of the article-pronouns; as, vno vto, vnonto, as for me; vno ak osh, I the one who, but vnak osh, I being the one who. Note.—The first person plural has two forms. The first is the definite or exclusive plural, and does not include all who are present, but only a fixed number. The second is the distinctive or inclusive plural, and em- braces the speaker and all who are present, but ignores all others. All personal and possessive pronouns have this double plural.! 2. The definite Personal. Simple form. With h predicative. sia, I, me. siah, I am. chia, thou, thee. chiah, thou art. pia, we, (def.) us. piah, we are. hypia, we, (dis.) us. hvpiah, we are. hvchia, you. hvchiah, you are. These pronouns generally have an antecedent, either a noun, or the dis- tinctive personal pronoun, or both. They may be in the nominative or oblique case, which is denoted by the article-pronoun which follows them. § 4. The personal pronouns in the third person, singular and plural, are wanting. They are supplied by a gesture, or by other pronouns; as, ilvppa, this; yymma, that; ilap, he, she, it, his, her, its; mih, he, she, it, they, the same, the said; okla, people. When no pronoun is expressed, the third person is understood. § 5. Examples of the use of the definite and distinctive personal pro- nouns: Acts X. 26, vno ak kia hatak sia akinli hoke, J am also a man; Mat. XIV. 27, vno ash sia hoke, it is 7; Luke XVIII. 18, nan ashvchi sia hoka, for 1 am a sinner; Exodus XX. 2, vno ak osh Chin Chitokaka Chi- howah sia hosh Echip yakni a chi kokchi li tuk oke, I am the Lord thy God which have brought the out of the land of Egypt, vno I distince- tive, sia I definite. 1T have here retained Mr. Byington’s definition, but I have no doubt the Choctaw double plural is similar to that of other American tongues. The first plural, definite or exclusive, excludes the second person; the second, distinctive or inclusive plural, includes the second person, and may or may not,include the third person. Thus the Indians in speaking to the whites, would say pishno, we (excluding the hearers), but to those of their own nation, hvpishno (including the hearers), The terms exclusive and inclusive to designate this distinction were, I think, first introduced by Father Holguin, in his Grammatica y Arte Nveva dela Lengva Qquichua (Ciudad de los Reyes, 1607), and he calls attention to the fact that when used with verbs, the distinction refers to the action of the verb: ‘“‘mas no se toma con verbos, por razon del pronombre, como aqui [where the pro- nouns are independent], sinv por la significacion del verbo, si es en todos o no ygual, 0 si se excluyen de laaccion del verbo, 0 de su significacion, aquellos con quien se habla” (fol. 12 recto). In the Grammar of the Dakota Language p. 9,the Rev. Mr. Riggs defines the inclusive as a dual (I and thou), the correctness of which I doubt, as it may also mean I and you, or We and you. Equally erroneous is Mr. Du Ponceau’s comparison of the exclusive plural with nous autres,in French (Langues Sauvages de V Amerique du Nord,p. 155), because nous autres does not necessarily exclude the hearers. Brinton.] 336 [February 4, 6. The possessive. Simple form. With h predicative. vmmi, mine. vmmih, it is mine. chimmi, thine. chimmih. it is thine. immi, his, hers. immih, it is his, hers. pimmi, ours (def). pimmih, it is ours. hvpimmi, ours (dis). hvypimmih, it is ours. hvchimmi, yours. hvchimmih, it is yours. immi, theirs. immih, it is theirs. The reciprocal forms of this pronoun are: ittimmi, each other’s; ittimmih, they are each other’s, singular and plural. § 7. Personal-and-possessive pronouns. Simple form. With h predicative. Definite, ilap, { he, she, it, and apah ilapa ; his, hers, its, his own, ilapah Distinctive, ilapo | they, theirs, their own. ilapoh it is his, hers, its, theirs, etc. The first and second persons are formed by prefixing inseparable per- sonal pronouns; thus: salap, I myself, me myself. chilap, thou thyself, thee thyself. pilap, we, us, ourselves (def). hvpilap, we, us, ourselves (dis). hvehilap, you yourselves. And to these again the inseparable possessive pronouns may be suffixed; thus: Def. ilapi, ilapim, ilapin, his own, her own, their own. Dis. ilapoi, ilapoim, ilapoin, his own, etc. Examples: Mark I. 34, ilapa okla ithana hatuk 0, because they knew him; Mat. X. 32, vno ak kia ilapa, I also him; John XIII. 3, ilap ak o ibbak a, his hands. § 8. The separable pronouns are the same for all genders, as are also all other pronouns, nouns, and verbs. They take the article-pronouns for the purpose of specification, emphasis and case. They can all take the inten- sive pronoun inli, self; ¢. g.: vno inli, I myself too; sia hak inli, ilap ak inli, ete. II INSEPARABLE PRONOUNS. $9. These are of seven classes, 1, subjective-personal, 2, objective-per- sonal, 8, objective-possessive, 4, reflexive, 5, reciprocal personal, 6, recip- rocral possessive, 7, the marriage or sacred pronoun. They are always prefixed (except li, I,) to the words with which they are in concord, and are never used alone. § 10 The subjective-personal. Affirmative form. Negative form. li (a suffix, ) I. ak, I not. ish, is, thou, chik, thou not. 1870.] 301 [Brinton. Affirmative form. Negative form. e, il, we (def). ik, he, she, it not. eho, iloh, we (dis). ke, kil, we not. hvsh, hvs, you. heloh, kiloh, we not. hychik, you not. ik, they not. E and eho stand before consonants, il and iloh before vowels. The third persons are wanting in the affirmative form. Li is the only one of the subjective personals that takes the article-pronouns. $11. These pronouns are used in the nominative case with transitive, intransitive, neuter, and passive verbs. When used with neuter and passive verbs they imply an active state, signification, being, or condition. Examples: Transitive verbs, tackchi, to tie. takchih, he ties it (h predicative). takchihlh, I tie it. ish takchih, thou tiest it. Intransitive verbs, nowa, to walk. , nowa lih, I walk. Neuter verbs, nusi, to sleep. nuse lih, I sleep. Passive verbs, holitopa, to be honored. holitopalih, I get honor. When these pronouns are used with neuter and passive verbs, the sub- ject of the proposition is active. These pronouns are rendered as possessives by changing the verbs to nouns; as, apehlichi, to rule there; apelichi lih, I rule there; apelichi li, my kingdom; ish apelichi, thy kingdom; it aiashvchi, our sins; itti bapishi li Sal mah, my brother Saul (from itti bapishi, to suck the breast together). g 12. The objective personal. Affirmative form. Negative form. S, Sa, Sv, Sai, si, I, me, my. iks, ik sa, ik sv, ik sai, ik so, not me. chi, ch, thou, thee, thy. ik chi, ik ch, not thee. wanting 4 ik, not him, not her. pi, p, we, us our (def). ik pi, ik p, not us. hypi, hvp, we us our (dis). ik hvpi, ik hyp, not us. hvchi, hvch, you, your. ik hvchi, ik hvch, not you. wanting ik, not them. § 138. These forms are used where by the pronoun no action is implied. They are not in the nominative case, although in common conversation they are thus translated. They should be treated as in the oblique case. They are used as subjective, objective, or possessive pronouns, and are pre- fixed to transitive, passive, and neuter verbs, to those nouns which pertain to one’s person, to the various members, and to near family relatives. Examples: Transitive verbs: chi pesah, he sees thee. hychi hakloh, he hears you. Brinton.] 3 38 [February 4, Passive verbs: chi tallakechih, bound thee it is. Neuter verbs: chi abekah, thee sick be. chi achukmah, thee good be. sa yonhah, me fever be. Names of members, and relatives: sa nushkoboh, my head, me head, it is. sa chukvsh’, it is my heart. svsoh, it is my son. satekchih, it is my wife. svpvfv, my dog, it is my family dog. sabaiyih, it is my nephew. subbitek’, it is my niece. The h predicative, or its accent ’, will be observed at the end of these sentences. § 14. The objective possessive. Affirmative form. a, am, vm, vmi, an, sa, sam, sum, sumi, san, my, of me, to me, for me, from me, &e. chi, chim, chimi, chin, of thee, ete. i, im, imi, in, of him, her, it. pi, pim, pimi, pin, of our (def). hvpi, hvpim, hvpimi, hvpin, of our (dis). “hvehi, hvchim, hvehimi, hvchin, of your. i, im, imi, in. of their. Negative form. ik sa, iksam, iksvm, ik san, not of me, not to me, not for me. ik chi, ikchim, ikchin, not of the, etc. ° ik i, ik im, ikin, not of him, her, it, ete. ik pi, ikpim, ikpin, not of us. ik hvpi, ikhvpim, ikhvpin, not of us. ik hochi, ikhvchim, ikhvchin, not of you. ik i, ikim, ikin, not of them. $15. This class of pronouns is used where there is an acquisition and possession, but not an implied ownership as a part of the thing spoken of." Thus; a shapo, my hat (French, chapeau); vmissuba, my horse; an chuka, my house, are things acquired and possessed; but sanushkobo, my head; svbbak, my hand; are integral parts of my person. A few nouns relating to the person take the possessive pronouns; as, vmiskonata foni, my col- lar-bone; vm uksak foni, my ankle bone. $16. These pronouns are prefixed to nouns and verbs, transitive, in- transitive, passive, and neuter. Before nouns they may be translated, of him, of her, in the singular, and of them in the plural; as, Chan in chuka, John of him house, John’s house; Chan micha Chemis in chuka, John and James’s house, or houses, for them, of them, ete. Before transitive and intransitive verbs they may be rendered by to, for, 1 An analogous difference occurs in construction in the Algonkin dialects: “ Les étrés qui tiennent leur maniére d’étre du Créateur, prennent la marque du possessif. Les étres qui tiennent leur maniére d’étre de ’homme ne le prennent pas.” Etudes Philologiques sur quelques Langues Sau- vages de V Amerique, p. 44. « 1870.] 339 [Brinton. from, or of him, of her, of them; as, in chumpah, he buys for or from him, her, or them; i kanchih, he sells to him, or for him, or them; im ia lih, I go for him, imonah, she goes to him; pim vlah, he comes to us, or for us. Before passive and neuter verbs they may be translated by of him, for him, to him; or, by I, thou, he. Examples: Passive verbs, intvllakchih, she is bound for him. i boa, it is beaten for him. im patafah, it is plowed for him. - Neuter verbs, i kulloh, he is hard to him. im achukmah, he, she, it is good to him, im puttah, they are all for him, all his. in tonlah, it lies for him. im ashah, they sit for him. im ahobah, it seems to him. $17. The reflexive. This is ille, ill, he himself, she herself, etc. It is used where the subject and object are the same. Example: ille takchi, to tie himself or herself. Affirmative forms. ille takchih lih, I tie myself. ish ille takehih, thou tiest thyself. ille takchih, he ties himself, she, it, ete. il ille takchih, we tie ourselves (def). iloh ille takchih, we tie ourselves (dis). hvsh ille takchih, you tie yourselves. ille takchih, they tie themselves. Negative forms. ak ille takchoh, I do not tie myself. chik ille takchoh, thou dost not tie thyself. ik ille takchoh, he, she, does not tie himself, herself. kil ille takchoh, \ we do not tie ourselves. kiloh ille takchoh, hvchik ille takchoh, you do not tie yourselves. ik ille takchoh, : they do not tie themselves. § 18. The reciprocal-personal. This is itti, itt; the former before a consonant, the latter before a vowel. They are used where the subject and object both being either in the nom- inative or oblique case mutually act on each other; as, itti takchih, to tie each other together. Hxamples: itti takchilih, I tie him together with me. ish itti takchih, thou tiest him together with thyself. itti takehih, he, she, it, they tie each other together. il itti takchih, we tie each other together, (def). iloh itti takchih, (dis). hvsh itti takchih, you tie each other together. itti halvllih, they pull each other. srinton.] 340) [February 4, § 19. Reciprocal possessive. This is itti, ittim, ittin, of, to, for, from each other; as, itti halvlli, they pull from or against each other. Both these and the preceding class, unite with the subjective personal inseparable pronouns. § 20. The marriage or sacred pronoun. This is ho before consonants, oh before vowels. It is used in the first, second, and third persons singular, and the second and third persons plural, as a substitute for son-in-law, father-in-law, mother-in-law, their brothers, sisters, and cousins. It has no variation to express number, case, or gender. ’ It is limited in use to the persons whose relationship is created by marriage; except the husband and wife. It is going out of use, as well as the ancient usages about marriage, especially that which re- quired the mother-in-law and son-in-law to avoid each other. The use of this pronoun may be compared to the emphatic he or she, with which the master or mistress of the house is sometimes referred to in English; as, when he comes back, meaning father, or husband. The father says to his son-in-law, vmissuba ik hopeso, has he not seen my horse? oh ia lih, I went with him; ho mintilih, I come with him, or her; oh ant ik sapeso ka hinlah? will he not come to see me? § 21. Combinations of the six classes of inseparable pronouns with the verb pisa, or pesa, to see. 1. The subjective and objective personal. Affirmative form. chi pesa lih, pisa lih, hvchi pesa lih, pisa lih, issa pesah, ish pisah, ish pi pesah, ish pisah, sa pesah, chi pesah, pisah, pi pesah, hvchi pesah, pisah, e chi pesah, e pisah, eho pisah, e hvchi pesah, e hohychi pisah, e pisah, hvs sa pesah, hvsh pisah, hvsh pi pesah, T see thee, I see him, her, or it, I see you, I see them, thou seest me, thou seest him, her, it, thou seest us, thou seest them, he sees me, he sees thee, he sees him, her, it, he sees us, he or she sees thee, he or she sees them, we see thee, we see him, her, it, we see ourselvés (dis.), we see you, we (all present) see you, we see them, ye see me, ye see him, her, it, ye see us, Negative form. ak chi pesoh, ak pesoh, ak hychi pesoh, ak pesoh, chik sa pesoh, chik pesoh, chik pi pesoh, chik pesoh; ik sa pesoh, ik chi pesoh, ik pesoh, ik pi pesoh, ik hychi pesoh, ik pesoh, ke chi peso, ke pesoh, ke ho pesoh, ke hvchi pesoh, ke hohvchi pesoh, ke pesoh, hychik sa pesoh, hychik pesoh, hvchik pi pesoh, 341 1870. ] Affirmative form. hysh pisah, sa pesah, chi pesah, ye see them, they see me, they see thee, (Brinton. Negative form. hvchik pesoh, ik sa pesoh, ik chi pesoh, ik pesoh, ik pi pesoh, ik hvchi pesoh, ik pesoh. pisah, they see him, her, it, pi pesah, they see us, hvchi pesah, they see you, pisah, they see them, 2. Subjective personal and reflexive. Affirmative. I see myself, thou seest thyself, he, etc., sees himself, we see ourselves (def.), we see ourselves (dis. ), you see yourselves, they see themselves, ille pis alib, ish ille pisah, ille pisah, il ille pisah, eloh ille pisah, hysh ille pisah, ille pisah, Negative. ak ille pesoh, chik ille pesoh, ik ille pesoh, kil ille pesoh, kiloh, ille pesoh, hvck ille pesoh, ik ille pesoh. Ille occasionally takes qa locative and drops e; as, illahobachi, to make like to himself. 3. Subjective, objective, and reciprocal- Affirmative. chitti pesa lih, itti pesa lih, hysh itti pesa lih, I see thee and thou seest me, I see him and he sees me, I see you and you see me, itti pesa lih, is svtti pesah, ish itti pesah, ish pitti pesah, ish itti pesah, svtti pesah, chitti pesah, itti pesah, pitti pesah, hvchitti pesah, itti pesah, e chitti pesah, il itti pesah, iloh itti pesah, e hvchitti pesah, il itti pesah, hvs sitti pesah, hvsh itti pesah, hysh pitti pesah, hvsh itti pesah, svtti pesah, I see them, etc., personal. Negative. ak chitti pesoh, ak itti pesoh, ak hvchitti pesoh, ak itti pesoh, thou seest me and I see thee, chik svtti pesoh, thou seest him and he sees thee, chik itti pesoh, thou seest us and we see thee, chik pitti pesoh, thou seest them and they see thee, chik itti pesoh, he sees me and I see him, ik svtti pesoh, he sees thee and thou seest him, ik chitti pesoh, he sees him, her, and she, he, sees him, he sees us‘and we see him, he sees you and you see him, he sees them and they see him, we see thee and thou seest us, we see him and he sees us, we see one another, we see you and you see us, we see them and they see us, you see me and I see you, you see him and he sees you, you see us and we see you, you see them and they see you, they see me and I see them, ik itti pesoh, ik pitti pesoh, ik hvchitti pesoh, ik itti pesoh, ke chitti pesoh, kil itti pesoh, kiloh itti pesoh, ke hvchitti pesoh, kil itti pesoh, hvchik svtti pesoh, nychik itti pesoh, hvchik pitti pesoh, hvchik itti pesoh, ik svtti pesoh, A. P. 8.—VOL. XI.—15E Brinton.] 342 [February 4, Affirmative. Negative. they see thee and thou seest them, ik chitti pesoh, they see him and he sees them, _ ik itti pesoh, they see us and we see them, ik pitti pesoh, they see you and ye see them, hvchik itti pesoh, they see one another, ik itti pesoh. chitti pesah, itti pesah, pitti pesah, hvchitti pesah, itti pesah, 4, The possessive-objective, in combination with the subjective-personal and objective personal. Affirmative. Negative. chi pisa lih, I see for thee, of thine, &c., ak chi pesoh lih, i pisa lih, I see for him, her, ak i pesoh lih, hvchi pisa lih, I see for you, akhvchi pesoh lih, i pisa lih, I see for them, aki pesoh lih, is sa pisah, thou seest for me, of mine, chik sa pesoh, ishi pisah, for him, chik i pesoh, ish pi pisah, for us, chik pi pesoh, ish i pisah, for than, chik i pesoh, a pisah, he sees for me, or of mine, ik sa pesoh, chi pisah, for thee, ik chi pesoh, i pisah, for him, ik i pesoh, pi pisah, for us, ik pi pesoh, hvchi pisah, for you, hvchik pesoh, i pisah, for them, ik i pesoh, e chi pisab, we see for thee, of thine, ke chi pesoh, il i pisah, him, kil i pesoh, iloh i pisah, ourselves, kiloh i pesoh, e hvchi pisah, ourselves, ke hychi pesoh, eho hvchi pisah, you, ke hohvchi pesoh, il i pisah, them, kil i pesoh, hvs sa pisah, hyshi i pisah, hvshpi pisah, us, hvsh i pisah, _them, you see for me, of mine, hvchik sg pesoh, him, hvchik i pesoh, hvchik pi pesoh, hvchik i pesoh. - The third plural, is the same as the third singular. The possessive is sometimes found before the reflexives ille and ill, and sometimes after them; as, im ill anoli, to confess oneself to him; illi nutakvchi, to humble oneself before him; im ille haiakvchi lih, I shew _ myself to him. Combinations with the reciprocal pronouns are formed in the following manners: chitti pisa lih, itti pisa lih, hvchitti pisa lih, svtti pisah, echitti pisah, hvs sitti pisah, I see for you (or of yours)with you. him, her, them. you, etc. he sees for me together with me. we see for thee together with thee. you see for me together with me, etc. 1870.] 343 (Brinton. When two possessives are prefixed to a verb, one is subjective and one objective; as, vm i nukhakloh, he pities him for me. chim i nukhakloh, thee. im i nukhakloh, him, her, or them. pim i nukhakloh, us. hvpim i nukhakloh, us. hvchim i nukhakloh, you. _ The negative is ik sum i, ik chim i, ik im i, ete. The following form is a combination of the subjective personal, pos- sessive, and reciprocal possessive: ish im itti nukhaklobh, you have pity on each other for him. il im itti nukhakloh, we have pity on each other for him. hvsh im itti nukhakloh, fs a Gb § 22. Relative pronouns. The article-pronouns supply the place of the relative pronouns, which are not found in Choctaw. This use of the article-pronouns will be seen in the following examples: Nom. case. Oblique case. Alvm vt, Adam he who, Alvm a, Adam him, whom. If vt, Eve she, who, If a, Eve her, whom. lukfi vt, clay it, lukfi a, clay it. Alvm ak osh, Adam, he who, Alvm ako, Adam, him whom. If ak osh, Eve, she who, If ak 9, Eve, her whom. § 23. Interrogative and responsive pronouns. The interrogative pro- nouns kvta, nanta, katima, who?, which?, what?, have two forms, one for interrogation, the other for response. They both take the article-pronouns, like the other separable pronouns, to indicate case. Examples: interrog. kvta hosh ik bi? Who made it? (osh or hosh is the subjective or nominative suffix). respons. kvyna hosh ik bituk. Some one made it. interrog. nanta hosh minti? What is coming? respons. nana hosh mintih. Something is coming. interrog. katimak osh achukma? Which of them is good? respons. kanima kia achukmah. Any one of them is good. interrog. katimampo hosh ia chi ho? Which (of the two) will go? respons. kanimampo hosh ia hinlah. Hither of them will go. interrog. katima hosh bvnna? Which of them (all) want it? respons. kanimik vt bynnah. Several of them want it. Oblique case. kvta ho ish pisa tuk 0? Whom did you see? nanta ho chibunnah? What do you want? katimak 0 ish chumpa tuk 0? Which did you buy? A definite interrogative ends in an aspirate, as, chi bvnnah? Do you want it? A distinctive interrogative ends in a nasal, as, chi bunng? These pronouns may also be subjective, as, nanta hosh yohma wah, noth- ing could do it; nanta hakosh yohma wa, no one could do it. Brinton.] 344 [February 4, § 24. Demonstrative pronouns. These are used to supply the want of a personal pronoun in the third person singular and plural. They are: ilvppa, this, these, he, she, it, they (near). yvmma, that, those, he, she, it, they (remote). Their plural is sometimes formed by adding the word putta, all. They take the article-pronouns, and are declined by it. Examples: Gen. XIV. 20, yymmak ak, who; Gen. IV. 2, yymmak okvt, which; Luke XVI. 27, yvymmak oka, him; Luke XVI. 28, yymmak mvt, they also; 29, yymmak 0, them. § 25. There are other words used as pronouns, some if not all of which can be also used as verbs and adjectives. They are: chvfa, one, a certain one, the one, the other. achofona, any. achvfaiyuka, each one. achafoa, some, a few. aiyuka, each, every. bika, each, same, both, fellow, Mark IX. 33. inla, other, another. inli, self, itself. — itatuklo, both, two together. luna, many. kanimona, some, several, from kanimi to amount to, and ona some. kanimusi, a few. mih, he, she, it, the same, the identical one, they. mika, each. moma, all. okla, a people, they; used to form the plural of nouns. okluha, all, the entire crowd, number, or quantity. puta, all, each and every one; used to form the plural of nouns. vhleha, all collectively, of persons only. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. . 1st personal singular. Nom., I, sia; vno; li. Oblique, me, S, Sa, SV, Sai, Si; vno. Possessive, mine, sa, sam, svm, svmi, san; vmmi; vno. 1st person plural. Definite form. Distinctive form. Nom., we, pia; pishno; e, il. hipia; hvpishno; eho, iloh. Oblique, us, pi, p; pishno. hvpi, hyp; hvpishno. Poss., our, ours, pi, pim, pimi, pin; pimmi. hvpi, hvpim, hvpimi, hvpin; hypimmi. 2nd person singular. Nom., thou, chia; chishno. Oblique, thee, chi, ch; chishno. Poss., thy, thine, chi, chim, chimi, chin; chimmi. 1870. ] B45 {Brinton. 2nd person plural. Nom., you, hvehia; hvchishno. Oblique, you, hveh, hvchi; hvchishno. Possessive, your, yours, hvchi, hvchim, hvchimi, hvchin; hvchimmi. CHAPTER III. VERBS. § 1. There are six classes of verbs in Choctaw, the transitive, intransi- tive, passive, possessive, attributive, and personal. § 2. The passive verb is made by an internal change of the transitive; but this rarely takes place except in verbs where the transitive effects a visible change in the object acted on. Thus, takchi, to tie; tvllakchi, to be tied; sa tvllakchi, I am bound; but pisa, to see; sa pisa, he sees me, not I am seen. The passive is formed so variously that rules are not attempted. The following examples will illustrate this: hofahli, to abash, passive, hofahya; okpvni, to abuse, pas. okpvlo; atokoli, to aim, pas. atokoa ; atokoli, to appoint, pas. ulhtoka; okchali, to awake, pas. okcha, siteli, to bind, pas. sita; hopi, to bury, pas. hollohpi; akvlli, to cobble, pas. ulhvta; ikbi, to build, toba, to be built; hukmi, to burn, holukmi, to be burned; chanli, to chop, chaya, to be chopped; bohli, to beat, boa, to be beaten; bvshli, to carve, bvsha, to be carved. Some passives are made by prefixing lh, a locative and intensive particle from vhli, it may be, to the active; as, tohno, to hire, ilhotno, to be hired; ipeta, to feed, ilhpita, to be fed; apoa, to give in marriage, passive, vlhpoba; abeha, to enter a place, passive, vlhbiha. § 3. The possessive verb is formed by prefixing the inseparable posses- sive pronouns to other verbs. Thus, ihikiah, he has him standing; iman- tah, he has him staying; intalaiah, he has it standing (like water ina vessel); imachukmah, he has, good, there is good for him; intobah, he has it made; imokpuloh, he has evil, he is evil. § 4. The attributive verbs affirm attributes or qualities, and are often used as adjectives and adverbs; as, kullo, to be strong; sa kulloh, I am strong; achukma, to be good; sa achukmah, Iam good. The possessive pronouns are affixed to these verbs, as vm achukmah, I have a good one; a falaiah, I have a long one, or it is long for me. § 5. The personal verbs take the objective inseparable pronouns; as, sa lakshah, I perspire; svllih, I die; sanusih, I sleep; saiokchayah, I live; sa hoitah, I vomit. When the act is involuntary, sometimes a change in the form of the verb occurs; as, hoeta lih, I vomit it up; hotilhko lih, I cough; habishko lih, I sneeze; fiopa lih, I breathe. § 6. All verbs end in the infinitive in i, a, or 0. They all have an affirmative and negative form in all moods and tenses. This is made by Brinton.] 346 [February 4; means of the negative prefix ik, and by changing the terminal vowel to 0 when it is i or a; when it is 0, it undergoes no change. Thus, anta, to stay; ik anto, not to stay; minti, to come; ik minto, not to come; ik ishko, not to drink. Both forms take the inseparable pronouns as prefixes, and the article- pronouns as suffixes, but both classes of pronouns are written separately, as far as may be. Thus, chi pisa lik vt, thee see I who, I who see thee. § 7. The modes. There are six modes, the infinitive, indicative, poten- tial, subjunctive, optative, and imperative. § 8. THE INFINITIVE MODE. This is the root or ground form of the verb, from which the other modes are formed by suffixes. It can be used as a noun, or in an adverbial sense, takchi, to tie, a tier, the act of tying; hvllot takchi, to tie strongly. It takes the inseparable pronouns and the prepositions as prefixes, and the article-pronouns, and particles of tense as suffixes. Examples: chi takchi, to tie thee; chin takchi, to tie for thee; ille takchi, to tie himself; itti takchi, to tie each other; iti takchi, to tie them to each other; a takchi, — to tie at; on takchi, to tie on; isht takchi, to tie with; ant takchi, to come and tie; ont takchi, to go and tie; et takchi, to tie hither; pit takchi, to tie thither; takchi a, to tie him to the; takchi ma, to tie simultaneously; takchi ho, to tie distinctive; takchi tuk, takchi tok, to have tied; takcha chi, takcha he, to tie in the future; takcha chin tuk, to be about to have tied; takchi tuk achi, to have been about to tie. The English infinitive is sometimes translated by the indicative: as Mat. V. 17, okpvni la hi osh aya li tuk keyu; amba aighlichilg he mak a tok, I am not come to destroy but to fulfil; sometimes the English indicative is translated by the infinitive; as Mat. XI. 30, vm ikonla abana ya il abanali ka im ylhpiesa, to put on himself my yoke is easy for him. The negative form is made by the prefix ik, and the change of the last vowel to o, and corresponds to the English prefixes dis, un, in, ete.; as, iktakcho, not to tie, to untie; haklo, to hear, ikhaklo, not to hear. $9. Modifications of the verb. There are numerous modifications of the ground form or infinitive mode of verbs, each of which forms a new in- finitive from which other modifications may arise. Some of the modifica- tions are by internal changes, others by adding a particle. They are: 1. The definite form, takchi, to tie. 2. The distinctive form, takchi, to be tying the while; implying continu- ance, prominence, and comparison. 3. The intensive form. This is made in various ways: 1. By an increase of emphasis on the accented syllable of a word; as, tékbah, to be so bad; takchi to te. 2. By lengthening the vowel sound in the accented syllable; as, chito, to be large, cheto, to be quite large; patvssa, to be flat, patassa, to be quite flat. 3. By inserting a syllable; as, taiyakchi, to tie; chieto, to be decidedly large. 1870. ] 347 (Brinton. 4. By prefixing the diphthong ai to words beginning with a vowel; as, ahli, to be true, aiahli, to be really true; sometimes i is prefixed, as 1iksho, to be none indeed. 5. By prefixing a to words beginning with a consonant; as bilia, to be forever, abilia, to be forevermore. 6. By doubling a consonant in the accented syllable; as, alota, to be full; allota, to be brimful; kvnia, to be gone, kvnnia, to be gone off. 7. By inserting a consonant in the final syllable; as, chukva, to go in, chukowa, to go in boldly; ihoa, to call him, i howa. 8. By prefixing ai and inserting another vowel; as, ulhpisa to be right, aiulhpiesa, to be just right. 9. By uniting two verbs; as, ishkottahli, to drink all up; vbitkanchi, to massacre. 4. The frequentative or iterative form; tahakchi, to keep tying. 5. The instantaneous or quick form, by the insertion of h in the ac- cented syllable; as, tahkchi, to tie quickly; vbi, to kill; ahbi, to kill quickly; also the form ahahbi; kvnia, to go away, hvninihya, to vanish. 6. The form for a sudden and single act; as shalvlli, to slide, shalakli, to slip; halvlli, to hold, halakli, to catch hold of. 7. The diminitive form in neuter and attributive verbs; as, chito, to be large, chihto, to be largish; hopaki, to be far off, hopahki, to be rather far off; lakna, to be yellow, lahakna, to be yellowish. 8. The repetitive form, to continue an action in one place and one Man- ner; as, binili, to sit, binininli, to rise up and sit down again; tonoli, to roll, tonononli, to roll back and forth. 9. The causal forms, 1, by suffixing chi; as, takchichi, to make him tie; ikbichi, to make him do or make, Mat. V. 32; 2, by suffixing chechi; as, ishko, to drink, ishkochechi, to make to drink, to drench; 3, by suffixing chi and prefixing a, locative; as, atakchichi, to tie it to something; 4, by suffixing li; as, achukmali, to make good; lvshpali, to make hot, to heat. Of these suffixes, chi denotes the causing of the action signified by the primitive verb; as, kvllochi, to harden, from kvllo, to be hard; kolichi, to eause to break, from koli, to break; chechi suffixed to a verb denotes the causing by its own subject of the performance of the action signified by the verb by another subject on an object expressed or understood; as, vno vt vila ya ikhish a, ishkochechi li tuk, I the child him the medicine it did cause him to drink; nafoka ya fohkvchechi lih, I made him put his clothes on himself; chi with a, locative, signifies that two different things are acted upon together, as Mat. XIII. 25, onush ash haiyukpulo yo ant a hokchichi cha, kynia tok, he came and sowed tares among the wheat, not wheat with wheat but tares with wheat; akakushi yo shuka nipi a aiau- vshlichih, she fries (causes to fry) eggs with pork. The suffix kachi, kechi, kvechi, is added to many verbs slightly altering their sense; as, winali, to shake, winakvchi, to be shaken; basasua, to have stripes, bassasu kvchi, to be striped like a rattlesnake; malvtha, to lighten, 348 Brinton.] [February 4, malvthakvchi, to flash once; bichota, to bend, bichotakvchi, to bend and spring once. Note.—Verbs may have all the above forms, but the number of verbs found in all these forms are small. Example, takchi, to tie, infinitives. Active: Definite takchi, to tie. Distinctive takchi, to be tying. Intensive taiyakchi, to tie firmly. Frequentative tahakchi, to keep tying. Speedy tahkchi, to tie instantly. Passive: Definite tvllakchi, to be tied. Distinctive tallakchi, to be the one being tied. Intensive talaiyakchi, to be tied fast, or at length. Frequentative talaiyahakchi, to be often tied. Speedy talahkechi, to be instantly tied. § 10. INDICATIVE MODE. This is formed from the infinitive by prefixing and suffixing the per- sonal pronouns, and suffixing the tense particles for past and future time. 1. Present tense, takehih, ish takehih, takchi lih. hysh takehih, e takchih, eho takchih, indefinite, with subjective personal pronouns. he, she, or it ties, or they tie, him, her, it, or them. thou tiest him, her, it, or them. I tie, ete. ye tie, etc. we tie, etc. (def). we tie, etc. (dis). 2. Pres. tense, definite, with subj. pers. pronouns. takechishkeh, third sing. and pl. To this the pronouns are added as in the indefinite. 3. Pres. tense, distinctive, with subj. pers. pronouns. takchih okeh, third sing. and pl. To this the pronouns are added as above. 4, Pres. tense, with objective pers. pronouns. chi takehi lih, takchi lih, hvyehi takchi lih, I tie thee. : I tie him, her, it, or them. I tie you. 5. Pres. tense, with possessive pronouns. in takchi lih, chin takchi lih, hvchin takchi lih, in takehih, chin takchih, an takchih, hvchin takchih, pin takchih, hvpin takchi, I tie for him, her, it, them. I tie for thee. I tie for you. he ties for him, her, it, them. ‘¢ for thee. for me. for you. for us. for us. 1870. ] 349 (Brinton. Past tenses. There are two past tenses, signified by the particles tuk and tok; tuk is used for the immediate and definite past, tok for the re- mote and indefinite past. They may be combined to form the relative or pluperfect past; as, tuk a tuk, tuk a tok, tokatuk. The particle a in these expressions is an article-pronoun, and should be rendered thus: he, she, it was. Past tense definite. takchi tuk, he, she, it, they tied, did tie, have tied. ish takechi tuk, thou OS - takehi li tuk, ity hvsh takche tuk, you. e takche tuk, we. eho takche tuk, we, etc. Past tense distinctive. This is formed by the article-pronoun, okeh. takchi tuk okeh, he, etc., tied, did tie, has tied. Another form of the past tense is made by a nasal sound in the fina vowel, as, takchi, chamo. Future tense. There are two forms of the future, made by the addition of chi for the immediate, and he, or hi, for the remote and indefinite future. The dis- tinctive future is made by suffixing okeh to chi and he; as, chi okeh, hi okeh. The suffix ashkeh is used for the definite, absolute, or imperative future. The past and future are combined to form a relative future; as, tuk a chi, tuk a he, tuk ashke, was to tie; also chin tuk, chin tok, he tuk, hitok, will have, shall have, would have, should have. $11. POTENTIAL MODE. This is formed from the infinitive by suffixing the articles hinla, may, can, and pulla, must, will. Present tense (but with reference to future time). Indefinite takcha hinlah, he, etc., may or can tie. Definite takcha hinlvshhe, he, ete., may or can tie. Distinctive takcha hinla hokeh, he, ete., may or can tie. Indefinite takchi pullah, he, etc., must or will tie. Definite takchi pullvschkeh, he, ete., must or will tie. Distinctive takchi pulla hokeh, he, ete., must or will tie. The past tenses are formed like those in the indicative mode, the tense signs being suffixed to hinla and pulla; as, takchi la hinla tuk, I may or might have tied. § 12. SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. This is formed from the infinitive by suffixing km for the definite and okm for the distinctive. The m takes the definite article-pronoun a in all its forms. Note.—km, if, when, whether, is compounded of k, a suffix, definitive of the idea contained in the verb; as. takchik, he ties, at that, in that, or A. P. §S.—VOL XI.—16E / Brinton. ] 3900 [February 4, just that; and of m, simultaneous or successive, affirming or supposing something in relation to the idea limited or bounded by k, then, when, at the same time or place; takchi km, when he ties then. This suffix can be added to the other modes in all their tenses; as, in- finitive, takchi kma, if to tie him, when to tie him; indicative, takchi kmah, if or when he ties him; potential, takcha hinla kmah, if he can tie him. Present tense. takchikmvt, definite subjective, if he, ete., tie, then he. takchikmah, definite objective, gs takehihokmvt, distinctive subjective, ne takchihokmah, distinctive objective, os The past and future tenses are inflected with the personal pronouns as in the indicative, except the forms which end ineh. These are always final, and admit of no suffix nor inflections. In the past tenses, tuk and tok, the k in kmvt, kmah, ete., is dropped, that in the tense particle taking its place. In the remote future, he, the distinctive form is not he okmah, but hokmah. The distinctive form okm expresses a condition or supposition with more emphasis, and implies a greater degree of uncertainty than km; as, infinitive, takchi hokma, to tie him, if so; indicative, takchi li hokmah, I tie him, if so it be; takchi la hinla hokmah, I tie him if it can be so. Examples: Romans XII. 20, chin tvnvp vt hohchvfo hokma; if thine enemy hunger; John XVI. 7, vno vt ia li keyu hokmvno, if I go not away; same verse, amba ia li hokmyvto, but if I do go away; Mat. IX. 12, amba abeka yok mak oh chatuk oke, but they (distinctive) who are sick; Luke XVI. 30, im ona hokmyno, if one went unto them, then; Mat. XI. 15, haksobish vt ihinlikmvt, if he have ears, definite; John XIX. 12, ishi hotofi hokmy, if thou lettest him go, distinctive; Phillip II. 1, asha hokma, if there be, a suppositive form; I. Cor. XIII. 8, nan ithana yokmé, whether there be knowledge, a suspensive form. § 13. OPTATIVE MODE. This is formed from the infinitive by suffixing kb definite and okb dis- tinctive. The particle b takes the article-pronoun @ in its definite and contradistinctive forms, babato, babano, and © distinctive and emphatic as a prefix, in distinctives and contradistinctives. takchikbat, definite subjective, oh ! that he, etc., would tie it, then he. takchikbah, definite objective, 36 takchikbato, contradistinctive subjective, ee takchikbano, contradistinctive objective, GE takchihokbat, distinctive subjective, oh! that he, ete., would tie, even he, then he. takchihokbah, distinctive objective, takchihokbato, contradistinctive subjective, ne takchihokbano, contradistinctive objective, 1870.] 301 { Brinton. Examples: Subjective form: shukbo chumpak bato, oh! that he would buy a blanket, (and take it home and wear it, etc). Objective form: shukbo chumpak bano, oh! that he would buy a blanket, (then others might buy). Contradistinctive subjective: shukbo chumpa hokbato, oh! that he would buy a blanket, (instead of borrowing one), and do something else, wear it, etc. - Contradistinctive objective: shukbo chumpa hokbano, oh! that he would buy a blanket, then others would come and buy, or do something else. Luke XIX. 42, nana isht chi ai yukpa he ai ulhpiesa ka ish ithaiyna tokokbato, if thou hadst known, or, oh! that thou hadst known; even thou,then thou, etc. Ialihokbat, I wish I could go and I (do something) ; iali hokbah, I wish I could go and he (do something). The persons, tenses, and numbers correspond with those in the indica- tive mode. $14. IMPERATIVE MODE. Affirmative: ik takchih, let him, her, it, or them tie. takchih, tie thou. ak takchih, let me tie. hvsh takechih, ye tie, tie ye (def). ho takehi, ye tie, tie ye (dis). ohiah, go ye (dis). ke takchi, let us tie (def). keho takchi, let us tie (dis). kiliah, let us go (def). kilohiah, let us go (dis). takchashkeh, let him, her, or them tie. The particle ashkeh is suffixed to the infinitive in the last word to ex- press an imperative in the shape of a wish. The imperative negative is formed by changing the terminal vowel of the verb into 0, and suffixing the particle kia;, or particles of negation may be used, such as na, wa, heto, he, keyu. Examples: ik takcho kiah, do not let him tie. ish takehi nah, don’t you tie him. ish takcha wah, you will not tie him. ish takcha heto, you shall not tie him. ish takcho he keyu, you shall not tie him. Double negatives may be used, not, not no; as: ak takcho ki nah; ak takcho ka wah; ak tokcha ka he keyuh. Compare Luke VII. 39, ik akostinincho ka heto, he would not have not known, 7. e., he would have known. Brinton.]J 302 [February 4, § 15. IRREGULAR VERBS. The irregular verbs are: vbi, to kill; vmo, to trim, to mow; vla, to ar- rive; vpa, to eat; ia, to go. The vowel v in these verbs is dropped ina part of the persons in both numbers; thus: Affirmative form. vpah, he, ete., eats, 7. €., of one article of food. vbih, he kills. ishpah, thou eatest. ish bih, thou killest. vpalih, _ I eat. ube lih, I kill. hvshpah, you eat. hvsh bih, you kill. epah, we eat (def). ebih, we kill. iloh vpah, we eat (dis). iloh vbih, we kill. Negative form. ik poh, he does not eat. ik boh. chik poh, thou chik boh. ak poh, I - ak boh. hvchik poh, you hvchik boh. ke poh, we (def). ke boh. kiloh poh, we (dis). kiloh aboh. In the frequentative form of these verbs, the pronouns in the second person singular and plural are modified thus: ahanla, ihishla, sing., ahashlah, pl. la, to go. Affirmative form. Negative form. iah, he goes, ik aiyuh. ish iah, thou goest, chik aiyuh. ialih, I go, ak aiyuh. hysh iah, you go, hvchik aiyuh. il iah, we go, kil aiyuh. iloh ia, we go, kiloh aiyuh. iksho, to be none, may be a negative form of vsha or asha. It is conjugated: ikshoh, he is not, there is none. ikchikshoh, thou art not. iksakshoh, I am not, ete. and: ik im ikshoh, he has not, there is none for him, ete. Keyu, not to be, has no modifications except h predicative, and the causatives chi and kechi; as, keyuchi, to make it nothing ; keyukechi, keyukma, if not, or. Kia, although, is perhaps an imperative form of ia, to go, ikiah, let him orit go. It has no variation except to take h pre- dicative, kiah, although it be. § 16. It will be seen that verbs have usually but one form for both singu- lar and plural numbers. Some verbs, however, have a plural, made by an internal change; as, hikah, it flies; helih, they fly; binilih, he sits; binohli, 1870.] 393 [Brinton. they sit; talahlih, he sets it up; talohlih, he sets them up; kopoli, to bite, plural, kobli; kanchi, to sell, plural, kampila; bohli, to lay down, plural, kapulli; tifi, to pluck up. plural, tehli; malleli, to run, plural, yihlepa. Some verbs have this plural form only; as, ilhkolih, they move off; pehlichi, he rules them; chiyah, they sit. Some have the singular number only; as, issoh, he strikes once. Some few verbs are dual; as, tihlaiah, they two run; ittonachih, they two go there together. . The inseparable pronouns determine the number of the verb in the first and second persons. The third person singular and plural has no personal pronoun; okla is sometimes used as a singular, dual, and plural pronoun; as, anumpulit okla tok, they two spake. Note.—By a verb in the plural is meant plurality either in the subject or object; as, wak pelichih, he or they drive cattle, and wak a chuffichi, they drive a cow. Here pelichih is in the plural number, and chuffichi in the singular. CHAPTER IV. PREPOSITIONS. § 1. There are few words in Choctaw that correspond to the English prepositions. The article-pronouns to some extent supply this want. Some verbs involve a preposition in their meaning; as, ona, to go to; vba, to arrive at; bokyupi, to bathe in the creek; husa, to fire at. The in- separable possessive pronouns i, im, in, involve a preposition, to him, for him, of him, from him, against him; so also do the reciprocal possessives, itti, ittim, ittin, to each other, for each other, etc. The preposition, to, in the infinitive is contained in the simple form of the verb; takchi, to tie. The preposition of, showing the genitive or pos- sessive case is understood; iti hishi, leaf of a tree. When one of the nouns expresses ownership in the other, the inseparable possessive pronoun is used; as, vila i holisso, the child its book. § 2. As the Choctaw is deficient in single words expressing space and time, it uses in place of them prepositive particles of definite significations. These are: 1. Locatives. They are: a, before consonants; ai, before vowels, and before y. This means the place for, in which, at which, from which, to which, where, there, then; as, afoha, to rest at or in a place, a time for resting; aminti, to come from; ahikia, to stand in; aianta, to stay at or in; ai impa, to eat at or there; ai illi, to die in a (room, ete.), or at (noon, night, ete. ); aianuk filli, to think of; aiahni, to long for; ayukfa, to rejoice at. Brinton.] 304 [February 4, 0, om, on. This is a more definite locative than a, ai, and may be trans- lated by on or upon; as, onbinili, to sit on; ontalali, to ride on; oyihlepa» to rush upon; ontalali, to set on or upon. 2. Distinctives: Et, anet, here, hither, to this place; et is the simple form, anet the in- tensive; et is from the verb echi, to reach, hand, or hold this way, to pass in this direction, intensive form anechi. These particles are transitive verbs, and are connected by the letter t with other verbs. Echi has the form of a causative verb, ishtishko a echih, pass the cup hither. Ex- amples: et kanchi, to cast it this way; et anoli, to report hither; et anuk filli, to think this way; awethikia, to stand this way, toward the speaker. Pit, thither. This is a subjective directive (made so by the t). It is from the verb pila, to send off, or throw, from the speaker to some other point. Examples: pit kanchi, to throw that way; pitanoli, to report it thither; pit anukfilli, to think of thither; pit hikia, to stand or lean that way. 3. Instrumental: : Isht, with. This is derived from the verb ishi, to take, with t distinct tive and continuative. Its literal meaning is often lost in the many uses it has as a prefix. Examples: ishtabeka, to be sick with; ishtanowa, to walk with; ishtan umpuli, to talk of; ishtanuk filli, to think about; isht- holitopa, to take it and be rich. 4. Of motion. Ant, from ayvt, means motion hither, to a place; as, ant anta, to come and stay. Ont, from onvt, means motion thither toa place; as, ont anta, to go and stay. 5. Social. Iba, with, in company with, awaya, to go with, awant, to bring with. Examples: ibatoksvli, to work with; ibapisa, to see with, a school-mate; itanowa, to travel together, a fellow-traveler; awantanta, to stay with; awantia to go with, awaya, to marry, fem. 7. ¢., she married him; itawaya, he marries her, or they marry. 6. The war or fire particle: This is ito, before a consonaut; it, before a vowel. This particle implies mutuality of action between the fire and what is put on it, or between those who kindle fires in a hostile manner against each other. Examples: oti, to kindle a fire; itoti, to fire each other; itotia, to go to war; itotaya, to wage war by fires. It is used in the New Testament, Mat. VII. 50, tvli a bila luak chito ka pit ito—ashacha he, to cast them into the furnace of fire. This particle ito may help us to understand how wars were formerly waged by fire rather than by weapons, these being very imperfect in con- struction, while fire was always at hand. § 3. These particles have various combinations with each other; as, aio, aiom, ai on, ont ai, ant ai, ont isht, ant isht, isht 0, ete., but as they are written separately, they can be readily understood. Examples: ont ai isht ia, go and of it take and go; isht im ai achukma hokeh, they take and in them have pleasure, it is so; ishtai 0 holissochi, to write on it therewith. 1870. } 399 [Brinton, CHUA Ns NOUNS. $1. In Choctaw there is no grammatical difference between common and proper, animate and inanimate, concrete and abstract nouns. They have no internal changes nor inflections to denote number, gender, or case. These accidents are supplied by additional words, or are left unexpressed. ~$2. Numprer.—Nouns are presumed to be in that number which is most natural to them. If the number is required to be specified, numerals, numeral adjectives, pronouns, or verbs are subjoined. Examples: wak, a cow, cows; wak achofa, one cow; wak tuklo, two cows; wak lawa, many cows; wak moma, all the cows; wak vmmi, my cow or my cows; hatak vt antah, a man stays; hatak vt ashah, men are staying; wak vt tihlaiah, the two cows run. § 3. GENDER.—A few nouns only have names in the masculine and feminine gender; as, hatak, aman; ohoyo, a woman; nakni, a male; tek, afemale. When gender is emphatic, these words, nakni, and tek, are sub- joined; as, vila nakni, a boy; vila tek, a girl; issinakni, a buck; issi tek, a doe. § 4. Casze.—All nouns take article-pronouns for specification, emphasis, and case. The subjective relation of a noun to a verb is indicated by the article-pronouns in the nominative case ; the objective relation by the article-pronouns in the oblique case. A noun, however, is often used by itself, without the article-pronoun, and may then be either in the nomina- tive or oblique case, the connective alone deciding which, though usually. it is oblique. Examples: hatak vt mintih, man he comes; hatak mintiah, man comes, or men come; hatak vt pisah, a man sees, or men see; hatak a pisah, man him (or men them) he sees. $ 5..The nominative and oblique independent. This occurs when two nouns or pronouns are in a subjective or objective relation to the same verb. In this case the first is emphatic or independent; as, hatak okvto i nitak vt hvshvk ak o chiyuhmi hokeh, man as for, he for him, days they, grass, that which is, like they are, so it is. hatak achvfa hosh ushi vt in tuklo tok, man a certain he sons they tohim two so it was. In these sentences, hatak okyto and hatak achvfa hosh, are in the nominative case, and nitak vt and ushi vt, are also in the nominative case. So in the oblique case: hvchishno ma, isht hvchi, mihacha he, you indeed, you, it shall not be judged to, or you, you shall not be judged. $ 6. The possessive or genitive sense. Possession may be shown by simple position; as, iti hishi, tree leaf, the tree’s leaf; hatak kvllo, man strength, the man’s strength, a man of Brinton.] 396 [February 4, strength; Chahta okla, the Choctaw nation, miko ibbak, king hand, the king’s hand. | Where there is an acquired possession, the inseparable possessive pro- nouns i, im, in, are inserted between two nouns; as, Chan in chuka, John ‘his house. It is probable that the method of indicating possession by position arose from an elision of this pronoun, as this method is most fre- quent in names of the human body and its members, of near relatives, in nominative and oblique independent nouns, and generally in such as are obviously integral parts of each other, or by nature closely connected. Examples: miko ibbak, the king (his) hand; miko ushe, the king (his) son; iti vni, a tree (its) fruit; iti hakshup, a tree, its bark; wak pishuk- chi, a cow (her) milk. Names of time take the possessive pronoun; as, i nitak, his day or days, which might also be regarded as i dative, to him, for him, as in wak i kanchi, he sells a cow to him or for him. § 7. The objective (accusative and ablative) sense. This is made by article-pronouns subjoined to nouns; as, hatak a, man him, man whom, man that. In forming the ablative of time, place, cause, the verb, not the noun, takes the preposition ; as, hatak vt a hikiah, the man stands in a place; isht ikbih, he makes it with. The vocative can be indicated by the particle mah; as, miko mah, O king.! § 8. Classes of nouns. The nouns are either primitive or derived. The former cannot be traced to any root; such are, oka, water; tvli, a stone; hatak, a man; ibbak, the hand; the latter are derived from verbs, adjectives, other nouns, etc. § 9. Derived nouns. The following examples will show the derivation of nouns: From transitive verbs: chanli, to chop, chanli, a chopper, the act of chopping. bvshli, to saw, a sawyer, the act of sawing. From intransitive verbs: nowa, to walk, a walk, the act of walking. pisa, to see, a seer, a sight. From passive verbs: talakchi, to be bound, a bundle. holitopa, to be honored, honor. kynia, to be lost, the loss, the act of losing. 1In one portion of his manuscript Mr. Byington propounds the following query: ‘Cannot all Choctaw nouns be treated as verbs? The root may be considered as in the infinitive mood; as, hatak, to be aman; hatak/, itis aman; hatak okmvt,ifaman.” Prof. H. Steinthal, on the con- trary, thinks that the peculiar formation of American tongues makes nouns, but no real verbs. He says of the Aztec: ‘das Mexikanische in seinem Ansatze zur Wortbildung Nomina gebildet hat, aber keine wahrhaften Verba” (Charakteristik des Sprachbaues, 8.218). The author of Etudes philolo- giques sur quelques Langues Sauvages de? Amerique, p.38, says: ‘Les noms algonquins ne se déclinent point, ils se conjuguent.” Prof. Steinthal, however, is right. The primitive expressions in these languages are concrete, not abstract,—nouns, therefore, not verbs. 1870. ] 307 [Brinton. From neuter verbs: kvllo, to be strong, strength. ahli, to be true, truth. From verbs with the locative particle a or ai: achanli, a chopping place. impa, to eat, aiimpa, a table. apisa, a looking glass. abvsha, a saw-pit, from bvsha, to be sawn. From verbs with the particle isht instrumental: isht bvsha, a saw. isht talakchi, a band. From verbs with the particle na or nanta: nakanchi, a seller, from kanchi, to sell. nanithana, a pupil, from ithana, to learn. From verbs with the definitive particle ka or kakah: falamaka, the return, from falama, to return. chukbika, a corner, from chukbi, to be a corner. lapalika, the side, from lapali, to be the side of. chitokaka, the Great One, God, from chito, to be great. From the verb ahpi, to be first in time: achafahpi, the first one. ishahpi, the first taken. tofahpi, to first of summer, the spring. hushtolahpi, the first of winter, the autumn. vttahpi, the first-born. With ushi, a son, to make a diminutive: bokushi, a brook, lit., son of a creek. hinushi, a path, from hina, a road. ibbakushi, the fingers, from ibbak, the hand. iyushi, the toes, from iyi, the foot. With vpi, a stalk, stem, trunk of a tree, main channel of a river, etc: iyvpi, the leg. bissvpi, a briar, bramble. hatakvypi humma, a red man, an Indian. From the union of two nouns: bila pvla, lamp-oil. hvpi oka, brine, salt water. iti hishi, leaf, leaves. nishkin okchi, tears. From the union of three nouns: chukfi hishi shapo, a wool hat, sheep-hair-hat. wak hakshup shukcha, a saddle-bag, cow-skin-bag. From a noun and an adjective: bota tohbi, flour, white-flour. hvpi champvlli, sugar, salt-sweet. A. PB. §.—VOL XI.—17E Brinton. |] 308 [February 4, From two nouns and an adjective: issuba haksobish falaia, a mule, horse-ears-long. From a noun and a verb: iti bvshli, a tree-sawyer. shapo ikbi, a hat-maker. shulush ikbi, a shoemaker. From two words connected by an article-pronoun: kanchit aya, a peddler, one that sells and goes. mvllit kvnia, a runaway, one that runs and is gone. From two nouns and a verb: bila pvla ikbi, a lamp maker. lukfi ampo ikbi, a potter.! Other combinations are also in use. 10. Abstract nouns. These are usually formed from neuter verbs ; as, kvllo, to be strong, strength; achukma, to be good, goodness; ahli (distinctive form of vhli, edge, end, point, limit), to be true, truth. The translators of the New Testament rarely, however, use these words alone, but combine others with them. For example: - Nnayimmi, faith, I. Cor. XIII. 13. nannihullo, love. nanisht i hullo, love. nanithana, knowledge, 2 Pet. 1, 5. ishtaivlbi, redemption. isht aholitopa, glory, Mat. VI. 13. Often circumlocutions are used; as, nan-isht hvsh il a nanaiya, your peace, lit., the thing by which you have peace in yourselves, Luke X. 6. The suffix nana or nan gives an intensive signification; as, nanihullochi, accursed thing, Joshua VII. 13. § 11. Proper nouns, and terms of relationship. These take the article-pronouns, and are construed like common nouns. Some proper nouns are simple, others compound. Chahta, Mvskoki, Chalaki, Wishashi, Shawvno, are simple, uncompounded names. Bulban- cha, the Choctaw name of New Orleans, is compounded of bvlbaha asha, where there is bvlbaha, unintelligible talking in different languages, as in Babel of old. Apalachicola, apelvchi okla, helping people, allies. Pensacola, pashokla, hairy people. Pascagoula, pvskokla, bread people. Tombigbee, itomikbi, box makers. Bok humma, Red river. Boktuklo, river two, applied to a creek the channel of which is divided by an island. 1 A number of words have been adopted from the English, and a few from French and Spanish. They all suffer some change. Thus, katus,acat; shapo, chapeau; wak, vaca (Sp-); enchil, angel. i 18$70.] 309 (Brinton. The terms of relationship are numerous, and differ materially in applica- tion from those used in the English tongue; as will be seen in the follow- ing list: I. Kinship by blood. 1. In the male line. omafo, my grandfather, the father of my father or of my mother, their fathers, brothers, and male cousins. aki, my father, his brothers, his male cousins, his uncles and nephews, their brothers and male cousins. omoshi, my maternal uncle, his brothers and male cousins. akni, the eldest among brothers, and male cousins. ushi, a son, svso, my son, son of the father, father’s brothers, male cousins, son of the mother, her sisters and female cousins, son of the father’s sister (said by this father’s son).. sabaiyt, my nephew, a son of my sister or her female cousin. sapok nakni, my male grandchild, my sister’s male grandchildren, my brother’s children (said by an aunt). ittibapishi, brother, literally those who suck together, a general name for brothers and male cousins. ommonnti, my elder brother or cousin. sa nak fish, my younger brother or cousin. i nak fi, her brother, spoken by a woman. 2. In the female line. voppoknt, my grandmother, her sisters, female cousins and their mothers. hoshke, my mother, her sisters, and female cousins. ahukni, my aunt, her sisters and female cousins. aknt, the eldest child among sisters and female cousins. oshetik, or svsotek, my daughter, the daughter of my sisters or female cousins, the child of my father’s sister, her sister or her cousin. sapoktek, my granddaughter, my sister’s grandchildren, the female child of a brother’s sister. itte bapishi, sisters, female cousins, common gender. ommonni, my eldest sister or cousin. sanak fish, my younger sister or cousin. antek, my sister or female cousin, said by a man. IJ. Kinship by marriage. hatak, husband, literally, her man. tekchi, wife, tm ohoyo, his woman. soppochi, my father-in-law, said by the man. suppochi, ohoyo, my mother-in-law, said by the man. omovfa, my father-in-law, said by the woman. oppokni, my mother-in-law, said by the woman. sayup, my son-in-law. sapok, my daughter-in-law. omalakusi, my brother-in-law, brother of my wife. omalak, my brother-in-law, husband of my sister. omafo, my uncle, the husband of my aunt. omalakust ohoyo, my sister-in-law, sister of my wife. Brinton.] 360 [February 4, sahaiya, my sister-in-law, wife of my brother, also wife of my uncle, or of my nephew. uppo, my sister-in-law. sapok, my sister-in-law. oshke, the wife of my father’s brother. haloka, a family name for son-in-law, father-in-law, and mother-in law. While formerly the kinsmen (¢ksa) and the peoples (okla) had specific names, the family hadnone.! The names of individuals were significant of some trait or quality. Some of the masculine names mean Come and kill, Stand and kill, Kill all, Kill and go; some of the feminine names signify Giver, Bringer, She who loops up her hair, Take water and give him. In times of war brave men received titles, such as Red bird, Red knife, Red owl, ete. The individual name is sacred, and is never used in common conversa- tion; the name of relationship, my brother, my cousin, is used instead. The wife speaks of her husband as vila iki, the children’s father. The ancient law of marriage was that no man could choose a wife in his own tksa. Hence the matter of clan relationship became one of great im- portance, and upon itthe terms of relationship in general were based. In common salutations, the husband addressed his wife’s clan as vm okla mah, my people, but his own clan as vm ai okla mah, inserting the locative particle ai, with an emphatic sense. Parents usually refer to their offspring as vila, the child, or children. There are no words, such as great-grand-father, great-grand-son, etc., to express relationship in the same line beyond grandfather and grandson. All ancestors and descendants more remote than these are called indis- criminately by these terms. § 12. Termination of nouns. Nouns may end with the vowels a, i, 0, u, and with the consonants f, h, k, 1, n, p, s, and sh; fakit, a turkey, the only noun ending in t, is probably a borrowed word. Those which end with a consonant take the article- pronouns which begin with a vowel sound; as, at, vt, osh, ot, ocha, a, 0, ona, or with the euphonic y; as, yvt, yosh, yocha, ya. CHAPTER VI. ADJECTIVES. D § 1. The words used as adjectives, or attributes of nouns, are in reality verbs. All the classes of verbs are used to modify nouns, but the attribu- tive neuter verb is that most frequently employed. When subjoined to 1The Choctaws were formally divided into two iksa, and three ‘“‘fires’ or districts. The latter were: Okla falaia, the long people; ahepvt okla, potatoe-eating people; okla hannali, six peoples. The iksa lived promiscuously throughout the nation and their establishment was attributed to sacred authority. This information I owe to Col. P. P. Pitchlynn, a thorough native Choctaw scholar, who has kindly read the proof of Mr. Byington’s Grammar with me. ‘ 1870. ] 361 [Brinton. nouns as adjectives, the verbs drop the inseparable and article-pronouns which belong to verbs alone, but continue to be modified by the internal changes of the verb. § 2. The adjective follows the noun it qualifies, and the article pronouns subjoined to nouns are removed and placed after the adjective. Thus, hatak vt mintih, a man is coming; hatak achukma yvt mintih, a good man is coming. The adjective agrees with its noun in number and case. § 3. Affirmative and negative forms. Adjectives are changed from the affirmative to the negative forms as verbs are. Thus, hatak kvllo, a strong man; hatak ikhvllo, a man not strong; ghli, true; ikahlo, not true. A noun with its adjective may be conjugated like a verb through the modes and tenses in the affirmative and negative forms. § 4. Number. Adjectives have a singular and plural number. The plural is formep from the singular by internal changes, and by the addition of other words. Examples: Singular. Plural. achukma, good, hochukma. chito, large, hochito. falaia, long, hofaloha. falvsa, long and slender, falvspoa. pvtha, wide, hopvtka. ibakchufanli, tapering, ibakchufashli. ibakhatanli, bald faced, ibakhatashli. ibakpishanli, round and pointed, ibakpashashli. ibaktasanli, starved in the face, ibaktasashli. yushkotoli, short, yushkotushli. yushbonoli, curly haired, yushbonushli. yushtololi, short, yushtolushli. okchvmali, green, okchymashili. § 5. Comparison. The degrees of comparison are much more numerous Aner § in English. They are expressed either by internal changes, or by the addition of other words. Example: achukma, good. Descending graduation. achukma ik ono, not good enough. achukma ik lawo, less good. achukma momakg ik lawo, less good than all. achukma iklawokit taha, completely less good than all. Positive degrees. achukma, good. achokma, goodish. achuhkma, good emphatically. Brinton.] 362 [February 4, achoyukma, good in an increased degree. achukma, good distinctly compared with others. achohukma, good and growing better. Comparative degree. achukma i shahli, better. Superlative degree. achukma moma i shahli, best. achukma kvt i shaht tahli, best, he completes it, subjective. achukma kvt i shaht taha, best, it is completed, objective. The last two expressions are attempts to translate the English superla- tive, and are not natural to the language. They are rarely heard. Diminutives. iskitini, small, iskitvnisi, smallish. okpulo, bad, okpulosi, baddish. kanomi, few, kanomusi, fewish. Sometimes it is expressed by a kind of lisp; as for ikchito, not large, say iksito. § 6. Numerals. These are all parsed like verbs, but are here called adjectives, in accord- ance with custom. Cardinal. Ordinal. 1. achvfa. tikba. 2, tuklo. atukla, or hittukla. 3. tukchina. atuchina, or hittuchina. 4. ushta. aiushta, or isht aiushta. 5. tahlapi. ishttahlapi. 6. hannali. isht hannali. 7. untuklo. isht untulo. 8. untuchina. . isht untuchina. 9. chakali. isht chakali. 19. pokoli. isht pokoli. 11. auahchvfa. 12. auahtuklo. 13. auahtuchina. 14. auahushta. 15. auahtahlapi. 16. auahhannali. 17. auahuntuklo. 18. auahuntuchina. 19. auah chakali. 20. pokoli tuklo. 30. pokoli tuchina. 100. tahlepa achvfa. 1000. tahlepa sipokni. The word auah means with, akucha, out of, over. There are no words for portions less than one half. 1870.] 363 { Brinton, CHAPTER VII. ADVERBS. § 1. Adverbs in Choctaw are verbs as well as adverbs. hey are either primitive or derived. The former are single words, such as beka, always; bano, only; illa, merely; tokba, very much; ahli, certainly; pulla, surely. § 2. Derived adverbs are formed in various ways. When two verbs have a connective between them, the first of them may serve merely to qualify the second and must then be rendered adverbially, though both may be parsed as verbs; as, achukmalit hvsh hoyashke, do ye search dili- gently, Mat. II. 8. Adverbs of place are formed from the demonstrative pronouns ilvppa, here; yymma, there. These take some of the article-pronouns; ilvppakinli, right here; yymmakinli, right there. Adverbs of number are derived from the numerals; as, ushta ha, four times; ai ushtaha, at the fourth time. Adverbs of time past are derived from the definite article-pronoun ash, renewed mention; as, mish ash, day before yesterday; hopakik ash, long since, long ago. Adverbs modify each other; fehna chohmi, somewhat very; fehna pulla, surely very. The degree of modification is varied after the manner of ad- jectives, by emphasis, by prolonging the sound of a word, or by inserting asyllable; as, fehna, fiena; cheki, chehki; chiki, chehika. Diminutives are formed by adding si; as, olatomasi from olatoma, this way, on this side of; bilikasi from bilika, close by. § 3. Interrogatives. These are definite and distinctive. The distinctive calls for a definite answer; katima ish ia hoh cho? where are you going ? anchuka ia lih, I am going to my house. In speaking an interrogative tone is used, and to increase the strength of the interrogation the final syllable ends with a nasal sound; antg? is he staying ? minti? is he coming? As there is no predicate in such inter- rogations, the verbal h finalis dropped. There is a milder interrogative where the nasal sound is dropped, and the h predicative is suffixed; as, yohmik ah? is it thus? yobatuh ah? could it be? Interrogatives with the nasal are distinctive; without the nasal they are definite. An interrogative in the negative demands an affirmative reply ; as, yvmmak keyu? is it not that ?=it is that. The principal interrogative adverbs are katima? or mvto? where? nanta? what? katiohmi? how? cho? an interrogative particle. Ex- amples: Katima ishia ha ? Where did you go? (definite. ) Katima ishia ho ? Where did you go? (distinctive. ) § 4. Adverbs take the article-pronouns, and some inseparable pronouns; as, sa tikba, before me (in place); an tikba, before me (in time). When they follow verbs, the article-pronouns of the verbs are removed, and placed after the adverbs. Brinton.) 364 [February 4, §$ 5. Examples of Choctaw adverbs. Yes, yea, yau, ah, i, ome. Nay, not, no, keyu, ahgh, ha, heto, awa, (haia, Chikasaw). -Much, laua, fehna, apakna. Little, kanomusi, iskitine, chvbihasi. Once, himona, himonaha. Twice, hitukla, hituklaha. Thrice, hituchina, hituchinaha. First, vmmona, tickba. Secondly, ont atukla. Thirdly, ont atuchina. Now, himak, himo. Then, yvmma. To-day, himak nitak. To-morrow, onna. Yesterday, pilashash. Upward, vba pila, vbema, vba imma. Downward, oka pila, akema, ak imma, aket. Beyond, mish sha. Soon, cheki. Enough, vilpesa. Perhaps, chishba, yobaka. Truly, ahli (from vhli, the limit). . Hither, anet. This side of, ola. Toward, pila. Merely, peh. CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS. $1. Conjunctions connect words, sentences, clauses and paragraphs, and commence and close sentences. They are definite and distinctive. Definite conjunctions usually end with t, vt, or a; as, mihmvt, mihma, and. The distinctives end with osh or 0; as, mihi osh, mihio. Some are both definite and distinctive ; as, okvt, oka, where ok, a demonstrative distinctive, is combined with vt and a definite. § 2. They take some of the article-pronouns to exhibit the nominative and oblique cases; as, mihmvt, nom. case, and he, mihma, oblique case, and him ; mih is used as a personal pronoun in the third person singular. Mihmvt is literally ‘‘he then he ;’’ mihma, ‘‘he then him ;”’ mihmvt con- tains the verb of existence (h predicative) and the subjective copula ; mihma likewise contains the verb of existence, and solves the subjective copula, and thus it acts on the subject—the subjective copula being solved. 1870.] 369 [Brinton. a new subject with its copula takes its place. This conjunction may be translated by any of the personal pronouns in the third person. § 8. The conjunction in the nominative case connects two or more sub- jects to one verb; as, Acts IJ. 8—11, where mikmyvt and micha connect the names of several nations with eho haiyak loshke. When there is one subject and two or more predicates, the subject is connected with all the predicates; as, Luke XY. 13, where the connective is suffixed to the predicates as a copula. But when another subject and predicate following the first are connected with it, the conjunction is in the oblique case. This change of case gives notice of the succeeding subject and predicate; as, Mat. I. 2: Eblaham vt Aisak a tobachi tok; atuko Aisak vt Chekob a tobachi tok; here, atuko is in the oblique case, and connects the two prepositions, and shows two dif- ferent subjects. If it were atuk osh instead of atuko it would make Abra- ham a subject of the second preposition. The genealogy of the Saviour in Luke III., illustrates the same usage. The conjunction mihma is there used, ‘‘and he,”’ the subject of the next verb. This change in the con- junction does not change the subject to the object. It gives notice of another subject, and connects them both by mihma. The copulais solved, and the way opened for another subject to take it. Thus, in Luke XYII. 10: achvfa kok osh Falisi okma, achvfa kyto publikan a tok ; okma is in the oblique case. These instances exhibit the difference between a con- junction in the nominative and oblique cases, § 4. Conjunctions are divided into the following classes: 1. Copulatives ; definite subjective, and, then, t, cha, micha, mihmvt, mikmvt, yohmi cha, yumohmi cha, yohmi mvt, yumohmi mvt. definite objective, na, mina, mihma, mikma. distinctive, mih ho, mih hosh. 2. Distinctives; or, if not, unless, except, but, keyukmvt, keyu hokmyt, amba, ikshokmvt, keyukma, 3. Concessives ; although, nevertheless, be it so, admit it. They con- cede something which has been said. They are kia and amba. The distinctive article-pronouns osh, 0, and oh, often precede kia, as akohkia, okako kia. 4. Adversatives; but, yet, notwithstanding, amba, kia; atuk ak a, but, Luke XIX. 14. 5. Causals; therefore, for, because, as, so as, okvt, yohmi hosh, yohmi kokvt, yomohmi hosh, yomohmih hoh, yomohmi hokah. 6. Ilatives ; therefore, wherefore, on account of, yomohmi hokvt, yo- mohmi hokah. 7. Finals; because, for, hokvt, hokah, yohmi hokvt, yohmi hokah. 8. Conditionals ; if, lest, when, then, provided, kmvt, kma (def.), okmvt, okma, (dis). A. P. S.—VOL x1.—18E Brinton.] 366 [February 4, 9. Suspensives ; whether, whether or, km4 (def.), okmé, (dis.), ish toh- bichikmaé; ish lusachikma, whether white or black, Mat. V. 36. Examples of conjunctions: Again, anonti, anowa, himmakma, himakona. Also, aiena, itatuklo, mvt, ma, akinli. Although, kia, okako, okakosh. And, cha, na, micha, mina, mihmvt, mihma, mikmvt, mikma. Because, hokvt, hoka, hatukosh. Besides, aiena, micha, mikmyt, mikma. But, amba, kia. Except, keyukma, akcho. Sinee, hatukosh, hatuko. Therefore, yvmohmikmvt, yymohmika, yymohmihokvt. Unless, keyukmyt, keyuhokmvt. (0) 5.0 cal Mp ig DL INTERJECTIONS. § 1. The Interjections may be divided into two classes, the subjective and the objective. § 2. The subjective interjections. Theseare produced by a sudden ebullition of feeling and merely manifest the state of the speaker’s mind, as akshukeh ! oh ! on account of pain from water or cold; akshupeh ! oh ! when the pain is from fire; ulleh! for any severe pain; ikikeh ! when in distress of mind or body. § 3. The objective interjections. These are employed to excite the attention of the party addressed; intah !, ok !, okintah !, well! now! used for defiance or banter; yak eh ! look here !, yak okeh, thanks to you; yokokeh, in lamentation ; omeh ! omishkeh ! to call attention, Give ear! There are interjections for times of sport, of mourning, of war, victory and defeat. Some are common to Loth sexes, some used by only one. $4. Interjections chiefly used by men. Ahah, no! stop! take heed ! Pullashkeh, God forbid ! Auohmeh, ah indeed ! Hahah, oh! Han, oh! what ! Humpheh, oh! in anger, defiance, or pain. Ok, well! now! as, I dare you! Okintah, well, come on, I dare you. Omeh, to invite the attention of hearers. Omishkeh, the same in more solemn style. Yakoh ! yakih !, a shout by the warner to the ball-players. 1870. ] 36 il [Brinton. Interjections chiefly used by women. Aiena, alas, wo is me. Aiyenaheh, alas, wo, uttered at funerals. Ehwah, fie ! begone, in reproach or disgust. Aiheh, oho! half infun and half in earnest. Wehkah, quit ! don’t ! Kaihoh, oh! in fear. Interjections common to both sexes. Ok hob, no! no! quit! in anger. Akshukeh, oh dear ! it hurts me ! Okshupeh, oh! it burns! Ehah, woe, woe ! Hai, in disappointment. Hok, oh! Hush, alas ! Hushha, alas ! Ikkikeh, alas ! pity ! Intah, well, now, come, enough ! Issah, guit ! be off! stop! Mah, look there now, sign of vocative. Makhalokah, “let it be so to him,’’ in centempt. Mishia, begone ! Okkvnno, indeed ! Okokkoh, oh dear! alas! Stated Meeting, April 15, 1870. Present, ten members. Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. Donations were announced from the Acclimatisation So- ciety of Paris; the Editors of Nature; the Commissioners of Emigration of the State of New York; Prof. Réhrig, of the Cornell University; the Hssex Institute; Dr. Newberry; the Phila. Acad. Nat. Sciences; Journal of Med. Sciences, and Franklin Institute, and the U. 8. Secretary of the Treasury. Prof. Cope exhibited and described vertebrae and other parts of a new species of Botlosaurus, found in the upper beds 368 of the Cretaceous Green Sand of Burlington Co., N. J., and showed how it differed from B. Harlani. Prof. Hayden exhibited photographs of fossil fishes, from the Green River locality described at the last meeting, and described a new process of picture printing, from which a great improvement in the representations of natural objects may be expected; he also showed sketches of Gelogical sec- tions of the Rocky Mountain rocks. Dr. Brinton described the peculiar mode adopted by Mr. Charency for interpreting some curious inscriptions newly discovered at Pelenque. The Society then proceeded to ballot for members, nomina- tions Nos. 601, 602, 654 and 650, being postponed for the present. When, the ballot boxes were examined by the presiding | officer, the following persons were declared duly elected mem- bers of the Society: Major R.S. Williamson, U. 8. Engineers. Hon. J. D. Cox, of Washington, D. C. Prof. Charles H. Hitchcock, of New York City. Mr. Edmund Quincy, of Dedham, Mass. And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, May 6, 1870. Present, twenty-five members. Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. J. D. Cox, dated Department of the Interior, Washington, April 26; Mr. Edmund Quincy, dated Dedham, Mass., April 20; and Mr. C. H. Hitchcock, dated Hanover, N. H., April 29, 1870. Photographs of Prof. F. L. O. Rohrig, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y., and Dr. Horn, of Philadelphia, were received for the album. 369 Letters acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings and an- nouncing transmissions, were read. Donations for the Library were received from the Royal Academies and Societies at St. Petersburgh, Munich, Goéttin- gen, Copenhagen and Edinburgh; the Society at Marburg; the Geological Society at Berlin; Geographical Society at Paris, and Astronomical Society at London; the Institutes at Salem, Philadelphia, and Baltimore; the New Jersey and Pennsylvania Historical Societies; the State Geologist of New Jersey; Dr. Ruschenberger, Hon. W. D. Kelley, Mr. C. H. Hunt, Genl. Abbott, and the Public School Commissioners in St. Louis. The death of a late member of the Society, Mr. Franklin Peale, of Philadelphia, on Thursday morning, May 5, aged 74, was announced by Mr. Robert Patterson, who, on motion of Mr. Fraley, was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. The Secretary communicated, as from the author, the sec- ond part of a Memoir on the Geological Position, Characters and Equivalencies of the Marshall Group, by Prof. Alex. Winchell, Part I. of which was published in the Proceedings, IN@, Sl The Secretary gave the following account of beads from Indian graves on the Susquehanna River, now in the posses- sion of Prof. S. 8. Haldeman, of Columbia, Pa. A bead found in an Indian grave near Bainbridge, Lancas- ter Co., Pa., in making the Pennsylvania Canal, about the yéar 1832. The bead is spherical, but made out of a section of a cylinder, or group of four concentric cylinders, the outer one blue, the middle one red, between these a thin one of white, and the fourth also white, forming an innermost thin lining to the red and a coating to the siphunele or string-hole through the centre. The end section of the three inner eylin- ders is star-shaped, or, more properly, corrugated very regu- larly in 13 waves, lke a watch pinion of 18 cogs. The white shining through the blue produces a banded appear- ance of the surface of the bead, the bands being alternately deep blue and hght blue. No doubt the blue cylinder was corrugated on the outside surface, also, and then pressed or rolled smooth. ‘The diameter of the bead across the string- 3710 hole is 3; 1n., and its length } inch. Its general appear- ance can be known from that of the objects figured on Plate, p» WI Proceedings Amer. Iiuillos;Soc., “Decl 0; le02 Mes: pecially Fig. 3. With this bead others were found, made of segments of blue glass cylinders about yo inch diameter, and about half an inch long; others of Venetian red color, of the same diame- ter, but an inch or an inch anda half long. See similar figures in Schooleraft. Also, a string of very small copper beads, above 7; of an inch large, every way, made of bits of flat cop- per wire coiled to receive a string. Dr. Allen presented for publication in the Transactions, a paper “On some of the effects of age as observed in the osseous system,” with three plates, which was referred toa committee consisting of Dr. Ruschenberger, Dr. Leidy and Prof. Lesley. Prof. Cope presented a paper entitled, ‘Observations on the Fishes of the Tertiary Shales of Green River, Wyoming,” collected by Dr. Hayden. (See Proceedings, page 380.) Dr. Hayden presented for publication three papers, de- scriptive of certain elaborately drawn and colored sections of rocks exposed in the cuttings of the Union Pacific Railroad. (See Procecdings, about page 419.) Professor Cope exhibited and discussed a new Dycynodont cranium from the Trias of South Africa, and compared it with some evidently Dycynodont tusks from the Triassic rocks of the Phoenixville tunnel, on the Reading Railroad, thirty miles northwest of Philadelphia, which he exhibited to sustain his remarks. (See Proceedings, about page 418.) Mr. James returned to the custody of the Society, the MSS. of Pursh’s Botanical Journal, loaned to him for publication in 1869; and, with the MSS., presented to the Library of the So- ciety a copy of the published Journal, with MSS. notes of his own interleaved. Mr. James returned, also, certain mosses, loaned to him from the Muhlenberg Herbarium, for comparison. Pending nominations Nos. 651 to 609 were read, and the Society was adjourned. Provost C. J. Stillé then read an obituary notice of the late Mr. Horace Binney, Jun. (See Proceedings, page 3/1.) May 6, 1870. 371 (Stille. OBITUARY NOTICE OF HORACE BINNEY, Jr., Read before the American Philosophical Society, By CHARLES J. STILLE. It is not often that the judgment of a man’s life and character by the world agrees with that of his intimate friends. By the world, success in life is too often measured by results which strike most for- cibly the popular imagination ;—it means a large fortune, a brilliant professional reputation, opportunities eagerly sought and adroitly tuken advantage of, for gaining prominent public positions. To his friends on the other hand, a man may be most endeared and best re- membered by qualities of which the world knows nothing, or at best knows them only as they are seen in the perfect symmetry of his life. Happy is the memory of him who, dying, forces the world to forsake for once the false standards by which it commonly judges character, and extorts from it an involuntary homage to what is real and true in human life. I think that the career of our late friend and col- league, Mr. Binney, is an illustration of this rare coincidence between the opinion of the world, and that of a man’s inner circle of friends. Here was a man who won none of the great prizes of life as the world counts them, who was not a successful politician, who never aspired to high official position, or gained great professional reputa- tion, who had none of the arts which please the multitude, who was simply a man of warm sympathies, and generous culture, striving to do his duty in the fear of God in that station of life in which his lot had been cast, a simple-hearted, modest Christian gentieman,—and yet when he dies, a voice comes to us made up of many voices, pro- claiming that his conception of life was a just one, and that such a life is worthy of our affectionate commemoration. HorACcE BINNEY, JUNIOR, was born in Philadelphia, on the 21st of January, 1809. He was the eldest son of the Honorable Horace Bin- ney, and one of the many blessings of his life was, that during the whole of it he felt himself supported by the wise counsel, the sure guidance, and the lofty example of such a Father. The influence of Fathers upon their children is, I fear, declining in this age and coun- try, but in this case the deep yet discriminating affection of the Father for the son, and the profound filial reverence of that son to- wards the Father, forms a picture as attractive and suggestive, as unhappily in our experience it is rare. Such a relationship between two such men continued for threescore years, could not be without an important influence on both. By the younger, at least, it was felt as a power which he never referred to, except to speak of it with grati- tude, as having happily controlled the whole course of his life. Stillé.] 372 [May 6, As a boy, Mr. Binney was of a serious and thoughtful turn. His love of study, and his exquisite moral sense were developed simul- taneously, and they soon became blended in that perfect harmony which formed the great charm of his character in his maturer years. He was somewhat shy and retiring in his disposition, and possibly a constitution never very robust, may have unfitted him for those boyish sports for the keenest enjoyment of which high animal spirits are essential. His studies began in the school of Mr. James Ross, and under the training of that most accomplished teacher he gained great proficiency in the Greek and Latin Classics. In this school, among his friends and associates, were the late Professor Henry Reed, Charles Chauncey, a young man of great promise, cut off in early manhood, and the Rev. Dr. Hare—and they remained his friends until death divided them. ‘‘ He was remarkable among his school-mates’’ says the last survivor of these companions, ‘‘for the qualities which dis- tinguished him in after life. He was to an unusual degree just, regu- lar and industrious. I have no remembrance of his having ever missed a lesson or incurred a censure.’’ Mr. Binney entered the Freshman class in Yale College, in the au- tumn of 1824, in his sixteenth year. Although he was with one ex- ception, the youngest member of a class nearly one hundred strong, his attainments in the classics were far beyond those required by the College rules for admission. This proficiency gave him of course a great advantage at the start, and was no doubt one cause of his high standing in his class. I well remember years afterwards at Yale a tradition, that Mr. Binney’s class was one of the most brilliant which had ever passed through that College, and in this class he carried off the highest honors. Those who know what is meant at Yale by that distinction, can best estimate not merely the attainments, but the force of character required in a boy of twenty years of age to reach it. His friends at College, like his friends at school, seem to have been chosen from those whose subsequent career proves his early dis- criminating judgment of character. J need mention only the names of two of our most eminent colleagues, Mr. Justice Strong, and Dr. Barnard, President of Columbia College, who were his class-mates, and his life-long friends, in illustration of what I have said. Perhaps however, the most powerful influence in moulding his character at this period of his life, came from a source outside the College. During the four years of his residence there. not a day passed in which a letter was not written by the Father to the son, or by the son to the Father. Such a correspondence could never have been maintained without that profound mutual confidence in each other which was a striking characteristic of both. It had too the inestimable advantage of making the Father and the son better known to each other, and one of its results was, that the Father who 1870. ] 313 [Stillé. had been the most careful and judicious of parents while his boy was at College, regarded him from the time he left it to the day of his death, as a younger brother rather than a son. It is not to be supposed that because Mr. Binney attained the high- est College honors, he had no time or inclination for studies beyond the ordinary curriculum. Although a firm believer to the last, in the simply disciplinary value of a thorough study of the Classics and the Mathematics, he never had the folly to suppose that four of the most precious years of his life were to be given merely to training his in- tellect, without storing his mind with knowledge, or cultivating his taste. His study of languages, and especially of Greek, led him into a far wider field than that embraced by an accurate knowledge of their grammar and their idioms. His proficiency was such that he was able to do that which few young men at College ever do, to re- gard the ancient languages principally as the vehicles of the litera- ture of the people who spoke them. He was thus led to study in the best way, the civilization of the free states of antiquity. No one had a finer appreciation of what modern culture owes to Greek models. He himself was thoroughly imbued with their spirit, and their influ- ence was conspicuous in liberalising his views and directing his stud- ies all through life. There can be, I suppose, little doubt that Mr. Binney’s strong reli- gious nature inclined him after he left College to adopt as a profes- sion, that of the Sacred Ministry. That he acted wisely in not fol- lowing this inclination, no one who now looks back upon his career can doubt. Mr. Binney’s life as a layman was a living epistle of all virtues, a daily exhibition in the midst of no ordinary trials and du- ties, of purity, goodness, faith and truth, and it is not to be doubted that the silent influence of such a life upon those around him was as powerful and as healthful as if he had been the most brilliant profes- sional teacher of those Divine truths, the fruits of which were so con- spicuous in his daily walk and conversation. There is no warrant for the statement which has been made, that he wished to devote himself to the Ministry, and that he was persuaded by his Father to study Law. His Father, no doubt wished and recommended it, but his intervention was confined to pointing out the priceless value of the life of a truly religious layman in the world, and more par- ticularly that among such religious men in England, were to be found several of her most eminent Judges and Lawyers. No one, indeed, who knows how solemn a thing duty always was with Mr. Binney, and how absolute was the confidence which his Father reposed in him, can doubt that the decision when arrived at, was the result of his own free and deliberate choice. Mr. Binney’s career as a Lawyer was not a striking or brilliant one. He studied his profession, as he did everything he undertook, A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—19E Stillé.] 374 [May 6, thoroughly and conscientiously, and his well-trained mind, and habits of industry, made him a master of the great principles of the science: But he was never intended for a professional athlete. He had none of the abundant self-assertion, the eager watching of opportunity for advancement, or the disposition to regard litigation as a game, the chief interest of which lies in the chances of success of those who conduct it, which are so characteristic of one class of Lawyers, while he had not those extraordinary gifts which make the fame of the truly great Lawyer, like that of the great Historian, one of the rarest of intellectual distinctions. He was however without doubt, one of those who do most to secure for the Profession the confidence of the Public. His nature abhorred all the arts of low cunning and chicanery, or rather with a certain noble simplicity, he seemed scarce- ly aware of their existence, and he lived in a moral atmosphere so pure, that it inspired every one who approached him with implicit trust and confidence. Hence in that large class of cases (much lar- ger than is commonly supposed), in which the moral qualities of the man are quite as important to the interests of the client as the pro- fessional skill of the lawyer, he found abundant occupation. He was eminently a safe counsellor, accurate and thorough, and perfect mas- ter of any case which had been confided to him. I have been assured by one of the most eminent living Jurists, that there are at least two cases in our Reports in which Mr. Binney’s printed arguments have always seemed to him models of Professional skill, showing on his part perfect familiarity with some of the most intricate and difficult questions of the Law. Mr. Binney’s extreme modesty, and his utter aversion to display or ostentation of any kind, confined his reputation as a scholar chief- ly within the limits of those who knew him well. To his friends he seemed always a man of genuine scholarly instincts, loving the famil- iar intercourse of the wise, the true, and the good of all ages, as a means of enriching and invigorating his own nature. His memory abounded with passages from his favorite Latin authors, and he studied Greek literature, and especially the Greek Scriptures in a thoroughly critical spirit. I have often heard him refer to certain expressions in the original, the peculiar significance of which he thought had been lost in the translation. He talked often of St. Paul as one of the finest specimens of Greek culture, and nothing could be more instructive than to listen to his analysis of the speech before Agrippa, and of its points of resemblance to the most cele- brated productions of the Greek orators. He referred frequently to the connexion between Greek culture, and the spread of Christianity, and to the providential combination for that purpose at the time of its Advent, of the Jewish or Monotheistic idea of the Deity, of the Greek conception of the dignity of man, and of the universal Roman 1870.) 370 [Stiilé. sway. He was fond of the study of history, but its chief interest to him, was as a record of the dealings of God with his creatures, and of the influence of the Church as a divinely organized institution in the world. His familiarity with ancient literature and ancient his- tory never tempted him as it has done so many scholars in our day, to make it the basis of a destructive criticism which would leave us no Divine revelation, and no personal God. If he abstained, it was not from indifference, nor from a fear of the consequences, but because no man ever had a clearer intellectual perception than himself, of the boundaries between the domain of faith and that of reason. The classical spirit with which Mr. Binney was imbued, formed the basis of all his canons of taste and criticism. He had learned at least one thing from the Greeks which so many are apt to forget, and that was the value of simplicity and truth in style. He had a great dislike for everything that was exaggerated, abnormal, or simply pretentious. Like Plato, he sought the beautiful by striving to find the true, and any picture in which truth and reality were sac- rificed to effect failed to make the intended impression upon him. He thought that the ancient Poets and Dramatists pourtrayed most truly human emotions and passions, because their descriptions were at least consistent and natural, and because they did not present to us as real human beings, those literary monsters of modern times,— ““the names linked with one virtue and a thousand crimes.’’ He had the keenest perception of what was of real value, either in the form or in the substance of the writings of others. He especially disliked that mode of presenting or discussing a subject which was simply rhetorical, passionate, or sensational. Such a style offended equally his moral, and his esthetic principles. It was not true because it was one-sided, and there was no beauty to him in anything which was not true. I have always regarded Mr. Binney as one of the best illus- trations I have ever met with, of the practical value of classical stud- ies, and I may mention here that during his long service as a Trustee of the Protestant Episcopal Academy,—extending over a period of nearly forty years,—and as a Trustee of the University, he was un- ceasing in his efforts to uphold their dignity, and in insisting upon their value in every scheme of liberal culture.! 1The following anecdote will illustrate Mr. Binney’s familiarity with Greek style. Mr. Richard Henry Wilde, once a member of Congress from Georgia, and an accomplished scho- lar, had written some beautiful verses beginning, ‘‘ My life is like the summer rose, &c.,” which being published in the newspapers, became widely known. Some time after, Mr. Wilde was sur- prised to find in a Georgia newspaper, a Greek Ode purporting to have been written by Alczus, an early Eolian poet of somewhat obscure fame, and it was claimed that Mr. Wilde’s verses were simply a translation of this Ode, the ideas in both being almost identical. As Mr. Wilde had never heard of Alczus, he was much puzzled to account for this resemblance of the two poems, At the sug- gestion of a friend, the Greek Ode was sent to Mr. Binney for examination and criticism. He at once, much to the relief of Mr. Wilde, pronounced it a forgery, pointing out wherein its style dif- fered from that of classical Greek. It turned out afterwards that the Ode in question had been written by an Oxford scholar on a wager that no one in that University was sufficiently familiar with the style of the early Greek poets, to detect the counterfeit. To carry out this scheme, he hat translated Mr. Wilde’s verses into Greek. Stillé.] 376 [May 6, It is not to be inferred from what has been said, that Mr. Binney led the life of a secluded student, for he felt the deepest interest in the great movements which were going on around him, yet it is also true that he had no ambition to occupy a prominent position in public life. The arts of the politician were abhorrent to every instinct of his nature, and he felt, as we all do, that by these arts success is chief- ly gained in a public career. He was one of that class, who, obsery- ing quietly the current of human affairs, are not disposed to make vain efforts to check its course until it threatens to sap the founda- tions of society, and those who have hitherto guided it lie panic- stricken and helpless. Such men form the true reserve force of a nation ; never seen, almost never thought of in days when all is smooth and prosperous, they are the only guides who are trusted in the crisis of danger. Mr. Binney was a typical man of this class. He was forced into public life when earnest men sought to purify our Municipal Government, or when the suppression of riot and blood- shed in his native city, required him to assume the singularly uncon- genial duties of a Captain of a Volunteer Company. In his religious opinions, Mr. Binney was a conservative Church- man. He had deeply studied the organization and claims of the Christian Church, and was strongly convinced of the rightfulness of its authority as a Divine agency in this world. With a most de- vout and earnest spirit, he strove through this means to uphold a high standard of Christian life and duty. He revered the memory of the Saints and Martyrs of that Church. The virtues which distinguished them—child-like faith, humility, self denial, and. an earnest love of the weak and the lowly—were those which found in him the fullest recognition and sympathy. His moral instincts and his mental cul- ture were here also in perfect harmony, and his enthusiasm for Saint- ly George Herbert, and his familiarity with Keble’s Christian Year, which he could repeat from beginning to end, were due, not merely to his appreciation of the literary merits of those Poets, but also to their praise of those virtues which it had been his life-long concern to cultivate. Mr. Binney’s peculiar views concerning the Church and its func- tions, modified his opinions upon many important questions, especial- ly in regard to those great movements of moral reform by which the present age is so strongly characterized. With an ardent desire that “men should grow purer and happier, his sober and serious judgment made him very slow in adopting any one of the plausible schemes by which it was proposed to accomplish that desirable object. He was no humanitarian. He had very little hope for the future of the race outside the influence of Christian faith and duty. He saw too much of the disturbing passions of mankind to believe that true pro- gress could be made inany other way. In all his work for his fellow- 1870.] 317 (Stille. men he was guided by a principle far deeper and more enduring than a vague sentiment of philanthropy, and that was, obedience to a duty divinely commanded. Hence his zeal had all the characteristics of duty,—courage, constancy and self-denial-—-and none of the weak- nesses attendant upon mere passionate impulse. How completely Mr. Binney’s whole life was the outgrowth of this principle of duty was shown by his conduct during the war. He had no favorite theories to establish, no passions to gratify by the subjugation of the Southern people. Moreover, he was one of those who, while he deplored most deeply the evils of slavery, felt himself bound by the force of positive law to abstain from interfering with it where it existed. Yet when a gigantic conspiracy to overturn the government of the country revealed itself, he regarded it with almost judicial calmness, and he prepared to resist it, as he would have per- formed any other high duty with all the manly earnestness of his na- ture. Shocked and indignant, no doubt, he was: ‘* Neque enim siluisse licebat, Cum passos, meerens indigna, Columbia crines Et pectus lacerum et stillantia lumina monstrat.”’ Yet he never lost his balance: he went about his work with a sober enthusiasm which was deep-rooted in conscientious conviction. He never doubted or wavered, nor weakly desponded, but keeping his eye steadily on the end in view, he gave himself and all that he had to the support of the government. Nothing was more suggestive than the sight of this quiet, undemonstrative gentleman, in active sympathy with the country in danger. Of all the many schemes devised here to give popular aid to the authorities during the war, he was a most zealous promoter. He was one of the founders of the Union League of this City, an agency in the successful prosecution of the war, the value of which I do not think it easy to over-estimate. He was never unduly excited by our successes, or depressed by our reverses, and I do not think that I ever saw him more moved during the war, than when on a public occasion here, he expressed his satisfaction that he was at last permitted to give free play to his convictions concerning slavery, and to aid with a clear conscience in its destruction. Mr. Binney’s services during the war were not confined, as is well known, to a hearty support of the policy of the government. His active sympathy soon embraced those who were called upon to defend the country at the risk of their lives. He sought every opportunity to promote their health, comfort and efficiency. He helped to build up that great monument of American civilization, the United States Sanitary Commission, and he is entitled to a full share of whatever honor may be due to those who organized and carried on the grandest and most efficient system of voluntary relief to the sick and wounded of an Army known in History since wars began on earth. Stillé.] 378 [May 6, He was elected on the thirtieth of July, 1861, by the gentlemen ap- pointed by the President of the United States, a ‘‘Commission of Inquiry and Advice in respect of the Sanitary Interests of the United States Forces,’’ a member of that body. His duties in this position were all engrossing. To do properly the work which the Commission had undertaken to do, which was nothing less than an attempt to supplement by the full measure of popular sympathy the deficiencies of the government service in the care of the suffering of the Army, required something more than mere devotion and zeal. If the whole project was not to end by increasing the very evils it sought to remedy, there was need of the utmost judgment, prudence and intelli- gence on the part of those who managed its affairs, in order to secure the harmonious co-operation of the army officials. In shaping and directing the policy of the Commission to this end, Mr. Binney was always conspicuous. On many occasions during its sessions in Wash- ington, I was impressed with his sound and well-considered views, not merely in regard to the general objects of the Commission, but as to the best methods of securing them. His judgment was always so sure and calm, his counsel so wise and patriotic, that he soon gained the fullest confidence of his colleagues, many of whom were among the foremost men in the country. But Mr. Binney’s care for the sick and the suffering of the Army during the war, did not end with this general supervision of the means to be taken to improve their condition. One of the methods adopted by the Sanitary Commission to organize popular sympathy on the widest basis, was the establishment of branch or tributary asso- ciations in different parts of the country. In pursuance of this plan, Mr. Binney was instructed to organize in December, 1861, such an association in this City. By his zeal and personal influence, he gathered round him many of our prominent citizens, who desired to aid in this great scheme of Army relief. Of this body, called the ‘‘ Philadelphia Associates,’ Mr. Binney was Chairman during the war, and by means of its labors, more than a million and a half of dollars were contributed in aid of the purposes for which the Com- mission was established. It is impossible, it seems to me, to recall the vast proportions which this work assumed without admiration, wonder and gratitude. Under Mr. Binney’s wise and earnest leader- ship, it collected vast supplies from the homes of the country, and distributed them to the suffering of the Army, it supplemented the needs of the Military Hospitals, local and general, —it was foremost in relieving the miseries of battle-fields; it established a Hospital Direc- tory, by means of which the condition of the suffering soldier, in any Military Hospital, might become speedily known to his friends, and it maintained a Bureau for the purpose of collecting the soldiers, claims on the government without charge to him. To carry on this 1870.) 319 [Stillé. great scheme, it secured large contributions from our citizens, and as its crowning work, it organized the Great Central Fair in 1864—an enduring memorial, not merely of the patriotism and mercy of the people of Philadelphia, but also a wonderful proof of their perfect trust that their vast benefactions would be wisely administered by Mr. Binney, and the gentlemen associated with him. It has sometimes been said that the war and its duties, brought into active excercise qualities in many men which had lain dormant all their lives, and of the existence of which they themselves had hardly been conscious. But in Mr. Binney’s case, the war only offered an oppor- tunity for an exhibition on a wider sphere of virtues, which had been his essential characteristics through life. He had courage, for in- stance,—not mere coolness in the midst of danger, although he pos- sessed that to an eminent degree,—but a much loftier quality, which the French call the courage of one’s opinions. His convictions were intensely strong, and when once formed, no power on earth would move him. Out of every conviction grew a duty, which soon brought forth fruit in an appropriate act. No one who knew Mr. Binney, could doubt his perfect readiness to maintain opinions so formed, with the courage and constancy of a martyr. And yet there was at all times in him, such true modesty, and a manner so unassum- ing, and almost shrinking, that to many the real strength of his na- ture lay hidden. His largeness of view, and his innate sense of cour- tesy, preserved him from the slightest taint of arrogance when he differed from others. Certainly, no opinions were held by Mr. Bin- ney more strongly or clearly, than those concerning the nature and the functions of the Church, and yet I have seen him in the most in- timate personal relations with representatives of almost every type of thought on this subject, except his own, at all times most zealous- ly co-operating with them in the performance of duties demanded by a common Christianity. As Mr. Binney was earnest and constant in his devotion to any cause the success of which he had at heart, so he was enthusiastic in his attachment to those whom he honored with his friendship. This is a trait of his character which I think is little understood. Few suspected what a fount of generous affection and tenderness lay hid- den under that quiet and undemonstrative exterior. When he once trusted a man, he seemed to give himself up wholly to him. The only instances which I can recall, in which his usually calm judgment was disturbed, arose from this intense desire to serve his friends. On one occasion I had urged him to support for an important position a gentleman in whose success I felt a deep interest. After listen- ing patiently to what I had tosay, he suddenly exclaimed: ‘‘Do not press me, do you know that Dr. (the opposing candidate), once saved my life??? Then again, he was led to feel that one of his friends Sullé.] 380 [May 6, 1870. had done some service to the country by his writings at a critical period of the war. From that hour his heart warmed towards that friend: he gave him his fullest confidence, he spoke in the most un- measured terms of the value of his services, and whatever influence he could command, was thenceforth exerted to secure for him posts of trust and honor. And this is the man, with a heart as simple as a child’s, and as tender as a woman’s, ae was thought cold ET for- mal by anaes who did not know him. Mr. Binney never fully recovered from the effects of an illness through which he passed about ten years ago. Within a few weeks of his death, a disease of the heart was rapidly developed, and he was snatched away from his family and friends with startling sud- deness, on the third of February, 1870. He left a widow, the daughter of the late William Johnson, Esquire, of New York, the eminent Reporter, and the muimiase friend of Chancellor Kent, and seven children. His life seems to me to have been in its Se beauty almost an ideal one. It was nurtured and strengthened by the two great principles out of which all true excellence springs, Trust in God, and Devotion to Duty : “Thus it flowed From its mysterious urn a sacred stream, In whose calm depths the beautiful and pure Alone are mirror’d ; which, though shapes of ill May hover round its surface, glides in light, And takes no shadow from them.”’ OBSERVATIONS ON THE FISHES OF THE TERTIARY SHALES OF GREEN RIVER, WYOMING TERRITORY. By Pror. E. D. Cope. Physoclysti. ASINEOPS, Cope, gen. nov. FAM. SQUAMIPENNES. Branchiostegal radii, seven; ventral radii I. 6—7. Opercular and other cranial bones unarmed; scales cycloid. Spinous and cartilaginous dorsal fins continuous; caudal rounded; anal with two spines. Lateral line distinct, not interrupted. Operculum with regularly convex posterior border. Teeth coarsely villiform, without canines. Both spinous and soft portions of dorsal and anal fins moderately scaly. This well marked genus is established on the remains of fifteen indi- viduals, in various states of preservation, so that the characters undis- tinguishable in one, can be discovered in another. Thus the lateral line is preserved in one only, and the teeth in another. Janone can I be entirely sure that I see the vomer. The scales are preserved in many specimens, and I cannot find a ctenoid margin in any, nor any radiating sculpture, but delicate concentric ridges continued round the central point proximally, distally forming parabolic Cope.] 381 [May 6, 1870. curves, the less median not completed but interrupted by the margin of the scale. Near the margin all the ridges become gently zig-zagged. There is no depression between the two portions of the dorsal fin, though the cartilagius portion is the more elevated. Laid backwards, the latter is in line with the extremity of the anal, and both extend beyond the basis of the caudal. The close affinities of this genus are difficult to determine with entire satisfaction. In its smooth cranial bones and united dorsals it is like the genera Apsilus Cuv. Val. of the Atlantic, and Micropterus Lac. of the fresh waters of North America. Its numerous ventral radii, agreeing with those of the Berycide (or Agassiz’ section Holocentri in Poiss. Fossiles) separate it entirely from the above genera. The absence of the emarigina- tion of the operculum, also distinguishes it from Micropterus. Its affini- ties are, however, entirely remote from the Berycide. The genus to which it stands in nearest relationship, is Pygzeus, of Agassiz, which he refers to the Cheetodontide, and which, if so referred, will intervene between the typical forms of the family, and the aberrant Toxotes. The only char- acter by which I distinguish it from Pygeus, is the presence of one or two additional ventral radii, the number in the latter genus being I. 5. Nine species of that genus are described in the Poissons Fossiles all from Monte Bolca, and the existence of the present near ally, suggests a deter- mination of the age of the Green River beds, which the other species do not furnish. This would be upper Eocene. ASINEOPS SQUAMIFRONS, Cope, sp. nov. General form is sub-oblong, the greatest depth just behind the head, and contained two and a half times in the length exclusive of caudal fin. Radii D. VIII, 14; A. II, 9; C. 14; V.I, 7; P. 211 218. Scales 5—?30—10, vertical line counted a little behind the ventral fins. The line of the ex- tremities of the second dorsal and anal fins, marks the basal third of the caudal fin. The dorsal spines are sub-cylindric, slightly curved, and of nearly equal length; the length equals the depth of the body at the middle of the second dorsal fin. The external series of villiform teeth are stout of their kind, conic, and a little incurved. I cannot see the pharyngeal bones or teeth. The number of vertebre which extends between the caudal fin and the superior margin of the operculum, where one or more are concealed, is twenty-five, of which fifteen are of the caudal portion (in two I can only count fourteen). The mouth is directed obliquely downwards and is rather large; the mandible, when closed, does not project beyond the premaxillary border. The maxillary, where preserved, is narrow distally, and does not project beyond the posterior line of the orbit. The latter is rather small, and though not well defined in any specimen, is not more than one-eighth the length of the head, and 1.5 to, 1.75 times inside of muzzle. The margins of all the opercular bones are entire and smooth. The interoperculum is narrow, and lies obliquely upwards, narrowing the operculum. The A. P. S.—VOL. XI.—20E Cope.] 382 [May 6, greatest width of the latter is more than two-thirds its depth. The pelvic supports of the ventral fins are slender, and about half the length of the fin. The pectoral fins are not elongate. The scales extend over the top of the head to or beyond the orbits. They also extend out on the ramus of the under jaw. Those of the fins are quite small; they extend to a considerable distance on the unpaired and on the caudal fins. Total length of the largest specimen................ 0.19 Do. No. 2, smaller example (with caudal)............ 0.12 eng throtneadtoted Onesie neeaien eae terete ec 0.044 Depth of do. posteriorly about...................... 0.036 Length base spinous dorsal......................-.-- 0.0265 OG WOSTETLOL Me sacral rats eres yesh chaneveruaceerste ek: 0.017 a OpPercullu meyer tasers irre cree kolvrene rate caro 0.0125 2) maxillary jboneraboutir..1-)-tmi or aides trarr 0.0145 Depth No. 3, at base 1st dorsal.................-..-- 0.045 eg SO ie hee amas Stab yao cuams nce cect ce 0.0325 Length basis anal=basis caudal..................---. 0.0162 6 CHO M NI R ome ONT One eae Oe OO CEES 0.0384 Tertiary strata of Green River, Wyoming; Dr. F. V. Hayden, Coll. Mus. Smithsonian. ‘ CLUPEA HUMILIS, Leidy. Proc. Acad. Nat’l Sciences, 1856, 256. Vertebrie 34. Depth 23 to 22 lines in length exclus caudal fin (23 times, Leidy). Seales large; 1. transverse 11-12. A very abundant species in the shales. CLUPEA PUSILLA, Cope. Greatest depth contained four times in the total length, or 3.5 times to basis of caudal fin. Length of head 3.2 to basis caudal;—this measure- ment may require revision, as the end of the muzzle is slightly injured. Orbit large, contained twice in length of head behind it. Middle of dorsal near the middle of length, and about over the origins of the ventrals. D. II. 11, V. 7%. Pectorals extending half way to ventrals. Vertebree 29-380, dorsals 19-80. Ventral keeled ribs18. Anal fin lost. Caudal peduncle slen- der, caudal fin deeply furcate. Length M. 044; greatest depth M. 011. The present species is about half the size of the last, and of consider- ably less proportionate depth. CYPRINODON LEVATUS, Cope. Anterior margin anal fin commencing a little behind opposite the pos- terior margin of the dorsal. Vertebre 10. 14. I. Radii D. 8, A. II. 8, V. 8. Caudal fin deeply furcate; first anal ray strong. General form elongate, the greatest depth contained three times in the length between the scapular arch and the basis of the caudal fin. Scales preserved, small; seven longitudinal series above, and seven below the vertebral column, probably two rows concealed by it. The caudal peduncle is rather contracted for the genus, Length from scapular arch to extrem- ity of caudal M. 0335; depth at origin dorsal fin M. 008. 1870. } 383 [Cope. There are portions of five individuals on the slab of slate, but none pre- sent a clear cranium. This slab represents that portion of the stratum which is highly carbonaceous, portions of it thrown into the fire burn freely. Dr. Hayden, who has brought numerous specimens from this locality, informs me that the laminz exhibit great numbers of these little fishes. No doubt the carbonaceous character of the shales is due to the decomposition of their bodies. The character of the species, as well as nature of the deposit, and mode of preservation, remind one strongly of the Cyprinodon meyeri, of Agassiz, from the neighborhood of Frankfort a. M. That species differs especially in presenting 18 Anal radii. Some of the specimens above described were obtained and preserved for scientific study, by David B. Collier, formally United States District At- torney for the Territory of Wyoming. From a Tertiary deposit on the upper waters of Green River, Wyoming Territory, from a laminated calcareous rock similar in color and appear- ance to the clay beds of Mount Lebanon and Mount Bolea. The first in- dication of the existence of this deposit was brought by Dr. Jno. Evans, who obtained from it a Clupeoid, which was described by Dr. Leidy, as Clupea humilis (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1856, p. 256). One of the blocks contains the remains of two small shoals of the fry, probably of Clupea humilis, which were caught suddenly by a slide or fall of calea- reous mud, and entombed for the observation of future students. They must have been taken unwares, since they lie with their heads all in one direction as they swam in close bodies. One or two may have had a mo- ment’s warning of the catastrophe, as they have turned a little aside, but they are the exceptions. The fry are from one-half to three-quarters of an inch long and upwards. True herring, or those with teeth, are chiefly marine, but they run into fresh waters and deposit their spawn in the Spring of the year, and then return to salt waters. The young run down to the sea in Autumn and remain there till old enough to spawn. The size of the fry of the Rocky Mountain herring indicates that they had not long left the spawning ground, while the abundance of adults suggests they were not far from salt water, their native element. To believe, then, that the locality from which the specimens were taken was neither far from fresh, nor far from salt waters, is reasonable; and this points to a tide, or brackish inlet or river. Lastly, the species of Cyprinodon inhabit also, tide and brackish waters. Most of the species of the family, as well as of the genus, are in- habitants of fresh water; but they generally, especially the Cyprinodons proper, prefer still and muddy localities, and often occur in water really salt. This habitat distinguishes them especially from Cyprinidae (Min- nows and Suckers) and Pike. The material which composes the shales indicates quiet water, and not such as is usually selected by herring for spawning in; while the abund- ance of adult Clupeas indicate the proximity of salt water. This is far from a satisfactory demonstration of the nature of the water which deposited this mass of shales, but is the best that can be obtained with such a meagre representation of species. Cope.] 384 [May 6, 1870. As to geological age, the indications are rather more satisfactory. The genus Clupea ranges from the upper Eocene upwards, being abundant in the slates of Lebanon and Monta Bolca, while Cyprinodon has been found in neither, but first appears in the Middle or Lower Miocene in Europe. The Asineops resemble very closely, and I believe essentially, the Pygeaus of Agassiz, of Eocene age, from Monta Bolca. The peculiarities pre- sented by the genus found by Dr. Hayden, are of such small significance as to lead me to doubt the beds in question being of later than Eocene age; though the evidence rests chiefly on this single, new and peculiar genus. The position of these fishes, 7000 feet above the level of the sea, fur- nishes another illustration of the extent of elevations of regions once con- nected with the ocean, and the comparatively late period of Geologic time at which, in this case, this elevation took place. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTICE OF A NEW CHIMRID FROM NEW JERSEY. LEPTOMYLUS COOKII, Cope. Indicated by a right inferior maxillary bone, of one-fourth the size of that indicating the Leptomylus densus. In general form the ramus re- sembles that of Ischyodus divaricatus, the posterior portion being curved outwards from the symphyseal. The latter region is much compressed and moderately prolonged, the inner face quite concave ; posteriorly the outer face is also slightly concave. There is a single external crest, which is obtuse, and descends gradually to the plane of the beak, and presents no dentinal area. A single small oval area represents the internal, so large in Ischyodus. It lies along the inner margin. This margin is much thickened, and rolled over inwards ; symphyseal face very narrow. The extremity of the beak is broken away, and the section shows that there is no inferior plate-like column, which produces the terminal area in most species of Ischyodus, but a round column, which issues on the upper sur- face of the beak, behind the apex. Lines Depth at posterior margin outer crest................- 25.4 ee ‘“* anterior base a OG zic. ate datccirstiatc) Ransuae eee 15. ae ‘ end terminal column..............-. BE ARS ns 6.8 Width ofsinner area coo sath Seicatede clos Aenea 2. TET RE ie apa thts PEALE ae SC er chet NM RRS Pigs Sicha tt a 10.6 “ eoomiddlecoss ealeanisrss cio s sient es silensces poe erensnetts ‘54 The apical dentinal column of this species distinguishes it from the L. densus, Cope, where no such column exists. It may be noted that at the posterior fractured section of the jaw, the apical column is seen, while in- ternal dental area is not, the latter occupying only a pocket, not a column. This species approximates Ischyodus solidulus in the apical column, which has the same form in both. The two dentinal faces the latter pos- sesses, are those of true Ischyodus. From the upper marl bed of the Cretaceous of New Jersey, from near Mt. Holly. Dedicated to Prof. Geo. H. Cook, under whose auspices the pale- ontological interests of the State survey have been extended. Winchell. ] 389 [May 6, 1870. Stated Meeting, May 20, 1870. Present, ten members. Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. A letter accepting membership was received from Maj. R. HK. Williamson, dated San Francisco, May 10th, 1870. A letter respecting the Byington MSS. was received from Prof. Jos. Henry, Sec’y Smithsonian Institute, Washington, D. C., May 16th. Donations for the Library were received from the Academies at Turin, Berlin and Boston; the Annales des Mines, and Nature; the R. Astronomical Society: Essex Institute; Bos- ton Pubhe Library; Silliman’s Journal; American Museum of Natural History in New York, and Dr. Wm. Dunean, of Savannah. The death of Dr. Jas. Y. Simpson, of Edinburgh, was an- nounced by the Secretary. ON THE GEOLOGICAL AGE AND EQUIVALENTS OF THE MARSHALL GROUP. By Pror. A. WINCHELL, DIRECTOR OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF MICHIGAN.. Part II.!12 IV. PReEsENT STATE OF OUR PALEONTOLOGICAL KNOWLEDGE. I come now to the most important and most interesting branch of this investigation. In order that others may be placed in full possession of all 112 For Part I of this paper, see Proceedings American Philosophical Society, vol xi-, p, 57 (March 5,1869). Both Parts of the paper were presented to the Chicago meeting of the American Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science, August 11, 1868. It was not offered for publication in the Proceedings in consequence of its length. It was reported, however, in the Chicago news- papers, and the chief points were briefly-stated in the American Naturalist for October, 1868, p- 445. Part I. was published in these ‘‘ Proceedings” without alteration; and Part IT., as here presented, is unchanged, except in the omission of some detailed lists of fossils, and in the addition of a few remarks based on late discoveries in Tennessee and Pennsylvania, and which have been made public in these Proceedings, vol. xi., p. 245, etc. Winchell. ] 386 [May 6, the data upon which my forthcoming conclusions are to rest, I introduce here a complete list of the fossils of the Marshall Group, and its supposed equivalents in other States. As introductory to this, however, and as tending to exclude from consideration the series of shales which I have designated the Huron group, I offer a few remarks upon the paleontology of these strata as far as investigated. The following is a complete catalogue of the fossils thus far deter- mined : Orthoceras Barquianum. Win. Rhynchonella Huronensis, Win. Spirifera subattenuata, Hall. Orthis Vanuxemi, Hall. ve medialis, Hall. ‘- erenistria ? Phil. a Huronensis, Win. ‘© Towensis ? Hall. es pharovicina, Win. Chonetes setigera ? Hall. us insolita, Win. Cardinia complanata, Win. Retzia polypleura, Win. Leptodomus clavatus, Win. Merista Houghtoni, Win. Solen priscus, Win. Pleurotomaria Huronensis, Win. Orthoceras gracilius, Win. Goniatites Whitei, Win. Four of the foregoing species I have identified, more or less doubtfully, with species from the Hamilton group. These are Sptrifera subattenuata, S. medials, Orthis Vanuxemi, and O. Iowensis. A species very similar to O. Vanuxemi exists, however, in the Waverly series of Ohio, and in strata of the same age in Illinois and Missouri. Chonetes setigera (?) of the list, ranges in New York from the Marcellus shale to the Genesee. Leptodomus clavatus closely resembles a Grammysia, a genus ranging from the Corniferous to the Chemung. The equivalencies of these rocks are not very precisely indicated from the paleontological data. That the formation is newer than the Genesee shale is demonstrated by its observed superposition. The paleontological evidence indicates, at least, that the fauna is older than that of the Marshall group; and this is all that is necessary. If this group of rocks is proven by stratigraphical superposi- tion to be newer than the Genesee, it belongs either to the horizon of the Portage and: Chemung, or to that of the Marshall. If its stratigraphical position, its lithological characters and its fossil remains indicate equally that it is not to be embraced in the same group with the Marshall, no alternative remains. The Huron group, above the Black Shale, must cor- respond to the Portage and Chemung, or to some portion of them. The question is now narrowed down to this :—Having discovered a rep- resentative of the Portage and Chemung groups in the Huron shales and their equivalents, in Michigan and Ohio, ought we to unite with these shales the Marshall sandstones and their equivalents, and thus em- brace these also in the zone of the Portage and Chemung ? I have furnished lithological and stratigraphical indications that this ought not to be done. Let us examine the paleontological evidence. 1870. ] B87 {Winchell. CATALOGUE OF THE KNOWN FOSSILS OF THE MARSHALL GROUP AND ITS SUPPOSED EQUIVALENTS IN THE UNITED STATES.'" Zvi]. al jee 1a /Slglea=\ol28 NAMES. References. SIS S/S/6 slisise NAMES SCAT Pa Spirophyton crassum, Hall xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 88 pate i Dictyophyton Newberryi, Hall xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 87 re as Redtieldi, Hall xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 88 is Lepidodendron corrugatum, Daw. Qr. Jour. Geol. Soe. xviii. s Pl. xii., fig. 10. ae sp? a k Sigillaria sp? Proc. A. P. Soc., xii., 260 « Syringodendron gracile, Daw. Qr. Jour. Geol. Soc., xviii. 4 Pl. xii., fig. 12. Lycopodites gracilis, Shum. sp. Mo. Rep. IT., 208, Pl. A,11 oi * Rhachiopteris striata, Daw. Qr. Jour. Geol. Soc. xviii. ; Cyclopteris ? Marshallensis, Win. MS. te al Nullipora obtexta, White Bos. Proe., ix., 33 ie Lophophyllum calceola, W. & W. Bos. Proc., viii., 305 a Zaphrentis elliptica, White Bos. Proce., ix., 31 Bilas v8 aeutus. W. & W. Bos. Proe., viil., 306 ol lig era Ida, Win. Phil. Pr., July, 1865, p. 111 cle! |2| rene Sphenopoterium enorme, M. & W. /|Phil. Pr., Oct., 1860, p. 448 = Conopterium efftusum, Win. Phil. Pr., July 1865, p. 111 a Syringopora Harveyi, White Bos. Proe., ix., 32 ee Alveolites vermicularis, McCoy Brit. Cal. Fos., lst Fase. 69 Mo. Rep. viii., 218 te Favosites divergens, W. &. W. Bos. Proe., viii., 306 “* (2?) maneus, Win. Phil. Pr., a uly, 1865, p.112 x - Leptopora typa, Win. Phil. Pr., Jan., 1863, p. 3 3 Trematopora (2) vesiculosa, Win. Phil. Pr., Jan., 1863, p. 3 * a : eS (?) fragilis, Win. Phil. Pr., Jan., 1863, p. 3 Synbathocrinus Oweni, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 111 * Pentremites Roemeri, Shum. Mo. Rep., II., 186 A x be sp? A ? Onychocrinus exculptus, Ly. & Cas. |Amer. Jour. [2] xxix., 78 * Platycrinus graphicus, Hall Pamph. 11 Nov. 1863 ; xvii Ky. Reg. Rep., 54 * se contritus, Hall POLE cra oue Waiae OHH * my be sp 2 . 4 ( Actinocrinus Indianensis, Ly.& Cas. |Am. Jour.Sci. [2] xxix.,75 ee | et pistilliformis, M. & W. |Phil. Pr., Aug. 1865; Ill. ie Rep., II1., 151 i st Coreyi, Ly. & Cas. Am. Jour. Sei. [2] xxix.,76 3 Be Helice, Hall Pamph.11 Nov.1863 ; xvii. Reg. Rep., 53 te i viminalis, Hall Se aR Ne “64 ef | i Daphne, Hall : ss “ i nO 2 w Ve a sp? s ry apey Bursaecrinus Meekianus, Shum. Mo. Rep., II., 188’ Bs | Cyathocrinus decadactylus, Ly.& Cas |Am. Jour.Sci. [2] xxix.,73 ‘z | ee hexadactylus, Ly. & Cas. a x Se mats Poteriocrinus crineus, Hall Pamph.11 Nov.1863 ; xvii. ' Reg. Rep., 56 to os Pleias, Hall af fe oO eT OY Ze a Corycia, Hall ef ig ns OY us Forbesiocrinus communis, Hall Ke a Sy OC * N.Y ss lobatus, var. tardus, Hall fe “t ne Oo fa) a a Kellogi, Hall 3 ue i SOO * Scaphiocrinus (Poteriocrinus) Age, | all k oe oe e ce 57 * 66 73 Lyriope, Hall be 66 be O58 * ng subearinatus, Hall ie se oe ES ee tt subtortuosus, Hall fe of st co) bd Zeacrinus paternus, Hall se +t ie 6) tH Ts Merope, Hall 13 6c 6c 3 * Lepidechinus rarispinus, Hall xx. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 295 ibe Pa. 13 This Catalogue is little more than a list of references to the original descriptions. There is undoubtedly a large amount of synonymy involved, but extended investigation will be required to eliminate it satisfactorily. The Catalogue, in its present form, will be found useful, it is hoped, to all occupied with researches in rocks of this age. Winchell.] NAMES. 388 References. Fenestella rhombifera, Phil. sp? Lingula membranacea, Win. 6 ce iad Melie, Hall Cuyahoga, Hall ?subspatulata, M. & W. Discina capax, White 66 be 66 Producta arcuata, | be =D. Newberryi, Hall Gallaheri, Win. patellaris, Win. Saffordi, Win. Hall concentvri Hea Hall Cora, @’O Coca romals Swal. crenulata, Shum. curtirostra, Win. dolorosa, Win. duplicostata, Win. gracilis, Win. leevicostata, White minuta, Shum. morbilliana, Win. Murchisoniana, de Kon. Newberryi, Hall ?= P. semireticulata, Flem. parvula, Win. pyxidata, Hall semireticulata, (Flem.) de Kon. ‘Shumardiana, Hall subaculeata, Murch. Strophalosia ? nummularis, Win. Chonetes Fischeri, Nor. & be 66 66 “ce se oe 66 oe 66 Prat. Fenieulala, White Ilinoisensis, Worthen = C Logani, Hall, (not Nor. & Prat.) Logani, Nor. & Prat. mesoloba, Nor. & Prat. Michiganensis, Stevens multicosta, Win. ornata, Shum. pulchell la, Win. Shumardiana, de Kon. Strophomena rhomboidalis, Wahl. ? Strophodonta arctostriata, Hall Hemipronites pre Hall, sp inflatus, W. & Ww lens, White oe bs Orthis flava, Win. Michelini, L’ Evéillé, sp. Missouriensis, Swal. occasus, Hall resupinata, Phil. subelliptica, W. & W. Swallovi, ? Hall Thiemei, White ? “ Vanuxemi, Hall Spirifera biplicata, Hall camerata, Morton Carteri, Hall = 8. Vernonensis, Swal. centronota, Win. Cooperensis, Swal. 6b 66 4c ? umbraculum, (V. B.) Mo. Rep., 218 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.3) xvi. Rep. N. BY Reg., 24 Mil. Rep. IL, 437 Bos. lou ix., 30, (1862) xvi. Rep. N. Y. Reg,, 30, (1863. ) Phil. _Pr. July, 1865, p. 112 Jan., 1863, p. 4 Tenn Rep. , 1869, p. 443; { Proc. A. Soc. xii. ,248 \lowa Rep., 518 x. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 180 |Pal. Voy. en Amer.mer.55 St. Louis Trans., I., 640 Mo. Rep., 218 Phil. Proc. July,1865,p.114 be oe be 114 rele 112 be oe 66 oe Bos. Jour., vii., 230 Mo. Rep., 218 Phil. Proc., July 1865,p.113 } Genus Prod. Pl. Xvi., 3 Mo. Rep., 218 x. Rep. N. XG Reg., 180 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 4 Iowa Rep. Part ITI. p. 498 Monogr. Gen. Prod., P33 Iowa Rep. Part II. p. 498 Bull Geol. Soe., xi., 255 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 4 Phil. Jour., III., 25 Bos. Proce., ‘ix., 29 St. Louis Trans., L., 571 Iowa Rep. Part II., p. 598 Phil. Jour., III., 30, Pl. IL, fig. 12 Phil. Jour., IIL. 5 37 Am. Jour.Sci. [2] xxv. 262 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.5 Mo. Rep., II., 202 Phil. Proe. , Sept. 1862, 410 Monogr. Ire. part. p. 192 Act. Soe. Upsal., ITI, 65 N.Y. Rep. [Vth Dist. +, 266 Towa Geol. Rep., I., 490 Bos. Proe., viii., "993 Bos. Proe., ix., 28 Anim. Foss., 399 Phil. Proe.,J uly 1865, p.117 Mem. Geol. Soe., pene St. Louis Trans., Be 530 xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg. a 111 Pal. Foss., Cornwall, 67 Bos. Proc., viii., 292 Iowa Rep. Part I., 597 Bos. Jour., vii., 231 x. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 135 Iowa Rep., 519 Am.Jour. Sei. [1]xxix.150 x. Rep. N. Y. Reg.170(1858) Phil. Proc., July mee D. 118 St. Louis Trans. le Ill. Rep., ae nts * Ok *OK OK KOK OK Ok OKO ok * Ill. Towa. Mo. Ind. * OK ROK Ok ok ok Ok * * [May 6, * %* | Tenn Tenn Pa. Tenn Pa. 389 1870.] [Winchell. (aliaee AA NAMES. References. 5 ic is\5 =| 2 26s eS] io Spiritera Cooperensis, Swal. i == S8. semiplicatus, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 111 x Tee sos cuspidata, Sow. (not Hall) |Min. Conch., III., 42 se extenuata, Hall Towa Rep., 520 ‘ae se ‘ Grimesi, Hall ‘Iowa Rep., 604 * ee hirta, W. & W. ‘Bos. Proc.., viii., 293 es x Tenn re latior, Swal. St. Louis Trans., II., 86 i te lineata, Phil. Geol. Yorks., I1., 219 = e Marionensis, Shum. Mo. Rep., I1., 203 * ?= 8S. Vernonensis, Swal. ; F sf Missouriensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I,, 643 | hee mucronata, Con. Ann. Rep. N.Y. 1841, p.54 x Hall: N.Y.Rep.1Vth Dist! = Osagensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 641 a ? = S. Carteri, Hall Veale oe peculiaris, Shum. Mo. Rep., I., 202 | Sil eihi BS Sillana, Win. Phil. Proc. , July 1865,p.119 | FY 215 striata, Sow. Min. Conch., II., 125 I. Fa es subrotundata, Hall Towa Rep. Part IL., 521 i ts te Taneyensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 645 = as texta, Hall x. Rep. N.Y. Reg., 169 | |? “ Waverlyensis, Win. Proce. A. P. Soe., xii., 251 eo n “ (Cyrtia) Hannibalensis, Swal. |St. Louis Trans., I., 648 | Cyrtia acutirostris, Shum. ae Rep., I1., 204 e * 5 sp? be Syringothyris typa, Win. Phil. Proe., Jan.1863, p. 7 ey Qi) eo Pa. ut Halli, Win. Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863, p.8| | * sales CG capax, Hall, sp. Towa Rep. Part IT., 520 we Spiriferina binacuta, Win. Phil. Proce., July 1865, p.120 a oe Clarkesvillensis, Win. Phil. Proc.,J uly 1855, p.119} * sf solidirostris, White Bos. Jour., vii., 232 ze te Spirigera biloba, Win. Phil. Proc. July 1855,p.119 be x corpulenta, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 6 it Ue crassicardinalis, Swal. Bos. Jour., vii., 229 Ld ce Hannibalensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 649 a BW ice i Missouriensis, Win. Phil. Proc.,J uly 1865, p.117 2 i of Ohiensis, Win. i oe Tks ae G8 Prouti, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 649 eRe Nucleospira Barrisi, White Bos. Jour., vii., 227 i Retzia Osagensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 653 te ‘* (2) Popeana, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 654 jell “* - sexplicata, W. & W. Bos. Proc.. viii., 294 % ** (Acambona?) altirostris, White |Bos. Proc., ix., 28 Atrypa sp? Mo. Rep., 218 ; iy Amboceelia sp? e oe (Spirifera?) minuta, White |Bos. Proc., ix., 26 oe = Pentamerus Salinensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 652 * é lenticularis, W. & W. Bos. Proe., viii., 295 ty Rhynchonella Barquensis, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep.1862, p.408 f cameritera, Win. en s He AOS a caput-testudinis, White |Bos. Proc., ix., 23 i 6 Cooperensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep., II., 204 alle ss gregaria. Shum. 53 a heteropsis, Win. Phil. Proc.,.July 1865,p.121 * * “ Hubbardi, Win. es Sep. 1862, p. 407) * | *| * Marshallensis, Win, a 408) | *|* ef Missouriensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep,, II.. 204; Tl. Rep., 11.153 ; Ib., IIT. 450 # |e) % | % |e fe obscuroplicata, Shum. |Mo. Rep., 218 * ih occidentalis, Shum. we 218 * a opposita, W. & W. Bos. Proc., viii., 294 oe tf persinuata, Win. Phil. Proc., July 1865,p.121 es “f pustulosa, White Bos. Jour., vii., 226 * us ie Sageriana, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1862,p.407) | *| * Tenn £¢ subcireularis, Win. *S oe ** 408 * os ? tetraptyx, Win. re July 1865, 120 *, oS unica, Win. e ef lo, a ee Whitei, Win. se Sep. 1862, 407) | * “* (Retzia?) micropleura, Win. te July 1865, 122 * “ (Eatonia) obsolescens, Hall |xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 111 * Centronella Alleji, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865,p.123 s Sh oo ee Flora, Win. Pr. Am. Phil. Soe., xii.,254! oy A. P. §,—VOL. XI.—21E Winchell.] 390 NAMES. References. Centronella Julia, Win. Terebratula Burlingtonensis, White ie fusiformis, Murch. & VY. Ostrea patercula, Win. Pterinea cardinata, Win. tf erenistriata, Win. =Cardiopsis crenistriata, Win spinalata, Win. strigosa, W. & W. % undulata, M. & W. Whitei. Win. AV iculopecten Caroli, Win. circulus, Shum., sp. duplicatus, Hall gradocostatus, White Newarkensis, Win. W. bb oe oe 9 bs nodocostatus, W.& occidentalis, Win. tenuicostatus, Win. Pernopecten limeeformis, Win. = Aviculopecten limeformis, W. & W. | limatus, Win. Shumardanus, Win. st ? (Amusium) Cooper ensis, um. Microdon reservatus. Hall Posidonomya ambigua, Win. mesambonata, Win. te Romingeri, Win. + Whiteana, Win. Dexiobia Whitei, Win. =Cardiomor rpha ovata, Hall +C. parvirostris, White Halli, Win. Pinna (?) Marshallensis,. Win. Mytilus elongatus, Shum “ fibristriatus, W. & W. = Mytilarca fibristriata, Hall occidentalis, W. & W. = Mytilarca occidentalis, Hall Whitfieldanus, Win. = Mytilarca fibr istriata, Hall Myalina imbricaria, Win. at Iowensis, Win. Michiganensis, Win. pterinizformis, Win. rara,!!4* Win. =M. aviculoides, Win. Orthonota phaselia, Win. at rectidorsalis, Win. ‘: ventricosa, W. & W. Sanguinolites amygdalinus, Win. oe oe be = Modiomorpha (?)amygdalina, Hall /Kolus, Hall borealis, Win. concentrica, Win. =Cardinia concentrica, Win. ne eylindricus, Win. we ? flavius, Hall ee Towensis, Win. oo ? jejunus, Win. ce Marshallensis Win. ie naiadiformis, Win. strigatus, Win. sulciferus, Win. unioniformis, Win. tt valyulus, Hall «| Mich. N. |Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1862,p.405 Bos. Jour., vii., 228 \Geol. Russ., p. 65 Phil. Proc. , July 1865, p.124| Jini Proce. Sep. 1862,p.412 Jt uly 1865, p. 124) Sep. 1862, p. 417 J uly 1865, p. 124) Bos. Proce., Ill. Rep.. iL, 456 Phil. _Proce., Jan. 1863 Mo. Rep., 1., 206 INEDYS Rep., 264 ‘Bos. Proe., ix., 31 Proc. A. P. Soc. Jan. 1870,) xii., 255) Bos. Proc., viii., 296 | Phil. Proe., J an. 1863, De 5 2 July 1865, p.126} ‘Bos. Proce., Vili, 295 Phil. Pr oc. July 1865 Oe | Til. Rep., III, 453) Mo. Rep., IT., 206 Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.33 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.10 ee Sep. 1862 , D- an 74 eH Jan. 1863, p. 11 Towa Rep., part 2, p. 522 Bos. Proce., ix., p. 31 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.11 “ Juiy 1865, p. 126 Mo. Rep., 218 Bos. Proce., viii., 296 Prelim. Notice ;part2, p.24 Bos. Proc., viil., 297 Prelim.N otice, part 2,p.24 Phil. Proc. ,Sep. 1862, p.413 Prelim. Notice,part 2,p. 24 Phil. Proe., Sep. 1862,p.412 “6 July 1865, p. 127 Sep. 1862, p. 411 oe ce p. 9 “e eo oe 66 oe Proc. A.P. Soc. (hoe loco) Phil. Proc.Sep. 1862, p. 412 il Jan. 1863, p. 12 Sep. 1862, p. 412 Bos. Proce., viil., 297 Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 13 “ce E retin Notice Dae Lae Phil. Proe.,Sep. 1862, p.415 oH July 1865, p. 128 oe Sep. 1862, p. 413 Jan. 1863, p. 13 Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.47 Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863, p. i ce Sep. 1862, p. AB Proc. A. P. Soe. , Xii., 255 Phil. Proc., July 1865 5, )-127 ts Jan. 1863, p. 14 SG Sep. 1862, p. 414 Pralmeioanen 2,p.46 oe 412) * * | Mich, S. Ed * Ti. Towa. * ak ok 9k ok ARK ais tk [May 6, A yi $28 sien NO ra % *IN. Y % * * 14 The original name (J, aviculoides) is preoccupied by Meek & Hayden, for a Permian species. 391 1870.] (Winchell, A tee eile lige] S _ 5 ge AMES fer , S\Srel\S Slela'sa NAMES. References Ze65 aie a5s Sanguinolites (Cypricar dia ?) Chou- 5 teauensis,Swal.sp. |St. Louis Trans., I., 96 li eS ‘“ ryigida,W.&W.sp. |Bos. Proc., viii., 300 * w jes Se rhombea, Hall |N. Y. Rep., p. 291 N. Y. Oe * securis, Win. ‘Proc. A. P. Soe., xii., 255 * re (Cypricardia) ventricosa, Hall. sp. |xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 110 Ed lle Ale Allorisma Hannibalensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep. I1., 206 a? PIN ONG = Gramnysia Hannibalensis, Hall Preiim. Notice, pt. 2, p. 62 Alli b Edmondia equimarginalis, Win. Phil. Proc. Sep. 1862, p.413 cll ASG WG wy binumbonata, Win. th fie 414) 1*| | les wv Burlingtonensis, W.& W. |Bos. Proc., viil., 301 % | : ss contracta, Win. | Phil. Proc.,July 1865,p.110 Weal TEN WM = Cypricar dia contr acta, Hall N.Y. Rep. 1Vth Dist. p.292 =Hdinondia? bicar inatd, Win Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, 2D 18 =Sanguinolites rigida, Hall |Prelim. Notice, part 2 2, p. 44, (1870) , ae elliptica, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.13 Zn ie Marionensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 654 Lene be nitida, Win. ‘Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.12 es “ nuptialis, Win. i ie 12 Vie te strigillata, Win. uae? = 12 a Modiomorpha hyalea, Hall Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.79 % Car diomor pha Julia, Win. Phil. Proe.,Sep. 1862,p.416 i modiolaris, Win. fe s 416} |\* fe sulcata, de Kon. Anim. Foss., 109 ig ee triangularis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 655 Wee uC trigonalis, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863. p.15 i B= O! rhomboidea, Hall \lowa Rep., part 2, p. 523 Pholadella Newberryi, Hall Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.65 ts Area arguta, de Kon. Anim. Foss., p. 116 % ‘© Missouriensis, Shum. Mo. Rep., 218 aie? ‘* “modesta, Win. |Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863, p.15 a Pike ee sp? \Mo. Rep., 218 ee Macrodon cochlearis, Win. Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863, p.16 < ovatus, Hall ‘Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.15 “2 ‘© parvus, W. & W. Bos. Proe., viii., 299 wy és Ctenodonta bellaluta, Win. Phil. Proc. ai uly 1865,p.128 Biislo MY =Nucula bellatula Hall N.Y. Rep. 1Vth Dist. sp. 196 id hians, Win. Phil. Proc. July 1865. »p-128 ¥ =Nucula hians, Hall xili. Rep. N.Y. Reg.,p. 110 i He Houghtoni, Win. Phil. Proc.,J uly 1865,p.128 a = Nucula Houghtoni, Stev. |Am.Jour.Sci. [2] xxv.,262 ie Hubbardi, Win. |Phil. Proe.Sep. 1862,p.417 ; July 1865, p. 128] | *|* ?=Nuculites sulcatina, Con. |Phil. Jour., viii., p. 250 es Iowensis, Win. Phil. Proc. J uly 1865p. 128) |% 3 =Nucula Towensis, W.& W.| ( Bos. Proc., viii., 298; 2 Wry. Phil. Proc., Sept. : 1862, p. 418 ee microdonta, Win. ‘Phil. Proc. oat 1863p. 16 zs ee sectoralis, Win. Sep. 1862, p. 418] * | * | * 2= Nuculitesmactroides,Con Phil. Jour., vii., p. 249 se Stella, Win. 'Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.419) * | * | * Nuculana (Leda) bellistriata, Ste- |Am.Jour.Sci. [2] xxv.,261 vens, sp.| WIN. Phil. Proc., Sep. 1862, p. 419) |* Tenn te * Barrisi. W. & W., sp. Bos. Proc., viii., 298 % oe =Paleaneilo Barrisi, Hall | Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.11 ** (Leda) dens-mammillata, ! Stevens, sp. |Am.Jour.Sci. [2] xxv.,261 ws ab ** “nuculeformis, Ste- vens, sp. se ee | PSI * se ‘* pandorzformis, Ste- vens, sp. ss ee OSI 2 ts *« saccata, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.16 ws Paleaneilo attenuata, Hall Prelim. Notice,part 2,p.12 * Conocardium bovipedale, Win. Phil. Proc., Sep. 1862,p.419) | * et Napoleonense, Win. ce a 419 @ te yulchellum, W. & W. |Bos. Proc., viii., 299 te es ie omingeri, Win. Ms. os Isocardia ? Jenne, Win. |Phil. Proe., Jan. 1863,p.17 ee 392 Winchell.] [May 6 Zlw| . ti Hn : Allele lslolee NAMES. References. So S/S\E\R/5ES ES | SIS |A IT 16 = Oz, z= Bel | Cardiopsis jejuna, Win. Phil. Proce. Sep. 1862,p. ae * ei ee megambonata, Win, Se 417 ze radiata, M.& W. oe Oct. 1860: Tl. Plies Rep., II., 157 = Megambonia Lyoni, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. eg. D. 110 5 Cypricar della quadrata, W. & W. Bos. Proc., viii., 300 Barquensis, Win. MSS 2 Cardinia occidentalis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 655 2 Sanguinolaria leptogaster, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863,p.18 | , rostrata, Win. u July 18€5, p.129 s He sectoralis, Win. st Sep. 1862p. 422) | 2 a septentiionalis, Win. ie ee 421) |~ a similis, Win. Hs COM NI Anatina Leda, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg. p.110 : 5 Solen Missouriensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., 1., 655 salle : * quadrangulars, Win. Eee: 1862,p.422| | = Tenn i ee ee Win. a ‘ 422) | * =) neni Conularia Byblis, White Bos. Proce., 22 = ee multicostata, M. & W. Phil. Proc. ee 1865,p.252 Bi ~ Newberryi, Win. Jan. 1865, p. 130 Bi se Whitei, M. & W. a Dee. 1865, p.263 eA oe spe Mo. Rep., 218 Bellerophon arquensis, Win. Phil. ieee Sep. 1862, 427 Bs |) bilabiatus, W. & W. Bos. Proc. “3 Vill, , 304 a cyrtolites, Hall xiii. Rep.N.Y. Reg., 107: Win. Phil. Proce. Sep. 1862) ||. |e |x = p. 426; I. Rep. I., 160 o ts galericulatus, Win. Phil. Proce. soe. 1862 D. 426) |. a oe lineolatus, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., NO Is a Michiganensis, Win. Phil. Proc. Sep. 1862,p. Aiea les a nautiloides. Win. 427 j cS panneus, Whito Bos. Proc., ix., 21 x 06 perelegans, W. & W. ag vili., 304 i * ‘ rugosisculis, Win. Phil. Proe.,fep. 1862 »p-425 5 ff scriptiferus, White Bos. Proce. J a0 6 vinewlatus, W. & W. a 304 a bi ss Whittleseyi, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865, p.130 j Porcellia crassinoda, W. & W. Bos. Proce., vili., 303 % re nodosa, Hall Iowa Rep. Sup. to Vol. I,p. i 4:1). Rep. III., 458 ay 66 obliquinoda, White ‘Bos. Proc., vat * at rectinoda, Win. Phil. Proce. aa Ree p.18 ey Pugiuneulus? (Theca) acwleatus,Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. RB , 107 * te Dentalium grandzvum, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863. ,p.18 % ?) Barquense, Win. on Sep. 1862, p. 425 Metoptoma undata, Win. Ora 5 uly 1865, p. 131 % Platycer as eequilater ale, Hall Iowa Rep., Supp. to bivolve, W. & W. Bos. Proe., viii., 302 * a ne corniforme, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863, p.18 " ee haliotoides, M. & W. ee 1866, p. 264; Dl. Rep., TIl., 458 3 ne Herzeri, Win. Proc. A.P.S0c.,Jan., isto, ip p. 256 ; or paralium, W. & W. \Bos. Proe., vili., 302 us Aes ee vomerium, Win. ‘Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.19 * % ad (Orthonychia) subplicatum, 1866, p. 265; U1. M. & W. Rep., TIL, 457 x, Pleurotomaria exieta, Win. sf Sep. 1862, Dp. 424) | * Hickmanensis, Win. |Proc.A. P. Soc.,xii.p. 257 Tenn i humilis, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1£62,p.424| | * ca Mississippiensis, W.&W. | Bos. Proc., viii. 302) * Ob (2). mitigata, Hall xiii. Rep N. Y. Ree., 108 ‘a “ quince uesulcata, Win. Phil. Proc. .July 1865 ent 131 si cg rota, Win. us Jan. 1863, p. 19) |. * Of Stella, Win. sf Sep. 1862, p. 424) |* ; o tectoria, Win. 06 Jan. 1863, p. 19 x ve vadosa, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg., 108 Win. Phil. Proc., Sep. L 1862, p. 423) | *|*|* ed Whitei, Win. Phil. Proce. Sep. 1862,p.428 * Murchisonia (Pleurotomari ia ?) limi- taris, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg. p.108) = 393 1870.] (Winchell. 4] 5] | fa| (88 NAMES References. SSB ERE Es ‘ gs = O|F SIF OB | * Murchisonia neglecta, Win. | Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p. 20 A ms prolixa, W. & W. \Bos. Proe., vili., p. 303 4 a quadricineta, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. "1863, p. a % A ut (2) Shumardiana, Win. Pa ig sp? Proc. A. P. Soe., xii, 280 al ling ye Straparollus Ammon, W. & W. ‘Bos. Proce., viil., 301 oe sis depressus, Hall,sp. |N. Y. Rep. [Vth Dist., | p. (not H#. depressus, Sby. )) 291 ma es Barrisi, Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p.20 a ue cyclostomus, Hall, sp. Iowa Rep., Part 2, p. 516 ty lens, Hall, sp. xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg. 109;| alle “ Ti). Rep., II., 159 alee os macromphalus, Win. | Phil. Proce Jal. 1863, p.20) ie A ie obtusus, Hall, sp. \lowa ane > Pp. 623 TH ss nf spirorbis, Hall, sp. xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg. p. 107 x we sp? Mo. Rep., 218 4 Phanerotinus paradoxus, Win. (Phil. Proe., J an. 1863,p- 21) ee Holopea conica, Win. 21) é He subconica, Win. 9 te 21 a Machrochilus pinguis, Win. oe a 21| ia Loxonema oligospiva, Win. sf i 22 i oC turritiformis, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 109, % Chemnitzia tenuiineata, Shum. Mo. Rep., I., p. 20 A Holopella mira, Win. Phil. Pioe. Jan. 1868, pe i Naticopsis depressus, Win. | 2 5 » Orthoceras arcuatellum, Sand b. Verstein. 165, Taf. xix. Amer. Jour. Sci., on SSOmG, Bia) |) ‘* — Chemungense, Swal. ‘St. Louis Trans., I., 660 % ee clinocameratum, Win. |Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxili. | 356) * L a heterocinetum, Win. Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.28 fe “© Indianense, Hall ixiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 107 | WIN. Alm. Jour. £Ci. [21], ORT SAY | a ee + Lathropianum, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiii. 357 us ss Marshallense, Win. of be OO BS * oe multicinetum, Win. Phil. Proc.,Sep. 1862.p.421 a a occidentale, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] cece oe reticulatum, Phil. Geol. Yorks., IT., 238 WIN. Am. Jour. Sci.[2], XXxiii, 257 a ss robustum, Win. . Am. Jour. Sci. [2], Xxxiil. 300) | | U0 vittatum (?) Sand b. Verstein. 165, Taf. xx., 9; Win. Am. Jour.Sci. 27 : XXxili, 355) | * st Wohitei, Win. Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.22 * ce sp. ‘Mo. Rep., 218 * Gomphoceras sp? * oo mB Mo. Rep., 218 * ce oe oe 218 * Nautilus (Trematodiscus), altidor- salis, Win. Phil. _Proe., 1862, p. 429 ce e “ digonus, M. &W. Oct. 1860, p.470 ; ; i Ill. Rep., IL, 163 a3 | x ee ‘¢ discoidalis, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2], xxiii. 360, * 2 sf ‘¢ ingentior, Win. ge Ob Oc 6 * re ‘* Meekianus, : Win. ce oe COO G1) * ne ve planidorsalis, Win. 66 oe 66 BFS *% cS “ striatulus, Win. | eC 06 66 Qag) | x ee ‘¢ strigatus, Win. | Phil. Proc., 1862;p. 426 cy Ot ‘* subsulcatus, — (Geol. Yorks. ; Il. » 233 Phil.| Win: Am. Jour. Sci. ; ; Xxxiii., 361 * oe “* trigonus, Win. |Am. Jour. Sci. [2], xxxiii.) | 308] |/* 394 Winchell. [May 6 Aral || jal (a8 TAME re 3 Sls 26 Slelosa NAMES. References Iets ER ae 5s Fla Nautilus (Trematodiscus) trisulcatus, | Phil. Proc. Oct. 1860,p.470; M. & W.| Ib. Jan. 1861; ae 3 aie eo, LOZ ‘ ue (Gyroceras?) gracile, Hall,sp xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 105 * x ee sp? Mo. Rep., 218 Fi Phragmoceras expansum, Win. Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863, p.28 Cyrtoceras Rockfordense, Win. se July 1865,p.1382 24 = WN. (Cryptoceras) "Rock ford- ense, M. & W. tt mats 275 = Gyroceras Rockfordense, M. & W./Ill. Rep., II1., 459 2 oe tesselatum, de Kon. ‘Anim. Foss., 529 Fs unicorne, Win. |Phil. Proc.,Jan. 1863,p.23 3 E sp? Gyroceras Burlingtonense, Owen Rep. Wis., &e., p. 581 e Goniatites Allei, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] Xxxili., 363; Sketches of Crea- tion, p. 116, fig. 50 ue Andrewsi, Win. |Proe. Am. Phil. Soe. xii.259 * ts Holmesi, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 659 % te Houghtoni, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] es 36% He Ixion, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 100 a 2? =G. rotatorius, de Kon. re Lyoni, M. & W. Phil. Proc. Oct. 1860, p.471 rat | =(G. Hyas, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg.,102 we Marshallensis, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiil. 862] * * oe Morganensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 659 * He Ohiensis, Win. Proc. A.P. Soce., xii.,259 a ue opimus, W. & W. Bos. Proce. vili., 305 alia Me Osagensis, Swal. St. Louis Trans., I., 659 * i Oweni, Hall xiii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 100 % Sf propinquus, Win. Am.Jour.Sei., [2] Sout B68 or PueInecus, Win. tt WG Se toGO ce Romingeri, Win. Phil. Proc. ,Sep. 1862,p. 427 ee Shumardianus, Win. Am. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiii., 363) * * Proetus (Phillipsia?) auriculatus, Hall |xv. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 107 * ee tt ellipticus, Phil. Pe oc. Dec. 1865 5p. 2673 M. & W. Ill. Rep., I11., 460 “3 #8 rs Missouriensis, Shum. |Mo. Rep., IT., 196 ae a ue Hr Swallovi,Shum. 0 ee OG) * Phillipsia Doris, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865,p. 133 BP || 23 =Proetus "Dor is, Hall xiii. Rep. N.Y. Reg., 112 Us insignis, Win. Phil. Proc. Jan. 1863,p.24 ee iar Ne Maramecensis, Shum. Mo. Rep., I1., 199 * we Win. Phil. Proc., Jan. 1863, p. 24 £6 Rockfordensis, Win. Phil. Proce. July 1865,p.133 w st Tennesseensis, Win. Tenn. Rep. 1869, p. 445; Proc. A. P. Soce., xii., 259 Tenn tt sp? Mo. Rep., 218 * Cythere crassimarginata, Win. Phil. Proe, ha 1862,p.429 * Helodus biformis, Newb. & Wor. Ill. Rep., Vt os “placenta, Newb. & Wor. 0 Gyracanthus Alleni, ewe: * Orodus multicarinatus, N. & W. 3 62 % ; Pleurodictyum problematicum, WIN.: Proc. A. P. Soc. ; Goldf. xii., 260 oy Nore.—In the foregoing table, * Bos. Jour.” = ‘Iowa Rep.,” *' Mo. Rep.,” “N.Y. Proceedings of same; “ Ill. Rep.,’ Journal Boston Soc. Nat. FHist.; Rep.,” “ Tenn. Rep.,- ** Bos. Proc.” = = Ge- ological Reports of OS Iowa, Missouri, New York IVth ‘District, acs Tennessee, respectively § *Pamph.” = Journal Neadeniy “* Mich. N.” and ‘‘ Mich. ot Natural Sciences, Philadelphia; Seoul, to Annual Report Regents of University, Trans.” =Transactions Acad. Sciences, St. Proc. State N. Louis. —Northern and Southern outcrops ot Mar shall group; Pamphlet issued Noy. deat Eaten Xvii. Reg. Rep., p.50; * Phil. Jour, — Proceedings of same; liminary Notice, &e., Preparatory for the Paleontology of NEY Reg.” * Prelin.. Notice” = Pre- “Kep. N. >on condition of State ‘Cabinets Appendix St. Louis QX¢ 1870. ] 395 [Winchell. From the foregoing catalogue, it appears that the total number of de- termined species, from rocks of the period under consideration, is, at present, 416. These are distributed in groups as follows : Plants, = = - 9 Poreellia, = - - 4 Corals (Polypi), = 13. Gasteropoda, - = 48 Crinoidea, &e., = - - 27 Cephalopoda, = - 46 Fenestella, - - 1 Trilobites, - - Brachiopoda, - - 124 Ostracoids, = Siac Lamellibranchiata, - 116 Fishes, = = - 4 Bellerophon, = - 13 Pleurodictyum, = eid Total, = - = © = 416 The number of species known, but not identified, is 20. The identified species have been collected in eleven detached districts or States, which have yielded, severally, the following numbers : Il IN@wiew MMOURHN, poconooDouooCoGDaGoOCKO 23 Bo SOMMER MMNGlUIGEI. Gos goavessocnoboooomoKe 93 eee OMI Oster eee sualay as seca oes er Scheu evn Los TT ee eloene DNS 139 dake BAYOU TYE heuer rat ens coves ee elie RENE Be co aI oO A US ER 45 TMD THINS ras sion 5 AOI el le BARE ois Gy Ceo a ne owen 27 GOW iar er nea eee Peer 160 EON TTSSO Uasissttore ieee peg Econ ts Ml tanei vise (oc) n elary MAUIMIE Sh De a ob GOMANCATs cosoncscooosooodoud ssirahalanndcey essere 2 OM MENITESSCO hate Moe scr ores cca Soe eostey eledete a tiae wae aes 13 OPIN G Wi oO teat ae kicgs svar elecets disc a Eta ahaa 9 Lal ERG ri Sayles acy ss) epet

Sos — g ao Sas EI5S S Q “R35 Ss ae a = ach es) ao i = 5 == | =. iS 32 = an se > th aS ° AE Tir ay = 5 CS = oS = : 3 © % : i = & £ sr =| eS =] ic) = Exe S ep = > = lop) me) a ® —— e OM: Ss ee = S = x S w z = D = = @ ao & = = = = 3 = | ler} = ie = | Ss i} — = =e S fe) 5 Q Lar] cs = © i= fe) = la o R 5 = = op) — re ® — ito = > a ° i=) ian | ct PD 5 = a = ir? ® | an —~ 2010 — ~~ 2 CSF aurkod Sot a= IZPOEaeo OSD Sho) \8F n° Oo ae |= fos I= S3e = dg (Winchell, 415 1870. ] ‘ TABLE OF GEOLOGICAL EQUIVALENTS. NEW YORK. | ONTARIO. ) MICHIGAN. | OHIO. NDIANA. | ILLINOIS. IOWA. MISSOURI. | KENTUCKY. , TENNESSEE. (Wanting?) | (Wanting) |ParmaCongl.' Jonglom’ate. Conglom’ate. \Conglom’ate. ? ? \Conglom’ate. Conglom’ate. Tanti TR tee Percvate | False Coal | False Coal False Coal False Coal Wanting Wanting Wantin ¢ 2 os ¢ ‘ ‘ SNA eee ‘ S ( g) | ( une) a g) Meas. ‘ Meas. j ? Meas. Meas. | | (Wanting) |KaskaskiaLi. Kaskaskia L. ? |Kaskaskia L.| Kaskaskia L. St. Louis Lim. St. Louis Lim. |St. Louis Lim. St. Louis Lim. St.Louis Lim.| ‘St.Louis L. | canoer | Warsaw Lim.| Warsaw Lim.| Warsaw Lim.|Warsaw Lim. a Warsaw L. ous Limest. [ee ae eae G | a A = q x = a . = a = . Pa (Wanting) | (Wanting) oer (Wanting) | Keokuk Keokuk Lim. Keokuk Lim.’ Keokuk Lim.’ Keokuk Lim.) |Keokuk L. Michigan | Limestone. | Salt Gr. Gray Lin. a Brown Sh. S | Iknobstones Anobstones | im u | ree ae ae = Kes} eo | | ? Burlington L. Burlington L.' Burlington L. ne |2 ? Upper part of | | | i ; Catskill Gr. | Chouteau = i Saree Rockford Limestone R including c OG) estone, | ( Probably f AICS aver A z St. = _ , y Sa -| Ver ar \ aera Taletls § sys 8 “Carbonifer- | (wanting?) | Marshall Waverly Se-| I inest Kinderhook vellow Sand-|Vermicular | ganz silicius| | Silicious pus” Conolo- B: Group. - EL _ ane vi stone Sandst. and, ; shales ous” Conglo ] eet : Group. ‘ : shale not yet Shales. ranvage ad in part. | Williamsport! Series. Shale wareiyaal merate and eee i 1) a observed.) “Chemung” Gritstone. Lithographic conglomer’ te | Limestone. Se EEE ee eee 2 | eee ee he Se Huron Group | Chemung Gr.} Micaceous Schists and : he Flags. Perhaps : PortageGr, |“Portage Lower partof pricn Shate |Atzillaceous é Shales. : Chocolate | (Wanting) | (Wanting) | Yellow Sand- Peers men eds. (Wanting) Argillace- 'Shale Series, | | stone series. ous Shale. EUROPE. | MillstoneGrit » : Mountain Limest. Old RedSand. (Scotland. ) Yellow Sand. (Treland. ) Westphalian Schists. Cypridinen- schiefer, Winchell.] 416 [May 6, IX. Toe Name. Should the equivalencies of the rocks under consideration be finally adjusted in the manner which I have indicated, it will be important to select a designation for the group in accordance with the recognized can- ons of geological nomenclature. In that case, it will scarcely be permis- sible to employ the term ‘‘ Catskill Group,’’ since the principal mass of the rocks which are made the type of that group is now known to belong to the Chemung; and the name would be amisnomer. A similar objec- tion rests against the use of the term ‘‘Waverly.’’ This term, as I have already intimated, has been used in different senses; and by all parties, from Professor Briggs down, has been employed to embrace, at least in central and southern Ohio (the typical region), either the entire series of strata between the Conglomerate and the ‘‘ Black Shale,”’ or, at least, the lower portion of that series. It is necessary to apply a term to the exclu- sion of the ‘‘Chocolate Series” of Ohio, underlying the, fossiliferous sand- stones of the Waverly series. The first geographical designation which was employed in this restricted sense was ‘‘ Marshall Group,” first em- ployed and published by me in December, 1860, and afterwards introduced in my Geological Report, advance copies of which were distributed in August, 1861. APPENDIX. REFERENCES TO PUBLICATIONS ON THE GEOLOGY OF THE ROCKS UNDER CONSIDERATION. 1836. Hildreth: Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xxix., pp. 138, 186; Pl. 1, 26, 28. 1838. Houghton: First Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Mich., p. 3. ‘¢ Briggs: First Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, p. 79. ‘¢ Foster: Second Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Ohio, p. 105. 18839. Houghton: Second Ann. Rep. Geol. Surv. Mich, p. 28. 1840. Hubbard: Mich. Geol. Rep., p. 87. 1841. Hubbard: Mich. Geol. Rep., p. 182, &c. 1842. Hall: Am. Jour. Sci. and Arts, xlii., p. 51. ‘Hall: Jour. Bos. Soc. Nat. Hist., v., p. 1. ‘‘ Conrad: Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil.; viii., 249. ‘¢ Hall: Trans. Assoc. Amer. Geol., p. 269. ‘* Vanuxem: Final Rep. Geol. N. Y. [Id Dist. 1843. Hall: Final Rep. Vth Dist. N. Y. 1846. Hall: Paleont. N. Y., vol. I., Introd., p. 16. 1847. Yandell and Shumard: Contributions to the Geology of Ky., p. 16. “* De Verneuil: Bull. Soc. Geol. France, ser. II1., Tome iv, p. 648 (Am. Jour. Sci. [2] v., 176, 350; and vii. 45, 218.) 1848. Sharpe: Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lond., vol. iv, 151. 1848-9. Murray: Canad. Geol. Rep., p. 24. ALT 1870. i [Winchell. 1850. Hall: Foster & Whitney’s Rep. L. Sup. L. Dist., II., p. 285. 1850-1. Murray: Canad. Geol. Rep., p. 29. 1851. Christy: Proc. Amer. Assoc, v. 76. ‘¢ Whittlesey. Ib., 207. 1852. Owen (D.D.): Geol. Rep. Wis., Min.. and Ind., pp. 92, 95, and Map. 1853. Marcou: Geol. Map of U. 8., Explanation and Text, p. 33. 1855. Swallow: Mo. Geol. Rep., I., 101. “ Marcou: Geol. Karte der Verin. Staaten, Peterm. Mittheil, p. 149. ‘¢ Shumard (B. F.): Mo. Geol. Rep., Il., 137, 185. _ “© Meek: Mo. Geol. Rep., I1., 218. ‘¢ Norwood & Pratten: Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil. [2] III., 254. 1856, Owen (D. D.): Ky. Geol. Rep., I., 89. ‘¢ Safford: Geol. Reconn. Tenn., 158. ‘¢ Murray: Can. Geol. Rep., 1853-6, p. 129. 1858. Stevens: Am. Jour. Sci., [2] xxv., 262. ‘¢ Marcou: Geology of North America, &c., Zurich. ‘¢ Hall: Io. Geol. Rep. [1] 88, and [11] 517. ‘¢ Owen (D. D.): Geol. Recon. Ark., I., 87, &e., 135. 1859. Newberry: Ohio Agricultural Rep. 1859, Pamphlet on the Rock Oils of Ohio, p. 6. 1860. White: Jour. Bos. Soc. N. Hist., vii., 209, Sep. “¢ Lyon: Trans. St. Louis Acad. Nat. Sci., I., 620. ‘© Worthen: Ib., 571. ‘¢ Swallow: Ib., 635. ‘¢ Meek and Worthen: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil.; Sep., p. 447. ‘¢ Winchell: Detroit Tribune, Dec. 11 (Summary of Results of Mich. Surv.) *¢ Winchell: Chicago Tribune, Dec. (Lecture before Chicago Academy of Sciences, on Excursion to Ann Arbor.) 1861. Winchell: Mich. Geol. Rep., Aug. (Advance sheets. ) ‘¢ “Meek and Worthen: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxii.; 167 (Sep). PO) JelENNG sable Javeyo, INlo SUs daverszog OXty: 1862. White and Whitfield: Proc. Bos. Soc.; viii., 289 (Feb). ‘¢ White: Proc. Bos. Soc., ix., 8 (Apr). ‘¢ Swallow: Trans. St. Louis Acad. Sci., I1., 81 (Apr). ‘¢ Winchell: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxiii., 352 (May). “¢ Winchell: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., Sep., 405. “¢ Hall: Canadian Nat., vii., 877 (Nov). ““; Hall: xv. Rep: N. Y. Regents, 107 (Nov). «Jewett: xv. Rep. N. Y. Regents, 198; and Amer. Jour. Sci., [2], xxxly., 418. ‘¢ Hall: xv. Rep. N. Y. Regents, 81. ‘¢ Dawson: Quar. Jour. Geol. Soc. Lond., xviii. ‘¢ Owen (R.): Ind. Geol. Rep., 92, 108, &e. 1863. Winchell: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., Jan., p. 3. ‘¢ Winchell: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xxxv., 61. ‘¢ Logan: Geol. Can., 387, 404. ‘* Hall: Pamphlet; Republished in xvii. Rep. N. Y. Reg., 1865, p. 50. y Q) Winchell. ] 418 [May 6, 1870. 1864. Hall: xvi. Rep. N. Y. Regents, pp. 92, 107, Note. 66 Winchell: The Oil Region of Michigan (Repub. Amer. Jour. Sci., May, 1865, xxxix., 350). 1865. Winchell: Proc. Phil. Acad. Sci., July, 109. oe Meek: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., Dec., 275. Meek and Worthen: Ib., 245. . Winchell: Amer. Jour. Sci., xli., 177 (March). Winchell: The Grand Traverse Region, p. 49. Newberry: Prospectus Neff Petroleum Co. Winchell: Prospectus Neff Petroleum Co., p. 7 (June). Meek and Worthen: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci, Phil., 251. Worthen: Rep. Geol. Surv. UL, I., 108. Meek and Worthen: Ib., Ii., 62, 77, 80, 145. Hall: Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., 246 (in advance of Pal. N. Y.,vol.iv). Logan: Atlas to accompany Geology of Canada, 1863. . Davidson (Thos.): Geological Magazine; vol. iv., July. 5 > b) ) Carpenter (W. B.): Annals and Magazine of Natural History, July. Meek: Amer. Jour. Sci. [2] xliii., 407. Hall: Notice of Volume IV., Paleontology of New York. 1868. Hall: xx. Report N.Y. Regents, p. 295, pl. ix., fig. 10. (79 6 Sey Winchell: Proc. Amer. Assoc., Abstract in Chicago papers, Aug.12, and ‘‘American Naturalist,’’? Oct., p. 445. Meek and Worthen: Geol. Survey of Illinois, vol. III., p. 450; and also the Geology of the Counties. ). Safford: Geology of Tennessee, pp. 341, 439. Winchell: In Geol. of Tenn., pp. 364-5, 442-6. Winchell: Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xi., pp. 57-83. Newberry: Proc. Amer. Assoc. Salem Meeting, Relations of Ohio Geology to that of adjoining States. . Hall: Preliminary Notice, &c., Preparatory for Palentology of New York (received Jan). Winchell: Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc., xii., pp. 245-261 (read Jan. Ath). Newberry: Geological Survey of Ohio, its Progress in 1869. An Address before the Legislature (received 15 April). 1B) Jey TR yve ID AN, IN PART J. OF THIS PAPER. 7. Contents, v. for ‘analogies,’ read ‘‘analogues.” 57. eS ix., for ‘‘ Their names,” read ‘The Name.” 64. Sixth line from top, for ‘“‘“Gryroceras,” read ** Gyroceras.” 66. Tenth line from top, for ‘‘ Hudson,” read ‘** Huron.” 69. Note ‘‘70,” line 3, for ‘‘ authority,” read ‘‘ authorities.” 72. Seventh line from top, for ‘‘ correction,’ read ‘* conviction.” 72. Note “83,” line 3. for ‘‘ he previously,” read “‘ he had previously.” 78. Note ‘'104,” line 2, for “ geological,” read ‘* geographical.” 80. Note ‘‘108,”’ line 3, for ‘‘announcement,”’ read “announcements.” 2. Twenty-seventh line from top, for ‘‘ phenomenon,” read ‘‘ phenomena.” eral minor errors will, perhaps, be apparent to the reader. Q Cope.]} 4] d [ May 6, 1870. REMARKS BY Epwarp D. Corn, at Meerine May 6rn, 1870. Prof. E. D. Cope exhibited the nearly perfect cranium of a Dicynodont Reptile from the Cape Colony, South Africa, which he regarded as differ- ent from those deseribed by Owen and Huxley. The application of the cutting edges of the mandible to those of the upper jaw, was nearly horizontal instead of vertical, as im some marine Chelonia, on which account he regarded it as representing a genus distinct from Ptychognathus, with which it was otherwise identical. This was named Lystrosaurus. It was nearest the Ptychognathus latifrons, Owen, but differed in having narrowed, sublongitudinal orbits, with immense protuberances in front of them, a very narrow front anterior to, or below these, with two parallel wide sulci on each side, and a much wider occiput and interorbitalregion. The middle of the cutting margin of the premaxillary was prolonged into a short beak. The front from the orbital protuberances, and the direction of the tusks, both nearly vertical. The following measurements are given: In. Lines. Length cranium (greatest), o ) Width occiput, 8 ‘s intertemporal space, 1 10.5 es interorbital i 3 7 as between supraorbital protuberances, 4 8 iG anterior to orbits, 2 3 of across middle of alveole of tusks, 3 er “* —internasal space, 1 8 vo wo eS Re ix) pt v9 [May 6, In. rx Sa cS @ oo for) et LFWWHWAO FP PK WO KW DOW @® w (Sv) S> Nile Cc wm 1£70.] 423 No. : Description. 104. Marl, Grey, 105. Shale, Black, 106. Sandstone, 107. Marl, 108. Shale, Black, 109. Marl, 110. Shale, Bituminous, 111. Marl, ‘112. Limestone, 118, Marl, 114. Limestone, 115. Marl, 116. Shale, Black, 117. Coal and Shale, 118. Limestone, 118. Marl, 120. Limestone, 121. Marl, 122. Clay shale, variegated (Purple, Yellow, &c.) 128. Limestone, slightly fossiliferous, 124. Gypseous earth, 125. Limestone, slightly fossiliferous, 136. Marl, Bluish-black, hard, 127. Coal, 128. Gypseous earth, 129. Coal, 130. Limestone, 131. Marl and coal, 132. Limestone, 133. Shale, Bituminous, Blacix, 134. Marl, hard, 135. Shale, Black, 136. Marl. 137. Shale, 138. Limestone, very fossiliferous, 139. Clay shale, Blue, full of fossils, 140. Shale, Bituminous, Yellow and Black, 141. Limestone, 142. Shale, Slaty, Black, AB ence Brown, full of fossils, 144. ‘ Blue, 145. Mari, 146. Gypseous earth, 147. Limestone, compact, streaks of a and coal, which run out, 148. Shale, Slaty, [Hayden. Feet. In. 6 2 34 3 4 2 1 2 8 5 6 1 1 2 11 6 10 1 6 9 3 6 4 2 a 4 3 ze 1 2 (a 10 t 1 2 1 4 1 3 2 6 6 3 7 3 1 3 6 1 2 A ey Hayden.1 . 424 [May 6, No. Description. Réetaela 149. Bituminous shale and Brown coal, 8 150. Limestone, a 151. Clay shale, contains scales of white Gypseous earth, 1 10 152. Marl, hard, 3 158. Shale, fossiliferous, 2 154. Clay, hard, fossiliferous, 8 155. Clay shale, Black, 14 156. Clay, hard, fossiliferous, 4 157. Marl, Grey, 6 1582 so eeeblack, 2 159. Gypseous earth, White, 8 160. Clay, hard, 8 161. Marl, 1 162. Coal, Brown, 6 168. Clay, 2 164. Limestone, 3 165. Gypseous earth and shale, 2 166. Limestone, * 1 6 167. Sandstone, Yellow, 2 168. Limestone, 1 169. Gypseous earth and shale, 8 170. Limestone, 1 171. Clay shale, 3 172. Bituminous shale, 4 173. Limestone, 2 From No. 173 to western end of cut (which is made up of the reversed strata, but not in regular order, some seem to be pinched out). ORDER OF STRATA HEXPosED IN Rai~RoAD Curt No. 2. (FROM EAST TO WEST.) No Feet 1. Drift, steel colored, 15 2. Sandstone, White, 12 3 i Yellow, containing fragments, No. 2, 1.5 4. Shale, arenaceous, Brown, 9.5, 5. Sandstone, coarse, yellow, in layers, 1 6 sg fine, O8 in thin layers, 1.5 7 od coarse, containing irregular streaks of brown shale, which contains coal in fragments, 2.5 8. of fine, white, 18 oO, “ brown, contains brown marks resembling bark and branches, 20 10. we Steel grey, contains streaks of No. 9, 40 11. Shale, Black, and sandstone, steel grey, 1 12. Sandstone, Fine, white, 4 13. a in thin layers of variegated colors, 6 14, oe in broad ‘* ee a1 - 1870. ] 425 [Meek and Hayden. Ne. Feet. 15. Sandstone, steel grey, 12 16. as in thin layers of variegated colors, i) 17. ie steel grey, in layers (contains streaks of coarser yel- low in layers), Bi3) 18. Shale, Brown, 2 19. Sandstone, Yellow, 6 20. Shale, Brown, 1 21. Sandstone, Steel grey, 40 22. ge White, 6 23. Sandstone, Grey, 4 24. Shale, earthy, Black, 1 25. Gypseous earth, Yellow, 5 26. Shale, Black, 9) 27. Sandstone, contains shells in fragments, 15 28. Shale, Brown, 1 29. Clay, marly, 1.5 30. Sandstone, Yellow, 30 31. Shales and clays, earthy, 20 32. Shale, Brown, 38. Sandstone and Gypseous earth, 20 34. Shale, Bituminous, 1 35. Gypseous earth, 3 386. Sandstone, yellow, 10 Ste «white, 8 38. Marl, contains shells, 6 39. Gypseous earth, 2 To end of Cut, Shale, clay, and arenaceous Gypseous earth, 60 Length of cut, 440 feet. A PRELIMINARY LisT oF FossiILs, COLLECTED BY Dr. HAYDEN in Coi1o- RADO, New MExiIcoO AND CALIFORNIA, WITH BRIEF DESCRIPTIONS OF A FEW OF THE NEw SPECIES. By F. B. Mrrx. Ltead before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1870. SILURIAN SPECIES. Camp Creek Canon, Volorado City. 1. Orthis Coloradoensis. Meek. A small, compressed, nearly equivalve, subsemicircul species, much widest on the hinge line, which is sometimes abruptly produced into late- ral auricles. Dorsal valve less convex than the other, and haying a shal- low, rather wide, mesial sinus, rapidly narrowing to the beak, which does not project beyond the hinge line. Ventral valve depressed convex, with cardinal area rather low, fiat, inclined backward, and sharply defined to Hayden.] 426 [May 6, the lateral extremities; beak not incurved. Surface of both valves orna- mented with sharply defined, slightly curved, unequal radiating plica- tions, and finer unequal strize, which, on the central regions of the valves, are more or less gathered into five or six fascicles, the middle one of which corresponds to the sinus in the other valve. In its surface markings and sinuous dorsal valve, this species is much like a form from the upper Lingula-flags of Wales, referred by Mr. David- son, doubtfully, to O. lenticularis, Wahlenberg. It is much more ex- tended on the hinge line, however, and has the radiating coste and striz more strongly defined on the central region, and more nearly obsolete on each side. From its affinities, it seems to be a Lower Silurian species, but as no other fossils were found with it, its exact age may be somewhat doubtful. Itis unlike any Devonian or Carboniferous form known to me. Crater’s Falls. 2. Merista? (andetermined). 3. Ophileta complanata, Vanuxem, or a very closely allied species. 4. Bucanella nana, Meek. Very small, and much like Bucania trilobatus, Hall, but much smaller, with proportionally larger umbilicus, and its three or four volutions increas- ing less rapidly in breadth, both transversely and in the direction of the plane of the shell; while its middle lobe is proportionally narrower, and embraced by each succeeding turn. As these little shells want the remarkable expansion of the aperture characterising Bucania, and show no traces of the mesial dorsal band, cor- responding to a dorsal sinus in the lip; as in Bellerophon, they seem to me to belong to an undescribed genus, for which I would propose the name Bucanella. 5. Plewrotomaria? or Raphistoma. Merely indeterminable lenticular casts. 6. Hndoceras. Small undt. sp. CARBONIFEROUS SPECIES. Moleen Station. / Fusulina cylindrica, Fischer ? Syringopora (undetermined). Campophyllum, like C. torquiuwm, Owen, sp. ~From the Upper Coal Measure, along the Missouri, at Rock Bluff, and near there in Ne- braska and Lowa. Chaetetes (andt. massive sp). Productus Nebrascensis, Owen. Spirifer (Martinia) like S. planoconverus, Shumard. ° Bellerophon ?; a rude cast ; may be a Nautilus or Goniatite, as it is not in a condition to show septa, if any exist. GS) ke) I= otk . st oS Sangre de Christo Pass, South Colorado. 8. Productus semireticulatus, Mart. (sp. ) 9. Productus punctatus, Martin, sp. 10. Athyris swbtilita, Hall (sp). 1870. ] 427 [Hayden. Pecos Church, New Mexico. 11. Fragments crinoid columns. 12: “ Spiriferina. 13. Spirifer cameratus, Morton (fragments). 14. Productus. Fragments, like P. semiretuculatus. Near Pecos R. N. M., Aug. 6, 1869. 15. Fenestella and Polypora. Fragments. 16. Athyris subtilita, Hall? 17. Aviculopecten (undt). 18. Aviculopecten occidentalis. Shumard. 19. Aviculopecten carbonarius, Stevens ? 20. Myalina Swallovi, McChesney. 21. Myalina subquadrata, Shumard. 22. Myalina perattenuata, M. & H. 23. Pleurophorus? (andetermined). Ten miles South of Kosylowiski, New Mexico. 24. Henestella (undt). 20. Athyris subtilita, Hall. 26. Spiriferina Kentuckensts, Shumard. 27. Myalina Swallowt, McChesney. 28. Myalina (undetermined). 29. Avicula (fragments). 30. Pleurophorus angulatus, M. & W. dl. Plewrotomaria ? (large cast). Mora Creek, New Mexico. 32. Crinoid columns. 33. Productus nodosus, Newberry. 34. Athyris subtilita, Hall, sp. 35. Spiriferina Kentuckensis, Shumard. 36. Spirifer Rocky-montana, Marcou. 37. Spirifer comeratus, Morton. Mora River, (1st ser. Card.) 38. Polypora, Fenestella, &c. 39. Synocladia (Septopora) Cestriensis, Prout, sp.(—=S. biserialis. Swallow. ) 40. Productus semireticulatus, Mart. (may be, in part, var. of P. cosiatus), 41. Productus nodosus, Newb. 42. Athyris subtilita, Hall (sp). 43. Spiriferina Kentuckensis, Shumard. 44. Sptrifer cameratus, Morton. 45. Orthoceras (fragment). Hot Springs, Salinas Creek, (Sept. 3d). 46. Campophyllum? 47. Crinoid columns. 48. Chetetes, undetermined; both massive and ramose. 49. Productus longispinus, Sow. (var. Wabashensis, N. & P.) 50. Productus nodosus, Newb. A+) Hayden.] 4.28 [May 6, Santa Fe, New Mexico. 51. Hemipronites crassus, M. & H. 52. Productus longispinus, Sow. 58. Productus semireticulatus, Martin, sp. 54. Productus nodosus, Newb. 55. Productus, (undetermined, 2 or more sp.) 56. Productus Nebrascensis, Owen. 57, Orthis (undetermined). 58. Chonetes (undetermined). 59. Athyris subtilita, Hall (sp). 60. Spirifer cameratus, Morton. 61. Spirtifer Rocky-montana, Marcou. 62. Spiriferina Kentuckensis, Shumard. Morav. City, Weben Mt. 63. Productus semireteculatus, Martin, sp. Salt Lake. 64. Campophyllum. Mere fragments in hard, bluish-gray limestone. Novre.—It is worthy of note that, although some of the species mentioned in the foregoing list of Carboniferous fossils, are forms known to be common to the Lower Carboniferous and the Coal Measures of the Western States, they are all, with one or two exceptions, so far as they have been identified, forms common in the Coal-measures of Illinois, lowa, Kansas and Nebraska; while not a single one of them is identical with any of the species peculiar to the Carboniferous limestone series below the horizon of the Millstone-grit in the Western States, though about 14 of them seem to be peculiar to the Coal-measures there. JURASSIC SPECIES. Salinas Creek.—Hot Springs. 1. Cardinia? (undetermined). Q Very poorspecimens, not showing hinge. - Look like some Jurassic forms, but only 2. Pholadomya (undt). § referred provisionally to that epoch. Between Sacramento and Summit Station. 3. Undt. bivalve. 4, ‘ wnivalves, 2 forms. 5. Ammonites Nevadensis, Gabb. These fragments belong to the group of discoid Liasic species, with keeled and bisulcated periphery, and numerous very slender whorls, all exposed on each side, and crossed by nearly or quite straight, simple, smooth, regularly arranged costee. They belong to one or the other of Mr. Hyatt’s genera—Discoceras, Arnioceras, or Ophioceras. Very probably of Liasic age. Weber Canon. 6. Bivalves. Mere undeterminabdle casts, in a matrix like that of beds in the west, of Jurassic age. Camo. (C. L. Morcham.) 7. Belemnites densus, M. & H. 1870.] CDONnaAakwwHe pt be e+ © . Inoceramus problematicus, Schlot. (sp.) . Inoceramus (undt. large gibbous distorted sp.) . Ammonites (undt.) “2 or3 . Inoceramus problematicus, Schlot. (sp). Cret No. 3. ce 429 [Hayden- CRETACEOUS SPECIES. Fountain Oreek, Colorado City, Colorado. . Inoceramus Candt. sp.) Cret. No. 4 . Baculites compressus, Say. . Buculites ovatus, Say. . Scaphites Cheyennensis, Owen. . Scaphites nodosus, Owen. . Scaphites Conradi, Morton.! (a3 ce Ammonites placenta, De Kay.? cw Ee oy Ostrea congesta, Conrad. Miser Station, U. P. R. R., Oct. 19th, . Inoceramus (andt.) Cret. No. 4. . Baculites ovatus, Say. 66 Near Canon City. . Bivalve Candt. sp.) Cret. No. 4 . Bacuities ovatus, Say. 66 Medicine Bow Station. . Inoceramus (undt). Large sp. No. 4 Cret. Missicn Station, N. P. R. R. . Inoceramus (andt. sp). Cret. No. 4. . Ammonites (undt). Caprina (undt). Between Denver and Cheyenne. . Inoceramus (large undt. sp). Six miles east of Como Station, U. P. kh. R. . Inoceramus (undt. sp). Valley of Fountain Creek, Colorado. . Anisomyon (andt. sp). No. 4 Cret. Red. Between Hard Scrabble and St. Charles. ce Ostrea congesta, Conrad. Medicine Bow River. . Inoceramus fragilis, Hall and Meek. No. 2 Cret. . Scaphites Warrenana, M. & W. a ras Ammonties serrato-carinatus, Meek. Cret. No. 2. Shell attaining a rather large size ; discoid, with periphery provided with a very narrow, prominent, serrated mesial keel, including the siph- uncle. Volutions increasing rather gradually in size, somewhat com- 1 T propose for the group of Scaphites, of which this may be regarded as the type, the sub- generic name, Discoscaphites. 2This may be regarded as the type of a group, for which I propose the name Placentocerus. A. P. S-—VOL. XI.—26E Hayden.] 430 [May 6, pressed laterally, and a little excavated, without being distinctly chan- neled on each side of the ventral keel; inner ones but slightly embraced by each succeeding turn, and consequently well exposed in the wide umbili- cus. Surface ornamented with numerous unequal cost, some of the larger of which bear a small, somewhat pinched node near the umbilicus, and two closely approximated small nodes around the ventro-lateral margins, where they all curve very strongly forward as they pass upon the periph- ery; Spaces between each two of the large nodose cost, occupied by from one to about three smaller ones. Septa unknown. Although undoubtedly a Cretaceous species, this shell would rather nearly resemble A. spinulatus, Brug., from the Lias, as illustrated by d’Orbigny, if that species had from one to three smaller coste between each two of its ribs, and its serrated keel more prominent. Our shell also differs in the presence of a small node near the umbilicus, on each of the larger cost. It is nota true Ammonite, according to the latest classifica- tion of the Ammonitide. Fort Bascom. 28. Gryphea navia, Conrad. Cret. No. 2 or 3. Dodson’s Ranche. 29. Inoceramus problematicus, Schloth. (sp.) Cret. No. 2. 30. Cucullea, and other undt. bivalves. Me Se 31. Anchura, undt. ee “ Como—(C. L. Morchom). 32. Baculites ovatus, Say. Near Coalville, in high hill, and near base of same. 33. Ostrea (undt. sp.) 34. Modiola Pedernalis, Reemn. 30. Nuculana. 36. Pleurotomaria ? ? TERTIARY SPECIES. Associated with Coal-bed, Bear River City. 1. Ostrea soleniscus, Meek. Attaining a length of near one foot, and very narrow, or not more than from one to two inches in breadth ; almost perfectly straight, excepting the immediate beaks, which usually curve a little to the left ; sides nearly straight and parallel. Upper valve flat ; lower moderately concave, and like a little trough. Surface of both valves without radiating striz or coste, or strong concentric markings. May be Cretaceous. Limestone-hill, Bear River. 2. Unio vetustus, Meek. 3. Unio belliplicatus, Meek. Differs from the last in having the posterior dorsal region marked with about six to eight strong, regular, oblique plications, which begin very small and crowded, just in front of the beaks, and radiate backward and downward nearly to the posterior and postero-basal margins. 1870.] 431 [St. John. 4. Corbula (Azara) pyriformis, Meek. 5. ¢ if sf var. concentrica, Meek. 6. S se Hngelmanni, Meek. 7. Cyrena (Corbicula) Durkee, Meek. Shell attaining a moderately large size ; subtrigonalin outline, thick and strong, gibbous in the central and umbonal regions, and cuneate postero- ventrally ; posterior side sloping above, and narrowly rounded below ; beaks rather elevated, pointed, and curving inward and forward, so as nearly to touch each other; posterior dorsal region much inflected from the beaks down the slope nearly to the extremity of the valves, so as to give the posterior umbonal slopes a prominently rounded appearance. Surface with moderately distinct marks of growth. Very closely allied to C. antiqua, Ferr., and C. Forbesi, Desh., from Lignite Lower Eocene beds of the Paris Basin, but differs from both in the details of the hinge, its lateral teeth being nearly or quite smooth, and like the cardinal teeth, differing in other respects. Named in honor of Mr. H. R. Durkee, who sent large collections of the species to the Smithsonian Institution, from Wyoming. 8. Tiara humerosa, Meek. Hik Station, Cent. Pac. R. R., beyond Salt Lake. 9. Spherium (two or more species, in highly bituminous shale). Fort Bridger; Wyoming (McCarter). Unio Haydeni, Meek. Melaniu ( Gontobasis?) Simpsont, Meek. Viviparus (two or more undt. species). Planorbis spectabiles, Meek. Cypris (undt.) In Oolitic ? matrix. DESCRIPTIONS OF FOSSIL FISHES, FROM THE UPPER COAL MEASURES OF NEBRASKA. By Orestes Sr. Jonn. Read by Dr. F. V. Hayden, before the American Philosophical Society, May 6, 1870. GrENus CLADODUS, Agassiz. CLADODUS MORTIFER, N. and W. Reference.—Newherry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. II, p. 22; Pl. I fig. 5. In the collection there are fragments of three individuals of the above species—two showing the base with portions of the crown, and one pre- serving about a third of the lower portion of the median cusp of a very large specimen. There can be no doubt that the teeth before me are re- ferable to the above species; but as they exhibit characters not shown in the imperfect specimen figured and described by Messrs. Newberry and Worthen, a short description of the Nebraska teeth is here appended. 6 9) Hayden.] 43 A [May 6, Description.—The base of the tooth is semi-elliptical in outline, ob- tusely angular behind, with low protuberances rising at the angles upon the superior inner margin, the outer margin interrupted by a broad, shal- low sinus, at either angle of which, immediately beneath the smaller lateral denticles, an obtuse node projects downward, similar to those upon the upper opposite side of the root, the presence of which would seem to have been designed to lend additional strength to the muscular attach- ment of the tooth upon its cartilaginous support; median cone cervical, regularly tapering, recurved, inequally compressed, with acute lateral edges; strize sharp, interrupted, separated by wide plane spaces, less nu- merous upon the strongly compressed anterior face, and confined to the lower half of the cusp; lateral denticles two upon either side, strong, with sharp cutting edges, and strong sharp strice or ridges. Breadth of base twice its length, and equal to the entire height of the tooth. This species, so far as we at present know, is restricted to the Upper Coal Measures. The single type specimen from which the species was originally described, was found in the Upper Coal strata near Springfield, Illinois; and in the prosecution of the geological survey of lowa, Dr. White has brought to light the same species from the Upper Coal Mea- sures of the southwestern portion of the State. Ihave also found this species in the same formation at Manhattan, Kansas. Compared with other species, the present one is probably more closely related to C. mirabilis, Agassiz, from the mountain limestone, Ireland, than with any other with which I am acquainted. It differs, however, in being less robust, and more symmetrical in its general proportions. Formation and Locality:—Upper Coal Measures, bed 6, Nebraska City section, Nebraska. Genus DIPLODUS, Agassiz. DIPLODUS COMPRESSUs, Newb. Reference.—Newberry, Geol. Illinois, Vol. IJ, p. 60; Pl. IV, fig. 2. The single specimen Diplodus in the collection is probably referable to: the form described by Dr. Newberry, under the name D. compressus. Description.—The tooth is of medium size; base slightly narrower than long, broadly rounded in front, and terminating in an obtuse point be- hind, under surface slightly raised in the middle, anterior extremity pro- duced into a large obtuse tubercle projecting slightly outward and down- ward, with a flattened, sharply defined, obovate pad-like projection upon the upper surface of the posterior extremity, marked upon either side by a shallow groove terminating above in a little pit, and which is entirely separated from the bases of the crown cusps,—in this latter respect, as Dr. Newberry has remarked, offering marked contrast to D. gibbosus, Agassiz, from the mountain limestone of Europe; cusps three, median one rudimentary, slender, compressed, with finely crenulated lateral edges, base well defined from the general surface and terminating in a slight protuberance in the osseous root in front; the apices of the lateral cusps 43 (2) 1870.] vv [Hayden. are broken away in the specimen before me; they are strongly compressed, smooth, with sharp, beautifully annulated cutting edges, unequally di- vergent; left one—viewed from before—most inclined from a vertical line and broadest at base; transverse section of both lenticular. In the collection of the State Geological Survey there is a tooth from the Upper Coal Measures of southwestern Iowa, which is doubtless spe- cifically identical with the Nebraska specimen, though possessing some slight differences. In the lowa specimen the base has, as in the above described tooth, a lozenge-shaped outline, its posterior extremity is more abruptly truncated, and the pad-like elevation surmounting its surface is ellipitical with its longer axis transverse to the root—in other respects the same as the Nebraska tooth; viewed in front, the right lateral cone is the strongest and most inclined laterally, and the bases on the anterior face are swelled out, producing an angular ridge or buttress, which, however, is lost both in the crown above and in the root below. These two individ- uals are the only ones I have had opportunity to examine, and comparing them with the excellent description and figures of D. latus, Newb., I can- not doubt but that they are distinct from that species. The present spe- cies is described from the Coal Measures of Ohio and southwestern Indiana, the latter locality holding a stratigraphical position probably be- low the Nebraska horizon. Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures. Genus PETALODUS, Agassiz.- PETALODUS DESTRUCTOR, N. and W. Reference.—Newberry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. II, p. 35; Pl. Il, figs. 1-3. The collection contains a large, almost perfect specimen of the above species, which presents the following characters: Description.—The crown is sharp, compressed, gradually thickening toward the base; crest more or less gently arched from the lateral extremi- ties, obtusely acuminate at the apex, and distinctly striated for the space of a line or less, below which the striz are lost in the dense enamel-like coating which covers both faces of the crown; posterior face of crown rhombic, outline of base similar to that of crest, and bordered by five strongly marked imbricating folds, which are conspicuously arched down- wards in the middle and more or less deflected at the lateral extremities; anterior face broadly rhomboidal, basal fold consisting of four or five ob- scurely marked imbrications, gently curved downwards in the middle and again at the lateral extremities; the upper edges of the imbricating folds are minutely crenulated; root broad, compressed at the edges, rapidly tapering from the lateral shoulders, and terminating in a blunt rounded point. Upon much worn surfaces the croy'n is finely punctate. Inches meno th enecarlyescea eres as eco Seats ave pre Greatest breadth of crown, about......:........... » Loo Height of anterior face of crown,.......... aNeab Areibih 95 lei sinilor pPosteniorsaceynast esas eee Rote ARGS 1.28 Breadth of root across the lateral shoulders, about... 1.1 434 [May 6, Hayden. | This species bears a striking resemblance to Petalodus acwminatus, Agassiz, from the mountain limestone of Europe; but, at the same time, it possesses characters which readily distinguish it from that species. The present species differs mainly in the more tapering root, the coronal band upon the inner face is more strongly curved downwards in the middle, and the crown is relatively higher. This species was originally described from the Upper Coal Measures of central Illinois. I have seen a fine specimen of the same species in the collections of the Museum at Cam- bridge, from similar horizons in southwestern Indiaia, and also from the Upper Coal Measures of central Iowa. Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures. Genus PERIPRISTIS, Agassiz (ms). Gen. char.—Teeth small or of medium size, possessing the general char- acteristics of the Petalodonts. Crown compressed, acuminate, serrate, more or less curved laterally; extremities on the inner face connected by a raised transverse shoulder, in which the crown terminates below and which gives rise to a more or less profound. coronal cavity, Root well de- veloped, entire, as in Petulodus. The surfaces of the crown and coronal cavity are covered by a dense and highly polished layer of ganoine, which forms an imbricated band at the base. The above generic designation was suggested by Prof. Agassiz, for the reception of a group of peculiar teeth, of which we have at least two rep- resentative species—that of P. semicircularis being regarded as the type. These forms certainly possess features which are widely at variance to the typical species of the genus Ctenoptychius, as represented by CO. apicalis, Agassiz; and in their description of the following species, Messrs. New- berry and Worthen have also referred to the remarkable characters which distinguish it from the typical species of Ctenoptychius. ‘The central cor- onal cavity and the prominent transverse ridge in which the root is ter- minated above on the posterior aspect, are peculiarities which do not appear in any of the numerous other genera comprised in the groups of Petalodonts. The genus is Carboniferous, ranging from the Subearboniferous to the Upper Coal Measures inclusive. PERIPRISTIS SEMICIRCULARIS. Ref. and Syn.—Ctenoptychius semicircularis, Newberry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. IJ, p. 72; Pl. 1V, Figs. 18, 18a, 18b. Description.—Tooth small, broadly obovate in outline, crown much compressed and strongly curved laterally, giving the crest a semicircular outline viewed from above; cutting edge divided into seven to hine denti- culations, the median lobe strangest, lateral ones gradually decreasing in size toward the lateral extremities, where they are scarcely relieved from the edge; the calcigerous tubes slightly diverge on nearing the edge, pro- ducing a minute radiated striation of the denticulations like that observed in the even crest of Petalodus, and when the crown is much worn the surface is finely punctate; outer face of crown very low in proportion to or 1870. 439 [ Hayden, its breadth, base sharply beveled, coronal band narrow, imbrications very obscure or obsolete, gently descending in the middle and slightly curved downward at the lateral extremities; upon the posterior face the base of the crown is defined by a conspicuous transverse ridge, which unites the lateral extremities, and gives origin to a deep central coronal cavity; the enamel-like coating lines the walls of the cavity, and spreading over the gently and regularly downward arched transverse shoulder, it forms a thin coronal band with one or two faint imbrications upon its external inflexed border. The root is nearly as wide and much thicker than the crown, tapering rapidly and rounded at its extremity; anterior side convex or ridged, posterior face slightly concave transversely, both surfaces more or roughened. Inches. Greatest length,......... LS CRED Boao ep eB mae haregees oo8 aut Greatest breadth at the lateral angles of the crown,..... .72 Height of crown upon its anterior face,................ .382 Depth of the coronal cavity from the apex of the median denticulation, about............. AH cares aioe 45 And from the transverse shoulder, about..... Site au Biolo eeu The collection contains a perfect individual of the above described spe- cies, from Bellvue, Nebraska, imbedded in a matrix of limestone, but ex- hibiting the entire posterior aspect of the tooth without a blemish; and I owe to the kindness of Mr. J. Sterling Morton, of Nebraska City, another equally perfect specimen, obtained from a shaft excavation near the City, which shows the anterior face of the tooth. IJ think there can be no ques- tion as to their specific identity with the form described by Messrs. New- berry and Worthen, from the Upper Coal Measures of Illinois. J am acquainted with but a single other form to which this species seems to be closely related, and that is from the mountain limestone of Yorkshire, England. Specimens of the latter species are in the extensive collections of the Museum of Comparative Zodlogy at Cambridge. The English specimens are, however, markedly specifically distinct from the American; they are less curved laterally, and possess some sharp, thick serrations on either side of the median cusp; the crown is relatively higher, and the coronal band on the outer face is more deeply arched downward in the middle, is wider and more distinctly imbricated; the coronal cavity of the inner face is shallower, and the transverse shoulder less prominent. Iam not aware that the English species is described. Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures. Genus CHOMATODUS, Agassiz. CHOMATODUS ARCUATUS, N. sp. A fragment of limestone from Bennet’s mill, near Nebraska City, pre- serves the impression of a tooth of the genus Chomatodus, which seems to be distinct from all the species of this genus heretofore described from the Coal Measures and Subcarboniferous. The impression presents almost the entire figure of the anterior face, from which the following description is given: , Hayden. } 436 [May 6, Deseription.—Tooth large, laterally elongated, moderately thick (?), ex- tremities rounded; crown slightly arching from the lateral angles and curved laterally, anterior face slightly convex vertically and rounded at the crest, which was probably more or less obtuse; the anterior face of the crown was apparently undulated along its crest, the obscure sulci may have reached half the distance from the crest toward the base, and at the median line a very shallow depression, about as high as it is wide at the base, reaches upward about two-thirds the height of the crown, and seem to interrupt the continuity of the basal folds, which, however, may not be persistent or of specific importance; basal band narrow, linear, with two or three imbricated folds, and parallel with the base of the root; surface coarsely punctate. Root nearly as wide as the crown, its anterior face deeply channeled by an angular transverse furrow, with a low ridge tra- versing the lower portion from one extremity to the other, below which it is beveled to the outer basal edge. Inches. Greatest breadth, about........ apap Ree eats Ne, Bop Weel le(XU) JElEN@IMG, So50 booos easel SAE MERias ce aiteers ote TH Rot Lae Ge hts 50 Greatest height of anterior crown face,.........-..- 6) ott In outline the above species bears a somewhat marked resemblance to C. loriformis, N. and W., from the Keokuk limestone; but it differs from that form in having the anterior face of the crown relatively higher, its crest undulated and less parallel, and its bow-shaped outline viewed from above, as well as in the more vertical concavity of the outer aspect of the root. Itis not improbable that the basal angle of the posterior crown face was quite prominent, and the vertical coneavity of that face of the crown must have been considerable, judging from the arched character of the opposite face, and in this respect somewhat resembling C. cinctus, Agassiz, though the present species is not acuminate, the coronal band not nearly as wide as in that species, and the tooth is not as thick and massive. Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures, Bennet’s mill, near Nebraska City. GENUS XYSTRODUS, Agassiz (Ms.) XYSTRODUS? OCCIDENTALIS, nN. sp. The collection affords an interesting little Deltoid tooth, which, I be- lieve, has not been heretofore described. Unfortunately, the specimen is quite imperfect, and, although its specific characters permit of deserip- tion, its generic affinity remains somewhat in doubt. Description.—Terminal tooth small, subtrigonal in outline, little nar- rower than long, but slightly inrolled, flattened or gently depressed above; the straight side is abruptly beveled, and from its edge the crown gently inclines to the opposite oblique margin, which is very slightly raised; the border extremity is thickened, forming a well defined continuous mar- ginal border, which rapidly descends upon the inner side and gently slopes into the shallow depressed space in front; toward the terminal extremity 1870.] 437 [HWayden. the tooth becomes exceedingly thin, and in the specimen before me the pointed end and outer margin are broken away. The superior surface is coarsely punctate, as is also the straight articular margin. Distance be- tween the angles of the broader extremities .35 inch. The tooth above described possesses some characters which seem to connect it more closely with Xystrodus, Agassiz, (MS.) than with any other genus with which I am acquainted. Its general depressed tritu- rating surface, and but slightly convoluted terminal extremity, are strongly suggestive of this relation. The genus Xystrodus was established by Prof. Agassiz, for the reception of Cochliodus striatus and two or more other European species from the mountain limestone. Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures. DELTODUS? ANGULARIS, N. and W. Ref.—Newberry and Worthen, Geol. Illinois, Vol. II, p. 97; Pl. TX, Fig. 1. Description.—Terminal tooth small, obliquely triangular in outline, thick, but slightly inrolled; the broader extremity has a sigmoidal curva- ture terminating in an acute point at the oblique posterior extremity; straight side forming an angle of about 55° with the oblique margin, ab- ruptly truncated, with a narrow sulcus about the middle of the beveled articular face extending from the inner angle to the pointed end, below which the tooth apparently expands into a thin narrow border similar to that upon the opposite side; the articular margin is bordered by a promi- nent flattened ridge which occupies about one-third the surface of the crown and gradually narrowing as it approaches the terminal point; a sharp, narrow keel rises from the oblique margin, rapidly converging and decreasing in prominence toward the apical end, and separated from the broad, flattened prominence of the straight margin by an equally broad, deep, angular furrow; along the oblique side the tooth was slightly ex- panded into a thin marginal border. The crown surface is beautifully granulo-punctate, the broader extremity very faintly marked by longitu- dinal sigmoid lines of growth, and the broad mesial depression is traversed by very obscure undulations parallel with the oblique keel. Under sur- face longitudinally undulated, smooth. Length of tooth along the straight margin, about .52 inch.; greatest distance between the acute and obtuse angles of the broader extremity, 48 inch. The collection affords but a single example of this handsome form. The specimen before me has a remarkable resemblance to the posterior teeth of Deltoptychius Agassiz (M3.), founded upon Cochliodus acutus, of the Irish mountain limestone, but we do not at present possess the materials fully to demonstrate this identity. The Nebraska tooth, however, is evi- dently identical with the form described by Messrs. Newberry and Wor- then, from stratigraphically corresponding horizons in Illinois; and Dr. White has discovered the same, or a very closely allied species, in the Upper Coal Measures of southwestern Iowa. Form. and Loc.—Upper Coal Measures. As 2, vO, Yo — Brin Hayden. | 438 [May 20, Stated Meeting, May 20, 1870, Continued from page 380. The following communication, descriptive of the recent hail storm of the 8th inst., was received from Mr. Hector Orr, of Philadelphia. Mr. Trego, Prof. Cresson, Dr. Coates, and Dr. Horn described the storm as they saw it, and Judge Low- rie compared its features with those of the great hail storm at Pittsburg, which he saw Sep. 380, 1850. PHILADELPHIA, May 17, 1870. To the Secretary of the Amer. Phil. Soc. Srr:—I have not seen any scientific account of the late fierce hail storm of the 8th inst. in print. I noticed the following points of fact counected with it. The moon entered her first quarter at 10.34’ A. M. that day. Wind from sunrise onward was brisk from N. E. till noon; a light sewd flying quite low, some two points divergent from the surface current, and a heavy upper stratum of cloud coming nearly from the South. Towards noon the upper clouds showed signs of condensation, and by 2 P. Ms, the various currents seemed to converge over the city. At this time the sun and moon made nearly equal angles on either side of our meridian, both planets being also well advanced towards the zenith. Rain began to fall about 2.10’, the wind then passing across the pole from N. E. to N. W. For several minutes previous to the fall and at its commencement, the electrical discharges were violent and frequent. The halting of the clouds directly over head happened within that pe- riod of the day in which the sun develops the most heat, and the artificial warmth always present over such a surface as that of the built-up part of Philadelphia, joined to the solar influence, seemed to me sufficient to drive the vapor suddenly upward almost perpendicularly. The concentration, congelation and precipitation, were thus all embraced in a period of thirty minutes. The demolition of glass shows the wind to have come from the N. W. until the storm reached the line of Sixth street, when it became West, and thus continued to the Delaware. The original breeze entirely spent itself during the fall, for during the last seconds of it the tendency of the stones was slightly from the 8. E.—the storm centering itself on the’ city plot. Yours, Very Respectfully, HECTOR ORR. Dr. Genth communicated a new discovery of rhodium gold in San Domingo, and the results of recent examinations of Q( 1570.] 439 [Genth. dirt excavated in Philadelphia, holding silicate jems indica- tive of the presence of gold. Dr. Genth stated that, according to Del Rio, an alloy of gold and rho- dium is found in Mexico, which contains from 34 to 43 per cent. of the latter metal. This discovery has never been confirmed, and there is per- haps no mineralogist living who ever has seen it. Some experiments which he has lately made with residues from San Domingo gold leave very little doubt as to the existence of this very interesting substance. Prof. Gabb sent a lot of gold from San Domingo to Dr. Horn, from which the latter dissolved the gold by aqua regia, and placed the very minute residue into his hands! This consisted of scales of Iridosmine, a dull, yellowish substance, in microscopic rounded and angular grains, and a silicate which under the microscope appeared to be topaz. One of the yellowish grains, on being flattened out in an agate mortar, assumed metallic lustre and a pale yellow color. It was almost insoluble in aqua regia, but by treating it for several days with a large excess of this solvent, it was finally brought into solution. A. trace of chloride of ammonium was added, and the whole evaporated to dryness and sufficiently heated to reduce the gold. Mixed with this were microscopic reddish crystals, which were dissolved in boil- ing water, filtered, the filtrate evaporated to dryness, and the residue slightly heated, by which it ‘assumed a reddish brown color. On being fused with bisulphate of potash it gave a slightly rose-colored mass, solu- ble in water, and precipitated yellow by ammonia. From these reactions there seems to be no doubt that the yellowish grains are rhodium-gold. Dr. Horn states that the gold received from Prof. Gabb came from the South side of the Island, and contained about 95 per cent. of gold. Dr. Genth remarked that some of the gold from the North side is of a pecu- liar nature; that several years ago a lot had been sold in this city and New York to jewellers, who stated that they could not work it, as it con- tained a substance unknown to them. It is very probable that this was also rhodium-gold. Dr. Genth communicated the result of panning sand and gravel of the Delaware River, dug from a cellar at 106 Arch street. After removing quartz and other light substances, a considerable quantity of heavy black sand remained, which contained a little magnetite, but a large quantity of titaniferous iron (menaccanite). These were treated and dissolved with chlorhydric and sulphurie acid, which left the silicates clean enough for further examination. These consisted principally of very brilliant but microscopic zircons, some garnets and a few yellowish green grains of the appearance of chrysolite. The observed mineral generally accom- pany gold, but not a particle of the latter could be found. This negative result, however, does not prove its absence, because the quantity of the sands washed was not large and they did not come from the bed rock, where they are always far richer. Prof. Cope exhibited a portion of the dorsal spine of a Michaux Legacy. ] 440) [May 20, shark of the genus Asteracanthus of Agassiz, from New Jersey, the first on record from the United States.* He regarded it as confirmatory of his theory respecting the existence of beds of Jurassic age in that State, though probably of small extent. Prof. Cope made some observations on the genus Labides- thes, Cope, which he had discovered in the Clinch River, E. Tennessee; he said it was an Atherinid, having considerable resemblance to the Cyprinodont genus Belonesox, having a prolonged premaxillary beak. Pending nominations Nos. 651 to 659 were read. The Committee on the Michaux Legacy reported through Mr. Price, that a site for the Oak Grove had been selected. The Committee on the Michaux Legacy have the satisfaction to report, that in pursuance of the arrangement made between this Society and the Fairmount Park Commissioners, the latter have lost no time in selecting a site for the Grove, in a central portion of the Park westward of the Schuylkill, on the Landsdowne drive. It was selected with a view to suitableness, in furnishing the kinds of soil required by oaks, both up- land and low land; dry and moist. There were found already growing, stately oaks of a century’s growth, to form at once an impressive scene of shade and sunlight, to become more dense in foliage as the trees recently planted and soon to be planted, shall grow and expand their shade. There have been planted such additions to the previous varieties as could be had neat this city. The annexed report of John C. Cresson, the Chief En- gineer of the Fairmount Park, shows that seventeen different kinds of oaks are now in the Michaux Grove; and the Park Commission have au- thorized the importation from France of all other species that will live in this climate; a resource to us for the grove, largely enriched by the scien- tific labors and zeal of the Messieurs Michaux, who made known to the world the great variety of oaks that were native to this country. PHILADELPHIA, May 18th, 1870. Hon. EH. K. Price, Chairman of Committee on Michaux Legacy. DEAR Str:—Under the arrangements made for carrying into effect the Will of the late F. A. Michaux, a grove of oak trees, named the Michaux Grove, has been established in Fairmount Park. * In the Proceedings of the Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., No. 1, for Jan.-April, 1870, at page 13, there subsequently appeared the report of a communication on Asterocanthus iderius, made by Dr. Leidy, at a meeting held March 22, 1870. 1870. ] Aer [Michaux Legucy. It now contains one hundred trees of the following species: Quercus alba. Quer. fastigiata viridis. | Q. palustris. Q. bicolor. Q. Fulhamensis. Q. phellos. Q. cerris. | Q. laurifolia. (. prinus acuminata. Q. coccinea. | Q. Leana. Q. robur. Q. falcata. | Q. macrocarpa. Q. tinctoria. Q. fastigiata. | Q. nigra. In pursuance of authority given by the Park Commission, all other species of Oaks that will live in this climate are to be imported from abroad, chiefly from the nurseries of France. Very Respectfully, JNO. C. CRESSON, Chief Engineer. The following resolution was then passed : Resolved, That Myr. Durand be respectfully requested to make known to the widow of the late André Francois Michaux what has been done by this Society, and the City of Philadelphia, through the Fairmount Park Commissioners, towards the carrying out the views of this lover of sylvan culture and benefactor of science, and towards holding his name in honor before the American People and Scientific World. The resignation of Dr. Wood from the Presidency of the Society, on account of age and ill health, was presented by Prof. Cresson. When, on motion of Dr. Rushenberger, it was Resolved, That the Secretaries be requested to address a letter to Dr. Wood, requesting him to withdraw his resignation, hoping that he will consent to remain with us as President of the Society. Mr. Fraley informed the Society that Provost Stillé had been requested to deliver his obituary notice of Mr. Binney, Jun., before an audience of the Union League. On motion of Prof. Cresson, seconded by Dr. Coates, the MSS. was placed at the disposal of the author. And the Society was adjourned. ) 442 [June 17, Stated Meeting, June 17, 1870. Present 10 members. Mr. FRALEY, Vice President, in the Chair. Photographs for the Album were received from Prof. H. A. Newton, of Yale, and Dr. Jarvis of Dorchester. A letter announcing the decease of Madame Michaux was read, and on motion, the following resolution was adopted without debate. Resolved, That M. Carlier be requested to have prepared the proper procuration or Letter of Attorney from this Society to himself, to dispose of the rentes or public loans standing in the name of this Society, being the investment of the Michaux legacy, and to make deposit of the pro- ceeds as the Society may hereafter direct; and also to instruct us as to the manner of executing the procuration. ; A letter withdrawing his resignation was received from the President, Dr. Wood. Donations for the Library were received from the Museum at Beunos Ayres; the Carlo Alberto Observatory; Berlin Academy; London Society of Antiquaries; Essex Institute ; B. N. H.S. Edmund Quincy, of Dedham; the Albany State Library; N. Y. Lyceum; Phil: Acad. of N. Sciences; Frank- lin Institute; Medical News; Mr. Hector Orr; Dr. Brinton ; the U.S. War Department, and the Editors of Nature. Prof. Joseph Henry returned, by request of the late Mrs. Bache, the MSS. correspondence of Prof. A. D. Bache relating to the Society. Dr. Brinton returned to the custody of the Society Dr. By- ington’s MSS. Choctaw Grammar. Prof. Frazer offered for publication in the Transactions a chart exhibiting all the metallurgical processes now employed at Friberg, in Germany, with descriptive text by Persifer Frazer, Jun., which was referred to a Committee consisting of Dr. Genth, Prof. Lesley and Dr. Bridges. Prof. Cope communicated for publication in the Proceedings a paper entitled: A partial synopsis of the Ichthyology of North Carolina, (see next number of Proceedings) which was referred to the Secretaries. 9 . 1870.] 445 [Genth. Dr. Genth made some remarks upon a new meteorite from North Curolina, which he desired to be considered prelimi- nary to a description and full analysis of the same. Prof: Kerr had forwarded photographs of the mass. Dr. Genth showed also, specimens of metallic lead and me- tallic iron from Gold tailings on Camp Creek, Montana Terri- tory. The place, circumstances, absence of all meteoric indi- ‘cations, and presence of gold in the lead, support the view that we have here a genuine discovery of lead and iron ina state of nature. Dr. Genth showed photographs of a new meteoric iron, weighing about twenty pounds, which was found on a small mount in Rockingham Co., N. C.; he made some preliminary remarks on a fragment of the same, which he received from Prof. W. C. Kerr, State Geologist of N.C. The iron is coated with a crust of hydrated sesquioxide of iron. A polished portion of it, after etching with dilute nitric acid, developed the Widmann- staedtean figures, and showed a very remarkable structure of the iron. It is composed of three different kinds of iron; one portion of it is quite homogeneous, and has a very fine granular structure ; if, however, the light is reflected in different directions it shows a peculiar glistening, and, very faintly, lines intersecting at angles of about 60° and 120° ; this same iron runs into bands of not over 0.5™™ diameter, which, at another por- tion of the iron, intersect at angles of about 60. The space between the bands is filled with an iron presenting a reticulated structure. Dissemi- nated throughout the homogeneous iron are crystals of rhabdite, but few only show a regular arrangement. A preliminary analysis gave : Wir OMe Pc ieee reeves aah oaais as 90.41 per cent. INiekela(Colvallit) terre ee Sho a semi ae COP Pere. fae heart es wees 0.11 2 ISRO ep ermretamiarccdoiio maces A Oy. 86 ) INickell(Cobalo merece eee OFB are Ges eos phide: Insoluble in chlorhydric acid. JPNOS MINGUS, cocoacsoscodsesea Odense: ) traces of a quartz-like mineral. A sulphide of iron of a pale, brass yellow color, and great hardness— probably pyrite is mixed with the iron. Dr. Genth intends to give a fuller account of this interesting meteorite at a future day. Dr. Genth also showed specimens of native tron and native lead from the bed-rock of gold-placers, and covered with about six feet of gravel, at Camp Creek, Montana Territory, which have been discovered there by Mr. P. Knabe, who kindly communicated them. The native iron is found in small, angular fragments, but slightly coated with rust; the largest which he has seen is about 0.5 inch in length. Etching with dilute nitric acid does not develop any Widmann- staedtean figures, but a finely granular structure. Mr. Knabe examined 444 [June 17, Cope. ] it for nickel and cobalt with negative results. Associated with the iron is native lead, in irregularly shaped rounded and flattened pieces, from the size of a pin’s head to about 0.5 inch in diameter. The lead is coated with a crystalline crust of massicot, of a sulphur yellow to reddish yellow color ; some pieces also show very brilliant but microscopic crystals, which may be cerussite. Acetic acid dissolves this massicot, and leaves the metallic lead, which then shows its crystalline structure. A small piece, on dissolving it in nitric acid, left an appreciable quantity of gold, but the solution contained no silver. Prof. Cope made some observations on the Reptilia of the Triassic formations of the Atlantic region of the United States. He observed that thirteen species had been described and referred to ten genera. None of these had been referred by their describers to their appropriate orders, and he had undertaken an investigation of them, having for its object such reference, as well as the determination of the closer affinities. Three of the species he proved to be Dinosauria. He had already as- signed Megadactylus and Bathygnathus to this division, and would now add Clepsysaurus, Lea, from evidence derived from an ischium discovered among the original remains. It resembled that of Megadactylus. Of the remaining ten species, he was satisfied that those referred to Paleosaurus by Emmons, as well as the Compsosaurus and Eurydorus, were founded on posterior teeth of Belodonts. He also said that nothing was to be found in the descriptions of Rhytidodon, Emmons, and Omo- saurus, Leidy, to distinguish them from Belodon, to which genus he was inclined to refer the remains which had fallen under his observation. Thus, three species were certainly to be distinguished from the ten, viz: Belodon carolinensis, Emm., (Rhytidodon, Emm., ? Centemodon sulcatus, Lea); Belodon priseus, Leidy, (Palwosaurus carolinensis, Emm., ? Comp- sosuurus priscus, Leidy, Clepsysaurus pennsyloanicus in part, Emmons); Belodon leaii, Emmons, (Clepsyswurus, Lea). The above were not as- serted to belong to the same genus without doubt, but that evidence to distinguish them was yet wanting. He added a fourth species, discovered by Chas. M. Wheatley, in the Triassic tracks of Phcenixville, Pennsyl- vania, which was apparently distinct from the above, and of larger size. The remains preserved were dorsal, lumbar and caudal vertebra, with costal and abdominal ribs; left femur and fibula nearly perfect; portion of pelvis; ungueal and chevron bones, etc. The femur measured thirteen inches in length, and the lumbar vertebra exhibited slender cylindric diapophyses, which bore ribs to the sacrum. This reptile was named Belodon lepturus, and was estimated to have attained a length of about twelve feet. Eleven of the thirteen species being thus disposed of, there remained fre 1870. 445 [Cope. the Dicynodon rosmarus, Cope, and Rhabdopelix longispinis, Cope. The latter he had formerly suspected to be a Pterosaurian, but he thought it more likely that it would turn out to be a Rhynchocephalian reptile. Ile called attention to four remarkable vertebre from the Cretaceous green sand of New Jersey, which were characterized by the possession of enormous pneumatic foramina. The articular extremities of the extremi- ties were rugose, and with scarcely any dense layer, so that they probably belonged to an immature animal, and were to be referred to the sacral or lumbar regions. If they belonged to the latter, they indicated a codssifi- cation similar to that seen in many birds. That they were not dorsals is indicated by the lack of capitular articulations. The pneumatic foram- ina occupied half of the centrum along its middle, leaving abutments fore and aft, for the support of the neural arch, which was lost in each one. There were no diapophyses. The neural canal presented a deepening and compression at the middle of the centrum, and a rising and expansion near the articulations. Centra much compressed medially, as well as contracted upwards; articular extremity subtriangular, with rounded angles and notch for neural canal one-third its vertical diameter. Can- cellous tissue, coarse, but much finer than in Lielaps ; the dense layer thin. The total length of the four, is seventeen and a half inches, the shortest measuring four ; the other three, four and a half inches in length. The complete number of six would have measured six inches in length. These vertebree had been described as the sacrals of a young Hadro- saurus by Leidy (Cretaceous Reptiles, U. 5., p. 100), but there are several reasons for dissenting from this conclusion. The pneumatic foramina of the sacral nerves, which, however, in known Reptiles and Birds, issue between the neural arches, not beneath them, not only in the sacral, but in the lumbar and other vertebrae. The reasons for questioning their perti- nence to Hadrosaurus were, first: the genus Megadactylus presents similar large pneumatic foramina, and they occur in both the caudal and lumbar vertebre ; the lumbar and caudal vertebrae of two species of Hadrosaurus are known, and do not present any pneumatic foramina whatever, which would scarcely be the case were the present vertebre sacrals of Hadrosaurus. Second: they form too long a series for the known ilium of Hadrosaurus. From the approximation of the facets for the sacral diapophyses in the type specimens of H. foulkei, it would ap- pear that those vertebre had somewhat the shortened form of the caudals. Yet the present animal appears to be a young one. Third: the structure is-in several respects more Megalosaurian than Iguanodontine. Thus the alternate enlargement and contraction of the neural canal is seen in Paleo- saurus and Clepsysaurus ; the neural arches appear to have alternated above the articulations of the centra. The pneumatic foramina exist in Leelaps, but of reduced dimensions. In respect to the presence of the foramina just mentioned, there is a resemblance to the Ornithopsis hulkei, recently discovered by Seeley, though here the comparison ends. In that form the cancellous texture of the centrum is extremely open and light, and composed ‘‘of enormous A. P. §.—VOL. XI.—T3£ Cope.] 446 [June 17, honeycomb-like cells of irregular polygonal form—for the most part long in the direction of the length of the centrum, and divided by exceedingly thin and compact films of bone,’’ ete. The structure in the subject of the above description is spongy and light, but much closer. Leelaps offers a much closer resemblance to Ornithopsis in its exceedingly coarse struc- ture; while in Megadactylus, lumbar vertebre appear to be absolutely hollow. ; Had Dr. Seeley been acquainted with these genera, he would probably have referred Ornithopsis to the Goniopod Dinosauria, rather than to the Ornithosauria. Prof. Cope added that he had already (Aug. 1869, ) published the view that the bone described previously as a quad- ratum of Iguanodon, (the type of Seeley’s Ornithopsis), was evidently not 2 cranial bone, and that he had always supposed it to.be a vertebra. The reptile represented by the above vertebrae was named Pnewmato arthrus peloreus; the possibility of its being found to be Ornithotarsus being entertained, though the near resemblance of the bones to those of a tortoise could not be overlooked. The specimens were discovered by Dr. John H. Slack, in Monmouth Co., N. J. Prof. Cope exhibited also seven Australian skulls and one Maori skull, probably the first seen here. Pending nominations, Nos. 651 to 659 were read. And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, July 15, 1870. Present, four members. Dr. GENTH in the Chair. Letters of envoi were received from various correspond- ents. Letters of acknowledgement for the receipt of No. 83 were received from the Essex and Smithsonian Institutes, Massa- chusetts, New York, New Jersey, and Georgia Historical So- cieties, Cambridge Museum, and New York Lyceum; Nos. 77 to 80, R. Danish Society; 77 and XIII. 2, Zool. Bot. Soe., Vienna; 78—80, Physical Society, Berlin; 76—80, Nassau, N. H. Association. Donations for the Library were received from the Acade- mies at St. Petersburgh, Berlin, and San Francisco; the Insti- 1870. ] ALT tutes at Salem, Albany, Philadelphia, Baltimore and Wash- ington; the Societies at Kénigsberg, Vienna (Zool. Bot. and Anthropological), Leipsig (P. Jablon. and R. Saxon), Gorlitz, Berlin (Geological, Physical and Horticultural,) Bremen, Wiesbaden, Bonn, Strasbourg, Bordeaux, London (R. Astro- nomical and Chemical), and Leeds; the Observatories at Mu- nich, Montsouris and Oxford; the Universities at Licge; the Museums at Salisbury and Cambridge, Mass.; the Italian Geo- logical Commission; MM. Manjini and Denra; American Medical Journal; Messrs. Elihu Thompson and A. Gebow ; the International Exposition Commission at Washington, and the editors of ‘“ NaturE;” and the Chinese Recorder at Foo- chow. . The death of Sir James Clark, of London, aged 82, was announced by the Secretary: The committee to which was referred the Chart of Frei- berg processes, by Percifer Frazer, Jr., reported in favor of its publication in the’ Transactions, which was so ordered. Prof. Cope communicated for the Proceedings, a Register of Meteorological Observations made at Bois Chéne, near Port au Prince, Hayti, by Prof. A. Ackerman, Phys. Sciences National Museum. Communications respecting the Michaux Legacy, and respecting Mr. Peale’s Cabinet of Antiquities, were made to the meeting. Nominations Nos. 651, 652, 654, 655 were postponed. The ballot boxes being examined by the presiding officer, the following persons were declared duly elected members of the Society: Dr. C. W. Boekh, of Christiana, Norway. Dr. Wm. Pepper,of Philadelphia. Rd. E. R. Beadle, of Philadelphia. And the Society was adjourned. June 7, 1870.] 448 [Cope. A PARTIAL SYNOPSIS OF THE FISHES OF THE FRESH WATERS OF NORTH CAROLINA. By Epw. D. Corr. A.M. Read before the Amer. Philosophical Society, June %, 1870. The material on which the present investigation is based was, for the most part, procured by the writer during the autumn of 1869. A journey from the Cumberland Mountains of Tennessee to the ocean, offered opportunity for making collections in the waters of five hydrographic basins, viz. : those of the Cumberland, Tennessee, Catawba, Yadkin and Neuse. The streams of the Tennessee examined were the Clinch and French Broad ; the former in a tributary called Coal Creek, in Anderson Co., Tenn.; the latter at various points, both in the mountainous part of its course, and in the elevated and flat valley of Henderson Co., where it takes its rise. A small seine with fine meshes, kindly lent me by the ad- ministration of the Smithsonian Institution, was used in the smaller streams; and fishermen’s apparatuses, especially weir traps, furnished most of the species inhabiting the river channels. Passing many of the latter at the time of year when the migratory fishes were descending, the writer was able to examine and procure them in great numbers. The opportunity of seeing fishes in life, it is believed, is no small aid to their proper specific determination. ; ACANTHOPTERYGII. PERCA, Linn. 1. PERCA FLAVESCENS, Cuv. Neuse River. j ROCCUS, Gill. 2. Roccus LINEATUS, Bloch. Neuse River. STIZOSTEDIUM, Raf. 8. STIZOSTEDIUM AMERICANUM, C. Y. This is the largest Percoid of the Western waters, occasionally attain- ing a weight of 35 lbs.: no specimen of more than 10 lb. came under my observation. It loves the most boisterous and rapid streams, ascending them to near their sources, having much the manners, and haunting the same waters as the trout, but of much more voracious habits. Its swift- ness enables it to take the black perch (Micopterus fasciatus) with ease, though that fish is, after it, much the most powerful swimmer of the rivers it inhabits. I took two from the stomach of a Lucioperca of eight pounds, one of which weighed 24 lbs. Suckers are used as bait in taking them by hook ; but the mode in which large specimens are most readily taken is by shooting. When the Lucioperca has gorged himself, he seeks ~ some shallow bayou, and lies inasluggish state, digesting his meal. Then 449 [June 7, Cope. ] the gun-fisherman, concealed in a tree close by, makes sure of him. It is the most valued food-fish of the French Broad, the flesh being very tender as well as rich. Without the opercular armature of the Percae, its chief defence is in its numerous and powerful canine teeth, with which it makes serious wounds on the hands of the unwary fisherman. The common name on the French Broad is ‘‘Jack.”’ 4, STIZOSTEDIUM SALMONEUM, Raf. This fine species was described to me as an inhabitant of the French Broad, though I did not see it. As elsewhere, it is called Salmon. BN PRIA) 1870.] 459 [Cope. Color in life silvery, with a double series of black specks along the lat- eral line, and a lateral band of dusted blackish; a dark line round muzzle between orbits. Membrane of dorsal fin often shaded with blackish. Common in creeks heading the Catawba R., in Macdowell Co., N. Ca., or tributary to the Yadkin River in Roane Co., in the same State. 37. CERATICHTYHS HYALINUS, Cope. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil., 1868, 226. From the French Broad and Clinch Rivers in North Carolina and Ten- nessee; not found east of the Alleghenies. 38. CERATICHTHYS BIGUTTATUS, Kirtl. Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1866, 356. Found in the rivers of East Tennessee and North Carolina, from the heads of the Cumberland, to, and including, the Neuse. ARGYREUS, Heckel. 39. ARGYREUS LUNATUS, Cope. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1864, 278. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1868, 228, Tab. 23, fig. 3. Common in the tributaries of the French Broad and Holston Rivers, in North Carolina and Tennessee. The absence of any species of this genus in the rivers of North Carolinaeast of the Alleghenies is a peculiar feature. They no doubt occur in the Roanoke, as I have taken A. atronasus from that river in Virginia. HYPSILEPIS, Baird. 40. HypsILEPIS COCCOGENIS, Cope. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1867, 160. Common in the French Broad and Clinch Rivers. Not found in the Beech Fork of the head of the Cumberland. 41. Hypstmpis cornutus, Mitch. Var. frontalis, Agass., Cope, 1. ¢., 158. Abundant in Coal Creek, a tributary of the Clinch River in Tennessee: Var. cornutus, Cope, 1. c. From the Neuse River. 42. HyPpsILEPIS ANALOSTANUS, Girard. Cope, 1. c., p. 161. Found in abundance in the Catawba River, but nowliere in the tribu- taries of the Tennessee or Cumberland. Found in the Neuse River. 453. HyPpsiLEPIs GALACTURUS, Cope. Loe. cit., 160. Most common in all the tributaries of the French Broad, Clinch and Cumberland. It does not occur east of the Alleghenies. Cope. ] 460 [June 7, Hypsilepis ardens, Cope. Loe. cit., p. 163. Abundant in the headwaters of the south fork of the Cumberland River in Tennessee. In my examination of the Virginia streams, I did not find it in any western water, but only in the Roanoke and James Rivers. HYBOPSIS, Agass. Cope. Transac. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1866, 379. Group A. 44, HyBopsis AMARUS, Girard. Proceed Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1856, 210. Hybopsis phaénna, Cope, lL. c. 1864, 279. Specimens from the Catawba River all have a relatively longer head than typical examples from the Potomac; former 4 times in length to basis caudal fin ; latter 4.5 times. They have also teeth 4.1—1.4, in place of 4.2—2.4; the three inferior of the outer row obtuse, without hook, the superior one only with masticatory face. Both varieties may really be- long to the H. hudsonius, as indicated in Monograph Cyprinidz Penn- sylvania. Coie @© wie 18}. Hybopsis longiceps, Cope. Journal Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1868, 231. Abundant in the head waters of the Cumberland River, and Coal Creek, a branch of the Clinch River, Tennessee. Originally found in the Roanoke and James Rivers, Virginia. 45. HyBOPSIS SPECTRUNCULUS, Cope. Loc. Cit. 231. From the tributaries of the French Broad in the high valley of Hend- erson County, North Carolina. GRouP BB. Teeth + 4. 4 + ; mouth horizontal, lower jaw received beneath upper. 4¢. Hysopsts NIVEUS, Cope. Spec. nov. Char. Head 4.5 in length ; depth 5 times in the same ; eye 3. 3 in head, 6 equal muzzle. Scales 38-40: anal 1. 8. White, a black spot on dorsal fin » v behind. Description. This is a regularly fusiform fish, the dorsal region more arched than the ventral. Head conic, muzzle obtuse, not projecting, mouth nearly terminal; preorbital large, longer than deep. Occipital region arched, its breadth at superior extremity of operculum equal from end muzzle to middle pupil. Muzzle about equal orbit, preorbital bone elongate ; end of maxillary extending to opposite anterior rim of orbit. 1370.] 46] [Cope. Mouth slightly oblique downward, mandible included ; isthmus medium. Fins D. I. 8, A. I. 8; the osseous dorsal ray separated from the first cartaliginous by a narrow membrane, and originating above the ventrals. Posterior ray 3-5 length of the anterior. Length 31.3 lines ; of caudal 5.8 lines ; to basis dorsal 12.9 lines. From basis to apex pectorals 4.1 lines ; same to basis ventrals 13 1. Color in life very pale, sides and below silvery ; a blackish spot at basis caudal, and a large dark spot at upper posterior part of dorsal fin. Common in the upper waters of the Catawba River, North Carolina. Cri, © wip 1D). (3-8 Teeth 4.1—1.4 ; lateral line little decurved ; scales °°: muzzle short ob- 3 tuse ; interorbital region wider ; depth 5; head 4 times in length. A. I. 8. H. CHLOROCEPHALUS. ( Teeth 4.2—2.4; lateral line much decurved ; scales 3!; muzzle acumi- 2 nate, interorbital space narrower; depth 5.5, head 4 times in length. AES: H. CHILITICUS. 47. HyBopsis CHLOROCEPHALUS, Cope. Spec. nov. ; This small species is rather stout and has a deep caudal peduncle. The head is broad with large orbit, descending muzzle, and descending mouth, orbit in head three times, diameter exceeding length of muzzle. End of maxillary extending beyond line of orbit; premaxillary margin barely reaching plane of lower margin of pupil. Interorbital width much more than length of muzzle. Lateral line moderately decurved. Dorsal fin above ventrals, elevated: R. J. 8, A. I. 8. Length (total) 27 lines ; to origin dorsal 11.9 lines ; to basis caudal 21.6 lines. Everywhere, except on belly and below orbits, thickly dusted with blackish, especially gathered into a lateral band which terminates in a basal caudal spot. Fins unspotted, in life a metallic green line on the vertebral line, and one from the upper angle of each operculum to caudal, visible in several lights; below the latter, dark crimson; dorsal and caudal fins, operculum and cheek with end of nose, all crimson. Part of operculum, properculum, postfrontal region and top of head metallic green. This surpassingly beautiful fish is abundant in the clear waters which it inhabits, viz: the tributaries of the Catawba River. This species may be compared with H. rubricroceus and H. plum- beolus as its nearest allies. The former has a relatively larger head, and more slender caudal peduncle, A. 1. 9. The latter is much shorter and deeper fish ; its depth enters the length 4.6 times ; the eyes the head only 2.79 times. As PR SVG, Sh 3))o *) [Cope. 462 [June 7, 48. HyBOBSIS CHILITICUS, Cope. Spec. nov. This species is an ally of the last ; it has amore clupeoid aspect, seen in strongly decurved lateral line and more acuminate muzzle. Head broad behind occiput, convex, interorbital width less than length of muzzle, orbit 3 times in head, exceeding length of muzzle; maxillary extending beyond its anterior rim. Teeth 4.2—2.4. Dorsal small, originating above vent- rals, R. 1. 8, A. 1. 8. Line of premaxillary margin opposite middle of pupil. Length 24.4 lines ; to basis dorsal 12.41. to basis caudal 24.41. Length pectoral from base 5 ; from same base to do. ventrals 5.7 lines. In life pure silver white to the dorsal line ; the dorsal scales brown edged ; a vermillion band through anal fin and one through dorsal ; the lips vermillion all round the mouth. This species is as beautiful as the H. chlorocephalus ; if not as rich, its tints are much more transparent. Common in the tributaries of the Yad- kin River, in Roane County, North Carolina. HEMITREMIA, Cope. Genus novum. Char. Dentition 5—4, with marked masticatory surface. Alimentary canal short, with the usual two flexures. The lateral line one-half want- ing, and generally imperfect. First (osseous) dorsal ray adherent. Pre- maxillary projectile. This genus is Hybopsis with teeth 5—4, and undeveloped lateral line. perhaps it will be necessary in future to refer H. heterodon and H. bifrenatus to it. Hemitremia vittata, Cope. This is a stout species with very short head and obtuse muzzle. The latter is rounded horizontally from the orbits. The mouth is short and oblique ; the end of the maxillary does not reach the orbit. Diameter of orbit equal muzzle, 3.5 in head; 1.33 times in interorbital width. Length head 4.2 times to base caudal; depth 4.5 in same isthmus rather wider. The first dorsal ray originates alittle behind above the ventrals; scales 6 3: Radii D. 1.8; A. E. 7. Length to basis caudal 24.4 lines. Do to + basis dorsal 13.2 lines ; length pectoral 4.2. The specimen is alcoholic, and I do not know the colors in life. There is aconspicuous dark shade along the median lateral line, and a pale band above it ; above this the whole dorsal region is of a dark color. This species is from the tributaries of the Holston River, near Knox- ville, Tennessee, and was procured by my friend, Prof. Harrison Allen, who submitted the specimen to me for examination. PHOTOGENIS, Cope. Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1867, 163. 1870. ] 465 [Cope. 49. PHOTOGENIS LEUCOPS, Cope. , I Var. @2¢¢a. Depth into length to basis caudal fin 6.5 to 7 times ; head 6-7 in same 4.5 times; scales 3 abundant in the French Broad River. 5 Var. aaaac Depth into length 5 times; length head into same 4 times; 5-6 scales 38: color silvery, a double row of black specks on lateralline. Very abundant in the head waters of the Catawba River. This fish, when taken from the water, always sustains a rupture of some of the branches of the ophthalmic artery by which blood is suffused beneath the cornea. The altered condition of pressure on transfer to arare medium, is no doubt the cause. Also from the Neuse River, near Raleigh. 50. PHOTOGENIS TELESCOPUS, Cope. Loe. Cit. 165. Very abundant in the French Broad River ; a variety with large eye in a tributary of the Clinch. 51. PHOTOGENIS LEUCIODUS, Cope. Loe. Cit. 165. Abundant in the waters of the tributaries of the French Broad River. 52. PHOTOGENIS PYRRHOMELAS, Cope. Spec. nova. This species is in most characters related to the Hypsilepides, and it combines remarkably the characters of the H. cornutus, H. analostanus, and H. diplemia. Thus it has the head of the first, the form, with milky paired, and black spotted dorsal of the second, and the long anal of the third. As the teeth are without masticatory surface, I refer it for the present to this genus. The extremity of the muzzle descends obliquely to the mouth, which is itself oblique, the end of the maxillary descending to a line from the an- terior margin of the orbit. The mandibular and premaxillary margins are in the same vertical line when the mouth is closed. The diameter of the eye ball enters the length of the head 3.6 times, and 1.25 times in interorbital width. Length of head four times in length, depth about the same. The body is therefore rather deep and compressed. Teeth sharp, hooked, 4.1—1.4. Radii D. J. 8, A. I. 10. VY. 8. The extremities of the pectorals barely reach the ventrals, and the ventrals attain the anal. 6 Scales3i-4; most of them with narrow exposed surfaces, as in typical Hypsilepis. Total length 401.; to orbit, 2.81.; to origin dorsal fin 16.51.; to origin caudal 382.71. In coloration this isagain one of the finest of our Cyprinide. Specimens taken in autumn were steel blue above, the scales darker edged ; the belly silver. The muzzle and upper lip to the end of the maxillary, are vermil- 464 [June 7, Cope. ] lion ; also, the iris above and below the orbit. The dorsal fin has a large black spot on the posterior half; the fin is anteriorly vermillion. The tail has a rather broad black posterior margin, and a wide vermillion crescent following it into the points of the fin ; base of the fin pale. Anal and ventral fins with miiky pigment. Small horny tubercles appear on the upper surface of the head in spring, as in the species of Hypsilepis. In this case I have assigned this species to its genus in accordance with its technical characters, but it is probable that it will be necessary to change the arrangement at some future time, —when the structure of these fishes is better known. The P. pyrrhomelas is the most abundant fish in the tributaries of the upper Catawba River, North Carolina. ALBURNELLUS, Girard. Several species of this genus were obtained, and may be compared with others already known, as follows: I. Ventral fins extending beyond dorsal, reaching anal. Scales 5—36—2 ; dorsal much elevated. A. 8. A. ALTIPINNIS. II. Ventrals extending to opposite last dorsal ray ; not to anal. a. Seales above lateral line 5—6. f. Seales large, lateral line 83. Orbit large. A. MEGALOPS. ' §/3. Seales smaller, 1. 1. 838—40. Scales ° ; head smaller, body stouter. A. 8, eye smaller. A. AMABILIS. Scales 5 ; head larger, body slender. A. 10, eye larger. A.. JACULUS. Scales, etc., as last ; eye much larger. A. ARGE. aa. Seales above 1. 1. 7. i Scales 44; slender. @ 1 1 Sept. 128.00) 16.25 111.75) 17 17 0 2 3 2 Oct. 257.00! 85.00 172.00) 23 2 0 1 1 1 Nov. 91.50) 27.25 64.25] 13 1 0 1 1 1 Dee. 18.50) inappr. 18.50! 6 0 0 0 0 0 f 577.50| 176.00 401.50| 72 22 0 4 6 5 1864. Jan. 0.75) inappr. 0.75) 2 0 0 0 0 0 Feb. 123575 eel oto0) 108.25) 14. 3 1 2 0 0 March.} 110.75 0.00 110.75! 11 0 0 0 0 0 April. 212.00 0.00 212.00) 15 2 1 2 2 2 May. 260.75} 183.00 127.75} 17 5 1 1 1 i June. 59.50 1.50 58.00, 7 5 8 0 2 1 uly. 108.75} 45.25 63.50; 14 8 6 0 3 2 Aug. 223.50} 152.50 71.00 19 15 1 0 6 5 Sept. 164.25} 11.50 152.75) 13 20 2 0 9 1 Oct. 170.75) 48.00 122.75] 13 1 1 0 0 0 Nov. 61.00} 17.00 44.00, 13 2 0 0 2 2 Dec. 45.50) 10.50 39.00) 7 2 0 0 1 1 1541.25] 434.75 1106.50 145 || 63 21 5 26 15 1865. Jan. 20.40 4.00 16.40) 5 0 0 0 0 0 Feb. 13.00 0.00 13.00) 5 0 0 0 0 0 March 77.75 0.00 77.10) 12 0 0 0 0 0 April. 193.50 8.00 185.50) 19 2 1 0 0 0 May. 451.25) 157.75 293.50! 24 17 4 0 4 2 June. 74.75 44,25 30.50) 14 8 8 1 3 3 July. 103.00) 38.00 65.00, 10 7 2 0 4 3 Aug. 129.00) 54.00 75.00) 15 9 3 1 3 1 Sept 298.25) 131.75 166.50, 20 11 8 1 3 1 Oct 151.50) 46.25 105.25; 22 13 3 1 3 2 Noy. 158.50) 14.50 144.00; 9 4 2 4 1 1 Dec. 28.00 0.00 28.00) 2 0 i 1 | © 0 1698.90) 498.50! 1200.40 157 71 32 9 1 20 13 Ackerman. | 9) 0 2 [July 15, II. Ramin AND ELECTRICAL PHENOMENA.—Continued. Number of thunderstorms Rain expressed in millim.; Number of days of observed. over the 4 town or its 1866. | eel environs. f = || thunder & |thund’y) lightn’g total. diurnal) nocturnal 4 || lightning. | alone. | alone. |! total. nocturnal Jan. T2502 100 46.25) 9 2 1 0 2 2, Feb. 75.50} 12.00 63.50) 12. | 2 2 1 1 1 March.| 149.25 5.00 144.25) 11 0 0 0 0 0 April. 362.25 inappr. 362.25) 22 | 8 2 aft 3 2 May. 226.50} 57.00 169.50} 18 13 ult 1 7 5 June. 146.00} 27.25) 118.75) 17 || 13 8 1 3 3 July. 150.50; 96.0} 54.00) 15 | 13 10 1 6 2 Aug. 125.50 8.75 116.75} 18 || 16 4 0 7 i Sept. 131.50} 37.50 94.00) 20 |; 20 3 3 6 5 Oct. 110.00} 39.00 71.00; 20 7 4 1 4 4 Nov. 25°50 ie 83.20 42.25) 11 il 0 0 0 0 Dec. 56.25 Inappr. 56.25} 6 0 0 il { 0 0 1716.00) 377.25) 1338.75|179 || 95 Bis) 10 39 31 1867. Jan. 51.25 0.00 51.25) 4 0 (| 0 0 0 Feb. 26.75 5.00). 21.75) 9 2 0 0 1 0 March. 22.75 2.00 PAS) 1 1 1 0 0 April. | 199.50) 14.75 184.75| 13 || 6 0 0 0 0 May. 322.7 60.00 262.75| 17 || 13 2 2 5 3 June. 177.00} 28.25 148.75) 17 11 7 0 2 1 July. 54.25} 41.50 12.75) 9 13 1 4 2 0 Aug. 138-75) 47.25) 91.50) 15 15 8 0 4° 4 Sept. 2ATD a 2Ss25 24.50) 7 14 1 6 2 2 Oct. 126.75 3.75 123.00) 12 ali 3 iL 2 2 Noy. 63.25) 19.50 43.75) 15 1 2 3 2 1 Dec. 41.50 0.00 41.50) 3 0 0 il 0 0 1277.25| 250.25) 1027.00)119 99 25 18 20 13 1868. Jan. 0.50 0.25 0.25) 2 0 0 1 0 0 Feb. 143.25 225 142.00) 17 Mi 0 3 il i March. 86.75} 10.00 76.75) 15. 1 0 0 0 0 April. 102.00} 47.00 55.00) 15 4 0 0 0 0 May. 817.50} 115.00 202.50} 25 | 17 4 1 6 5 June. 52.00} 47.75 4/25) 14 6 10 0 i 1 July. 42.75| 14.00 28.75) 13 14 2 12 5 2 Aug. 129.50} 43.50 86.00} 13 18 3 5 7 6 Sept. 282.00) 151.00 131.00} 24 21 4 0 16 12 Oct. 118.00} 13.75 104.25} 14 10 5 3 1 1 Nov. 117.75} = 29.00 88.75} 17 8 1 2 3 2 Dec. 3.00} 20.00} 23.00) 10 () 0 1 | @ 0 1435.00! 492.50 942.50:179 106 { 99 28 | 40 30 F()\2 1870.] 503 f Ackerman. Ill. Rarn anp EvLEctTrRicAL PHENOMENA— Continued. Number of Rain expressed in millim. Number of days of observed. thunder- storms over 1869. 5 _ the town or f B thunder &|thund’r) lightn’g pes he DNit ons: total. |diurnal, poctunD al G lightning.| alone. | alone. || total |nocturnal Jan. 26.75) 15. 00) 11. 75| 9 | 1 0 0 0 0 Feb. 141.00) 7.50) 133 pO 12 | 2 0 1 1 1 March. | 108.75] 5.50) 10325| 14 || 1 1 | O nal April. 123.25 inap. | | 5 1 0 0 0 May. 826.25) 105.00 15 ao 0) a 5 June. 139.25, 64.50) 18 4 i |. @ 4 July. 97.50| 48.50) 21 5 Olea tees 1 Aug. 265.50 158.25 21 7 0 | 10 3 Sept. 267.25) 31.25) 19 5 2 (ard 6 Oct. 151. 50) 25.09 17 4 4 6 6 Nov. 28. 75| 6.00 4 1 3 0 0 Dee. 6.00} 1.00 0 0 1 | 0 0 ee 4 eS ——————— 1681.45, 467.50 1214.25) 170 124 31 12 48 27 eeceraal| Sate —|—= Sasa (aaa Days of electric | a b ce jphenom. aybic. 1864 1541.25) 434. 75) 1106.50) 145) 63 21 5 26 15 89 1865 1698.90, 498.50) 1200.40) 157 71 32 9 21 13 112 1866 1716.00) 377.25} 1338.75] 179 95 3 10 39 3L 140 1867 1277.25} 250, 25 1027.00) 119) 99 25 18 20 13 142 1868 1435. 000) 492.50} 942.50} 179}| 106 29 28 40 30 163 1869 | 1681.45] 467.50) 1214.25| 170|| 124 31 12 48 27 167 The remarkable increase of days of electric phenomena is not yet accounted for. Nothing has been changed in the mode of observing, or hours of observing, and all are personal observations. I may add, that for the last four years agriculture has been ne- glected in the mountains surrounding the town. Mean value of a rainy day in millim. 1863. | 1864. 1865. 1866. 1867. 1868. 1869. January. 0.37 4.08 §.36 12.81 0.25 2.97 February, 8.35 2.60 6.30 2.98 8.43 11.75 March, 10.07 6.48 13.57 4.55 5.78 GUL April, ae 10.08 16.47 15.35 6.80 7.25 May, 15.34 18.80 12.58 18.98 12 70 18.12 June, 8.50 5.34 8.56 10.41 Syl 11.60 July, Well 10.30 10.03 |- 6.03 3.29 6.10 August, 6.35 11.76 8.60 6.97 9.25 9.96 12.06 September, 7.53 12.63 14.90 6.57 7.53 aloes) 12.15 October, 11.17 13.13 6.90 5.50 10.56 8.43 8.42 November, 7.00 4.70 17.60 11.40 4.21 6.93 4.11 December, 3.08 6.50 14.00 9,25 13.83 4.30 | 2.00 (July 15, 504 Ackerman. ] 00°86 G66 GOP 00°08 00°98 00°SS 00°C 00°GhE 00°0F 00°F 006 002 “UUTTTTTAL ‘SINOY, FZ u U pur p U u U U u pur p U puv p u U U U ‘Jou 10 woNeINd, jeuMid OS'LT OS'ST 00°C9 00°SS GLOF 00°08 00°F 00°C9 00°8S 00°89 00°26 GL0 “UTTUAL “SINOY F UIUE O&T “JOU 10 U uoleandg, [Vung &% its ‘Vd. 00°8 OG'LT 00°88 GL LE 00°C& “OUT OAL U U u u “UTUL Ze p y ~-40u 10 uolneing) [RUMI ayrq ‘loquieadeq “I9QUIOAON *19Q0J9Q ‘requieydeg Asnsny ‘Aine ‘oun “AVI Tdy ‘TOIL “AIVNAG IT ‘AIVNUB LE “G98T FOBT “698T "E981 “ISQDAY AO IS] AHL AONIS HINO] AUTAWY AO AVC ANIVY SOW AHL 05 1>7U.] {Aekerman. 00 F GL FL 00°C O0'GL 00 Fé 00°06 00°09 OO FEL 00°09 GLY 00 29 0G L “WITTE *SOUOJS|IVY, PUB ULBY x u Uu u u uN p u p “Jou 10 UgVIMNg [Wang S wD =) T 1G Go19 00°F9 00° LF 00' TT 00°ST 00°LG 00°96 00°ST 00°88 | GZ'0 | “CUT ET EAL uw | ‘UIUL 0G | UD “UIUL OZ ~P “ULUL GG u ‘ulm ee |p UI OZT) Ul ‘UIU GOT] ou 1 UU CE | OU UU GET) ou YP | JOU 10 | U4VvIndg, [.Wmid) 8I 0IV GLE GG 00°91 GL'se S61 Goes 0G'IS 09°GL 0S°eL 00°8S 00°S1 00°81 “WUTTTTAL “Ule GéT| Pp Uy p Uu ‘you 10 UOHVInG [Wand i ize 00°66 GL'98 GLTG 00°96 | G'S 00°8F 09°99 0S°9S j CULLTEIAT 0€ 1S 0¢ UE UT UZ "WOE “UF UIUL GOT “UTU 0 uy p u “u u U u “JOU 10 WONVMNG [,WIMId | ‘Taqutoood, ‘TOQUIOAON ‘I9qopO ‘raquta}deag ‘snsny ‘Arup ‘oun “AVIA ‘Lady ‘YOAV IAL ‘LIVIA OT ‘AIVNUBE “6981 “8981 “LO8L “998T ‘panunyuog—eggy ‘LSANAY dO LST AHL AONIS HLNOJ{ AUMAG AO AVG ANIVY LSOP AH, 5B Gr Xe ——e), S-—ViOlie A P. [July 15, Ackerman. } 06: 1G GEG 09:06 «=| O06 L¢ 9T'88 F8°o9 0€ 92 09°0S CL 81 GE 06 GL'6G 00°98 86°19 0G CL OT 86 586 66°91 08°06 88°19 GL98 08°69 PLL OL9G WEL 98°06 9149 81°98 PF 69 88°91 “AON. 00°LZ OL°0G 08°96 08°69 89°06 86°69 0808 OF SS G69L 06°66 08°69 88°88 96°TL C684 ‘WO 00 LG Tr6L 08°96 08°69 - 0S 6 98°CL 86°18 V8 FG 8.8L $9 F6 08°69 F106 96°TL 16°64 “qdoy FOLGE FE 0G OL 16 OTOL 9G°66 Go'Gh 69°18 08 °8Z 06°8T TG 86 PP 69 8P G6 89°C) COS “OuV 06°L2 86°61 90°86 91 OL 99°66 89'S OV'I8 80°86 FOL 9T'L6 80°69 81°68 PL GL 96°08 “ATUL $9 9G GL'8L ; 00°6 96°89 E16 09'S LE°08 68'9G 00ST 06°S6 80°69 GE06 GS OL 06 08 “oun? F8 TG OLLL P86 00°89 88°88 SL TL 99°64 FOS OF LT OF 16 96°89 00°98 FS°89 GL6L “ART CLLG 9L-0G 96 °S6 F919 89°06 6G'0L GG6L || GEC OLLL 09°68 8§ 99 $948 FS°89 OULL Thy 7G '06 FE0S 00°S6 91°49 TZ 68 06°89 O9LL j| 08.86 0G 9L 88°88 80°09 GUS8 66°99 F6PL YOAV 9166 FOG F016 88°19 08°L8 9G°99 0°92 86°96 9€ SL 96°68 89°69 F998 81°89 00 LA “Qo, 09°US 08°6L 0S°C6 06°6S G8 "G8 60°99 80°S2 0G TS POLL F&§ 88 F8 9G GOS 86°99 66 FL ULL EERO! pear (ol (e) ae io} {e) (e) _o fe] Om = xe) me) {e) ie) (eo) “LOST “‘O98T 91°SG 00°81 88°88 G 00°98 00°89 OL! | \ G9°G) LTGE SL1G e'CT PLO6 96°89 00°98 OL OL CP Lh CFL) “AON SOL PO'16 $9°$9 TE"88 96°LL 88°64 GF 08 490 PL 91 F919 FS 88 O09 TL 68°84 FL 18 4aog OF LL 08°69 F016 89'S F618 18°08 “ONY F831 FG [Lh GLGO 89°6L OLS 98°18 “AID? Fe) fo) ° ) 0 ° 84°18 09°18 “OUN(? G66L PSL), “AVTT 96°8L GE"Sh TWady 06°LL 68°91 “TOIe VL 9G°C), 86°C “Qo | SP LL PL GL Ue | ° | | | ) “pander “pgydue | UEXvVU | “UULEUTUE | WUTEXRUE | “WUT | Ky yQUoUL \|-p gudure paTdure | “WIxXBUt | “ULLUEUU eee “ATYQUOUL jo jo Jo jo ouayxXy |) uUroy | ysousip | gsomory ———————————]| vo] |)oWolxg| Uvey | ISOs | ysoMoy | ———]| uvofy uUvouwlt ATYQUOTL uvoul ATYIUOTL “GOST \ “POST “HUN LVUA INS, [Ackerman. 1870. ] F6°GL ‘TaquaNa( GSS, ‘savoA 9 JO [VNUUY UVOTL gery), “TOC LUDAON ) 06°64 “LdQOWO a — 01°08 *roquuaydas 6964 698T 69°18 “4Snou vy (08°84 SO8T 06°18 AVL fs F684 L981. O06 TS ‘oun OL 8h 998T Cr'6L ‘AVANT 00°64 GOST 60°64 “Udy 1G°8h POST C8 9h ‘TOLVTAL a Ze), *KIVNAQAT 10°94 *AIVNULS? ae seks. pert = Se ee a le) “MINLVUAdIWNG J, TIVONNY NVGJ ‘SUVAA 9 AO “UAHA Y, ATHINOJN NVA 960 OF TS OF 16 Fr'09 Sew 18°99 6G°G), 96% GF'0G 98°06 OL'T9 96°18 PL99 68°C) DIL. 1G 19°81 OF 16 F079 10°88 9f 69 6L8L 88°66 G8°LL OF 16 6g 19 GL°98 06°89 1694 “AON. 89°GS 80°LL OF 16 61°89 69°88 Goth 90°08 FOES 80°6L 066 96°69 FS"$8 GS"6L WO CL TG COLT FL66 69°69 ¢8°68 66°1L 96°08 00°LZ 8 LL F9'F6 F919 90°68 “WAdS SSS €6°8T 06°66 68°19 SP'06 OST 19°08 89°TS 09°TZ OF O00 61°89 G8 T6 “ony F606 68°TE FE 86 00°89 F566 G9 TL F918 9008 6961 OF 00L FE'0L 96 G6 “AU? 81°06 OIG FG'86 9F 19 86°66 PL GL OF 8 PS 6% OL°0Z 90°86 61°89 BPG “oun f* 96°06 Gs 61 OL°L6 F499 LO'16 69°TL 69°18 0° LZ 09'1Z OL F6 OLL9 96°68 96'8) “AVITAL 91°63 FP 6L F9°S6 86°99 16°06 LLOL 68°18 PLIs FIGS FF 96 06°99 6S 06 81°89 Thay 80°86 TV LL 0§ G6 CG P9 6498 86°69 LOLL 08°86 GL8L OF 16 09°%9 96°98 FILO “YOAV 666 IL0@ F8 G6 0G"E9 IL'88 00°89 8G°Lh 90°08 OL°0G 08 6 Pa'CY 96°18 99°99 G “qo FOE PLS OF 16 96°6S 6988 86°99 09°9L 6196 91 66 06°66 POG OL'88 F6°P9 9791 “URL? fo} (o) i fo} fo} fe) fo} (oe) fe) {e) fo} (9) fo} (0) (e) “paydue | “pyiydure) -wirxeur | curr | texeur | cupuytr | “Augmour |p armdure pPAdure) “WEXBUE | “UEPUTUUE | "UU EXRUL UTPUTUL | “A [UG UO UL Jo Jo Jo Jo SWIXA | UWeoyT | JSolLstET | JsoMVoy |————_——— uray |) oulatyxg | Urey | JSoUSTH | JSoMoT —— UvOW j ust APYJUOPL | Uva ALYJUOTL *698T “89ST “panUrjuUoy—AUALVULALW J, [July 15, 508 Ackerman. ] 66D) £9 °C LL'6L 88°SL 79°18 LLL 12°88 9% 6L €9°€8 98°Ld, 1G°¢g 90°84 GE"G8 e9"Sh 10°98 =| «(OL PL ILT8 91'S GL'6) GP'eh 92°08 08°SL 78/81 98°Gh “4SOUsIy ““ysaM0| 11°98 IT98 69°98 COTS 90°78 88°6L IT 6L 99°64 4Ysoysly | “SOOT oD = < te) i 88°6L 6608 8SF8 06 F8 66F8 G6°S8 69°S8 GOTS 19°18 91°08 PP'sh LI 'sh ) a ica] ) ye =H I~ is 7 All RS 8 ideo} ~~ a 109! LVPL F0'8L 98°92 ‘qSoYsttL | “Ysemol TS°68 G9"F8 99°68 91°68 0g'T8 90°08 96°84 GO'b6L 86'8 fe) I~ 90°12 90°FL B0'Ls 28°92 80'S) 80°8h, 06° 9g°c) rata) ¥9°89 SCL PP 169 ‘4solfolt| | “JSoMOT 99°08 $6" OL'6L bLGh 6218 ST LL TWTs ItGL 81°98 69'8L G9'F8 66°LL OSs 88°62 66°68 95°C) 99°08 99° FL F608 FOOL PP8h 09 TL 19°08 OF Sh sas “4SOMO| Go'8 Sh'08 98°18 IL8 OL'Ss 68°98 6678 GF 08 eP'08 OL 06 ay, S> kX ~~ ~ 8 (o) x ~ “YoYo ly “‘qSaMO| “898T “LOST ‘99ST “CO8T “POST ‘aQuidda ‘TAC ULIAON, “1901 O ‘Taqute}dsg Qsnsny “Ane ‘oun? “AVI Tad *TotR AL SAIVIIQ AT ‘ATIBVNUBSL HLNOW AUAAY WOT AWALVURAIWAS, ATIVG NVA] GSAT ONV ISHMO'T THY, { Ackerman. d09 1870. ] FL'GL PLS) 88°S eae 99 wh 0g PL)06 6 FL'8'9L et ‘OL aes OF 9LIZO'GL SF'PL GL PL 8E'SL 99'PL|SP PL 96°EL OS FL O'GLIOG'GL'0G'GL 99'S), 99°SL 06'S 4) ‘7 oun’ “89ST FL GL'96'TL 09'S mice 1'89°CL|F0'EL|89 CL|0F SL GL PL|8P tah bh “SL/80" 84 86°84 96° LL 00 LL 06°SL)66'EL\08 FL'66 "SL 98° Is 89 I8 FL 18 36°18 )90° el 0S$'18) “OT Toqureydeg —., GE'GL\89'CL 89%, A 8956 189°C) F0'SL| OFSh 2 ish oh SL FO" 6h 9L ph OL SL 08 PL F6'SL\76'eL/8P- aL 9°9L)86'9L| 99°SL|0G Gh) 78" ph ie ‘PLIOS 741602 1g ysnsny “LOST al cal 0 Bl excum lexan | lO =O Oe (esc aces aon ee Ons |sekO lien | © “ANIVYE ATHUIINGA SAVG AO AYALVYAdINAYT, “SAV TVOSON() OF Th AG Gh F85GL\6P Al i LLG) (8h \1e"18 BPE FG8|/ST98 04°98 PL°98) 69°98 LP'S8 GES F408 FHLL L0°CL GO'TLIGL'TL 66°CL 18'GL 89°62 16 FL OL PL | | | [eee ase Sees eae eee eae ee ie | ee | re a a || Saar is | a S = | a ie i TLGL CE"h F0° “GL OP" GL loo-ralze-s 98 LL'8L" 08) 0F G8 08'28'FLF8|99'F8 ‘P8"S8) GG Gare GS"OL 8G 94 PL'ZL|80°69|8T 890869 9L'0L)0L° irae TL'96°TL PLC (Poco (7 GG'SL|89'SL|CL PL 0S FL)06'SL|8 9117 h 8h 96°08) 0S °S8] F868 8E 78) F178 F8°E8|0F'S8/FS'08 FS°LL OS FL/9L'OL/9L'0L|90 TL 96°LL BS °CL)/89°CL G6'SL OF GL TaqtuoAON 8G '9L|Z8'9L|8ST'LL|/PS LLIFP SL|6S GLI FLT 802 58 | 83'G8/81'98 06°98|06°98) ZL°98 9F'S8)8P'S8 8408 8" LL|GOELIPLGLICS" oh F6'S1'99 FL/85 SL 'G6'SL 8694 «80190 SPL|60°S4)9S°SL OL 9116892) PF 840908 99 "E89¢ ue OL°G8|9F°98) 81°98 \FS°98) F9°S8/G0'F8 FLIS8 GL LL Opies 8L°TL\0G°ZL 98°CL GS A ¥6°SL\08PL/99 PL Toqutoydeas Hel ole 96°81, 86" 81/0L°61 PLI8|89°Z8) 86°S8 29° L8 $3 '68|SE 06 9806/8906) F016 | GE "06/8888 ST°98 FO'G8/96"L4) 76 Gh SP PL. au Gh PLSL'8G'91' 0021 GL Ld ysudsny 06°L1}08°81/0L°6L 09°08 )0G°T8) 89 °C8| 00°98 aes on-be OF 16/6 L6|GL'Z6) (89°16) ZS "06| F888, 9 °S8| F628) PS°6L| 00° LL/8T°LL GP LL) 06" my FE°6490'08 8408 A ANG? —98°LL|80°84'08'8L/69°64| FG '08| 09°18] 0678/9698 F718) P PS'S8 F368) 0968] 90°68) 86°L8| F398 8s" £8 89 TSIGLLL|9L'°SL)89 EL! Vat LPL 99'PLIPL SLOP" On /8T LL A PG ELISE FL 0G GLP 9L|GLLL|GG"6L| G6 C8 PBes 2508 00° 98 £9" $8|86°98| |8L'98| 00'98/ FL F8, £6'G8|90°0S/OL'9L| PG LL/Gh L184 TL PL 'CL'89 GL 0P SLL FL A AVIN 8E°SL a eee F9°L41|08°81|06 68 )9L°68 OF 'S8/8L" 98 ZL'98) FS°98} (06°98 9F'G8| F8 $8. 98'T8|9L'6L/89 'SL/GPTL109 GL! F0'SL|89°EL\ 0S PLiPS FL 8S°GL ‘ TEudy 89'°CL\OP SL GL PL) OS FL|F8 FL| 9F'9L| PF'8L|8L°08 OF G8] UE"E8 | F8°S8) 99°E8) 99 68] OP G8) Fo" 08 80°S4'Z0°SL|ZG"04L|06°89/Z9°69 39°01 90°TL |@L°TL 196" TL 89°CL F (OUI 09 TL)98°L'9L EL! F8°FL166°92)00°L2 Won GOs Ob ee 99°E8'0G'P8|8E'F8| |ZO'F8| OF'Z8| F308) 00°44) 89°64) 00°89) 8Z°L9| 81°89 Gh 89 80°69 08" 69 Ob OL/O9 TL Areniqod Poh OSC) OF- 61/08 Ph 86S) 9P79L 9161 )6°6 G8 G6 8 81598 75°98) 8-98 79°88 85-78 98° of Ns LL OF GL 96/89 86°19 OF L Joh, ae 89/69 ae eal eee ALVIUY (? | | Eres Te | 0k 6 8 L 9 G i tg 6 [ 2 | & | G | Io | 06 | GL | 8L Pe | OIE |) GIL GAR |) BE WE 2 7S ie | Tf U U U U it U it tt U S UY At U U U itt U U U Tf U Ve = t+ = +! : UWVAL—UBON AUFDAD WOA SHTALVUAMINAT, ATHLNO NVa Ze ld 3 ie) [July 1 d10 Ackerman. ] -|JOM SUIMOT[OF JL = GP OL ‘JUSIU JV WONVIPVL 0} Posodxo PUL IINIVISdUI9} VIIJ WIIMJIG POATISYO IDUAIaYIp JSoywary “o0ZL POMIVUL “p.vog Jo VdeId v WO SUTAT ‘aTRoS AIOAT JIM TOPOULOULIIIY V OULY OUIVS of} IV FO. FG SUIOG oINJVAOdUT9} OOF OT} “JST JSNSNY ‘99ST ‘OT GIT ‘PoAtEsqo Uns ay] 0} posodxe ainqvodtio} JSoUSTEL °ZE oGG ‘UNS 09 posodxe purv sInzVAoduto} 99.17 WAdMJOq PIATOSqO VoUa.LOYIP IS9yvaty TH “V “19019,0 9 ‘gost “Ure IYgz OT] WO gF'9g op Op oD ae NOr ‘T pur 0 eaatqaq ‘Q98T ‘ISUSNY WIC oy) UO OF ‘OOT ‘6G8T VOUIS POALOSGO dIMYVIEd U9} ISOS mo Curt "turxeu) (‘UIW—uvou) J ‘VINUITOT aq}? A PoUTVIGO SVAL J TOILE OTT] ‘poAtesqe wad OS[V SULALT, UNUIU PUL “WHXBUE oyNpOsqV™ ayy PUB ‘SUOTVALSgo JuvystpmMbe Fz Aq aingvaoduro} ATIVp UB9UE OYJ WOATS SUIAVT, JUSUUNAYSUT S,Jonsoa1g ‘ApIep wrout = ‘ur + FX (UE —XVT) 2 E quaseadad []IM BIMULIOT UMOUYy odngeredttey ATIRp Weel ony of} JWosetdert JOU [[IM Wins-Jey wreyy ‘ATU ae AIV “WHUTUL PUB WIEXVUt ATIVp eMposqe ot} IT “YJUOUE ATOAS LOF WayV] UVOUE OT] puv ‘Avod OY] UL ALP ALOAI IOJ POYWMo[VO Wood PART STOJOVE DAOGV OIL e19F0 | 629r'0 | CSPP'O | FIFO | POFFO | ZPSP'O | ‘BePPO | O99F0 | OFVO | LyLPO | TOPO | 999F0 | LosrO | Steed ¢ Jo UroW gor | TPIS | Ts9F'0 | S4sr0 | e100 | GhP'O | eosh'o | cesro | gIec'o | ecxg"0 | Giro | SLLr0 | 92070 | 6981 gecr0 | Treo | GrSro | Ee6r0 | SLIPO | OIFP0- | SSIh0 | 09r'0 | GzsrO | OPPFO | L99F0 | Z9GrO | O6LF0 | 898L cs7r0 | Lc0r0 | SIFFO | GPO | goerO | O8Er'O | 9eer0 | SoerO | SSP | 91FF'O | O8Gh'0 | QNLbO | 96Fr0 | LOSI Trop'o | Mero | FO0P0 | IspPO | ogsFo | Porro | OFF | O1OFO | ElFrO | 90s | Gelro | eosPO | 998L LOLPO | 6GEF" GLorO | eer | G6LFO | 06LP'0 | SPOFO | S69P0 | 9840 | GLOFO | GIF | Gees" COST ee | gee | | od | “AON ‘pO dog “onV “AINE ‘oun | “AVITAL Wid y “IVT | "qo uve ‘XINO ‘WINIJT GNV “WIXV] ULOATOSAY AHL ULIM AUMOLVEUdINaAYT ATIVG NVA] AHL ONINIVLEO WORX SUIOLOIV YA ATHINOTL NVA {Aekerman. 511 1870. | 89°% OF 68° IGG 69% 6LT 90'S 62'S GGG 08°% 90S 96'S ‘[dury Apivd woh CP = | Aer — 1) COL— |} Shits | COL — |) 10). ORES | - ESS 1 Oa | a | OS | a = W ‘d Jo “WHUTTL eel + tS + OSileaats 80° + VOT + GL'0 + 13°0 + 06°0 ++ 90°L + Gorin ae | OVAL se LYT + TW CV JO XUIN Dod “AON 0 ‘qdag ‘SnV “ATID GC ‘oun? “AVIN adv TOALVIAL QoL uve ‘SUALUNITIIY NI ‘NOON HLIM GHUVAKOO HLINONW AUAAT WO ‘COST “YOST ‘LOBT ‘NOILVIUVA ATIVG NVAIV “UCU $6 'EL ‘9987 UL poTINN00 SABOA OAT UT WOTPLI[LOSO JSoVVo.y) UU 0G OT ‘TONYI[OSO [RoOLloulo.iwg [VNUUYy UvoyL tO. || 6TE9L , 6819 | OLO9L ) OGT9L , c@@OL | Tee9h , 6C9L | OF@OL | 8G'COL | POCOL | SIFOL | E8'COL [Sth G Jo uvo €8°2 FS 08° 680 =| S61 £9°% OLS gore 98% EGG 80'F 0g's 18'€ 6981 86°2 08°¢ 6¢'L OFT 10% 8S GE 66% 80°Z 08°E z9's Lg ZL'b R981 69'S POE LPS £80 20S 90°% Oe HOS CLT 91% ze"e 1S? FP LOST 68'S Ore ical £0°0 Ze°G C87 0z'e era 60'S F's EF TL 6o'F 981 p29 || 90'co2 | 61192 | 9e092, | FE T9L | zLT9L | GeeoL | Zercon | OLTOL | 06'S9L | GO'9L | SEPOL | GL'S9L CORT “UOON 98 | jenuuy || ‘90q@ “AON 290 dag ‘SnNV “AINE ‘oun “AVITAL Tady “AVAL do Uve ural ‘SHUVNAY AVOLONGOULINI AHL NI GHALVLS Sv qHo0dHwat ANY ‘NOON LY AGVWN SNOILVAUUSAO S,AVA AUMAM WOtA AHOAdHa ‘SOON LY AUASsaud JIUANdSOWNLY NVA] a ~419 ie Ackerman. | ol ~ [July 15, 1870. MontHiy AMPLITUDE oF ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. Bienes stand ; Lowest stand (a) oO — Barometer. Barometer. |=2a 5 i ee Ee Remarks. milli-|;| = jmilli-/eo= o | oS @ | a Sissi 2 = me- |#8 = me- | 755) S| 8 for, Sy) & ter. = yl | a | ee eS) EEE ee 1865, |_| | oh h 2 Jan. |3110 « M)767.19;23) 3 PM 759.61] 7.58 Feb. 23 914 ** |767.33/20) 5 “* ) 760.15) 7.18 March. |13 10° ‘' |767.70/24| 4 “* 760.30) 7.40) April. |21; 9 ‘* |767.00,26) 4 °* |758.91) 8.09 May. eQ) 6) N1G4283 120) 4 = Seb TeSB I MoO. June. |28 91% * |764.75)19) 4 ** |760.40) 4.35} July. 7:9 pPmMi765.70| 5) 3 ** |761.07) 4.63 Aug. [80'39% aA M|763.75 16) AY tS fos 4:9) B ui Sept. | 4/8 pm|76407,28 5 -* \758.73| 5.34 h | Oct. 3110 +a M!763.39) 2) 414‘ 1758.00) 5.39 Nov. 20 9% ‘* 1763.85|10) 4 ** 758.19} 5.66) Dec. 18 9 * 1766.59) 6 4 ‘ 1759.69] 7.03) 1866. h 1 eee | Jan 12 934 4M /769.10/26, 3446PM 760.78, 832 1The highest barom. stand observed be- Feb 17| 9 ‘* |768.8011) 4 ‘* |761.28) 7.52) tween 1863 to 1870. ; Mar.2 |12) 94% ‘* |767,13/31} 334 *t 762.10, 5.03) 2Mar.4days without barom.observations 3 | Apr WO eo 765.10) 18 "44s os (760.98 3.92 %Onsome days the max.A M unobserved 4 | May. | 6) 9°4 ‘* |764.36 25] 414 ** |75881) 555) Same remark. June. |2910 “. 1764.75.23] 314 “ 769.45) 4.30) -°Same rema.k. July. |21/10 “ |765.07) 3] 334 ‘* (760.49) 4.58 Aug. 610 ** 1764.83 30) 3% * \ies-ee| 6.27 Sept, SiON van 764.83 30) A “S55 ia 9.67, _ & The lowest stand between 1863 to 1870. Oct. 14] 934 ** |'762 65| 7) 444 “ 757.95| 4.70, Great hurricane U. 8. coast. Nov. 3/10 ‘* 1763/95) 6) 334 ** \757-70)| 6225) Dec | 1867 h h | Jan. 28) 834 AM'768 06 20! 38 PM|758.74| 9.32! Feb. 1| 7 ‘ |767.00 15} 41% ** 1769.50} 6.50] March. | 5| 914 ‘* |766.05,22' 4 ‘ /759.85' 6.29} April. |14/ 9% ‘ )765.54/22 4 ‘* (759.47) 6.07) May. (12,10 “ |763.33 Gb 08 gas)! 2EB June. j28)9 ‘ 765.86) 9) 4 “* 1758.50) 7.36} July. GO) 8 765.3430) 06 “© 1759.38; 5.95} Aug. 11) 644 “ 764.75) 3° 434 “ 759.64) 5.11) Sept. 30) 744 “ |763.81) 7) 344 ‘* 1769.82) 3.99 Oct. We + \16eG214) 4 ara7\ elo Nov.7 5| 734 ‘° 1766.42 9) 3844 ** 1760.19} 6.23) 7 From 23 to 28 Nov. no barom. observat. Dec. 21! 9% ** 1766.37 12) 34% “© I760.72' 5.65) Certif. ten pages to be conform to the registers of the Meteorological Station of Port- au-Prince. Prof. A. Ackerman. 913 Stated Meeting, September 16, 1870. Mr. T. P. JAmEs in the Chair. Present, six members. Letters accepting membership, were received from Dr. Wil- liam Pepper, dated 1215 Walnut Street, Philad., July 16; Dr. William Boeckh, dated Christiana, Monday, Aug. 11th; Dr. K. R. Beadle, dated 212 south Highth Street, Philadelphia, Sept, 7th, 1870. | Letters acknowledging the receipt of the Society's publica- tions, were received from the Russian Geographical Society (79, 80); the Austrian Academy (78, 80); the Cambridge Phi- losophical Society (X11); and the Cincinnati Observatory (82, 83). Letters of Envoy were received from the Russian Geogra- phical Society ; the Austrian Academy ; M. Dora d’Istria; and the United States Naval Observatory. Donations for the Library were received from M. Prud- homme de Borre, of Brussels; the Geographical Society and Cours des Sciences, at Paris; the British Association ; London Meteorological and Geological Societies; Cambridge Philo- sophical Society; Canadian Naturalist; Silliman’s Journal ; Prof. C. H. Hitchcock; the Medical News; Penn Monthly ; Howard University; and the United States Naval, and Cin- cinnati Observatories. On motion, the Howard University was placed on the list of correspondents to receive the Proceedings. On motion, Prof. Cope’s “Eight Contribution, &c.,” was ordered to be published in the Proceedings. (See page 553). Pending nominations 651, 652, 654, 655, and new nomina- tions 660, 661, were read. And the Society was adjourned. A. P. S.—VOL. XI—87E. o14 Stated Meeting, October Tth, 1870. Mr. FRALEY, Vice-President, in the Chair. | Present, sixteen members. A letter was received from Dr. Goodwin, accepting his appointment to prepare an obituary notice of Mr. Merrick. A letter acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings 81 and 58, was received from the McGill University, Montreal. A photograph for the Album was received from Mr. Samuel Foster Haven, of Worcester, Mass. A letter from M. Carlier, dated Great Coram St., No. 31, near Brunswick Square, London, Sept. 15th, to Mr. Durand, was read, to inform the Society of the fact that he had received the Extrait d’Inscription au Grand Livre, No. 148, 986, Serie. Téme rente, 2778; au nom: Philadelphie (La Société Philo- sophique Americaine), &c. — Donations for the Library were received from the Italian Geological Ccmmittee; the London Linnean Society; the Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Science; the Cambridge Museum of Comparative Zoology; and the U.S. R.R.& Mining Register, of Philadelphia. A donation for the Cabinet was received from Mr. J. A. McNeill, consisting of a Cap worn by the natives of Chiriqu, made of the sheath of the Coible Galen nut. The decease of Judge Robert C. Grier, a member of the Society, was announced with appropriate remarks, by Judge Strong. On motion of Mr. Price, Mr. Aubrey H. Smith was appointed to prepare an obituary notice of the deceased. Mr. Cope presented for publicatior in the Transactions, a Memoir on the Ichthyology of the Antilles, which was referred to a committee consisting of Dr. Leidy, Dr. Bridges, and Dr. Rushenberger. 1870.] o15 Dr. Brinton described and proposed the purchase of two rare works now for sale in London—one a Maraho Mexican theological work and grammar, the other a Moska New Granada grammar. 'l'he subject was referred to a committee, consisting of Dr. Brinton, Mr. Hopper and Mr. Price. Mr. McNeil was then introduced by Prof. Cope, and gave a sketch of his explorations in Central America, undertaken for the Peabody Institute, in Salem, and for the Kent Scientific Institute, at Grand Rapids, Michigan, and his plan for a fifth expedition, to explore ruined cities on the river which flows into the Chiriqui lagoon. With $1,200, he could carry on his researches for six months, and send to the Society which employed him, objects of antiquarian, ethnological, and natu- ral history interest. Dr. Brinton said it was unexplored territory. No stone monuments were known so far south. They were valuable as furnishing possibly a key to the connexion between the Mexican, Central American and Peruvian stone monuments. Prof. Cope exhibited the remains of a new Cretaceous tortoise, of the genus Adocus Cope, to be called A. syntheticus. He explained that he had been able to establish more fully the characters of the genus Adocus ; that it was found to possess an intergular shield, as in the Pleurodira, but had not the sutural union of the inferior pelvic elements with the plastron, characteristic of that type. These characters had been here- tofore known as correlatives in the order, from the Cretaceous period to the present time, and that this genus presented us witb the first exception to the rule. The genus was therefore regarded as a generalized type, and typical of a new family, the Adocide. He also made some observations on the metatarsal region of Laclaps aquilunguis, exhibiting the first example found, and said it proved the distinctness of those elements from each other in that genus, and their slender collective proportions. The specimen was an external one, with- out trace of a rudimental one on its outer face. That its measurement, 10 inches, was indicative of a length of 18 inches for the median meta- tarsus, a length he had already assigned to it on theoretical grounds. Nominations Nos. 651, 652, 654, 655, 660, 661, and new nominations Nos. 662, 663, were read. And the Society was adjourned. O16 Stated Meeting, October 21, 1870. Dr. EMERSON in the Chair. Present, seven members. Dr. Brinton stated that the Choctaw Grammar, recently published by the Society, is being translated into German. It appears from two letters recently received from Dr. Berendt, at present prosecuting his researches into the Maya language and history in Central America, that he has added an ad- ditional amount of knowledge of the subject equal to that which was possessed before. Prof. Cope read a paper on the Osteology of Megaptera Bellicosa, one of the few whalebone whales of economic value found within the tropics. He gave a detailed account of the structure of a specimen from the island of St. Bartholomew, W. I., and its variations from known species of Megaptera, especially in the forms of the mandible and nasal bones. Dr. Emerson read a paper on the part taken by the American Philosophical Society and Franklin Institute in establishing stations for meteorological observations, detailing arrangements for procuring full reports from fifty-two points in the State of Pennsylvania. He spoke of the important bearing which those efforts had had upon the present state of meteorological science: In February last, the Congress of the United States passed a law for instituting meteorological observations throughout the country by means of Government telegrams. This duty has been assigned to the War De- partment, and active measures are now in progress to carry out the objects contemplated by the act of our National Legislature. Through the medium of a pamphlet issued by the Signal Officer appointed by the War Department, we are informed that stations for making observations have already been designated throughout all of our States and Territories, from the Atlantic to the Pacific. By such means, we shall soon be put in possession of data for determining the conditions of the atmosphere over a vast region, and enabled to trace the boundaries and progressive movements of storms and tornadoes, which, generally following definite courses, may have their coming anticipated through storm signals. 1870.] O 1 7 | E merson Such utilization of simultaneous meteorological observations, with immediate transmission by the magnetic telegraph, is now carried on in England and most parts of Europe, including Norway, Denmark, Holland, Belgium, Prussia, Austria, France, Italy, and throughout the Russian Empire. At your breakfast table in London, Paris, or any other of the principal cities of Europe, you can now read in the Times, Galignani, and other leading newspapers, the condition of the weather almost at the same hour in the morning, in every part of Europe. More than thirty years ago, a very active interest was taken in this country, and especially in this city, in regard to meteorological investiga- tions, and especially those relating to the origin and progression of storms. Espy, Redfield, Loomis and Olmstead, on this side of the Atlantic, were the most prominent leaders in the investigations carried on. The work was not, however, left entirely to individuals, but learned societies engaged init. In this city, a ‘‘ Joint Committee on Meteorology” was instituted, consisting of four members of this Society and five mem- bers of the Franklin Institute, which for several years labored in the collection of observations, and other measures calculated to promote the advancement of meteorological knowledge, and the programme of their plans was almost identical with that now proposed to be carried out under the auspices of Government. f The primary meeting of this ‘‘ Joint Committee’’ was held on the 9th of September, 1834, and the first project set on foot by it was the establish- ment of competent observers, in different parts of our State and country, to make simultaneous observations of the conditions of the weather, the occurrence of storms of rain, hail or snow, the direction of the wind and. atmospheric currents, quantities of aqueous precipitations, movements of the barometrical column, temperature, &c. Of the nine members of this ‘‘ Joint Committee’? when first appointed, I find myself the only survivor ; and it seems to me a duty I owe to the Society by which I was appointed, to bear testimony to its former efforts for the advancement of meteorological scienec—efforts made at a time when the only means of transmission was by the tardy and costly mail - service, now superseded by the marvellous capacities combined in the magnetic telegraph. For carrying out the projects of the ‘‘ Joint Committee’? money was needed. This could not be advanced by our Society, then in a condition of pecuniary embarrassment, nor by the Franklin Institute, which, strange to say, in this great city, where it should be cherished as a grand capitol of the industrial arts creating most of wealth, has always been compara- tively poor. In this dilemma, application was made to the Legislature of our Com- monwealth, from which liberal appropriations in money were obtained for our use, $4,000 at one session, and $3,000 at another. Some of this money was used by the ‘‘ Joint Committee’’ to defray expenses incurred in print- ing, corresponding and collecting reports. The largest portion, however, was spent in supplying each of the fifty-two counties then in the State, 518 Oct. 21, Emerson.] with a set of instruments, consisting of a barometer, two thermometers (one self-registering), and a rain-guage.* The manufacture and distribu- tion of these instruments was all entrusted by the Committee to my own supervision. Most, if not all, of these instruments doubtless exist at the present day, in the court-houses or academies in the counties to which they were sent. At the time to which I refer, I was much devoted to meteorological investigations, and for several years delivered lectures on meteorology, before the class of the Franklin Institute. I made observations several times a day, noting the atmospheric changes as to density, temperature, dew-point, winds, aqueous precipitations, &c. &c. It was whilst so engaged, that I made a communication to this Society, relative to the inapplicability, in this country, of the prognostic words inscribed on the scale-plates of European barometers, such as fair, set fair, rainy, &c., which generally indicate the reverse of the prognostic on this side of the Atlantic, where the barometer has never acquired any high degree of credit as a weather-glass. ‘‘Stormy’’ is, perhaps, the only inscription which might be retained for both sides of the Atlantic at or near the sea- level. In the course of my observations, I found that storms from the north and north-east were generally preceded by high risings in the barometer, especially during the winter months. This observation was recognized as original by Sears C. Walker, a distinguished member of this Society, and by Mr. Espy, who regarded it as one of the main supports of his theory of storms. My communication upon these subjects, I suppose, still exists among the manuscripts in the archives of this Society. In reference to the barometers made for distribution in this State, it is worthy of notice that they do not contain the ‘Enropean inscriptions on their scale plates, ‘‘fair,’’ ‘‘set fair,’? &c., which, as I have already stated, are calculated to mislead observers on the western side of the Atlantic, and bring the instrument into discredit. Another reason for omitting the inscriptions exists in the fact, that many of the barometers went to points in the State so greatly elevated as to render deceptive and useless any inscriptions made on scales graduated from the sea level: The main consideration of the Committee was to ascertain the fluctua- tions of the mercurial column as influenced by atmospheric conditions. In pursuing his investigations concerning the phenomena connected with the origin and movements of storms, tornados, and water-spouts, Mr. Espy was chiefly indebted for his data to the materials brought to- gether by the labors of the “Joint Committee,’ from which he was enabled to map the courses of many remarkable storms, hurricanes and water-spouts, which drew marked attention from men of science at home and abroad. In 1840, Mr. Espy went to Europe, and laid his views before the British *The original standard barometer and thermometer from which the other instruments were graduated, are now in the possession of the Frank 1870.] {Emerson. Days. Hour. Temperature of| Air. Temperature of et Bulb, Dew Point. Course of Wind. Lower Strata of Clouds. Middle Strata of Clouds. Upper Strata of Clouds. Strength of Wind. Weather. Beginning of Rain. | End of Rain. Barometer. *SUOIVATOSAO "29nUwmwo?y purop fo snjpno1g srg Burhunduoson s.toasasg(¢ 07 $W01)09.L~°7 Emerson. 020 [1870° Scientific Association, accompanied by numerous maps and diagrams. His communication elicited great interest, and, after its reading, was dis cussed by some of the most eminent men in the grand Scientific Con_ gress, among whom were Professors Forbes and Phillips, and Sir David Brewster. Mr. Espy also visited Paris, and communicated his views to the French Academy, by which a committee was appointed to report upon the sub- ject, consisting of Messrs. Arago, Pouillet, and Babinet. A report was made at considerable length, containing a beautiful analysis of Mr. Espy’s theory, with conclusions extremely flattering to our countryman. This, with the paper read before the British Association, may be found in Mr. Espy’s treatise on the Philosophy of Storms—a work which contains much of the information collected by the “ Joint Committee’’ in a con- densed form. I cannot conclude this communication without expressing my opinion, that a strong and very effective impulse was given to meteorological in- vestigations at home and abroad by the combined efforts of this Society and its associate, in organizing that system of simultaneous meteoro- logical observations which has since been spread over the European con- tinent, and is now resumed in our own country under the most favorable conditions. In claiming for our Society the credit fairly due for its efforts formerly made in the eause of meteorology, I do not wish to derogate from the just claims of other institutions or individuals who have been working earnestly in the same field of philosophical research. Any proper notice of even one of these—the Smithsonian Institute, for exampie—would lead me beyond the just limits of a communication adapted to the usual order of business established by this Society. The names appended to the first Circular issued in September, 1834, by the ‘‘ Joint Committee,’’ were James P. Espy, Chairman, GouUVERNEUR Emerson, M. D., ©. N. BANCKER, ALEXANDER J). BAcuHE, Committee of American Philosophical Society. James P. Espy, AuEx. D. BACHE, H. D. RocGERs, S. C. WALKER, P. B. Gopparp, M. D. Committee of Franklin Institute. 1870.] 521 Mr. Briggs made some remarks on the results in meteorology obtained by Prof. Henry twelve years ago. Pending nominations, Nos. 662 and 663 were read. After balloting for Candidates for Membership, the following named gentlemen were declared to be duly elected members of the Society :— Mr. Henry F. Q. D’Aligny, of New York. Mr. William P. Blake, of New Haven, Conn. Mr. George L. Vose, of Salem, Mass. Mr. J. Imbrie Miller, of Pennsylvania. Mr. Eckley B. Coxe, of Philadelphia. And the Society was adjourned. Stated Meeting, Nov. 4th, 1870. Vice-President, Prof. CRESSON, in the Chair. Present, eight members. Letters were read from Nassau Hall and Yale College, acknowledging the receipt of Proceedings and Transactions. The following letter was received from the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, transmitting copies of resolutions adopted by them on the subject of the establishment of a Botanic Garden in Fairmount Park, and asking concurrence, and the appointment of a committee. PHILADELPHIA, Wov. 2d, 1870. SIR :— In accordance with instructions, it is my agreeable duty to communicate to you the following action of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy. Ata Stated Meeting of the Board of Trustees of the Philadelphia College of Pharmacy, held November 1st, the following Resolutions were unani- mously adopted :— “* Resolved, That a Committee of three be selected to confer with the Park Commissioners, in conjunction with other Committees that may be A. P. §.—VOL. XI—38E Cresson. ] o 22 [Nov. 4, appointed for the same purpose, in reference to the establishment of a Botanical Garden in Fairmount Park.”’ In accordance with the above Resolution, the following Committee was selected :— Prof. William Proctor, Jr., Prof. Robert Bridges, M. D., Prof. John M. Maisch. It was also Resolved, ‘‘ That the Secretary be directed to communicate the action of this College to the President of the Park Commissioners, to the Horticultural Society, and to the American Philosophical Society.” I have the honor to be Yours, respectfully, ALFRED B. TAYLOR, Secretary. To Prof. GkorcE B. Woon, M. D., President of the American Philosophical Society. A letter transinitting a donation for the Library, was received from Mr. Abbe, of the Cincinnati Observatory. Dr. Lea took the Chair, and Prof. Cresson described the recent auroras, of one of which he presented for publication in the Proceedings, the following account :— An Auroral display occurred on the evening of the 24th of October, observed from half-past eight o’clock. A faint Auroral arch was visible to the north, extending from Cor Caroli, which was just setting, nearly to Castor, which was just rising, the elevation of the arc being equal to that of star Dubhe, in Ursa Major, which was nearly at its lowest culmi- nation. At the same time, a band, of ten degrees in width, of pink auroral light, spanned the heavens, apparently on an arc of a great circle, extending from the northwestern point, where the Northern Crown was -setting, to a point in the east, where Bellatrix, in Orion, was just rising, and passing through Menkar, in the head of the Whale, south of Aries, through Pisces and Aquarius, through the Dolphin, through the Eagle, with Altair near the centre of the band, south of Lyra, and through the head of Hercules. The average width of the luminous belt was about ten degrees, its median line corresponding very nearly with the celestial equator. Dr. Emerson informed the Society that the earthquake of October 20th, 1870, was felt in Canada, the New England States and New York. The strongest manifestations of it were along the St. Lawrence River, and especially on the shores of the Gulf of St. Lawrence, where the shocks were reported so severe as to occasion some loss of life. In certain 523 (Cresson. 1870.] quarters of New York city no movements were noticed, but in others shocks were felt to an alarming extent, driving people from their houses and workshops, and children from the public-school rooms, into the street, with a sensation of nausea or sea-sickness. Walls were cracked, clocks were stopped, articles were thrown from tables, steeples vibrated. See detailed account in the Scientific American of October 29th. Pending Nominations Nos. 661, 662 and 663, and New Nominations Nos. 664 and 665 were read. Prof. Wood offered the following resolution, which was adopted :— Resolved, That a Committee be appointed to act with Committees that may be appointed by other Societies, in the matter of procuring the establishment of a Botanic Garden in Fairmount Park. Prof. H.C. Wood, Prof. Jos. Carson, and Mr. Durand, were appointed said Committee; and, on motion of Mr. Price, the President, Dr. G. B. Wood, was added to the Committee. By request of Mr. Cuyler, who had been obliged by another engagement to retire from the meeting, Mr. Price asked that notice be given on the cards for the next meeting, that Mr. Cuyler will then present a proposition for the removal of the Society to Fairmount Park, with the view of obtaining an expression of the opinion of the members as to the expe- diency of such removal. And the Society was then adjourned. Stated Meeting, Nov. 21st, 1870. Vice-President, Mr. FRALEY, in the Chair. Present, twenty-four members. Letters accepting membership were received from Mr. Geo. L. Vose, dated Minneapolis, Minn., Nov. 14th, 1870, and Mr. Wm. P. Blake, dated New Haven, Conn., Nov. 18th, 1870. 524 aoe A letter acknowledging receipt of diploma of membership, was received from Mrs. Mary Somerville, dated Naples, Oct. 26th, 1870. Letters acknowledging the receipt of the Society’s publica- tions, were received from Sir J. F. W. Herschell (series); Mr. R. W. Fox (82); Leeds Phil. Soe. (83); Rhode Island Hist. Soc.; Georgia Hist. Soc.; Peabody Inst.; and Essex Institute (all 84); the Belgian Nealen (XM. 3; and 78.979" SOs: Amherst College (asking for deficiencies S be sansplllad) ; New York Lyceum; N. H. Mass’ Hist. Soc.; Howard College; New York State Library; and Penna. Hist. Soc. (all XIV, 2 and 84). Letters of envoy were received from the Belgian Acad., May 80; Holland Soc., July Ist (asking that deficiencies in. their series be supplied); Royal Geographical Soc., June 1; and the Ulm Art and Antiquity Union, March 6th, 1869, requesting an exchange of publications. On motion, the Ulm Art and Antiquity Union was ordered to be placed on the list of correspondence to receive the Proceedings. Donations were received from M. Zantedeschi, of Padua ; M. Finzi, of Florence; the Ulm Union; Judge Lowrie; the London R. Astron. Soc.; Mr. John Tyndall; Mr. John Lewis Peyton, of London; Prof. EH. Loomis, of Yale College; New York Lyceum N. Hist; Prof. T. Eggleston, Jr.; the Albany Institute; Franklin Institute; and the Minnesota Historical Society ; which, on motion, was ordered to be placed on the list of Correspondents to receive the Proceedings regularly. The Committee to which was referred Prof. Cope’s Memoir on the Ichthyology of the Maranon, reported in favor of its being published in the Proceedings, with wood-cut illustra- tions, which, on motion, was so ed Dr. Wm. Pepper read the following Toes y notice of Sin James Copland :— 1870.] 029 OBITUARY NOTICE OF THE LATE JAMES COPLAND, M. D. Read by Dr. William Pepper, before the American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, Nov. 21, 1870. It would be amiss to occupy any large share of the time of the Society by a lengthy eulogy upon the wise man, whose death has furnished the occasion of my remarks; yet in some respects the life of James Copland presented more of variety and vicissitude than falls to the lot of most students or practitioners of medicine. He was born in the Orkney Islands in November, 1791, and was the eldest of nine children. His early education was conducted at Lerwick, one of the Shetland Islands, but at the early age of sixteen, having decided to adopt the profession of medicine, he repaired to the justly renowned University of Edin- burgh, where he continued four years. In 1815, at the age of twenty-four, haying obtained his diploma, he turned his footsteps towards Jondon, following the example of a long list of distinguished predecessors. It is certainly strong testimony to the high standard of requirements, the great educational facilities, and the distinguished abilities of the Faculty at the University of Edinburgh, during the latter half of the last century, that so many of her graduates attained the highest eminence. It was to this school that we owed our own Kuhn, Rush, Morgan, Shippen, Wistar, and Physick, and many of the most successful and distinguished Physi- cians in London had migrated there from Edinburgh. Of all these eminent men not one sought the metropolis with a better equipment of vigorous health, strong and well trained mental powers, and indefatigable energy than Copland. Still he did not succeed in establishing himself there immediately, but within a few months after his arrival in London, crossed the channel to Paris, and spent two years in study at the French and German schools. Upon his return to London in 1817, he became one of the Health officers of the African Company, and spent twelve months on the Gold Coast. While there both his own exceptionally robust constitution and wide ex- perience in the treatment of fever and dysentery, underwent a severe trial, for not only was he obliged to treat and nurse almost the entire ship’s crew in an attack of yellow fever, but, after accomplishing this arduous duty, he was himself seized and was dangerously ill. He subsequently returned to England, but after paying a brief visit to his Oreadian home, he again crossed to France and spent some months in attendance on the Parisian Hospitals. It was not until 1820 that Copland, at the age of twenty-nine years, finally settled in London, and commenced an unbroken course of fifty years’ laborious study and practice. From this time his success was steady and uniform. In 1820 he was appointed Physician to the Royal Infirmary for Diseases of Children, a post which he subsequently changed for Senior and finally for that of Consulting Physician. In 1823 he was elected Con- sulting Physician to Queen Charlotte’s Lying-in Hospital. He was also sometime Physician to the South London Dispensary. His practice in- Pepper.] 526 [Nov. 21, om creased quite rapidly, and for many years before his death was among the largest and most lucrative in London. The professional honors which he re- ceived were numerous and distinguished. In 1833 he was made a Fellow of the Royal Society; in 1837 a Fellow of the Royal College of Physicians; in 1888 he was Gulstonian Lecturer; in 1841, 1842, and 1861 he was Censor of the College ; Croonian Lecturer in 1844, 1845, 1846 ; seven times Coun- cillor between 1844 and 1853; Lumleian Lecturer in 1854 and 1855 ; and Harveian orator in 1857 ; in 1858 he was elected President of the Royal Medico-Chirurgical Society. He was also honored by being made a mem- ber of many learned societies out of England ; and in Jan. 17, 1845, was elected a member of the American Philosophical Society at Philadelphia. Despite, however, the arduous practical duties of his profession he was indefatigable in literary laLors. He edited the ‘‘London Medical Re- pository ’’ for five years from 1822 to 1827, and contributed to it a vast number of articles He also edited Richerard’s Physiology in 1824; con- tributed notes to Griffith’s translation of Cuvier’s ‘‘ Animal Kingdom ;” assisted in the preparation of Annesely’s magnificent work on the Diseases of India, to such an extent that it is stated by one well informed that he may be considered its author. His occasional articles are too numerous to mention, but the great work of his life was his colossal ‘‘ Dictionary of Practical Medicine.’”? The idea of such an enterprise occupied his atten- tion as early as 1827, and he then issued a prospectus of a plan for bring- ing out an ‘‘Encyclopedial Dictionary of Medical Science.”” The un- dertaking was not accepted by the publishers, however, though they subeequently entered into an arrangement with Drs. Forbes, Conolly, and Tweedie, which resulted in the publication of an excellent Medical En- cyclopedia. Copland was not to be thus thwarted in his plan, and accordingly in 1830 he began, single-handed and unaided, the task of writing a similar work. The first part of this truly great work appeared in 1832, and others followed in regular succession, so that the greater part of it was published in the first three years, though the last two parts composing the Dictionary did not make their appearance until 1860, twenty-eight years after the first part. The entire work comprises about 7,000 closely printed double- columned royal octavo pages. The success of this publication was imme- diate and marked. Over 10,600 copies of the English edition were sold, it was reprinted in America and translated into German. It has also been reissued in an abridged form under the editorship of his nephew, Mr. James C. Copland. It is no exaggeration to say that but few more colossal literary works have ever been achieved by any au- thor. The number and yariety of the articles are only equaled by the profound erudition and great practical knowledge which they evince, and the vigor and clearness of the style in which they are composed. One of the most important features of the work, and which has endeared it to every true medical student, is the copious and exhaustive Bibliography appended to every article in the Dictionary. In the preparation of these Bibliographic lists, the acquirements and wide range of rcading of Copland are conspicuous. The work has served as a 1870. ] yA [Pepper. mine from which countless medical workers have extracted precious materials, which they have, in but too many instances, reissued without the stamp of the original and real author. Doubtless many of the theories and views expressed in it will be, ere long, superseded; many of the facts require rearrangement or new explanation ; but the work itself will long live and command the admiration of posterity as an enduring monu- ment to the great intellect, sustained ambition, and indomitable energy of James Copland. In person he was about the common height, of a robust build and striking countenance. In social life he possessed many friends, and was of a most generous and hospitable nature. For some years before his death he had retired from the active practice of his profession. He had suffered for a long time from gout, and for some years had had occasional attacks of rheumatism. His death occurred on July 12, 1870, in the 79th year of his age, after a severe illness of about ten days. Mr. Dubois made the following written communication respecting Lake Superior Silver Mines. Mr. Du Bois asks attention to a specimen of ore from the new silver- mining region on the ncrthern shore of Lake Superior. The precise location of the mine is on a very small island, about half-a-mile from the main land near Thunder Cape, to the east of Thunder Bay, and north of Isle Royale. Silver Island only measures-a few feet long and broad, out of the water, and it was necessary first to fence it with a coffer dam: it is still necessary to use the pump daily. They are now at work a few feet below the bed of the lake. Herewith two specimens are shown; one is the ore (in two pieces) ; the other is a button of fine silver extracted from precisely the same amount of ore. The comparison will give an idea of its surprising richness, and will also show how much may be hidden under an exterior not promising to a casual observer. The matrix is a calcareous spar, or carbonate of lime, with granular galena; the silver occurs in two conditions: mineralized in the galena, and native in small needle-shaped filaments, some of them visible with a glass. The return of this specimen was over $13,000 a ton; but as we are cautious of reporting such ores by such large measure, we gave it as $6.73 a pound. However, it turns out that they are really getting up tons of rich ore, and sending it to be smelted at Newark, New Jersey. Other specimens tried at the Mint yield about half as much as the extra- ordinary piece here shown. That Lake Superior shonld thus offer on its northern shore a bed of silver associated with lead; and on its southern shore a mixture of silver with copper, as well as copper alone ; is an interesting fact in mineralogy. That it should promise us more silver, at a time when we want it for cur- rency, is equally interesting in another point of view. The mine, although in Canada, is owned and worked by a company of our citizens, of Detroit and other places. 528 [Nov 21, 1870. Prof. Henry made a verbal communication of the doings of the International Commissioners who assembled at Paris last summer, to consider a revision of the French metre. Mr. Cuyler offered the following Preamble and Resolu- tions :— WueEREAS, The Building now owned and occupied by this Society has ceased to be central and convenient, and has also the disadvantage of affording only imperfect and unsafe accommodations to its Library and other valuable properties ; whilst those who desire to consult its Books and Manuscripts have not proper conveniences for that purpose ; and, WueErREas, It has been suggested that it may be practicable to enlarge the field of usefulness of this Society by adding to its other offices that of providing for and controlling the Observatory (both Astronomical and Meteorological), and for the Study and Recording of such other natural phenomena as may be appropriately observed and investigated in connec- tion with such an Institution, and that for these purposes the removal of the Society from its present location, and its re-establishment in Fair- mount Park, is desirable and practicable, therefore be it Resolved, That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and requested to appoint two Special Committees, each of which shall consist of a Chairman and four other members, and with each of which Com- mittees the President is requested to meet and act as an additional member. Resolved, That to one of these Committees shall be entrusted the duty of digesting the plan for such an Observatory as is described in the Pre- ambie, so far as, in their judgment, it is expedient this Society should undertake the work of its establishment, and that they be requested also to describe such instruments as it is requisite should be provided for use therein, and an estimate of their cost, together with an estimate of the probable annual expense of maintaining and conducting such an Insti- tution. Resolved, That the other Committee shall be charged with the duty of considering the financial questions which are involved in such changes as are contemplated by the Preamble and the preceding Resolutions, and of reporting to the Society how the funds requisite for such an undertaking can be provided. Dr. Carson moved that the further consideration of the Preamble and Resolutions offered by Mr. Cuyler, be postponed to a special meeting of the Society, to be held on the evening of the second Friday in December, notice of which should be given to all the members of the Society, with a printed copy of the Preamble and Resolutions; which was ordered. And the Society was adjourned. Noy. 18, 1870.] [Cope. ON THE SAURODONTID A. By Epwarp D. Corn, A. M. Read before the American Philosophical Society, November 18th, 1870. The genus Saurocephalus of Harlan and its allies have been referred to the neighborhood of the Acanthopterygian family of the Sphyrenide by Prof. Agassiz in his Poissons Fossiles, after having been regarded by Harlan and Hays as reptilian. This was an important step in the right expression of its affinities ; but I take the present opportunity of making another progress in the true interpretation of its relations, favored as I am by the opportunity of examining new material not accessible to former authors. My conclusion, it will be observed, differs widely from that heretofore maintained. ; Some years after Harlan’s description of Sawrocephalus lanciformis appeared, Dr. Hays described a second species under the name of Sau- rodon leanus. This I believe to represent a genus distinct from the former. A third genus more remote is characterized in the present article. The characters of first importance which may be assigned to these genera are :— Vertebre short, numerous; their neural arches united with centrum by persistent suture. Tail vertebrated or heterocercal. Superior arch of the mouth formed by the short premaxillaries and long maxillaries. Teeth one-rowed, with fangs received into alveoli more or less confluent at their openings. Anal or caudal radii*with complex segmentation. These characters are most of them entirely contradictory of any affinity to the Sphyreenide, those presented by the vertebrz indicating a nearer approach to Amia. The structure of the mouth is not that of any Acanthopterygian fish, and with the complex segmentation of some of the radii approaches nearer such types as the Characinide. The form of the vertebral centra is utterly different from that of the Sphyrznide: in the Saurodontide they are short, little contracted medially, and deeply grooved on the sides ; in the Sphyreenide, elongate, much contracted, and exceptional among Teleosts in being smooth and grooveless ! The characters presented by the teeth and vertebrze of Saurocephalus remind one much of Serrasalmo, though the genus is no doubt in other respects widely removed from that group. On the characters above enumerated, I propose the family Saurodontide. Its precise position I am not prepared to determine at present, though I have little doubt that Amia is its nearest living ally. With the remains of species of this group occur numerous scales, which may belong to the former. They are cycloid and without ganoine. The three genera are distinguished by the form of their jaws and teeth: in Saurocephalus the crowns are shortened, much compressed, and with sharp edges; in Saurodon the crowns are elongate, subcylindric and slightly curved near the apex. In Ichthyodectes the teeth are similar A. P. S.—VOL. XI—39E. Cope. } 5 30 [Nov. 18, to those of Saurodon; but the margins of both jaws are without the large foramina so prominent in both the other genera. There appear to be some important differences also in the vertebre, which will be men- tioned below. In the Transactions of the American Philosophical Society for 1856, Dr. Leidy treats Saurocephalus as a Sphyrznoid fish, and regards Sau- rodon aS a synomyme. He corrects the erroneous references of some European authors, showing the Saurocephalus of Dixon to be a Xiphias, and the Saurodon of Agassiz to be some other genus which he calls Cimolichthys, without characterizing it. This form is supposed to be established on palatine teeth, and if so, is well distinguished, as it will be seen below, that Saurocephalus has no teeth on the palatine bones. He also refers two other species of supposed Sawrocephalus of Agassiz to a new genus called Protosphyrena, without characters. This I think rests on mandibular teeth of true Saurocephali. SAUROCEPHALUS. Harlan. Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. III. 837. Xiphactinus Leidy Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. 1870. 12. SAUROCEPHALUS LANCIFORMIS. Harlan l. c. Med. and Phys. Researches, 862. Leidy Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1856. Tab. Saurodon lanciformis, Hays Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1830, 476. Established on a right superior maxillary bone from a locality near the Missouri river. It differs from that of the other species in having a very elongate superior suture with the premaxillary bone, and in the very short dental crowns, which are as wide as deep. The largest species; known from the jaw. SAUROCEPHALUS PHLEBOTOMUS. Cope sp. nov. Established on some vertebree and portions of the cranium, the latter including the dentary, maxillary, part of the premaxillary, the palatine and vomerine bones, compressed into a mass by pressure, the separate pieces preserving nearly their normal relations, From the latter the fol- lowing characters may be derived : Palatine bones toothless; teeth of both maxillary and dentary, with compressed crowns, which are longer than wide at; base, and closely placed, those of the dentary twice as large as those of the maxillary. Maxillary bone proximally deep; dentary shallower, the maxillary with elongate suture with the premaxillary behind. The teeth are equilateral, without intermarginal groove or barb, and with smooth enamel surface, or only minutely striate under the micro- scope. A series of larger foramina extends along the alveolar margin of the maxillary and dentary bones, one foramen to each tooth. The alve- ole are confluent as they approach this margin. There are three vertebra, which present two pairs of deep longitudinal grooves, viz.: two on each side, two on the inferior, and two on the supe- 1870.] odl [Cope. rior face of the bone ; the last receives the basal articulation of the hama- pophyses. The centra are crushed, their measurements with those of the jaws are as follows: M MEMS EMEC EMULUIN Pert retrete els c's shois) im cletecareclaveraielie\«) y= /0 sla lala = 031 Depth dentary 69 OTT ERA PAG ERT eas od INE MIT Stores ats cote .015 ene thmeroyminterion tooth .).5 if nf. se okie react: fstakinved, SRIsbale peels 006 Number ‘“ ge Sooper. Od mins pif at hanet cumemtds Repsskpncaeels 6 3 ss «¢ superior ‘‘ CSPGs anh tmnoceycncke cis Bay. piershaa iy, 1 4.5 Length crown ce fie BOTT IRA CISTI OI aS CRE HIS Reece Caton OETA .0046 The vertebree are about as large as those of a fully grown ‘‘ drum fish,”’ Pogonias. From the yellow chalk of the upper Cretaceous of Kansas, found on the Solomon or Nepaholla River, Kansas, at a point 160 miles above its mouth, by Professor B. F. Mudge, Professor of Natural Science in the State Agricultural College of Kansas. I append a description of some caudal vertebre of a species probably different from the S. phlebotomus. It is indicated by three consecutive caudal vertebree which resemble those of S. prognathus and S. thaumas, but which differ also considerably from both ; the several arches and spines are of very great width: in S. thawmas they are narrow, and in 8. prog- nathus, as wide, but here their width exceeds the depth and equals the length of the centrum. As in the other caudals, the lateral grooves are wanting and the inferior pair remain separated by alamina. The neural suture is very distinct, and not two angled as in S. prognathus, but with a median decurvature and rise anteriorly. The neural spines are twice as wide as deep and lie on each other. The third vertebra is shorter than the others and contracted distally ; it is probably the penultimate of the series ; neural canal minute. Surface striate ridged. Measurements. : M. Mengti centrum anterior vertebras cy. deeeee ete aoe eens 0.021 Depth ss (at-middle)lanterior wertebras-s-. 1-24 0465- 06 015 Madthencuralareh. at base spine.cmessececse sates. coe a aaeine te ale -010 De pulySpiNe’s. iva oes es ook eee TE. Be EE 0072 Renophithirdivertebra...2 0). 20082 16 Ol cic Wek ChEIAD Pe IA 01385 Wadthinieurall archaea. See Le Ree eas Fe ae 014 es Or niki CHUTE AREAS Ont AER GRE GRE RAN il lhe Sig ane Seat a ad a .0176 From a point twenty miles east of Fort Wallace, Kansas. Professor Mudge’s collection. In this species the vertebre in question are longer in proportion to their other dimensions than in those described, besides carrying wider neural arches and spines. Cope.] O02 LNov. 18, SAUROCEPHALUS PROGNATHUS. Cope sp. nov. This species is represented by a premaxillary and attached proximal portion of the maxillary bones of the right side, and by a large number of vertebre and other bones. These portions were associated in the collections placed in my hands by Prof. Mudge, and relate to each other in size, as do those of the preceding species and the Ichthyodectes ctenodon. The premaxillary is characterized by its great depth as compared with its length, and by the shortness of its union with the maxillary. The palatine condyle of the maxillary reaches a point above the middle of the alveolar margin of the premaxillary. The latter contains alveole of seven teeth, the anterior of which only presents a perfect crown. This is still more elongate than the crown of the teeth of S. phiebotomus. It is com- pressed, equilateral, smooth, and acute. Its direction is even more ob- liquely forward than the anterior outline of the bone, which itself makes an angle of 50° with the alveolar border. ‘ The vertebre consist of cervicals, dorsals, and caudals, to’ the number of about sixty, most of which are supposed to have been derived from the same animal. The groves are as in S. phlebotomus, there being two be- low, two on each side, and two above. The latter receives the bases of the neurapophyses, which are in many cases preserved. The inferior pair of grooves becomes more widely separated as we approach the cervical series, leaving an inferior plane, which is longitudinally striate grooved. This plane widens till the grooves bounding it disappear. The inferior lateral groove becomes widened into a pit which some of the specimens show to have been occupied by a plug-like parapophysis, as in Hlops, etc., or a rib-head of similar form. The neurapophysial articular grooves be- come pits anteriorly, and these only of all the grooves, remain on the ante- rior two vertebra in the collection. Some of the posterior caudals preserve large portions of the neural arches and spines. They form an oblique zigzag suture with the body, consisting of two right angles, one project- ing upward anteriorly another downward behind. The neural spines are very wide and massive and in close contact antero-posteriorly ; these probably support the caudal fin. They are deeply and elegantly grooved from the basis upwards. The centra exhibit no lateral grooves. An unsymmetrical fin ray accompanied these remains, and from its mineralization, color, size, and sculpture, probably belongs to them. The anterior margin is thinned, and with obtuse denticulations, the posterior truncate. The section is lenticular, with a deep rabbet on one side of the posterior edge ; section at the base, apex circular lost. The sculpture consists of fine longitudinal raised strie, which bifurcate and send nnmerous similar ridges to the teeth of the anterior margin. It is pro- bably a spine of a pectoral fin. It is identical in form and sculpture with that recently described by Leidy as X¢phactinus audaa, but differs in specific details. 9 1870.] 538 [Cope. M Mon oydinmeter Of spinerrde ripe store afoletclelaltelaibelcietoloieret jalalcietatayetetet ake ce 0.0245 Basal € Cetiade se iPVeNAS crcy sh «dot sist Susy NG Useseene Wavolnde rumtete a, MOROPNER a .019 Length, two cervicals (not distorted).............00.00.50-2-.e08 033 IDiametersomuIe anteriores cielo eel e-lo ti cierctelstatee aloetolstel ay clelei 021 Hem obin ota dorsal ses oy Lisa erp bates, Stel ots )e/steke ney stiel ao) sioiete ators Pe Do eps BUG sé GG! GEOR lets Gas ERS CRS chore einaks Simisoln Bete cee Re EID tito. oania Iori 014 _ Width neural spine of caudal, at base.....................-..008- .012 Length alveolar margin premaxillary.....................2000. 27022 ‘¢ anterior ‘‘ Cae SRN lale Ut Enea Cuatce al aeeiey Mice CARIES Coe Lua .02 Wenihsiromicondyleror maxillary rycen ger rt cleesls) ace a= olalelelore 026 itenethycrownlpremaxdllaryGoobli.)(¢ $202. doers. laeicts oi ie nice cle ee = 0042 Diameter’ ‘ a TANTRA. eliototctis Hh Meio tee ore An et 002 A fragment of a large flat bone exhibits very delicate radiating grooves which are marked by spaced impressed dots. From the upper Cretaceous of Kansas, six miles south of the town of Sheridan. Prof. B. F. Mudge. This species was about two thirds the size of the species last described. SAUROCEPHALUS AUDAX. Leidy, sp. Xiphactinus audaz. WLeidy. Proc. A. N. Sci. Phil. 1870, 12. Established on a pectoral spine, supposed by Leidy to be that of a Siluroid. According to the description, it does not differ from that of 9. prognathus in more than specific characters. Thus the anterior margin is weakly serrate in the latter, a feature not described by Leidy in the former. In S. audaz the posterior portions of both sides are said to be grooved , in that part of the spine of S. prognathus preserved, one surface only exhibits the groove in question, one of whose edges is obliquely ridged, as in S. audaz. From Kansas; museum Smithonian. SAUROCEPHALUS THAUMAS. Cope sp. Nov. This is larger than any of the species here described. It is represented by wholes or parts of from seventy to eighty vertebra, with numerous neural and hemal spines and fin radii, and perhaps some ribs. There are no teeth nor cranial fragments. The bulk of the vertebre is double that of those of S. phlebotomus, and appropriate to an animal of the size of the 9. lanciformis. It may be ultimately found to be identical with that species ; but there is no evidence conclusive of such a view at present in my possession. The vertebre present the usual two inferior, two lateral, and two superior grooves—the last for the neural arch. There are no cervical vertebre, for these characters show them all to be dorsals and caudals. The suture for the neurapophyses forms a regular angulate convexity projecting downwards. The arch is not closed above anteriorly, and is expanded laterally, while the spine is directed very obliquely backwards. The concavities of the articular extremities are equal in the dorsals ; but in the caudals one surface is much more deeply concave than the other, one being funnel-shaped, and the other nearly plane in a few. oye O34 [ov. 18, A number of consecutive vertebre are preserved, which represent the posterior portion of the caudal series. One of these is fortunately the very extremity, and they demonstrate the tail to have been vertebrated or heterocercal, after the manner of Amia. On the anterior series of three the lateral grooves have disappeared from the centra; the neural canal is very small, and the spines are very massive and curved back- wards, but much less than in the more posterior parts of the column ; they are flattened, wider than deep, and in close contact with each other. . The anterior of the three, on the other hand, presents a narrowed edge forwards. The hemapophyses are thin, and suturally united by a flat gomphosis. The terminal series embraces six vertebrae, which have a minute or obsolete neural canal, but heemal canal distinct, but apparently interrupted. The hemal arches are united to the centra by a rather smooth suture. The general direction of these vertebre forms a light upward curve. The hemal spines are flat and laminar, and their margins in contact 5 they decrease in width and length to the end of the series. The neural spine lies obliquely backwards, and has a narrowed anterior ridge, but stout shaft. The anterior hemal spine in place exhibits a subglobular base, like an articulation, and its shaft is wider than those posterior toit. A sub- triangular flat bone, with neck and subglobular extremity, applies very well to a concavity between the anterior pair of pleurapophyses, but does not in that position preserve contact with the anterior margin of the second spine. One margin of the enigmatical bone is thin and divergent ; the other expanded laterally and straight. The latter gives off a trans- verse prominence like half a globular knob before reaching the extremity. Just within the latter are two large foramina, which are connected with the extremity by a groove on each side, which meet in a notch where the thin edge passes into the knob. Both sides of the neural and hemal spines are concealed in this species and in the S. prognathus by numerous parallel osseous rods, which are somewhat angulate in section. They lie along the centra of the anterior series of caudal vertebra, but are not to be found on vertebra of any other part of the column. Numerous loose and fragmentary rods of the same character accompany the loose and attached caudal vertebre, and all of them, according to Prof. Mudge, belong to the ‘‘posterior swim- ming organ” of this animal. There is also a collection of these rods from the anterior region of the body, which Prof. Mudge thought occu- pied the position of an anterior limb. They do not any of them present a segmentation such as would be exhibited by the cartilaginous radii of caudal and pectoral fins, and their nature might have remained doubtful but for the explanation furnished by the anterior compound ray or spine of the posterior, probably caudal fin. This ray, as in the case of the pectoral spine and first anal rays of some existing Siluroid and Loricariid fishes, is composed of a number of parallcl rods closely united. These 535 1870.] 53: [Cope. are in their distal portions remarkably and beautifully segmented, of which a very simple form has been figured by Kner, as existing in the pectoral spine of the Siluroid genus, Pangasius. This segmentation becomes more obscure proximally, and finally disappears altogether, leaving the spine and rods homogeneous. This portion of them is quite identical with the rods found in the positions of fins already described, and I therefore regard these as fin radii of the attenuated form presented by cartilaginous rays of most fishes, but ossified sufficiently to destroy the segmentation. They are thusin the condition of the anterior rays of the dorsal fin of some of the large Catostomidze, where they are proximally homogeneous and bony, distally segmented and cartilaginous. This is an important character when found in pectoral and caudal fins, and such as I have not found described. It adds another feature to the definition of this group. The segmentation above alluded to presents the following characters. The spine consists of four principal parallel rods, of which the external on each side thins, the one to an obtuse, the other toa thin edge. The more obtuse edge presents a groove on one side, which is occupied by a very slender rod, and a shallow rabbet along the flat edge is occupied by a slender flat red. Of the four principal rods the two median are the most slender, and the flat marginal the widest. Of the two median, that next the last is the wider. The stout marginal, or probably anterior rod, is segmented en chevron, the angle directed forwards and lying near the free margin. The suture of the segments is entirely straight, except when returning it approaches the margin, where it suddenly turns to the margin at right angles to it. The next rod is segmented without chevron obliquely backwards and inwards; where it leaves and reaches the margins, it is at right angles to them, and the margin projects obtusely at those points. Between them the suture is very irregular and jagged, sending processes forwards and backwards. The segmentation of the next rod is similar, but more regularly serrate; distally it becomes as irregular as in the last. The transverse marginal termini of the sutures are serrate in both. The inner and widest rod presents a still more regularly serrate suture, with the truncate extremities ; but, owing to the width of the rod, the near approximation of the sutures continues for a longer distance. When broken, the suture appears step-like, This remarkably beautiful segmentation is paralleled remotely, as has been stated, by some Siluroids. Much more like the recent type are the segmented rays of the carboniferous genus, Edestus of Leidy, regarded variously by authors as a jaw or a ray; but now generally regarded asa ray. Measurements. M. Meng th iragment of (?)caudal spime... 1... 2 aja. ss 6 ee Bans see 0.25, Width uC AN jORODANTME| GHRNGADURS. 6 obo oc cob baGdedabeanodsoe .06 Greatest thickness es SCR Nia hse Aaa eR hs ats nadie" :018 - Width posterior rod sf a A ea 0245 Mengthiot six distal caudal vertepree..sj.s.ss-0 62+ ost ee weet ee .10 Kor Cope. ] d00 [Nov. 18, M. Width hzemal spine of second of series....................- Boos ollzH! Vertical diameter centrum first TN TEMPE AVERSA Adio cs 6 025 Length of neural spine and centrum of anterior caudal.......... 108 Transverse diameter of neural spine a “¢at base.... .0285 Antero-post. diam. four anterior caudal neural spines in contact.. .069 Length centrum of a dorsal.............. fale Scjagstetol sts ais se tener 404 AVertical diame teres si yes sisal tea Gavel pe eins ascliviegs eftiere ree eee 0615 Transverse ‘‘ Se hen fe) GCLUS TCG!) aeeyrag levels tictercogteehsets tastes ace e 041 These remains were found in place by Prof. B. F. Mudge: he states that their extent was eight feet. As they embrace no cervical vertebree nor portions of cranium, two feet are probably to be added, giving a total of near ten feet for the length of this fish. It was discovered at a point on the bank of the Solomon’s or Nepaholla river, in Kansas, 160 miles | from its point of junction with the Kansas river. SAURODON Hays. Transac. Amer. Philosoph. Society, 1830, 476. SAURODON LEANUS, Hays. Loe. cit. Tab. xvi. Leidy Trans. Am. Philos. Soc. 1856. From the cretaceous green sand of New Jersey. ICHTHYODECTES. Cope, gen. nov. In this genus the teeth are subcylindric and slender, without cutting edges. The inner margins of the maxillary and dentary bone exhibit no dental foramina, which are in Saurocephalus and Saurodon, of large size. ICHTHYODECTES CTENODON. Cope, sp. nov. This species is established on one complete maxillary bone, and three- fourths of the other, a large part of the dentary bone, with the entire dental series ; numerous portions of cranial bones, with thirteen vertebra. These, according to Prof. Mudge, were found together, and to all appear- ance belong to the same animal. 3 The dental characters differ from those of Saurocephalus, as above pointed out, and in this species more than in S. leanus. The crowns of the teeth are more exserted and slender. The inner face of the crown is more convex than the outer; but there is no angle separating the two aspects. The apex is moderately acute, and directed a little inwards, owing to a slight convexity of the external face. Enamel smooth. The alveoli are very close together, and are probably only separated in their deeper portions. There are forty-two teeth and alveoli in the maxillary bone. The palatine condyle is low, and its anterior border falls opposite to the last tooth, or the indented surface which was occupied by the pre- maxillary bone. The more proximal part of the maxillary curves inwards and backwards behind the position of the premaxillary more than in S. prognathus. The maxillary is a rather thin and narrow bone, with a For 1870.] O87 ae [Cope. broad obtuse and thinned extremity. Its superior margin is marked with one or more acute ridges, which look as though it had a contact with a large preorbital bone. Two fractured bones with an elongate reniform condyle on a wide peduncle, look like the articular extremity of an oper- culum, which view is confirmed by their application to some flat, coarsely rugose bones which resemble parts of the latter. The dentary bone is remarkable for its straightness and laminar char- acter, and for the depth of the symphysis. The length of the latter is preserved, while posteriorly to it the lower margin of the dentary is breken away. The alveolar margin is slightly concave, and unites with the symphyseal at an angle of 65°. There are twenty-seven teeth and alveole, which grow a little larger to the posterior extremity of the series ; anteriorly the alveoli are confluent externally, but posteriorly the septa are frequently complete, though thin. In neither this bone nor the maxillary are to be found the foramina along the bases of the teeth, cha- racteristic of Sawrocephalus or Saurodon leanus, as pointed out by Harlan and Hays. The vertebree forma series of 13.4 inches in length, embracing thirteen caudals. This is indicated by the close approximation of the inferior pits and inserted pleurapophyses, and absence of lateral grooves. There are important differences from what has been described as charac- teristic of Saurocephalus. The neural arches, whose bases only are pre- served, are much lighter and narrower than in it, and its sutural union with the centrum is less distinct. Their bases issue from pits; but their anterior portions appear in some cases at least to be co-ossified. They exhibit a longitudinal rib near one side. There are no heavy neural spines preserved. The sides of the centra are longitudinally rugose striate ; inferiorly they are rugose with exostoses. Measurements. MM. enetbymacalla mys Onels. Vrach eso cee seen n ee cei Kiso ce 0.158 epi lietpcomdyle wy cerita: Melee tctahhh eRV cone amen ateasia, oys\ale 031 SONI SEAT ICSRIRSICUL M/E mtcrg SECO GIy Herel ercrca eM ei ic er aoe eNana en EMER ae 022 ILEDVAAN GHONTN OL Ly WOOU DA So eo oE CO ne Ne bloT Ube oe en cere ee eno ce 0061 Dame LETACLOMAIEAL DASE tei ee eI Sele aoe ecu el aek cae 003 Heneulmalyeolanlborder OL enbaliyr qe ook 4 else ee en ) 1870. | 583 [Cope. CLIDASTES CINERIARUM, Cope. The largest species of this genus as indicated by the zygosphen articu- lation of the vertebree. The locality where it was found is the same as the last, but the specimeus were taken from the gray bed, perhaps the same that produced the Hlasmosaurus platywrus, Cope. They consist of vertebre and ptery- goid teeth. There are two anterior dorsals, three lumbars, and one caudal. The articular faces of the caudals are broad vertical ovals. They increase in width on the lumbars till on the last of these they assume the sub- pentagonal form characteristic of many species, and which is still moie marked on the caudal. The centrum of the anterior dorsal is much com- pressed ; inferiorly, slightly concave longitudinally, regularly and promi- nently convex transversely. Conversely, the rims of the cup and ball are strongly expanded, the latter with surrounding groove. The diapophyses of the lumbars are of considerable length, exceeding in this respect those of Mosasawrus we possess, where these parts are preserved. On the median of the lumbars the inferior surface of the centrum first becomes truncate or plane, and separated from that below the diapophyses, which become slightly concave. The expansion of the ball becomes more ab- rupt and striking on these vertebre. The caudal is a little more com- pressed than the lumbars, and presents the character of codssified chevron bones. These are slender and longitudinally grooved. A single pterygoid tooth was found in the matrix on one of the dorsals. The basis is short and much swollen; the crown curved, acute, a little compressed, and with an obtuse cutting edge posteriorly. Measurements. Vertebre, &c , from brown bed. M. Anterior dorsal, length centrum..................2..0-:: 0.0608 HG O83. Glooun ayeni@nlkye ANN sees oodde swe aeeuene 6 038 f “¢ width a vite iiaitrady Seayee purer cheneeel cst eue Nae .088 ‘¢ diameter behind diapophyses..... Ret AK, 029 a en Gepihpariculartace Ton abeaeaee ee cee 022 umibarveslene Lhecentrunl eee eee eer mer arin ie .06 AS CRSA TOE es pigoina sod ues roel oc come ete 037 ac APUG LIEN Bich Fay 2s ene icy Bie tT rane is kai7) > SARS eee MRI 089 ee length remnant of diapophysis................. 046 a IN@, By Weiaedd ny COMBATING 6g a usoo cea dudumououo ues 055 i AW ACLLNEZ COSC ycnvyey eee iL eek -us tanto) ee .0182 Caudalglengthyee nt nmin. toc tareysleri epee oretes a clove oes 041 o¢ CS] DOV GDN ora Gaus otras Bae eee N Or blo oc Seis erates 04 s WANA G Salo do UDO ME OC ee COE oe he OO OO ee ener D een 04 a HbaAsiscdiapopliysisee. i wares acer cl ack iia can 0245 fs Samet Ween. Chev GONEEAN IE eel mirls jer yn eese .0115 Prenycorditoothpheight crowilses. -piyis- eve aces teens ae 0125 as “a diameterspedestalous ease cee eens: 013 Goodwin.] 584 [Dec. 46, This species was found by Prof. Mudge near the locality of the Liodon mudget, six miles south of Sheridan, Kansas. It is only necessary to compare this species with CO. intermedius, Leidy,* as the C. iguanavus and C. propython have depressed vertebral centrz. Those of the first are rounded, of the present compressed. The C. intermedius also agrees with the two others in the obliquity of the articular faces to the vertical transverse plane of the centrum; in the present species these planes are parallel. This species is also larger than the C. iguanavus, Cope; the C. intermedius is smaller. There is another species from New Jersey to which it is more nearly allied, a vertebra of which I have described under the head of ZLiodon levis (Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc., 1869, 205), and figured 1. c. Tab. V. fig. 5, under the erroneous name Macrosaurus validus. This probably does not belong to the Liodon levis, which does not possess the zygosphen articulation but is most likely allied to the present species, and a true Clidastes. When compared with a vertebra from the same position in the column as determined by the position of the diapophyses, the articu- lar faces are still more compressed, and the inferior surface of the centrum instead of being regularly convex, forms a plane separated from lateral coneayities by an obtuse angle. There is less expansion of the margins of the cup and ball. The size is also greater. I propose to distinguish this species as Clidastes antivalidus, Cope. It is from the darker stratum of the green sand near Medford, New Jersey. Obituary Notice of SAMUEL VAUGHAN MeERRIck, Esq., by DanieL R. Goopwin, D. D. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 16, 1870.) Mr. Samuel Vaughan Merrick, who died on the 18th of August last, was, at the time of his decease, among the oldest members of this Society. Elected in 1833, his membership covered more than the average period of a generation. His wasa noiseless and unobtrusive, but an eminently active and beneficent life, moving on like the current of a deep and quiet river, silently depositing the accumulations of rich alluvium along its banks, and bearing the freighted wealth of thousands upon its bosom. He was not what iscommonly recognized as a great or a distinguished man. His life does not stand out before us in bold relief, in marked individuality, leay- ing upon the mere casual observer the impression of its definite outline ; but was buried and mingled in the moving and surging mass of the world around him. It might be thought fitting, therefore, to dismiss our notice of him in a few passing words ; but to me there seem to be special rea- sons, in this very peculiarity of the case, for pursuing an opposite course; and I shall, therefore, ask the indulgence of the Society in giving a some- what greater extension to this paper than is usual; though less, after all, than the subject, in my judgment, demands. Great usefulness was Mr. * Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1870, p. 4, 1870.] D085 (Goodwin. Merrick’s distinction. Solidity, energy, practical sagacity, were his char- acteristics. In the wildly moving and fermenting mass with which his life was mixed up, it was ever a guiding and propelling element of pro- gress, and a leavening element of good, but an element requiring some attention and study for its distinct apprehension and full appreciation. If we have more men of this kind of greatness than of the other, we have reason to rejoice in the fact. A community in which such men abound need never be ashamed, unless social improvement and happiness are occa- sions for humiliation. This is a Philosophical Society; but we are not, and we need not all be philosophers in the narrower technical sense. He who leaves the world in a high degree better, wiser and happier, for his having lived init, is either, in the large and more generous sense, a philosopher, or something more and better than a philosopher. It is true, that classifications of men are always deficient in logical pre- cision. They express only leading tendencies or marked degrees. But one of the most general, and, at the same time, most simple and fruitful in its applications, is the two-fold division into men of thought and men of action. But these two classes are not to be kept aloof from each other, still less to be arrayed in mutual conflict. They are reciprocally comple- mentary and helpful. One aim of this Society is, to aid in bringing them into their appropriate relation to each other. And few among us have labored more successfully for the accomplishment of this end, or have pre- sented in themselves a better illustration of the happy union of these two characters, than Mr. Merrick. To suppose that this Society was designed to embrace only men of mere thought, that it confines its mission to mere speculation or pure science, is a great mistake. Its aim is eminently practical. It seeks thought, scientific observation, certainly; but it seeks _ thought only as related to its applications. It would utilize thought, and it would rationalize action. It would reduce action under the stimulus and guidance of thought; and it would provoke thought to its intensest and, at the same time, its most healthful exertion on the field of action. This Society is not the arena of combat, but the armory and foyer of the combatants; it is not the theatre of action, but the post-scenitum of the actors. It seeks to bring thought into its widest play as well as its fullest development. It aims to make thought permeate and leaven the mass. Not only do we, therefore, welcome men of action rising into the sphere of thought, but we admire and cheer on men of thought descending into the dust and struggle of action. The dignity of labor is the true dignity of man. To enforce this truth is one of the highest aims of this Society. The elevation of man is the noblest end of philosophy. It is in this view that Mr. Merrick’s career presents itself in its true significance, and in its proper relations to this Sogiety. This will best appear from a rapid sketch of his life and character. Mr. Merrick was born at Hallowell, Maine, on the 4th of May, 1801. His father, John Merrick, was a man of marked character, and extraordinary mental vigo:. In 1798 he came to this country from England, where he (S Goodwin. ] 086 [Dee. 16, had been educated for the Unitarian pulpit. Not finding in this his voca- tion, he lived in Hallowell as a gentleman of retired leisure, or rather, of great and varied and beneficent activity. The mcther was a daughter of Samuel Vaughan, Esq., a merchant of London. His brother, John Vaughan, uncle of our Samuel Vaughan Merrick, was, for a long series of years, identified with this Society, as its Librarian and Secretary. He is remembered with affectionate respect for his genial social qualities, and for his rare benevolence and kindness of heart. He cared for the stranger. Every foreigner, of whatever nationality, who chanced to be in Philadel- phia, found in him more than the official consul of his country,—a sym- pathizing friend. In his uncle’s business house, our 8. V. Merrick was placed at the age of 15, to be trained as a wine merchant. At the age of 19, a proposition was made to him to leave that business, and enter an opening which pre- sented itself for the manufacture of machinery. This was to exchange the profession of the merchant for that of the mechanic,—a step which it is significant to observe was at that day regarded as involving little less than social degradation. Young Merrick, in the full determination to hew his own way in the world, accepted the offer, doffed his coat, and rolled up his sleeves to the work. The firm of Merrick & Agnew was established ; and soon gained unusual celebrity as manufacturers of im- proved Fire-engines. Professors in New England colleges used to ex- hibit these engines to their classes as illustrations in mechanics and speci- mens of American ingenuity and workmanship.* Young Merrick rapidly developed, under his own teaching, a remark- able engineering and mechanical talent. After some years he was ready to enlarge his field of operations; the ‘“‘Southwark Foundry’’ was established; the firm of ‘‘ Merrick and Towne’’ was founded in 1837, and entered into the general and extensive manufacture of various kinds of machinery and apparatus, particularly of steam engines and boilers. Asan illustration of the energy and enterprise of the firm may be mentioned the fact, that, at so early a period and in the infancy of mechanical engineering in this country, they contracted for and constructed the engines of the U.S. Steam frigate Mississippi, which proved to be one of the speediest, safest, most trustworthy and serviceable ships in the navy. It was chiefly due to the faithfulness, skill, and perfect finish with which her machinery was constructed, that abroad, as wellas at home, she became an object of national pride. In her Commodore Perry made his visit to Japan and rode out the cyclones of the China sea; and she continued high in the list for effective service, until, on the night of the 14th of March, 1863, she ran aground and was blown up under the guns of Port Hudson. In 1849 Mr. Towne retired from the firm, which was continued under the *Later in life, Mr. Merrick retained his early interest in the improvement of Fire Engines, al- though they were no longer manufactured at his works; and for many years he took personally an active and leading part in the Fire Department, until he secured the introduction of the Steam Fire Engines throughout the city. 1870.] O87 [Goodwin. well-known style of ‘‘ Merrick and Son,’’ and * Merrick and Sons,”’ al- though Mr. Merrick’s active connection with it ceased from the year 1860. The development of this great business establishment was the main work of his life, and he persevered in it for a period of near a quarter of a century. He retired from it with large wealth honorably acquired in a business whose great private gains were conditioned upon conferring im- mensely greater public benefits; in works and enterprises which sensibly contributed to the growth and prosperity of the city and to the welfare of the state. He retired when the establishment which he had reared was still in the flood tide of success, for it was never more active or useful than during the years of the late rebellion. At an early period in his career, Mr. Merrick became deeply impressed with the importance to mechanics, for their success and elevation, of more thought and intelligence, of more acquaintance with the progress of mechanical arts and inventions, and of more of mutual intercourse and social stimulus. With this view he projected and urged forward the establishment of the Franklin Institute ; and it may be said, I think, without disparagement to the claims of any other of its original members, that no man has a better title to be considered its fownder than Mr. Merrick. For a long series of years he continued one of its most active and honored members ; until, from its small and unpretenticus beginnings, as little more than an association of mechanics for mutual improvement, it was developed into the chief centre of practical science in the city, be- came an honor to Philadelphia, and enjoyed a familiar national and European reputation. _ Tn one point of view the Franklin Institute has taken as its specialty and almost absorbed into itself one portion of the work which pertains to the general scope of this Society. Among our own founders was Ben- jamin Franklin himself, a most thorough utilitarian, who always regarded science with an eye to its practical applications, and considered them among the principal motives for all scientific effort and enquiry. And, in general, so far as the founders of this Society were philosophers, they were eminently Socratic philosophers ; and such is the philosophy which they designed the Society they established always to represent. The Franklin Institute may, therefore, be considered as an offshoot, or a department, or a section—not in form but in fact—of the American Philosophical Society. And this may explain why, in later years, Mr. Merrick may seem to have relinquished his active participation in our work—it was because his interest and energies were absorbed in the Franklin Institute. The Managers of the Institute have expressed their own sense of the merits and character of Mr. Merrick, in the resolutions which are here subjoined : “ Resolved, That the Managers of the Franklin Institute have received with the deepest sorrow the announcement of the death of Sainuel V. Merrick, the founder of the Institute, for many years its president, and always its earnest, liberal and devoted friend. Associated with it as he was in its early efforts for the public confidence and support; participating as he did in all the great labors and enterprises by which it A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—46E Goodwin.] 288 Dec. 16, won its way to the honorable reputation it now enjoys; his name and character are so mingled with its history that, while the Institute endures, his will be an enduring memory. ‘* Resoived, That the Managers of the Institute, many of whom have been for years associated with the deceased in the care of its affairs, and in the other walks of life, in which he was so distinguished for broad and wise intelligence, for untiring zeal, and for great public spirit, will ever cherish with feelings of proud and affectionate remem- brance, the kindly and honorable associations which have always distinguished his re- lations with them. ** Resolved, That, in token of our sense of the loss we have sustained, the Hall of the Institute be closed on Monday next; that the Managers attend his funeral in a body» and that the members of the Institute be invited to join with them in paying the last earthly trihute of respect to their honored associate and friend.” To Mr. Merrick before all others, the City owes the introduction of gas as a means of illumination, instead of the oil formerly relied upon for the purpose—a reliance so precarious, inefficieut, clumsy, filthy and ex- pensive, that we all, as we look back, should now feel its restoration em- phatically a return to the Dark Ages. Not so did the case look from the other end of the glass. Mr. Merrick, with his characteristic, practical sagacity, early saw the advantages of substituting gas for the material formerly employed ; and he perseveringly urged its substitution, amidst an extraordinary excitement of public feeling, and a most earnest and confident opposition on the part of some of the most respectable and intelligent of his fellow citizens—an opposition which we now regard with wonder, and which those who participated in it remember as a strange dream. We see things now in a different light ; and it is difficult for us to place ourselves at the point of view from which the subject was then contemplated ; yet it is only by so doing that we can duly appreciate the prophetic vision and indomitable energy of those who persevered for years in urging on, step by step, the proposed improvement. Mr. Merrick songht and obtained a seat in the City Councils, that there he might labor directly to secure the change. He was appointed Chair- man of a Committee of the Common Council, which, after corresponding with the authorities of the few other cities in this country where gas had been partially introduced, reported with a full and triumphant answer to all the objections which had been urged against it. To his great satis- faction, he subsequently received an appointment from the Councils to visit England and parts of Europe, for the purpose of inquiring into the facts connected with the use of illuminating gas in those countries. On his return, in 1834, he made a fuil report, which was marked by great wisdom and ability. Whereupon it was resolved that the experi- ment should be tried in Philadelphia. Mr. Merrick was appointed, as chief engineer, to take charge of the erection of the works, of the manu- facture of the gas, and of the whole business of introducing and dis- tributing it in the city. This task he performed without the least waste, failure, mistake, or delay, but with singular economy, skill, and prompti- tude, to entire and universal public satisfaction. On the 8th of February, 1836, the lamps were lighted ; and in their next annual report the Trustees of the Gas Works render the following emphatic testimony : 1370.] 589 [Goodwin. ‘“«The works are built in the most substantial manner, and, for the perfection and economy of their operation, are certainly unrivalled in this country ; the rapidity with which they were constructed and the complete adaptation of every part of the apparatus to its intended purpose, reflect the highest credit on the engineer, Samuel V. Merrick, Esq., whose faithfulness and ability in discharging the arduous and novel duties of this undertaking, it gives us much pleasure thus publicly to notice.’ In their report of the year following they say : ‘‘In conclusion the Trustees have to state that Samuel V. Merrick, Ksq., the able engineer who constructed the first section of the works, having found that his continued attention to them interfered too much with his private engagements, tendered his resignation, which the Board reluctantly accepted on the 8th of February, 1837. As the extensions were about to be made, the trustees requested Mr. Merrick to devote oceasionally, to a general superintendence of the new works, so much of his time as he should be able to spare, or as might be deemed necessary, in consultation with the superintendent. This duty has been performed to their utmost satisfaction, and the trustees can only repeat here their unqualified approbation of the conduct of that gentleman, and their ad- miration for the signal success which has attended the works put up by lanes At a meeting of the Stockholders held in the ensuing week, it was resolved : “That the trustees be hereby authorized to appropriate the sum of $600 to be expended in the purchase of one or more pieces of plate ; to bear such inscription expressive of the approbation of the Stockholders as they may think proper ; to be presented to Samuel V. Merrick, Esq.’’ Nothing is more striking in all Mr. Merrick’s connection with this business than the largeness of his views for the general good, and the un- selfish public spirit which marked all his labors. He sought to promote the comfort and convenience of his fellow citizens, and permanently to diminish the burden of taxation. He sought also to develop the resources and industrial wealth of the State. In his report on his return from Europe are these noteworthy words: ‘‘I deem it an argument of no small moment in favor of this mode of lighting, that every material used in the fabrication of this gas will be the product of Pennsylvania labor. The bituminous coal from which it is to be made, may be drawn irom the rich mines now open in the interior of the State ; the fuel, from the ex- haustless body of anthracite ; and the lime for purification, from our own vicinity ; and not a lamp will shed its rays over our streets which has not paid a tribute to the internal improvements of the State.”’ In like manner, it was distinctly as a public benefactor, it was from a sensitive regard for the welfare and prosperity of the city and State of his adoption, that, some ten years later, Mr. Merrick led off in another great enterprise. He was one of the prime movers in the establishment of the Pennsylvania Central Railroad Company, and was its first President. The books were opened for subscription to its stock in 1846, and its Goodwin.] 090 [Dec. 16. President made his first report in 1847. This document contains a clear and business like statement of the means of the Company, and of the plans for their immediate use. And not only so, it wisely suggests and urges their increase, also without incurring any debt,—the avoidance of which was a fixed principle in all his administrative arrangements ; and it sets forth such far reaching views of future growth and enlarge- ment that it looks almost like history written before the time. His motives for throwing himself into this enterprise, and the motives upon which he invited others to participate in it, appear in his report addressed to the stockholders in September of the next year (1848), in which he earnestly urges them to increase their subscriptions. ‘* The absolute necessity,’’ says he, ‘‘of this road to the trade of Philadelphia is universally acknowledged. The completion of the Cincinnati and Sandusky road brings that city within three days ride of New York for eight months in the year. ‘‘The trade of the Ohio river, which once belonged to Philadelphia, is now diverted to New York by this new channel of the lakes. ‘‘Hundreds of passengers daily pass over that road to New York. Where the travel goes, there goes the trade. ey 7 o % ‘¢ You are engaged in a great struggle for the trade of the West. To obtain it a portion of your earnings must be devoted to open the highway. Once open, it will maintain and enlarge itself. Railroads and Canals have built up New York ; and so well convinced are the citizens of their value, that they are now making a third avenue to the lakes, both the others being crowded with trade. ‘Boston has been built up by the same means, and if we expect to maintain our position, we must follow their example.”’ In fact even Baltimore had got the start of Philadelphia; and if the Pennsylvania Central had not been opened just when it was, not only the trade of Ohio and the far West, but even that of the western part of our own State would have been irretrievably diverted to Baltimore, on the one side, and New York on the other. Such were the circumstances and motives under which this great work was undertaken. When Mr. Merrick, again compelled by the pressure of his own private business, retired from the Presidency, Sept. 1, 1849, the road was opened for travel from Harrisburg to Lewistown, and nearly completed to the base of the Alleghanies, the western division was begun, and a small portion in use, the whole route was surveyed and the cost of construction estimated, and negotiations had been successfully concluded for connection with the cities of Ohio and with the avenues of the more distant West. The Board oz Directors in the following November, thus refer to Mr. Merrick in closing their report : ‘“‘The distinguished gentleman who had, with signal ability, admin- istered the affairs of the company from the date of its organizatiou, was constrained, by reasons altogetber personal and private, to tender his resignation in August last, and it was reluctantly az:cepted by the Board. 1870. ] O91 [Goodwin. His continuance as a Director ensure to the Company the benefit of his enlarged experience, sound judgment, and thorough acquaintance with the work.* Thus the foundations of the great edifice were laid, and the plans and ma- terials provided for the superstructure. The seed was planted, and had ger- minated ; it had shot up its trunk, and was already beginning to send out its wide-spreading branches. The Pennsylvania Railroad Company is now one of the greatest and most powerful corporations in the country, with a gross annual income exceeding the original estimated cost of the con- struction of its entire original track from Harrisburg to Pittsburgh. It is by far the most important.and indispensable business agency of Phila- delphia and of Pennsylvania. Strike it out of existence, and the city would be stunned by the blow, and even the State would stagger under it. It is an immense power for good or for evil. But whatever motives may actuate its present or future managers, and however its influence may be abused or its energies perverted, we have this security that it cannot be made profitable to its owners without continually benefiting the com- munity. And by whatever motives or principles its action may hereafter be controlled, ‘‘the past, at least, is secure ;’’ its projectors and origin- ators were actuated by a generous devotion to the public good, they sought to promote the prosperity of the city and the growth and develop- ment of this great commonwealth. As one of its founders, and as its first President, Mr. Merrick’s name is identified with its whole history. He shares the glory of its subsequent greatness, while it inherits the prestige of his noble purpose and character. When, after nearly another decade, an effort was made to construct a Railroad from Sunbury to Erie, thus completing the connection between Philadelphia and the lakes, through the great western coal fields of Penn- sylvania ; and when, after many ineffectual struggles, the enterprise threatened to prove a disastrous failure, all eyes were turned to Mr. Merrick. He was recognized as the only man in the community who * The following is Mr. Merrick’s letter of resignation: “ OFFICE PENNA. R. R. Co., PHITADA, Aug. 22, 1849. “To the Directors of the Penna. R. R. Co. ¢ ** GENTLEMEN :—Circumstances connected with my private affairs compel me to announce to you my intention of resigning the office with which you have entrusted me. **T need scarcely say that I take this step with great reluctance. “Identified as I am in feeling and interest with the great work which, above all others, is des- tined to add to the prosperity of Philadelphia, I had hoped to have been prominently instrumental in urging it to final completion; and although I relinquish the position I have occupied as the President of the Company, my exertions will not be wanting in forwarding its interests. “It is no small cause of regret that my official connection is severed with gentlemen, both of the Board and in the office, with whom J have acted in the most uninterrupted harmony and good feeling, a continuation of which it will always be my pleasure to cultivate. “Desirous of resuming my private business at as early a date as possible, and at the same time give an opportunity to select a successor, I leave to the Board to fix the date at which my resigna- tion shall take effect. “ Very respectfully, “*S. V. Mrerricz, “President Penna. R. R. Co.” Goodwin.] 092 [ Dee. 15, could retrieve its affairs, and push it on to speedy success. Early in 1865 the Presidency of this road was offered him, and urged upon his accept- ance. He was upon the point of declining it when the following letter was addressed to him, which, with its signatures, speaks for itself, and for him also. “ PHILADELPHIA, Feb. 21st, 1856. “To SamuEL V. Mernick, Esq.: “ Dear Sir: We have learned that the Presidency of the Sunbury and Erie Railroad Company has been tendered to you, under such circum- stances as render it reasonably certain that your character and ability may conduct that enterprise to a successful completion. ‘We are sensibie that such a position cannot present any peculiar at- tractions, but that any favorable consideration you may give to the application would have its origin in a high sense of public duty. ‘¢There are occasions when purely personal motives ought properly to yield to public claims, and in the exigency which calls for an efficient and tried man to administer the affairs of the important work above named, we may well address ourselves to you to assume the Presidency. Your perfect organization and successful administration of the affairs of the Pennsylvania Railroad Company are so well remembered by our fellow citizens, that we are sure the whole community would hail with pleasure your acceptance of the proffered trust. ‘‘ We feel confident that you can organize an administration and adopt financial and other plans, which will at once place the Sunbury and Hrie Railroad in its proper attitude before the people, and insure such aid from public and private sources as will realize an early completion of a work that must open for the trade of our city one of the richest agricultural and mineral districts of the State. “‘On behalf of the great interests involved, we call on you to accept the office. We are very truly and respectfully yours, JOHN GRIGG, C,. H. FisHEr, THoMaAs ROBINS, Tuos. T. Lea, Wm. H. Bowen, S. A. MERCER, Isaac R. DAvis, F. FRALEY, Aua@’N 8. ROBERTS, C. 8. Boxer, A. E. Borin, S. F. Smirn, Frep’k LENNIG, C. H. Roemrs, JAMES C. HAND, Jos. PATTERSON, A. J. Lewis, JOHN Farnum, Morris L. HALLOWELL, J. RICHARDSON, THOMAS ALLIBONE.”’ To such an appeal to his sense cf public duty Mr. Merrick could not turn a deaf ear. 1870.] 093 [Goodwin. The following was his reply : ““ PHILADELPHIA, Feb. 238d, 1856. ‘“©GENTLEMEN: I was duly honored with your letter of the 21st inst., urging my acceptance of the Presidency of the Sunbury and Erie Railroad Company. The peculiar circumstances in which that work had recently been placed, gave a weight to the application made to me, which was well calculated to overcome all considerations but those of public duty, With- out, however, the expression of such a wish on the part of my fellow citizens, as indicated in your letter, I should have felt constrained to de- cline the offer; but the reasons urged by you, in addition to those presented by the gentlemen who tendered the appointment, caused me to yield a reluctant assent. “‘ Accepting this trust at your solicitation, as representatives of the public feeling and interests of the city, and relying upon your co-opera- tion, I remain, Very truly and respectfully, S. V. MERRICK.” Mr. Merrick began at once with an energetic reformation and remodel- ing of the whole organization and administration of the road. But searcely had he addressed himself to the Herculean task, when the terrible commercial crisis of 1857 swept over the country, prostrating even many old establishments, and utterly paralyzing new enterprises, completely thwarting all plans for securing aid, public or private, arresting the pro- gress of the road, and bringing the Company to the verge of bankruptcy. In fact, it was saved only by large advances from Mr. Merrick’s own private resources—advances equally difficult aud dangerous for a business man at that time to make. At the risk of ruining himself, and by almost superhuman efforts, he carried the Company through the storm. His own health was prostrated ; and, after remaining in the Presidency nearly two years—as long, in fact, as he had ever anticipated being able to continue in it—he sent in the following letter of resignation : “To the Board of Managers of the Sunbury and Erie Railroad Company: Gentlemen: I have long contemplated declining a reélection to the post of President of this Company in February next, as it interferes too much with my own affairs to warrant further continuance. Believing that the interests of the Company will be promoted by the immediate election of some other gentleman who will devote himself to the impor- tant interests at stake, I beg leave to tender my resignation. * : * * * % * %*% * * The field is now open for an energetic prosecution of the work as soon as the returning tide of prosperity shall have fairly set in upon the com- merce of the country, and I may indulge the hope that a brighter day may soon dawn on the Sunbury and Erie Railroad. With every wish for the final success of the enterprise, I remain, very respectfully, 8S. V. MERRICK, President.’ Goodwin. ] a9 4 [Vee. 16, The road was soon after completed, and its bonds, that were issued with Mr. Merrick’s name, have long been at par. Nor did his labors in the cause of the public improvements of the State, and for the enlargement of the business and prosperity of Philadelphia end here. To his vigorous and wise counsels it has been, in a large de- gree, due, that the affairs of the Catawissa Railroad have been retrieved from a condition of imminent ruin. The road owes it to him that it now rests upon a solid basis, and has a promise of permanent prosperity and usefulness. The regard in which he was held by the Managers of that road will appear from the resolution adopted by them on the occasion of his decease. ‘‘The death of our late associate, Samuel V. Merrick, Esq., who for fourteen years has been a Director of this Company, the value of whose counsel all appreciated, has gen announced to us so unexpectedly, in the midst of current business, in which his energies were actively engaged, that we fail to realize the extent of our loss. ‘ The character of Mr. Merrick needs no eulogy at our hands; his long and useful life has been spent in ‘ good works.’ The mention of his name in connection with any enterprise has always iuspired confidence and respect. In relation to this Company, the interest of which appeared to be his special pride—through the period of its darkest history, he always manifested a cheerful confidence that time and energy would re- lieve it of all difficulties; and we rejoice that he lived to see his prediction verified.” In the eleemosynary institutions of the City, Mr. Merrick took a deep and active interest, and particularly in anything that promised to help the poor and weak to help themselves. He was among the founders, and most efficient managers of the Western Savings Fund; and to him is largely due the safe and solid character of this beneficial institution. Its Managers have given expression to their deep sense of his wisdom and worth in the following testimonial : ** Resolved, That it is with profound sorrow the Managers of the Western Savings Fund Society record the unexpected demise of SAMUEL V. MERRICK. ““By this sad memorial they will perpetuate the recollection of a man associated with the Institution from its foundation, who was distinguished by remarkable traits of character, that rendered him eminently useful to the world, and made him univer- sally honored in every position he was called to fill. Wise in council, broad and com- prehensive in his views, liberal and good in his deeds, and, above all, crowned with the possession of a truly Christian and Catholic spirit, his loss to society, and especially to his friends, will be long and keenly felt.” At the time of his decease, Mr. Merrick, besides an active connection with many other of the public corporations, and most of the leading charities of the city, was a prominent member of the Board of Trade, one of the Port Wardens of Philadelphia, and a member of the Board of Commissioners for the erection of the South Street Bridge. Immediately upon his demise, the following expression was adopted by the last mentioned body : ‘““WHEREAS, This Board, and the City of Philadelphia, have suffered a great loss by the death of our colleague, Mr. SAMUEL V. MERRICK, who for many years devoted his abilities, services and time, in promoting the interests of the municipal, charitable and scientific institutions of Philadelphia. Resolved, That the President be requested to communicate to Mr. Merrick’s family our sympathy and condolence in their affliction.” 1870. ] 999 [Goodwin. But neither Philadelphia nor Pennsylvania bounded his sympathy and public spirit, or his ideas of loyalty and patriotism. His heart embraced the whole country. He loved her flag. He was cevotedly attached to her Union. When that flag was assailed, and that Union imperilled, his soul was stirred to its lowest depths. All conservative as he was in prin- ciple and feeling, he gave his full support to the Government through all the changing fortunes of the dark struggle, until the rebellion was sup- pressed. In the work of the Sanitary Commission he took a special in- terest, not only contributing freely to its funds, but rendering his personal services, at the time of the Great Central Fair, until his health was se- riously endangered. After the war, his attention was particularly drawn to the cause of general education at the South ; and he gave large sums for the support of schools in that part of the country, both for blacks and whites. At the suggestion of a younger sister, he joined forces with her and his brother, and they, with their own independent funds, have built a com- modious school house of brick, and established a school for the instruc- tion of the negroes, in one of the counties in Virginia. In fact, his benefactions have been more and larger than will ever be generally known ; and always bestowed in a spirit of glad liberality, and with a modest unconsciousness of doing anything more than a matter of course. In this feeling he resorted to no artificial contrivances to hide his gifts ; still less did he ever seek to have them bruited abroad. Cases have come to light in which an applicant, in behalf of some scheme of be- nevolence, after having explained the object, has hoped for a hundred or two dollars at the most, and been surprised by receiving from him a check for ten times that amount. Other cases of his giving by thousands have been known only in the circle of his own family, and to them only after a time and, as it were, by accident—in such a way, in short, as to indicate that these were but specimens of many similar cases of which his intimate friends knew nothing. It was a saying of Sir Isaac Newton, that ‘those who give nothing before their death, never in fact give at all.’”’ On this principle Mr. Merrick acted. He gave while he lived, and left it to his heirs to follow his example after he was dead. And surely the living spring, with its perennial flow, is better than the sudden inundation from any pent-up reservoir. Mr. Merrick was a consistent Christian. Jn this relation, also, his active benevolence, so characteristic of him, could not fail to display itself. At the time of his death he was one of the Wardens of Grace Church, of which he had been a member nearly thirty years. In the erection and endowment of the Episcopal Hospital, he manifested a lively and prac- tical interest ; and to him, more than to any other man, the Diocese of Pennsylvania is indebted for its Episcopal residence. Mr. Merrick’s was an eminently successful life. He was always equal to what he undertook, to every occasion and to every position in which Providence placed him. He sought to raise others with himself. He respected labor, and he dignified it. Few men have done more to elevate A. P. 8.—VOL. XI—47E Goodwin. ] 096 [Dec. 16, the mechanic to a higher intelligence and a more respectable social posi- tion. There have been men who have amassed millions, and who have not failed to give generously of their abundance when it could be done with great éclat; but who had, nevertheless, either grown rich at the expense of their neighbors, as mere gambling’ speculators, or been loose in their principles of integrity, or excessively parsimonious in their per- sonal habits, or hard and rigorous to the last cent in all their daily trans- actions, especially with their dependents, employés, and clerks. Not so with Mr. Merrick. He expended freely as he went ; he was generous and kind to all his dependents; in raising himself he lifted up others; their rising was the very mode and condition of his ; all his operatives respected and loved him; all his business transactions were for the mutual benefit of the parties concerned ; all his prosperity was the prosperity of those around him, and of the city in which he lived. Tt is no small achievement thus to acquire a large property—by honest industry, by extraordinary skill, and tact, and enterprise, without parsi- mony, or stint, or exaction, but in the spirit and constant exercise of a large liberality. Indeed, this is one of the grandest schemes of benevo- lence and philanthropy that a man can conceive and ¢carry out. It implies a certain greatness of mind, a certain self-containedness, voluntarily to stop in the career of acquisition and leave the field to others. It is no slight mark of the eminence and worth of any man that, at his decease, he should leave a sensible gap in a great city, that his departure should be widely felt as a public bereavement. Eyery gas-burning lamp that lights our streets, our halls and our par- lors, is a perpetual illumination of the name of Merrick. Merrick and Franklin, both sons of New England, will remain indissolubly associated as long as our Franklin Institute retains its name and remembers its founder. The great railways converging upon Philadelphia will be ave- nues and radiants for the enduring fame of the citizen who planned, and early presided over, the Pennsylvania Road, which has become the head of the great family, and now stretches its arms over a continent. His fire engines were long since eloquent with his name in many a city and village of the land ; the beautiful frigate Mississippi: bore it proudly around the globe ; and later, in our great national life struggle, the same name re- verberated along the rebel coast with the guns of our best and mightiest armored steamship of war.* To sum up the character of our departed friend: He was a man of quick perception, of clear intelligence, of singular forecast, of large and liberal views, of rare sagacity, of imperious, even overbearing, will, and of indomitable energy ; a just man, of honorable sentiments, of strict in- tegrity, to be trusted anywhere and in anything, faithful in the least and in the greatest alike ; a man of a kindly nature, of ready sympathy, in- stinctively and on principle benevolent, always benevolent—his benevolence * The New Ironsides was furnished to the Government, hull, armor, and machinery, by ‘‘ Mer- rick & Sons.” i) 1870.] 997 ‘ [Patterson. was not stinted by increasing years or increasing wealth, but grew rather with his means and his habit of exercising it; a man of ardent patriot- ism, he identified his own life with that of his country ; of an ever gen- erous and ready public spirit, he was in all relations a good citizen ; reli- gious, not without profession, but without cant, and beneficent without ostentation ; his character, like his person, was of a noble and massive rather than of a graceful make. He was every inch a man. And now, should it be thought that I have but followed the example of all manufacturers of obituaries, dealing only in loose and empty pane- gyric, I do not plead guilty to the charge. What has been said rather falls short of the truth than transgresses it. If it be suggested that, after all, this certainly cannot be so very extra- ordinary a case, that Mr. Merrick was not so very great or remarkable a man, for we have among us every day many men qtite as great, as good, and as useful as he, I cannot by any means concur in the suggestion ; and yet I do believe, and rejoice to believe, that we have more good, earnest, public spirited, sagacious and energetic men, quietly working on among us, than we are sometimes, in our habitual querulousness, disposed to acknowledge. Amidst all our complaints, often unreasoning and inconsid- erate complaints, of the degeneracy and corruption of the times, there is more of real greatness and goodness around us than we are aware of. Great and good men have not all passed away with the former generations. They are with us still. And it is one of the lessons we may learn from a review of such a life as Mr. Merrick’s, to see and recognise the treasures we possess. If we have many such men as Mr. Merrick, let us rejoice ; let us so look to them while they live, and so remember them when they are gone, that by all means we may have more. An Obituary Notice of FRANKLIN PEALE: Read before the American Philosophical Society, December 16th, 1870, by RoBERT PATTERSON. At the meeting of the American Philosophical Society, held February 19th, 1796, the proceedings were diversified by a singular incident, which we find thus recorded in the minutes: ‘‘Mr. Peale presented to the Society a young son of four months and four days old, being the first child born in the Philosophical Hall, and requested that the Society would give him a name. On which, the Soci- ety unanimously agreed that, after the name of the chief founder and late President of the Society he should be named FRANKLIN.”’ Tradi- tion adds, that the infant was thereupon so named in the President's chair, given to the Society by Benjamin Franklin. This child, in a peculiar sense the child of the Society, was FRANKLIN PEALE, our late associate, to whose memory I now, honored by your choice, seek to render a feeble tribute. The father of Franklin Peale was Charles Wilson Peale, a man of va- rious gifts, but eminent as a painter, and as the founder of the once Patterson. ] 298 [Dec. 16, noted Philadelphia Museum. To him the country owes an extensive series of portraits of the most distinguished men of our revolutionary and post-revolutionary era. In the course of his profession, having been called on to make drawings of bones of the mammoth, his attention be- came attracted to natural history, and he began the accumulation of ob- jects illustrating that department of science.* From very small beginnings, Wilson Peale, by energy, enthusiasm and self-sacrifice above all praise, suc- ceeded in building up the Museum referred to, which Philadelphians of a past generation recall as one of the most interesting and useful institu- tions of our city. He was a member of our Society—which was natu- rally much interested in the success of his work—whence it happened that, while the Museum was stillin its early stage of growth, in the year 1794, it was located in our building, the same which we now occupy ; and here, in the northwest room, seéond story, now known as the Libra- rian’s room, FRANKLIN PEALE was born, on the 15th day of October, 1795. His mother was Elizabeth De Peyster, second wife of Charles Wilson Peale. She died while he was quite young, but his childhood and youth were tenderly cared for by a stepmother, Wilson Peale’s third wife, a member of the Society of Friends. The father’s views on the subject of education were peculiar. The children were not directed according to any systematic routine, but left much to their own choice in their course of study. They were guided according to a fancied ability, and means were furnished (but not always the teachers) to stimulate them to the acquisition of the knowledge to- wards which their minds seemed naturally bent. Books, tools, canvas, and pencils, besides the opportunities to see what had been done by others, he thought sufficient, provided there was a disposition to learn ; otherwise he considered any attempt to push them forward as but lost time. If such a plan of education seems open to criticism, it may, per- haps, be justified by the result, which has furnished to us, in the Peale family, Rembrandt, the artist; Franklin, the mechanician; and Titian, the naturalist. The instruction received by Mr. Peale seems, therefore, to have been quite irregular. He had no systematic course of training, either in school or college. He went first to a country school in Bucks County, was a short time at the University of Pennsylvania, and finished his education at the Academy in Germantown, where the family then resided. The bent of Mr. Peale’s genius towards mechanics was developed at a very early period. While quite young, he became distinguished as a manufacturer of all the usual apparatus for games, and many curious toys. Asa school boy, he demonstrated a fondness for surveying as well as mechanics—in the interval of school hours surveying his father’s farm near Germantown, and developing also the water power of some neigh- boring streams. * [may be pardoned, I trust. the mention of the fact, since it illustrates a family friendship, ex- tending now through several generations, that the first article presented to Mr. Peale, and the earliest encouragement of his project, was from Robert Patterson, a former President of the Soci- ety, and the grandfather of the writer. 1870.] 099 [Patterson. At the age of 17, he entered the factory of Hodgson & Bro., on the Brandywine, Delaware, to learn machine making. From his industry, patience and neatness, he rose superior to his teachers. He became skilful as a turner and founder, and in the use of tools, and a very éxcel- lent draftsman. He here prepared the working drawings for the machines required for a cotton factory at Germantown, and had them constructed under his supervision, and in great part by his personal skill and labor. When barely 19 he left Delaware to take charge of the cotton factory just mentioned, of which he had the management for several years. He afterwards removed to Philadelphia, and entered into the establishment of John & Coleman Sellers, making machinery for card sticking. Mr. Peale now separated himself for a time from the strict line of his profession, and entered upon the management of his father’s Museum. For this duty he was well fitted, on account of his administrative abili- ties, his taste, and his talent for arrangement, as well as by a competent knowledge of the subjects to which it was devoted. The Museum was something more than a place of deposit for birds, beasts and fishes, but was a collection of curiosities in art, in mechanism, and in antiquity. Mr. Peale, in the pursuit of his own profession, had not neglected other fields of knowledge. He was ever an ardent student and observer. It was not likely, therefore, that he should have been unlearned in any of the subjects which the Museum was intended to illustrate, and which he had heard discussed from his childhood. While not professing a particular fondness for natural history, he so far mastered the subject as to deliver lectures upon it, availing himself of the special facilities placed at his disposal. His mechanical genius, also, found room for display, in adding to the curiosities of the establishment. Many of us will remember his curious speaking toy, besides other ingenious inventions which cannot now be specified. It was while engaged at the Museum that Mr. Peale placed there a miniature locomotive, the first seen in this country, and manufactured by his friend, M. W. Baldwin, ona plan agreed on between Mr. Peale and himself. It was put in operation on a track, making the circuit of the Arcade, in which the Museum then was, drawing two miniature cars, with seats for four passengers. The valuable aid of Mr. Peale was after- wards given to Mr. Baldwin in the construction of the locomotive for the Philadelphia and Germantown R. R., in 1832, the success of which led to the establishment of Mr. Baldwin in the great business of his life. Mr. Peale’s position at the Museum was of advantage in bringing his peculiar and varied talents more conspicuously before the public. The establishment was largely visited, often by distinguished men of our own and other citles, and many learned to admire the ingenious young man- ager. His society and friendship were sought after, and he assumed his proper place as one of the select band then most active among us in the pursuit of science and art. The Franklin Institute, then young and earnest, as it still is in the ad- vancement of knowledge, secured the services of Mr. Peale for a series of Patterson. ] 600 [Dec. 16, oe lectures on a subject adapted to his special talents. He here delivered two courses, in the winter of 1831-2 and 1832-3, on Mechanics, or rather on Machines. These were fully illustrated either by the machines them- selves, or diagrams, were novel in their character, and justly added to Mr. Peale’s reputation. He was long an active member of the Institute, giving efficient labor on its most important committees, and at the annual exhibitions, and occasionally contributing articles on mechanical subjects to its Journal. In 1888, Mr. Peale entered upon that connection with the Mint of the United States, which gave a full opportunity for the display of his special abilities, and through which his reputation was firmly established. Dr. Samuel Moore, then Director, conceived the project of a mission to Eu- rope, for the purpose of examining and reporting on such chemical, me- chanical and metallurgic methods and improvements, as might be deemed worthy of introduction into our Mint. He procured the needful authority, and appropriations, and having the fullest confidence in Mr. Peale, selected him as the agent for this purpose. He accepted the trust and sailed for Ku- ropein May ofthe same year, being officially designated as Assistant Assayer. Mr. Peale remained abroad two years. The subjects of special interest to the Director had been the Sulphuric Acid process of Refining (or Parting, ) and the Humid Assay of Silver, on which full investigations were required, but Mr. Peale was not restricted in his inquiries, nor in truth was he one likely to overlook any particulars bearing directly or remotely upon the broad objects of his mission. His intelligent, patient labor, mastered every detail. By partial reports during his absence, but more especially by a full and final report after his return, accompanied by plans and drawings, our Mint was placed in full possession of all that was then worthy to be known of the establishments, public and private, whose or- ganization and methods affiliated them with ourown. The direct results of the mission, were the introduction of the humid assay, some improve- ments in the details of the refining process, and the labor-saving method of duplicating working dies for coinage. The indirect results were per- haps, equally important. For the thoughts and labors of a man of genius in mechanics (as Mr. Peale was,) could not be concentrated on the details of Mint processes, without planning many valuable improvements. Hap- pily for the public service, Dr. R. M. Patterson, the Director who succeed- ed Dr. Moore, (in July, 1835,) was Mr. Peale’s warm friend, and a great admirer of his talents. His ‘‘mission’’ did not cease, therefore, with his return from Hurope, but he became associated permanently with the Mint, for a time as Assistant Assayer, then as Melter and Refiner (in 1836), and finally as Chief Coiner (in 1839). His first great werk was in the con- struction of the steam coining presses, substituted for the hand presses then in use. The first steam press was manufactured under his supervi- sion, by Merrick, Agnew & Tyler, and turned out its first specimens in March, 1836. Presses subsequently manufactured for our own and other mints, have been improved in minor points, but their principle of action 1870 ] 601 [Patterson. remains the same. Other improvements which he introduced, were the so-called milling machine, for raising the edge of the planchet ; the steam engines, small and large ; the automatic or retroactive return of the draw- bench ; and, in particular, the scales for the weighing of gold and silver. These last are models of simple mechanism and nice accuracy. So, in fact, was all of Mr. Peale’s work. And we may add, that he brought to all the eye of anartist. It was not enough that a machine should be effec- tive ; it must also be graceful and attractive. ‘‘ Nihil tetigit quod non ornavit.’’ But I cannot enter at large into details of his labors at the mint. I simply add my conviction, (which I know to have been that of the revered Director already named, under whose administration the work was accomplished,*) that without Franklin Peale, the most of that which attracts the admiration of the visitor to the coining department of the Mint would have been wanting. The mark of his inventive genius is here conspicuous, and I have often thought, as I passed through that part of the establishment, how appropriately might be there ascribed to his honor, the words, ‘‘Si monumentum requiris, circumspice.’’ But amore com- petent judge than myself, thoroughly qualified by long experience in mint affairs, has spoken to this point in words which I take the liberty to quote: ‘¢Tt has been my privilege (he says,) to visit the mints of London and Paris, and to witness their inferiority in their mechanical arrangements, tothe Mint in Philadelphia. The superiority of our Mint is most mani- fest in just those points where his hand has touched, and when Ameri- cams visiting the mints of Europe, feel a pride in remembering the supe- riority of their own, they ought to know that to the genius and taste of Franklin Peale are they mainly indebted for it. At the mints of both Paris and London, he was well known and inquired for with interest.”’ Mr. Peale’s connection with the Mint ceased in December, 1854, and he retired for some time from all publicemployment. Jn 1864, he was elect- ed President of the Hazleton Coal and Rail Road Company, in the direc- tion of which he had been for many yearsanactive member. He continued in this office until 1867, when he resigned, and finally closed his long career of active business life. I have thus hastily sketched the professional life of Mr. Peale, by which his public reputation was established ; but any notice of his character would be far from complete which left out what we may call its esthetic side, including those varied accomplishments and elegant tastes, which made him one of the most interesting of men. We have already referred to the artistic hand which he brought to his mechanical work. This was a characteristic naturally growing out of his strong love and devotion toart. In the society in which he was brought up, —his father and brother eminent as painters,—he came to a knowledge of the subject rare among amateurs. He was for many years a member of the Academy of Fine Arts, which his father had been instrumental in establishing, and for the last fifteen years of his life, one of the Board of Directors, and a member of its most important committees. We are told *Dr. Robert M, Patterson, the father of the writer, and late President of this Society. Patterson. ] 602 [Dec. 16, by one of his eminent associates in the Academy, that ‘‘he was zealously devoted to the discharge of the duties assigned him, always observing a scrupulous regard for the interests of the contributizg artists and pupils of the Academy. His courtuous manners and almost “Raining gentleness, made him a great favorite with the lady students especially. He was sin- cere in the utterance of his convictions, honest in action, and sound in judgment. His taste was refined and his ideas elevated. He was, in short, a most valuable member of the Board. His departure from the scene in which he labored so industriously and efficiently, las created a vacuum not easily filled.”’ Mr. Peale was an excellent musician, and I believe a self-taught one. He was endowed with a most agreeable cultivated tenor voice, to which the guitar was the appropriate accompaniment, and on which instrument he became a great proficient. His love of music was a passion, and in private circles and public associations he was foremost in promoting its cultivation. His house was for many successive seasons made charming to his friends, as the resort of the best amateur and professional talent of our city, met together to illustrate, in a manner altogether worthy the choicest instrumental and vocal compositions. Mr. Peale was one of the founders of the Musical Fund Society, to which Philadelphia owes so much asthe means of spreading a cultivated musical taste among us. He was among the most active members in promoting its objects in art and charity, and at his decease was President of the Society. In manly accomplishments, Mr. Peale was conspicuous, carrying into these the elegant refinement so marked in his character, and lending also the aid of his mechanical genius. The graceful art of archery was par- ticularly attractive to him, and in his efforts to establish it as an addition to our out-door amusements, I cannot but think he showed a taste and judgment in happy contrast to what has been exhibited in the develop- ment of those boisterous and half-savage games, cricket and base ball, or which we now hear so much. He was one of the founders of the club of United Bowmen, and a long series of medals and badges, which he pre- served with some pride, attest a skill in which he was confessed the chief. His love of the art and affection for his fellow-members, was shown to the last, for by his special request his remains were borne to the grave by his associates of the club. Tn another beautiful gymnastic art, that of skating, he was a proficient from his youth to the last years of his life. And it was, I think, an admirable sight to observe him, when past seventy, moving along with firmness and grace, happy in the enjoyment of his younger friends, and never so pleased as when aiding by his hand or counsel the fairer sex. He was President of the Skaters’ Club at his death. And I ought to mention here that Mr. Peale was the inventor of Skaters Reel, a simple expedient for rescuing persons breaking through the ice that has probably been the means of saving many lives. But the activity of Mr. Peale was by no means limited to his pro- fessional duties, or to art and recreation. He was zealous in good works. ; 9 1$70.] 603 { Patterson. Tn particular, the Pennsylvania Institution for the Instruction of the Blind long engaged his sympathy and unwearied labor. He was elected a manager in 1839, served on its most important committees, and was finally elected President in 1863, holding that office at his decease. He was rarely absent from the managers’ meetings, and presided only a few weeks before his death. His tender, affectionate manner made him greatly loved by the pupils, while his intelligence and the soundness of his judgment secured the esteem and confidence of the officers and of his fellow managers. For some years before his death, Mr. Peale was greatly interested in that branch of Archeology which relates to the so-called Stone Age. He determined to make a collection of implements illustrating that age, and by energy and patience succeeded in accumulating over twelve hundred specimens, many of them very choice. The most of these were gathered by himself at the ancient homes of the Shawnees and Delawares, around the Water Gap where he spent many autumns; others were secured by exchange or purchase. These have all been arranged for easy examina- tion on a plan devised by himself, and full of his characteristic ingenuity and taste, and he has left behind a manuscript catalogue with an intro- duction and full descriptive details which leave nothing further to be desired. It affords me great satisfaction to add that this valuable collec- tion, the latest labor of Mr. Peale, is to be presented to this Society. I have left to the close, what perhaps should have been earliest men- tioned, all reference to Mr. Peale’s association with our own Society. He was elected a member October 18, 1833, and ever after took a constant and active interest in our proceedings. He was for many years one of the Curators, and filled that office at his death. Our published minutes show many communications from him, on a variety of subjects, but of late these were mostly relative to the stone ag2, on which he was always heard with the interest inspired by his enthusiasm and fulness of knowledge. Mr. Peale was twice married. By his first marriage, which took place in his minority, he had a daughter, his only child, who still survives. His second wife was a niece of Stephen Girard. She lives to lament the death of her husband, and I may not, therefore, refer more particularly to those accomplishments and virtues by which'she crowned his happiness, and made delightful his home. I have thus far considered for the most part the outer life of Mr. Peale, by which he became known to the public at large, but I cannot conclude without some reference to his inner life as it was disclosed to his more in- timate friends. These, while they admired his varied knowledge, saw upon a close inspection other traits which made still more excellent the character of the man. Of these I may mention his gentleness and loving tenderness to all, but especially to the young. With children he was a universal favorite. He never wearied in contributing to their amusement or instruction. And this was no light burden on his time, for a toy from Mr. Peale was not such as comes from the shops, but all that he ac- A. P. §.—VOL, XI—48E 604 [Dee. 16, Patterson. ] complished, from a kite to a complicated engine, was beautiful in form and finish. On oceasions, and especially if a charitable object were to be promoted, he would don the costume of an Eastern Juggler, and astonish the young, and even children of a larger growth, with apparently miracu- lous feats, for which he had constructed apparatus of his own. Even to the brute creation the same tender nature was exhibited. A scientific friend recalls even now the self restraint with which, when a youth, ardent in the search for entomological specimens, he spared a water- spider, of rare species, that had shown a touching instinct in the pro- tection of its young. He was always most ready in imparting information to inquirers wliom his happy faculty and clearness in explanation gathered round him. An enthusiastic lover and explorer of nature, it was in the fields and woods that he became perhaps most interesting. He was familiar with the names and habits of plants, animals, and insects, and mineralogy and geology, and from the fulness of his knowledge dispensed liberally. A marked characteristic of Mr. Peale was his untiring energy. He was never idle, always laboring on some systematic plan. Even his re- creations were methodically arranged, and a part of the means by which his body and mind were invigorated for work. And with him there were no small duties. Each one was sacred. No temptation or pleasure could induce him to forego a responsibility. A promise was its performance. Punctuality was a prominent virtue, any infringement on which he re- gretted as wasting another’s time. Finally, Mr. Peale was a reverential, humble, Christian man. A faith better than philosophy sustained him in the closing hour, and he went calmly to his rest murmuring ‘‘The Lord is my Shepherd,”’ like unto a little child trusting toa parent’s promise. His dying words distinctly and clearly uttered were: ‘‘If this is death, it is as 1 wished, perfect peace, perfect comfort, perfect joy.”’ The vigorous constitution of Mr. Peale carried him in robust health to a term some years beyond, that allotted to man by the Psalmist. For months before his death, however, he was observed to be failing, a fact of which he was himself fully conscious, speaking to his friends with perfect composure of his approaching end. He was nevertheless able, almost to the last, to attend to his accustomed duties, and his closing illness was but a brief one. He died at his residence, 1131 Girard Street, on the 5th of May, 1870, in the 75th year of his age. * 1870.] 605 [Cope. ON THREE EXTINCT ASTACI FROM THE FRESH-WATER TER- RITORY OF IDAHO. By Pror. E. D. Cope. (Read before the American Philosophical Society, Dec. 16th, 1870.) ASTACUS SUBGRUNDIALIS, Cope. This craw-fish is represented by four specimens, which include the ce- phalothorax and region of the front, one of them including, also, the post-abdomen to the end, with limbs; three specimens with cheles, one including a pair; and one other specimen representing the post- abdomen. The prominent characters of the species may be stated diagnostically thus: Two tubercles on each side the front, the anterior spiniform and external to the basis of the lateral ridge of the ensiform process. The latter narrow, medially grooved, acute, with five spinous points on each side, and a terminal recurved spinelet. Surface of the cephalothorax smooth or obsoletely wrinkled. Cheles nearly smooth, not granulate, the superior edge spiniferous. Margins of the segments of postabdomen produced into acuminate plates. I cannot determine the presence or absence of hooks on any of the legs. The cheles are badly preserved in specimens of this species. The last segment of the cheles is furnished with a longitudinal series of strong reverted spines along the superior margin. They dimin- ish in length proximally ; four or five are most prominent. In a speci- men much smaller than the type, where the surface is preserved, it is nearly smooth, and minutely striate. The longitudinal groove of the penultimate joint is well marked ; this segment is not spiniferous. The antennal plates are large, and extend to nearly opposite the end of the ensiform process at the front. The free abdominal segment is punctate on its anterior half. The outer lamina of the postabdominal segment is four times as wide as that of the others, with convex outline to a point directed outwards and backwards. The lamine of the other segments are acuminate triangular and transverse. The transverse suture of the external lamina of the flipper, marks the posterior fourth of the whole length of the lamina. The lateral suture of the cephalothorax is deeply impressed. Four of the specimens represent individuals of large size: two are smaller. The measurements are as follows: M enothtordorsalysuture, INO pecs sors) sciot enn eteys cis olor sienehel- koopa 0.0415 “¢ of ensiform process only........ Se se ba Mmetamepe A eau arate Pate .0182 Width ie nO ALD AS Care cwatcis eat nae fous orale tehae avery yey 005 Wenothepostabdominalandelipper... sete ise se ee ant 072 CS (wlll) Taree lemming, ists Seer is opaccee AoC oabeoo é5eouc 015 CP ROME CTD ATA AL LPO OT sry erey stave yelayetehere alle clers css gs 3) aravetens egeacere tN .02 Po LeEMMNAliseoOmenttlippelp ene eesti reece .005 cM SecOndEpalabdominalmleosnerrne er eral 024 ‘¢ dorsum No. 2 from basal spine to suture................ .021 Cope. ] 606 [ Dee. 16, Wadthibasisuixe duclawaot clielesasnameenrieeeccice ecient 009 Length penultimate joint cheles, No. 3........................-. 0175 Widthydistalvemad of iSamencns xh css dm ctevereste oe koe eicie er ledeienastentons .O115 In the small specimen (No. 2) it appears to be the inferior margin of the cheles which is spiniferous. The mesonotum is exposed, and is of moderate width. From a fresh water deposit in the Teritory of Idaho, near Hot Spring Mountain. Obtained by Capt. Clarence King’s expedition. Museum Smithonian, No. 9779. ASTACUS CHENODERMA, Cope, sp. nov. This species is represented by the cheles of opposite sides of one in- dividual,with which I associate with great probability one from the right side of a second. Part of a cephalothorax of a third is associated, but without conclusive evidence of identity, chiefly because of a near re- semblance in the sculpture. The first mentioned are remakable for their long slender form, and the absence of all spinous armature from their margins. The surface of all parts is covered with thickly placed granular tubercles. The external surface is regularly convex on the middle line, the inner convex on the lower portion, the convexity separated from the lower margin by a groove. Upper portion gradually thinned out to the edge. The edges are simply rugose like the sides, though more coarsely so, with small granular promi- nences. The denticulation of the opposed edges of this joint are in- significant, thongh but a small part of the latter is cleared from the matrix. In the second specimen part of the penultimate segment is preserved. Its inferior margin is unarmed, but on the middle of the outer face is a series of short spines rather distantly placed. In the third, represented by a cephalothorax, the dorsal suture is regu- larly convex backwards, and the mesonotum of moderate width. The surface is delicately wrinkled by the confluent bases of fine pointed granules directed forwards. They become more scattered on the sides of the cephalothorax. As in the last species there are two spines on each side the front. M. Length from anterior spine to middle of cross suture..... 0.0235 Width between posterior spines................--.--+5-: .0105 ‘¢ mesonotum .25 inch from front..............-.... 007 Length of last segment of cheles (No. 1).................. 045 AVWViiclbhwbasalenoaistemwpan cciicetem eectocier incr eicerr crt 0173 GS reveal ave MANS 5a5 cocoocaacnodcodonnbenOD000 .006 From Catharine’s creek, Idaho; collected for Capt. Clarence King by J. ©. Schenk. No. 9779, Museum Smithonian. ASTACUS BREVIFORCEPS, Cope. Species nova. Established primarily on three cheles or last segments of the fore limbs; with these I have associated a cephalothorax of one, and abdominal and 1870.] 607 [Cope, postabdominal regions of three individuals. The only reason for such reference of the latter, is their superficial texture, in which they resemble the cheles, and differ from the corresponding parts in the two other species. The cheles are short and thick, the section of the stoutest proximal part being an oblique oyal. The inferior edge is thinned by lengitudinal contraction above and below it. The fixed process is of a rather short conic form. The surface is granular tuberculate, except on the convex faces, where it is finely vermiculate rugose. M. Wencthelast segment cheles. js .cece eee Shop suiecole sla chveass cect 0.08% ANIC a oe aeons Sep srcuiet: east eden iia Elperecreuhniaiere Siaciehie sumwsuee |. Oeil IPRORAONeN, WINS VSMEIS CUBWINKIP. Gave sGoodssocunedoecncuonosamocnous sols The cephalothorax associated is quite similar to that of A. subgrundi- alas, and may possibly belong to it. It however, differs in the finely ver- miculate rugose character of its surface. The ruge are generally trans- verse on the back and sides. The supra-anteunal lamina is exhibited in a clear manner ; it is as long as the spine of the muzzle, and as wide at the base. The superior surfaces of the abdominal segments are marked with a delicate vermiculate rugosity, like that of the last specimens. In A. swb- grundialis, itisimpressed punctate. Thisspecies also differs from the latter in that the transverse marginal lamina of the first postabdominal segment, is narrower than in the latter, its width not equaling twice that of one of the others, instead of being four times as wide. The succeeding lami- ne are acuminate elongate, and slightly curved forward. It is, however, quite uncertain as to whether these postabdominal specimens belong to the species which has the stout cheles. Some of the specimens indi- cate individuals larger than those referred to A. subgrundialis. From the same locality and collection as the last. No. 9779. GENERAL REMARKS. The preceding species differ from those at present inhabiting North America, as I have been able to determine by examining the excellent monograph of the latter, published in the catalogue of the Museum. Compar. Zoology, by Dr. J. H. Hagen. They differ from all of them in the prominence and acumination of the lateral margins of the postabdominal segments. In the serrate simple frontal process, the first described re— sembles the Astacus gambelii Girard, but its process is longer and nar- rower. I have already described * twelve species of fishes from the same local- ity and deposit, whence these Astaci were procured. * Proceed, Amer, Philos, Soc. 1870, December 8. Cope. ] 608 [ Nov. 18, 1870. NOTE ON SAUROCEPHALUS, HARLAN. By E. D. Cops, in the Meeting November 18, 1870. Prof. Cope called attention to the cretaceous group of fishes represented by Saurocephalus of Harlan. He said they had been regarded as related to the Acanthopterygian family of Sphyrenide. He showed that they were more like certain Malacopterygian families in the structure of the mouth; that the neural arches of the vertebra were not coossified ; and that the tail was vertebrated in a manner between the types of Salmonidw and Amiide. He said the pectoral rays of the group had been described by Leidy under the name of Xtphactinus, and that the caudal rays were remarkably and beautifully segmented. He said that they had been hitherto regarded by authors as spines or rays of the cestraciont genus Ptychodus. Prof. Cope also made a communication on the results of the explora- tions of certain caves in the island of Anguilla in the West Indies, by Dr. Van Rijgersma. He stated that the vertebrata embraced eleven species, of which one was a Crocodilian, two birds, one a deer, and five rodents. Of the latter, three were of gigantic size, including, beside the two species of Chinchillas already described (Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soe., 1869, 188), a third, larger than either, which was named Loxomylus lati- dens, Cope. It differed from the LZ. longidens, Cope, in having teeth with triturating surface less oblique to the axis of the tooth, and wider than long, instead of longer than wide, and with a certain irregularity in the outer margin. The distal end of the femur measured 32 inches across ; the se- ries of superior molars 23 inches ; width of two inferior incisors in place one inch and two lines. The bones of the deer indicated a species a little over half the size of the Chinchilla. Proceedings, Amer. Philos, Soc. SECTIONS OF TERTIARY ROCK STRATA Vol, XE Teenie M2, In Cuttings éf the Union Pacific Railroad, one mile west of Bear River City, Wyoming Terr., U. S. Rartroap Currine, No. 1 (page 420). STE \\ MIE See ae : ING TD) 1 XG BUSINESS. ACMI OMe CLLOMS ey ccnatonmteccicissicsleinisicietteisiawiercicieileleisisteic ister ieiseretos dnocboEK0e 2, 274 SURGES COM TTA KiiGeesaqconcdsosbnebod doa daddacuoonesanpocudbEaodolAcounAoane 6, 278 Special Committee OnAWinchellisiMarshalliG yOupcmecreccelsletclesscisiseicieloee sie etciete 24 Lyon’s New species Of @rinoidea.... 3... cece nce cccccscs 24 b6 us WEW Vas CATI CES er aaa ask aicise cisicisialelers erettrevet Velen 113, 115 WG ts IBRinioM GOMGIHO WISS5oooooudodoonodcedussaoauodooconeKoE 115 ce ee TEKS WAAC .6b concede conodboudadoanSboudessodos 146 ee ne Brinton’s Arawack language.........-...06+s.seecee sooon: PAY) rs Cope’s Megadactylus Polyzelus.............--..eeee-ceee 277 i st Hrasems Metalluncical@hantsasseeccerooyacccoeerteeeee 447 U6 i MahanoandeVoskaybookseanenece cece econ eee 515 or “ Cope’s Ichthyology of the Marafion.................--.... 524 oC OG The Michaux Legacy, 6, 24, 114, 193, 201, 212, ae ay 442, 447 * te Ren tinewthepHalley eee eee eee , 84, 03, 111 OG OC The Michaux Oak Grove and Botonie Garden........ 312, 523 66 ce A Meteorological Observatory . 627, 572 Cleaning and Varnishing the Portr aits. BgeoandooooboCOyeS 2239) Memorial to Congress respecting the Eclipse.......... 13 TNS TRA HISIAUOVOTUISO) OMX en eee ooo SoM MICU MEE a cat chee Map iyla.s uene Mire ni te Sau 84 NO MASA lame Ore MUTTN Oy wEIROOl, sodobcossosbanccdnbposaooougdssdoonbesonuooooe 115, 214 TPUIFIN'S ROTA cIOUNNEN INS DURIMEOl, oo oobodsosoUbos scan von cbosdoncongecoooccsucusbeuns 370 MAhiaAnM asus LORY Ol S Palm CEUUMME Mine lasteletore see ence ecieleiacinionice ec ene ann 3, 14, 192 ConmppesthenadustpunTchased eye tattle cteveravetereeayevetatate iain eee ee rere ee eee 275 HO CCCAUMESMSSUCORINION SU sivecverarelcksrarerecersveleretstosloete erate a ree oe eee nS Ree 3 ANDRO OA AKOING) Hare IHD WNAKd> Cooodcosucos sc duusoaumucooSoob obo beseGed GobuessuoDeD 239 heberesident]s resignation withawawmlee sees saeci- ceisler 441, 442 Order governing additions to memoirs going through the Press...........-.e++.+++- 278 Order respecting delinquent subscribers to the Tr ALISA HOTS is ina ann On 572 Mr. Cuyler’s motion respecting the Physical Observatory inthe Park............... 572 Riembers Hlected. IBIGCHIGIE bo Snondobosoocbo}oMUOnGuadauodaeoddooenobEnAsadeodedc 7, 111, 210, 278, 368, 447, 521 Agassiz. Mrs. Elizabeth, of Cambridge Horne, George H., M. D., of Philada. 7 NVIASSoetetetetetelelaisietaroieeeietetcisrelaverieestaieterets 2 Huxley, Thomas F. of London....... 7 Anderson, George W., of West Haver- Lartet, Edward, of PAT SN ee 7 TROTRG Ld EF Oo ca Sie toe tere ricer 211 Linant Bey, of Cairo ees 7 Baird, Henry C., Philadelphia........ 7 Lippincott, Joshua B., of Philadelphia 7 Beadle, Rd. E. R., of Philadelphia.... 447 Lyman, Benjamin S., of Philada...... 7 Binney, Horace Jr., of Philadelphia... 7 Mariette Bey, Aug guste, ost CORVIKOA Ghons 7 Birch, Samuel, of London........¢.... 7 Mayer, Alfred M., of South Bethlehem Blackmore, William, of Salisbnry, aan ls nisiien mamnees auiis aeiecre me ener 211 (Gconidon) ne lamd ys seeeeeeee ee 7 Miller, J. Imbrie, of Pennsylvania... 521 Blake, William P., of New Haven, Ct 521 Boekh, Dr: C. W., of Christiania, Nor- NEN SCE Rater a SSE eere ny DEO Catia Here e ers 447 Brinton, D. G., M. D. of Philadelphia. 112 Brugsch, Een MF OMBeulinusseee reece 7 Bullock, Charles, of Philadelphia..... 211 Carlier, Auguste, of Paris............. he Gesell wom ROMere eee. 7 Chabas, Francois, of CRO surSaone 7 Coffin, J. H. C., U.S. N., Supt. Naut. Almanac, Washington eo Bat edo esas 112 Cox, Hon. J. D., of Washington, D.C. 368 Coxe, Eckley Be of Philadelphia haaodon 521 D’Aligny, Henry F.Q., of New York.. 52] Darwin, Charles, of England beer otis (aie 210 DeRougé, Emmanuel, of Paris........ 7 Dumichen, Johannes of Germany..... 7 Flower, William Hi. , Of London....... 7 Fr auenfeld, George Von, of Vienna.. 211 Gabb, William M., of Philadelphia... ri Gruner, Louis, Ecole des Mines, Paris 210 Hakakian iBeyOMCAILOM eee eee Hale, Rey. E.E., of Roxbury (Boston) IASG ered eee SRE BREE atid oR ies 278 Hitchcock, Prof. Charles H., of New York City Beat alevers la yeahs fovebele kar anteaters 368 GCHEIELGS Ferdinand Von, of Vi- Giltacsopop poaodaso hare moo aodeenee 211 Hooker, Joseph D., M. D., of Kew Ganrdensraieccyconoa ces ccna nee eee 7 Hopper, Edward, of Philadelphia.... 211 A. P. $.—VOL. x1.—49E Mitchell, Miss Maria, of Vassar Col lege; IN GAVE alee oe alata 210 Naumann, Carl Fr., of Leipsig........ 210 Nillson, Hi, Ot IONE! «5 .6osdsenoonse T Pepper, Dr. Wm.. of Philada......... 447 Phillips, onmeonOxtordes ao seeeae 7 Prestwich, Joseph, of London........ a Quiney, Edmund, of Dedham, Mass... 368 Rawlinson, George, of England....... 210 Reeves, Samuel Je, of Philada 05.555 I Rolleston, George, "of Oxford.......... eitlh Rutimeyer, Carl L., omBaseleeereeeeee Uf Seidensticker, Oswald, OMAN Boooasen 78 Seiler, Mrs. Emma, of Philada........ 278 Siebold, Carl T. E. Von, of Munich.... 210 Somerville, Mrs, Mary, of England, MON? Oe INYO ES ob5000g008 SoogoboRaban 210 Tilghman, W. M., of Philada.......... 278 Tyndale, Hector, ot Philada ....- ert Tyson, Philip T., of Baltimore. o AL Vogt, Carl, of Geneva............ so6 Pll) Vose, George L., of Salem, Mass...... 521 Wharton, Joseph, OHA NEO. 5 bases 112 White, ANS Wy, , President Cornell Uni- versity, Ithaca, NARS Ue ie 2 112 Whittier, John Greenleaf, of Ames- DUAR TASS nse a eee ae ra Ra 278 Williamson, Major R.S8., U. S. Engi- NIE OLS a eiiic saree eter eee eae eee 368 Worsaae, J. J. A., of Copenhagen.... 7 612 Photographs Received. Chitin, dis 18 Concdscogoc0a0 Bo000nans0e IL neh ease Del Dogeaeseneoaacedonaoonll «.. 442 ible, Wye. (Sh 185 eccsanoepooaseacedsobe BIL ING WAKO, JEONG Lele WN jog oneadcaosoqcoOKer 442 lel@a, Wikcoodacedasgaoucapodcdous4dgodbo Blots} | TOV MeARONG 1s Wy Ossoncsasosoncadec 368 Members Deceased. Baneker, C. N., (obituary read, 85).... 14 Grier, R. C............... ails itis misleroeee 514. Binney, "Horace Jr. BA (obituary read, Meigs, Ce OS Sa ea 146 Sil) sadsoososaauaqcodagodocdbEdauceuus 279 Merrick, S. V., (obituary read, 584)... 496 ChRSing MOMnssassecdcca sooccdocee Bh Mery INO) Paulding, OJoilal (IANA ane au OOD a. G0 os 24 Ciawake: Sire GAINES se cadooageedéoousoeRs 447 Peale, Fr: an (obituary read, 597). 369 GIEVelanl dee eae er raceleeiseee 193 Simpson. BIS aeh Gee es a ET OG Bo 835 Copland, Sir James, (obituary read, 5) 496 Stevens, Alexander,...... 24. Wied ocanuddodsoueaaapooosOOOOeOOOs - 201 Von Martius, C. F. P 3 Dunglison, Robley.. .. 91 List of surviving members read.-..- 6, 278 Erdmann, AME aa) EL AO Rane co . 215 Memoirs and Communications. Ackerman, A.: Meteorological register at Bois-Chéne...............2..++2+-447, 499 Allen, D. H.: On Human osteology SES AOC EERE aOR Onec saae deren Soa bi 117, 370 Briggs, Hi.: On Prof. Henry’s meteorological results..............ce-scceeseenscne 521 Brinton, B. G.: On the Maya language..............+--+++-- SUiaisssistoseniaaneenee 4 ee ‘¢ Chol and Cokehiquel JAM SUAP CS. ects visisieloaaterstoclecelee 13 BO “6 MSS. Arawak Vocabulary of Schultz 114, 192 60 ‘¢ Byinegton’s MSS. Choctaw grammar 317 4497 516 06 VISIO KE Ce SramMImMal inser yaoi eileen rere 301 Chase, P. E.: On Philadelphia life TAUPYES ee hee NOE SUT CUT Oe ain Ai en 13 ge Cosmicalrelations of light and gravity..........---....-.--.00+.. 103 Ee SDT CUE VSS iy se sce aioe oe ora aratalisv evel ralcberetevechavcole lesen neta orcas atoeare et eee 113 00 SIGE! TANT oo coo podD on scaes00s0OLpDEODOSHSgGG0L 2000000 exerecerets 202 ce Solarandrelectricniohtisicecsssscee eae eee eee ECE eee 276 06 Additional deductions from the rain fall tables.....-.....-...... 979 “e FUSING ts CLES 2 esa ie cyst tanta SOEs ea ove Petes ores wore tova re vey s ecoven eye te pete a 284 0g Monthly rainfall variations at IA MIGNON Soodsadadaannodcdasas 314 Of Comparison of mechanical equivalents..............-... *ucdhe iat 313 Cresson, J. €.: Profile of the Schuylkill flood............-... 0.00.2 e eee eee, 209 sé ANaACler Sion On Aes wl Us codcasavacboousocudonosasaodebo0c 498 06 DEScHIpPHONOhTeEcentaunorasw cere ce. aeeceeas Sint Shas alsiage ene orators 622 Cope, E. D.: On Mylodon Annectens.......---.-.-- 22.2 eee sees ence tees ceeeeeee 15 ts MHelCretAaACeOuUs LOLLOISES sche saesiertersis eee cake hie eee eee 16 06 INTENT MUOSERENUORO OL ME Qu soebooo oboodeseescucasdsocoucouce 116, 146 ‘ Seventh contribution to the Herpetology of tropical America. 147 ce Synopsis of Extinct Mammalia of the cave formations in the Uni- FedeStaLces-y liwithbaihneelplavesil--ecscieceeee eee eC hoe eee eee 171 6 Second addition to the History of the fishes of the Cretaceous of THEMWMICEA States ewe cercesicciooas cae ee eect steiner 194, 212, 240 oc Some Etheostomine Perch from Tennessee and North Carolina.. 261 te Some Reptilia of the Cretaceous formation of the U.S....... PN, PB bs Moiar tooth and fragment of a skeleton...............+..-.-0+0.. 278 ‘ Fourth contribution to the history of the Fauna of the Miocene and Eocene periods of the United States.........-...-.......... J 285 “ Adocus, a genus of Cretaceous Emydide............ SHAN ole 295 “ Note on Skeletons found near Woodbury......:...............0- 310 ss Photographie pictures of figures of the human foot on OOS: AL iene 311 uc TOSS iS esperar eodco on Pao advance cope cay Goud oan domed else Lo) ve Vertebree and other WANG of anew species of Bottosaurus....... 367 “c Fishes of the Tertiary shales of Green River, Wyoming Ter.. .370, 380 “6 Anew. Chimeeridkirom Ne wiWJerseyenneceeesee eee eee eee 384 te THe My SiLOSAUnUS HLONTOSUS werieeeeeraeeeecee eee een eel : ve URE TES EE CPM LL VOTO Eeh ea MEST DN RMR TAIN VG Wik SORA eR OIA He NU Sh 44 “ AVBEISKO INCOMES. dood ddoenossonoossdocanes woodecaaasbagnoce i ve Some Australian skulls and a Maori skull “ A partial synopsis of the fishes of the fresh waters of North Car- CONN CEI. ENR es ret alee Dy ERO INE PARE AP ai ah nO eo oe 442, 448 “ AP iOYe Koval Toro EVN WUC RG agadoboonodaconouadodubouddebdoacaodocHondods 496 “e IMOSOSAURUSE BLUM VA-eeeeereeenereeec choo eee CLE eee 497 “ RhesehnhivolosygotthePAmtilleSteen Lecce eerie he ee ere reer eee 514 “ Some remains of a new Cretaceous tortoise...-...-...........2002 DIS st The Osteology of Megaptera Bellicosa................csceceunn- ve 516 Cope, 195 LD 158 (Oya) INNS SEVTTROO OMA oo ano noonobouo onannononbdennoodadondanpensosene 529 Fishes of the fresh water tertiary in Idaho, discovered by Capt. CONTEST CGI Gaododn ooode sodbadbcoos eu mucedesaaRobOdeD 088, 553, 559 ts Contribution to the Ichthyology of the ME ENTIOT oo eo weHeaeae 496, 559 G eee Contr ibution to the Herpetology of Tropical America, 496, Gian ouodudcUSSDAMadoudeoRGnounacnb Hboo OHO Opie meso aDeubacated $s Tdaho freshwater fossil fishes........... gacdoaonsodeauuEcopaoode. 571 + Mososaurus maximus, &¢......... olelelslsio}syeteietayateleletsta|syeleye/s1= doodeddce 571 Os PUI SANTO GTO ACHE ae wssckersisreteveiaer nie fale tcd falere atmo neers re eteate oi otatetareieiee 547 fe Species of Pythonomorpha, from Kansas and New Mexico....... 574. es Hossils/from) Wein diaisland\ caves en vce seecee cece eecceccce 608 Dubois, W. E.: On Specimen of silver ore.. BECO EC EOE OIccnccRUbo Sco Hciasceneabdon GEN Mer ne Silver Coins struck at the Mint BEE CaRE CA CHOSE Roca Enis b b doccononneckicn 233 % Written communication respecting Lake Superior silver mines 527 Davidson, Geo.: On obtaining the longitude of San Francisco.............:ssescceneesees 91 Emerson, G.: On an improvement in . Whitney’ s Cotton Gin.. 84 Robbin’s process for preserving wood from mould ‘and decay. 111 s The part taken by the Am. Phil. Soe. in establishing Sees) for meteorological observations. . -.. O16 te Information concerning the ear thquake of Oct. 20th, "1870. . 522 Frazer, Persifer, Jr.: A chart exhibiting all the metallurgical processes now employed at Friberg, with descriptive text.............. 442 Genth, F. A.: On Rhodium Gola in San Domingo and gold sand from the soil of Philadelphia.. oe On native lead and iron in ‘gold tailings from Montana Territory... "443 Halderman, 8.S8.: On Beads from Indian OTANVES! Histuicisislsienisveisioniesclen cose 569 Hayden, EF. V.: Notes on the geology of Wyoming and Colorado Ter. No. 2...15, 431 NG Appendix to hisreport on Geology of Yellow and Missourt Rivers 112 ce Geological map of the Upper Missouri... : 115 oP Field notes on the geology of Colorado and New Mexico... 212, 234 oe Description of a large collection of fossil HSIECS insects, ee emia 316 a Photographs of fossil fish... 368 ne Three sections of strata belonging to the Bear river er oup, “Wyo- ming Territory... 870, 420 a Preliminary iist of fossils collected i in} New Mexico and California DY SEW BOWES oun See AGRA LGR UES CU RG BARAT SET ae ge 425 fs Description of fossil fishes from the upper coal measures of Ne- in OTK c60d0 sng 05000 coobonD DOD cao cHanmIMAodDDUODOe DD00DUGO00N0 : Horn, G. H.: On the revision of the Tenebrionide of America... ys 115 Kirkwood > D.: On the periodicity of the sun’s spots.......-.-.......0000-.00- “92, 95 Cometssandameteorsmecneeeecccciece cece cerca 218, 215 sf The periodicity of certain rings. . Baers Coe) i oe The mass of Asteroids between Mars and J upiter.. seseee 498 Lea, Isaac: On thirteen new species of Crinoidea............. 2 cece cece etc eee eee cee 14 Lesley, J. PY WOnitherAurorasBorealic (on sAlnnil sth aeaeat eee semana 111 a Section across the Allegheny mountains.................+- 115 be TLonnadoat Cave City in Wentucky--eesceceeneneecscees 277 Lowrie, W .#H.: Some suggestions on the maintaining forces of Cosmical motion 195 “A search for the normal cause of the recession of Cosmical TOM SS pe iets raters elevajas Stone srnisison sieiolerote etoteieratovele cia evelalersiomcniosersteet ie 213, 22 Marsh’; On the meteorsiot Aususti 24th, W869 ere eos ences ces ce cleiclele cietenielels 194 Marston, Com Onirelics tromivjerai Cruzin een ain aan Ltn ey Onin 83 Mayer, Alfred: Abstract of results of measurements and Sere ot the photographs of the total eclipse of August 7, 1869........... 202, 204 McClure: Drawings of the appearance of the sun in the eclipse on ania 7, 1869.... 202 McNeil; On his Explorations in Central AMeYVica.............. ccc ce cece eee eee eee 415 Morton: PICREGS DINO KOA RYONS CI WKS COMORs Goods adgbosanoscoscoousocenbocenouoKe 202 Orr, Hector: Extraor dinary mildness of the winter illustrated................... 279 ie On the hail storm of May 8th)... 225. 0..22).0.......0.. PES OCB edtoe : Pepper: Ona unique casciomUniversalbEbyperostosisueseseeeeee eee eee eee IDOE, US Cok LANA TNO MOMS. aocsodonbeaoodoeasondosobasonubonnoncouceubeoses Roscoe, Dr.: Letter respecting a supposed Laurentian fossil Rothwell: New map ofthe Anthracite\Coal Basins... e.c5e.s+ es sees eee 118 Sheafer, P, W.;: Boring records in the Anthracite Region...................-.. 93, 107 Coal borings in the Wilkesbarre Basin................ss+--ssee-. 235 Tyson, Phillip T.: Section of the Cumberland Coal Basin............-+.... 0... 9 Winchell; Alexander: On the Geoloetal ee and couivalents of the Marshall (GrROWIO, welts IO, Gases saooubeoobebs 15, 57, 245, 275, 369, 385 Wood, G. B.: Indian relics from southern Noe MSHBENVoosooogccgosundaoosbodoCGes 213 OO Experiments on the revival of peach trees...............ceeeecesees 237 tf Communications concerning an Indian skeleton................... 283 Wood, H.C.Jr.,: Prodomus of astudy of the fresh water Alga, of eastern INO RHE AUN EECA eee erie tere ay apetaa c nreiauia vaca RR iL tee calla aed 119 Gb Concerning recent experiments Ni WEAN s pnve5doomanne 214 U6 On the medical activity of the hemp plant as grown in North PNSTRONL CR ere ioe eee eee ree a neta eo UNE an Rel aye OD ES On the fresh water Algee of the United States............571, 574 614 Correspondence: Prof. Bache’s correspondence returned.............. jdoobAeOOODAo Gobo DBaCOSADSos00S 442 A bronze medal from the Balavian Society of Experimental Science at Rotterdam 282 Prof. Henry, respecting the Byington MSS........... cece eee w cece ec tec ces ceecec cece: 385 M. Carlier, respecting the Michaux legacy... .....-------ccce.ssecccesetssesececseser 514 Dr. Dewey’s report on Carices. Letter read relating t0..............cee cece esse eens 284 Gen. Humphreys’ correspondence respecting the geological reports............-e06 170 National Delecraphic) Storm SULVCY:. 1 ec ce se cecle clelsie + © cleicie cle ls ntelsjoreisiolele/ctelere «)elsiereisietele 278 Ehiladelphia Colle selorm Pharma cyer ns sceiae easels clas clociersieeeieieieciees sisielaalerrotenre 52 Schimper’s Palaeontologie Vegetable.......-.........- cece sen cece ee ceeae tees tseseee 201 Myr. Sullivan to Mr. James, respecting posthumous work by Schwartz, the bryologist. 194 Societies placed on the list of correspondents : GeologicaliSurviey Ol SWedeMicnsecemiecccescins ssclene aviesiceeerectnecee ieeccietereer TOW ALGRWIMIVETSIE Ye \bictsisieleie soos seit nic secieite mole cei ee neeee Cine eee eee Imperial Central Meteorological Institute......... Georgia Historical Society.................02-.55- Ulm Art and Antiquity Union IMefeOLOLOoICaANOMCEs coer acca ieicceeeciceior been eter beet Gece eee EEE IMontrealUNaty HUStsiSOCIELY jets ccoaiis oe wiecteisive eee ce oles sels ee eecle eee eee Eee INewrBedtordhPublieibraliyies sane We wisee ce eics orien etek oe aie ee OEE Eee iINewsObsenvatonyatehaniseeeseeceteeee rece eee eee a apnea stuart society of Phy. and Natural Sciences, Bordeaux ..............-.---cseer ener ee wen sce s 5) Surgzeom General’siofices Washinetone-se- sno: ose ence ere enone: eee 1 Umiversityoteln diana iercishincmt sn cctiscacs sccm eee rerits Geib Cee eee erin 280 y “ t a oy ray ve ree Leta etal Pe a Pec l yUWEU iS) AC) aio Y =| II 2 S = Mw: ts if Ale ee i rea i uv UR ieArny i i j NUNUW UG oe eu voter UeN Moe MeN ro NSWYW Wri Se ee oge rc UtuY .